FAN410 Rev.3.0 PDF

Installation Quick Reference
Handbook
(HVAC)
FAN 410
Rev. 3.0
Issued December 1, 2008
The documentation contained in this handbook is the exclusive property of

Johnson Controls, Inc. This documentation is protected by federal copyright law
as an unpublished work and any unauthorized reproduction is prohibited.
FAN 410
Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)
FAN 410, Rev. 3.0
Issued December 1, 2008
Supersedes February 1, 2008
Section 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Handbook Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Handbook Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Metasys System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Section 2: Understanding HVAC Control Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
HVAC Control Drawings Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Point Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Section 3: Locating and Installing HVAC Controllers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
General Guidelines for Transporting, Receiving, and Storing Controllers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . 13
General Guidelines for Locating and Mounting Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Guidelines for Panel and Enclosure Mounting Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Mounting Metasys System Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sensor Location and Mounting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Section 4: Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
General Guidelines for Wiring Metasys System Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Low Voltage Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Cable Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
RJ-Style Modular Connectors and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Wiring Guidelines for Network Sensors with RJ-Style Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Section 5: Ethernet Network Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Ethernet Network Overview and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Wiring the Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Section 6: NAE55/NIE55 Series Network Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) i

Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Dimensions and Physical Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Model Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Section 7: NAE35, NAE45, and NCM45 Series Network Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setup and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
NAE Comparison Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Section 8: NCE25 Series Network Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Termination Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setup and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Section 9: SECVT Serial N2 to Ethernet Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Section 10: BACnet MS/TP Communications Bus Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
BACnet MS/TP Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
FC Bus Rules and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
SA Bus Rules and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
EOL Termination on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
MS/TP Bus Repeater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ii FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Baud Rates on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Wiring the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
MS/TP Bus Checkout and Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Surge Protection on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Section 11: Setting Device Addresses on the BACnet MS/TP Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Device Addresses on the BACnet MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Setting the Address on MS/TP Bus Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Section 12: FEC Series Field Equipment Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Termination Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Setup and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Model Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Section 13: VMA1600 Series VAV Modular Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Installation Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Section 14: IOM Series Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) iii

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Section 15: DIS1710 Local Controller Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Special Tools Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Section 16: TEC26xx Series Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Section 17: NS Series Network Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting NS Sensor Device Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Section 18: NS Series Network Discharge Air Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
iv FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Section 19: N2 Communications Bus Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
N2 Bus Overview and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Wiring the N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
EOL Termination on the N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
N2 Bus Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
N2 Bus Checkout and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Section 20: Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Device Addresses on the N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Setting the Address on N2 Bus Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Section 21: UNT Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Section 22: VMA1400 Series VAV Modular Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Section 23: AHU Series Air Handler Unit Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) v

Section 24: VAV Series Variable Air Volume Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Section 25: DX-9100 Series Controllers with XT, XTM, and XP Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Mounting the XT-9100 Extension Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
XP-910x Expansion Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Section 26: TC-9102 Terminal Unit Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Section 27: TE-6700 Series Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Section 28: TEC21xx Series Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
vi FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Section 29: LONWORKS Network Communications Bus Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
LONWORKS Network Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
LONWORKS Network Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Wiring LONWORKS Network Buses and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
LONWORKS Network Device Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Section 30: LN Series Application Specific Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Section 31: LN Series Free Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Section 32: LN Series VAV/VVT Profile Application Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Section 33: Wireless Device Location and Mounting Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) vii

Applications to Avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Wireless Transmission Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
General Location and Estimating Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Section 34: ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator and Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Status LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Section 35: ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Section 36: WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Section 37: WRZ-7840 Wireless Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
viii FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Section 38: TEC20 Wireless Coordinator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Section 39: TEC2xxx Wireless Thermostat Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Section 40: WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Section 41: WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Section 42: Panels and Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Standard Panel and Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
UPM Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) ix

Section 43: Actuator Mounting and Preloading Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Actuator Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Actuator Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Section 44: A11 and A70 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Section 45: Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Metasys Network Cable Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Cable Part Numbers for Standard Metasys Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Metasys Cable Color Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Network Power and Power Cable Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Network Conduit Sizing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Section 46: Factory Installed Controls - Solution Air Handling Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
FPC Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
FPC System with Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
FPC System without Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
FPC System with Remote Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
FMED System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Section 47: Under Floor Air Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Section 48: Glossary of Acronyms and Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Section 49: Trademark Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Section 50: Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
x FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

INTRO
Introduction 3
INSTALL DRWGS
HVAC
Understanding HVAC Control Drawings 7
LOCATE
Locating and Installing HVAC Controllers and Sensors 13
WIRING
Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors 17
Code No. LIT-410TOC1 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) 1

2 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)
INTRO
Introduction
Handbook Purpose
This Installation Quick Reference Handbook for HVAC controls (FAN 410) provides a handy reference to
information, general guidelines, best practices, and procedures for field technicians and electricians who install and
wire HVAC control systems for Johnson Controls. The handbook includes information on Metasys system
supervisory controllers, field-level equipment controllers, network thermostats, network sensors, and some
associated control devices. This handbook also provides references to additional system and product information.
This handbook does not include information on commissioning, operating, or troubleshooting HVAC controls
systems.
IMPORTANT: FAN 410 is not intended to replace the published Technical Product Literature for the
Johnson Controls systems and products presented. The Installation Instructions that are packed with products,
and the Technical Bulletins and Product Bulletins released with Johnson Controls systems and products,
supersede the information in this handbook. As a product installer or product user, you must obtain and follow
the product installation, operation, and safety procedures provided with the products. Also realize that project
specification and local code requirements may supersede any information presented in this handbook.
Handbook Content
The sections in FAN 410 are divided into ten tabbed groups. The tabbed groups include:
Tab One: Introduction, HVAC Drawings, General Installation and Wiring Guidelines
Section 1: Introduction outlines the FAN 410 contents and provides a general description of the networks, buses,
and devices installed in Johnson Controls HVAC projects.
Section 2: Understanding HVAC Control Drawings defines the information found in the HVAC Control Drawing set
that is provided for every Johnson Controls HVAC project.
Section 3: Locating and Installing HVAC Controllers and Sensors provides general guidelines and best practices
for mounting control devices in a Johnson Controls HVAC project.
Section 4: Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors provides general guidelines and best practices for wiring control
devices in a Johnson Controls HVAC project.
Tab Two: Ethernet Networks, Network Supervisors, Serial Converters
Sections 5 through 9 provide information on installing and wiring an Ethernet network and the devices that connect
to and communicate on an Ethernet network. Ethernet devices include:
• Network Supervisors: NAE35s, NAE45s, NAE55s, NIE55s, NCE25s, and NCM45s controllers
• Serial Converter: SECVT
Tab Three: BACnet MS/TP Bus and Associated Controllers and Sensors
Sections 10 through 18 provide information on and guidelines for installing, wiring, and addressing the BACnet
MS/TP Bus and the devices that connect to and communicate on an MS/TP Bus. BACnet MS/TP devices include
FECs, IOMs, VMA1600s, DIS1710s, TEC26xx Series thermostats, and NS Series network sensors.
Tab Four: N2 Communication Bus and Associated Controllers and Sensors
Sections 19 through 28 provide information on and guidelines for installing, wiring, and addressing an N2 Bus and
the devices that connect to and communicate on an N2 Bus. N2 devices include UNTs, VMA1400s, AHUs, VAVs,
DX-9100 Series controllers, TC-9102 controllers, TEC21xx Series thermostats, and TE-6700 Series sensors.
Tab Five: LONWORKS Network Communications Bus and Associated Controllers
Sections 29 through 32 provide information on and guidelines for installing and wiring a LONWORKS network bus
and the devices that connect to and communicate on an LONWORKS network bus. LONWORKS Network devices
include LN Series application specific controllers, LN Series free programmable controllers, and LN Series VAV
and VVT profile applications controllers.
Code No. LIT-410002 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC): Section 1 3

INTRO
Tab Six: Wireless Temperature Sensing Systems, Receivers, and Sensors

Sections 33 and 41 provide information on and guidelines for locating, installing, and wiring a wireless temperature
sensing system and the associated receivers and wireless sensors. Receivers and sensors include ZFR1810
Coordinators and ZFR1810 Routers, WRS-TTx and WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Sensors, WRZ-7810 Wireless
Receivers, TEC Wireless Coordinators, TEC Wireless Thermostat Controllers, and WRS-RTN and TE7800 Series
Receivers.
Tab Seven: Panels, Enclosures, Dampers, and Low Temperature Cutout Controls
Section 42: Panels and Enclosures provides information, guidelines, and best practices for installing HVAC control
systems that are packaged in standard panels and UPM enclosures.
Section 43: Actuator Mounting and Preloading Guidelines provides information and guidelines for mounting and
preloading actuators on damper assemblies.
Section 44: A11 and A70 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls provides information, guidelines, and best
practices for mounting low temperature cutout controls in accessible and inaccessible locations.
Tab Eight: Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards
Section 45: Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards provides the sizes, types, part numbers, and standards for
the cables, wire, conduit, and raceways used to install Johnson Controls HVAC projects.
Tab Nine: Factory Installed Controls and UFAD Systems
Section 46: Factory Installed Controls - Solution Air Handling Units provides information and guidelines for working
with control systems that come prewired from the factory.
Section 47: Under Floor Air Distribution Systems provides information and guidelines for using the
Johnson Controls FlexSys under floor air distribution system that provides an alternative heating and cooling air
delivery solution.
Tab Ten: Glossary of Acronyms and Terms, Trademarks List, and Index
Section 48: Glossary of Acronyms and Terms provides definitions of the acronyms and some of the terms used in
this handbook.
Section 49: Trademark Listing provides a list of trademarks used in FAN 410.
Section 50: Index provides page locations of products and terms used in the handbook.
Metasys System Overview
HVAC control systems and devices are connected on Metasys system networks. Some of the networks, buses,
and devices that make up an HVAC control system are described in the sections that follow. Figure 1-1 on page 5
shows a network-level view of a simple Metasys system network.
Internet Protocol (IP) Networks
In this handbook, Ethernet refers to the IP networks that connects computers, workstations, and network-level
supervisory controllers. LANs, WANs, and the Internet are examples of IP Ethernet networks. Networks may also
refer to WLANs and other high-level wireless networks that connect computers across wireless connections. These
high-level (wired and wireless) IP networks allow users to access HVAC control systems via a computer browser,
and enable the user to monitor and control HVAC equipment across the building or across the country.
Network-Level Supervisory Controllers
Network-level supervisory controllers such as NAEs, NIEs, NCEs, and NCMs connect to IP Ethernet networks and
field communications buses. Supervisory controllers are set up to monitor and control one or more field-level
communication buses, and provide access to and control of the devices on the communication bus. Supervisory
controllers also store alarms and system trends generated by devices on the communications bus and can
communicate that information to other computers on Ethernet networks.

INTRO
Cluster of Remote
N2 Field Devices
N2 Field MS/TP
N2 Data Over
Devices Devices
N2 Bus
Web Browser
N2 MS/TP
Bus Bus
SECVT
FC FC
Laptop
NAE35 NAE25
Internet
IP Network
NAE5512 Tunneled N2 Data
FIG:Netwrk
NAE45 Over Wired Ethernet
NAE5513
NAE5520
NAE5521
Firewall
FC
FC-A FC-B
MS/TP
Bus FC-A
MS/TP FC-B
Bus
N2 LON
Bus MS/TP
MS/TP Bus
Devices N2
MS/TP Bus
Devices LONWORKS
MS/TP Network Bus
N2 Field Devices
Devices
N2 Field
Devices
LONWORKS
and LN Series
Devices
Figure 1-1: Metasys System Network and Field Communications Buses
Communications Buses
Communications buses are field-level networks of field controllers, thermostats, and other devices that connect
and control HVAC systems and equipment. In Metasys systems, the field-level communication buses are
connected to and controlled by network-level supervisory controllers. There are a variety of protocols for
communication buses. This handbook provides information for the three types of communications buses that you
typically encounter on Johnson Controls HVAC projects: BACnet MS/TP Bus, N2 Bus, and LONWORKS Network
Bus.
Field-Level Controllers and Input/Output Modules
Field controllers are discrete programmable controls designed to control HVAC equipment, such as air handlers,
chillers, roof top units, and VAV boxes. There are many different types field controllers, each designed for a specific
type of HVAC equipment and each designed to communicate over a specific type of communications bus. In this
handbook, Input/Output Modules (IOMs) are grouped with field controllers and operate on field-level buses. IOMs
increase the number and type of control points that can be connected to the bus and expand the buses control
capacity.
Introduction: Section 1 5
INTRO
Sensors and Thermostats

Sensors and thermostats also connect to the field-level communications buses. Sensors provide temperature input
and control to the field controllers. Thermostats also provide temperature input and control, but thermostats can
also provide much more control than sensors, such as fan control, damper control, heat pump control, and more.
Network thermostats can provide the same level of control as a field controller and are often considered field
equipment controllers on the bus.

BILL OF MATERIALS
Designation Qty Part Number Description

CLG – O 1 VG 1241AE+906AGA incremental Actuation Valve
SF – C 1 RIB 24 P 20 AMP DPDT 24 VAC / DC
TX – 1 1 Y 65 T 31 – 0 XFMR , 120 - 208 - 240 / 24 , 40 VA
Flow Diagram ZN – T 1 TEC 2626-2 MS / TP . 2 ON / OFF / FLT . 3 SP FAN
Code No. LIT-410003

1 STAGE
Bill of Material
C E
RA C C DA (typically a separate report)
CLG-O
ZN-T
WC-ADJ
RETURN
SUPPLY
Object Identifier
ZN-T
TEC2626
HEATING STAGE 1
COMMAND +
HTG1-C - BO3
BO5 AUX
BO5 AUX
TX-1
BRN UI3
24V
Understanding HVAC Control Drawings
120 V Power COM

BI2
ORG 24V HOT SCOM
FAN-L RS
GROUND
FAN-M BI1 COM
FAN-H BO2 CW Sequence of Operation
SUPPLY FAN BO1 CCW
+
COMMAND BO4
SF-C -
+
COOLING OUTPUT
FER
CLG-O
OCCUPIED MODE: DURING THIS MODE THE FAN WILL RUN CONTINUOUSLY.
System Drawing WHEN THE ROOM TEMPERATURE IS BETWEEN THE OCCUPIED HEATING
AND COOLING SETPOINTS (INSIDE OF THE BIAS), THE HEATING WILL BE OFF,
OUT MS/TP AND THE COOLING VALVE WILL BE CLOSED. ON A RISE IN ROOM
TEMPERATURE ABOVE THE COOLING SETPOINT, THE COOLING VALVE WILL
IN MS/TP MODULATE OPEN AND THE HEATING WILL REMAIN OFF. ON A DROP IN
ROOM TEMPERATURE BELOW THE HEATING SETPOINT, THE HEATING WILL
CYCLE ON AND THE COOLING VALVE WILL REMAIN CLOSED.
UNOCCUPIED MODE: DURING THIS MODE THE FAN WILL CYCLE OFF. ON A
RISE IN ROOM TEMPERATURE ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING
SETPOINT, THE FAN WILL CYCLE ON, THE COOLING VALVE WILL MODULATE
OPEN, AND THE HEATING WILL REMAIN OFF. ON A DROP IN ROOM
Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC): Section 2

Figure 2-1: Typical Johnson Controls HVAC Control Project Drawing for a TEC2600 Thermostat
TEMPERATURE BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING SETPOINT, THE FAN
WILL CYCLE ON, THE HEATING WILL CYCLE ON AND THE COOLING VALVE
WILL REMAIN CLOSED.
GICFAV:HGN WR D
7
HVAC
DRWGS
HVAC Control Drawings Content
A set of Johnson Controls HVAC control project drawings is provided for each Johnson Controls project. The
DRWGS
drawings provide details for installing and wiring a Building Automation System and HVAC controls at a job site.
HVAC
The control drawing set typically contains a Title Page, Riser Diagrams, System Drawings (per field bus type), a
Point Schedule (per field bus type if required), and Room, Valve and Damper Schedules.
FAN 55.510 contains sample control drawings for N2, BACnet, MS/TP, LON, and factory-installed systems as well
as a more extensive explanation of the drawings.
Each of the control drawing sections and types has a specific purpose. The following paragraphs give an overview
of each section or type of drawing.
Title Page
The title page is critical because it defines the job name, address, and project numbers assigned. It also provides
the names of the general contractor, mechanical contractor, architect, and project.
In addition, the title page contains a Table of Contents for the drawing set as well as a Legend of Symbols.
Riser Diagrams
Riser diagrams are usually generic in nature and are designed to show:
• generally how the field bus cabling (Ethernet, N2, FC-MS/TP, SA Bus, or LON Bus) should be routed.
• which field bus controllers are intended to be connected to which supervisory controller or engine.
Note: Because of engineering requirements, it is important that you do not alter the connections between the
supervisory controller and its field bus controllers, unless you are authorized to do so.
• the anticipated device address for each controller.
• the bus numbers (for controllers or engines that support more than one bus).
• the planned locations of supervisory and field bus controllers.
It is important to understand that the cable routing shown is general in nature, and you are expected to route the
bus cables in the manner that provides the lowest cost. You are also expected to show the actual cable routes you
used on the mechanical drawings and to keep the Johnson Controls control drawing updated for as-built
documents. In addition, the location of the first and last controllers on the field bus (and bus segments) must be
noted on the as-built documents for actual end-of-line termination locations.
System Drawings
For a given mechanical system, a system drawing can consist of one or multiple drawings within the drawing set.
Typically, system drawings consist of a system flow diagram, object (point) identifiers, sequence of operation, bill of
material, point schedules, and termination details.
Typically, simple system drawings, such as VAV boxes, are shown entirely on one page. Larger, more complex
systems, such as AHUs and central plants, are shown on several pages.
For simple systems, separate point schedules and termination detail drawings are usually omitted and the
terminations, and cable requirements are defined on the point-to-point wiring diagrams.
For more complex systems, the point schedules are often used to summarize the point types and numbers,
equipment locations, cable and termination numbers, intermediate device requirements, and reference details.
Flow Diagram or Drawing
System drawings almost always have a flow diagram (Figure 2-1 on page 7). The flow diagram is a high level
representation of mechanical equipment and identifies the general location of control devices within a system,
depicting how air and/or water moves through the system.
Note: Although flow diagrams accurately depict how air or water moves through a system, the actual mechanical
equipment and system configuration often looks different from the drawings.

Object (or Point) Identifiers (Names)
Object (or Point) Identifiers (Figure 2-1 on page 7) are unique alphanumeric tags that identify individual controllers
DRWGS
and devices in the various HVAC control drawings and system diagrams. Each Object Identifier names a single
HVAC
discrete device across the entire set of HVAC drawings. Object Identifiers are the binding link between the various
system diagrams and are key to understanding how the different components are connected and how they operate
together.
An Object Identifier on the:
• Flow Diagram indicates where the device is to be located.
• Bill of Material shows the part number(s) and description of the control component(s).
• Point Schedule or line connection diagram, shows how the device is connected in the system.
• Termination Details shows how each cable or wire connects to a controller and field device.
Point identifiers are sometimes shown throughout the sequence of operations to show how the device is used to
operate equipment.
Sequence of Operation
The Sequence of Operation (Figure 2-1 on page 7) is a simple textual description, defining how a system is
required to function or operate. For Plan and Spec projects, the sequence of operations is almost always in the
project specifications or directly on the project mechanical System drawings.
IMPORTANT: The Sequence of Operation section is perhaps the single most important item to validate system
performance for the project owner, project consultant, and technician commissioning the project. It is critical that
all Johnson Controls employees and subcontractors involved in an installation understand the sequence of
operation completely to ensure that installation provides the specified system performance.
Bill of Material
The Bill of Material (Figure 2-1 on page 7) section is typically a stand-alone section that provides basic information
about the type and quantity of devices required for a project:
• The first column provides the object (point) Identifier for a device.
• The second column provides the Johnson Controls or vendor part number(s) associated with the device.
• The third column briefly describes the part.
The part number can be used to identify and locate product data sheets to learn more about a specific part,
including engineering data or detailed installation instructions.
Point Schedules
For most complex systems, the point schedules organize and summarize information in a table format (Figure 2-2
on page 11). This section describes each field on the point schedule.
• Tag: Correlates the point to another part of the project; for example, consultant’s points listing or, if required,
special device tagging requirements.
General Information
• Point Type: Identifies the control point type or function, which can be an analog input or output, binary input or
output, configurable, or universal point. (For example, BO-1 = Binary Output #1, AI-9 = Analog Input #9, CO-4
= Configurable Output #4.)
• System Name: A unique alpha-numeric identifier tag that identifies a common type of mechanical system or
controller, or software system. (For example, AHU-1 = Air Handler Unit #1, VAV-8 = Variable Air Volume
Controller #8, and RTU-1 = Roof Top Unit #1.)
• Object Name: An identifier tag for common types of hardware and software control points. (For example, DA-
T = Discharge Air Temp, MAD-O = Mixed Air Damper Output, and LT-A = Low Temp Alarm.)
Note: An Object Name not only identifies the same type of hardware or software point throughout an entire
project, but it also identifies the same type of hardware or software point across almost all other
Johnson Controls projects.
Understanding HVAC Control Drawings: Section 2 9

• Expanded ID: Provides a brief definition of the point.
Controller Information
DRWGS
HVAC
• Controller Type: Identifies the type of controller, expansion module, or IOM to which the point is connected.
• Trunk Nbr: Identifies the number of the field bus to which the controller is attached.
• Trunk Addr: Identifies the address of the controller.
• Cable Destination Bay/Terminal: Identifies the wire termination point at the controller, expansion module, or
IOM.
• Module Type: Identifies the function module type used (for DCM controllers only).
• Termination Out: Identifies the actual terminations, expansion module, or IOM.
Panel Information
• Panel: Provides the panel designation or name.
• Panel Location: Provides a description of the panel’s location (for example, Mech. Room 101).
• Slot Number: Identifies the number of the slot where a DCM or XM controller is installed in a NCU or NEU
base frame.
• Reference Drawing: Provides a cross-reference to a project drawing, if needed.
• Cable Number: Provides a project specific number or just the object name or ID if cable numbers are not
designated on the project.
Intermediate Device
• Wiring/Tubing: Provides the quantity and type of wiring from the panel to the intermediate device (for
example, 2/22 means a 22 AWG cable with 2 conductors single twisted pair).
• Termination In: Identifies the termination designations on the field device for the input side.
• Device: Identifies the name of the intermediate device used, if any (for example, IDEC relay).
• Termination Out: Identifies the Termination designations on the intermediate device for the output side (for
example, COM, NO [9,5]).
• Location: Provides a description of the intermediate device’s location.
Field Device
• Wiring/Tubing: Provides the quantity and type of wiring from the panel or intermediate device to the field
device.
• Termination In: Identifies the termination designations on the intermediate device for input.
• Device: Provides the name of the field device used.
• Location: Provides a description of the field device’s location.
• Ref Detail Shape: Identifies the reference detail that illustrates the typical wiring detail.
• Comment: Provides miscellaneous comments regarding information for the controller or point.
Point schedules can be viewed as a master list of hardware connection points for a given system. It is important to
understand that some items, such as 24 VAC power and bus wiring to a Smart VSD, are not shown on the point
schedule. These types of connections are shown on the termination details or riser diagrams.
Termination Reference Details
Termination details (Figure 2-3 on page 12) are referenced on the point schedule as Ref Detail Shape. Typically,
one sheet per system can show the engineered details associated with the termination of a given point at the field
device, field bus controller, intermediate devices, and any hardware DIP switch (device address) settings.
Termination details are also referred to as wiring details.

DRWGS
HVAC
Figure 2-2: Typical Point Schedule
Understanding HVAC Control Drawings: Section 2 11

Note: The Termination Detail drawings are often the only drawings in the HVAC drawing set that provide the
power requirements for the controlled devices and sensors connected to the controller terminations.
DRWGS
HVAC
DETAIL S35 Hot Water Pump1 Starter DETAIL F131 TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT
Wiring Diagram
H 120 VAC N IN #
HO A M1 OL’S ICOM#
RTD FEC/IOM
Temperature Element
HWP1-C
FIG:Term_Ex
HWP1-S
Figure 2-3: Examples of Typical Termination Reference Details
Room, Valve, and Damper Schedules

Room schedules are good references for establishing the device quantities and locations of a variety of devices
specified in a project, such as zone controls. The typical fields available include:
• Bldg/Flr: Identifies the building (in multiple building projects) and floor or area in which the room is located.
• Room No and Name: Identify the room number and name.
Note: Construction room numbers and names can often change for owner acceptance.
• System Name: Identifies the system with which a device is associated. For systems like VAV boxes, this is the
AHU that serves that box (for example, AHU-1). For other systems, it is the name of the mechanical equipment
itself (for example, FCU-1).
• Reference Drawing: Identifies the mechanical drawing (or other contract document) that shows the physical
location of the equipment.
• Controller Code: Identifies the controller part number.
• NAE Address: Identifies the address of the NAE or NCM supervisory controller.
• N2 Trunk: Identifies the N2, LONWORKS, or FC-MS/TP bus number.
• N2 Address: Identifies the N2 or FC-MS/TP bus address number.
• Sensor Code Number: Identifies the room sensor part number.
• Box Information: Identifies the mechanical drawing designation for a VAV box (typically).
• Box Engineering Data: Identifies the VAV box details including K Factor, Box Size, and Flow.
Johnson Controls electrical installers and the mechanical contractor use the valve and damper schedules to
ensure that the correct valve or damper is installed on the appropriate mechanical equipment system.
Although not every mechanical system has a valve or damper, you can use damper schedules to perform system
counts and to understand the quantity of devices that have to be connected.

Locating and Installing HVAC Controllers and Sensors
General Guidelines
Overview
This section provides general guidelines for determining mounting locations and installing network controllers and
sensors. Many of the guidelines are best practices that can be applied to locating and installing many different
INSTALL
LOCATE
controllers and zone/room sensors or thermostats, but this section focuses on Metasys system HVAC controllers
and sensors, and uses them as examples. In this section:
• Controller refers to supervisory controllers (NAEs, NCEs, NCMs, and others), field controllers (FECs, IOMs,
VMAs, UNTs, VAVs, AHUs, FSCs, LN Series controllers, and others), converters (SECVTs), and other
discrete building automation or HVAC controllers
• Sensor refers to room/zone thermostats (TEC26xx Series, TEC21xx Series, TE6700 Metastats, and others)
and room/zone sensors (NS Series, WRS-TTx Series, WRZ Series, and others).
IMPORTANT: This section is not intended to provide complete guidelines, procedures, or safety information for
the products you may be installing, and not all of the guidelines presented in this section pertain to every
controller or sensor. Refer to the product manufacturer’s Technical Literature and Product Installation
Instructions for additional installation guidelines, procedures, and product safety information.
Note: The information provided in this section may apply to locating and installing controllers in panels and
enclosures also. See Panels and Enclosures on page 435 for additional information.
Note: For information on locating and installing wireless controllers, routers, and devices, see Wireless Device
Location and Mounting Considerations on page 345.
Installation Materials, Hardware, and Special Tools
Some of the product Installation and Wiring Guidelines sections in this book provide a short list of the hardware/
materials and any special (not typical) tools required to mount a product in a simple or typical application. See the
Special Tools and Materials Needed sections in each device’s specific section.
Typically, no mounting hardware is shipped with controllers or sensors, and it is the responsibility of the installer to
supply any material or hardware required to mount the controllers and sensors. Use durable mounting hardware of
sufficient quality to ensure that the installation can endure for the life of the product. Some of the guidelines in this
section provide information on appropriate mounting hardware for installing the product. You should refer to the
product manufacturer’s Technical Literature and Product Installation Instructions for additional information on the
required installation material and hardware.
General Guidelines for Transporting, Receiving, and Storing Controllers and Sensors
Observe the following guidelines when receiving, transporting, shipping, handling, and storing controllers:
• Verify that all parts and documentation were shipped with the controller or sensor.
• Retain the original installation instructions (typically packed in the box with the controller or sensor) for future
reference.
• Ship, transport, and securely store the controller or sensor in the original box/container to minimize vibration,
shock, or other damage.
• Observe the ambient storage condition limits for the controllers and sensors. The ambient storage conditions
may be found in the Installation Specifications for the products in this handbook or refer to the manufacturer’s
Technical Literature and Product Installation Instructions.
• Always provide adequate protection for controllers and sensors on the project construction site. Do not expose
the controllers or sensors to dirt, drywall dust, liquids, or other construction materials and contaminants.
Protect all exposed wire terminations and modular jacks.
• Do not drop the controller or sensor, or subject it to any kind of physical shock.
• Coordinate job site delivery of product with the project’s schedule to ensure the product is not lost or damaged.

General Guidelines for Locating and Mounting Controllers
Follow these guidelines when locating and mounting a controller:
• Observe all environmental limits and ensure that the mounting location maintains the ambient operating
conditions for the controller. The controller’s environmental limits and ambient operating limits are typically
specified in the Installation Specifications sections in this handbook, or refer to the product manufacturer’s
Technical Literature and Product Installation Instructions for additional Technical Specifications.
INSTALL
LOCATE
• Mount the controller indoors or in an approved enclosure where the ambient operating conditions are always
maintained. Do not mount the controller where it may be exposed to any water, condensation, or other liquids,
or to corrosive or flammable vapors of any kind.
IMPORTANT: Before mounting controller in plenum applications, verify acceptance of exposed plastic
materials in plenum areas with the local building authority. Building codes for plenum requirements vary by
location. Some local building authorities accept compliance to UL 1995 Heating and Cooling Equipment,
whereas others use different acceptance criteria.
• Mount the controller in an accessible location to facilitate wiring, commissioning, and future service. Provide
sufficient space around the controller to accommodate final cable runs and provide sufficient ventilation of the
controller. Do not obstruct the ventilation holes in the controller housing. Estimate an additional 5 to 10 cm (2 to
4 in.) around the controller to provide ventilation, wiring, and service.
• Mount the controller on a smooth, even surface whenever possible, and ensure that the mounting surface can
support the controller. If the controller must be on an uneven surface, be careful not to crack the mounting
clips, mounting feet, or controller housing when tightening the mounting screws. If necessary, use shims or
washers to mount the controller evenly and securely on the mounting surface. Do not overtighten the mounting
screws. Overtightening the screws may damage the mounting clips or controller. Use durable mounting
hardware such as Molly bolt anchors that cannot be easily pulled out of the mounting surface. Do not use
plastic expansion anchors to mount controllers or sensors.
• Mount the controller in the proper orientation (Figure 3-1 on page 14). Often, ventilation holes are located on
the top and bottom of the controller housing, allowing air to rise though the housing to facilitate convection
cooling.
+15V OUT 1
IN1 OCOM 1
UNIVERSAL
OCOM 1
COM
HOT
OUT 1
OUT 2
OCOM 2
OUT 3
OCOM 3
OUT 4
OCOM 4
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 7
OCOM 7
ICOM OUT 2
ON
1
SA BUS
FAULT
POWER
OCOM 2
IN2
ICOM OUT 3
2
OCOM 3
IN3
BINARY
ICOM
3
ADDRESSØ = ALLOFF
POWER ET SY R
FAULT
SA BUS
ET SY
OUT 4
OCOM 4
ADDRESS
SENSOR
OUT 5
OCOM 5
R
FC + OUT 6
ON ADDRESS Ø =ALL OFF O
– OCOM 6
SABUS
N
EOL
COM OUT 7
ADDRESS
SA
OCOM 7
UNIVERSAL BINARY SA BUS PWR
SHLD
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
COM
COM
N
O
PWR
+15V
+
IN1
1
IN2
2
IN3
SA
SENSOR
+
+
–
FC
– COM
COM
SHLD HOT
EOL
Figure 3-1: Proper Orientations for Controllers in Wall Mount Applications
• Do not mount the controller on surfaces that are prone to vibration or in areas where electromagnetic
emissions, inductive interference, or radio frequency signals from other devices or wiring can interfere with
controller operation or field bus communication.
• Do not mount the 24 VAC power supply transformer or any other heat generating sources below the controller.

Guidelines for Panel and Enclosure Mounting Applications
On applications where the controller is mounted inside a panel or enclosure, follow these additional guidelines:
• Mount the panel or enclosure on a smooth, even surface whenever possible, and ensure that the mounting
surface and mounting hardware can support the controller. See Panels and Enclosures on page 435 for more
information on mounting standard panels and enclosures.
• Do not mount any heat-generating devices in the controller’s enclosure that may cause the ambient
INSTALL
LOCATE
temperature in the panel to exceed the controller’s maximum ambient operating temperature.
• Do not install the controller in an airtight enclosure.
• Monitor the enclosure temperature or cooling-fan operation if enclosure temperature is maintained with a fan or
supplemental cooling.
Mounting Metasys System Controllers
To mount a controller in surface mount applications:
1. Pull the bottom mounting clips down until they lock in the extended position as shown in Figure 3-2 on page 15.
Note: The top mounting clip is always in the extended surface mount position.
2. Place the controller against the mounting surface and use it as a template to mark the location of the three
mounting holes.
3. Drill the appropriate size holes for the mounting hardware.
4. Use appropriate screws (typically #8) with the appropriate mounting hardware to secure the controller to the
mount surface.
Top Mounting Clip
DIN Rail
DIN Rail Hooks
Channel
Bottom
Mounting
Clips
Figure 3-2: Back of Typical Metasys System Controller
To mount the controller in DIN rail applications (Panel):

1. Mount a section of DIN rail (that is at least as wide as the controller) horizontally in a space that provides
adequate controller ventilation, and room for wires and wiring the control. Use appropriate hardware to support
the DIN rail, controller, and associated wiring.
2. Place the back of the controller over the mounted DIN rail so that the DIN rail hooks catch the top of the DIN
rail.
3. Position the controller so the DIN rail channel is flush on the DIN rail, and push the bottom mounting clips up to
lock the controller on the DIN rail.
To remove the controller, pull the bottom mounting clips down and swing the controller up and off the DIN rail.
Note: The top mounting clip is used for surface mount applications only. It may be removed on DIN rail mount
applications by pulling it upward and out of the clip slot in the controller housing.
Locating and Installing HVAC Controllers and Sensors: Section 3 15

Sensor Location and Mounting Guidelines
The intended room/zone sensor and thermostat locations are indicated on the HVAC project plans with a T .
If the intended sensor location is not clearly specified, or if you need to change the location, you should get
approval first. Follow these guidelines when locating and mounting a room/zone sensor or thermostat:
• Mount the sensor on an interior wall where it is easily accessible, at least 1.4 m (54 in.) above the floor, in an
area where the temperature is representative of the entire controlled space.
INSTALL
LOCATE
Note: Disability requirements or project specifications may specify unique mounting heights. Confirm
mounting heights before rough-in.
• Avoid locations that are exposed to drafts, direct sunlight, and other sources of heat or cooling.
• Avoid locations near entry foyers, doors, windows, supply air ducts, and pipes that impact the average ambient
conditions.
• Avoid locations subject to excessive vibration, electrical/inductive interference, or radio frequency interference.
• Avoid enclosed or recessed locations and locations behind curtains, doors, or other obstructions to the
controlled space.
• Avoid long cable or wire runs between the sensor and the controller. Long wire or cable run can impact sensor
accuracy. For maximum wire lengths for sensors, see Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards on
page 465.

Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors
General Guidelines
Overview
This section provides an overview of and general guidelines for wiring Metasys system HVAC controllers and
sensors. Included are best practices that are important to the quality and ease of installation. For specific
instructions on installing and wiring Metasys system network controllers, thermostats, sensors, and other HVAC
components, refer to the particular Installation Instruction sheets and Technical Bulletins. For information on
selecting the proper cable and wire types and sizes for Metasys installations, see Metasys System Cable and Wire
Standards on page 465.
WIRING
General Guidelines for Wiring Metasys System Networks
CAUTION: Risk of Electric Shock.
! Disconnect all power supplies before making electrical connections to avoid electric shock.
IMPORTANT: Do not apply power to the Metasys network before finishing communication wiring and checking
all wiring connections. Short-circuited or improperly connected wires can result in permanent damage to the
equipment.
IMPORTANT: Use copper conductors only. Make all wiring in accordance with local, national, and regional
regulations. Do not exceed the electrical ratings for the devices on the Metasys network.
IMPORTANT: Do not run network communication wiring (Ethernet, N2 Bus, Zone Bus, FC Bus, SA Bus, or
LONWORKS Bus) in the same in the same conduit, raceway, or panels with any high-voltage (>30 VAC) wiring or
any low-voltage (<30 VAC) wiring that supplies inductive loads. ZB, AI, AO, and BI wiring may be run in the
same conduit or bundle, where convenient. Isolate all network devices from high-voltage wiring and equipment
and from low-voltage inductive wiring. Failure to isolate network wiring and equipment from high-voltage wiring
and equipment or low-voltage inductive loads can result in equipment damage and poor network performance.
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge to the network devices. Static electric discharge can
damage the devices and void any warranties.
Follow these guidelines when installing and wiring Metasys system network devices:
• Route cables neatly to promote good ventilation, visibility, testing, and ease of service.
• Provide some slack in the wires and cables. If using preconfigured cables, coil and secure any excess cable.
• Protect and secure cables all along their route. Do not run cables near moving parts. Avoid sharp bends,
abrasion, and the potential for severing or crushing the cable. Run all raceways and cables parallel or
perpendicular to building lines.
• Ensure proper grounding for bus cable that requires a shield.
• Ensure proper EOL termination on communication buses.
• Use dedicated transformers for 24 VAC supply power to network devices to isolate the network devices from
inductive spikes, or provide surge protection on the primary side of the 24 VAC supply power transformers.
• When the binary outputs of a controller are used to source power for an inductive load (for example, a
contractor, starter, or other coil), consider using a separate transformer to power the inductive loads. This
avoids creating a current path for inductive spikes coupled directly to the control circuitry. If a separate
transformer is not available, install surge protection across the inductive loads to prevent misoperation of the
controller (Johnson Controls Part No. AS-MOVKIT-0 or Electrocube Part No. RG1782-6 or RG2031-6).

• As with all electrical practices, consistency is expected. For example, proper continuity for bus wiring from
device to device and from terminal to terminal is essential. If you are an electrical installer and have any
questions about how to install or wire a system, you must get direction from project leadership before
proceeding.
• Due to the repetitive nature of system installations, a best practice is to validate the first systems you install
before proceeding with the rest of the installation. This practice eliminates rework and associated costs.
Low Voltage Cabling
Much of the HVAC system cabling is considered
Class 2 as defined by the National Electrical
Code. This classification means that the current Building
WIRING
it carries is less than 100-volt amperes. If you Structure

are a subcontractor or electrical installer, you Independent Bridle
J Hook
must read and understand Article 725 of the Support Ring
NEC in its entirety. In addition, you are Approved and

Tagged for
encouraged to meet with local authorities having Purpose Low Voltage Cable
jurisdiction to understand specific local
amendments and interpretations. Ceiling Tile
The power supply determines the classification Generally Accepted Methods

of wiring. Transformers that feed most of the Note: Article 300-11 indicates where independent support
wires are used; they shall be secured at both ends.
control wiring in Johnson Controls installations
are marked Class 2. Circuits that exceed the Figure 4-1: Acceptable Methods for Running
100 VA limit are not Class 2 and must be Low Voltage Cable
installed in a raceway.
Class 2 wiring requires independent supports
every 5 ft and cannot be attached to conduit or
other raceways unless the raceway contains
power supply conductors that connect to the Building
same controlled device as the Class 2 wiring. Structure
This practice prevents Class 2 wiring from Ceiling

interfering with the dissipation of heat. Support EMT
Wire
For example, it is acceptable to attach a motor
Low Voltage
starter status cable to the conduit containing the Cable
motor leads (refer to NEC, Article 300.11[B][2]).
Ceiling Tile
No other cables are allowed to be attached to
the raceway. Not Permitted
Figure 4-1 on page 18 illustrates several
acceptable methods for supporting low-voltage Figure 4-2: Unacceptable Methods for Running
Class 2 cable runs in plenums. Figure 4-2 on Low Voltage Cable
page 18 illustrates several unacceptable
methods for supporting cables.
Note: Do not use all-threaded rod to support Class 2 wiring runs unless the cables are adequately protected from
the abrasion and potential cable failure that can be caused by vibration of the rod against the cable.
IMPORTANT: Cable installed under metal-corrugated sheet roof decking shall be supported so the nearest
outside surface of the cable or raceway is not less than 38 mm (1-1/2 in.) from the nearest surface of the roof
decking.
Generally Accepted Installation Practices

All wiring and cabling must conform to the NFPA 70 National Electric Code and be in accordance with all state and
local codes plus project specifications for the location in which the wiring and cabling is installed. Wires and cables
must meet the applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for the type of installation, jacket, and conductor
specified or required. Fire Alarm system wiring must meet UL 760. Do not use wires and cables manufactured
more than 12 months prior to delivery to the site.

Install all wiring in a workman-like manner, free from splices. Subcontractors must replace wires and cables that
are nicked, scraped, or damaged at no cost to Johnson Controls. Provide service loops for all wiring and cabling in
all control panels, or in the closest pull box to the device being wired.
Subcontractors or electrical installers must provide and install all control wiring to all Johnson Controls panels,
equipment, and devices.
Identify and tag all wiring and cabling in accordance with Johnson Controls control drawings and/or point
schedules. Tag all wires and cables at each end, and where spliced or terminated, with a Johnson Controls
approved identification system. If you are required to run in conduit, run fire alarm communication cables in conduit
systems containing only fire alarm system wiring.
Ducts, plenums, and other air-handling spaces have a greater supply of oxygen for the spreading of fire. Because
this air is supplied to the environment, there is the danger of spreading toxic products of combustion that can impair
WIRING
vision in a fire-fighting or egress situation. For this reason, use plenum rated cables (type CL2P or higher) and tie
raps when exposed in ducts, plenums, or other space used for environmental air.
Use of Shielded Communication Wiring
In an installation where cabling is subjected to transients because of its proximity to sources of electrical noise, you
should install FC-MS/TP, SA, N2, AI, AO, or BI cable, or multiple cables with 22 AWG/3-wire or 22 AWG/2-wire
stranded, twisted, and shielded to avoid communication issues. If shielded communication cable is used, follow
these best practices:
• Handle and terminate shielded cable properly. (Based on tests conducted by Johnson Controls engineers,
improper handling of the shields can create installations that are less stable than if no shield is used.)
• Establish only one hard ground connection of the Shield per bus segment. Install this hard ground at the
supervisory controller when the controller is also at the end of line, and terminate the Shield within 1 inch of
entering an enclosure.
• Isolate from ground all other Shield connections, unless communication problems persist.
• If communication problems persist, add an extra level of protection by soft grounding the Shield within 1 inch
of entering their respective enclosures with a 560 pF capacitor. This provides the highest level of noise
immunity, although it should not be needed for most situations.
• As an option, run shielded cable in the same conduit or bundle as 24 VAC power wiring.
Cable Sizes
Point Schedules in the HVAC project drawings show the cable and wire sizes to be used. For information on Point
Schedules, see Understanding HVAC Control Drawings on page 7.
The size of conductors may need to be increased to meet installation conditions or project requirements. The two
most common conditions that may require conductor size adjustment are:
• long cable runs for resistive temperature sensors
• 24 VAC power distributions from Transformers to Zone Controls
For information on recommended cable and wire size/gauge, see Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards on
page 465.
RJ-Style Modular Connectors and Cables
IMPORTANT: Ensure all that communication bus cables are disconnected from power sources before cutting
or crimping the cable. Failure to disconnect the cable before cutting or crimping can result in damage to the
connected bus devices and void any warranties on the devices.
On Plenum Cable Jobs

For plenum jobs where you can run open wiring, use preconfigured cables with RJ-style connectors. Using factory
preconfigured cables is more efficient and accurate than fabricating cables with RJ-style connectors in the field.
Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors: Section 4 19

EMT or Conduit Jobs
When EMT or conduit raceways are required, use standard cable and the device terminal screws (because RJ-
style modular connectors do not pull through conduit well, and the prefabricated cables are seldom the right length
for the conduit run). If the preconfigured cables are the right length, you can use them if you cut off one end, pull
the cable, and then terminate the other end.
Note: Network sensor cables with RJ-12 connectors pull much more effectively through raceways than TE-6700
Metastat cables with RJ-45 connectors. Also, if you pull an RJ-style connector through a raceway, you should test
it after installation to ensure that the connector is not damaged.
Cable Installation Tips
Follow these guidelines when installing cables with RJ-style modular connectors:
WIRING
• Use proper techniques when fabricating and installing cables with RJ-style connectors.
• When attaching wires to RJ-style connectors, ensure that all of the cable conductors are fully inserted in the
connector in the proper positions and securely crimped into the connector. For details on proper pinouts for
Ethernet, Metastat or network sensors, see their specific sections in this guide.
• Route and support cables neatly to promote good ventilation, visibility, appearance, and troubleshooting.
Provide some slack between connections. If using preconfigured cables, coil and secure the excess cable.
• Test all cables for proper pinout and continuity before connecting cables to controllers, thermostats, or sensors.
• Because of the considerable time that can elapse between running the cable and connecting the thermostat or
sensor, you should wrap the RJ-style connectors with tape or other means to protect them from drywall mud,
paint, and other construction site hazards.
The EZ-RJ45 Crimper (Figure 4-3 on page 20) manufactured by Bomar Interconnect Products, Inc. reduces
termination errors and can be used to terminate RJ-12 or RJ-45 connectors. The tool, when used with Bomar
connectors, allows the wires to pass entirely through the RJ connector and allows you to crimp the wires into the
connector and trim the excess wire, all in a single operation. To order these product online, go to
http://www.bomarinterconnect.com, or call Anixter at 1-800-447-8565.
RJ-12 Pinout
FIG:RJ12Pn
6 5 4 3 2 1
Bus Common
Bus Common
SA +
SA Pwr (Sensor)
SA -
SA Pwr (PDA)
Figure 4-3: SA Bus RJ-12 Pinout Identification; Crimping Tool; and Positioned, Crimped, and Trimmed
Cable Conductors in an RJ-Style Connector by Bomar Interconnect Products, Inc.

In addition to this crimping tool, other products are available to test
cables and RJ-45 or RJ-12 connectors. For example, the TP600
LanRoamerPRO cable tester by Test Um Incorporated (Figure 4-4
on page 21) is a length measurement tool, cable tester, and tone
generator. Another name for this device is the LanRoverPRO
TP600.
Wiring Guidelines for Network Sensors with RJ-
Style Ports
The N2 Metastats (with RJ-style ports) are connected to the bus
with a 24 AWG, 4-pair cable that terminates at both ends with an
RJ-45 modular connector (Figure 4-5 on page 21). The NS Series
WIRING
Network Sensors are connected to the bus with 24 or 26 AWG,
3-pair cable that terminates with an RJ-12 modular connector
(Figure 4-5 on page 21). The 3-pair cable (six conductors) is used,
even though the SA Bus requires only four conductors because
two of the wire pairs are run in parallel to provide additional power Figure 4-4: TP600 LanRoamerPRO
capacity on the cable. Cable Tester
RJ-12 connectors are smaller than the RJ-45 connectors

(Figure 4-5 on page 21), and RJ-12 connectors are less likely to be
damaged when pulled though 1/2 in. EMT conduit. RJ-45
connector applications typically require 3/4 in. EMT conduit
raceways.
RJ-11 vs. RJ-12 Modular Connectors
There is a difference between RJ-11 and RJ-12 modular
connectors, even though RJ-12 connectors are sometimes
referred to as RJ-11 connectors. RJ-11 connectors may be applied
to 1-, 2-, or 3-pair preconfigured cables, whereas RJ-12
connectors are typically applied to just 3-pair cables. A RJ-12
connector may be referred to a RJ-11 3-pair connector.
Regardless, always verify the RJ-style connector, the cable wire Figure 4-5: RJ-12 and RJ-45 Modular
gauge, and the number of wire pairs before applying the cable and Connectors
connectors to your network sensor bus application.
Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors: Section 4 21

WIRING

ETHER
NET
Ethernet Network Guidelines 25
NAE55
NIE55
NAE55/NIE55 Series Network Controllers 33
NAE35/45
NCM45
NAE35, NAE45, and NCM45 Series Network Controllers 45
NCE25
NCE25 Series Network Controllers 55
SECVT
SECVT Serial N2 to Ethernet Converter 67

ETHER
NET
Ethernet Network Guidelines
NAE45 NCE25
NAE35
Hub or Switch
Firewall
Hub or Switch Internet
Ethernet
IP Network
NAE55
ADS/ADX
Computer NIE55
Segment Cable Lengths

CAT5 cable: 100 m (330 ft)
Fiber optic: 2,200 m (6,600 ft)
NCM4500
FIG:Ntwk_Lyt
Figure 5-1: Ethernet Communications Network Diagram
Ethernet Network Overview and Rules

The wired Ethernet network is the primary communication backbone for the Metasys system extended
architecture. It carries all types of communication, including shared point and control information, database
uploads and downloads, commands to field equipment, summaries, and alarms. (For information about how the
Ethernet is used on a wireless network, refer to the particular Metasys wireless component document.)
Ethernet technology uses the industry standard UDP service provided by the TCP/IP and works with single or
multiple segment LANs. Ethernet is defined by the IEEE 802.3 specification.
Ethernet components on the Metasys network include the ADS/ADX computer and supervisory controllers,
including NAEs, NCEs, NIEs, and NCMs (Figure 5-1 on page 25). In addition, hubs, switches, and routers are used
to extend the network to support additional nodes. These components can be either dedicated for Metasys system
use or shared with other customer-supplied systems.
Ethernet communications allow for Metasys supervisory components to communicate over a high-speed local area
network at speeds up to 100 Mb/s using UTP cable. Several categories of twisted-pair cables exist. The tighter the
twisting, the higher the supported transmission rate and the greater the cost per foot. Category 3 has a very low
number of twists and is rated up to 10 Mbs. Category 5 has a much higher number of twists and is rated up to 100
Mbs. Category 5e (e = enhanced) has a more stringent standard and is capable of speeds up to 1,000 Mbs
(Gigabit Ethernet). The most frequently used type of cable today is Category 5e, but the Category 6 standard is
now officially part of the 568A standard and Category 7 cable is soon to become a standard as well.
An 8-pin RJ-45 network jack located on each supervisory device connects the node to the network.
For NAEs, NCEs, NIEs, and NCMs, a flickering Ethernet LED indicates the presence of network activity. For
computers, activity is often shown by an LED at the network jack. When no Ethernet traffic is occurring or the LAN
cable is disconnected, the LED is off.

ETHER
NET
For most installations, Ethernet nodes are connected to a LAN jack on the wall or to a network hub or switch that is
connected to the building network. Anywhere down the line, there might be repeaters, hubs, and switches. The IT
department at the job site is responsible for the building network and should be consulted when adding network
components. See Table 5-1 on page 26 for Ethernet Network rules.
Table 5-1: Ethernet Network Rules
Category Rules/Maximums Allowed
General Star topology with network hubs, switches, and routers
Number of Devices Maximum of 100 devices can be connected to one site in the Metasys system extended
architecture.
Line Length and Type Solid unshielded twisted pair (Category 5 cable): 100 m (330 ft)
Stranded unshielded twisted pair (patch cable): 10 m (33 ft)
RG58A/U coax cable (for 10Base2 systems): 185 m (607 ft)
Plastic/glass fiber optic with external adapter: 2,000 m (6,600 ft)
Terminations For 10/100 BaseT, no line terminators allowed.
Wiring the Ethernet Network

all wiring connections. Short-circuited or improperly connected wires may result in permanent damage to the
equipment.
IMPORTANT: Do not run network communication cables in the same conduit, raceway, or panel with any high-
voltage (>30 VAC) wiring. Isolate all network devices from high-voltage wiring and equipment. Failure to isolate
network wiring and network devices from high-voltage wiring and equipment can result in damage to network
devices or poor network performance.
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge to the network wiring and network devices. Static electric
discharge can damage the network devices and void any warranties.
IMPORTANT: Always consult with the customer’s Network IT department before installing Metasys Ethernet
components. Other online systems may be affected, so close coordination with the IT department is very
important. For more information, refer to the Network and IT Guidance for the BAS Professional Technical
Bulletin (LIT-12011279).
IMPORTANT: Do not deform, do not bend, do not stretch, and do not staple Ethernet cables. Also, do not run
Ethernet cables parallel to power cables, and do not run Ethernet cables near noise inducing components.
IMPORTANT: It is very important that you maintain the pairing of conductors. For details, see Figure 5-2 on
page 27 and terminate per the appropriate standard.
General Ethernet Wiring Guidelines

Observe the following when installing and wiring Ethernet nodes:
• Do not run cables near moving parts. Avoid sharp bends, abrasion, and the potential for severing or crushing
the cable.
• Provide some slack in the wires and cables to allow for access and servicing.
• Protect, coil, and secure any excess cable.
• If using a crimping tool to attach RJ-45 connectors to cable, follow proper techniques. Assure that all wires are
fully inserted into the connector in the proper positions and that they are securely crimped.

ETHER
NET
• Make sure that RJ-45 connectors are fully inserted into the LAN jack of the device.
• Use dedicated transformers for 24 VAC supply power to the network devices or provide surge protection on the
primary side of the 24 VAC supply power transformers to isolate the network devices from inductive surges or
spikes.
• Take extra care when installing and servicing components on an online Ethernet network. The network may
include dedicated systems with other controllers, engines, and workstations that are not part of the current
project being installed. Accidental shutdown of these systems can have severe repercussions; therefore, be
sure that your actions do not adversely affect their operation.
• No more than 12.7 mm (1/2 in.) of the Ethernet cable should be untwisted; otherwise, it can be susceptible to
crosstalk.
The standard UTP Ethernet
cable termination is RJ-45. RJ-45 Plug
Figure 5-2 on page 27 shows
the cable pinouts for that type of Pin 1
cable. See Table 5-1 on
page 26 for Ethernet cable
length limits.
As shown in Figure 5-2 on
page 27, odd numbered pins
are always striped and even
numbered pins are always solid
colored. When you look at the
RJ-45 connector with the clip Clip pointed away
facing away from you, brown is Pair Pair
always on the right, and Pin 1 is
on the left. Figure 5-2 on Pair Pair Pair Pair Pair Pair
page 27 shows pair
combinations for the two most
popular CAT5 Ethernet cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
standards: 568A and 568B.
O range - S tripe
O range - S tripe
While using a standard color
B ro w n - S tripe
G reen - S tripe
Brow n - Stripe
G reen - S trip e
Blue - S tripe
B lue - S tripe
code for terminations, it is
O ran ge
O range
Brow n
G reen
B row n
G reen
important to understand the
B lue
pairing with the pin numbers B lue

(Figure 5-2 on page 27). Always
ensure that all connectors,
cables, and termination
standards, including color and
termination order, meet project
requirements. Maintain pairing
as shown in Figure 5-2 on 568A 568B
page 27.
FIG:Ethrpin
Ethernet Cable
Termination Instructions
Follow these steps when Figure 5-2: Ethernet Cable RJ-45 Pinout Detail
terminating UTP Ethernet cable:
1. Pull the cable to the desired locations. If you are pulling cables through holes or raceways, it is easier to attach
the RJ-45 plugs after the cable is pulled. The total length of wire segments between an ADS/ADX computer or
supervisory controller and a hub, or between two ADS/ADX computers or supervisory controllers, cannot
exceed 100 m (330 ft).
2. Start on one end and strip the cable jacket off an appropriate amount. Be extra careful not to nick the wires;
otherwise, you need to re-strip.
Ethernet Network Guidelines: Section 5 27

ETHER
NET
3. Spread and then untwist the pairs. Arrange the wires in the order of the desired cable end (Figure 5-2 on
page 27), and then flatten the end between your thumb and forefinger.
Note: A crimper is required to terminate the wires to an RJ-45 connector. For most crimpers, you need to trim
the ends of the wires so they are even with one another, leaving only 12.7 mm (1/2 in.) wire length. If longer
than 12.7 mm (1/2 in.), the length is out-of-spec and susceptible to crosstalk. The crimper Johnson Controls
recommends does not require this 12.7 mm (1/2 in.) length limitation. (See Crimping Tool on page 28).
4. Hold the RJ-45 plug with the clip facing down or away from you. Push the wires firmly into the plug. Be sure
that each wire is flat and even at the front of the plug. Check the order of the wires. Check again before
crimping.
5. Verify that the jacket is fitted up against the stop of the plug. Carefully hold the wire and use the crimper to
firmly crimp the wires into the RJ-45 connector.
6. Check the color orientation and make sure that the crimped connection is not about to come apart. Verify that
the wires are flat against the front of the plug. If just one of these wires is incorrect, you need to start over and
recrimp.
7. Test the Ethernet cable. Record test results if requested by the customer.
Use of Straight-through and Crossover Ethernet Cables
A straight-through Ethernet cable terminates identically on each end (Figure 5-3 on page 28). In Ethernet
connections, this type of cable is often called a patch cord. A crossover cable however, terminates differently on
each end. It connects two Ethernet devices without a hub or connects two hubs. For this cable, the orange set of
wires on one end are switched with the green set (for either 568 standard).
Crimping Tool
The recommended crimping tool for installing RJ-45 connectors is the EZ-RJ45 Crimper manufactured by Bomar
Interconnect Products, Inc. and available from Anixter. (See the Installation Specifications on page 30 section for
contact information.) This tool, when used with Bomar connectors, allows the wires to pass entirely through the
connector, crimps the connector, and trims the excessive wire in a single operation. Use this tool to help eliminate
RJ termination errors.
LAN Cable Testers
LAN Cable testers are helpful when testing Ethernet connections for use on the Metasys network. The most
common errors seen are improper termination and wire length. Several industry standard tools are available that
test for both of these conditions. The 620 LAN CableMeter tester from Fluke or the Fluke MicroScanner Pro tester
are excellent choices for checking CAT5 cable (distance and wire mapping). Another, less expensive alternative is
the TP600 LanRoamerPRO cable tester by Test Um Incorporated. (Also known as the LanRoverPRO TP600.)
If you need to validate terminations only, many inexpensive RJ45 cable testers are also available. Many local
electronic and hardware stores offer these testers. An example is the Triplett WireMaster XR-2.
Straight Through Ethernet Cable
Transmit + 1 Green - Stripe 1 Receive +

Transmit - 2 Green 2 Receive -
At ADS/ADX Receive + 3 Orange - Stripe 3 Transmit + At a Hub
computer or
4 Blue 4 or Switch
supervisory
controller.
5 Blue - Stripe 5
Receive - 6 Orange 6 Transmit -
FIG:EthCablConf
7 Brown - Stripe 7
8 Brown 8
Figure 5-3: Straight-Through Ethernet Cable Detail

ETHER
NET
Note: To create a crossover cable between two computers, simply swap the Transmit and Receive pairs on one
end, maintaining end-to-end polarity.
Note: Also, both the blue and brown wire pairs on Pins 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not used in either standard. Even though
Pins 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not used or required on many networks, terminate all four pairs because the cable is a
standard and some network systems may require these pairs.
Consistent Media
The specific environment and application must be evaluated when selecting a media type. Where possible, use
one type of media to avoid having to meet the different installation, maintenance, and test equipment requirements
that are unique to each media. Hardware connections and special equipment associated with each media can
further complicate network management and maintenance. For example, an installation requiring 500 feet of UTP
cable would be better served by installing a switch (when accessible) between NAEs instead of switching the
media to another type.
Cable and Hardware Accessibility
Accessing the network cable and hardware is necessary for maintaining and expanding the network. To simplify
future cable alterations, install a generously sized conduit for network cables in the walls.
Each type of media has length restrictions. For any one segment, avoid running cable beyond 80 percent of the
allotted cable length. Use additional hardware rather than have segments that exceed cable limits. Maximum cable
length is media specific and is covered in multiple sections of this handbook.
Number of Nodes
Other key LAN installation and design factors are the maximum number of Metasys and Ethernet nodes, as well as
the maximum length of cable for each N1 segment. Up to 100 Metasys nodes can reside on an Ethernet network,
with a maximum segment length of 100 m (330 ft) when UTP cable is used.
Extending Ethernet between Buildings
Avoid copper conductors when routing Ethernet between buildings. The electrical disturbances caused by lightning
and naturally occurring differences in ground potential over distance can quickly cause considerable damage to
equipment and people. Instead, to eliminate network cabling as a safety risk, use fiber-optic cabling between
buildings whenever possible. Also, various wireless media are available for building links; however, wireless media
is much less reliable than fiber-optic media, and should only be considered when it is impossible or impractical to
get right-of-way for installation of fiber-optic cable.

ETHER
NET
Related Documentation
Table 5-2: Related Documentation
For Information On See Document LIT or Part Number
Metasys System Extended Architecture Metasys System Extended Architecture Overview LIT-1201527
Technical Bulletin
General information about understanding Network and Information Technology LIT-1201578
building networks Considerations Technical Bulletin
Security issues on networks Security Administrator System Technical Bulletin LIT-1201528
Specifications and Installation of the NAE55/NIE55 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10051-0
NAE5500 and NIE5500
Specifications and Installation of the NAE35/NAE45 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10050-6
NAE3500 and NAE4500
Specifications and Installation of the NCE25 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10143-63
NCE2500
Specifications and Installation of the NCM45x0-2 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10249-18
NCM45x0-2
Interaction between an N1 Network and N1 Migration with the NIE Technical Bulletin LIT-1201535
the NIE
Installation Specifications
Table 5-3: Ethernet Network (Part 1 of 2)
Category Specification
Protocol TCP/IP
CSMA/CD
Device Addressing 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods. Each number is an
integer between 0 to 255. For example, 192.168.10.240 could be an IP address.
Number of Devices Supported Up to 100
Data Transmission Standard IEEE 802.3 Specification
Signaling Method Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detect
Communication Rate Up to 100 Mb/s
Error Checking Cyclic Redundancy Check
Termination Method Network segments terminate at a hub, switch, or router.
Transmission Media 24 AWG unshielded twisted cable, 4 twisted pairs, solid copper conductors (CAT5 cable)
Physical Configuration Star configuration
Segment Length Category 5 cable: 100 m (330 ft) maximum
RG58A/U coax cable (for 10Base2 systems): 185 m (607 ft) maximum
Fiber-optic cable (plastic or glass) with external adapter: 2,000 m (6,600 ft) maximum

ETHER
NET
Table 5-3: Ethernet Network (Part 2 of 2)
Optional Vendor Components Hubs or Switches
• Netgear 5 Port 10/100 switch model FS105NA
• W-Linx 5-port 10/100 Mini Hub (USB) E63746 (part number SW-005CM-X)
• Netgear 5 Port 10/100 Desktop switch model FS605
Fiber-Optic Switch
• Allied Telesis™ 2 port switch 10BT/100FX/100TX model AT-FS201-10
LAN Cable Testers
• 620 LAN CableMeter from Fluke
• Fluke MicroScanner Pro
• Test Um Inc. TP600 LanRoamerPRO or LanRoverPRO TP600
Note: Consult with the customer’s IT department before purchasing equipment. They
may already have the accessories you need to perform the installation.
Preferred Network Cable Anixter, Inc.
Supplier 4420 N. Harley Davidson Ave., Suite B
Wauwatosa, WI 53225
1-800-447-8565
414-755-6120 (main)
414-755-6121 (fax)
http://www.anixter.com
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standard. For application at conditions beyond these
specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls® office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication
or misuse of its products. For additional specifications refer to the Product Bulletin for this product. See Related Documentation.

ETHER
NET

22 AWG Stranded 3-Wire Twisted Shielded Cable recommended for MS/TP Bus applications.
18 to 22 AWG Stranded 3-Wire Unshielded Cable recommended for N2 Bus applications.
Code No. LIT-410007

(See Cable Standards and General Wiring Guidelines for complete information on cable selections.)
FC-A connects to a daisy-chained

MS/TP trunk or N2 trunk.
Connect FC Bus cable shield to earth ground
Figure 6-1:
within 50 mm (2 in.) of NAE. (Do not connect cable
FC-B connects to a daisy-chained shield to earth ground at any other point along cable.)
MS/TP trunk or N2 trunk.
LON connects to a POWER connects to 24 VAC
LONWORKS network. Class 2 isolated or surge protected
power supply, (50 VA maximum
22 AWG, 2-Wire Twisted Cable
power requirement).
Two Standard USB Ports
connects NAE/NIE to
(user-supplied) external Two Wires, 22 to 16 AWG
LON
modem with USB cable.
Installation and Wiring Guidelines
LON A
LON B
SHIELD
EOL Termination Switches
RJ-45, 8-Pin Ethernet Jack (See Setting the End-of-Line
connects NAE/NIE to Switches for the FC Bus.)
Metasys IP network with
Ethernet patch cable.
LED Status Indicators

NAE55/NIE55 Series Network Controllers
RJ-11 6-Pin Modem Jack (See LED Status Indicators.)

connects to phone cable on
NAE/NIE models with
internal modems.
Data Protection Battery

Compartment (See Installing
the Data Protection Battery.)
Typical NAE55 Physical Features and Termination Descriptions

System Re-Boot Switch
(See System Re-boot Switch.) FIG_NAE55

33
NAE55
NIE55
Application
The NAE55 Series and NIE55 Series are Web-enabled, Ethernet-based, supervisory devices that monitor and
NAE55
control networks of field-level building automation devices, HVAC equipment, and lighting equipment.
NIE55
Figure 6-1 on page 33 shows the typical wiring for an NAE55. Figure 6-7 on page 40 shows the dimensions and
physical characteristics of a typical NAE55 model. See Table 6-4 on page 41 for NAE55/NIE55 model details. See
Table 7-3 on page 52 for a comparison of all NAE models.
Special Tools Needed
• four fasteners appropriate for the mounting surface (#8 screws - North America, M4 screws - Europe), or
• two 35.6 cm (14 in.) or longer pieces of DIN rail for DIN rail mount applications
• a small straight blade screwdriver for securing communication wires in the terminal blocks
Mounting
See General Guidelines for Locating and Mounting Controllers on page 14 and Mounting Metasys System
Controllers on page 15 for mounting guidelines.
Wiring
See General Guidelines for Wiring Metasys System Networks on page 17 for general wiring guidelines.
In addition, follow these guidelines when wiring an NAE55/NIE55:
• Mount the NAE securely before wiring it.
IMPORTANT: Do not apply 24 VAC power to the NAE before installing the data protection battery. See
Installing the NAE55/NIE55 Data Protection Battery on page 37 in this section.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the terminal block keys. The terminal block plugs and the terminal sockets are
keyed to fit together in the correct configuration only.
Power Supply, Network, and Communication Connections

See Table 6-1 on page 35 for port label, name description, function, rating and requirements. See Figure 6-1 on
page 33 or Figure 6-7 on page 40 for the location of the power supply terminal, network communication terminals,
Ethernet jack, and modem jack. See Related Documentation on page 41 for references to more detailed
information on NAE55/NIE55 power supply, network ports, and communication ports, and their ratings,
requirements, and restrictions.

Table 6-1: NAE55/NIE55 Terminal Block/Port Function, Ratings, Requirements, and Wire/Cable Types
Terminal Terminal Block/Port Ratings Requirements and Wire/Cable Type
NAE55
Block/Port Name and Description/ Restrictions
NIE55
Label Function
POWER 24 VAC, Class 2, Power Source 24 VAC, Class 2 Install the data protection 16 to 20 AWG,
connection battery before applying 2-wire, cable shield
24 VAC power to the NAE. not required.
See Installing the Data
Protection Battery.
FC-A Two optically isolated RS-485 N2 applications: An N2 Bus trunk supports 22 AWG, stranded,
and communication ports support either 98k baud (only) 100 devices total and 50 3-wire, twisted
FC-B a Metasys N2 or MS/TP trunk. per bus segment. cable
Connect to two pluggable and EOL termination at both Shielded cable
keyed 4-position terminal blocks ends of each N2 bus recommended
(FC-Bus ports available on NAE segment is preferred. only in applications
models only). EOL termination using one that encounter high
The cable shield connection (SHD) EOL terminated device inductive noise or
on the FC port is not connected to somewhere on each N2 radio frequency
earth ground. The FC A and FC B bus segment is interference.
terminal blocks are not acceptable.
interchangeable.
MS/TP An MS/TP Bus trunk 22 AWG, stranded,
applications: supports 100 devices total 3-wire,twisted
98k to 76.8k baud and 50 per bus segment. cable
for MS-NAE/ (Device limit may be lower Shielded cable
NIE55xx-1 when connecting TEC required.
models. Older controllers to bus.)
models cannot EOL termination at both
operate at the ends of each MS/TP bus
highest baud rate. segment is required.
LON LONWORKS communication port, FTT10 78 Kbps Supports up to 127 22 AWG, stranded
supports LONWORKS and LN Series LONWORKS devices on the 2-wire twisted
devices. network and 64 devices cable
Connect to a pluggable, keyed, per LONWORKS Bus Shielded cable
3-position terminal block recommended
(LONWORKS port available on only in applications
NAE552x-xxx models only) that encounter high
inductive noise or
radio frequency
interference.
SERIAL A Two RS-232-C serial ports, with Supports all Use SERIAL A port to Connect using a
and standard 9-pin sub-D jacks standard baud connect directly to a laptop Null-Modem Serial
SERIAL B rates. or PC serial port to browse cable with standard
to the NAE. 9-pin sub-D plugs.
Use SERIAL B port to
connect to a VT100
terminal or computer using
a VT100 terminal emulator.
USB A Two USB serial ports, standard USB Supports standard Refer to NAE Connect using a
and connectors support an optional, USB. Commissioning Guide Standard USB
USB B user-supplied external modem (LIT-1201519). interface cable.
MODEM Connects the optional internal Up to 56 Kbps Refer to NAE Standard
modem available on some model baud Commissioning Guide telephone cable
NAE/NIEs to a dial-up connection (LIT-1201519). with RJ-11, 6-pin
phone line. Standard RJ-11, 6-pin modular plugs
telephone jack
ETHERNET Ethernet IP network communication 10/100 Mb baud Refer to NAE Standard Ethernet
connection. Connects NAE to Commissioning Guide patch with RJ-45
Metasys network and NIE to N1 (LIT-1201519). 8-pin modular
migrations. RJ-45, 8-pin jack plugs
NAE55/NIE55 Series Network Controllers: Section 6 35

To wire an NAE55/NIE55: FC Bus Wiring
1. Connect the Metasys network Ethernet cable to the RJ-45,
SHLD
COM
NAE55
8-pin Ethernet port (Figure 6-7 on page 40).

NIE55
+
2. Connect the field bus cables to the appropriate ports:
-
FC Bus
• For FC Bus trunks, connect wires to one of the FC-A or Terminal
FC-B terminal plugs (Figure 6-2 on page 36). Block
• For LONWORKS network trunks, connect the wires to the

LON terminals (Figure 6-2 on page 36).
FC Bus
3. If the NAE55 is connected to an N2 Bus or an FC Bus, set the Terminal Block
NAE EOL switches to the proper positions. See Setting the Plug
End-of-Line Switches on page 38.
4. If required, connect the telephone line to the modem port or
connect an external modem to the USB A port.
5. Make connections to the RS-232 serial ports, if required N2 Applications = REF N2- N2+
(Figure 6-7 on page 40). MS/TP Applications = COM FC- FC+
6. Connect the 24 VAC supply power wires from the transformer
LONWORKS Wiring
to the terminal block plug (Figure 6-2 on page 36).
Note: Power supply wire colors may differ on transformers
LONWORKS
LON
not manufactured by Johnson Controls, Inc. Follow the Terminal Block
transformer manufacturer’s instructions and the project
installation drawings.
IMPORTANT: Connect the 24 VAC power to all network

devices so that transformer phasing is uniform across the LONWORKS
Terminal Block
devices. Powering network devices with uniform 24 VAC
SHD
Plug
B
supply power phasing reduces noise, interference, and ground
loop problems. The NAE does not require an earth ground
Wires from
connection. LONWORKS
Trunk
LONWORKS wires are not polarity sensitive.
24 VAC Power Supply Wiring
NAE/NIE
Power Terminal Block
24V~
NAE/NIE Power
Terminal Block
Plug
COM
HOT
Wires from
Johnson Controls
24 VAC Class 2
Power Transformer
FIG:NAE55_Wrng
Brown Wire Orange Wire

(COM) (24 VAC)
Figure 6-2: NAE Wiring

Setup and Adjustment
Installing the NAE55/NIE55 Data
NAE55
NIE55
Protection Battery
To install the data protection battery:
POWER
Data
SER IAL B
SER IAL A
U SB B
U SB A
-
NC
+
S
REF
-
N2
+
S
REF
-
+
1. Remove the battery from its Protection
Battery
packaging. Remove the battery
RE- BO OT
SYSTEM
GENL FAULT
BATT FAULT
24 VAC
RUN
PEER COM
FC B
FC A
100/LINK
10/LINK
ETHERNET
POWER
cover on the NAE55/NIE55 to ETHERNET MODEM
expose the battery compartment ET SY R NAE
NAE_DATA_PRO_BATT
(Figure 6-7 on page 40). Battery
BATT E RY
Cable
2. Carefully plug the NAE55/NIE55 Connectors
Battery
battery connector from the battery Strap
Data Protection
compartment into the connector Battery
on the battery cable (Figure 6-3 on Compartment
page 37).
3. Place battery in the compartment Figure 6-3: NAE and NAE Data Protection Battery
(Figure 6-3 on page 37).
4. Slide one end of the battery strap into the hole in the other tape (Figure 6-3 on page 37), and fasten the hook
and loop tape tightly around the battery to minimize battery movement.
IMPORTANT: Do not apply 24 VAC power to the NAE55/NIE55 before installing the data protection battery.
5. Replace the cover of the battery compartment and apply 24 VAC power to the NAE55/NIE55 immediately.
IMPORTANT: If you are using an NAE55xx-0 or NIE55xx-0 model, the data protection battery must maintain a
small residual charge. The battery ships from the factory with a small residual charge, and you should connect
24 VAC power to the NAE55/NIE55 immediately after connecting the battery to ensure that the battery does not
completely lose its charge, which may damage the battery. If you are using a -1 model, battery draining when
the power is off does not cause a problem.
Note: The 24 VAC power to the NAE55/NIE55 charges the data protection battery. At initial startup, the battery
requires a charging period of at least 2 hours before it supports data protection if power fails. Maximum protection
(up to three consecutive power failures without recharging time) requires a 24-hour charging period.
Addressing an NAE55/NIE55
Assign the NAE Computer Name (host name) and the IP address in the Metasys Site Management Portal UI
(software) via a laptop computer or desktop computer. The Metasys system automatically assigns the appropriate
device address for the NAE on the field bus. Refer to the NAE Commissioning Guide (LIT-1201519) for more
information on the Computer Name and IP address.

Setting the End-of-Line Switches
See EOL Termination on the MS/TP Bus on page 81 and
EOL Termination Across the N2 Bus on page 179 for
NAE55
O N
NIE55
information on setting the EOL termination switch.
NAE_EOL
The NAE55 has two EOL switch blocks (one for each FC
Bus port) that enable/disable the NAE55 as a network 1 2
terminated device. Set an NAE55 as a terminated device
on an FC Bus by positioning both of the switches on the
Figure 6-4: FC Bus EOL Switch Block with
EOL switch block ON (Figure 6-4 on page 38). NAE55s are
Switches in the (Default) ON Position
shipped with the EOL switches in the ON position for both
FC ports.
Powering On the NAE55/NIE55
After applying 24 VAC power, the NAE55/NIE55 requires up to 5 minutes to start up and become operational. See
the NAE55 LED Test Sequence at Startup on page 38 section.
Startup is complete and the NAE55/NIE55 is operational when the (green) RUN LED is On steady and the (red)
GEN FAULT LED is Off. See Figure 6-5 on page 38 for LED locations.
Disconnecting Power from the NAE55/NIE55
IMPORTANT: Turn on the NAE/NIE to charge the data protection battery. Apply 24 VAC to change the battery.
The 24 VAC supply power is disconnected from the NAE by removing the terminal block plug from the power
terminal port on the NAE (Figure 6-2 on page 36).
When the 24 VAC supply power to the NAE is disconnected or lost, the NAE is nonoperational. The POWER LED
remains On, and the data protection battery continues to power the NAE for several (1 to 8) minutes to back up
volatile data in nonvolatile memory. The POWER LED goes Off when the data backup is completed.
IMPORTANT: Disconnect the data protection battery (after the POWER LED goes Off) whenever the NAE55/
NIE55’s 24 VAC power supply is disconnected for more than 48 hours. If a -0 model is used, an unpowered NAE
depletes the battery charge, and complete loss of charge may damage the data protection battery.
NAE55 LED Status Indicators

The NAE55 has 11 LEDs to indicate power and
communication status. Figure 6-5 on page 38 shows the POWER
LEDs and Table 6-2 on page 39 describes their ETHERNET
meaning. 10/LINK
100/LINK
NAE55 LED Test Sequence at Startup
During startup, the NAE automatically initiates an LED FC A
test to verify the operational status of the LEDs. FC B
N2-B
N2-A
POWER
SERIALB
SERIALA
USBB
USBA
-
NC
+
S
REF
-N2
+
S
REF
-N2
+
Immediately after connecting supply power, the following PEER COM

NAE_LED_STATUS
R E -BOO T
S Y ST EM
RUN
GENL FAULT
BATT FAULT
24 VAC
RUN
PEERCOM
N2B
N2A
100/LINK
10/LINK
ETHERNET
POWER
LED lighting sequence occurs: ETHERNET MODEM
ET SY R NA E
1. The PEER COM, RUN, and GENL FAULT LEDs turn 24 VAC
on, indicating that the operating system is booting BATT FAULT
GENL FAULT
up. For NAE55 models, the FC A and FC B LEDs
also turn on.
2. The PEER COM, RUN, GENL FAULT LEDs, and the Figure 6-5: Front of NAE with LED Designations
FC A and FC B LEDs (on NAE55 models) shut off.
The RUN LED flashes to indicate that the NAE
software is loading.
3. The LEDs display the operational status of the NAE. When the RUN LED goes On Steady, the operating
system and Metasys application are running and the NAE is ready.
The total time to start up the NAE depends on the size of the database and can take several minutes.

Table 6-2: NAE LEDs Designation, Normal Status, Description, and Other Conditions
LED Normal Descriptions/Other Conditions
NAE55
NIE55
POWER (Green) On Steady On Steady = Unit is getting power from either the battery or 24 VAC power.
Also see the 24 VAC LED. Off Steady = Unit is shut down.
ETHERNET (Green) Flicker Flicker = Data is transferring on the Ethernet connection. Ethernet traffic is
general traffic (may not be for the NAE).
Off Steady = No Ethernet traffic, probably indicates a dead Ethernet network or
bad Ethernet connection.
10/LINK (Green) On Steady On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 10 Mb/s.
100/LINK (Green) On Steady On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 100 Mb/s.
FC-A (NAE55 only) Flicker On Steady = Controllers are defined to FC-A (FC Bus 1 or N2 Trunk 1) in the
(Green) NAE, but none are communicating (NAE transmitting only).
Flicker = Normal communications; FC A port is transmitting and receiving data.
Flickers are generally in sync with data transmission but should not be used to
indicate specific transmission times.
Off Steady = No field controllers are defined to FC A (FC Bus 1 or N2 Trunk 1)
in the NAE.
FC-B (NAE55 only) Flicker On Steady = Controllers are defined to FC-B (FC Bus 2 or N2 Trunk 2) in the
(Green) NAE, but none are communicating (NAE transmitting only).
Flicker = Normal communications; FC B port is transmitting and receiving data.
Flickers are generally in sync with data transmission but should not be used to
indicate specific transmission times.
Off Steady = No field controllers are defined to FC B (FC Bus 2 or N2 Trunk 2)
in the NAE.
PEER COMM (Green) Varies (see Flicker = Data traffic between NAE devices. For an NAE that is not a Site
next column) Director, this LED indicates regular heartbeat communications with the Site
Director. For a Site Director NAE, flashes are more frequent and indicate
heartbeat communications from all other NAE devices on the site. For a single
NAE on a network without an Application and Data Server (ADS), there is no
flicker.
Run (Green) On Steady On Steady = NAE software is running.
On 1 second, Off 1 second = NAE software is in startup mode.
On 0.5 seconds, Off 0.5 seconds = NAE software is shutting down.
Off Steady = Operating system is shutting down or software is not running.
24 VAC (Green) On Steady On Steady = 24 VAC power is present.
Off Steady = Loss of 24 VAC power. In the Off Steady condition, the NAE can
be running on battery power. Also see the POWER LED.
BATT FAULT (Red) Off Steady On Steady = Battery fault. Replace the battery. Battery not connected or
cannot be charged. The BATT FAULT LED may remain On for up to 24 hours
after initially powering-on the NAE. If the BATT FAULT LED remains on longer
than 48 hours after initially powering-on the NAE, check the battery connection
or replace the battery.
GENL FAULT (Red) Off Steady On Steady = General Fault. Fault conditions are user configurable in software.
Preconfigured fault conditions include excessive Central Processing Unit
(CPU), flash or memory use, excessive CPU or Printed Wire Board (PWB)
temperature, or Battery Fault. In normal operation, the GENL FAULT LED
stays on steady for the first half of the startup sequence.
System Re-Boot Switch

The System Re-Boot switch (Figure 6-7 on page 40) forces a manual restart of the NAE55/NIE55 processor. All
data changes made to the system since the last time the NAE55/NIE55 saved data are lost on restart, including
alarm, trend, and audit trail data.
IMPORTANT: Press the System Re-Boot switch only if the NAE55/NIE55 fails to respond and cannot be
accessed by any user device. Do not press the System Re-Boot switch unless you have tried other reasonable
means to fix the problem.

Dimensions and Physical Features
NAE55
NIE55
Wall Mount Feet

(Four Total)
226 mm
(8.9 in.)
NAE55_DIMENSIONS_2
DIN Rail
Hooks
(Eight Total)
DIN Rail Clips
(Two Total)
Figure 6-6: Back of an NAE55/NIE55: Dimensions and Other Physical Features
FC Bus
(N2 Trunk,
R
RJ-11 6-Pin RS-232-C LON WORKS FC Bus) 24 VAC
Modem Serial Ports Terminal Terminals Power Terminal
USB
Jack
Ports
End-of-Line
(EOL) Switches
RJ-45 8-Pin
LON
Ethernet
SHIELD
LON A
LON B
Jack
Wall Mount
Data Feet
Protection
Battery
Compartment
System Status
226 mm
Light-Emitting Diodes
(8.9 in.)
(LEDs)
NAE55_DIMS_FRONT
System 96.5 mm
Re-Boot 3.8 in.
Switch
Figure 6-7: Typical NAE55/NIE55 Series Model Dimensions and Physical Features

Table 6-3: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up NAE55/NIE55
NAE55
NIE55
For Information On See Document LIT or Part No.
Daily Operation of the Metasys System Extended Metasys system Help On the Help Menu,
Architecture, Navigating the UI, Monitoring and select Metasys
Controlling the BAS Networks Help
or LIT-1201793
Installation Considerations and Guidelines, NAE55/NIE Installation Instructions Part No.
Mounting, Wiring, and Starting an NAE55 or NIE 24-10051-0
Connecting to, Configuring, Browsing, NAE Commissioning Guide LIT-1201519
Commissioning, and Addressing an NAE
Integrating N2 Devices into the Metasys System N2 Integration with the NAE Technical Bulletin LIT-1201683
Extended Architecture
Configuring an MS/TP Network and Integrating MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin LIT-12011034
MS/TP Devices into the Metasys System
Integrating BACnet Devices to the Metasys BACnet System Integration with NAE Technical LIT-1201531
System Extended Architecture Bulletin
Migrating N1 Networks to the Metasys System N1 Network Migration with NIE Technical LIT-1201535
Extended Architecture Bulletin
Integrating LONWORKS Devices to the Metasys LONWORKS Network Integration with NAE LIT-1201668
System Extended Architecture Technical Bulletin
Dialing into Metasys System Extended Metasys system Extended Architecture Direct LIT-1201639
Architecture from a Computer Connection and Dial-up Connection Application
Note
Model Information
Table 6-4: MS-NAE55xx and MS-NIE55xx Series
Product Code Number Description
MS-NAE55xx-xxx NAE55 Series Network Automation Engines: Require a 24 VAC power supply. Each
model includes two RS-232-C serial ports, two USB serial ports, two RS-485 ports, one
Ethernet port, and an MS-BAT-1010-0 Data Protection Battery.
MS-NAE5510-1 Supports two N2 or two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunks (or one N2 trunk and one
BACnet MS/TP trunk).
MS-NAE5510-0U Supports two N2 or two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunks (or one N2 trunk and one
Note: This model is UL Listed, UUKL 864 8th Edition Smoke Control Equipment and is
available for replacement in or expansion of existing UUKL 864 8th Edition Metasys
smoke control applications only.
MS-NAE5510-1U Supports two N2 or two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunks (or one N2 trunk and one
Note: This model is UL Listed, File S4977, UUKL 864 9th Edition Smoke Control
Equipment.
BACnet MS/TP trunk); includes an internal modem.
Note: MS-NAE5512-1 models supports N2 tunneling on N2 trunks (only).
BACnet MS/TP trunk); includes an internal modem.
Note: MS-NAE5513-1 models supports N2 tunneling on N2 trunks (only).
MS-NAE5520-1 Supports a LONWORKS trunk and two N2 trunks or two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunks
(or one N2 trunk and one BACnet MS/TP trunk). Supports up to 255 devices on the
LONWORKS trunk.

Table 6-4: MS-NAE55xx and MS-NIE55xx Series
NAE55
NIE55
MS-NAE5520-1U Supports a LONWORKS trunk and two N2 trunks or two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunks
(or one N2 trunk and one BACnet MS/TP trunk). Supports up to 255 devices on the
LONWORKS trunk.
Note: This model is UL Listed, File S4977, UUKL 864 9th Edition Smoke Control
Equipment.
MS-NAE5521-1 Supports a LONWORKS trunk, and two N2 trunks or two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunks
(or one N2 trunk and one BACnet MS/TP trunk); includes an internal modem. Supports
up to 255 devices on the LONWORKS trunk.
MS-NIE55xx-xxx NIE55 Series Network Integration Engines: Requires a 24 VAC power supply. Each
model includes two RS-232-C serial ports, two USB serial ports, one Ethernet port, and
an MS-BAT-1010-0 Data Protection Battery.
MS-NIE5510-1 Supports N1 network migrations.
MS-NIE5510-0U Supports N1 network migrations.
Note: This model is UL Listed, UUKL 864 8th Edition Smoke Control Equipment and is
available for replacement in or expansion of existing UUKL 864 8th Edition Metasys
smoke control applications only.
MS-NIE5511-1 NIE55 model that supports N1 network migrations, includes an internal modem.
Table 6-5: NAE55 and NIE55 (Part 1 of 2)
Power Requirement Dedicated nominal 24 VAC, Class 2 power supply (North America), SELV power supply
(Europe), at 50/60 Hz (20 VAC minimum to 30 VAC maximum)
Power Consumption 50 VA maximum
Ambient Operating 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Temperature
Ambient Operating Condition 10 to 90% RH, 30°C (86°F) maximum dew point
Data Protection Battery Supports data protection on power failure. Rechargeable gel cell battery: 12 V, 1.2 Ah, with
a typical life of 3 to 5 years at 21°C (70°F); Product Code Number: MS-BAT1010-0
Clock Battery Maintains real-time clock through a power failure. On board cell; typical life 10 years at
21°C (70°F)
Network and Serial Interfaces One Ethernet port; 10/100 Mb; 8-pin RJ-45 connector
Two optically isolated RS-485 ports; 9600, 19.2k, or 38.4k baud; pluggable and keyed
4-position terminal blocks (RS-485 ports available on NAE55 models only)
Two RS-232-C serial ports, with standard 9-pin sub-D connectors, that support all standard
baud rates
Two USB serial ports, standard USB connectors support an optional, user-supplied
external modem
Options: One telephone port for internal modem; up to 56 Kbps; 6-pin RJ-11 connector
One LONWORKS port; FTT10 78 Kbps; pluggable, keyed 3-position terminal block
(LONWORKS port available on NAE552x-xxx models only)
Housing Plastic housing with internal metal shield
Plastic material: ABS + polycarbonate UL94-5VB
Protection: IP20 (IEC 60529)
Mounting On flat surface with screws on four mounting feet or on dual DIN rail

Table 6-5: NAE55 and NIE55 (Part 2 of 2)
Compliance United States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy Management
Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
NAE55
NIE55
UL Listed, File S4977, CCN UUKL, UL 864, Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm
Systems (only for Product Code Numbers MS-NAE5510-0U and MS-NIE5510-0U, also
PAZX Listing)
Canada: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal
Equipment, Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003
Europe: CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, in accordance with EN 61000-6-3 (2001)
Generic Emission Standard for Residential and Light Industry and EN 61000-6-2 (2001)
Generic Immunity Standard for Heavy Industrial Environment
Australia and New Zealand: C-Tick Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant
BACnet International: BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) 135-2004 Listed BACnet
Building Controller (B-BC)

NAE55
NIE55

Code No. LIT-410008
Connect to 24 VAC, Class 2
power supply, (25 VA maximum
power requirement).
The LED indicators vary depending on the 24 VAC
NAE/NCM model. See LED Status Indicators Power Terminal
for more information. Two wires, 22 to 16 AWG
6-Pin Field Controller

Service Port
(NAE models only)
ET SY R
Modem Jack EOL Termination Switch

RJ-11 6-pin modular jack, only Set EOL switch according to

on NAE models with optional the NAE/NCM’s position on the
internal modems. N2 or FC Bus.
FC BUS
Connect FC Bus cable shield to

hard ground near NAE/NCM.
(Do not connect shield cable to
RS-232 Serial Port
hard ground at any other point
NCMs have two ports and NAEs have
along cable.)
one or two ports depending on the model. Standard USB Port
See Model Information tables and the Wiring section
for more information on RS-232 Serial ports. FC BUS Port connects to
LON Port connects to a a MS/TP (FC) Bus or
LONWORKS network. an N2 Bus.
Ethernet Port
RJ-45 8-pin modular jack connects
NAE or NCM to IP Network. 22 AWG Stranded 22 AWG Stranded, Twisted 3-wire Cable
Twisted 2-wire Cable (Cable Shield recommended on all MS/TP applications.
Cable Shield recommended only on N2 applications
NOTE: NAE35s, NAE45s, and NCM45s have either a that encounter high inductive noise or radio interference.)
LONWORKS port or an FC Bus port, but not both.
The FC BUS port supports an N2 or an MS/TP Bus on NAEs
NAE35, NAE45, and NCM45 Series Network Controllers
and an N2 Bus (only) on NCMs.

Figure 7-1: Physical Features and Termination Descriptions for NAE35, NAE45, and NCM45 Models
45
NAE35/45
NCM45
Application
The NAE35 and NAE45 are Web-enabled, Ethernet-based supervisory devices that monitor and control networks
of field-level building automation devices, HVAC equipment and lighting.
The NCM45 is a supervisory controller that emulates the NCM350/361, yet uses the same hardware platform as
the NAE45. The NCM45 Series has two basic models: an N2 Bus model and a LONWORKS Network model. In this
document, NCM or NCM45 refers to either model.
NAE35/45
NCM45
Mounting
Controllers on page 15 for mounting guidelines and procedures.
Special Tools and Materials Needed
• 3 fasteners appropriate for the mounting surface (#8 screws - North America, M4 screws - Europe)
• 20 cm (8 in.) or longer piece of standard 35 mm (1.4 in.) DIN rail for DIN rail mount applications
• a small straight blade screwdriver for securing wires in the terminal blocks
See Locating and Installing HVAC Controllers and Sensors on page 13 and Related Documentation on page 52 for
references to mounting guidelines, considerations, and procedures.
Wiring
Table 7-1 on page 46 explains the power, network, and communication ports found on NAE35/45s, and NCM45s,
and provides some of the requirements and restrictions to be observed when connecting to the ports. See Related
Documentation on page 52 for references to additional information.
See Figure 7-1 on page 45 for wiring information and an example of the wiring for NAE35/45s, and NCM45s.
Table 7-1: NAE35/45, and NCM45 Terminal Block/Port Function, Ratings, Requirements, and Wire Cable
Types (Part 1 of 2)
Label Function
POWER 24 VAC, Class 2, Power Source 24 VAC, Class 2 16 to 20 AWG,
connection. 2-wire, shielded
Connect to a pluggable, keyed cable not required
3-position terminal block.
FC One optically isolated RS-485 N2 An N2 Bus trunk supports 22 AWG, stranded,
communications port: applications: 100 devices total and 50 3-wire, twisted cable.
• Supports either an N2 or MS/TP 9600 baud (only) per bus segment. Cable shield
trunk on NAE351x and NAE451x EOL termination at both recommended only
models. ends of each N2 bus in applications that
• Supports an N2 trunk only on segment is preferred. encounter high
NCM451x models. EOL termination using one inductive noise or
EOL terminated device radio frequency
Connect to a pluggable, keyed, interference.
4-position terminal block. somewhere on each N2
Note: The cable shield connection bus segment is
(SHD) on the FC port is not acceptable.
connected to earth ground. MS/TP An MS/TP Bus trunk 22-AWG, stranded,
applications: supports 100 devices total 3-wire, twisted cable,
9600 to 7680 and 50 per bus segment. cable shield
baud (Device limit may be lower required
when connecting TEC
controllers to bus.)
EOL termination at both
ends of each MS/TP bus
segment is required.

Table 7-1: NAE35/45, and NCM45 Terminal Block/Port Function, Ratings, Requirements, and Wire Cable
Types (Part 2 of 2)
Label Function
LON One LONWORKS communication FTT10 78 Kbps Supports up to 127 Refer to the NAE35/
NAE35/45
port. Supports LONWORKS and LN LONWORKS devices. NAE45 Installation
NCM45
Series devices. (LONWORKS port Instructions
available on NAE352x, NAE452x, 24-10050-6 for more
and NCM452x Type models only.) information.
Connect to a pluggable, keyed
3-position terminal block.
SERIAL A RS-232-C Serial ports with Standard Supports Refer to the NAE Null-Modem Serial
and 9-pin Sub-D Jacks standard baud Commissioning Guide cable with standard
SERIAL B NAEs have one or two Serial ports. rates (LIT-1201519) or 9-pin sub-D plugs
On NAEs: NCM45x0-2 Network
• RS232C A supports a direct Control Module
connection to a laptop or Commissioning Guide
computer, or to a VT100 terminal (LIT-12011176) for more
or VT100 terminal emulator. information.
• RS232C B supports an optional
user-supplied external modem.
NCMs have two Serial ports. On
NCMs:
• RS232C A/Port 3 supports
configured and unconfigured
Operator Workstation, printer,
modem, or operator terminal.
• RS232C B/Port 5 supports a
configured Operator
Workstation, printer, modem, OT,
or local network terminal.
Refer to the NCM45x0-2 Network
Control Module Commissioning
Guide (LIT-12011176) for more
information about these options.
USB A Two USB serial ports. Standard USB Support Refer to the NAE Standard USB
and connectors support an optional, standard USB Commissioning Guide interface cable
USB B user-supplied external modem. (LIT-1201519) for more
Note: The USB port on the information.
NCM4500 model is not used. Note: USBs are not used
on NCM45x0-2.
MODEM Optional internal modem available Up to 56k baud Refer to the NAE Standard telephone
on some model NAEs. Connects to Commissioning Guide cable with RJ-11
a dial-up connection phone line. (LIT-1201519) for more 6-pin modular plugs
Standard RJ-11 6-pin telephone jack information.
is needed. Note: Modems are not
Note: The NCM4500 model has no used on NCM45x0-2.
internal modem.
ETHERNET Ethernet IP network communication 10/100 Mb baud Refer to the NAE Standard Ethernet
connection. Connects NAE to Commissioning Guide patch with RJ-45
Metasys network. RJ-45 8-pin jack is (LIT-1201519) or 8-pin modular plugs
needed. NCM45x0-2 Network
Control Module
Commissioning Guide
(LIT-12011176) for more
information.
NAE35, NAE45, and NCM45 Series Network Controllers: Section 7 47

Wiring the NAE35/45 and NCM45
Mount the NAE35/45 and NCM45 securely before wiring the NAE35/45 and NCM45. See the General Mounting
Guidelines section for mounting information, considerations, and procedures. Follow these guidelines when wiring
an NAE35/45 and NCM45:
NAE35/45
NCM45
To wire the NAE35/45 and NCM45:

FC Bus Wiring
1. Connect the Ethernet communication cable to the RJ-45
SHLD
8-pin Ethernet port shown in Figure 7-1 on page 45.
COM
+
2. For N2 or FC Bus connections, connect the bus wires to
-
the removable 4-terminal FC Bus plug as shown in FC Bus
Terminal
Figure 7-2 on page 48. Block
Note: If the NAE35/45 and NCM45 is connected to an N2
Bus or an FC Bus, set the EOL switch to the proper
position. See Setting the EOL Switch on page 49. FC Bus
Terminal Block
3. For LONWORKS Network connections, connect the wires Plug
from the network trunk to the removable 3-terminal plug as
shown in Figure 7-2 on page 48.
4. If required, connect the telephone line to the modem port
or connect an external modem to the RS-232 B port or the N2 Applications = REF N2- N2+
USB modem port. MS/TP Applications = COM FC- FC+
5. Make connections to the RS-232 serial ports (if LONWORKS Wiring

necessary).
6. Connect the 24 VAC supply power wires from the LONWORKS
LON
transformer to the removable 3-terminal plug as shown in Terminal Block
Figure 7-2 on page 48. The middle terminal is not used.
Note: Power supply wire colors may be different on
transformers not manufactured by Johnson Controls. If this
LONWORKS
is the case, follow the transformer manufacturer’s Terminal Block
instructions or the project installation drawings.
SHD
Plug
A
B
Note: The 24 VAC power should be connected to all
Wires from
network devices so transformer phasing is uniform across LONWORKS
the devices. Powering devices with uniform 24 VAC supply Trunk
power phasing reduces noise, interference, and ground- LONWORKS wires are not polarity sensitive.
loop problems. The NAE NCM does not require an earth-
ground connection. 24 VAC Power Supply Wiring
Setup and Adjustments

NAE
Data Protection Battery Power Terminal Block
The NAE35/45 and NCM45 ships with the data protection 24V~
battery installed and connected. Do not disconnect the battery
NAE45 Power
for any reason other than to replace a defective battery. The Terminal Block
24 VAC supply power to the NAE35/45 and NCM45 charges Plug
COM
HOT
the data protection battery. At initial startup, the battery may Wires from
Johnson Controls
require a charging period of at least 4 hours before it supports 24 VAC Class 2
data protection if power fails. Maximum protection (up to three Power Transformer
FIG:NAE_Wrng
consecutive power failures without recharging time) requires a Brown Wire Orange Wire
15-hour charging period. (COM) (24 VAC)
Figure 7-2: NAE Wiring

The data protection battery slowly loses charge when 24 VAC power is removed from the NAE35/45 and NCM45. If
the battery completely loses charge, the NAE35/45 and NCM45 real-time clock stops.
Whenever an NAE35/45 and NCM45 is disconnected from 24 VAC power for over 30 days, ensure that the real-
time clock is set properly and that the NAE35/45 and NCM45 is powered long enough to recharge the data
protection battery.
Powering On the NAE35/45 and NCM45
NAE35/45
NCM45
After applying 24 VAC power, the NAE35/45 and NCM45 requires up to 3 minutes to start up and become
operational. See LED Test Sequence at Startup for NAE on page 49.
Startup is complete and the NAE35/45 and NCM45 is operational when the (green) RUN LED is On Steady and the
(red) FAULT LED is Off (Figure 7-3 on page 49).
IMPORTANT: Wait for the NAE to complete the start-up sequence and the RUN LED to go On Steady before
initiating any other action on the NAE. If you are installing an NCM4500 that has no database (fresh from the
factory), the RUN LED blinks and does not go On Steady.
Disconnecting Power from the NAE35/45 and NCM45

When 24 VAC supply power to an NAE35/45 and NCM45 is disconnected or lost, the NAE35/45 and NCM45 is
non-operational, but the POWER LED (Figure 7-3 on page 49) remains On and the data protection battery
continues to power the NAE35/45 and NCM45 for several (1 to 5) minutes while volatile data is backed up in
nonvolatile memory. The RUN LED goes Off when data backup and shutdown are complete.
IMPORTANT: The data protection battery must be installed and charged before disconnecting the 24 VAC
supply power.
Setting the EOL Switch

See EOL Termination on the MS/TP Bus on page 81 and EOL Termination Across the N2 Bus on page 179 for
Addressing an NAE35/NAE45/NCM45
Assign the NAE/NCM Computer Name (host name) and the IP address in the Metasys UI (software) via a laptop
computer or desktop computer. The Metasys system automatically assigns the appropriate device address for the
NAE on the FC Bus or provides identification for the NCM on the N2 Bus. Refer to the NAE Commissioning Guide
(LIT-1201519) for more information on the NAE Computer Name and IP address. See Related Documentation on
page 52.
The NAE35/45 and NCM45 models have up to 11 LEDs POWER BAT FAULT
FAULT ETHERNET
(depending on the model) to indicate power and
NAE45_LED-STATUS
10 LINK
network communication status. Figure 7-3 on page 49
FC BUS 100 LINK
and Figure 7-4 on page 49 shows the LEDs. Table 7-2
MODEM TX RUN
on page 50 describes the LED indications.
MODEM RX PEER COM
Note: Some of the LEDs shown in Figure 7-3 on
page 49 are not used or displayed on some NAE Figure 7-3: NAE35/NAE45 LED Designations
models.
LED Test Sequence at Startup for NAE
NCM4510-2 (N2) NCM4520-2 (LON)
During startup, the NAE automatically initiates an LED
test to verify the operational status of the LEDs. POWER BATT FAULT POWER BATT FAULT
Immediately after connecting supply power, the FAULT ETHERNET FAULT ETHERNET
following LED lighting sequence occurs: 10 LINK 10 LINK
FC BUS 100 LINK LON 100 LINK
1. The POWER, BAT FAULT, 10 LINK, FAULT, RUN,
RUN RUN
FIG:NCM_LED
and PEER COM LEDs turn On, indicating that the

PEER COM PEER COM
OS is booting up. (After 2 seconds, the LEDs may
change states depending on site-specific network
activity.) Figure 7-4: NCM LED Designations

2. The BAT FAULT, PEER COM, and FAULT LEDs shut Off. The RUN LED flashes to indicate that the NAE35/45
and NCM45 software is loading.
3. The LEDs display the operational status of the NAE35/45 and NCM45. When the RUN LED goes On Steady,
startup is complete, and the NAE35/45 and NCM45 is operational.
The total time to start up the NAE35/45 and NCM45 depends on the size of the database and can take several
minutes.
NAE35/45
NCM45
Refer to the NAE Commissioning Guide (LIT-1201519) for additional information on troubleshooting an NAE.
Refer to the NCM Commissioning Guide (LIT-12011176) for additional information on troubleshooting an NCM.
LED Test Sequence at Startup for NCM45
Immediately after applying power to the NCM, the following LED lighting sequence occurs:
1. The POWER, FAULT, BATT FAULT, 10 LINK, RUN, and PEER COM LEDs turn On for 2 seconds, indicating
that these LEDs are operational.
2. The BATT FAULT LED shuts Off and the POWER, FAULT, PEER COM, and RUN LEDs remain On. The 10
LINK or 100 LINK LED turns On to indicate the speed of the connected network.
3. After a few minutes, all LEDs except POWER turn Off for about 2 seconds as the LED software driver is
initialized.
4. Then, the RUN LED and the 10 LINK LED turn On again. The RUN LED blinks to indicate that the NCM
software is starting up. The ETHERNET LED blinks to indicate network traffic.
5. Lastly, the RUN LED goes On Steady to indicate startup is complete. Also, the POWER and the 10 LINK or 100
LINK LEDS remain On, and the ETHERNET LED and FC Bus or LON LED blink.
Table 7-2: NAE35/45 and NCM45 LED Designations, Normal Status, and Descriptions (Part 1 of 2)
LED Designation Normal Descriptions/Other Conditions
Status
Off Steady = Unit is shut down.
general traffic (may not be for the NAE35/45 and NCM45).
10/LINK (Green) On Steady On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 10 Mbps.
100/LINK (Green) On Steady On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 100 Mbps.
FC BUS (Green) Flicker Flicker = Normal communications; the FC Bus is transmitting and receiving
data. Flickers are generally in sync with data transmission, but should not be
used to indicate specific transmission times.
Off Steady = No field controllers are defined to FC Bus in the NAE35/45 and
NCM45.
PEER COM (Green) Varies (see Flicker = Data traffic between NAE35/45 and NCM45 devices. For an NAE that
next column) is not a Site Director, this LED indicates regular heartbeat communications with
the Site Director. For a Site Director NAE, flashes are more frequent and
indicate heartbeat communications from all other NAE devices on the site. For
a single NAE on a network without an ADS, there is no flicker.

Table 7-2: NAE35/45 and NCM45 LED Designations, Normal Status, and Descriptions (Part 2 of 2)
Status
RUN (Green) On Steady On Steady = NAE35/45 and NCM45 software is running.
On 1 second, Off 1 second = NAE35/45 and NCM45 software is in startup
mode.
NAE35/45
On 0.5 seconds, Off 0.5 seconds = NAE35/45 and NCM45 software is shutting
NCM45
down.
Off Steady = Operating system is shutting down or software is not running.
The NCM4500 is never just Off.
BAT FAULT (Red) Off Steady On Steady = Battery defective. Flicker = Data Protection Battery is not
connected. Connect or install battery.
FAULT (Red) Off Steady On Steady = General Fault. Fault conditions are user configurable in software.
Preconfigured fault conditions include excessive Central Processing Unit (CPU)
flash or memory use, excessive PWB temperature.
MODEM RX Flicker Flicker = NAE (only) modem is connected and receiving data.
MODEM TX Flicker Flicker = NAE (only) modem is connected and transmitting data.
110
4.3 Mounting Data Protection Battery 24 VAC
Clip Compartment Power Terminal
270
10.6
62
2.5
131
5.2 RJ-11 6-Pin
Field Controller
ET SY R
Service Port
210
8.3
NAE45_FRONT_DIMS
USB
RJ-11 6-Pin Mounting Port End-of-Line FC Bus
System Status Modem Clip RJ-45 8-Pin
RS-232 Mounting Switch (N2 Bus or
Light-Emitting Diodes Port Serial Port Ethernet Clip FC Bus
(LEDs) Port Terminal)
350
13.8
Figure 7-5: Dimensions and Physical Features of an NAE4511-2 Model,

(Representative of the NAE35, NAE45, and NCM45 Series Devices) mm (in.)
Repair Information
If you replace an NAE on a site with a new NAE for any reason or add a new NAE to a site, you must update the
site registration to ensure that the new NAE is recognized and able to communicate in the site.
Refer to the Replacing an NAE section of the NAE Commissioning Guide (LIT-1201519) for information on
removing an NAE from service and configuring a replacement NAE to communicate in a Metasys system extended
architecture site.

NAE Comparison Table
Table 7-3: Comparison of Features for NAE Models
Feature NAE35 NAE45 NAE55 NAE85
Number of N2 or MS/TP Trunks 1 1 2 Not Available
Number of N2 or MS/TP Devices per 50 100 100 Not Available
Trunk
NAE35/45
NCM45
Maximum Number of Objects 2,500 2,500 5,000 25,0001

Model with Internal Modem Available Available Available Not Available
RS-232C Serial Ports 1 or 2 1 or 2 2 Not Available
RS-485 Ports 1 1 2 2 or 3
USB Serial Ports Available 1 2 Not Available
Ethernet Ports 1 1 1 2
LONWORKS Network Support Available (64) Available (127) Available (255) Not Available
(Number of Devices)
Smoke Control Applications Not Available Not Available Available Not Available
N2 Tunneling Over Ethernet Not Available Not Available Available Not Available
MS/TP Tunneling Over Ethernet Available Available Available Not Available
1. Standard is 10,000 objects; 15,000 object upgrade available.
Table 7-4: Documents Related to NAE35s, NAE45s, and NCM45s
Daily Operation of the Metasys System Extended Metasys system Help On the Help menu,
Architecture, Navigating the UI, Monitoring, and select Metasys
or LIT-1201793
Installation Considerations and Guidelines, NAE35/NAE45 Installation Instructions Part No.
Mounting, Wiring, and Starting an NAE35/NAE45 24-10050-6
Installation Considerations and Guidelines, NCM45x0-2 Series Network Control Module Part No.
Mounting, Wiring, and Starting an NCM45 Installation Instructions 24-10249-18
Connecting to, Configuring, Browsing, NAE Commissioning Guide LIT-1201519
Commissioning, and Addressing an NAE
Connecting to, Configuring, Commissioning, NCM45x0-2 Network Control Module LIT-12011176
and Addressing an NCM4500 Commissioning Guide
Integrating N2 Devices into the Metasys System N2 Integration with the NAE Technical Bulletin LIT-1201683
Integrating BACnet Devices to the Metasys BACnet System Integration with NAE Technical LIT-1201531
Migrating N1 Networks to the Metasys System N1 Network Migration with NIE Technical LIT-1201535
Extended Architecture Bulletin
Integrating LONWORKS Devices to the Metasys LONWORKS Network Integration with NAE LIT-1201668
Dialing into Metasys System Extended Metasys System Extended Architecture Direct LIT-1201639
Note

Model Information
Table 7-5: NAE35 Model Descriptions
Product Code Description
Number
MS-NAE35xx-xxx NAE35 Network Automation Engines: Requires a 24 VAC power supply. Each model includes
(Base features of one RS-232-C serial port, one USB serial port, one Ethernet port, and an MS-BAT1020-0 Data
NAE35/45
each NAE35) Protection Battery.
NCM45
MS-NAE3510-2 Supports one FC trunk (RS-485 port); includes an additional RS-232-C serial port for optional
external modem. Up to 50 devices are supported on the FC trunk.
MS-NAE3510-2U1 Supports one N2 or BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunk; includes an additional RS-232-C serial port for
optional external modem; supports up to 50 devices on the RS-485 port.
MS-NAE3511-2 Supports one FC trunk (RS-485 port); includes an internal modem. Up to 50 devices are supported
on the FC trunk.
MS-NAE3514-2 Supports one FC trunk (RS-485 port); includes Basic Access support and an additional RS-232-C
serial port for optional external modem. Up to 50 devices are supported on the FC trunk.
MS-NAE3515-2 Supports one FC trunk (RS-485 port); includes Basic Access support and an internal modem. Up to
50 devices are supported on the FC trunk.
MS-NAE3520-2 Supports one LONWORKS trunk, includes an additional RS-232-C serial port for optional external
modem. Supports up to 64 devices on the LONWORKS port.
MS-NAE3520-2U1 Supports one LONWORKS trunk, includes an additional RS-232-C serial port for optional external
modem. Supports up to 64 devices on the LONWORKS port.
MS-NAE3521-2 Supports one LONWORKS trunk, includes an internal modem. Supports up to 64 devices on the
LONWORKS port.
MS-NAE3524-2 Supports one LONWORKS trunk, features Basic Access support, includes an additional RS-232-C
serial port for optional external modem. Supports up to 64 devices on the LONWORKS port.
MS-NAE3525-2 Supports one LONWORKS trunk, features Basic Access support, and includes an internal modem.
Supports up to 64 devices on the LONWORKS port.
1. This model is UL Listed, File S4977, UUKL 864 9th Edition Smoke Control Equipment.
Table 7-6: NAE45 Model Descriptions

Number
MS-NAE45xx-1xx NAE45 Network Automation Engines: Requires a 24 VAC power supply. Each model includes
(Base features of one RS-232-C serial port, one USB serial port, one Ethernet port, and an MS-BAT1020-0 Data
each NAE45) Protection Battery.
MS-NAE4510-2 Supports one FC trunk (RS-485 port); includes an additional RS-232-C serial port for optional
external modem. Up to 100 devices are supported on the FC trunk.
MS-NAE4510-2U1 Supports one N2 or BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunk; includes an additional RS-232-C serial port for
optional external modem; supports up to 100 devices on the N2 or BACnet MS/TP trunk.
MS-NAE4511-2 Supports one FC trunk (RS-485 port); includes an internal modem. Up to 100 devices are supported
on the FC trunk.
MS-NAE4520-2 Includes a LONWORKS port and supports one LONWORKS trunk; includes an additional RS-232-C
serial port for optional external modem. Up to 127 devices are supported on the LONWORKS port.
MS-NAE4520-2U1 Supports one LONWORKS trunk, includes an additional RS-232-C serial port for optional external
modem; supports up to 127 devices on the LONWORKS port.
MS-NAE4521-2 Includes a LONWORKS port and supports one LONWORKS trunk; includes an internal modem. Up to
127 devices are supported on the LONWORKS port.
1. This model is UL Listed, File S4977, UUKL 864 9th Edition Smoke Control Equipment.

Table 7-7: NCM45 Model Descriptions
MS-NCM45x0-2 (Base NCM Network Control Module: Requires a 24 VAC power supply. Each model includes
features of each two RS-232-C serial ports, one USB serial port (unused), one Ethernet port, and an
NCM45x0) MS-BAT1020-0 Data Protection Battery.
MS-NCM4510-2 Supports one N2 trunk (RS-485 port). Up to 100 devices (60 to 200 TC-9100s) are supported on
the N2 trunk when a repeater is used.
NAE35/45
NCM45
MS-NCM4520-2 Includes a LONWORKS port and supports one LONWORKS trunk. Up to 127 devices are
supported on the LONWORKS port.
Table 7-8: MS-NAE3500, NAE4500, and NCM4500
(Europe), at 50/60 Hz (20 VAC minimum to 30 VAC max.)
Ambient Operating Temperature 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Ambient Operating Conditions 10 to 90% RH, 30°C (86°F) maximum dew point
Ambient Storage Temperature -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F)
Ambient Storage Conditions 5 to 95% RH, 30°C (86°F) maximum dew point
Data Protection Battery Supports data protection on power failure. Rechargeable NiMH battery: 3.6 VDC
500 mAh, with typical life of 5 to 7 years at 21°C (70°F); Product Code Number:
MS-BAT1020-0
Network and Serial Interfaces One Ethernet port; 10/100 MB; 8-pin RJ-45 connector
One optically isolated RS-485 port; 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k baud (depending on
protocol); pluggable, keyed 4-position terminal block (FC Bus available on NAE351x-1,
NAE451x-1, and NCM4510-x models only.)
One LONWORKS port; FTT10 78 Kbps; pluggable, keyed 3-position terminal block
(LONWORKS port available on NAE352x-x, NAE452x, and NCM4520 models only.)
One RS-232-C serial port with standard 9-pin sub-D connector that supports standard
baud rates.
A second serial port, on models without an internal modem, that supports an optional,
user-supplied external modem. (Not available on NCM4500 models.)
One USB serial port with standard USB connector that supports an optional,
user-supplied external modem (NCM4500 models have a second RS232 port but it is
used for NT/OT/OWS connection purposes.)
Option: One telephone port for internal modem; up to 56 Kbps; 6-pin RJ-11 connector
(NAE models with an optional internal modem have one RS-232-C serial port only;
NCM4500 models do not have a telephone port.)
Housing Plastic housing material: ABS + polycarbonate UL94-5VB
Protection: IP20 (IEC 60529)
Equipment; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
UL Listed, File S4977, UUKL 864 - 9th Edition, Smoke Control Equipment
(MS-NAE35x0-2U and MS-NAE45x0-2U models only)
Europe: CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, in accordance with
EN 61000-6-3 (2001) Generic Emission Standard for Residential and Light Industry and
EN 61000-6-2 (2001) Generic Immunity Standard for Heavy Industrial Environment
BACnet International: BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) 135-2004 Listed BACnet
Building Controller (B-BC)

Binary Output, Configurable Output, and
Analog Output Terminal Blocks are located RJ-Style 6-Pin Modular Bus Ports
on the top side of NCE. See Wiring the FC Bus port (MS/TP models only) connects to a
Input/Output Points.
Code No. LIT-410009

Wireless Commissioning Converter (MS-BTCVT-0).
LED Status Indicators SA Bus port connects to a NS network sensor,
The LED indicators vary depending a DIS1710 Local Controller Display, or a 24 VAC Class 2 Supply Power
on the NCE model. See LED Status Wireless Commissioning Converter (MS-BTCVT-0). Terminal Block is located on
Indicators. the top side of the NCE.

NCE Reset Switch Compartment
Display Screen (on specified models)
displays NCE menus and commands.
Display Navigation Keypad

is used to navigate the display menus
and initiate commands.
NCE
FC BUS
SA BUS
Cover Screw
NCE25 Series Network Controllers
SA BUS FC BUS
SA
FC
COM
EOL
COM
PWR
SHLD
O FC Bus Terminal Block

N
connects NCE to an N2 Bus

or FC Bus segment.
Standard
Ethernet Port USB Port
Modem Jack
RJ-45 8-pin modular jack
RJ-style 6-pin modular jack, End-of-Line Termination Switch sets
only on NCE models with connects the NCE to the
the NCE as an EOL terminating device.
IP Network.
optional internal modems. Set the EOL switch according to the NCE
Universal Input and Binary Input position on the N2 or FC Bus segment.
RS-232 Serial Port Terminal Blocks are located on the
bottom side of the NCE. See Wiring
SA Bus Terminal Block
the Input/Output Points.
connects the NCE field controller
to the SA Bus.
Figure 8-1: Physical Features and Termination Descriptions for NCE25 Model
FIG_NCE25_FEATURS
NOTE: NCE25 models have either a FC Bus terminal block or a LONWORKS terminal block, but not both. Depending on the model, an FC Bus terminal block supports
either an N2 Bus or an MS/TP FC Bus. (All NCE25 models have an SA Bus terminal block.)

55
NCE25
Application
The Metasys NCE 25 Series controllers combine the network supervisor capabilities and IP network connectivity of
a Metasys NCE with the I/O point connectivity and direct digital control capabilities of a Metasys FEC. NCE25
Series controllers provide a cost-effective solution designed for central plant applications and large built-up air
handlers.
Mounting
Controllers on page 15 for mounting guidelines and procedures.
Special Tools and Materials Needed
• 3 fasteners appropriate for the mounting surface (#8 screws - North America, M4 screws - Europe)
NCE25
• 20 cm (8 in.) or longer piece of standard 35 mm (1.4 in.) DIN rail for DIN rail mount applications
• a small straight blade screwdriver for securing wires in the terminal blocks
See Locating and Installing HVAC Controllers and Sensors on page 13 and Related Documentation on page 64 for
references to mounting guidelines, considerations, and procedures.
Wiring
Table 8-1 on page 56 provides terminal designations, information, ratings, requirements, and cable
recommendations for wiring the NCE25 I/O points and communications bus terminals.
Table 8-1: NCE Terminal Wiring (Part 1 of 3)
Terminal Terminal Function and Electrical Ratings/Requirements Recommended
Block Label Cable Type
Universal IN +15 V Provides 15 VDC power for active devices connected to the 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire
Universal IN terminal blocks (3-wire connection). twisted, non-shielded
NCE25 Series models support 100 mA total current for all UIs. cable for runs of <30 m
(90 ft)
IN n Analog Input, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Accepts a 0-10 VDC input signal. twisted, non-shielded
10 VDC maximum input voltage cable for runs of <30 m
(90 ft)
Internal 75k ohm Pulldown
Analog Input, Current Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Accepts a 4-20 mA input signal twisted, non-shielded
For current sensing applications, the NCE25 controller does not cable for runs of <30 m
provide a jumper to close the current loop when the controller is (90 ft)
powered off.
Analog Input, Resistive Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Accepts 0-600k ohm input signal. twisted, non-shielded
Internal 12 V, 15k ohm pullup cable for runs of <30 m
(90 ft)
RTD (1k Nickel, 1k Platinum, A99B
Silicon Temperature Sensor)
NTC Sensor (10k Type L, 2.252k Type 2)
Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
1.0 second minimum pulse width (0.5 Hz at 50% duty cycle) twisted, non-shielded
(90 ft)
ICOM n The signal common for all Universal IN terminals; isolated from all 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire
other terminal commons. twisted, non-shielded
cable for runs of <30 m
(90 ft)

Binary IN IN n Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
0.01 second minimum pulse width (50 Hz at 50% duty cycle) twisted, non-shielded
(90 ft)
Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode
0.01 second minimum pulse width (50 Hz at 50% duty cycle)
Internal 8 V, 3k ohm pullup
ICOM n The signal common for all Binary IN terminals; isolated from all
other terminal commons, excluding CO terminal commons that
NCE25
are configured as AOs.
Analog OUT OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Sources 0-10 VDC output voltage twisted, non-shielded
External 1k ohm minimum load required cable for runs of <30 m
(90 ft)
10 VDC maximum output voltage
10 mA maximum output current
Analog Output, Current Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Sources 4-20 mA output current twisted, non-shielded
External 300 ohm maximum load required cable for runs of <30 m
(90 ft)
OCOM n The signal common for Analog OUT terminals; isolated from all 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
other terminal commons. twisted, non-shielded
cable for runs of <30 m
(90 ft)
Binary OUT OUT n Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
(Jumper Set Connects OUT to OCOM when activated. twisted, non-shielded
to External) 30 VAC maximum output voltage cable for runs of <30 m
(90 ft)
0.5 A maximum output current
40 mA minimum load current
OCOM n The signal common for Binary OUT terminals; isolated from all
other terminal commons, including BO terminal commons.
Binary OUT OUT n Sources 24 VAC Class 2 Power (Hot) 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
(Jumper Set OCOM n Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac twisted, non-shielded
to Internal) cable for runs of <30 m
Connects OCOM to 24 VAC Power (Com) when activated
(90 ft)
(high-side switching).
30 VAC maximum output voltage
Configurable OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
OUT Sources 0-10 VDC twisted, non-shielded
External 1k ohm minimum load required cable for runs of <30 m
(90 ft)
Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Connects OUT to OCOM when activated. twisted, non-shielded
30 VAC maximum output voltage cable for runs of <30 m
(90 ft)
OCOM n Analog Output: The signal common for all analog configured CO 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
terminals; isolated from all other terminal commons, excluding BI twisted, non-shielded
terminal commons. cable for runs of <30 m
Binary Output: The signal common for binary configured CO (90 ft)
terminals; isolated from all other terminal commons, including CO
terminal commons.
NCE25 Series Network Controllers: Section 8 57

SA Bus1, 2 SA BUS Provides SA Bus network communication and 15 VDC power. 24 AWG 3-pair CAT 3
(RJ-12 RJ-12 6-position modular connector. Cable <30.5 m (<100 ft)
Modular
Jack)
SA Bus1, 2 + Provides SA Bus network communication. Daisy-chained
(Terminal - 366 m (1,200 ft)
Block) COM Provides reference for network communication bus and 15 VDC maximum length
source power. 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2 (18
SA PWR Sources 15 VDC power for devices on the SA Bus. to 24 AWG)
NCE25
(22 AWG
Recommended)
FC Bus2, 3 FC Bus Provides FC Bus communication network. 24 AWG 3-pair CAT 3
(RJ-12 Cable <30.5 m (100 ft)
Modular
Jack)
FC Bus2 + Provides FC Bus communication network. Daisy-chained
(Terminal - 1,524 m (5,000 ft)
Block) COM maximum length
SHLD Provides an optional shield connection. 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2 (18
to 24 AWG)
(22 AWG
Recommended)
24~ Power HOT AC Supply Input, Supply 20-30 VAC (Nominal 24 VAC) 18 AWG
COM The 24~ Power common; isolated from all other terminal
commons.
1. The SA Bus terminals and the RJ-style modular Sensor Port are connected internally.
2. The recommended cable type provides the best bus performance. See the SA Bus Rules and Specifications on page 77
and FC Bus Rules and Specifications on page 75 sections for recommended cable lengths. Refer to the MS/TP
Communications Bus Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011034) for information on alternative cable sizes and lengths that can be
used to wire an FC Bus.
3. FC Bus RJ-12 Modular Jack port is found on MS-NCE256x-xxx models only.
Wiring the NCE25

Mount the NCE25 securely before wiring the NCE25. See Mounting Metasys System Controllers on page 15 for
mounting information, considerations, and procedures. Use the following guidelines when wiring an NCE25:

To wire the NCE25:
FC Bus Wiring
1. Connect the Ethernet communication cable to the RJ-45
SHLD
8-pin Ethernet port shown in Figure 8-1 on page 55.
COM
2. For N2 or FC Bus connections, connect the bus wires to
+
-
the removable 4-terminal FC Bus plug as shown in FC Bus
Figure 8-2 on page 59. Terminal
Block
Note: If the NCE25 is connected to an N2 Bus or an FC
Bus, set the EOL switch to the proper position. See Setting
the EOL Switch on page 62.
FC Bus
3. For LONWORKS Network connections, connect the wires Terminal Block
NCE25
from the network trunk to the removable 3-terminal plug as Plug
4. If required, connect the telephone line to the modem port
or connect an external modem to the RS-232 B port or the
USB modem port. N2 Applications = REF N2- N2+
5. Make connections to the RS-232 serial ports (if MS/TP Applications = COM FC- FC+
necessary).
LONWORKS Wiring
6. Connect the 24 VAC supply power wires from the
transformer to the removable 3-terminal plug as shown in
Figure 8-2 on page 59. The middle terminal is not used.
LONWORKS
LON
Note: Power supply wire colors may be different on Terminal Block
transformers not manufactured by Johnson Controls. If this
is the case, follow the transformer’s manufacturer
instructions or the project installation drawings.
Note: The 24 VAC power should be connected to all
network devices so transformer phasing is uniform across LONWORKS
Terminal Block
the devices. Powering devices with uniform 24 VAC supply
SHD
Plug
B
power phasing reduces noise, interference, and ground-
loop problems. The NCE does not require an earth-ground Wires from
connection. LONWORKS
Trunk
LONWORKS wires are not polarity sensitive.
24 VAC Power Supply Wiring
NCE25 Power
Terminal Block
24V~
NAE25 Power
Terminal Block
Plug
COM
HOT
Wires from
Johnson Controls
24 VAC Class 2
Power Transformer
FIG:NCE_Wrng
Brown Wire Orange Wire

(COM) (24 VAC)
Figure 8-2: NCE Wiring

Wiring Input and Output Terminals
NCE25 Series models support up to 33 hardwire I/O points, including:
• 7 BO points
• 4 CO points
• 4 AO points
• 8 BI points
• 10 UI points
See Figure 8-3 on page 60, Figure 8-4 on page 60, and Table 8-1 on page 56 for more information.
The I/O points are designed for multiple types of input or output, and most of the points are configured in the CCT
NCE25
software.
Position the jumpers next to the BO terminals to provide either internal 24 VAC power to the BO load or act as a
switch for an externally powered BO. Each NCE25 BO wired in an application must have the jumpers positioned
properly for the application. See Figure 8-3 on page 60.
FIG: NCE_OUTPOINTS
Binary Output 2 jumpers positioned Binary Outputs are Analog Outputs can be defined as:
for an Internal source of power. 24 VAC Triac Outputs Voltage Analog Outputs (0-10 VDC)
Current Analog Outputs (4-20 mA)
Back of NCE (Flush to Mounting Surface)
BO TYP
OUT12
OCOM12
OUT13
OCOM13
OUT14
OCOM14
OUT15
OCOM15
OUT8
OCOM8
OUT9
OCOM9
OUT10
OCOM10
OUT11
OCOM11
COM
HOT
EXT INT
BINARY CONFIGURABLE ANALOG 24V~
Front of NCE
Binary Output 4 jumpers positioned 24 VAC, Class 2 Supply Power
for an External source of power. Terminal Block (Center terminal not used.)
Required jumper positions for setting Configurable Outputs can be defined as:
a Binary Output's power source. Voltage Analog Outputs (0-10 VDC)
Binary Outputs (24 VAC Triac)
Figure 8-3: NCE25 Series Output Terminal Blocks, Binary Output Jumpers, and
Supply Power Terminal Block as Viewed from the Top of an NCE25
Universal Inputs can be defined as:
FIG: NCE_INPOINTS
Voltage Analog Inputs (0-10 VDC)
Current Analog Inputs (4-20 mA)
Resistive Analog Inputs:
0-2k ohm Binary Inputs can be defined as:
RTD: 1k Nickel, 1k Platinum, or A99B SI Dry Contact Maintained
NTC: 10k Type L or 2.225k Type 2 Pulse Counter Mode (50 Hz at 50% Duty Cycle)
Dry Contact Binary Inputs
Front of NCE
UNIVERSAL BINARY
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
ICOM
IN13
IN17
IN14
IN15
IN18
IN11
IN12
IN16
14
18
12
13
16
17
11
15
Back of NCE (Flush to Mounting Surface)
Figure 8-4: Universal Input and Binary Input Terminal Blocks as Viewed from the Bottom of an NCE25

Termination Details
A set of Johnson Controls termination details is provided for each Johnson Controls project. These drawings
provide details for wiring inputs and outputs to a particular controller. See Table 8-2 on page 61 and the figures it
references for IOM termination details.
Table 8-2: IOM Termination Detail Matrix
Type of Input/Output Type Detail See Termination Detail
0-10 VDC Output to Actuator (External Source) CO or AO F244 Figure 12-8 on page 108
0-10 VDC Output to Actuator (Internal Source) CO or AO F264 Figure 12-8 on page 108
0-20 mA Output to Actuator (External Source) AO F254 Figure 12-8 on page 108
0-20 mA Output to Actuator (Internal Source) AO F274 Figure 12-8 on page 108
NCE25
24 VAC Binary Output (Switch High, External Source) BO F501 Figure 12-10 on page 110
24 VAC Binary Output (Switch Low, External Source) BO F401 Figure 12-10 on page 110
24 VAC Triac Output (Switch High, External Source) CO or AO F901 Figure 12-9 on page 109
24 VAC Triac Output (Switch Low, External Source) CO or AO F801 Figure 12-9 on page 109
Current Output (Analog Output) AO F202 Figure 12-7 on page 107
Current Input - External Source (in Loop) UI F104 Figure 12-6 on page 106
Current Input - External Source (Isolated) UI F105 Figure 12-6 on page 106
Current Input - Internal Source (2-wire) UI F106 Figure 12-7 on page 107
Dry Contact (Binary Input) UI or BI F301 Figure 12-7 on page 107
Feedback from EPP-1000 UI F116 Figure 12-7 on page 107
Incremental Control to Actuator (Switch High, External Source) BO F562 Figure 12-10 on page 110
Incremental Control to Actuator (Switch Low, External Source) BO F462 Figure 12-10 on page 110
Incremental Control to Actuator (Switch High, External Source) CO or AO F962 Figure 12-9 on page 109
Incremental Control to Actuator (Switch Low, External Source) CO or AO F862 Figure 12-9 on page 109
Network Stat with Phone Jack (Fixed Address = 199) SA Bus NS101 Figure 12-11 on page 111
Network Stat with Terminals Addressable SA Bus NS102 Figure 12-11 on page 111
Network Stat with Terminals (Fixed Address = 199) SA Bus NS103 Figure 12-11 on page 111
Temperature Sensor UI F131 Figure 12-6 on page 106
Voltage (Analog Output) CO or AO F201 Figure 12-7 on page 107
Voltage Input - External Source UI F101 Figure 12-6 on page 106
Voltage Input - Internal Source UI F102 Figure 12-6 on page 106
Voltage Input (Self-Powered) UI F103 Figure 12-6 on page 106

The NCE25 ships with the data protection battery installed and connected. Do not disconnect the battery for any
reason other than to replace a defective battery. The 24 VAC supply power to the NCE25 charges the data
protection battery. At initial startup, the battery may require a charging period of at least 4 hours before it supports
data protection if power fails. Maximum protection (up to three consecutive power failures without recharging time)
requires a 15-hour charging period.
The data protection battery slowly loses charge when 24 VAC power is removed from the NCE25. If the battery
completely loses charge, the NCE25 real-time clock stops.
Whenever an NCE25 is disconnected from 24 VAC power for over 30 days, ensure that the real-time clock is set
properly and that the NCE25 is powered long enough to recharge the data protection battery.
Powering On the NCE25
After applying 24 VAC power, the NCE25 requires up to 3 minutes to start up and become operational. See LED
Test Sequence at Startup for NCE on page 62.

Startup is complete and the NCE25 is operational when the (green) RUN LED is On Steady and the (red) FAULT
LED is Off (Figure 8-5 on page 62).
IMPORTANT: Wait for the NCE to complete the start-up sequence and the RUN LED to go On Steady before
initiating any other action on the NCE.
Disconnecting Power from the NCE25

When 24 VAC supply power to an NCE25 is disconnected or lost, the NCE25 is not operational, but the POWER
LED (Figure 8-5 on page 62) remains On and the data protection battery continues to power the NCE25 for several
(1 to 5) minutes while volatile data is backed up in nonvolatile memory. The RUN LED goes Off when data backup
and shutdown are complete.
NCE25
IMPORTANT: The data protection battery must be installed and charged before disconnecting the 24 VAC
supply power.
Setting the EOL Switch

See EOL Termination on the MS/TP Bus on page 81 and EOL Termination Across the N2 Bus on page 179 for
Setting Device Addresses
The NCE25 is always the SA Bus supervisor and, therefore, always has a fixed device address of 0 on the SA Bus.
The supervisory controller on NCE25 models that support an (MS/TP) FC Bus is always an FC Bus supervisor and
has a fixed device address of 0 on the FC Bus. The field controllers in all the NCE25 models have fixed device
addresses of 4 on the NCE FC Bus.
Refer to the MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011034) for more information on device
addresses on (MS/TP) FC Buses and SA Buses.
NCE25 models that support an N2 Bus are always bus supervisors on the N2 Bus, and they do not require a user
assigned device address to communicate on the N2 Bus.
NCE25 models that support a LONWORKS network trunk have a unique LONWORKS address that is factory-assigned
as part of the integral LONWORKS Neuron chip on the NCE252x Type models. You do not need to assign a
LONWORKS device address to an NCE25 on LONWORKS applications.
Display Screen and Display Navigation Keypad
Specified NCE25 models feature an integral display screen and display navigation keypad that allow you to view
and edit the I/O points settings on the NCE25 (Figure 8-1 on page 55). Refer to the DIS1710 Local Controller
Display Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011270) for more information on using the display screen and navigation keypad.
The NCE25 models have up to 11 LEDs (depending on The FC BUS LED is labeled
the model) to indicate power and network LON on NCE25 models that
communication status. Figure 8-5 on page 62 and support a LONWORKS Network.
Figure 8-5 on page 62 show the LEDs. Table 8-3 on
page 63 describes the LED indications.
Note: Some of the LEDs shown in Figure 8-5 on
page 62 are not used or displayed on some NCE
The MODEM LEDs are not
models. provided on NCE25 models
without an internal modem.
LED Test Sequence at Startup for NCE
FIG_NCE_LEDS
During startup, the NCE automatically initiates an LED

test to verify the operational status of the LEDs.
Immediately after connecting supply power, the
following LED lighting sequence occurs: Figure 8-5: NCE25 LED Designations
1. The POWER, BATT FAULT, 10 LINK, FAULT, RUN,
and PEER COM LEDs turn On, indicating that the
OS is starting. (After 2 seconds, the LEDs may change states depending on site-specific network activity.)

2. The BATT FAULT, PEER COM, and FAULT LEDs shut Off. The RUN LED flashes to indicate that the NCE
software is loading.
3. The LEDs display the operational status of the NCE. When the RUN LED goes On Steady, startup is complete
and the NCE is operational.
The total time to start up the NCE25 depends on the size of the database and can take several minutes.
Refer to the NCE Commissioning Guide (LIT-1201519) for additional information on troubleshooting an NCE.
Table 8-3: NCE25 LED Designations, Normal Status, and Descriptions
Status
NCE25
Off Steady = Unit is shut down.
FAULT (Red) Off Steady On Steady = General Fault. CCT application may be corrupted or missing.
Some FAULT conditions are user-configurable in the Metasys software.
Pre-configured fault conditions include excessive CPU flash or memory use,
excessive board temperature.
SA BUS (Green) Blinking Blinking - 5 Hz = Data Transmission (normal communication)
Off Steady = No Data Transmission
On Steady = Communication lost, waiting to join communication ring
FC BUS or LON1 Flicker Flicker = Normal communications; the FC Bus or LONWORKS network is
(Green) transmitting and receiving data. Flickers are generally in sync with data
transmission but should not be used to indicate specific transmission times.
Off Steady = No field controllers are defined to FC Bus or LONWORKS network in
the NCE.
MODEM RX2 Flicker Flicker = NCE modem is connected and receiving data.
MODEM TX2 Flicker Flicker = NCE modem is connected and transmitting data.
BATT FAULT (Red) Off Steady On Steady = Battery defective. Flicker = Data Protection Battery is not installed.
Connect or install battery.
general traffic (may not be traffic to or from the NCE).
10 LINK (Green) On Steady On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 10 Mbps.
(10 Mbps
network)
100 LINK (Green) On Steady On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 100 Mbps.
(100 Mbps
network)
1. LED labeled FC BUS on models that support MS/TP Bus or N2 Bus and LON on models that support LONWORKS network.
2. Modem LEDs are only on NCE25 models with internal modems.

110
4.3 Mounting Data Protection Battery 24 VAC
Clip Compartment Power Terminal
270
10.6
62
2.5
RJ-11 6-Pin
Field Controller
Service Ports
131
NCE25
5.2
Display
Navigation
NCE
FC BUS
Keypad
210
8.3 SA BUS
NAE25_FRONT_DIMS
USB SA Bus
RJ-11 6-Pin Mounting Port Terminal FC Bus
System Status Modem Clip RJ-45 8-Pin
RS-232 Mounting Terminal
Light-Emitting Diodes Port Serial Port Ethernet End-of-Line
Clip
(LEDs) Port Switch
350
13.8
Figure 8-6: Dimensions and Physical Features of NCE25 Model, mm (in.)
Table 8-4: Documents Related to NCE25
Daily Operation of the Metasys System Extended Metasys system Help On the Help menu,
Architecture, Navigating the UI, Monitoring and select Metasys
or LIT-1201793
Installation Considerations and Guidelines, NCE25 Installation Instructions Part No.
Mounting, Wiring, and Starting an NCE25 24-10043-63
Connecting to, Configuring, Browsing, NCE Technical Bulletin LIT-12011267
Commissioning, and Addressing an NCE25
Integrating N2 Devices into the Metasys System N2 Integration with the NCE Technical Bulletin LIT-1201683
Integrating BACnet Devices to the Metasys BACnet System Integration with NCE Technical LIT-1201531
Integrating LONWORKS Devices to the Metasys LONWORKS Network Integration with NCE LIT-1201668
Note

Model Information
Table 8-5: NCE25 Model Information
Number
MS-NCE25xx-xxx Each NCE25 Series model requires a 24 VAC power supply and includes one RS-232-C serial port,
(Base Features on one USB serial port, one Ethernet port, and an MS-BAT1020-0 Data Protection Battery. Each
Each NCE25) NCE25 Series model supports 33 hardwire Input/Output points. See the Wiring Input and Output
Terminals on page 60 section for more information on the 33 hardwire I/O points.
MS-NCE2510-0 Supports one N2 Bus trunk with up to 32 N2 devices.
MS-NCE2511-0 Supports one N2 Bus trunk with up to 32 N2 devices. Includes an internal modem.
MS-NCE2516-0 Supports one N2 Bus trunk with up to 32 N2 devices. Includes integral display screen.
NCE25
MS-NCE2517-0 Supports one N2 Bus trunk with up to 32 N2 devices. Includes integral display screen and an
internal modem.
MS-NCE2520-0 Supports one LONWORKS Network trunk with up to 32 LONWORKS devices.
MS-NCE2521-0 Supports one LONWORKS Network trunk with up to 32 LONWORKS devices. Includes an internal
modem.
MS-NCE2526-0 Supports one LONWORKS Network trunk with up to 32 LONWORKS devices. Includes integral display
screen.
MS-NCE2527-0 Supports one LONWORKS Network trunk with up to 32 LONWORKS devices. Includes integral display
screen and an internal modem.
MS-NCE2560-0 Supports one FC Bus trunk with up to 32 MS/TP devices.
MS-NCE2561-0 Supports one FC Bus trunk with up to 32 MS/TP devices. Includes an internal modem.
MS-NCE2566-0 Supports one FC Bus trunk with up to 32 MS/TP devices. Includes integral display screen.
MS-NCE2567-0 Supports one FC Bus trunk with up to 32 MS/TP devices. Includes integral display screen and an
internal modem.
Table 8-6: MS-NCE25xx (Part 1 of 2)
(Europe), at 50/60 Hz (20 VAC minimum to 30 VAC maximum)
Power Consumption 25 VA maximum for NCE25 only
The 25 VA rating does not include any power supplied to devices connected at the NCE
BOs. BO devices connected to and power by an NCE can require an additional 125 VA
(maximum).
Ambient Operating 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); 10 to 90% RH, 30°C (86°F) maximum dew point
Conditions
Ambient Storage -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F); 5 to 95% RH, 30°C (86°F) maximum dew point
Conditions
Data Protection Supports data protection on power failure. Rechargeable NiMH battery: 3.6 VDC
Battery 500 mAh, with a typical life of 5 to 7 years at 21°C (70°F); Product Code Number:
MS-BAT1020-0
Processors Supervisory Controller: 192 MHz Renesas SH4 7760 RISC processor
Field Controller: 20 MHz Renesas H8S2398 processor
Memory Supervisory Controller: 128 MB Flash nonvolatile memory for operating system,
configuration data, and operations data storage and backup and 128 MB Synchronous
DRAM for operations data dynamic memory
Field Controller: 1 MB Flash and 1 MB RAM
Operating System Microsoft Windows CE embedded

Table 8-6: MS-NCE25xx (Part 2 of 2)
Network and Serial One Ethernet port, 10/100 Mbps, 8-pin RJ-45 connector
Interfaces One optically isolated RS-485 SA Bus port; with a pluggable and keyed 4-position
(Depending on NCE terminal block (all NCE25xx-x models)
Model. See Table 8-5 One optically isolated RS-485 FC Bus port; with a pluggable and keyed 4-position
on page 65 for Model terminal block (only on NCE25 models that support an N2 Bus or MS/TP Bus trunk)
Information.)
One LONWORKS port; FTT10 78 Kbps; pluggable, keyed 3-position terminal block (only
on NCE25 models that support a LONWORKS Network trunk)
One RS-232-C serial port with standard 9-pin sub-D connector that supports standard
baud rates
One USB serial port with standard USB connector
Option: One 6-pin RJ-12 jack for connecting to internal modem; up to 56 Kbps;
NCE25
connector
Analog Input/Analog Analog Input Points: 16-bit resolution
Output Analog Output Points: 16-bit resolution and ±200 mV accuracy on 0-10 VDC
Resolution and applications
Accuracy
Dimensions 155 x 270 x 64 mm (6.1 x 10.6 x 2.5 in.)
(Height x Width x Minimum mounting space required: 250 x 370 x 110 mm (9.8 x 14.6 x 4.3 in.)
Depth)
Housing Plastic housing
Plastic material: ABS and polycarbonate
Protection: IP20 (IEC60529)
Mounting On flat surface with screws on three mounting clips or a single 35 mm DIN rail
Shipping Weight 1.2 kg (2.7 lb)
Compliance United States
UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy Management Equipment
FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Canada
UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment
Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003
Europe
CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, in accordance with EN 61000-6-3 (2001) Generic
Emission Standard for Residential and Light Industry and EN 61000-6-2 (2001) Generic
Immunity Standard for Heavy Industrial Environment
Australia and New Zealand
C-Tick Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant
BACnet International
BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) 135-2004 Listed BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)

SECVT Serial N2 to Ethernet Converter
Application
The SECVT, in conjunction with a supported NAE (MS-NAE5512-x and MS-NAE5513-x models), enables N2
tunneling over Ethernet on Metasys system extended architecture networks. The SECVT (with a supported NAE)
allows you to connect remote N2 devices to the NAE using existing Ethernet wiring, which is cost-effective when it
is difficult to route N2 Bus cable between the NAE and remote N2 devices.
IMPORTANT: The SECVT is not designed or intended for use in mission-critical or life/safety applications.
Mounting
Controllers on page 15 for mounting guidelines.
IMPORTANT: The SECVT is commissioned and its IP address is set with software. Verify that the SECVT IP
SECVT
address has been set and is written on the cover before installing the SECVT. Failure to commission and set the
IP address on the SECVT before it is installed may require removing, commissioning, and reinstalling the
SECVT.
IMPORTANT: Before using the SECVT for plenum applications, verify acceptance of exposed plastic materials
in plenum areas with the local building authority. Building codes for plenum requirements vary by location. Some
local building authorities accept compliance to UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment, whereas others use
different acceptance criteria. Metal enclosures may be required.

To mount the SECVT, you need three fasteners appropriate for the mounting surface (#8 or M4 screws) or one
20.3 cm (8 in.) or longer piece of DIN rail and appropriate hardware for mounting the DIN rail.
Wiring
Observe the following guidelines and procedures when wiring the SECVT.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the building automation network wiring meets the specifications, rules, and guidelines
in N2 Communications Bus Guidelines on page 173 and Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors on page 17.
Ethernet Port
The (10 or 100 Mbps) Ethernet connection on the SECVT is an 8-pin RJ-45 network port. Connect the Ethernet
communication cable to the RJ-45, 8-pin Ethernet port shown in Figure 9-1 on page 68.

24 VAC Class 2 Supply Power
Connect the 24 VAC supply power wires from the Converter Supply Power
transformer to the 3-terminal pluggable block as shown in Terminal Block
Figure 9-1 on page 68.
Note: The middle terminal of the 24 V~ terminal block 24V~
remains disconnected. The SECVT does not require an
earth ground connection. Converter Power
Terminal Block
N2 Bus Plug
COM
HOT
The SECVT is designed to connect to an N2 bus at the
pluggable, 4-position terminal block labeled N2 BUS
POWER_PORT
Wires from 24 VAC
(Figure 9-2 on page 68). The SECVT supports up to 32 N2 Class 2 Power
devices on the N2 Bus connection. Connect the three Transformer
N2 Bus wires to the 4-terminal pluggable block as shown in Brown Wire Orange Wire
Figure 9-2 on page 68. (24 VAC) (24 VAC)
Note: The Shield (SHLD) terminal of the N2 Bus terminal
SECVT
Figure 9-1: 24 VAC Supply Power Wiring

block does not require an earth ground connection.
Figure 9-2: N2 Bus Wiring

Setting EOL Termination
See N2 Communications Bus Guidelines on page 173 for information on setting the SECVT EOL termination
switches on the serial N2 Bus.
LED Test Sequence at Startup
During startup, the SECVT automatically initiates an LED test to verify the operational status of the LEDs.
Immediately after connecting supply power, the following LED lighting sequence occurs:
1. All LEDs light up.
2. The Power LED remains lit while all other LEDs go to Normal operation as indicated in Table 9-1 on page 69.
Note: If the LEDs do not go to normal operation, use Table 9-1 on page 69 to diagnose the problem indicated.
Table 9-1: SECVT LED Designations and Descriptions
LED Name Color Normal Descriptions/Other Conditions
Power Green On Steady On Steady = Power is On
Off = Power is Off
Fault Red Off Off Steady = No Faults
SECVT
On Steady = Device Fault
Blink = Network Fault
N2 Bus Green Flicker Flicker = Normal communications; N2 port is transmitting and
receiving data. Flickers are generally in sync with data
transmission but should not be used to indicate specific
transmission times.
Off Steady = No field controllers are defined to the N2 port.
10 Link Green On Steady or On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 10 Mbps.
Off
100 Link Green On Steady or On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 100 Mbps.
Off
Ethernet Green Flicker Flicker = Data is transferring on the Ethernet connection.
Ethernet traffic is general traffic.
Off Steady = No Ethernet traffic, probably indicates a dead
Ethernet network or bad Ethernet connection.
Table 9-2: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up SECVT
For Information On Refer To LIT or Part No.
Installing the SECVT SECVT Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10093-4
Network Requirements and Network Information Worksheet for LIT-12011170
Commissioning the SECVT Commissioning the SECVT
Access, Commissioning, Operating, SECVT Technical Bulletin LIT-1201790
and Troubleshooting the SECVT
SECVT Serial N2 to Ethernet Converter: Section 9 69

Table 9-3: MS-SECVT-0
Product Code MS-SECVT-0 Serial to Ethernet Converter
Power Requirement 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 VA, Class 2
Power Consumption 4.5 VA Maximum
Ambient Operating Temperature 0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F)
Ambient Operating Conditions 5 to 95% RH, Noncondensing, 85% Maximum Dewpoint
Ambient Storage Temperature -40° to 70° C (-40° to 158° F)
Ambient Storage Conditions 0 to 90% RH, Noncondensing
Housing Gray Plastic Housing with UL94-5VB Flammability Rating
Mounting On flat surface with screws on three mounting clips or on DIN rail
Shipping Weight .51 kg (1.13 lb)
SECVT
Compliance United States Intended for Connection to an NEC Class 2 Power Source
Listed to UL 916, Energy Management Equipment (PAZX), File
E107041 (Pending)
UL94-5VB Flammability Rating (Receiver Housing is Plenum Rated
per UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment)
FCC compliant to CFR 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Canada Intended for Connection to a CEC Class 2 Power Source
Listed to CSA/CAN C22.2 No. 205-M1983, Signal Equipment
(PAZX7), File E107041 (Pending)
UL94-5VB Flammability Rating (Receiver Housing is Plenum Rated
per CSA C22.2 No. 236, Heating and Cooling Equipment)
IC compliant to Class A limits
Europe CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EC
Australia and Australia/New Zealand emissions (C-tick mark) ACN: 002 968 103
New Zealand C-tick dependent on CE compliance per EMC Directive 89/336/EC
China CCC and SRRC (Pending)
Hong Kong OFTA (Pending)
Product Warranty 1-year limited warranty against defects in material and workmanship

MS/TP
BUS
BACnet MS/TP Communications Bus Guidelines 73
MS/TP
ADDR
Setting Device Addresses on the BACnet MS/TP Bus 95
FEC
FEC Series Field Equipment Controllers 99
VMA1600
VMA1600 Series VAV Modular Assemblies 117
IOM
IOM Series Input/Output Modules 127
TEC26xx DIS1710
DIS1710 Local Controller Display 137
TEC26xx Series Thermostats 143
SENSOR SENSOR
NS DTN NS NET
NS Series Network Sensors 161
NS Series Network Discharge Air Sensors 167

NS Series Network Sensors on SA Buses FEC terminates segment
on FC Bus A and
is SA Bus Supervisor
FC Bus A (FC-A) is a
Code No. LIT-410011

T T IOMs on SA Bus
single bus segment. T
T1
Ethernet Network VMA1600s on FC Bus
NS Series Network Sensors on SA Buses
Router
T T T
NAE55 Repeater
87 654321
FC-A FC Bus B (segment 1) VMA1600s on FC Bus

T1
FC-B
FC Bus B
(segment 2)
T
T T1 TEC26xx Series
IOMs T1 Thermostats
on
on FC Bus
SA Bus
FEC is on FC Bus and
is SA Bus Supervisor
T
FC Bus B (FC-B) is three bus EOL Terminator
segments connected at two terminates bus segment
NS Series Network Sensors on FC Bus (T2).
repeaters.
on Separate SA Buses
Figure 10-1: MS/TP Communications Bus Detail

BACnet MS/TP Communications Bus Guidelines
T T
Cable Legend
T3
Repeater T2 T# = FC Bus (segment) terminating device and
VMA1600s on FC Bus 876 54321
bus segment number (EOL Switch Set to On.)

T = SA Bus EOL Terminating Device (fixed On)
FC Bus
FC Bus B
T (segment 3) SA Bus
GI F S :M P-T s_B

T3
73
MS/TP
BUS
MS/TP
BUS
BACnet MS/TP Bus Overview

The Metasys BACnet MS/TP Communications Bus is based on BACnet standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.
BACnet MS/TP protocol is peer-to-peer, multiple master protocol based on token passing. The FC Bus port on an
NAE/NCE can support an MS/TP FC Bus or an N2 Bus, but not both at the same time. NAE55xx models with two
FC Bus ports can support an MS/TP FC Bus on one port and an N2 Bus on the other FC Bus port.
IMPORTANT: Do not connect MS/TP devices and N2 devices to the same bus. MS/TP Communications
Buses follow different protocol and wiring rules from N2 Communications Buses, and MS/TP devices and N2
devices are not compatible on the same bus.
A BACnet MS/TP bus supports two types/levels of buses: FC Bus and SA Bus. See Figure 10-1 on page 73 and
NAEs/NCEs have FC Bus connections and are FC Bus supervisors. NCEs, FECs and VMAs have both FC Bus
and SA Bus connections and can be SA Bus supervisors. The IOMs can connect to either an FC Bus or an SA
Bus, but IOMs are never bus supervisors.
The FC Buses and the SA Buses are networks of daisy-chained devices. Each bus has only one bus supervisor.
The bus supervisor communicates with devices on the supervised bus and with the next (higher level) bus on the
network. The bus supervisor typically starts the communication on the FC Bus and SA Bus. If an SA Bus or FC Bus
does not have a bus supervisor, the device with the lowest device address value on the bus starts the
communication.
Ethernet Network
NAE
FC Bus
FIG_MS-TP
ET SY R
Supervisor
FC Bus
SA Bus
Supervisor CLE AR =LO W RE D=H IG H
35 IN - LB (4 Nm) 60 SE CO ND S
FEC
UN I VE RS A L
AL LF E
I LD TER M N I ALS A RE PO WER LI M T
I ED
+15
O UT 1
IN
M A NU A L O CO M 1
I CO M
O VE R RI D E
AD D RE S S 0=O FF
B I NA RY
O UT 2
O CO M 2
ON
S A B US
F AU LT
P O WE R
O UT 3
SE NS O R
O CO M 3
P OW ER
SA
PWR
MS-VM A1 620 -0
SA BU S
CO N FI G UR A B LE
FA U LT
O UT 4
CO M P WR I N: 2 4VA C 2 .5 A, CL AS S 2
O UT PU T S: 24VA C 0 .5 A, CL AS S 2,
S A BU S O CO M 4
–
P IL O T DU TY
FC BU S
+
O UT 5
FC O CO M 5
EO L
ET SY
SHLD
FCBUS
HO T
CO M
24
–
OP ENE NERG Y
CO M
+ MA NAG EMEN T
EQ UIPMENT
15U0
R
SA Bus
N
O
VMA SA Bus
Supervisor
Network SA Bus
Sensor
Network
Sensor
ON
S A BU S
FA U LT
P O WER
Network
E T SY
R
Sensor
N
O
IOM
Figure 10-2: MS/TP Communications Bus

MS/TP
BUS
FC Bus Rules and Specifications
An FC Bus supports up to three bus segments, and each bus segment can support up to 50 Metasys devices, but
the total number of Metasys devices on an FC Bus can not exceed 100. Figure 10-3 on page 76 shows an FC Bus
with bus segments. Table 10-1 on page 75 and Table 10-2 on page 76 provide some of the FC Bus rules, limits,
and specifications.
Table 10-1: FC Bus Rules
Category Rules/Limits
General NAE55 Series models can support up to two FC Buses1.
NAE45 Series models can support one FC Bus1.
NAE35 Series models can support one FC Bus1 (but an NAE35 FC Bus supports only 1/2 the
number of devices that are supported on an FC Bus on an NAE45 or NAE55).
NCE25 Series models can support one FC Bus1.
Note: An FC port on an NAE/NCE can connect to only one bus segment on an FC Bus.
Only a daisy-chain topology is allowed (no T or Star topology configurations)
Number of Devices and When all of the devices connected on the FC Bus are Metasys FECs, VMAs,
Bus Segments and/or IOMs, the device and bus segment limits are:
• 100 devices total per FC Bus (maximum)
• 3 bus segments per FC Bus (maximum)
• 50 devices per bus segment (maximum, not to exceed 100 devices per FC Bus)
When one or more TEC26xx Series thermostat or third-party MS/TP device is connected
on the FC Bus, the device and bus segment limits are:
• 3 bus segments per FC Bus (maximum)
Bus segments on an FC Bus are connected with repeaters (only). Up to two cascaded repeaters
may be applied to an FC Bus (to connect three bus segments).
Cable Length for FC When all of the devices connected on the FC Bus are Metasys FECs, VMAs,
Bus and Bus and/or IOMs, the cable length limits are:
Segments2 • Each bus segment can be up to 1,520 m (5,000 ft) in length (using 22 AWG 3-wire twisted,
shielded cable).
• Each FC Bus can be up to 4,750 m (15,000 ft) in length (using 22 AWG 3-wire twisted,
shielded cable).
When one or more TEC26xx Series thermostat or third-party MS/TP device is connected
on the FC Bus, the device and bus segment limits are:
• Each bus segment can be up to 1,220 m (4,000 ft) in length (using 22 AWG 3-wire twisted,
shielded cable)3
• Each FC Bus can be up to 3,660 m (12,000 ft) in length (using 22 AWG 3-wire twisted,
shielded cable).
When using fiber-optic connections: 2,010 m (6,600 ft)2 between two fiber modems
Recommended 22 AWG Stranded, 3-Wire Twisted, Shielded Cable
Cable Type4
EOL Termination The EOL switch must be set to On (or an EOL terminator installed) on the two devices located at
either end of each bus segment on an FC Bus.
The EOL switches must be set to Off (or EOL termination disabled) for all other devices on the
bus segment on an FC Bus.
See EOL Termination on the FC Bus on page 82 for more information.
1. Refer to the Network Automation Engine (NAE) Product Bulletin (LIT-1201160) and the Network Control Engine (NCE)
Product Bulletin (LIT-12011283) for complete information on MS/TP Bus support on NAE/NCE models.
2. See Table 10-3 on page 77 for more detail on supported cable lengths and gauges.
3. If third-party devices are connected to the bus, the cable lengths should be reduced (if necessary) to match the third-party
vendor recommendations.
4. The recommended cable type provides the best bus performance. See MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on page 86
for information on alternative cable types and lengths that may be used in MS/TP applications.
Note: Metasys MS/TP devices generate less data traffic than third-party MS/TP devices and TEC26xx
thermostats. Connecting third-party devices or TEC26xx thermostats to the FC Bus increases data traffic, reduces
bus performance, and reduces the number of devices that can be connected to the bus.
BACnet MS/TP Communications Bus Guidelines: Section 10 75

MS/TP
BUS
FC Bus
4,570 m (15,000 ft) Maximum
100 Total Metasys Device Connections (Maximum)
Bus Segment Bus Segment Bus Segment

NAE 1,520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum 1,520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum 1,520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
50 Metasys Device Connections 50 Metasys Device Connections 50 Metasys Device Connections
ET S Y R
T T T T T T
EOL Switch R R
ON
FIG_FC_SEGS
Note: When TEC26xx Series thermostats or third-party MS/TP devices are T = EOL Termination switch ON
connected to an FC Bus, a bus segment supports only up to 32 devices
and the FC Bus supports only up to 64 devices. R = Repeater
Figure 10-3: FC Bus with Three Bus Segments and the Required EOL Terminations
Table 10-2: FC Bus Specifications

Error Checking Message Headers checked using 8-bit CRC test. Message data check using 16-bit
CRC test.
Device Addressing 0 - 255 (See Setting Device Addresses on the BACnet MS/TP Bus on page 95 for
more information.)
Data Transmission Standard RS485
Signaling Method BACnet MS/TP
Signaling Rate 9,600; 19,200; 38,400; or 76,800 baud as selected by bus supervisor
Transient Immunity Meets ENG1000-4 Requirements for heavy industrial applications. Protected against
misapplication of 24 VAC.
EOL Termination Method Integral EOL Termination switch or add-on EOL Terminator module
(See EOL Termination on the FC Bus on page 82 and EOL Terminator Module on
page 83 for more information.)
Shield Grounding One (only) hard ground connection per bus segment when using shielded cable.
Physical Configuration Daisy-chained
Optional Vendor Components Repeaters
• Acromag 4683-TTM-1F (115 VAC)
• Acromag 4683-TTM-2F (230 VAC)
Note: A repeater is required to support more than 50 devices per trunk segment and/
or trunk cable segments longer than 1,524 m (5,000 ft).
Transient Eliminator
Advanced Protection Technologies Transient Eliminator TE/JC04C12
Fiber Modem
• S.I. Tech 2110 Fiber-Optic Modem and S.I. Tech 2121 Power Supply
• 9-pin Male Connector Kit (required by 2110 modem)
• Does not support 76800 baud.

MS/TP
BUS
TEC26xx Series Thermostats and Third-Party Rules and Limits on the FC Bus
If TEC26xx Series thermostats and/or third-party BACnet MS/TP devices are connected on an FC Bus, different
rules and device limits apply to the bus.
If one or more TEC26xx Series thermostat or third-party MS/TP device is connected on an FC Bus, the device, bus
segment and bus cable limits are:
• 3 segments per FC Bus (maximum)
• 1,220 m (4,000 ft) maximum per bus segment (using 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire twisted, shielded cable)
• 3,660 m (12,000 ft) maximum per FC Bus (using 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire twisted, shielded cable)
When a TEC26xx Series thermostat terminates an FC Bus bus-segment, an EOL Terminator module must be
wired to the FC Bus terminals on the TEC26xx thermostat.
Third-party MS/TP devices should not terminate an FC Bus bus-segment unless the third-party device’s EOL
termination capability is disabled and an EOL Terminator module is wired to the bus segment at the third-party
device. See EOL Termination on the MS/TP Bus on page 81 for more information.
SA Bus Rules and Specifications
The SA Bus connects input/output point controllers and network sensors to field controllers. An SA Bus is a single
segment bus that can support up to 10 devices (but an SA Bus can support only four NS Series network sensors).
Figure 10-4 on page 78 shows a simple SA Bus. Table 10-3 on page 77 and Table 10-4 on page 78 provide SA
Bus rules, limits, and specifications.
For more information on terminating the SA Bus, see EOL Termination on the SA Bus on page 84.
Table 10-3: SA Bus Rules
Category Rules/Limits
General Each bus supervisor supports one SA Bus (and each SA Bus is a single segment).
Number of Devices An SA Bus supports up to 10 devices.
Supported on the Bus Note: Only four NS sensor addresses are available for use on an SA Bus. In addition, the SA
Bus supervisor provides power for NS network sensors and some of the other devices
connected on the bus. Exceeding the SA bus power limit can result in devices going offline and
poor bus performance. See SA Bus Device Limits on page 79 for more information on SA Bus
power limits.
SA Buses do not support repeaters.
Cable Length 365 m (1,200 ft) maximum bus length
152 m (500 ft) maximum distance between an NS network sensor and the bus supervisor (FEC
or VMA supplying power to the sensor) using bus cable connected to the SA Bus screw
terminal blocks
30 m (100 ft) maximum length for network sensors using bus cables connected to the RJ-Style
modular jack (6-Pin SA Bus Port)
366 m (1,200 ft) maximum Bus Length
Recommended Screw Terminal Connections: 22 AWG Stranded 4-wire, 2-Twisted Pairs, Shielded Cable for
Cable Type1 screw terminals
Modular Jack Connections: 6-Pin RJ-Style Modular Connectors with 24 or 26 AWG Solid
6-Wire, 3-Twisted Pairs
EOL Termination Each SA Bus supervisor has integral (fixed ON) EOL termination, which typically provides
sufficient EOL termination on an SA Bus. Long SA Bus runs or persistent communication
problems on an SA Bus may require EOL termination at the last device on the SA Bus (in
addition to the integral EOL termination at the SA Bus supervisor).
1. The recommended cable types provide the best bus performance. See MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on page 86
for information on alternative cable types.

MS/TP
BUS
FEC or VMA
(SA Bus Supervisor)
T = EOL switch set to ON
TT = EOL integral fixed ON
POWER ET SY R
FAULT
SABUS
ON
O
N
SA Bus Devices
128
64
32
16
IOM
T T
EOL ON
EOL
(Fixed)
Switch ON
(Or EOL = OFF is Acceptable)
SA Bus
10 Device Connections (Maximum)
(No more than four can be NS Sensors)
365 m (1,200 ft) Maximum
FEC or VMA
(SA Bus Supervisor)
POWER ET SY R
FAULT
SA BUS
O
ON
N
128
64
32
16
SA Bus Devices SA Bus Devices

T
EOL ON
(Fixed)
SA_BUS_SEG
EOL Switches OFF EOL Switches OFF
or No EOL or No EOL
Figure 10-4: SA Bus, Bus Topology, Bus Limits, and Required EOL Termination
Table 10-4: SA Bus Specifications

Error Checking Message Headers checked using 8-bit CRC test.
Message data check using 16-bit CRC test.
Device Addressing 0 - 255 (See Setting Device Addresses on the BACnet MS/TP Bus on page 95 for more
information.)
Data Transmission Standard RS-485
Signaling Method BACnet MS/TP
Signaling Rate 9,600; 19,200; 38,400 (default); or 76,800 baud as selected by the bus supervisor
Transient Immunity Meets ENG1000-4 Requirements for heavy industrial applications. Protected against
Shield Grounding One hard ground per bus when using shielded cable
Physical Configuration Daisy-chained (screw terminal only).
Optional Vendor Components Transient Eliminator:
• Advanced Protection Technologies Transient Eliminator TE/JC04C12
Fiber-Optic Modem:
• S.I. Tech 2110 Fiber-Optic Modem and S.I. Tech 2121 Power Supply
• 9-pin Male Connector Kit (required by 2110 modem)

MS/TP
BUS
SA Bus Device Limits
The SA Bus is limited to 10 devices total to ensure good communication on the bus and is limited to four NS
sensors because only four unique addresses can be set on the sensors.
The SA Bus is also limited by the total power consumption of the devices connected on the bus. See Table 10-5 on
page 79 for the power consumption of devices commonly connected to the SA Bus.
IMPORTANT: The total power consumption on an SA Bus is limited; do not exceed the SA Bus power
consumption limit. Exceeding the total power consumption limit can cause poor bus communication and devices
to go offline.
Table 10-5: Power Consumption by Common SA Bus Devices

SA Bus Device Power Consumption on the SA Bus
Discharge Air Sensors (NS-DTN70x3-0) 12 mA
Balancing Sensors (NS-xTV70x3-0) 12 mA
Network Sensors without display 13 mA
Network Sensors with display no RH 21 mA
Network Sensors with display and RH 27 mA
ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router 90 mA
DIS1710 Local Controller Display 90 mA - may be a temporary load
BTCVT Wireless Commissioning Converter 90 mA - temporary load
Variable Speed Drives NA (self-powered)
IOM Series Controllers NA (self-powered)
Romutec Modules (Europe only) NA (self-powered)
SA Bus applications are limited to a temporary power load of 210 mA.

The best practice when configuring an SA Bus is to limit the total available operating power consumption to 120 mA
or less. This power level allow you to temporarily connect a BTCVT Wireless Commissioning Converter or a
DIS1710 Local Controller Display to the bus for commissioning, adjusting, and monitoring.
On SA Bus application where a DIS1710 display or ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router is permanently connected
to the bus, you should limit the additional available operating power consumption to 30 mA, to allow for the
temporary use of a Wireless Commissioning Converter on the bus.

MS/TP
BUS
SA Buses with Multiple Network Sensors

The SA Bus supports up to four NS Series network sensors. Table 10-5 on page 80 shows an example of two SA
Buses, each with four network sensors. To place multiple network sensors on the SA Bus, three of the network
sensors must be switch addressable models (Product Code No. NS-ATN7003-0 or NS-BTN7003-0).
Ethernet Network
NAE55
FC Bus
SA Bus with 3 Daisy-Chained Network Sensors SA Bus with 4 Daisy-Chained Network Sensors
Using Terminal Blocks Plus Using Terminal Blocks
1 Network Sensor with a Modular Jack
VMA1620
=1 0
to 0
0
ss 02-
99
ed 3-
20
to 0
1
to 0
ed 3-
2
to 0
20
2
ss 00
dre 70
ed 3-
to 0
20
ed 3-
1
20
ss 00
FEC1610
ed 3-
to 0
20
dre N7
ss 00
Ad -xxx
ss 700
ed 3-
20
dre N7
ss 00
dre N7
ss 700
Ad S-xT
dre N7
dre N
Ad -xT
NS
Ad -xT
Ad S-xT
dre N
Ad -xT
NS
N
Ad -xT
NS
=1 0
NS
N
ss 01-
99
NS
dre 70
FIG: ns_example
Ad -xxx
NS
Figure 10-5: SA Bus Example Showing Multiple Networks Sensors

MS/TP
BUS
EOL Termination on the MS/TP Bus
End-of-Line termination is required on all FC Buses and SA Buses to reduce signal reflection on the bus, which can
cause communication problems. The FC Bus and SA Bus have different EOL termination requirements. See EOL
Termination on the FC Bus on page 82 and EOL Termination on the SA Bus on page 84 for more information.
Repeaters and third-party devices have different EOL termination capabilities and requirements, see EOL
Terminator Module on page 83 and EOL Termination on Bus Repeaters on page 84 for more information.
EOL termination is built into most Metasys MS/TP devices. EOL termination on the FC Bus is enabled with a switch
on the device (Figure 10-6 on page 81). EOL termination on the SA Bus is fixed On on the bus supervisor.
VMA1610 or VMA1620
NAE35, NAE45,
or NCE25
CL EAR= LOW RED= HIGH 35 IN- LB (4N m) 60 SECONDS
UN IVE RS AL
+ 15 AL L F IEL D T ERMIN ALS ARE PO WER L IMI TED
OUT 1
IN
OCO M 1
ICO M
AD DR ESS
BI NA RY
OUT 2
OCO M 2
0= OF F
OUT 3
SEN SO R
OCO M 3
PO W ER
SA
PWR MS-VMA1620-0
S A B US
C ON FIG U RA BLE
FAU LT OUT 4
COM PW R IN : 2 4 VAC 2 .5 A , C LAS S 2
SA B US O UTP UTS : 24 VAC 0 . 5A , CLA SS 2, OCO M 4
–
PI LOT DU TY
FC BU S
+
OUT 5
FC
EOL OCO M 5
SHLD
FC B US
COM
24
–
OPENENERGY
MANAGEMENT
+ EQUIPMENT
15U0
EOL Switch in O 1
the ON Position N
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 8
OCOM 8
COM
OUT 2 NO
OUT 3 NO
OUT 4 NO
HOT
OUT 1 NC
OUT 2 NC
OUT 3 NC
OUT 4 NC
OCOM 3
OCOM 4
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 7
OCOM 7
OUT 1 NO
OCOM 1
OCOM 2
POWER ET SY R
FAULT
LON
SHIELD
L ON A
L ON B
EOL_MODS
EOL ADDRESS
O
N ON ADDRESS Ø =ALL OFF
C O M CO M
UNIVERSAL
+
–
ICOM 1
ICOM 2
ICOM 3
ICOM 4
+15V
+15V
+5V
IN 1
IN 3
IN2
IN 4
+5V
P WR
POWE R ET SY
SA
R
+
–
FAULT
SA B US
ON O
N
IOM1710, IOM2710,
IOM3710, or IOM4710
NAE55
FEC1610 or FEC2610
Figure 10-6: MS/TP Controllers Set as EOL Termination Devices
Enabling EOL Termination on MS/TP Bus Devices

NAEs, NCEs, FECs, and VMAs have switch-enabled EOL termination on the FC Bus (only).
FECs or VMAs do not have switch-enabled EOL termination for the SA Bus connection. FECs or VMAs are always
bus supervisors on the SA Bus and have integral (fixed ON) SA Bus EOL termination.
IOMs can connect to either an FC Bus or SA Bus (but not both). The EOL switch on IOMs enables an IOM as an
EOL terminating device on either an FC Bus or an SA Bus.
Set the EOL switch to the ON (up) position to set the controller as an EOL terminating device on the FC Bus
Note: Some NAE55xx models have two FC Bus ports (FC-A and FC-B). The two ports are independent of each
other, and each port has its own double-pole EOL switch that can enable the NAE55xx as an EOL terminating
device on the bus connected to the port. Therefore, an NAE55xx can be an EOL terminating device on one FC Bus
and a non-terminating device on the other FC Bus.

MS/TP
BUS
EOL Termination on the FC Bus

The FC Bus requires EOL terminations on the devices at the end of each bus segment on the FC Bus. See
Figure 10-7 on page 82 for examples of FC Bus EOL termination in four different FC Bus scenarios.
FC Bus (Single Segment)

NAE
Scenario 1 1,520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
ET SY
FC Bus with an
R
NAE at the end T

G T
of the line
EOL Switch
ON
FC Bus (Single Segment)

1,520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
NAE
Scenario 2
FC Bus with an ET SY R
NAE not at the

end of the line T G T
EOL Switch
OFF
FC Bus
Bus Segment Bus Segment
1,520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum 1,520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
NAE
Scenario 3 ET SY R
FC Bus in two
A B
segments with T G T
T T
the repeater at EOL Switch
the end of both R G
OFF
segments
FC Bus
NAE Bus Segment
Scenario 4 1,520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
ET SY
FC Bus in two
R
segments with A A T
G T
the repeater not R
at the end of both EOL Switch
segments ON T G
B
T = EOL Terminating Device

(EOL switch set to ON.)
Bus Segment
R = Repeater 1,520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
= FC Bus Device
FC_EOL
G = Ground shield location

T
Important: Bus segmentation is determined by the location
of EOL Terminators. The location of the NAE or a Repeater
does not determine bus segmentation. NAEs and Repeaters
can reside anywhere on a bus segment.
Each FC Bus segment must have only one hard ground connection to the cable shield, typically
accomplished at the supervisory controller. If repeaters are used, make the hard ground connection
on the side of the outgoing signal (typically side B) for each segment.
Figure 10-7: FC Bus Termination Scenarios
Note: Set the EOL termination switch on a repeater to ON only when the repeater terminates a bus segment at
the repeater. See Scenario 4 in Figure 10-7 on page 82.

MS/TP
BUS
EOL Terminator Module
The MS-BACEOL-0 EOLT provides EOL termination on FC Bus segments when a device at the end of a bus
segment does not have integral EOL termination capability. An EOLT is required in all Metasys MS/TP
applications wherever the device at the end of an FC Bus segment does not have integral EOL termination; for
example, TEC26xx Series thermostats.
The EOLT is designed for Metasys RS485 buses and provides better FC Bus performance than the integral EOL
termination on third-party devices. An EOLT is recommended wherever a third-party device terminates an FC Bus
segment. If the EOLT is connected to a third-party device that has integral EOL termination, the integral EOL
termination on the third-party device must be disabled.
Observe the following guidelines when wiring the
EOLT:
• The EOL terminator is designed for N2 and MS/
TP trunks on Metasys RS485 Buses. Connect
the EOL terminator to only N2 or MS/TP trunks
on Metasys RS485 FC Buses. (The EOLT is not EOL
Terminator
designed for use on the SA Bus.)
Cl
• Connect the EOLT to N2 or MS/TP devices that AC ass
24 2
V~
24V~Com
terminate Metasys bus segments and do not
24V~Hot
have integral EOL termination capability. Bus
FC
• When a third-party device terminates a Metasys

Supply
FC Bus segment, it is recommended that any Power
BLK
EOL termination on the third-party be disabled Terminals
WHT
and an EOLT be installed to provide EOL
BLK BLU
termination on the bus segment. To 24 VAC
WHT
Class 2
• When the third-party device is at the end of a bus Power Supply
segment and has only + and - terminals (no COM
or REF terminal), the best practice is to connect FC or Bus Cable from
COM/REF Previous Device on
the COM/REF (blue) lead on the EOLT to the
Daisy-Chained Bus Segment
COM/REF lead on the FC Bus cable. Because
FIG_EOLT_WRNG
FC or N2 Bus
three-conductor shielded cable for the FC Bus is Terminals
required, connect the COM/REF lead of the
EOLT directly to the FC Bus cable and not to the NOTE: If a third-party device with only + and - terminals
(no COM/REF terminal) terminates the bus segment, connect
device. Isolate and insulate the shield of the FC the EOL Terminator’s blue COM/REF lead to the COM/REF
Bus cable. (See Figure 10-8 on page 83). lead on the FC Bus.
Connect the EOL FC Bus leads to the appropriate FC Figure 10-8: Wiring the EOL Terminator to a
or N2 Bus terminals on the bus terminating device Bus-Terminating Device
Connect the EOL 24 VAC power supply leads to a
dedicated or surged protected 24 VAC, Class 2 power supply (Figure 10-8 on page 83).
Refer to the MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-10264-4) for more
information.

MS/TP
BUS
EOL Termination on the SA Bus

On an SA Bus, the minimum requirement is that the EOL termination must be enabled on at least one device on
the bus, and because a bus supervisor always has EOL termination enabled, this requirement is always met;
however, for enhanced bus performance, it is preferable to have EOL termination enabled on the devices at each
end of the SA Bus. See Figure 10-9 on page 84 for SA Bus EOL termination scenarios.
FEC or VMA T = EOL switch set to ON

(SA Bus Supervisor)
TT = EOL integral fixed ON
P O WE R ET S Y R
Best
FA U LT
S A BU S
ON
O
N SA Bus Devices
128
64
32
16
4
2
1
T T IOM
EOL ON EOL
(Fixed) Switch ON
FEC or VMA
(SA Bus Supervisor)
P O WE R ET S Y R
Acceptable
FA U LT
ON
S A BU S
O
N
SA Bus Devices
128
64
32
16
T
EOL ON
(Fixed) EOL Switches OFF
or No EOL
FEC or VMA
(SA Bus Supervisor)
P OWE R ET S Y R
FA U LT
Acceptable
S A BU S
ON O
N
12
64
32
16
8
2
1
8
SA Bus Devices SA Bus Devices

T
EOL ON
(Fixed) SA_EOL
EOL Switches OFF EOL Switches OFF

or No EOL or No EOL
Figure 10-9: SA Bus Termination Scenarios
Note: The MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator module is not designed for use on the SA Bus.
EOL Termination on Bus Repeaters
When using repeaters in the FC Bus, set the EOL switch based on the position of the repeater in the run. See
Table 10-6 on page 85 for proper settings.

MS/TP
BUS
MS/TP Bus Repeater
The MS/TP FC Bus Repeater (Figure 10-10 on page 85) isolates and boosts the power of the FC Bus signal, which
extends the range and increases the number of devices that can reside on the MS/TP Bus. You need a repeater
only when the FC Bus must be extended beyond 5,000 feet or 50 devices. See Table 10-1 on page 75 for more
requirements and limitations. Also see FC Bus Specifications on page 76 for repeater model information.
3 21
J4 EOL
J3 Jumpers
FC Bus Repeater Side B
FC Bus Side B (Out)
Com COM-OUT
D FC OUT(-)
D FC OUT(+)
3 21
J1 EOL
FC Bus Side A Jumpers
J2
Side A
Com COM-IN
D (In)
FC IN(-) Baud Rate
D FC IN(+) Switches
120 VAC
G GND
W LO
N1
HI
FC_Reaptr
NOTE: For two twisted-pair cable, terminate one pair to (+) and (-) and the other pair to REF.
Apply a hard ground or soft ground to the bus segment cable shield as required by the
application wiring.
Figure 10-10: Setting a Repeater EOL Termination on the FC Bus
WARNING: Risk of Electric Shock.
! Disconnect each of multiple power supplies before making any electrical connections. More than one
disconnect may be required to completely de-energize equipment. Contact with components carrying
hazardous voltage can cause electric shock and may result in severe personal injury or death.
Table 10-6: EOL Settings for Repeater

Side Jumper If Repeater:
Side A J1 and J2 At end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).
Not at end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 2 and 3 (EOL Out).
Side B J3 and J4 At end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).

MS/TP
BUS
Baud Rates on the MS/TP Bus

An MS/TP bus can be configured to communicate at one of four different baud rates. It is very important that all of
the devices on an MS/TP bus communicate at the same baud rate.
The baud rate setting determines the rate at which devices communicate data over the bus. For Metasys MS/TP
devices, the baud rate is set in the Metasys system software. The settings available on Metasys MS/TP devices
are 9,600; 19,200; 38,400; 76,800, and Auto.
We recommend setting all MS/TP bus supervisors to 38,400 baud.
We recommend setting all field controllers on the FC Bus (FECs, VMAs, and IOMs) to Auto. In the Auto setting, the
Metasys devices listen for the bus supervisor to communicate first, the devices then automatically set their baud
rate to the bus supervisor’s baud rate.
TEC26xx Series thermostats automatically set their baud rate to the bus supervisor’s baud rate. The baud rate
setting on bus repeaters and third-party MS/TP devices typically is configured manually at the device and the baud
rate setting must match the setting of the bus supervisor. Refer to the manufacturer’s product documentation for
information on setting the device’s baud rate.
Note: Some third-party devices do not support all four baud rates. The NAE55xx-0 models do not support
76,800 baud.
Due to the high communications data rates possible, higher baud rates require a limited range of wire gauge. There
is a relationship among the baud rate, wire gauge, wire length, and the number of devices. Higher baud rates
support more devices, but require small gauge wire (which provides lower capacitance). A lower baud rate may be
required to use existing, larger gauge wire (which has higher capacitance), but may support fewer devices. We
recommend 38,400 baud using 22 AWG stranded wire. This provides the best balance between performance and
installation sensitivity.
For more details on baud rate, wire gauge, wire length, and the number of devices, see MS/TP Bus Cable
Recommendations on page 86.
Wiring the MS/TP Bus
See General Guidelines for Wiring Metasys System Networks on page 17 for guidelines on wiring communications
buses.
MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations
The MS/TP Bus communicates at much higher baud rates than the N2 Bus, which makes the MS/TP Bus less fault
tolerant and less immune to interference from inductive noise sources that may be present in the application
environment. Table 10-7 on page 86 provides cable recommendations for MS/TP applications. The recommended
FC Bus and SA Bus cables are available from Belden CDT Inc. and Anixter Inc.
Note: For the best performance on MS/TP bus applications, 22 AWG stranded wire in a shielded cable with
proper cable shield grounding is recommended. Other wire gauges and non-shielded cable may provide
acceptable bus performance in many applications, especially applications that have short cable runs and low
ambient inductive noise levels. See Table 10-7 on page 86 and Table 10-8 on page 87 for more information.
Table 10-7: Recommended Cable for FC Buses and SA Buses (Part 1 of 2)
Bus and Cable Type Non-Plenum Applications Plenum Applications
Part Number O.D. Part Number O.D.
FC Bus: 22 AWG Stranded, 3-Wire Anixter: 0.138 in. Anixter: CBL-22/3-FC-PLN 0.140 in.
Twisted Shielded Cable1 CBL-22/3-FC-PVC Belden: B6501FE
Belden: B5501FE
SA Bus (Terminal Block): Anixter: 0.209 in. Anixter: CBL-22/2P-SA-PLN 0.206 in.
22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire, CBL-22/2P-SA-PVC Belden: B6541FE
2 Twisted-Pair Shielded Cable1 Belden: B5541FE
SA Bus (Modular Jack)2: — — Anixter; preassembled: 0.15 in.
26 AWG Solid 6-Wire, 3 Twisted-Pair CBL-NETWORK25
Cable CBL-NETWORK50
CBL-NETWORK75
CBL-NETWORK100

MS/TP
BUS
Table 10-7: Recommended Cable for FC Buses and SA Buses (Part 2 of 2)
Bus and Cable Type Non-Plenum Applications Plenum Applications
Part Number O.D. Part Number O.D.
FC Bus: 22 AWG Stranded, 3-Wire Belden: B5501UE 0.135 in. Belden: B6501UE 0.131 in.
Twisted Non-Shielded Cable
SA Bus (Terminal Block): Belden: B5541UE 0.206 in. Belden: B6541UE 0.199 in.
22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire,
2 Twisted-Pair Non-Shielded Cable
Recommended Acceptable
1. A 3-wire (for FC Bus) and 4-wire, 2 twisted-pair (for SA Bus), 22 AWG stranded, shielded cable is strongly recommended.
22 gauge cable offers the best performance for various baud rates, cable distances and number of trunk devices primarily
due to lower conductor-to-conductor capacitance. Shielded cable offers better overall electrical noise immunity than non-
shielded cable. Observe the shield grounding requirements.
2. 26 AWG solid, 6-wire, (3 twisted pairs) cable is recommended as the best fit for fabricating modular cables with the modular
jack housing assembly. Be sure the cable you use fits the modular jack housing. The preassembled cables that are
available from Anixter (Part No. CBL-NETWORKxxx) use 24 gauge wire.
MS/TP buses cannot support the same number of devices at every baud rate and wire gauge. See Table 10-8 on
page 87. We recommend operating the MS/TP bus at 38,400 baud.
Table 10-8: FC Bus Wire Gauge vs. FC Bus Baud Rate
AWG Maximum Cable Baud Rate
Wire Length and Node 9,6001 19,2001 38,4002 76,8003
Gauge Connections Limit
18 Maximum Cable Length 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 1,219 1,524 305
per Bus Segment (m [ft]) (5,000) (4,000) (5,000) (1000)
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 40/100 50/100 10/30 50/100

Nodes (per Segment /
per FC Bus)
20 Maximum Cable Length 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 1,219
per Bus Segment (m [ft]) (5,000) (4,000)
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 50/100 40/100 50/100
per FC Bus)
22 Maximum Cable Length 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000)
per Bus Segment (m [ft])
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 50/100 50/100
per FC Bus)
per FC Bus)
per FC Bus)
Best Acceptable Acceptable with Possible Restrictions Not Recommended

1. The maximum number of devices is reduced at lower baud rates due to increased token loop times.
2. 3 conductor (FC Bus), 22 AWG stranded, shielded cable is recommended. 22 gauge cable offers the best performance for
various baud rates, cable distances, and number of trunk devices primarily due to lower conductor-to-conductor
capacitance. Shielded cable offers better overall electrical noise immunity than non-shielded cable.
3. The MS-NAE55xx-0 cannot communicate at 76,800 baud.

MS/TP
BUS
Wiring the FC Bus

Figure 10-11 on page 88 shows a wiring detail for the
COM (Blue)
– (White)
FC Bus terminal blocks. See Table 10-1 on page 75 for
+ (Black)
bus cable length limits.
SHLD
FIG_FC_TERM
Follow these guidelines for wiring the FC Bus:
• Wire the bus devices in a daisy-chain network FC Bus
configuration. Maintain polarity (FC+ to FC+, FC- to Terminal
FC-, COM to COM, and SHLD to SHLD) along Block Isolated Shield
Connection
entire bus daisy-chain (Figure 10-11 on page 88). Terminal
• For vendor devices that do not have a connection
for COM or SHLD, connect and isolate the COM or
SHLD wire to continue the daisy-chain network
configuration. Continue to use 22 AWG 3 conductor
shielded cable for these devices.
To Next Device To Next Device
• Use Anixter FC Bus cables whenever possible (see on the FC Bus on the FC Bus
Table 45-5 on page 466). These cables are
22 AWG Stranded, 3-Wire Twisted, Shield Cable
specifically designed for Johnson Controls products
and have two key characteristics: (1) the exterior Figure 10-11: FC Bus Terminal Block Wiring Details
cable jacket is blue and labeled JCI FC BUS
CABLE; (2) the interior wires are colored black,
white, and blue.
• Always wire the FC Bus using the following color coding scheme to maintain consistency and prevent crossed
wiring elsewhere on the trunk:
Table 10-9: FC Bus Wire Color Scheme
Terminal Wire Color
+ Black
- White
COM Blue
• Twist the FC Bus lead pairs together before inserting into the termination and ensure that the termination is
tight at each terminal block on the daisy-chain.
• Each FC Bus segment must have only one hard ground connection to the cable shield, typically accomplished
at the supervisory controller. If repeaters are used, make the hard ground connection on the side of the
outgoing signal (typically side B) for each segment. See EOL Termination on the FC Bus on page 82.
• Some FC Bus and vendor devices do not have a terminal connection called COM. On these devices, the
terminal may be labeled REF. The COM and REF terminals are equivalent.

MS/TP
BUS
• The hard ground connection to the cable
COM (Blue)
– (White)
shield should be made at the NAE/NCE
+ (Black)
when the NAE/NCE terminates the bus
SHLD
segment. Cable shield ground connection
FIG_FC_SFT_GRND
should be made within the first 2 inches
after entering the NAE/NCE enclosure. FC Bus
Terminal
• All other cable shield connections along Block
the bus segment must be isolated from the
ground unless network communication
problems persist.
• If the FC segment experiences persistent Cable Shield
network communication problems or if the Connections
segment encounters high ambient to Soft Ground
inductive noise, apply soft ground
connections along the segment
To Next Device To Next Device
maintaining hard ground at NAE/NCE. on the FC Bus on the FC Bus
• For bus segments that originate at a 560 pF
Capacitor
repeater, make the hard ground
connection to the cable shield at the
repeater for that bus segment. Make the
cable shield ground connection within the Figure 10-12: Applying a Soft Ground to the FC Bus Cable
first 2 inches after entering the repeater Shield
enclosure.
To create a soft ground connection, connect a 560 pF capacitor between the cable shield and ground. The
connection to ground should be made within the first 2 inches of entering an enclosure (Figure 10-12 on page 89).
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the cable shield is connected to hard ground at only one point on the bus
segment and is completely isolated from hard ground at all other points on the bus segment. Multiple hard
ground connections on a bus segment can create transient currents in the cable shield, which can result in poor
bus performance and frequent device offline occurrences.
Examples of potential inductive interference include large motors, contractors, relays, welding equipment, high
voltage conductors that are not in metal conduit or raceways, other high wattage devices within 10 m (30 ft) of the
bus cable, and areas of frequent lightning.
Examples of potential radio frequency interference include locations near airports hospitals, radio or television
transmission towers, police and fire stations, or factories. Mobile transmitters in police, fire, emergency, and fleet
vehicles are also potential sources of radio frequency interference.
Note: The majority of properly grounded MS/TP applications do not require soft ground connections, but you
should assess the potential interference that the application may encounter before installation. It is typically easiest
to prepare for soft ground connections when making the bus terminations at the initial installation.
Note: Soft grounds should be connected within 2 inches of the bus terminations of any bus devices that
experiences frequent offline occurrences resulting from high ambient inductive or RF interference (Figure 10-12 on
page 89).
Wiring the SA Bus
The SA Bus can connected using either a 4-wire (2-twisted pair) cable to the SA Bus (screw) terminal block or
6-wire cables with RJ-style modular jacks.
On the 4-wire (2-twisted pair) cable, the + and - wire lead are one of the twisted pairs and the SA PWR and COM
leads make up the second twisted pair.

MS/TP
BUS
• Wire the SA Bus devices in a daisy-chain

network configuration. Maintain polarity
SA PWR
(SA+ to SA+, SA- to SA-, COM to COM,
FIG_SA_TERM
COM
and SA PWR to SA PWR) along entire
+
bus daisy-chain.
• Twist the SA bus leads together before SA Bus
inserting into the termination and ensure Terminal
that the termination is tight at each Block
terminal block on the daisy-chain.
• Each SA Bus must have only one hard
ground connection to the cable shield.
• The single hard ground connection should
be made at the bus supervisor where the
SA Bus originates and should be made
within 2 inches of entering an enclosure.
• All shield connections on the SA Bus must
be isolated from ground and connected in To Next Device To Next Device
continuous segments along the SA Bus. on the SA Bus on the SA Bus
Note: The SA Bus terminal blocks do not
provide an isolated terminal for making 22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire (2 Twisted Pair) Shielded Cable
cable shield connections. Use a small (One is + and - . The second pair is COM and SA PWR.)
wirenut or other suitable connector to Figure 10-13: SA Bus Terminal Block Wiring Details
daisy-chain and isolate the cable shield on
the SA Bus (Figure 10-13 on page 90).
• Isolate the cable shield at the end of the bus segment (opposite the controller).
SA Bus RJ 6-Wire Termination
Network sensors connect to the SA Bus with 24 or 26 AWG, 3-pair cable that terminates with an RJ-style modular
connector. Figure 10-14 on page 90 shows the SA Bus modular jack pin designations.
modularjack
Pin Number Assignment for
Straight-Through Cable
SA+
3 2 1
Printed Circuit Board
SA-
SA Bus Port SA Bus Common (Power from Sensor Terminals to Tool*)
Modular
SA Power (Power from Sensor Terminals to Tool*)
4
Jack
SA Bus Common (Power from Bus to Network Sensor)
6 5
SA Power (Power from Bus to Network Sensor)
* Provides power from Network Sensor SA Bus terminal block to

a connected Wireless Commissioning Converter (MS-BTCVT-0)
or handheld VAV balancing sensor.
Figure 10-14: 6-Pin Modular Jack Pinout Details
IMPORTANT: Failure to adhere to the 6-pin modular jack wiring details can cause the Network Sensor to
function incorrectly and the bus cannot connect to a Wireless Commissioning Converter, Handheld VAV
Balancing Sensor, nor can the system be expanded to include future devices.

MS/TP
BUS
MS/TP Bus Checkout and Testing
Voltage readings on the MS/TP Bus should fall within the following voltage ranges:
Table 10-10: Acceptable Voltage Ratings for the MS/TP Bus
Measurement Lower Limit Upper Limit
+ to COM 2.45 VDC 2.98 VDC
– to COM 2.06 VDC 2.54 VDC
Note: The MS/TP Bus is a token-passing network, so voltage readings may fluctuate as the token is passed
between controllers. This is normal, but the fluctuating values should still be within the range. Also, all voltage
readings change slightly when communication starts.
A bus with voltages outside of these ranges may still communicate, but may function in an impaired state. If the
number of devices or device traffic on an impaired MS/TP Bus increases, communication problems could occur.
Therefore, if your readings are not within the ranges listed in Table 10-10 on page 91, a wire is most likely
grounded, shorted, or crossed with another wire.
If you discover that the MS/TP voltages are outside the recommended ranges, you must locate and fix the problem.
In many cases, poor MS/TP voltage is caused by:
• faulty or improper End-of-Line termination or terminator (often indicated by voltage readings greater than
3 VDC, although not every EOL termination problem is indicated by high-voltage readings)
• short circuit between +, – and/or COM at some point on the bus
• + or – wire reversed on one or more field controllers; this may be the problem if you find that + to COM voltage
is lower than – to COM voltage (+ to COM voltage should always be higher).
Additional troubleshooting tips include the following:
• If the bias reading is far below expected values (for example, near 0), and you validated that the EOLs are
correctly terminated, the + is either shorted or swapped at one or more terminals (either - or Ref) at one or
more controllers.
• If the bias reading is above the expected values and you validated that the EOLs are correctly terminated, the
- and Ref wires are most likely swapped at one or more controllers.
Voltage readings may be out of the tolerances noted in Table 10-10 on page 91; this could indicate a bus
overloading condition. In this case, consider:
• decreasing your device count
• adding a repeater
• checking for noise on the bus
For additional MS/TP troubleshooting information, please contact your Regional Technical Support representative.
Surge Protection on the MS/TP Bus
One pair of surge protectors is required whenever the MS/TP Bus wire is routed outside between two buildings.
Install the protector close to the MS/TP device that first receives the bus wires from the outside (Figure 10-15 on
page 92).
The recommended surge protector is the Transient Eliminator, model TE/JC04C12, manufactured by APT. The
device protects the MS/TP Bus from indirect lightning. It shunts both common and normal mode voltage surges to
ground repeatedly without damage to MS/TP Bus components.

MS/TP
BUS
Do not use it with any other type wiring, such as leased line. If you need surge protection for other wire types,
contact APT or another transient noise protection company.
Surge
Protector
FC Bus
protect1
Surge
Protector
FC Bus
N2 Bus
FC Bus
Figure 10-15: Surge Protector Installation on MS/TP Bus

MS/TP
BUS
Design and Installation of MS/TP MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin LIT-12011034
Communications Buses
NAE5500 and NIE5500
NAE3500 and NAE4500
NCE2500
Specification for the Metasys System Metasys System Field Controllers, Network LIT-12011042
Field Controllers Sensors, and Related Products Product Bulletin
Specifications and Installation of FEC1610 Field Equipment Controller Installation Part No. 24-10143-4
FEC1610 or FEC2610 Field Equipment Instructions
Controllers FEC2610 Field Equipment Controller Installation Part No. 24-10143-12
Instructions
Specifications and Installation of the VMA1610/1620 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10143-20
VMA1600 Series Modular Assemblies
Specifications and Installation of the IOM1710 Input/Output Module Installation Part No. 24-10144-9
IOM1710, IOM2710, IOM3710, and Instructions
IOM4710 Input/Output Modules IOM2710/IOM3710 Input/Output Module Part No. 24-10144-14
Installation Instructions
IOM4710 Input/Output Module Installation Part No. 24-10144-25
Instructions
Integrating the MS/TP Communications BACnet MS/TP Integration with the NAE LIT-12011013
Bus into the Metasys System Technical Bulletin
Installation and Specifications of the NS Surface-Mounted NS Series Network Sensors Part No. 24-10094-9
Series Network Sensors with Setpoint Adjustment Installation Instructions
Surface-Mounted NS Series Network Sensors Part No. 24-10094-17
without Setpoint Adjustment Installation
Instructions
Wallbox-Mounted NS Series Network Sensors Part No. 24-10094-25
with Setpoint Adjustment Installation Instructions
Wallbox-Mounted NS Series Network Sensors Part No. 24-10094-33
without Setpoint Adjustment Installation
Instructions
Installation and Specifications of the TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Part No. 24-9890-226
TEC26xx Series Thermostat Controllers Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and
One-Speed Fan Control Installations Instructions
TEC26x6(H)-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Part No. 24-9890-234
Thermostats with Two Outputs and Three Speeds
of Fan Control Installations Instructions
TEC26x7-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Part No. 24-9890-242
Thermostats with Two Outputs Installations
Instructions
Installation and Specifications of the MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator Part No. 24-10264-4
MS-BACEOL-0 End-of-Line Terminator Installation Instructions

MS/TP
BUS

Setting Device Addresses on the BACnet MS/TP Bus
MS/TP
ADDR
Device Addresses on the BACnet MS/TP Bus
Each device connection on a BACnet MS/TP Bus requires a device address to coordinate communication on the
bus. Each bus has a set of device addresses that is separate and independent from the device addresses on all
other buses. Devices connected to both an FC Bus and SA Bus have two different device addresses, one for each
device connection.
In the MS/TP Bus hierarchy, device connections on separate buses can have the same device address. For
example, every bus supervisor connection on an MS/TP Bus has a device address of 0 (zero), and the device
address for the first network sensor on many SA Buses is 199. Figure 11-1 on page 95 shows an example of an
MS/TP Bus and the device addresses for connections on the FC Bus and the SA Buses.
Ethernet Network
NAE/NCE
ET SY R
FC Bus (Supervisor)
0 Connection and
Address FC Bus Connections
and Addresses FC Bus Connection
VMA 5 6 7 and Address
0 CLE AR =LO W RE D=H IG H
35 IN - LB (4 Nm ) 60 SE CO ND S
U N IV ER SA L
+15 AL LF E
I LD TER MIN ALS A RE PO WER L M I T
I ED
O UT 1
IN
O CO M 1
M A NU A L
I CO M
A D DR E SS 0= OFF
O VE R RI D E
BI N AR Y
O UT 2
FC Bus FC Bus FC Bus

O CO M 2
ON
FEC
SA BU S
FA U LT
POW ER
O UT 3
S EN SO R
O CO M 3
SA
PWR
P OW ER
MS-VM A1 620 -0
Device Device Device 8

S A BU S
C O N FI GU R AB LE
FA U LT
O UT 4
P WR I N: 2 4VA C 2 .5 A, CL AS S 2
CO M
S A BU S O UT PU T S: 24VA C 0 .5 A, CL AS S 2,
O CO M 4
–
PL
I O T DU T Y
FC BU S
+
O UT 5
FC
O CO M 5
EO L
E T SY
SHLD
FC BU S
HO T
CO M
24
–
OP ENE NERG Y
MA NAG EMEN T CO M
+
EQ UIPMENT
15U0
R
4
N
O
FC Bus Connection 0
and Address
Network
199 Sensor
Network
Sensor 199
IOM
SA Bus Connections 200
ON
SA B U S
FA UL T
PO W ER
and Addresses SA Bus Connections
ET S Y
Network and Addresses
R
Network 4
N
O
Sensor
Sensor
FIG_NET_ADDRSS
201 Network
Sensor
200
Figure 11-1: MS/TP Bus Showing FC Bus and SA Bus Addresses
The NAE/NCE is the bus supervisor on an FC Bus. The FEC or VMA is the bus supervisor on an SA Bus. Bus
supervisors have a fixed device address of 0 (zero) that cannot be changed (Figure 11-1 on page 95). Depending
on the model, an NS Series network sensor has either a fixed address of 199 or can be assigned a
switch-selectable address between 200 and 203. Table 11-1 on page 96 provides a list of the MS/TP device
address values and address value ranges for devices connected to an MS/TP Bus.
Because a token-passing message is sent from address to address in consecutive order, any gaps in the device
address range reduce bus performance while the message negotiates the gap to find the next device address on
the bus. For optimal bus performance, start with the lowest device address value and use consecutive address
values for the ranges listed in Table 11-1 on page 96.
Note: The devices on the bus do not need to be physically wired in sequential order as long as no gaps are in the
address value range.

Table 11-1: Valid MS/TP Bus Address Values and Address Ranges
Address Value/ Class Examples
Address Range
MS/TP
ADDR
0 Bus Supervisor NAE/NCE on the FC Bus

FEC and VMA on the SA Bus
1 Reserved Wireless Commissioning Converter
2 Reserved ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator1
3 Reserved DIS1710 Local Controller Display
4 - 127 Master Range FC Bus: FECs, VMA1600s, IOMs, and TEC26xx
SA Bus: IOMs
Note: On applications using an NCE, the address
value 4 is reserved for the NCE integral field
controller.
128 - 254 Slave Range Slave devices and network sensors on the SA Bus
198 Reserved VAV Balancing Sensor (handheld)
199 Reserved Most NS Series Network Sensor models or VAV
Balancing Sensor (wall-mounted)
200 - 203 Reserved NS Series Network Sensors (specified models)
255 Broadcast Do not apply address 255 to any device.
1. At Release 4.1 and later, the MS/TP address of the ZFR1810 Coordinator is no longer fixed at 2. The new address is 120
plus the value summation of switch 8, switch 7, and switch 6 of the PAN Offset on the ZFR1810 Coordinator, giving an
MS/TP address range of 120 to 127. See the example in Figure 34-6 on page 371.
Setting the Address on MS/TP Bus Devices

For most devices on an FC Bus or SA Bus, the device address
is set using the DIP switches on the device’s ADDRESS DIP
switch block. The DIP switch blocks are binary switch blocks
1
and each switch represents a binary numerical value when the 2
switch is in the ON position.
4
The device address set on the ADDRESS DIP switch block
applies to only the bus where the device is not the bus 8
supervisor. For example, the DIP switches on an FEC set the 16
FC Bus address. If the FEC also supervises an SA Bus, the
FEC’s SA Bus address is 0 by default (Figure 11-1 on 32
page 95). The switches on the IOM set the address of the FC 64
Bus or SA Bus depending on the bus on which the IOM is
located. (An IOM is never a bus supervisor.) 128
ON
IMPORTANT: On FEC and VMA1600 Series controllers

(only), the 128 DIP switch on the controller’s device address
DIP switch block is used to enable the controller to operate
in a wireless mode using the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Figure 11-2: Setting the Device Address
Bus System. On any FEC, VMA1600, and IOM Series on the ADDRESS DIP Switch Block
controller that is hardwired to an MS/TP Bus, the 128
DIP switch must be set to the (factory default) OFF
position. Operating any FEC, VMA1600, or IOM that is
hardwired to an MS/TP Bus with the controller’s 128 DIP
switch set to the ON position results in communication
failure on the bus.
An IOM has only one device connection, which can connect to either an FC Bus or an SA Bus (but not both);
therefore, the device address set on an IOM applies to the bus to which the IOM is connected. (An IOM is never a
bus supervisor.)

As you set the device address, the best practice is to set the highest switch value first, then the next highest switch
value, and so on, until the total of the switch values equal the intended device address. For example, to set a
device address for a device on an SA Bus to 227, position switch 128 to ON first, then 64, 32, 2, and 1. Positioning
MS/TP
ADDR
switches 16, 4, and 1 to ON (as shown in Figure 11-2 on page 96) sets the device address to 21 for a device on the
FC Bus.
Note: Devices may go offline momentarily when a device address is changed on an active bus, but the bus
devices and bus supervisor do not need to be reset after changing a device address.
Some devices, such as the TEC26xx Series thermostats and third-party MS/TP devices, use their own
configuration settings to establish the device address on the bus. Refer to the device manufacturer’s product
documentation for instructions on setting the device address. The device address values for TEC26xx thermostats
and all third-party devices must comply with the rules and ranges described previously. See Configuring the
TEC26xx Series Thermostat on page 150 for information on setting TEC26xx Series thermostat device addresses.
See Setting NS Sensor Device Address on page 163 for more information on setting NS Series network sensor
devices addresses.
Setting Device Addresses on the BACnet MS/TP Bus: Section 11 97

MS/TP
ADDR

Configurable Outputs can be defined as: Analog Outputs can be defined as:
Voltage Analog Output (0-10 VDC) Voltage Analog Output (0-10 VDC)
Binary Output (24 VAC Triac) Current Analog Output (4-20 mA)
24 VAC, Class 2
Code No. LIT-410013

Supply Power
Terminal Block
Binary Outputs
Typically 24 VAC Triac outputs
Display
Navigation Keys
HOT
COM
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUT 5
OUT 6
OUT 7
OUT 8
OUT 9
(FEC1620/FEC2620 Only)
OCOM 1
OCOM 2
OCOM 3
OCOM 4
OCOM 5
OCOM 6
OCOM 7
OCOM 8
OCOM 9
Display Area
(FEC1620/FEC2620 Only)
Cover Screw
Status LEDs esc
PWR
FLT
SAB
ET SY R
FC Bus Port
(RJ-12 6-Pin Modular Jack)
Device Address
DIP Switch Block
O
ON N
ADDRESS
EOL
FEC Series Field Equipment Controllers
ADDRESS Ø = ALL OFF

UNIVERSAL BINARY SA BUS
FC Bus End-of-Line
+
–
+
–
+15V
IN1
ICOM1
IN2
ICOM2
+15V
IN3
ICOM3
IN4
ICOM4
+15V
IN5
ICOM5
IN6
ICOM6
IN7
ICOM7
IN8
ICOM8
COM
15V
COM
SHLD
SENSOR Termination Switch
FIG:FEC2620_term
Voltage Analog Input (0-10 VDC)
Current Analog Input (4-20 mA)
Resistive Analog Inputs: FC Bus Terminals and
0-2k ohm Terminal Block
Binary Inputs can be defined as:
RTD: 1k Nickel, 1k Platinum, or A99B SI Dry Contact Maintained Sensor Port
Figure 12-1: FEC2620 Physical Features and Termination Descriptions

NTC: 10k Type L or 2.225k Type 2 SA Bus Terminals and
Pulse Counter Mode (100 Hz high-speed) (RJ-12 6-Pin Modular Jack)
Dry Contact Binary Input Terminal Block
NOTE: The Current (4-20 mA) Analog Input Load Resistor jumpers for Universal Inputs
are located on the inside of the FEC cover. The Binary Output’s INT/EXT power
source jumpers are located under the FEC cover on the termination board.

99
FEC
Application
The FEC Series controllers are designed to run a variety of pre-engineered HVAC applications and provide the
input/output points required for the applications.
Mounting
Controllers on page 15 for more information on mounting FECs.
FEC

• Three fasteners appropriate for the mounting surface (#8 screws) or
• One 20.3 cm (8 in.) or longer piece of DIN rail and appropriate hardware for mounting the DIN rail
FEC Base and Cover
The mounting base may be mounted without the
controller cover. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance
Hinge Cover
to allow for mounting of the controller cover at a later time. Screw
Tabs
Attaching the FEC Cover to the Base
1. Place the hinge tabs on the FEC cover onto the top of
the slots in the FEC base (Figure 12-2 on page 100).
OUT 4
OCOM 4
OUT 5
OCOM 5
OUT 6
OCOM 6
OUT 7
OCOM 7
OUT 8
OCOM 8
OUT 9
OCOM 9
2. Do not fully insert the tabs into the slots. If the tabs
are fully inserted into the slots, the cover may not
close.
3. Close the cover and tighten the cover screw to secure Hinge
Slots
the cover to the base.
Cover_attach.cdr
Wiring
See General Guidelines for Wiring Metasys System UNIVERSAL
SA BUS
Networks on page 17 and Wiring the FC Bus on page 88
+15V
COM
STAT
+
–
for wiring guidelines. For SA Bus wiring information and
important device limitations, see Wiring the SA Bus on
page 89 and SA Bus Device Limits on page 79,
respectively. Figure 12-2: Attaching the FEC Cover
Table 12-1 on page 103 defines the power,
communication bus, and input/output terminals found on the FECs and provides information on the electrical
ratings, requirements, and devices that connect to the terminals. Table 12-1 on page 103 also provides
recommended cable or wire type for each terminal block or port.
See Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards on page 465 for more information on alternative cable and wire
types, sizes, and lengths for connecting an FEC to the field buses, power supply, and the application control points.
To install the FEC for wired operation, see Hard-Wired Installation on page 100. To install the controller for wireless
operation using the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus system, see Wireless Installation on page 101.
Hard-Wired Installation
To install the FEC for hard-wired operation:
1. Terminate wiring as shown in your engineering drawings. For examples, see Termination Details on page 105.
2. Wire Network Sensors and other devices to the SA Bus or RJ12 modular jack for sensors.
3. Wire the FC Bus in a daisy chain to other devices on the FC Bus and the supervisory controller.
4. Wire the SA Bus in a daisy chain.
5. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate address (in the range of 4-127).
6. Connect 24 VAC Class 2 power to the FEC.
The FEC is ready for commissioning using the Controller Configuration Tool (CCT). Refer to the CCT Help.

Wireless Installation
Wireless installation depends on the FEC model: FEC1610, FEC1620, or FEC26x0.
Wiring FEC1610 Model
To install the FEC1610 Controller for use with the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System:
1. Terminate wiring as shown in your engineering drawings. For examples, see Termination Details on page 105.
2. If you have SA Bus devices, such as IOMs, wire them to the FC Bus Terminal Block (not the SA Bus Terminal
FEC
Block) in a daisy-chained fashion.
3. If you need to install a DIS1710 Local Controller
Display, balancing network sensor, or Wireless Installing a ZFRCBL Wire Harness
Commissioning Converter (BTCVT) at the FEC1610
Controller, install a ZFRCBL wire harness between FC Bus Terminal Block
the SA Bus and FC Bus terminal blocks as shown in

PWR
COM
SHLD
Note: The ZFRCBL wire harness is necessary only
COM
+
SA
-
-
when a DIS1710 Local Controller Display, balancing
network sensor, or BTCVT is to be used at the
FEC1610 Controller. The ZFRCBL wire harness
combines +15 VDC from the SA Bus terminal with +,
PWR
COM
COM
SA
and -, and COM from the FC Bus terminal to provide a
SH
+
LD
-
+
powered jack for SA Bus devices. SA BUS FC BUS

Terminal Block Terminal Block
4. If applicable, connect the DIS1710 Local Controller Plug Plug
Display, network sensor, or BTCVT to the RJ-12 jack ZFRCBL
Wire
at the end of the ZFRCBL wire harness (Figure 12-3 Harness
on page 101). Use a 1:2 phone jack splitter if you
need to connect two devices to the wire harness.
5. Connect the ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router to
the Sensor port RJ-12 jack (Figure 12-3 on
page 101). For details on the ZFR1811 Router, see
RS-485 (RJ-12) Jack
ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router on page 377.
6. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to Wiring ZFR1811 Router: FEC1610 Only
the appropriate address (in the range of 4-127). Set
DIP switch 128 to the ON position, which enables
ZFR1811
wireless mode on an FEC16x0 Controller that uses Router FEC1610
the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System. (no Display)
00 -1 0-8D- xx- xx-xx-x x-xx
7. Connect 24 VAC Class 2 power to the FEC.

The FEC1610 is ready for commissioning using the CCT. POW ER
FAUL T
SA BUS
ET SY R
IOM
Refer to the CCT Help. ON

O
N
PO W ER
F AU L T
ET SY R
O ON
N
Wiring FEC1620 Model

C OM C O M
+
–
FC Bus
P WR
SA
+
–
To install the FEC1620 Controller for use with the Sensor

Port
ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System: ZFRCBL
Wire Harness
with Phone
1. Terminate wiring as shown in your engineering Jack Splitter
drawings. For examples, see Termination Details on ET S Y R
esc
page 105.
DIS1710 BTCVT
2. Install a ZFRCBL wire harness between the SA Bus
Note: Other SA bus devices, such as the network
and FC Bus terminal blocks as shown in Figure 12-3 sensor, can be connected to the ZFRCBL wire
harness. Do not wire any other devices directly
on page 101.
FIG:FEC_Wrng
to the SA Bus terminal block.

Note: The ZFRCBL wire harness is required when the
FEC1620 Controller is used with the ZFR1800 Series
Figure 12-3: Installing a ZFRCBL Wire Harness
Wireless Field Bus system.
FEC Series Field Equipment Controllers: Section 12 101

3. Connect the ZFR1811 Router to the RJ-12 jack at
the end of the ZFRCBL wire harness (Figure 12-4 ZFR1811
on page 102). Router FEC1620
4. If you have SA Bus devices, such as Input/Output 00 -1 0- 8D- xx- xx-x x-x x-xx
(built-in Display)
Modules (IOMs), wire them to the SA Bus Terminal
Block (not the FC Bus Terminal Block) in a daisy- P WR esc
IOM
chained fashion. FLT
S AB
E T SY R
FEC
5. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to ON

PO W ER
F A UL T
ET SY R
the appropriate address (in the range of 4-127). Set O

N ON
C OM C O M
+
–
SA Bus
P WR
SA
+
–
DIP switch 128 to the ON position, which enables Sensor
wireless mode on an FEC16x0 Controller that uses Port
the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus system.
ZFRCBL
Wire Harness
FIG:FEC2_Dis_ZFR
Wiring FEC26x0 Model BTCVT
To install the FEC26x0 Controller for use with the
ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System:
1. Terminate wiring as shown in your engineering Note: Do not wire any other devices directly
drawings. For examples, see Termination Details on to the FC Bus terminal block.
page 105.
Figure 12-4: Wiring ZFR1811 Router: FEC1620 Only
2. Wire Network Sensors and other devices to the SA
Bus or RJ12 modular jack for sensors.
3. Connect the ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router to ZFR1811
the FC Bus Port in front of the controller (Figure 12-5 Router
on page 102). 00 -1 0- 8D- xx- xx- xx-x x-xx
4. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to

the appropriate address (in the range of 4-127). Be FEC26x0
sure that DIP switch 128 is set to ON, which enables
wireless mode on an FEC26x0 Controller that uses
OCO M 1
CO M
HO T
OUT 1
OUT 2
O COM 2
OUT 3
O COM 3
OUT 4
O COM 4
OUT 5
O COM 5
OUT 6
O COM 6
OUT 7
O COM 7
OUT 8
O COM 8
OUT 9
O COM 9
the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus system. PW R e sc
FIG:FEC26x0_ZFR
FLT
SA B
ET SY R
5. Connect 24 VAC Class 2 power to the FEC. ON

UNIVERSAL
ADDRESS
BINARY SA BUS
SHLD
EOL
PWR
COM
COM
IC OM1
IC OM2
IC OM3
IC OM4
IC OM5
IC OM6
IC OM7
IC OM8
+15 V
+15 V
+15 V
SA
SENSO R
+
+
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
IN 8
The FEC1610 is ready for commissioning using the

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT). Refer to the CCT Note: When you plug a ZFR1811 Router into
Help. the FC Bus port, do not wire any devices
to the FC Bus terminal block.
Figure 12-5: Wiring the ZFR1811 Router: FEC26x0

Only

Table 12-1: FEC Terminal Wiring (Part 1 of 2)
Terminal Terminal Function and Electrical Ratings/Requirements Recommended Cable
Block Label or Wire Type1
Universal IN +15 V Provides 15 VDC power for active devices connected to the 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire
Universal IN terminal blocks (3-wire connection) twisted, non-shielded cable
FEC1610: 35 mA total current for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
FEC2610: 100 mA total current
FEC
IN n Analog Input, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Accepts a 0-10 VDC input signal twisted, non-shielded cable
10 VDC maximum input voltage for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
Analog Input, Current Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Accepts a 4-20 mA input signal twisted, non-shielded cable
Note: For current sensing applications, the FEC16x0 does not
provide a jumper to close the current loop when the controller is
powered off. This option is available on FEC26x0 controllers
only.
Analog Input, Resistive Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Accepts 0-600k ohm input signal twisted, non-shielded cable
Internal 12 V, 15k ohm pullup for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
RTD (1k Nickel [Johnson Controls], 1k Platinum, A99B
Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
1.0 second minimum pulse width (0.5 Hz at 50% duty cycle) twisted, non-shielded cable
ICOM n The signal common for all Universal IN terminals; isolated from 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
all other terminal commons. twisted, non-shielded cable
for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
(Use 3-wire cable for active
devices that connect to
+15 V terminal also.)
Analog OUT OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Sources 0-10 VDC output voltage twisted, non-shielded cable
FEC2610 External 1k ohm minimum load required for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
Only
Analog Output, Current Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Sources 4-20 mA output current twisted, non-shielded cable
External 300 ohm maximum load required
OCOM n The signal common for Analog OUT terminals; isolated from all 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
other terminal commons twisted, non-shielded cable
for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
Binary IN IN n Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
0.01 second minimum pulse width (50 Hz at 50% duty cycle) twisted, non-shielded cable
0.01 second minimum pulse width (50 Hz at 50% duty cycle)
ICOM n The signal common for all Binary IN terminals; isolated from all
other terminal commons, excluding CO terminal commons that
are configured as AOs

Table 12-1: FEC Terminal Wiring (Part 2 of 2)
Terminal Terminal Function and Electrical Ratings/Requirements Recommended Cable
Block Label or Wire Type1
Binary OUT OUT n Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
(Jumper Set Connects OUT to OCOM when activated twisted, non-shielded cable
to External) 30 VAC maximum output voltage for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
FEC
1.3 A at 25% duty cycle

Maximum 6 cycles per hour with M9220-BGx-3
OCOM n The signal common for Binary OUT terminals; isolated from all
other terminal commons, including BO terminal commons
Binary OUT OUT n Sources 24 VAC Class 2 Power (Hot) 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
(Jumper Set OCOM n Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac twisted, non-shielded cable
to Internal) for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
Connects OCOM to 24 VAC Power (Com) when activated (low
side switching)
Configurable OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
OUT Sources 0-10 VDC twisted, non-shielded cable
External 1k ohm minimum load required for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
Connects OUT to OCOM when activated twisted, non-shielded cable
30 VAC maximum output voltage for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
1.3 A at 25% duty cycle
Maximum 6 cycles per hour with M9220-BGx-3
OCOM n Analog Output: The signal common for all analog configured 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire
CO terminals; isolated from all other terminal commons, twisted, non-shielded cable
excluding BI terminal commons. for runs of <30 m (90 ft)
Binary Output: The signal common for binary configured CO
terminals; isolated from all other terminal commons, including
CO terminal commons.
Sensor2,3 Sensor Provides SA Bus network communication 24 AWG 3-pair CAT 3 cable
RJ-12 6-position modular connector <30.5 m (100 ft)
SA Bus2,4 + Provides SA Bus network communication 22 AWG stranded, 4-wire
- (2 twisted-pairs), shielded
COM cable recommended
SA PWR Sources 15 VDC power for devices on the SA Bus
FC Bus3 + Provides FC Bus communication network 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire
- twisted, shielded cable
COM recommended
SHLD Provides an optional shield connection
24~ Power Hot AC Supply Input 20 to 16 AWG, 2-wire
Supply 20-30 VAC (Nominal 24 VAC)
COM 24~ Power common; isolated from all other terminal commons
1. For longer cable runs, refer to the respective FEC Installation Instructions for alternative wire gauges and lengths.
2. The SA Bus terminals and the RJ-style modular Sensor Port are daisy-chained internally.
3. The SA Bus and FC Bus specifications are for Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) bus communications at 38.4k.
4. The SA Bus and FC Bus specifications in this table are for MS/TP bus communications at 38.4k.

Termination Details
provide details for wiring inputs and outputs to a particular controller. See Table 12-2 on page 105 and the figures
it references for FEC termination details.
Table 12-2: FEC Termination Detail Matrix
FEC

DETAIL F131/V131 Temperature Sensor Input DETAIL F103/V103 Voltage Input (Self Powered)
FIELD
IN#
DEVICE
ICOM# OUT IN#
RTD FEC/IOM COM ICOM#
FEC
Temperature or FEC/IOM
Element VMA16xx or
VMA16xx
DETAIL F101/V101 Voltage Input - External Source DETAIL F104 Current Input - External Source
(in Loop)
FIELD FIELD
DEVICE DEVICE
+ POWER - IN#
- SUPPLY + ICOM#
OUT IN# FEC/IOM
POWER
COM ICOM#
SUPPLY
FEC/IOM +
or -
VMA16xx
DETAIL F102/V102 Voltage Input – Internal Source DETAIL F105 Current Input - External Source
(Isolated)
FIELD FIELD DEVICE

DEVICE Signal + IN#
+ IN# Output - ICOM#
- ICOM# +
Power FEC/IOM
+ VDC +15V -
FEC/IOM
POWER -
or
FIG:feciom_prt1
SUPPLY
VMA16xx +
Figure 12-6: FEC/IOM/VMA-16xx Termination Details: UIs

DETAIL F106 Current Input - Internal Source DETAIL F107 Current Input - Internal Source
(2 Wire) (3 Wire)
FIELD
FIELD DEVICE
DEVICE + VDC +15V
+ VDC +15 V + IN#
FEC
Output IN# - ICOM#
FEC/IOM FEC/IOM
DETAIL F116 Feedback from EPP-1000 DETAIL F301/V301 Binary Input (Dry Contact)
EPP-1000 FIELD DEVICE

Wh/Vio
Retracted ICOM# ICOM#
Wh/Org IN# IN#
Stroked +15V DRY CONTACT
Wh/Brn FEC/IOM
(N.O. or N.C. as or
FEC/IOM required) VMA16xx
DETAIL F201/V201 Analog Output (Voltage) DETAIL F202 Analog Output (Current)
FIELD FIELD
DEVICE DEVICE
+ OUT# + OUT#
- OCOM# - OCOM#
FIG:feciom_prt2
FEC/IOM FEC/IOM
or
VMA16xx
Figure 12-7: FEC/IOM/VMA-16xx Termination Details: UIs, BIs, AOs

FEC
108
DETAIL F244/V244 0-10 VDC Output to Actuator DETAIL F264/V264 0-10 VDC Output to Actuator
Add Jumper from 24VAC Com to

only one AO Com per Transformer
Common 1 24VAC Com Common 1 N
24 VAC
Power 2 24VAC Hot Power 2 H
Calibration Output 3 OCOM# Calibration Output 3 OCOM#
Current Input 4 OUT# Current Input 4 OUT#
Voltage Input 5 FEC/IOM Voltage Input 5 FEC/IOM

or Feedback 6 or
Feedback 6
VMA16xx VMA16xx
Terminal Block 1
Terminal Block 1

DETAIL F254 0-20 mA Output to Actuator DETAIL F274 0-20 mA Output to Actuator
Add Jumper from 24VAC Com to

only one AO Com per Transformer
Common 1 24VAC Com Common 1 N
24 VAC
Power 2 24VAC Hot Power 2 H
Calibration Output 3 OCOM#
Calibration Output 3 OCOM#
Current Input 4 OUT#
Current Input 4 OUT#
Voltage Input 5 FEC/IOM
Voltage Input 5 FEC/IOM
Feedback 6
Feedback 6
Figure 12-8: FEC/IOM/VMA-16xx Termination Details: COs, AOs

Terminal Block 1
t r_p 3
Terminal Block 1
Foi ce:f
GI m
DETAIL F801/V801 24 VAC Triac Output DETAIL F901 24 VAC Triac Output
(Switch Low, Externally Sourced) (Switch High, Externally Sourced)
FIELD
DEVICE 24V Com FIELD
H 24V Hot DEVICE OCOM#
N OUT# H OUT#
OCOM# N 24V Com
24V Hot
FEC/IOM
or FEC/IOM
VMA16xx
DETAIL F862/V862 Incremental Control to Actuator DETAIL F962 Incremental Control to Actuator
24V Com 24V Hot

COM 24V Hot COM 24V Com
CW OUTb CW OUTb
CCW OUTa CCW OUTa
OCOMb OCOMa
OCOMa OCOMb
Figure 12-9: FEC/IOM Termination Details: COs

t r_p 4
FEC/IOM FEC/IOM
Foi ce:f
GI m
or
VMA16xx
FEC Series Field Equipment Controllers: Section 12

109
FEC
FEC
110
DETAIL F401 24 VAC Binary Output DETAIL F501 24 VAC Binary Output
FIELD
DEVICE 24V Com FIELD
DEVICE OCOM#
H 24V Hot
H OUT#
N OUT#
N 24V Com
OCOM# OUT#
OUT# 24V Hot INT
FEC/IOM
INT FEC/IOM
EXT EXT
TRIAC JUMPER TRIAC JUMPER

DETAIL F462 Incremental Control to Actuator DETAIL F562 Incremental Control to Actuator
24V Com 24V Hot

COM 24V Hot COM 24V Com OUTa
CW OUTb CW OUTb INT
CCW OUTa CCW OUTa
EXT
OCOMb OCOMa
OUTb
OCOMa OCOMb INT
Figure 12-10: FEC/IOM Termination Details: BOs

FEC/IOM OUTa OUTb FEC/IOM
r 6
INT
t_p
INT EXT
EXT EXT TRIAC JUMPERS
Foi c:ef
GI m
TRIAC JUMPERS
DETAIL NS101 Network Thermostat with Phone Jack
Fixed Address = 199
THERMOSTAT CIRCUIT BOARD
CABLE WITH AN -RJ12

J1
CONNECTOR ON EACH END
J2
FEC
1 6 1 6
JACK J2 IS FOR 1 1
COMMISSIONING TOOLS
. J1 2 2
3 3
4 4
Terminal1 is to SENSOR 6- Pin
the extreme left PHONE PLUG5 5 CONTROLLER
SENSOR PLUG
as you face the ( JACK J1) 6 6
Jack opening,
Tab Notch down .
DETAIL NS102 Network Thermostat with Terminals Addressable
THERMOSTAT CIRCUIT BOARD ADDRESS

C- + SWITCH SW1 SW2 ADDRESS
ON
2 OFF OFF 200
W4 1 201
ON OFF
OFF ON 202
J2 203
ON ON
SA PWR
COM
ON
JACK J2 IS FOR
+
-
COMMISSIONING TOOLS
. CONNECTOR ON STAT
MOUNTING BASE. SLIDES INTO
W4 PINS ON CIRCUIT BOARD
.
{ }
+ + TO NEXT
FROM - -
PREVIOUS COM COM SA BUS DEVICE
SA PWR SA PWR ( IF REQUIRED)
SA BUS DEVICE ( 15 VDC )
(15 VDC)
DETAIL NS 103 Network Thermostat with Terminals Fixed

Fixed Address = 199
THERMOSTAT CIRCUIT BOARD
C- +
W4
J2
SA PWR
COM
JACK J2 IS FOR
+
-
COMMISSIONING TOOLS
. CONNECTOR ON STAT
MOUNTING BASE. SLIDES INTO
W4 PINS ON CIRCUIT BOARD
.
{ }
+ +
FROM -
FIG:feciom_prt5
COM - TO NEXT
PREVIOUS SA PWR COM SA BUS DEVICE
SA BUS DEVICE ( 15 VDC ) SA PWR
( IF REQUIRED )
( 15 VDC )
Figure 12-11: FEC/IOM/VMA-16xx Termination Details: Network Thermostat

Set the FEC FC Bus address on the ADDRESS DIP switches (if required). See Setting Device Addresses on the
BACnet MS/TP Bus on page 95.
Set the FEC EOL switch according to the FEC controller’s position on the FC Bus segment. See EOL Termination
on the MS/TP Bus on page 81.
Setting the FEC Input and Output Jumpers
FEC
Jumper ENABLE
Analog Input Load Resistor Enable/Disable
Jumper positioned
The Analog Input Resistor Enable/Disable jumpers on top two pins
Analog Input_Jumpers.cdr
(J10 through J15) are located on the circuit board in the
FEC cover. These jumpers connect an internal 100 ohm
resistor across the input terminals for 4-20 mA Pins DISABLE (Default)
applications that require a closed circuit. Set the jumper Jumper positioned
for each Universal Input as shown in Figure 12-12 on on bottom two pins
page 112, also refer to Table 12-3 on page 112.
Table 12-3: Jumper Labels and UI Points
Controller Jumper Position Universal Input (UI) Figure 12-12: Analog Input Resistor Jumper
FEC16x0 J10 UI1 Positions
FEC26x0
FEC16x0 J11 UI2
FEC26x0
FEC26x0 J12 UI3
FEC26x0 J13 UI4
FEC26x0 J14 UI5
FEC26x0 J15 UI6
Binary Output INT/EXT Jumpers

The Binary Output jumpers (OUT1 through OUT3) are
INT
located on the circuit board in the mounting base near the Jumper
binary outputs. These jumpers select whether the output Jumper positioned
on top two pins
Binary OUT_Jumpers.cdr
provides power to the load (INT) or requires external
power (EXT). See Figure 12-13 on page 112.
IMPORTANT: Do not set the Binary Output EXT (Default)

jumpers to INT when an external transformer is Jumper positioned
wired to the Binary Output terminals. Failure to Pins
on bottom two pins
follow this precaution may cause damage to the
controller. Figure 12-13: Binary Output Jumper Positions
When set to the INT position, the FEC is the power source
for the Binary Output, and both sides of the load can be wired directly to the OUTx and COMx terminals.
Setting the jumper to the EXT position isolates the Binary Outputs and power must come from one or more external
sources. Do not wire the load directly to the OUTx and COMx terminals. Wire one side of the load to the source
and the other side of the load to the OUTx terminal. Wire the other side of the external power source to the COMx
terminal.
Commissioning
Commission the FEC using the Wireless Commissioning Converter with Bluetooth technology and the CCT
software. Refer to the CCT Help.

Troubleshooting
The Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) indicate operational status for the FEC. Use Table 12-4 on page 113 to
troubleshoot an FEC Series controller.
Table 12-4: FEC1610 and 2610 Status LEDs
Name Color Normal Descriptions
Power/PWR Green On Steady Off Steady = No Power
On Steady = Power is supplied by Primary Voltage.
FEC
Fault/FLT Red Off Steady Blink = Download or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operation
Off Steady = No Faults
On Steady = Device Fault; no application loaded; Main Code download required, if
controller is in Boot mode, or a firmware mismatch exists between the FEC and the
ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router.
FC Bus/FCB Green Blink - 2 Hz Blink = Data Transmission (normal communication)
Off Steady = No Data Transmission (auto baud in progress)
SA Bus/SAB Green Blink - 2 Hz Blink = Data Transmission (normal communication)
Off Steady = No Data Transmission (N/A - auto baud not supported)

Table 12-5: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up FECs
Specifications and Installation of FEC16x0 or FEC16x0 Field Equipment Controller Part No. 24-10143-4
FEC26x0 Field Equipment Controllers Installation Instructions
FEC26x0 Field Equipment Controller Part No. 24-10143-12
FEC
Design and Installation of MS/TP MS/TP Communication Bus Technical Bulletin LIT-12011034
Communication Buses
Designing, Installing, Commissioning, ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System LIT-12011295
Operating, and Troubleshooting a ZFR1800 Technical Bulletin
Series System on a Metasys Network
Locating, Mounting, and Wiring ZFR1810 ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator Part No. 24-10325-2
Coordinators, and ZFR1811 Routers Installation Instructions
Installation and Configuration of Devices Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help LIT-12011147
Model Information
Table 12-6: FEC Series Controllers Model Information
MS-FEU1610-0 10-point field equipment controller with 2 UI, 1 BI, 3 BO, and 4 CO, 24 VAC, and SA Bus,
with mounting base, single pack
MS-FEU1610-0U 10-point field equipment controller with 2 UI, 1 BI, 3 BO, and 4 CO, 24 VAC, and SA Bus,
with mounting base, single pack
Note: This model is UL Listed, File S4977, UUKL 864 - 9th Edition, Smoke Control
Equipment.
MS-FEC1610-0 Field equipment controller cover with 2 UI, 1 BI, 3 BO, and 4 CO, 24 VAC, and SA Bus,
single Pack
MS-FEB1610-0 Triac mounting base for FEC16x0, single pack
MS-FEU1620-0 10-point field equipment controller with display; 2 UI, 1 BI, 3 BO, and 4 CO; 24 VA;
SA Bus; mounting base; single pack
MS-FEU1620-0U 10-point field equipment controller with display; 2 UI, 1 BI, 3 BO, and 4 CO; 24 VA;
SA Bus; mounting base; single pack
Equipment.
MS-FEC1620-0 Field equipment controller cover with display; 2 UI, 1 BI, 3 BO, and 4 CO; 24 VA;
SA Bus; single pack
MS-FEU2610-0 17-point field equipment controller cover with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, and 4 CO, 24 VAC,
and SA Bus with mounting base, single pack
MS-FEU2610-0U 17-point field equipment controller cover with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, and 4 CO, 24 VAC,
and SA Bus with mounting base, single pack
Equipment.
MS-FEC2610-0 Field equipment controller cover with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, and 4 CO, 24 VAC, and SA
Bus, single pack
MS-FEB2610-0 Triac mounting base for FEC26x0, single pack
MS-FEU2620-0 17-point field equipment controller cover with display; 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, and 4 CO;
24 VAC; SA Bus; mounting base; single pack
MS-FEU2620-0U 17-point field equipment controller cover with display; 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, and 4 CO;
24 VAC; SA Bus; mounting base; single pack
Equipment.
MS-FEC2620-0 Field equipment controller cover with display; 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, and 4 CO; 24 VAC;
SA Bus; single pack

Table 12-7: FEC Controllers (Part 1 of 2)
Product Code Numbers MS-FEU1610-0 Field Equipment Controller Unit - Cover and Mounting Base
MS-FEC1610-0 Field Equipment Controller - Cover
MS-FEB1610-0 Field Equipment Controller - Mounting Base
MS-FEU1620-0 Field Equipment Controller Unit - Cover with Display and Mounting Base
MS-FEC1620-0 Field Equipment Controller - Cover with Display
FEC
MS-FEB1610-0 Triac Mounting Base
MS-FEU2610-0 Field Equipment Controller Unit - Cover and Mounting Base
MS-FEC2610-0 Field Equipment Controller - Cover
MS-FEB2610-0 Field Equipment Controller - Mounting Base
MS-FEU2620-0 Field Equipment Controller Unit - Cover with Display and Mounting Base
MS-FEC2620-0 Field Equipment Controller - Cover with Display
MS-FEB2610-0 Triac Mounting Base
Supply Voltage 20-30 VAC at 50 or 60 Hz
Power Consumption 10 VA maximum plus all BO and Configurable Output loads
Ambient Operating Conditions 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); 10 to 90% RH noncondensing
Ambient Storage Conditions -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F); 10 to 90% RH noncondensing
Terminations Screw terminals
Controller Addressing DIP switch set (4-127). Addresses 1-3, 128-254 are reserved.
Communications Bus BACnet MS/TP; 3-wire FC Bus between the NAE/NCE and other devices. 4-wire SA Bus
between network sensors and other devices.1
Output Resolution and Analog Output Points: 16-bit resolution, +200 mV accuracy
Accuracy
Mounting Surface mounting clips or a single 35 mm DIN rail
Dimensions (H x W x D) FEC1610: 144 x 150 x 53 mm (5-11/16 x 5-15/16 x 2-1/8 in.)
Minimum space for mounting: 174 x 350 x 110 mm (6.8 x 13.8 x 4.3 in.)
FEC2610: 180 x 127 x 58 mm (7-1/16 x 5 x 2-1/4 in.)
Housing Plastic housing
Plastic material: ABS + polycarbonate UL94 5VB
Protection: IP20 (IEC529)
Weight FEC16x0: 0.50 kg (1.10 lb)
FEC26x0: 0.68 kg (1.5 lb)

Table 12-7: FEC Controllers (Part 2 of 2)
(MS-FEU1610-0U, MS-FEU1620-0U, MS-FEU2610-0U, MS-FEU2620-0U models only)
Canada
UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment;
FEC

Europe
Immunity Standard for Heavy Industrial Environment, and the Low Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC in accordance with EN 60730-1 (1999) Automatic electrical controls for
household and similar use.
BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) 135-2004 Listed BACnet Application Specific
Controller (B-ASC)
1. For more information, refer to the MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011034).

Code No. LIT-410014
Pneumatic Tubing
(for Static Air Pressure Sensor)
Universal Input can be defined as:
Voltage Analog Input (0-10 VDC) Manual Override
Resistive Analog Input:
Button
0-2k ohm
RTD: 1k Nickel, 1k Platinum, or A99B SI
NTC: 10k Type L or 2.225k Type 2
Dry Contact Binary Input
CLEAR=LOW RED=HIGH 35 IN-LB (4Nm) 60 SECONDS
+15 ALL FIELD TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
OUT 1
IN
OCOM 1 Binary Outputs
Device Address ICOM
UNIVERSAL
24 VAC Triac 1620
DIP Switch Block OUT 2
BINARY
OCOM 2
ADDRESS 0=OFF
OUT 3
Network Sensor Port OCOM 3
(6-Pin Modular Jack)
SENSOR
SA
PWR
OUT 4 Configurable Outputs
COM
SA Bus OCOM 4 can be defined as:
SA BUS
–
Terminal Block +
OUT 5
Voltage Analog Output
FC (0-10 VDC)
CONFIGURABLE
VMA1600 Series VAV Modular Assemblies
EOL OCOM 5
Binary Output
SHLD
End-of-Line (24 VAC Triac)
COM
24
Termination Switch –
FC BUS
+
24 VAC, Class 2
Supply Power
FC Bus Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Status LEDs
Figure 13-1: Typical VMA 1600 Physical Features and Termination Descriptions

117
VMA1600
Application
The VMA1600 Series controllers are configurable digital controllers with an integral, air-pressure sensor and an
actuator for driving a damper (Figure 13-1 on page 117). The VMA1600 Series controllers are designed for BACnet
MS/TP applications on the FC Bus.
The VMA1600 controllers provide control for cooling, cooling with reheat, dual duct fans, and supply/exhaust fans
applications.
Mounting
See General Guidelines for Locating and Mounting Controllers on page 14 for more information on mounting the
VMA1600.
VMA1600
Preparing the VMA1600 for Mounting

• 8 mm (5/16 in.) square wrench or 10 mm (3/8 in.) 12-point socket for actuator collar screw
• pliers to turn the damper shaft (if needed)
• 8 mm (5/16 in.) hex nut driver or 100 mm (4 in.) extension for 8 mm (5/16 in.) socket and power screwdriver for
self-drilling screw
• 3.5 mm (9/64 in.) drill bit (optional)
Check that you have the following equipment:
• VMA1600 Series controller
• NS Series network sensor, thermostat or other compatible room temperature sensor/control
• room sensor cable or wire for connecting the room sensor to the VMA1600
• appropriate cable or valve (if applicable)
Ensure that the installation site meets the following environmental requirements:
• VMA1600 location is protected, as much as possible, from water caused by leaking pipes, condensation, or
dripping solder from sweating pipe joints.
• atmosphere is free of explosive vapors or escaping gases.
• atmosphere is free of exposure to corrosive chemical or salt vapors, which might damage electrical equipment.
• maintain the ambient operating limits shown in the Installation Specifications on page 125. Flow measurement
accuracy suffers if the ambient temperature varies widely within this band.
IMPORTANT: The VMA1600 Series controllers require a damper shaft protrusion of at least 44 mm (1-3/4 in.)
from the surface the VMA is mounted on.
Make sure the VMA1600 mounting location has adequate clearance for future servicing.
Mounting the VMA1600
To mount the VMA1600:
1. Place the VMA1600 in the proper mounting position on the damper shaft so that the wiring connections are
easily accessible. Make sure the VMA base is parallel to the VAV box (perpendicular to the damper shaft). If
needed, use a spacer to offset tipping of the VMA caused by the shaft bushings.
IMPORTANT: When the air supply to the VAV box is below 10°C (50°F), make sure that any condensation on
the VAV box, particularly on the damper shaft, does not enter the electronics. Mount the VMA1600 vertically
above the damper shaft to allow any shaft condensation to fall away from the VMA controller. Additional
measures may be required in some installations.

2. Secure the self-tapping No.10 screw through the VMA1600 mounting slot with a power screwdriver and
100 mm (4 in.) extension socket. Otherwise, use a punch to mark the position of the shoulder washer, and then
drill a hole into the VAV box using a 3.5 mm (9/64 in.) drill bit. Insert the mounting screw, and tighten it against
the washer.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten the screws, or the threads may strip. If mounting to the VAV box, make sure
the screws do not interfere with damper blade movement.
3. Locate the damper position using the typical marking on

the end of the damper-shaft (Figure 13-2 on page 119).
d_shaft
4. Note the direction (CW or CCW) required to close the
VMA1600
damper.
5. The open end-stop is automatically set for 90° (full Figure 13-2: Typical Damper End Shaft Icons
travel) boxes. For boxes that require 45° and 60° to
achieve full travel, hard stops must be provided at both fully closed and fully open damper positions. By
installing the VMA1600 at the fully open position, the VMA provides the open stop for 45° and 60° boxes. The
closed damper seal provides the fully closed stop.
Grasp the damper shaft firmly with pliers and either manually close the damper for 90° boxes or manually open
for 45° or 60° boxes.
6. Push down and hold the Manual Override button (see Figure 13-1 on page 117), and turn the VMA1600
coupler until it contacts the mechanical end-stop at either the fully closed (90° boxes) or fully open (45° and 60°
boxes) position.
7. If the damper for the box requires 90° to achieve full travel and closes CCW, rotate the coupler to the CCW
mechanical limit. If the damper for the box requires 90° to achieve full travel and closes CW, rotate the coupler
to the CW mechanical limit.
8. Tighten the square coupler bolt to the shaft using an 8 mm (5/16 in.) wrench or 10 mm (3/8 in.) 12-point socket.
Tighten the bolt to 17 to 21 N·m (150 to 180 lb·in [14 lb·ft]).
9. Loop the pneumatic tubing to include a trap for condensation. Attach the tubing from the VMA1600 to the VAV
box pickup. The HIGH (red) tubing is connected to the inlet or high-pressure side and the clear tubing to the
low side (see Figure 13-1 on page 117).
10. Push the manual release button, and turn the actuator coupling manually to ensure that the actuator can rotate
from full closed to full open positions without binding.
11. Complete the mounting by rotating the damper to the full open position.
CAUTION: Risk of Property Damage.
! Rotate the damper to full-open position before starting the air handler. Failure to rotate the damper to
the full-open position may result in damage to the Variable Air Volume (VAV) box or ductwork when
the air handler is started.
VMA1600 Series VAV Modular Assemblies: Section 13 119

Set the VMA1600 FC Bus device address on the ADDRESS DIP switches. See Setting the Address on MS/TP Bus
Devices on page 96.
Set the VMA1600 EOL switch according to the VMA1600 controller’s position on the FC Bus segment. See EOL
Termination on the MS/TP Bus on page 81.
Wiring
See General Guidelines for Wiring Metasys System Networks on page 17 and Wiring the FC Bus on page 88 for
general wiring guidelines. For SA Bus wiring information and important device limitations, see Wiring the SA Bus
on page 89 and SA Bus Device Limits on page 79, respectively.
VMA1600
Note: Many VMA1600 space sensors are connected to the VMA using modular jacks and cables with RJ modular
plugs. See Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors on page 17 for more information on installing network devices
with RJ jacks.
To install the VMA1600 for wired operation, see Hard-Wired Installation on page 120. To install the controller for
wireless operation using the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus system, see Wireless Installation on page 120.
Hard-Wired Installation
To install the FEC for hard-wired operation, see Figure 13-1 on page 117 and Table 13-2 on page 122, and:
1. Terminate the input and output point wiring per project engineering drawings. For examples, see Termination
Details on page 123.
2. Wire network sensors and other devices to the SA Bus or Sensor jack.
3. Connect the VMA1600 to the FC Bus at the FC Bus terminals.
4. Connect the VMA1600 to 24 VAC, Class 2 power supply at the 24~ terminals.
Wireless Installation
To install the VMA1600 for use with the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System:
1. Terminate the input and output point wiring per project engineering drawings. For examples, see Termination
Details on page 123.
2. Connect the VMA1600 to the FC Bus at the FC Bus terminals. If you have other FC Bus devices, wire them to
the FC Bus Terminal Block in a daisy-chained fashion.
3. If you need to install a balancing network sensor or
Wireless Commissioning Converter (BTCVT) at the SA Bus Terminal Block FC Bus Terminal Block
VMA1600 Controller, install a ZFRCBL wire harness
between the SA Bus and FC Bus terminal blocks as
COM
PWR
SHLD
COM
+
SA
-
Note: The ZFRCBL wire harness is necessary only

when a balancing network sensor or BTCVT is to be
used at the VMA1600 Controller. The ZFRCBL wire
harness combines +15 VDC from the SA Bus terminal
PWR
COM
COM
SA
-
+
SH
LD
-
+
with +, and -, and COM from the FC Bus terminal to
SA BUS FC BUS
provide a powered jack for SA Bus devices. Terminal Block Terminal Block
Plug Plug
ZFRCBL
Wire
Harness
FIG:ZFRCBL
RS-485 (RJ-12) Jack
Figure 13-3: Installing a ZFRCBL Wire Harness

4. If applicable, connect the network sensor or BTCVT VMA1600
to the RJ-12 jack at the end of the ZFRCBL wire
harness (Figure 13-4 on page 121). Use a 1:2 phone ZFR1811
OU T 1
O CO M 1
OU T 2
O CO M 2
OU T 3
O CO M 3
O UT 4
O CO M 4
O UT 5
O CO M 5
H OT
C OM
Router B IN A R Y C O N FI G U R A BL E 24
A LL FIELD TERM IN ALS A RE P OW ER LI M ITED

jack splitter if you need to connect two devices to the
O U TP U TS : 2 4 VA C 0 . 5 A , C LA SS 2 ,
3 5 IN -LB (4 Nm ) 6 0 SEC ON DS
2 4 VA C 2 . 5 A, C L A SS 2
MS-VM A 16 20-0
P IL O T D UT Y
wire harness. 00 -1 0- 8D- xx- xx-x x-x x-xx
P W R IN :
OPEN ENERGY
M ANAGEM ENT
EQUIPM ENT
5. Connect the ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router to
PO W ER
SA B U S
FC B U S
FA U LT
C LEAR= LO W RED = HIG H
15U0
A D D R ES S 0 =O FF
the Sensor port RJ-12 jack (Figure 13-4 on U N IV ER S A L

S EN S O R
SA BUS FC B US
IOM
I CO M
PWR
SHLD
COM
EOL
COM
+15
SA
FC
IN
+
–
–
page 121). For details on the ZFR1811 Router, see ET SY
ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router on page 377.

PO W ER R
F A UL T
SA FC
Sensor Bus Bus O
N
ON
C OM C O M
+
–
FC Bus
P WR
6. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to
SA
Port
+
–
the appropriate address (in the range of 4-127). Set
VMA1600
DIP switch 128 to the ON position, which enables ZFRCBL
wireless mode on an VMA1600 Controller that uses Wire Harness
the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System. with Phone
Jack Splitter
FIG:VMA_ZFR
7. Connect the VMA1600 to 24 VAC, Class 2 power
AN TE NN A
supply at the 24~ terminals.
Important Notes Network Sensor BTCVT
Note: To meet NEC requirements for line voltage greater

Figure 13-4: Wiring ZFR1811 Router: VMA1600
than 150 VAC, Terminal 1 can be earth grounded.
Note: When supplying 24 VAC low voltage power to
multiple VAV boxes, one 100 VA low-voltage, power-limited, Class 2 transformer is usually used to power five or six
VMA Controllers. See Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors on page 17 for specific calculations for the maximum
number of controllers allowed, not to exceed the 100 VA limit. See Low Voltage Cabling on page 18 for voltage
drop calculations to determine wire size requirements.
Commissioning
Use the following procedure to commission the VMA1600.
1. Download the control application to the VMA1600 using the CCT. Refer to CCT Help.
2. Commission the VAV Box. Refer to CCT Help.
3. Perform airflow balancing on the VAV box. Refer to the VAV Balancing Sensor Technical Bulletin
(LIT-1201187).
4. Perform commissioning checkout procedures. Refer to CCT Help.
Troubleshooting
Table 13-1 on page 121 defines the VMA1600 Status LEDs and what they indicate.
Table 13-1: VMA1600 LED Indicators
Power Green On Steady Off = No Power
On Steady = Power is Supplied by Primary Voltage.
Fault Red Off Steady Blink (flicker) = Download or startup in progress, not ready for
normal operation
SA Bus/FC Bus Green Blink (flicker) Blink (flicker) = Data Transmission (normal communication)
Off Steady = No Data Transmission (auto baud in progress, N/A for
SA bus)

Table 13-2: VMA1600 Wiring List (Part 1 of 2)
Block Labels Cable or Wire Type1
Universal IN +15 V Sources 15 VDC power for active devices 22 AWG stranded,
35 mA total current 3-wire twisted, non-
shielded cable for runs
of <30 m (90 ft)
IN n Analog Input, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded,
Accepts a 0-10 VDC input signal 2-wire twisted, non-
10 VDC Maximum Input Voltage shielded cable for runs
of <30 m (90 ft)
VMA1600
Analog Input, Resistive Mode 22 AWG stranded,

Accepts 0-600k ohm input signal 2-wire twisted, non-
Internal 12 V, 15k ohm pullup shielded cable for runs
of <30 m (90 ft)
Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode 22 AWG stranded,
1 s minimum pulse width (0.5 Hz at 50% duty cycle) 2-wire twisted, non-
Internal 12 V, 15k ohm pullup shielded cable for runs
of <30 m (90 ft)
ICOM n The signal common for all Universal IN terminals; isolated 22 AWG stranded,
from all other terminal commons 2-wire twisted, non-
of <30 m (90 ft)
(Use 3-wire cable for
active devices that
connect to +15 V
terminal also.)
Binary OUT OUT n Sources 24~ Power (Hot) 22 AWG stranded,

OCOM n Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac 2-wire twisted, non-
Connects OCOM to 24~ Power (Com) when activated
of <30 m (90 ft)
Configurable OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-
OUT Sources 0-10 VDC wire twisted, non-
External 1k ohm minimum load required shielded cable for runs
of <30 m (90 ft)
Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac Mode 22 AWG stranded,
Connects OUT to OCOM when activated 2-wire twisted, non-
30 VAC maximum output voltage shielded cable for runs
of <30 m (90 ft)
OCOM n Analog Output: The signal common for all analog configured 22 AWG stranded,
CO terminals; isolated from all other terminal commons. 2-wire twisted, non-
Binary Output: The signal common for binary configured shielded cable for runs
Configurable Out terminals; isolated from all other terminal of <30 m (90 ft)
commons, including CO terminal commons.
Sensor2,3 Sensor Provides SA Bus communication network 24 AWG 3-pair CAT 3
RJ-12 6-position modular connector Cable <30.5 m (100 ft)

Table 13-2: VMA1600 Wiring List (Part 2 of 2)
Block Labels Cable or Wire Type1
SA Bus2,3 + Provides SA Bus communication network 22 AWG stranded,
- 4-wire (2 twisted pair),
COM shielded cable
SA PWR Sources 15 VDC power for devices on the SA Bus
FC Bus3 + Provides FC Bus communication network 22 AWG stranded,
- 3-wire twisted, shielded
COM cable recommended
VMA1600
SHLD Provides an optional shield connection
24~ Power Hot Low-Voltage AC Supply Input 20 to 16 AWG, 2-wire
commons
1. For longer cable runs, refer to the VMA1610/1620 Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-10143-20) for alternative wire
gauges and lengths.
2. The SA Bus and the Sensor Port are daisy-chained internally.
3. The SA Bus and FC Bus specifications in this table are for MS/TP bus communications at 38.4k. For more information,
refer to the MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011034).
Termination Details
it references for VMA1600 termination details.
Table 13-3: FEC Termination Detail Matrix
0-10 VDC Output to Actuator (External Source) CO or AO V244 Figure 12-8 on page 108
0-10 VDC Output to Actuator (Internal Source) CO or AO V264 Figure 12-8 on page 108
24 VAC Binary Output (Switch Low, External Source) BO V702 Figure 13-5 on page 124
24 VAC Binary Output (Switch Low, Internal Source) BO V701 Figure 13-5 on page 124
24 VAC Triac Output (Switch Low, External Source) CO or AO V801 Figure 12-9 on page 109
Dry Contact (Binary Input) UI or BI V301 Figure 12-7 on page 107
Incremental Control to Actuator (Switch Low, External Source) CO or AO V862 Figure 12-9 on page 109
Temperature Sensor UI V131 Figure 12-7 on page 107
Voltage (Analog Output) CO or AO V201 Figure 12-7 on page 107
Voltage Input - External Source UI V101 Figure 12-7 on page 107
Voltage Input - Internal Source UI V102 Figure 12-7 on page 107
Voltage Input (Self-Powered) UI V103 Figure 12-7 on page 107

DETAIL V701 24 VAC Binary Output
(Switch Low, Internally Sourced)
Internal Wiring
24V Com
FIELD
DEVICE 24V Hot
H OUT#
N OCOM#
VMA16xx
VMA1600
DETAIL V762 Incremental Control to Actuator

(Switch Low, Internally Sourced)
Internal Wiring
OUTb
OUTa
COM 24V Hot
CW OCOMb
CCW OCOMa
24V Com
FIG:vma_prt1
VMA16xx
Figure 13-5: VMA-16xx Termination Details: BOs
Table 13-4: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up VMA1600
Daily Operation of the Metasys System Metasys System Help On the Help Menu,
Extended Architecture, Navigating the UI, select Metasys Help
Monitoring and Controlling the BAS Networks or LIT-1201793
Installation Considerations and Guidelines, for VMA1610/1620 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10143-20
VMA1600
Features, Point Types, Selection Chart, and VAV Modular Assembly (VMA) 1600 LIT-1900347
Accessories for VMA1600 Series Catalog Page
Installation for the VAV Balancing Sensor Handheld VAV Balancing Sensor Part No. 24-10211-2
Configuring MS/TP Network and Integrating MS/ MS/TP Communications Bus Technical LIT-12011034
TP Devices Into the Metasys System Extended Bulletin
Architecture
Dialing into Metasys System Extended Metasys System Extended Architecture LIT-1201639
Architecture from a Computer Direct Connections and Dial-up
Connection Application Note
Designing, Installing, Commissioning, ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus LIT-12011295
Operating, and Troubleshooting a ZFR1800 System Technical Bulletin
Series System on a Metasys Network
Locating, Mounting, and Wiring ZFR1810 ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator Part No. 24-10325-2
Coordinators, and ZFR1811 Routers Installation Instructions

Model Information
Table 13-5: VMA1600 Series Model Information
MS-VMA1610-0 Integrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (Cooling Only), FC Bus, and SA Bus,
Single Pack
MS-VMA1610-0U Integrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (Cooling Only), FC Bus, and SA Bus,
Single Pack
Note: This model is UL Listed, File S4977, UUKL 864 - 9th Edition, Smoke Control Equipment.
MS-VMA1620-0 Integrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (with Reheat and Fan Control), FC Bus, and
SA Bus, Single Pack
MS-VMA1620-0U Integrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (with Reheat and Fan Control), FC Bus, and
VMA1600
SA Bus, Single Pack
Note: This model is UL Listed, File S4977, UUKL 864 - 9th Edition, Smoke Control Equipment.
Table 13-6: MS-VMA1600 Series (Part 1 of 2)
Product Code Number MS-VMA1610-0, Cooling Only
MS-VMA1620-0, Cooling with Reheat
Power Consumption 10 VA typical, 14 VA maximum, Class 2 Energy Limited
Power delivered to devices connected to the binary outputs (valves, relays, and similar
devices) is not included in this rating.
Ambient Operating Conditions 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Ambient Storage Conditions -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F)
Terminations 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) spade lugs except communications and 24 VAC power, which are screw
terminals
Controller Addressing DIP switch set to 4-127. (The addresses 1-3 and 128-254 are reserved.)
Communications Bus BACnet MS/TP; 3-wire Field Controller Bus (FC Bus) between the NAE/NCE and other
master and slave devices. 4-wire SA Bus between network sensors and other slave
devices.
Mounting Mounts to damper shaft using single set screw and to duct with single mounting screw.
(MS-VMA1610-0U and MS-VMA1620-0U models only)
Canada
Europe
Controller (B-ASC)

Dimensions Width: 182 mm (7.2 in.)
Length: 182 mm (7.2 in.)
Height: 64 mm (2.5 in.)
Center of Output Hub to Center of Anti-rotation Slot: 160 mm (6.3 in.)
Weight 0.86 kg (1.9 lb)
Actuator Rating 4 N·m (35 lb·in) minimum; Minimum shaft length = 44 mm (1-3/4 in.)
VMA1600

Configurable Outputs can be defined as: Analog Outputs can be defined as:
Voltage Analog Output (0-10 VDC) Voltage Analog Outputs (0-10 VDC)
Binary Output (24 VAC Triac) Current Analog Outputs (4-20 mA)
Note: For IOM2710 and IOM3710 models,
Code No. LIT-410015

the terminals on this side of the module are 24 VAC, Class 2
used for Relay Outputs and Universal Outputs. Supply Power
Terminal Block
Binary Outputs
Typically 24 VAC Triac outputs
HOT
COM
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUT 5
OUT 6
OUT 7
OUT 8
OUT 9
OCOM 1
OCOM 2
OCOM 3
OCOM 4
OCOM 5
OCOM 6
OCOM 7
OCOM 8
OCOM 9
Cover Screw
Status LEDs POWER
ET SY R
FAULT
IOM Series Input/Output Modules
SA/FC Bus Port

(6-Pin Modular Jack)
Device Address
O
ON N
DIP Switch Block ADDRESS
EOL
FC
-
+
COM
15V

UNIVERSAL BINARY
SA End-of-Line
-
+
SA
PWR
COM
+15V
IN1
ICOM1
IN2
ICOM2
+15V
IN3
ICOM3
IN4
ICOM4
+15V
IN5
ICOM5
IN6
ICOM6
IN7
ICOM7
IN8
ICOM8
Termination Switch

Voltage Analog Input (0-10 VDC)
Resistive Analog Inputs: FC Bus or SA Bus
0-2k ohm
Figure 14-1: IOM4710 Physical Features and Termination Descriptions

Binary Inputs can be defined as: Terminal Block
RTD: 1k Nickel, 1k Platinum, or A99B SI
NTC: 10k Type L or 2.225k Type 2 Dry Contact Maintained
Dry Contact Binary Input Pulse Counter Mode (100 Hz high-speed)
NOTE: The Current (4-20 mA) Analog Input Load Resistor jumpers for Universal Inputs are located on the inside of the FEC cover.
The Binary Output’s INT/EXT power source jumpers are located under the FEC cover on the termination board.

127
IOM
Application
The IOM1710, IOM2710, IOM3710, and IOM4710 Series Input/Output Modules are Metasys system MS/TP field
equipment controllers that provide increased input and output point capacity on large MS/TP Bus applications.
Table 14-1 on page 128 shows the point count types per model.
Table 14-1: Point Count Types per Model
Point Types Signals Accepted IOM1710 IOM2710 IOM3710 IOM4710
UI Analog Input, Voltage Mode, 0 - 10 VDC 0 2 4 6
Analog Input, Current Mode, 4 - 20 mA
Analog Input, Resistive Mode, 0-2k ohm, RTD
(1k NI [Johnson Controls], 1k PT, A99B SI), NTC
(10k Type L, 2.252k Type 2)
Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode
BI Dry Contact Maintained Mode 4 0 0 2
Pulse Counter Mode (High Speed), 100 Hz
AO Analog Output, Voltage Mode, 0 - 10 VDC 0 0 0 2
Analog Output, Current Mode, 4 - 20 mA
IOM
BO 24 VAC Triac 0 0 0 3
UO Analog Output, Voltage Mode, 0 - 10 VDC 0 2 4 0
Binary Output Mode, 24 V AC/DC FET
Analog Output, Current Mode, 4 - 20 mA
CO Analog Output, Voltage Mode, 0 - 10 VDC 0 0 0 4
Binary Output Mode, 24 VAC Triac
Relay Output 120/240 VAC 0 2 4 0
120/240 VAC

You need the following tools to install the IOM:
• Three fasteners appropriate for the mounting surface (#8 screws or M4 screws) or
• One 20.3 cm (8 in.) or longer piece of DIN rail and appropriate hardware for mounting the DIN rail
Mounting
Controllers on page 15 for more information on mounting IOMs.
Setting the FC or SA Bus Address and EOL Switch
Set the IOM FC/SA Bus address on the ADDRESS DIP switches. See Setting Device Addresses on the BACnet
MS/TP Bus on page 95.
Set the IOM EOL switch according to the IOM controller’s position on the FC/SA Bus segment. See EOL
Termination on the MS/TP Bus on page 81.
Setting the IOM4710 Jumpers
Jumper ENABLE
Analog Input Load Resistor Enable/Disable
Jumper positioned
The Analog Input Resistor Enable/Disable jumpers on top two pins
Analog Input_Jumpers.cdr
(J10 through J15) are located on the circuit board in the

IOM4710 cover. These jumpers connect an internal
100 ohm resistor across the input terminals for 4-20 mA Pins DISABLE (Default)
applications that require a closed circuit. There is a
Jumper positioned
jumper for enabling each Universal Input (Figure 14-2 on on bottom two pins
page 128).
Figure 14-2: Analog Input Resistor Jumper
Positions

Binary Output INT/EXT Jumpers (IOM4710)
The Binary Output jumpers (OUT1 through OUT3) are INT
located on the circuit board in the mounting base near the Jumper
Jumper positioned
binary outputs. These jumpers select whether the output on top two pins
Binary OUT_Jumpers.cdr
provides internal power to the load (INT) or requires
external power (EXT). See Figure 14-3 on page 129.
When set to the INT position, the IOM is the power source EXT (Default)
for the Binary Output and both sides of the load can be Jumper positioned
wired directly to the OUTx and COMx terminals. on bottom two pins
Pins
Setting the jumper to the EXT position isolates the Binary Figure 14-3: Binary Output Jumper Positions
Outputs and power must come from one or more external
sources. Do not wire the load directly to the OUTx and COMx terminals. Wire one side of the load to the source
and the other side of the load to the OUTx terminal. Wire the other side of the external power source to the COMx
terminal.
Universal Inputs for 4-20mA Applications
IOM
Software configuration of the Universal Input normally selects the enabling or disabling of the analog input load
resistor. In cases when the analog input load resistor must be left connected even when power is OFF to the
controller, set this jumper to the ENABLE position.
Note: This jumper must be in the DISABLE position for all Universal Input modes other than 4-20 mA.
Universal Outputs for 4-20mA Applications
The IOM2710 and IOM3710 models include Universal Outputs that accept 4 to 20 mA applications.
Wiring
See General Guidelines for Wiring Metasys System Networks on page 17 and Wiring the FC Bus on page 88 for
general wiring guidelines. For SA Bus wiring information and important device limitations, see Wiring the SA Bus
To wire the IOM:
1. Terminate wiring per engineering drawings. For examples, see Termination Details on page 132.
2. If the IOM is connected to the FC Bus of a NAE or NCE, wire the FC Bus in a daisy chain.
3. If the IOM is connected to the SA Bus of an NCE or FEC, wire the SA Bus in a daisy chain.
4. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate hardware address (in the range of 4-127).
5. Connect power to the IOM.
6. Download and commission the IOM. For more information, refer to the CCT Help.
IOM Series Input/Output Modules: Section 14 129

Table 14-2: Typical IOM Field Controller Platform Wiring List (Part 1 of 3)
Terminal Terminal Function and Electrical Ratings/Requirements Wiring Requirements1
Block Labels
Universal IN +15V Sources 15 VDC power for active devices 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire twisted,
100 mA total current non-shielded cable for runs of
<30 m (90 ft)
IN n Analog Input, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
Accepts a 0-10 VDC input signal non-shielded cable for runs of
10 VDC Maximum Input Voltage <30 m (90 ft)
Internal 75k ohm pulldown
Analog Input, Current Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
Accepts a 4-20 mA input signal non-shielded cable for runs of
Internal 100 ohm load Impedance <30 m (90 ft)
Analog Input, Resistive Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
Accepts 0-600k ohm input signal non-shielded cable for runs of
IOM
Internal 12 V, 15k ohm pullup <30 m (90 ft)

Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
1 s minimum pulse width (0.5 Hz at 50% duty cycle) non-shielded cable for runs of
22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
non-shielded cable for runs of
<30 m (90 ft)
(Use 3-wire cable for active
devices that connect to +15V
terminal also.)
ICOM n The input signal common for all Universal IN terminals; 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire twisted,
isolated from all other terminal commons non-shielded cable for runs of
<30 m (90 ft)
Universal OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
OUT Sources 0-10 VDC output voltage non-shielded cable for runs of
1k ohm minimum load <30 m (90 ft)
Binary Output Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
24 V AC/DC FET non-shielded cable for runs of
Connects OUT to OCOM when activated. <30 m (90 ft)
30 V AC/DC maximum output voltage
40 mA minimum load current (hold current)
Analog Output, Current Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
Sources 4-20 mA output current non-shielded cable for runs of
External 300 ohm maximum load required <30 m (90 ft)
OCOM n The output signal common; isolated from all other 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
terminal commons, including UO terminal commons. non-shielded cable for runs of
<30 m (90 ft)

Block Labels
Relay Output OUT NO n Normally Open Contact
Control Connects OCOM to OUT NO when activated.
240 VAC maximum voltage
1/3 hp 125 VAC, 1/2 hp 250 VAC
400 VA Pilot Duty @ 240 VAC
3 A Non-inductive 24-240 VAC
OCOM n The relay signal common; isolated from other terminal
commons, including Relay Output terminal commons.
OUT NC n Normally Closed Contact
Connects OCOM to OUT NC when activated.
240 VAC maximum voltage
1/3 hp 125 VAC, 1/2 hp 250 VAC
IOM
3 A Non-inductive 24-240 VAC
Binary IN IN n Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
0.01 s minimum pulse width (50 Hz at 50% duty cycle) non-shielded cable for runs of
0.01 s minimum pulse width (50 Hz at 50% duty cycle)
ICOM n The signal common for all Binary IN terminals; isolated
from all other terminal commons
Analog OUT OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
Sources 0-10 VDC output voltage non-shielded cable for runs of
External 1k ohm minimum load required <30 m (90 ft)
Analog Output, Current Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
Sources 4-20 mA output current non-shielded cable for runs of
External 300 ohm maximum load required <30 m (90 ft)
OCOM n The signal common for Analog OUT terminals; isolated 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
from all other terminal commons non-shielded cable for runs of
<30 m (90 ft)
Binary OUT OUT n Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
(Jumper Set Connects OUT to OCOM when activated non-shielded cable for runs of
to External) 30 VAC maximum output voltage <30 m (90 ft)
OCOM n The output signal common for Binary OUT terminals;
isolated from all other terminal commons, including BO
terminal commons
Binary OUT OUT n Sources 24~ Power (Hot) 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
(Jumper Set OCOM n Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac non-shielded cable for runs of
to Internal) <30 m (90 ft)
Connects OCOM to 24~ Power (Com) when activated

Block Labels
Configurable OUT n Analog Output, Voltage Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
OUT Sources 0-10 VDC non-shielded cable for runs of
External 1k ohm minimum load required <30 m (90 ft)
Binary Output, 24 VAC Triac Mode 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
Connects OUT to OCOM when activated non-shielded cable for runs of
30 VAC maximum output voltage <30 m (90 ft)
OCOM n Analog Output: The signal common for all analog 22 AWG stranded, 2-wire twisted,
configured CO terminals; isolated from all other terminal non-shielded cable for runs of
commons, excluding BI terminal commons. <30 m (90 ft)
Binary Output: The signal common for binary configured
IOM
CO terminals; isolated from all other terminal commons,

including CO terminal commons.
Sensor2,3 Sensor Provides SA Bus communication network 30.5 m (100 ft) maximum length
RJ-12 6-position connector Phone cord
SA Bus2 + Provides SA Bus communication network Daisy-chained
- 366 m (1,200 ft) maximum length
COM 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2 (18 to 24
SA PWR Sources 15 VDC power for devices on the SA Bus AWG)
(22 AWG Recommended)
FC Bus3 + Provides FC Bus communication network Daisy-chained
- 1,524 m (5,000 ft) maximum length
COM 0.6 mm to 1.5 mm2 (18 to 24
SHLD Provides an optional shield connection AWG)
(22 AWG Recommended)
24~ Power Hot AC Supply Input 18 AWG
commons
1. For longer cable runs, refer to the respective IOM Installation Instructions for alternative wire gauges and lengths.
2. The SA Bus and the Sensor Port are daisy-chained internally.
3. The SA Bus and FC Bus specifications in this table are for MS/TP bus communications at 38.4k. For more information,
refer to the MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011034).
Termination Details
it references for IOM termination details.
Table 14-3: IOM Termination Detail Matrix (Part 1 of 2)

Table 14-3: IOM Termination Detail Matrix (Part 2 of 2)
IOM
Commissioning
Commission the IOMs using the Wireless Commissioning Converter (BTCVT) and the CCT software. For more
information, refer to the CCT Help. Figure 14-1 on page 127 shows an example of the IOM Wiring Interface.
Troubleshooting
Table 14-4 on page 133 defines the IOM LED indicators and what they indicate.
Table 14-4: IOM1710 LED Indicators
Power Green On Steady Off = No Power
On Steady = Power is Supplied by Primary Voltage.
Fault Red Off Blink (flicker) = Download or startup in progress, not ready for
normal operation
SA Bus/FC Bus Green Blink (flicker) Blink (flicker) = Data Transmission (normal communication)
Off Steady = No Data Transmission (auto baud in progress, N/A for
SA bus)

Table 14-5: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up IOMs
Design and Installation of MS/TP MS/TP Communication Bus Technical LIT-12011034
Communication Buses Bulletin
Specifications and Installation of the IOM1710 Input/Output Module Installation Part No. 24-10144-9
IOM1710, IOM2710, IOM3710, and Instructions
IOM4710 Input/Output Modules
IOM2710/IOM3710 Input/Output Module Part No. 24-10144-17
IOM4710 Input/Output Module Installation Part No. 24-10144-25
Instructions
Model Information
Table 14-6: IOM Series Model Information
IOM
MS-IOM1710-0 4-Point IOM with 4 BI, FC Bus and SA Bus Support

MS-IOM1710-0U 4-Point IOM with 4 BI, FC Bus and SA Bus Support
Equipment.
MS-IOM2710-0 6-Point IOM with 2 UI, 2 UO, 2 BO, FC Bus, and SA Bus Support
MS-IOM2710-0U 6-Point IOM with 2 UI, 2 UO, 2 BO, FC Bus, and SA Bus Support
Equipment.
MS-IOM3710-0 12-Point IOM with 4 UI, 4 UO, 4 BO, FC Bus, and SA Bus Support
MS-IOM3710-0U 12-Point IOM with 4 UI, 4 UO, 4 BO, FC Bus, and SA Bus Support
Equipment.
MS-IOU4710-0 17-Point IOM with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, 4 CO, 24 VAC, and SA Bus with Mounting Base,
Single Pack
MS-IOU4710-0U 17-Point IOM with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, 4 CO, 24 VAC, and SA Bus with Mounting
Base, Single Pack
Equipment.
MS-IOB4710-0 Triac Mounting Base for IOM4710 (17-Point), Single Pack
MS-IOM4710-0 Controller Cover for IOB4710 (17-Point), Single Pack
Accessories
Table 14-7: IOM1710, 2710, 3710 Accessories Ordering Information
TP-2420 Transformer, 120 VAC Primary to 24 VAC secondary, 20 VA, Wall Plug
Y65T31-01 Transformer, 120/208/240 VAC Primary to 24 VAC Secondary, 40 VA, Foot Mount, 8 in.
Primary Leads and Secondary Screw Terminals, Class 2
AS-XFF050-0 Power transformer (Class 2, 24 VAC, 50 VA maximum output), no enclosure
AP-TBK4SA-0 Replacement MS/TP SA Bus Terminal, 4 Position Connector, Brown, bulk pack
AP-TBK4FC-0 Replacement MS/TP FC Bus Terminal, 4 Position Connector, Blue, bulk pack
AP-TBK3PW-0 Replacement Power terminal, 3 Position Connector, Grey, bulk pack
MS-BTCVT-0 Wireless Commissioning Converter with Bluetooth Technology
1. Additional Y60 Series transformers are also available.

IOM4710 Accessories Ordering Information
TP-2420 Transformer, 120 VAC Primary to 24 VAC secondary, 20 VA, Wall Plug
Y65T31-01 Transformer, 120/208/240 VAC Primary to 24 VAC Secondary, 40 VA, Foot Mount, 8 in.
Primary Leads and Secondary Screw Terminals, Class 2
AS-XFR050-0 Power transformer (Class 2, 24 VAC, 50 VA maximum output), no enclosure
MS-BTCVT-0 Wireless Commissioning Converter, with Bluetooth Technology
1. Additional Y60 Series transformers are also available.
Table 14-8: IOM Specifications (Part 1 of 2)
Product Code Numbers MS-IOM1710-0, MS-IOM2710-0, MS-IOM3710-0, MS-IOM4710-0
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, Class 2 (50 or 60 Hz)
Power Consumption 10 VA typical, 14 VA maximum (plus the total of all connected BO and Configurable
Output loads)
IOM
Ambient Operating Conditions 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); <90% RH noncondensing
Ambient Storage Conditions -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F); <90% RH noncondensing
Terminations Screw terminals
3-position screw terminal pluggable blocks: AP-TBK1003-0
4-position screw terminal pluggable blocks: AP-TBK4SA-0 and AP-TBK4FC-0
Communications Bus BACnet MS/TP, 3-wire FC bus between the NAE/NCE and other master and slave
devices. 4-wire SA Bus between network sensors and other slave devices.
Output Resolution and Analog Output Points: 16-bit resolution, +200 mV accuracy
Accuracy
Mounting 2 or 3 Surface mounting clips or a single 35 mm DIN rail
Dimensions MS-IOM1710-0: 127 x 108 x 58 mm (5 x 4 x 2 in.)
(Height x Width x Depth) Minimum space for mounting: 210 x 350 x 110 mm (8.3 x 13.8 x 4.3 in.)
MS-IOM2710-0, MS-IOM3710-0, and MS-IOM4710-0 Input/Output Module:
180 x 127 x 58 mm (7 1/16 x 5 x 2 1/4 in.)
Output Relay Contacts MS-IOM2710-0, MS-IOM3710-0:
Electrical Ratings 1/3hp 125 VAC, 1/2hp 250 VAC
400 VA Pilot Duty at 240 VAC

Table 14-8: IOM Specifications (Part 2 of 2)
Agency Compliance United States
(MS-IOMx710-0U and MS-IOU4710-0U models only)
Canada
Europe
IOM

Controller (B-ASC)

DIS1710 Local Controller Display
Display Red Alarm Removable
Screen Keypad LED* Back Plate
FIG:DIS_LEDs
* Alarm Light-Emitting Diode (LED) not currently in use.
** RJ-12 6-pin modular jack. To use port, remove cap plug. When done, replace cap plug.
Figure 15-1: DIS1710 Physical Features and Termination Descriptions
Application
DIS1710
The DIS1710 Local Controller Display is a stand-alone display module designed for installation on the front panel
of an enclosure. The Display can connect to the NCE or FEC models that do not have integral displays. The
Display provides a local user interface for the application running in the controller. The CCT is used to configure the
display.
You need the following tools to install the Display:
• power saw for cutting a hole into the panel to hold the Display, if no hole is provided
• small Phillips-head screwdriver
Note: The Display also uses a cable harness for installations with the ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router and
FEC1610 Controller; its product code number is MS-ZFRCBL-0.
Mounting
Location Considerations
The Display is mounted onto the front panel door of an enclosure.
Mounting Dimensions
See Figure 15-2 for the mounting dimensions of the Display.
Front View
Back View
231
238
9 9.37
ET SY R
DIS
85.9 63.8
3.4 2.5
FIG:DIS_Dims
Depth: 25.8 (1.0)

SA Bus Removable Removable
Access Hole Back Plate O-Ring
Figure 15-2: DIS1710 Mounting Dimensions, mm (in.)
Preparing the Panel
The Display is mounted onto the front panel door of the
enclosure. The panel door must have a maximum
thickness of 6.35 mm (.250 in.). Also, if the panel you 91.6
3.61
intend to use lacks a presized cutout, make the cutout
70.6 x 216.4 mm (2.78 x 8.52 in.). See Figure 15-3 on
page 138 for the recommended cutout location. 70.6 DIS1710 Display
2.78
Mounting Display to Enclosure Door
95.0 216.4
Follow these steps to mount the Display onto the front of 3.74 8.52
the enclosure door (Figure 15-4 on page 138):
1. Loosen the two thumb screws on the back plate, but
do not remove them.
2. Detach the back plate from the Display by using a
small Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the two
back plate screws. Tilt the back plate forward to
remove it from the retaining tabs.
FIG:DIS_Pnl_Dims
3. Insert the O-ring into the gland (slotted groove) in the
back of the Display (Figure 15-5 on page 138).
DIS1710
4. Insert the Display into the front access hole on the

Figure 15-3: Panel Cutout for DIS1710, mm (in.)
panel door. Hold in place.
5. Carefully insert the back plate to the other side of the
access hole (inside of the panel door) and secure it to
the cutout by hand-tightening the two thumb screws.
You may need to tilt the back plate to slide it onto the Display
Front Piece
two bottom retaining tabs.
Panel
6. Using the screwdriver, tighten the two back plate Cutout
screws to secure the back plate in place. Tighten the
thumb screws against the panel to provide a snug fit.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten the thumb screws. Insert O-ring

into Gland
Overtightening the screws may exert too much pressure (slotted groove).
on the back plate.
Two Back Plate Attach Removable

Screws Back Plate into
Cutout in Panel.
Thumb
Screw
FIG:Encl_Dis_Mnt
FIG:DIS_Feats
Thumb SA Bus Retaining Removable

Screw Access Hole Tabs O-Ring
Figure 15-5: DIS1710 Back Plate
Figure 15-4: Binary Output Jumper Positions

Wiring
The Display receives power over the SA Bus from the NCE or FEC controller.
Note: Do not connect the Display to an NCE or FEC that has an integral display. Also, do not connect more than
one Display on the same SA Bus.
Connecting Cable to Controller
Connect the communication cable (included in box) between the SA Bus connector on the back of the Display and
the SA Bus jack on the front of the controller (Figure 15-6 on page 139). The coiled cable is 91 cm (3 ft) in length
and can be stretched to a maximum length of 152 cm (5 ft).
DIS1710
SA Bus
Jack
FIG:FEC_encl_dr
Figure 15-6: Connecting the SA Bus Cable
If the SA Bus jack on the controller is in use, you can wire the Display’s communication cable to the SA Bus
terminal block. Splice one end of the communication cable and connect it to the SA Bus terminal block using the
wiring designations in Figure 15-7 on page 140.
DIS1710 Local Controller Display: Section 15 139

If you are connecting the Display to an FEC1610 that uses the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus system, and the
SA Bus terminal block is in use, rewire by installing a ZFRCBL wiring harness and telephone jack splitter, then
connecting the Display’s communication cable to either side of the splitter (Figure 15-7 on page 140).
ZFR1811 Router
SA Bus Port 00 -1 0- 8D-xx- xx- xx-x x-xx
FEC1610
Modular
Jack
POW ER ET SY R
FAULT
SA BUS

Straight-Through Cable ON O
N
6 5 4 3 2 1 Sensor
Port
SA Bus Com
SA Power
SA Bus Com
SA-
SA+
SA Power
ZFRCBL
Wire Harness
with Phone
Jack Splitter
ET S Y esc
To other
R
sensor bus
DIS1710 devices.
DIS1710
Note: Other sensor bus devices, such as the network

sensor, can be connected to the ZFRCBL wire
harness. Do not wire any other devices directly
to the SA Bus terminal block.
SA PWR
COM
+
FIG;SA_FC_Wrng
Figure 15-7: Wiring Cable to SA Bus Terminal Block

Power On the Controller
1. Supply power to the controller.
2. Close the panel door of the enclosure.
3. Verify that the Display is on and initiating the startup sequence.
Commissioning
Commission the DIS1710 Display with CCT, either through the BTCVT or in passthrough mode when connected
via an NAE or NCE. If using the wireless converter, remove the cap-plug that covers the FC/SA Bus Port and plug
the device into the port. Make sure that the communication cable is connected between the Display and the
controller. For more information on commissioning, refer to CCT Help.

Table 15-1: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up the DIS1710
Troubleshooting the DIS1710 DIS1710 Local Controller Display LIT-12011270
Technical Bulletin
Commissioning, Uploading, and Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help LIT-120111471
Downloading the DIS1710
Features, Benefits, and Applications of DIS1710 Local Controller Display Product LIT-12011273
the DIS1710 Bulletin
Model Information
Table 15-2: DIS1710 Model Description
MS-DIS1710-0 MS-DIS1710-0 Local Controller Display
Accessories
Table 15-3: DIS1710 Accessory Ordering Information
DIS1710
MS-ZFRCBL-0 Cable harness required by Display for installations with the ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus
Router and FEC1610 Controller
DIS1710 Local Controller Display: Section 15 141

Table 15-4: MS-DIS1710
Power Requirement Dedicated nominal 15 volts provided by NCE or FEC controller over SA Bus
RTOS-H8S
Ambient Operating Conditions 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); 10 to 90% RH noncondensing
Ambient Storage Conditions -20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F); 10 to 90% RH noncondensing
Terminations RJ-12 6-pin jack at Service Port (covered by removable cap-plug)
SA Bus connection on back of unit
Processor Renesas H8S/2398 32-bit microprocessor
Memory 256 KB Flash Memory
8 KB Random Access Memory (RAM)
Operating System RTOS-H8S
Network and Serial Interfaces Communication to NCE or FEC controller over SA Bus
Graphic Display Resolution 240 x 64 pixels with white LED backlighting (adjustable)
Dimensions 85.9 x 238 x 25.8 mm (3.4 x 9.37 x 1.0 in.)
(Height x Width x Depth)
DIS1710
Housing Plastic housing material: ABS + polycarbonate; Protection: IP20 (IEC60529)

Mounting Mount to the outside of the panel
70.5 x 216.5 mm (2.78 x 8.525 in.)
Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Europe: CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, in accordance with EN 61000-6-3 (2001)
Generic Emission Standard for Residential and Light Industry and EN 61000-6-2 (2001)
Generic Immunity Standard for Heavy Industrial Environment

TEC26xx Series Thermostats
Application
The TEC26xx Series thermostats are BACnet MS/TP networked devices that provide monitoring and programming
capabilities for efficient space temperature control.
Note: There are many models of TEC26xx Series thermostats. The examples and tables included in this
document are for the TEC26x6(H)-2 because its capabilities cover a wide range of other TEC26xx Series models.
Refer to your engineered drawings and specific technical literature for more information on other models. See
Related Documentation on page 158 for references to more information on TEC26xx Series thermostats.
Note: Wireless thermostats are also available. For details on the TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Control
system, see TEC2xxx Wireless Thermostat Controller on page 405.
Mounting
Locate the TEC26xx Series thermostat:
• on a partitioning wall, approximately 1.5 m (5 ft)
above the floor in a location of average temperature
• away from direct sunlight, radiant heat, outside
walls, behind doors, air discharge grills, stairwells, or
outside doors
• away from steam or water pipes, warm air stacks,
TEC26xx
unconditioned areas (not heated or cooled), or
sources of electrical interference
Note: Allow for vertical air circulation to the
TEC26xx Series thermostat.
Note: If you need to install the thermostat on an
electrical junction box, use 2 1/8 x 4 in. square boxes
with mud ring covers and avoid the smaller 1 1/2 x 4 in.
square or 3 x 2 in. boxes. This procedure ensures you
FIG:cvr_rmvl
have enough space for cabling and end-of-line devices,
if needed.
To install the thermostat:
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the Figure 16-1: Removing the Thermostat Cover
security screw on the bottom of the thermostat
cover.
2. Pull the bottom edge of the thermostat cover and
open the thermostat as illustrated in Figure 16-1 on
page 143.
3. Carefully pull the locking tabs on the right side of the
thermostat mounting base and unlock the PCB.
Open the PCB to the left as illustrated in Figure 16-2
on page 144.
4. Pull approximately 15.2 cm (6 in.) of wire from the
wall and insert the wire through the hole in the
thermostat mounting base. PCB
Locking
5. Align the thermostat mounting base on the wall and
Tabs
use the base as a template to mark the two
mounting hole locations.
Note: Be sure to position the thermostat mounting
FIG:prntdcirctbrd
base so that the arrow on the base points upward to
indicate the top of the thermostat.
6. Create mounting holes for appropriate anchors.
Note: Do not use plastic or nylon anchors of any
Figure 16-2: Opening the Thermostat PCB
type.
7. Position the thermostat mounting base on the wall
and use the two mounting screws to secure the
base to the surface as illustrated in Figure 16-3 on
page 144.
Note: Be careful not to overtighten the mounting
screws.
TEC26xx
8. Swing the PCB back to the right and carefully snap

it into the locking tabs on the thermostat mounting
base.
9. Pull the pull-tabs on each of the connectors and
remove the screw terminal blocks as illustrated in
FIG:mntingbas
Wiring
See Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards on
page 465 for more information on alternative cable and
wire types, sizes, and lengths for connecting an TEC to
Figure 16-3: Securing the Thermostat Mounting
the field buses, power supply, and the application
Base to the Wall
control points. See BACnet MS/TP Communications
Bus Guidelines on page 73 for guidelines on wiring an
TEC to a FC Bus.

! Disconnect the power supply before making

electrical connections to avoid electric shock.
! Do not apply power to the system before checking all

wiring connections. Short circuited or improperly
connected wires may result in permanent damage to
the equipment.
IMPORTANT: Make all wiring connections in accordance with

local, national, and regional regulations. Do not exceed the
electrical ratings of the TEC26xx Series thermostat.
FIG:termblck
To wire the thermostat:
1. Strip the ends of each wire 6 mm (1/4 in.) and connect them to
the appropriate screw terminals.
Note: Terminate the TEC according to Johnson Controls Figure 16-4: Removing the Screw
engineered drawings. Terminal Blocks
2. Carefully push any excess wire back into the wall.
Note: Seal the hole in the wall with fireproof material to prevent drafts from affecting the ambient temperature
readings.
TEC26xx
3. Reinsert the screw terminal blocks onto the board and reattach the MS/TP communication wires to the terminal
block.
4. Reattach the thermostat cover to the mounting base (top side first).
5. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to reinstall the security screw on the bottom of the thermostat cover.
See Figure 16-5 on page 147 to identify and locate the terminals called out in Table 16-1 on page 145.
Table 16-1: Terminal Identification (See Figure 16-5 on page 147.) (Part 1 of 2)
Terminal Terminal Label Function
Number TEC2616(H)-2 TEC2626(H)-2, TEC2646(H)-2,
(On/Off TEC2636(H)-2 TEC2656(H)-2
Control) (On/Off or (Proportional
Floating 0 to 10 VDC
Control) Control)
1 Fan-H Fan-H Fan-H Fan On – High
2 Fan-M Fan-M Fan-M Fan On – Medium
3 Fan-L Fan-L Fan-L Fan On – Low
4 24 V~ Hot 24 V~ Hot 24 V~ Hot 24 VAC from Transformer
5 24 V~ Com 24 V~ Com 24 V~ Com 24 VAC (Common) from Transformer
6 BO5 Aux BO5 Aux BO5 Aux Aux BO (Auxiliary Output)
8 BO3 BO3 Blank Open Heat
9 Blank BO4 AO2 Close Heat
10 Blank BO1 AO1 Open Cool
11 BO2 BO2 Blank Close Cool
12 BI1 BI1 BI1 Configurable Binary Input 1
TEC26xx Series Thermostats: Section 16 145

Table 16-1: Terminal Identification (See Figure 16-5 on page 147.) (Part 2 of 2)
(On/Off TEC2636(H)-2 TEC2656(H)-2
Control) Control)
13 RS RS RS Remote Sensor
14 Scom Scom Scom Sensor Common
16 UI3 UI3 UI3 Configurable Universal Input 3
Blank +, –, REF +, –, REF +, –, REF MS/TP Bus
TEC26xx

Separate 24 VAC
Power Source for Auxiliary Output
Power and Fan (24 VAC Maximum)
24 V~ 24 V~ Fan Fan
Com
Fan BO5 BO5
Hot
-L -M -H Aux Aux Five-Pole
Three-Pole
Left Top Connector
Right Top
Aux Fan Fan Fan 24 V~ 24 V~
Connector
-H -M -L Hot Com
BO5 BO5 BO3
+ Aux Aux
1 2 3 4 5
– 6 7 8
Eight-Pole Bottom Connector
REF
BO4/ BO1/
BO2 BI1 RS Scom BI2 UI3
AO2 AO1
Independent 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Contacts
• Reheat
• Lighting
24 VAC
• On/Off Actuation
Thermostat Power
• Exhaust Fan
- OR -
Same 24 VAC Remote Inputs Voltage-Free
Power and Fan Power Source for Auxiliary Output Contact
(24 VAC Maximum) • Door
• Remote
BI1 Scom BI2 UI3
24 V~ 24 V~ Fan Fan Fan
Override
TEC26xx
Hot Com • Filter Alarm
-L -M -H
BO5 BO5
Aux Aux • Service Alarm
Voltage-Free
Aux Voltage-Free Contact
Contact • COC/NH
• Remote NSB - OR - Normally Heat
• Motion Closed Contact
• Window = Cold Water
• COC/NC
Normally Cool
Supply Sensor Closed Contact
Changeover Sensor = Hot Water
+ – REF
24 VAC
Thermostat Power
FIG:wrng
Supervisory
Controller
Figure 16-5: Wiring the TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat (See Table 16-1 on page 145.)

BO2 24 V~ 24 V~ BO3 24 V~ 24 V~
Hot Com Hot Com
N.C.
Cooling
Valve
FIG:TEC2616(H)-2onoff
N.O.
Heating
Valve
Two-Pipe Applications Four-Pipe Applications
Figure 16-6: Wiring TEC2616(H)-2 Thermostats for On/Off Control
or or 24 V~ 24 V~
or 24 V~ 24 V~ Hot Com
Hot Com Cooling
Valve
Heating
Valve
TEC26xx
Figure 16-7: Wiring TEC2626(H)-2 and TEC2636(H)-2 Thermostats for On/Off Control
BO1 24 V~ 24 V~ 24 V~ 24 V~
BO2 Com BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4
Hot Hot Com
Cooling
Valve
Heating/Cooling FIG:TEC2626(H)-2floating
Valve
Heating
Valve
Figure 16-8: Wiring TEC2626(H)-2 and TEC2636(H)-2 Thermostats for Floating Control
24 V~ 24 V~
AO1 24 V~ 24 V~ AO1 AO2 Hot Com
Hot Com
Cooling
Valve
FIG:TEC2646(H)-2prop
Heating/Cooling Heating
Valve Valve
Figure 16-9: Wiring TEC2646(H)-2 and TEC2656(H)-2 Thermostats for Proportional Control

Connecting the TEC26xx to the MS/TP Bus
See BACnet MS/TP Communications Bus Guidelines on page 73 for guidelines on wiring a TEC to a FC Bus.
The MS/TP Bus device address for the TEC is configured using the TEC configuration menus. There are no
address DIP switches to set. See Configuring the TEC26xx Series Thermostat on page 150 for more information.
Note: The TEC thermostat does not provide EOL termination. If the TEC terminates a bus segment on the FC Bus
you must add an MS-BACEOL EOL Terminator module. See Related Documentation on page 158 for more
information. See Table 16-7 on page 158 for EOL Terminator ordering information.
MS/TP LED Indication
A small green light under the thermostat cover (on the left edge when facing the thermostat) indicates the
communications mode when the thermostat is operating. The following blink codes may be seen:
• Short-Short-Long: Indicates that the baud rate is known and that communication is active.
• Short-Short: Indicates that the thermostat is scanning for the correct baud rate and that there is no
communication.
• Off: Indicates that there is no power to the thermostat or that the MS/TP wiring polarity is reversed.
• Long: Indicates that the MS/TP communication daughter board is the wrong type for the main board.
TEC26xx Series Thermostat Operation Overview
User Interface Keys
The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series thermostat user interface
consists of five keys on the front cover (as illustrated in
TEC26xx
Figure 16-10 on page 149). The function of each key is as
follows:
• MODE key toggles among the system modes
available, as defined by selecting the appropriate
operation sequence in the Installer Configuration
Menu (for example, Off, Heat, Cool, Auto).
• FAN key toggles among the fan modes available, as
defined by selecting the appropriate fan menu options
defined in the Installer Configuration Menu (for
example, Low, Med, High, Auto).
• OVERRIDE key (commercial models) overrides the Room Temp
unoccupied mode to occupied at the local user 70.0ºF
interface for the specified TOccTime. (TOccTime is
defined by selecting the appropriate time period in the
Installer Configuration Menu.) The OVERRIDE key MODE FAN
FIG:frnt_vw
also allows access to the Installer Configuration
Menu. See Configuring the TEC26xx Series
Thermostat on page 150.
Note: If one of the binary inputs is configured to Figure 16-10: Example of the Front Cover of a
operate as a remote override contact, this OVERRIDE TEC26xx Series Thermostat
key is disabled.
• UP/DOWN arrow keys change the configuration parameters and activate a setpoint adjustment.
• °C/°F key (on hospitality models only and not shown in Figure 16-10 on page 149) changes the temperature
scale to either Celsius or Fahrenheit and allows access to the Installer Configuration Menu.
Note: For hospitality models, binary inputs can override from the unoccupied mode to occupied mode.

Backlit LCD
The TEC26xx Series thermostats include a 2-line, 8-character backlit display. Low-level backlighting is present
during normal operation, and it brightens when any user interface key is pressed. The backlight returns to low level
when the thermostat is left unattended for 45 seconds.
Cover LEDs
Three LEDs are included to indicate the fan status, call for heat, or call for cooling:
• The FAN LED is on when the fan is on.
• The HEAT LED is on when heating or reheat is on.
• The COOL LED is on when cooling is on.
Status Display Menu
The Status Display Menu is displayed during normal thermostat operation. This menu continuously scrolls through
the following parameters:
• Room Temperature (All Models) and Humidity (TEC2636-2, TEC2636H-2, TEC2656-2, and TEC2656H-2
Models)
• System Mode
• Schedule Status – Occupied/Unoccupied/Override
• Applicable Alarms – The backlight lights up as an alarm condition is displayed.
Note: An option is available within the Installer Configuration Menu to lock out the scrolling display and show only
the Room Temperature parameter.
Dehumidification Operation – TEC2636(H)-2 and TEC2656(H)-2 Thermostat Models
TEC26xx
Upon detection of room humidity above the adjustable humidity setpoint as sensed by the integral humidity sensor,
dehumidification activates.
Note: Dehumidification operation functions only in the Cooling mode; dehumidification operation does not function
in either the Off or the Heating mode.
Note: A central network command can globally lock out dehumidification operation to all thermostats.
If the room temperature resides in the deadband between the Heating and Cooling setpoint:
• the thermostat forces the fan to low speed
• the chilled water valve opens to the specified maximum value set by CoolMax
• the thermostat stages Heating to maintain the room temperature at the Cooling setpoint, as sensed by the
thermostat
If the room temperature falls below the current Heating setpoint, the thermostat disables dehumidification
operation.
If the thermostat is in Cooling demand:
• the chilled water valve opens to 100%
thermostat
If the thermostat is in Cooling demand, and the room temperature rises 2F°/1C° above the Cooling setpoint, the
thermostat automatically disables dehumidification operation. Likewise, if the thermostat is in Cooling demand and
the room temperature falls below the current Heating setpoint, the thermostat disables dehumidification operation.
Configuring the TEC26xx Series Thermostat
The TEC26xx Series thermostat comes from the factory with default settings for all configurable parameters. The
default settings are shown in Table 16-4 on page 153. To reconfigure the parameters via the thermostat, follow
these steps:
1. Press and hold the center key for approximately 8 seconds to access the Installer Configuration Menu.
2. Release and press the center key to scroll through the parameters listed in Table 16-4 on page 153 until you
reach the desired parameter.

3. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose the desired selection option.
4. Press and release the center key to continue scrolling through the parameters.
Note: Pressing the FAN key during configuration restarts the list of displayed parameters at the first parameter
listed in Table 16-4 on page 153.
When the thermostat is in the Installer Configuration Menu and left unattended for approximately 8 seconds, the
thermostat reverts to the Status Display Menu.
Configuring Inputs BI1, BI2, and UI3
When BI1 and BI2 are configured for an alarm condition, an alarm condition is displayed locally when the input is
closed. An alarm message is included on the scrolling Status Display Menu and when the message is displayed,
the backlight momentarily lights up.
The UI3 input provides changeover of hot/cold water switching, or supply air temperature monitoring at the
thermostat.
Each input can be configured to the Selection Options included in Table 16-4 on page 153.
Configuring the Sequence of Operation (SeqOpera)
Choose the appropriate sequence of operation. The modes presented are user-dependent on the sequence of
operation selected. For two-pipe applications using a changeover sensor, choose the selection option
(0): Cooling only. Changeover occurs between Cooling only and Heating only.
Note: See Figure 16-5 on page 147 and Table 16-1 on page 145 for location and description of the terminals
called out in Table 16-2 on page 151 and Table 16-3 on page 152.
Table 16-2: Selection Options for Sequence of Operation in Two-Pipe Applications
Selection Terminal Numbers Used
TEC26xx
Option On/Off Control Floating Control Proportional 0 to 10 VDC
Control
(0): Cooling 10: N.O. Cooling 10: Open Cooling 10: Proportional Cooling
11: N.C. Cooling 11: Closed Cooling
(1): Heating 10: N.O. Heating 10: Open Heating 10: Proportional Heating
11: N.C. Heating 11: Closed Heating
(2): Cooling with Reheat 6 and 7: Reheat 6 and 7: Reheat 6 and 7: Reheat
10: N.O. Cooling 10: Open Cooling 10: Proportional Cooling
(3): Heating with Reheat 6 and 7: Reheat 6 and 7: Reheat 6 and 7: Reheat
10: N.O. Heating 10: Open Heating 10: Proportional Heating

Table 16-3: Selection Options for Sequence of Operation in Four-Pipe Applications
Control
(4): Heating/Cooling, Four- 8: N.O. Heating 8: Open Heating 9: Proportional Heating
Pipe 9: N.C. Heating 9: Closed Heating 10: Proportional Cooling
10: N.O. Cooling 10: Open Cooling
(5): Heating/Cooling with 6 and 7: Reheat 6 and 7: Reheat 6 and 7: Reheat
Reheat, Four-Pipe 8: N.O. Heating 8: Open Heating 9: Proportional Heating
9: N.C. Heating 9: Closed Heating 10: Proportional Cooling
Configuring the Fan Menu

When selection (0): Low-Med-High is chosen in the Fan Menu parameter, the fan operates as shown in
TEC26xx
Figure 16-11 on page 152. When selection (1): Low-High is chosen in the Fan Menu parameter, the fan operates
at only the low and high settings and ignores the medium setting.
High Heating Cooling

On Setpoint Setpoint On
Fan
Speed
Off Off
Medium
On On
Off Off
Low
100% 2.0F°/1.0C° to
5.0F°/2.5C°
Deadband
Heating
Cooling
Valve
Valve
FIG::fn_oprtn
0%
2.5 2.0 1.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 2.0 2.5
Figure 16-11: Two-Speed and Three-Speed Fan Operation

Note: There are many models of BACnet TEC controllers. Table 16-4 on page 153 focuses on the TEC26x6(H)-2
because its capabilities cover a wide range of other TEC models. Refer to the specific technical literature for more
information on other models.
Table 16-4: Installer Configuration Menu for TEC26x6(H)-2 (Part 1 of 5)
Parameter Description and Default Selection Options
Appearing
on Display
Com addr MS/TP address at the thermostat; Range: 004 to 127
coincides with the address assigned
at the supervisory controller.
Default: 4
BI1 Configuration of Binary Input 1. (None): No function is associated with an input.
Default: None (Rem NSB): Remote NSB via a time clock input, an occupancy
sensor, or from a voltage-free contact. Contact open = Occupied;
contact closed = Unoccupied.
(MotionNO*): Temporary occupancy request via a motion detector
input. Contact open = Unoccupied. When the contact closes, the
thermostat goes into the occupied mode for a specified TOccTime.
Once the TOccTime begins, the thermostat remains in the occupied
mode if the contact is open, until the TOccTime expires.
(MotionNC*): Temporary occupancy request via a motion detector
input. Contact closed = Unoccupied. When the contact opens, the
mode if the contact is closed, until the TOccTime expires.
(Window**): Cancels the thermostat heating or cooling action when
TEC26xx
a window is open. The fan operation is not affected. A Window
alarm is displayed indicating that the window needs to be closed to
resume heating or cooling.
* These settings disable any local override function.
** When this setting is selected, the outputs are enabled only when
the contact is closed.
Default: None (Door Dry): Door contact only has an effect if BI1 is set to
MotionNO or MotionNC. (See the BI1 parameter earlier in this
table.) The occupancy is now dictated via BI1 and BI2. Any motion
detected sets the zone to Occupied status. The thermostat remains
in the occupied mode until a DoorOpen is detected, at which point
the thermostat goes to the unoccupied mode. If the door stays open
more than the specified door time, the thermostat remains
unoccupied. (See the Door Time parameter later in this table.)
(RemOVR): Temporary occupancy request via a remote input. This
override function is controlled by a manual remote occupancy
override. When enabled, this condition disables the override
capability of the thermostat.
(Filter): A Filter alarm is displayed. This alarm can be connected to
a differential pressure switch that monitors a filter.
(Service): A Service alarm is displayed on the thermostat when the
input is energized. This input can be tied into the air conditioning
unit control card, which provides an alarm should there be a
malfunction.

Appearing
on Display
UI3 Configuration of Universal Input 3. (None): No function is associated with an input.
Default: None (COC/NH): Changeover Contact/Normally Heat: A dry contact input
is used to signal seasonal hot/cold water changeover. The contact
closes when cold water is present. Valid only for two-pipe systems.
(COC/NC): Changeover Contact/Normally Cool: A dry contact input
closes when hot water is present. Valid only for two-pipe systems.
(COS): Changeover Analog Sensor: Used for hot/cold water
changeover switching. Valid only for two-pipe systems.
Note: Choose the selection option (0): Cooling only for the
SeqOpera parameter to allow changeover to occur between
Cooling only and Heating only. The changeover sensor does not
operate in Cooling with reheat, Heating with reheat, or
Cooling/Heating with reheat applications.
(SS): Supply Air Sensor Monitoring
MenuScro Gives the option of having the (off): The scroll is inactive.
display continuously scroll the (on): The scroll is active.
parameters.
Default: on
AutoMode Enables the Auto function (if (on): The Auto function is active (Off-Auto-Heat-Cool). Provides
Option 2 is chosen in the SeqOpera automatic changeover between heating and cooling.
parameter) to be visible within the (off): The auto function is inactive (Off-Heat-Cool).
MODE key menu. (The MODE key
TEC26xx
is the key at the far left of the

thermostat cover.)
Default: off
C or F Provides temperature scale options (°C): Celsius scale
for display. (°F): Fahrenheit scale
Default: °F
%RH disp Displays the current humidity (on): Displays the current humidity reading in % RH.
reading (TEC2636-2, TEC2636H-2, (off): Does not display the current humidity reading.
TEC2656-2, and TEC2656H-2
models).
Default: off
Lockout Selectable Lockout Levels for Lockout Function
limiting end user keypad interaction. Level Mode Fan Local Occupied
Default: 0 Setting Setting Override Temperature
Setpoints
(0) Access Access Access Access
(1) Access Access No Access Access
(2) No Access No Access Access Access
(3) No Access No Access No Access Access
(4) No Access No Access Access No Access
(5) No Access No Access No Access No Access
Pipe No Selectable number of pipes in the (2.0 Pipes): Limits the number of sequences of operation available
system. from 0 to 3, and enables heat/cool operation from the same output.
Default: 4.0 Pipes (4.0 Pipes): Allows access to all sequences of operation from 0 to 5,
and enables heat/cool operation from different outputs.
CntrlTyp Defines the control output for the (On/Off): For Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally Closed (N.C.)
type of valves used in the 24 VAC two-position valves.
installation (TEC2626-2, (Floating): For proportional three-wire control of 24 VAC floating
TEC2626H-2, TEC2636-2, and valves.
TEC2636H-2 models).
Default: Floating

Appearing
on Display
SeqOpera Determines the sequence of (0): Cooling (Off-Cool). The default is Cool.
operation. (1): Heating (Off-Heat). The default is Heat.
Default: 1 (2): Cooling with Reheat (Off-Auto*-Heat-Cool). The default is Heat.
(3): Heating with Reheat (Off-Heat). The default is Heat.
(4): Heating/Cooling, Four-Pipe (Off-Auto*-Heat-Cool). The default
is Heat.
(5): Heating/Cooling with Reheat, Four-Pipe (Off-Auto*-Heat-Cool).
The default is Heat.
* Auto can be disabled with the AutoMode parameter.
Note: Choose the selection option (0): Cooling only when using a
changeover sensor to allow changeover to occur between Cooling
only and Heating only.
Fan Menu Sets the Fan Mode options. (0): Low-Med-High: Three-speed configuration using three fan
Default: 4 relays (L-M-H). The default is High.
(1): Low-High: Two-speed configuration using two fan relays (L-H).
The default is High.
(2): Low-Med-High-Auto: Three-speed configuration with Auto Fan
speed mode using two fan relays (L-H). The default is High.
(3): Low-High-Auto: Two-speed configuration with Auto Fan speed
mode using two fan relays (L-H). The default is High.
(4): On-Auto: One-speed configuration, (H) Auto is for Fan on
demand and On is for Fan on continuously. The default is Auto.
TEC26xx
DHumiLCK Locks out the dehumidification (off): Dehumidification is locked out.
capability (TEC2636-2, (on): Dehumidification is allowed.
TEC2636H-2, TEC2656-2, and
TEC2656H-2 models).
Default: on
%RH set1 Sets the dehumidification setpoints Range: 30.0 to 95.0% RH
(TEC2636-2, TEC2636H-2,
models). This parameter can be
used only if the dehumidification
sequence is enabled.
Default: 50.0% RH
DehuHyst1 Sets the dehumidification hysteresis Range: 2.0 to 20.0% RH
(TEC2636-2, TEC2636H-2,
Default: 5.0% RH
DehuCool1 Sets the maximum dehumidification Range: 20.0 to 100.0%
cooling output (TEC2636-2, Note: This parameter can be used to balance smaller reheat loads
TEC2636H-2, TEC2656-2, and installed with regard to the capacity of the cooling coil.
TEC2656H-2 models). This
parameter can be used only if the
dehumidification sequence is
enabled.
Default: 100%

Appearing
on Display
Unocc HT Sets the Unoccupied Heating Range: 40.0°F/4.5°C to Note: When adjusting the
setpoint value. 90.0°F/32.0°C temperature, press the UP/
Default: 62.0°F/16.5°C DOWN arrow keys to
change the temperature in
Unocc CL Sets the Unoccupied Cooling Range: 54.0°F/12.0°C to
0.5F°/0.5C° increments;
setpoint value. 100.0°F/37.5°C
press and hold the
Default: 80.0°F/26.5°C UP/DOWN arrow keys
Heat max Sets the Occupied and Unoccupied Range: 40.0°F/4.5°C to to change the temperature
maximum Heating setpoint values. 90.0°F/32.0°C in 5.0F°/5.0C° increments.
Default: 90.0°F/32.0°C
Cool min Sets the Occupied and Unoccupied Range: 54.0°F/12.0°C to
minimum Cooling setpoint values. 100.0°F/37.5°C
Set type Provides the option of temporarily (temporar): Local changes to the heating or cooling setpoints are
changing the heating or cooling temporary, and remain effective for the specified TOccTime.
setpoint by pressing the UP/DOWN (permnent): Local changes to the heating or cooling setpoints are
arrow keys. permanently stored in the thermostat memory.
Default: permnent
TOccTime Sets the duration of the Temporary Range: 0.0 to 24.0 hrs in 1-hour increments
Occupancy Time when the heating
or cooling setpoints in the Occupied
mode are established by:
• an Override Function enabled in
TEC26xx
the Main User Menu (when the

thermostat is in the Unoccupied
mode)
• a temporary heating or cooling
setpoint
Default: 2.0 hrs
DoorTime Engages the Unoccupied mode if Range: 1.0 to 10.0 min
the door stays open minimally for
the time specified.
Default: 2.0 min
Deadband Sets the minimum deadband Range: 2.0F°/1.0C° to 5.0F°/2.5C° (adjustable in 1.0F°/0.5C°
between the heating and cooling increments)
setpoints.
Default: 2.0F°/1.0C°
Cal RS Sets the desired room air sensor Range: -5.0F°/-2.5C° to 5.0F°/2.5C° (adjustable in 1.0F°/0.5C°
calibration (offset). The offset can increments)
be added to or subtracted from the
actual displayed room temperature.
Cal RH Sets the desired humidity sensor Range: -15.0% RH to 15.0% RH (adjustable in 1% RH increments)
calibration (offset). The offset can
actual displayed room humidity
(TEC2636-2, TEC2636H-2,
Default: 0.0% RH

Appearing
on Display
Aux cont Determines the auxiliary contact (0) Not used, If the sequence of operation is set to
function and configuration. or used for reheat (2, 3, or 5), ignore this parameter.
Default: 0 reheat
(1) Auxiliary Occupied = contact The output
N.O. closed aligns with
Unoccupied = contact occupancy.
open
(2) Auxiliary Occupied = contact open
N.C. Unoccupied = contact
closed
(3) Auxiliary Occupied and fan On = The output
N.O. contact closed aligns with
Unoccupied and fan On occupancy
or Off = contact open and the
fan on
(4) Auxiliary Occupied and fan On =
command.
N.C. contact open
Unoccupied and fan On
or Off = contact closed
(5) Auxiliary On/Off control through the The output
auxiliary network command. The output aligns with
can be commanded through the network the
for any required auxiliary functions via a secondary
TEC26xx
separate and dedicated network network
variable. occupancy
command.
FL time Sets the maximum actuator stroke Range: 0.5 to 9.0 min (adjustable in 0.5 minute increments)
timing (floating CntrlTyp
TEC2626-2, TEC2626H-2,
models).
Default: 1.5 min
Cph Sets the maximum number of cycles Range: 3 to 8 cycles per hour
per hour (TEC2616-2,
TEC2616H-2, and on/off CntrlTyp
TEC2626-2, TEC2626H-2,
TEC2636-2, and TEC2636H-2).
Default: 4
RA/DA Choice of reverse or direct acting (RA): Reverse acting, 0 to 100% = 10 to 0 VDC
analog output signal (TEC2646-2, (DA): Direct acting, 0 to 100% = 0 to 10 VDC
TEC2646H-2, TEC2656-2, and
TEC2656H-2 models)
Default: DA
Reheat Sets the duty cycle time for reheat (1): 10 seconds (six cycles per minute), for various equipment with
output (if Option 2, 3, or 5 is chosen solid-state relays that withstand short duty cycles such as electric
in the SeqOpera parameter). heat.
Default: 0 (0): 15 minutes (four cycles per hour), for various equipment with
mechanical relays or contactors controlling mechanical reheat
systems.
UI3 dis Displays the supply or changeover Used as a diagnostic/service help, to troubleshoot and diagnose
temperature when UI3 is configured sensor operation.
as an analog input (supply sensor or
changeover sensor).
Default: -40°F/-40°C
1. When adjusting the numeric value, press the UP or DOWN arrow key to change the value by single increments; press and
hold the UP or DOWN arrow key to change the numeric value in increments of ten.

Table 16-5: Documents Related to Setup, Installation, and Wiring TEC26xx Series Thermostats
Configuring an MS/TP Network and MS/TP Communications Bus Technical LIT-12011034
Integrating MS/TP Devices into the Bulletin
Metasys System Extended
Architecture
Installation and Specification of TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Part No. 24-9890-226
TEC2645-2 Series Thermostat Thermostat with Single Proportional
Output and One-Speed Fan Control
Installation and Specification of TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Part No. 24-9890-234
TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat Networked Thermostat with Two
Outputs and Three Speeds of Fan
Control Installation Instructions
Installation and Specification of TEC26x7-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Part No. 24-9890-242
TEC26x7-2 Series Thermostat Networked Thermostat with Two
Outputs Installation Instructions
Installation and Specification of TEC2688FS-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Part No. 24-9890-706
TEC2688FS-2 Series Thermostat Network Thermostat Installation
Instructions
Model Information
Table 16-6: TEC26xx Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostats
Product Code Control Outputs Fan Control Integral Application
TEC26xx
Humidity Sensor
TEC2616-2 Two On/Off Three Speeds No Commercial Market
TEC2616H-2 Two On/Off Three Speeds No Hospitality Market
TEC2626-2 Two On/Off or Floating Three Speeds No Commercial Market
TEC2626H-2 Two On/Off or Floating Three Speeds No Hospitality Market
TEC2636-2 Two On/Off or Floating Three Speeds Yes Commercial Market
TEC2636H-2 Two On/Off or Floating Three Speeds Yes Hospitality Market
TEC2646-2 Two Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Three Speeds No Commercial Market
TEC2646H Two Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Three Speeds No Hospitality Market
TEC2656-2 Two Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Three Speeds Yes Commercial Market
TEC2656H Two Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Three Speeds Yes Hospitality Market
TEC2688FS-2 Time Modulated 20 to 40 VDC One Speed No Commercial/UFAD
Accessories
All the accessories in Table 16-7 on page 158 include mounting hardware; contact the nearest Johnson Controls
representative to order any of these parts. Review the technical specifications of the accessories prior to their use
in an application.
Table 16-7: Accessories (Order Separately)
Code Number Description
SEN-600-1 Remote Indoor Air Temperature Sensor
TE-6361M-11 Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor
SEN-600-4 Remote Indoor Air Temperature Sensor with Occupancy Override and LED
TE-636S-11 Strap-On Temperature Sensor
MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator
1. Additional TE-636xx-x Series 10k ohm Johnson Controls Type II Thermistor Sensors are available; refer to the
TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216320) for more details.

Table 16-8: TEC26xx Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification
Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control
Power Requirements 19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 VA (Terminals 4 and 5) at 24 VAC Nominal, Class 2 or SELV
Relay/Triac On/Off and 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush, Class 2 or SELV
Contact Floating
Rating Control
Analog Proportional 0 to 10 VDC into 2k ohm Resistance (Minimum)
Output Rating Control
Fan Relay Output Rating 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush
Auxiliary Triac Output 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush
Output Rating
Digital Inputs Voltage-Free Contacts across Terminal Scom to Terminals BI1, BI2, or UI3
Temperature Sensor Type Local 10k ohm NTC Thermistor
Wire Size 18 AWG (1.0 mm Diameter) Maximum, 22 AWG (0.6 mm Diameter) Recommended
MS/TP Network Guidelines 50 Devices Maximum; 5,000 ft (1,524 m) Maximum Cable Length
Temperature Backlit -40.0°F/-40.0°C to 122.0°F/50.0°C in 0.5° Increments
Range Display
Heating 40.0°F/4.5°C to 90.0°F/32.0°C
Control
Cooling 54.0°F/12.0°C to 100.0°F/38.0°C
Control
TEC26xx
Accuracy Temperature ±0.9F°/±0.5C° at 70.0°F/21.0°C Typical Calibrated
Humidity ±5% RH from 20 to 80% RH at 50 to 90°F (10 to 32°C)
Minimum Deadband 2F°/1C° between Heating and Cooling
Ambient Operating 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C); 95% RH Maximum, Noncondensing
Conditions
Storage -22 to 122°F (-30 to 50°C); 95% RH Maximum, Noncondensing
Compliance United States UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX,
Under UL 873, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
FCC Compliant to CFR 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Canada UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX7,
Under CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
Industry Canada, ICES-003
Europe CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
Australia and C-Tick Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant
New Zealand
Shipping Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)

TEC26xx

NS Series Network Sensors
Application
Wallbox-mounted and surface-mounted NS Series Network Sensors are
electric zone sensors designed to function directly with
Johnson Controls MS/TP digital controllers in HVAC systems. Models in
this series monitor the temperature setpoint, zone temperature, and
humidity, and transmit this data to a field controller on the SA Bus.
Models with a setpoint adjustment feature a temperature setpoint dial
and a LCD designed to make setpoint adjustment and zone temperature
viewing easier. A °F/°C push button is available on setpoint adjustment
models to provide temperature scale options for display. An occupancy
override function is also featured on these models, which allows the
user to signal the controller that the space is occupied, and to request
an override of time-of-day scheduling. Rotating the setpoint dial signals Figure 17-1: Example of a
occupancy. 120 x 80 mm NS Series Network
Select setpoint adjustment models in this series also provide VAV Sensor
balancing functionality. These models look like and perform similarly to
the other network sensors but have the added capability of serving as a tool to balance a VAV box.
For models without a setpoint adjustment, a warmer/cooler dial is included on certain models for minor temperature
adjustments from the setpoint. An occupancy override button is also featured on some of these models, which
allows the user to signal the controller that the space is occupied, and to request an override of time-of-day
scheduling. Select models without a setpoint adjustment include DIP switches to set a unique address in averaging
applications.
Depending on the model chosen, the wires connecting the network sensor to the controller can be terminated
using either a modular jack or screw terminal block, offering wiring flexibility. All models include an SA Bus access
SENSOR
NS NET
port for connecting accessories to access the SA Bus. This feature allows a technician to commission or service
the controller via the network sensor.
Mounting
See Sensor Location and Mounting Guidelines on page 16 for information on locating and mounting an NS Series
sensor.
Note: For surface-mount applications, use durable mounting hardware such as Molly bolt anchors that cannot be
easily pulled out of the mounting surface. Do not use plastic expansion anchors to mount NS Series sensors.
Only a 1.5 mm (1/16 in.) Allen wrench or a Johnson Controls T-4000-119 Allen-head Adjustment Tool is needed.
IMPORTANT: The wallbox-mount NS Series Network Sensor models must be mounted on a wallbox in a
vertical orientation (only). Do not mount a wallbox-mount network sensor horizontally.
Note: The network sensor is shock and vibration resistant; however, be careful not to drop the unit or mount it
where it could be exposed to excessive vibration.
Note: An adapter wallplate (NS-WALLPLATE-0) is required when the surface mount Network Sensor
(80 x 80 mm) is mounted on a standard electrical backbox.
Observe the following ambient operating conditions:
• Temperature: 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C)
• Humidity: 10 to 90% RH, noncondensing; 85°F (29°C) maximum dew point
Wiring
IMPORTANT: Failure to adhere to these wiring details causes the network sensor to function incorrectly. If you
do not adhere to these guidelines, you cannot connect to the bus using the wireless commissioning converter or
the handheld Variable Air Volume (VAV) balancing sensor, and you cannot expand the bus with future offerings.
To wire the network sensor:

1. Use a 1.5 mm (1/16 in.) Allen wrench or Johnson Controls T-4000-119 Allen-head Adjustment Tool to loosen
the security screw on the top of the unit.
2. Insert a blade screwdriver (or another tool, such as a quarter) into the slot next to the security screw location,
then carefully pry the top edge of the sensor assembly away from its mounting base and remove.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the Printed Circuit Board (PCB). Removing the PCB voids the product warranty.
3. Pull out approximately 152 mm (6 in.) of cable from

the wallbox, and insert the cable through the hole in
the mounting base.
4. Align the mounting base on the wallbox.
Note: Confirm that the mounting base is positioned
with the proper edge up. The mounting base is
positioned properly when the security screw is located
on the top edge of the base.
screwterminalblock
5. Secure the mounting base to the wallbox using the
two No. 6 pan-head mounting screws included with
the unit.
6. Wire the network sensor:
• For models featuring a screw terminal block, wire
the unit as illustrated in Figure 17-2 on page 162. Figure 17-2: Wiring to the Screw Terminal Block
SENSOR
NS NET
• For models featuring a modular jack, simply snap

the modular plug into the jack. See Figure 17-3
on page 163 for modular jack pin number assignments. Modular jack models require a straight-through
(not a crossover) connector.
For more details on wiring the MS/TP Communications Bus, see the BACnet MS/TP Communications Bus
Guidelines on page 73. For SA Bus wiring information and important device limitations, see Wiring the SA Bus
7. Align the tabs on the bottom edge of the mounting base with the slots on the bottom edge of the network
sensor assembly, and rotate the assembly onto its mounting base.
Note: On models featuring a screw terminal block, be certain that the terminal block pins align with the holes
in the terminal block.
8. Use a 1.5 mm (1/16 in.) Allen wrench or Johnson Controls T-4000-119 Allen-head Adjustment Tool to tighten
the security screw and fasten the network sensor assembly to the mounting base.
Note: Do not overtighten the security screw to avoid damaging the unit.
9. Use the CCT software to commission the network sensor. Refer to the CCT Help for more details.

modularjack
Straight-Through Cable
SA+
3 2 1
Printed Circuit Board

SA-
SA Bus Port SA Bus Common (Power from Sensor Terminals to Tool*)
Modular
SA Power (Power from Sensor Terminals to Tool*)
4
Jack
SA Bus Common (Power from Bus to Network Sensor)
6 5
SA Power (Power from Bus to Network Sensor)
* Provides power from Network Sensor SA Bus terminal block to

a connected Wireless Commissioning Converter (MS-BTCVT-0)
or handheld VAV balancing sensor.
Figure 17-3: Modular Jack Pin Number Assignments
Setting NS Sensor Device Address

Most NS Series Network Sensors have a default Table 17-1: Address DIP Switch Settings
device address of 199 on the SA Bus. On the
Address Switch 2 Switch 1
NS Series models with averaging capability, you must
199 N/A N/A
set the device address on the dual-switch DIP switch
block on the back of the sensor housing. The sensor 200 OFF OFF
is shipped with both switches ON which set the 201 OFF ON
202 ON OFF
SENSOR
sensor’s device address to 203. See Table 17-1 on
NS NET
page 163 for NS Sensor device address DIP switch 203 ON ON
settings.
NS Series Network Sensors: Section 17 163

Repair Information
If the NS Series Network Sensor fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement
network sensor, contact the nearest Johnson Controls representative.
Table 17-2: Documents Related to Installation, Mounting, Wiring and Setup of NS Network Sensors
For Information On: See Document LIT or Part Number
Metasys system BACnet Field Metasys System BACnet Protocol Field LIT-12011042
Equipment Controllers Controllers, Network Sensors, and
Related Products
Installing Surface-Mounted Sensors Surface-Mounted NS Series Network Part No. 24-10094-9
with Setpoint Adjustment Sensors with Setpoint Adjustment
Installing Surface-Mounted Sensors Surface-Mounted NS Series Network Part No. 24-10094-17
without Setpoint Adjustment Sensors without Setpoint Adjustment
Installing Wallbox-Mounted Sensors Wallbox-Mounted NS Series Network Part No. 24-10094-25
with Setpoint Adjustment Sensors with Setpoint Adjustment
Installing Wallbox-Mounted Sensors Wallbox-Mounted NS Series Network Part No. 24-10094-33
without Setpoint Adjustment Sensors without Setpoint Adjustment
Options and Conformance of NS Network Sensor Protocol LIT-12011103
Network Sensors Implementation Conformance
Statement Technical Bulletin
Selection Charts and Model NS Series Network Sensors Catalog LIT-1900350
Information for the NS Series Page
Network Sensor
Model Information
Table 17-3: Network Sensor Ordering Information — Temperature and Humidity Models
Vertical Wallbox-Mounted (WB),
SENSOR
NS NET
Size (mm), Height x Width
Warmer/Cooler Dial (W/C)

Temperature Adjustment:
or Surface-Mounted (SM)
Screw Terminals (ST), or

Modular Jack (MJ)
Setpoint (Set), or
F/C Scale Toggle

LCD Display
Occupancy
Humidity
Override
Product
Number
Code
NS-APA7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes MJ

NS-APA7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes ST
NS-APB7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-APB7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes ST
NS-BPB7001-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-BPB7002-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 2% Set Yes Yes ST
NS-AHA7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes MJ
NS-AHA7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes ST
NS-AHB7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-AHB7003-0 80 x 80 SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes ST
NS-BHB7001-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-BHB7002-0 120 x 80 WB, SM Yes 3% Set Yes Yes ST

Table 17-4: Network Sensor Ordering Information — Temperature Only Models
Vertical Wallbox-Mounted (WB),

Size (mm), Height x Width
Warmer/Cooler Dial (W/C)

Temperature Adjustment:
or Surface-Mounted (SM)
Screw Terminals (ST), or

Modular Jack (MJ)
Setpoint (Set), or
F/C Scale Toggle
VAV Balancing
LCD Display
Fan Control
Occupancy
Switches
Override
Address
Product
Number
Feature
Code
NS-ATA7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes MJ

NS-ATA7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes ST
NS-ATB7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-ATB7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes ST
NS-ATC7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes MJ
NS-ATC7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes ST
NS-ATD7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes Yes MJ
NS-ATD7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes Yes ST
NS-ATN7001-0 80 x 80 SM MJ
NS-ATN7003-0 80 x 80 SM ST Yes
NS-ATP7001-0 80 x 80 SM W/C Yes MJ
NS-ATP7002-0 80 x 80 SM W/C Yes ST
NS-ATV7001-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes No1 MJ Yes
SENSOR
NS-ATV7002-0 80 x 80 SM Yes Set Yes Yes No1 ST Yes
NS NET
NS-BTB7001-0 120 x 80 WB, Yes Set Yes Yes MJ
SM
NS-BTB7002-0 120 x 80 WB, Yes Set Yes Yes ST
SM
NS-BTN7001-0 120 x 80 WB, MJ
SM
NS-BTN7003-0 120 x 80 WB, ST Yes
SM
NS-BTP7001-0 120 x 80 WB, W/C Yes MJ
SM
NS-BTP7002-0 120 x 80 WB, W/C Yes ST
SM
NS-BTV7001-0 120 x 80 WB, Yes Set Yes Yes No1 MJ Yes
SM
NS-BTV7002-0 120 x 80 WB, Yes Set Yes Yes No1 ST Yes
SM
1. In the VAV Balancing models, the Fan Control button is replaced by a light bulb button used in the VAV Balancing Process.
NS Series Network Sensors: Section 17 165

Table 17-5: NS Series Network Sensor
Sensor Type With Setpoint Adjustment Without Setpoint Adjustment
Supply Voltage 9.8 to 16.5 VDC; 15 VDC Nominal
Current Consumption 25 mA Maximum (Non-Transmitting) 13 mA Maximum (Non-Transmitting)
Terminations Modular Jack or Screw Terminal Block
Sensor NS-xTN7003-0 — DIP Switch Set (200 to 203)
Addressing Model
on the
All Other Fixed Address of 199 Fixed Address of 199
SA Bus
Models
Wire Size Modular Jack 26 AWG (0.4 mm Diameter) Recommended; Three Twisted Pair (6 conductors)
Models
Screw 18 to 22 AWG (1.0 to 0.6 mm Diameter); 22 AWG (0.6 mm Diameter) Recommended
Terminal
Block Models
Communication Rate Auto-Detect: 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k bps
Mounting Surface-Mounted (80 x 80 mm)
Surface-Mounted or Vertical Wallbox-Mounted (120 x 80 mm)
Temperature Measurement 0.0°C/ 32.0°F to 40.0°C/104.0°F
Range
Sensor Type Local Platinum RTD
Resolution ±0.5C°/±0.5F° NA
Sensor Accuracy ±0.6C°/±1.0F°
Time Constant 10 Minutes Nominal at 10 fpm Airflow
Default Setpoint Adjustment 10.0°C/50.0°F to 30.0°C/86.0°F in 0.5° ±3.0C°/±5.0F°
Range Increments
SENSOR
NS NET
Ambient Operating 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F); 10 to 95% RH, Noncondensing; 29°C (85°F) Maximum Dew
Conditions Point
Storage -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F); 5 to 95% RH, -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F); 5 to 95% RH,
Noncondensing Noncondensing
Compliance United States UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, Under UL 916, Energy Management Equipment
Canada UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, Under CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal
Equipment
EN61000-6-3 (2001) Generic Emission Standard for Residential and Light Industry
EN61000-6-2 (2001) Generic Immunity Standard for Heavy Industrial Environment
New Zealand
BACnet BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) 135-2004 Listed BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS)
International
Shipping Weight 0.09 kg (0.20 lb) for NS-Axx7xxx-0
0.11 kg (0.25 lb) for NS-Bxx7xxx-0

NS Series Network Discharge Air Sensors
Figure 18-1: NS Series Network Discharge Air Sensor
Application
The NS Series Network Discharge Air Sensors are electronic duct sensors designed to function directly with
Johnson Controls digital controllers in HVAC systems. Models in this series monitor the duct temperature, typically
at the discharge of the VAV box, and transmit this data to a FEC, a VMA1600, or an NCE on the SA Bus using the
10 ft (305 cm) wiring lead included with the unit. The 10 ft (305 cm) wiring lead consists of four 22 AWG (0.6 mm
diameter) color-coded wires encased in a plenum-rated jacket. Each of the wires is stripped and tinned for easy
connection to the SA Bus screw terminal block.
The NS Series Network Discharge Air Sensors are available with either a 4 or 8 in. (102 or 203 mm) temperature
probe. All models include DIP switches for applications requiring multiple discharge air sensors, each with a unique
SENSOR
DIP switch address.
NS DTN
Mounting
The following ambient operating conditions apply:
• Temperature: 14 to 140°F (-10 to 60°C)
• Humidity: 10 to 90% RH, noncondensing; 85°F (29°C) maximum dew point
Note: The discharge air sensor is shock and vibration resistant; however, be careful not to drop the unit or mount
it where it could be exposed to excessive vibration.
To mount the discharge air sensor:
1. Drill a 3/8 in. (10 mm) diameter hole in the duct at the desired mounting location.
2. Insert the temperature probe into the drilled hole.
3. Secure the discharge air sensor to the duct using two No. 6 self-drilling sheet metal screws included with the
unit.
Wiring
If the NS Series Network Discharge Air Sensor is used in
an application requiring multiple discharge air sensors,
each with a unique DIP switch address, set the DIP
switches before wiring the unit. Otherwise, proceed directly
to Step 5.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the two cover-holding
screws using a 1/4 in. (6 mm) blade screwdriver or a
FIG:scrw_trmnl_blck
1/4 in. (6 mm) nut driver.
2. Remove the cover from the discharge air sensor.
3. See Figure 18-3 on page 168 and set the DIP switch
block on the discharge air sensor circuit board to the
desired DIP switch address. The starting address for Figure 18-2: Wiring to the SA Bus Screw
the device is 204, plus the binary value of the three Terminal Block
switches.
Note: Table 18-1 on page 168 lists the available DIP
switch addresses and the DIP switch settings required to
obtain them.
Table 18-1: Setting the DIP Switch Address
Available DIP Switch Settings
DIP Switch Switch 4 Switch 2 Switch 1
Addresses
204 Off (Open) Off (Open) Off (Open)
205 Off (Open) Off (Open) On (Closed)
206 Off (Open) On (Closed) Off (Open)
207 Off (Open) On (Closed) On (Closed)
208 On (Closed) Off (Open) Off (Open)
209 On (Closed) Off (Open) On (Closed)
210 On (Closed) On (Closed) Off (Open)
211 On (Closed) On (Closed) On (Closed)
SENSOR
NS DTN
4. Reinstall the cover on the discharge air sensor and

tighten the two cover-holding screws to secure it in On
place. (Closed)
5. Wire the discharge air sensor to the SA Bus screw
FIG:dp_swtch_blck
terminal block as illustrated in Figure 18-2 on

page 168. Off
4 2 1 (Open)
Note: For more details on wiring the MS/TP
Communications Bus, refer to the MS/TP Communications
Bus Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011034). Figure 18-3: Setting the DIP Switch Block
! Disconnect power supply before making

IMPORTANT: Failure to adhere to these wiring details

causes the discharge air sensor to function incorrectly.
6. Use the CCT software to commission the discharge air sensor. Refer to the CCT Help for more details.

Table 18-2: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up Network Discharge Air Sensors
Metasys system BACnet Field Metasys System BACnet Protocol Field LIT-12011042
Equipment Controllers Controllers, Network Sensors, and Related
Products
Options and Conformance of NS Network Sensor Protocol Implementation LIT-12011103
Network Sensors Conformance Statement Technical Bulletin
Selection Charts and Model Information NS Series Network Sensors Catalog Page LIT-1900350
for the NS Series Network Sensor
Model Information
Table 18-3: Network Discharge Air Sensor Ordering Information
Product Dimensions, Temperature 305 cm (10 ft) Terminations Sensor
Code Height x Width x Depth Probe Length Wiring Lead Addressing
Number Included
NS-DTN7043-0 76 mm x 76 mm x 51 mm 102 mm (4 in.) Yes Screw terminal DIP Switch
(3 in. x 3 in. x 2 in.) block (204 to 211)
NS-DTN7083-0 76 mm x 76 mm x 51 mm 203 mm (8 in.) Yes Screw terminal DIP Switch
(3 in. x 3 in. x 2 in.) block (204 to 211)
Accessories
Table 18-4: NS Series Network Sensors Accessory Ordering Information
NS-WALLPLATE-0 Network Sensor wall plate
MS-ZFRCBL-0 Wire Harness for use with ZFR1811 Router
SENSOR
NS DTN
NS Series Network Discharge Air Sensors: Section 18 169

Table 18-5: NS Series Network Discharge Air Sensor
Supply Voltage 9.8 to 16.5 VDC; 15 VDC Nominal
Current Consumption 12 mA Maximum (Non-Transmitting) per Discharge Air Sensor;
60 mA Maximum Total Current Consumption per SA Bus
Terminations Four Color-Coded Wiring Leads, Stripped and Tinned;
Factory Installed at the Discharge Air Sensor Screw Terminal Block
Sensor Addressing DIP Switch Set (204 to 211); Factory Set at 204
Wire Size 18 to 22 AWG (1.0 to 0.6 mm Diameter);
22 AWG (0.6 mm Diameter) Recommended;
10 ft (305 cm) Wiring Lead Included with the Unit
Communication Rate Auto-Detect: 9.6k, 19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k bps
Temperature Measurement 14°F/-10°C to 140°F/60°C
Range
Sensor Type Local Platinum RTD
Sensor Accuracy ±1.0F°/±0.6C°
Ambient Operating Conditions 14 to 140°F (-10 to 60°C); 10 to 90% RH, Noncondensing;
85°F (29°C) Maximum Dew Point
Ambient Storage Conditions -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C); 5 to 95% RH, Noncondensing
Dimensions Sensor Enclosure
Temperature Probe for NS-DTN7043-0: 4 in. (102 mm) Long
Temperature Probe for NS-DTN7083-0: 8 in. (203 mm) Long
Compliance BACnet International: BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) 135-2004 Listed BACnet
Smart Sensor (B-SS)
United States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX,
Under UL 916, Energy Management Equipment
Canada: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7,
Under CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment
Europe: CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
SENSOR
NS DTN
EN61000-6-3 (2001) Generic Emission Standard for Residential and Light Industry
EN61000-6-2 (2001) Generic Immunity Standard for Heavy Industrial Environment
Shipping Weight NS-DTN7043-0: 1.15 lb (0.52 kg)
NS-DTN7083-0: 1.17 lb (0.53 kg)

N2 BUS
N2 Communications Bus Guidelines 173
N2 BUS
ADDR
Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus 185
UNT
UNT Controllers 197
VMA1400
VMA1400 Series VAV Modular Assemblies 221
AHU
AHU Series Air Handler Unit Controllers 227
VAV
VAV Series Variable Air Volume Controllers 233
TC-9102 DX-9100
DX-9100 Series Controllers with XT, XTM, and XP Modules 243
TC-9102 Terminal Unit Controller 267
TEC21xx TE-6700
TE-6700 Series Sensors 281
TEC21xx Series Thermostats 287

DX-9100
VMA VMA VMA XTM/XPs
E XP D O 1 D O2 D O 3 D O 4 EX P E XP EXP
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 + 1 5 V RS485 EX P
A B CA B C A D D RESS
DO1 ma x
D O2 AO7
D O3
D O4 mi n
D O5 P o w er
D O6 max
D O7 A O8 RD
D O8 mi n TD
X P 91 0 3 X P91 02 X T9 1 0 0
D O5 D O6 D O 7 D O 8 FU S E
N2 Bus A (N2-A) is a N2LED
N2LED
xp9103
AI5 AI6 V A O7 A O8 C 24V
xp9 1 02
C O M 24 V
xt9 1 00
N2LED
N2-
N2+
REF
SHLD
N2-
N2+
REF
SHLD
N2-
N2+
REF
SHLD
single bus segment.
Code No. LIT-410020

Ethernet Network
VMA
VMA VMA VMA VMA
Router
N2LED
N2 Bus B
N2-
N2LED
N2+
REF
SHLD
N2LED N2LED
N2LED
N2-
Side Side
N2+
REF
SHLD
N2-
(segment 1)
N2-
N2+
REF
N2-
N2+
REF
SHLD
N2+
REF
SHLD
SHLD
NAE55 A B
87 65 4321
T
N2-A
N2-B XTM/XPs VMA VMA N2 Bus B TEC2100
E XP D O1 D O2 D O3 D O4 E XP E XP
AI1 AI2 AI3AI4 + 1 5 V
EXP RS4 85
A B CA B C A D DRE S S
EXP
Repeater
DX-9100 (segment 2)
D O1 ma x
D O2
D O3 A O7
D O4 mi n
D O5 Po w er
D O6 m ax
D O7 A O8 RD
D O8 mi n TD
X P9 1 03 X P 9 1 02 X T9 1 0 0
D O5 D O6 D O7 D O8 FU SE N2LED N2LED
AI5 AI6 V A O7 A O 8 C 24 V C O M 24 V
xp9103 x p9 1 02
xt9 1 00
N2-
N2-
N2+
REF
N2+
REF
SHLD
SHLD
XTM/XPs
EXP D O 1 D O2 D O 3 D O4 EX P E XP
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 + 1 5V
E XP RS485
A B CA B C A D D RESS
EXP
DO 1
DO2
DO3
DO4
m ax
AO7
mi n
DX-9100
DO5 P o w er
DO6 m ax
DO7 A O8 RD
DO8 mi n TD
X P 91 0 3 X P9 1 02 X T9 1 0 0
D O5 D O6 D O7 D O8 FU S E
AI5 AI6 V A O7 A O8 C 24V C O M 24 V
xp9103 xp 9 1 02
xt9 1 0 0
E XP EX P RS485 E XP
AI 1 AI2 AI3 AI4 + 1 5V A B C A B C A D DRES S
T
N2 Communications Bus Guidelines
max
AO7
mi n
Po w er
max
A O8 RD
mi n TD
X P9 1 0 2 X T9 1 0 0
XTM/XPs
EXP D O 1 D O2 D O 3 D O 4 EX P E XP E XP
AI1 AI2AI3 AI4 + 1 5 V RS485 EX P
A B CA B C A D D RE S S
FUSE
x p 9 1 02 xt9 1 00
N2 Bus B (N2-B) is three bus DO1
DO2
DO3
ma x
AO7
mi n
DO4
DO5 P o w er
DO6 m ax
DO7 A O8 RD
DO8 mi n TD
X P91 03 X P9 1 02 X T9 1 0 0
segments connected at two Note: See XTM/XP
D O 5 D O 6 D O7 D O 8 FU S E
xp9103 xp 9 1 02
xt9 1 00
literature for N2
repeaters.
E XP E XP RS4 85 EXP
AHU300-0 AI 1 AI2 AI3AI4 +1 5 V A B CA B C A D D RE S S
connection
max
AO7
mi n
P o w er
requirements.
max
A O8 RD
mi n TD
X P 9 1 02 X T9 1 0 0
FU SE
AI5 AI6 V A O7 A O8 C 24 V CO M 24 V
xp9 1 02 xt9 1 00
Figure 19-1: N2 Communications Bus Diagram

UNT/VAV
1 23 4 5 6 78 End of line resistor required
OFF
TM
+ 1 5 VD C
AN ALO G
÷
AN ALO GINPUTS BI NARYIN PUT TO BI NA RY O UTPUT O UTPUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
Z B US
ZO NE
STAT
when XT Bus is greater than
N2-
REF
N 2+
COM
1 2 34 5 6
ZB U S
2 4VA C
2 4 VA C
2 4VA C
2 4VA C
24V A C
2 4VA C
A NAL O GINPUTS
24 VA C
BI N ARY C O M
+ 15 VD C
C O M M ON
C O M M ON
C O MM ON
1 2 34 5 6
A NAL OGINPUTS BIN ARYIN BINARY OUTPUTS A N A O UT

330 ft (100 m).
Ω
DSI
P5 P6
Repeater
876 54321
Figure 19-1: N2 Communications Bus Diagram (Incomplete Graphic)

Legend
T = N2 Bus EOL Switch Set To On
T
UNT/VAV Or EOL Terminator Installed.
UNT/VAV
1 23 4 5 6 7 8 1 23 4 5 6 7 8
OFF OFF
TM TM
N2 Bus
+1 5 V DC
AN AL O G
+ 1 5V D C
AN AL O G
A NAL O GIN PUTS BI NA RYINPUT BI NARY OUTPUT O UTPUT A NAL O GIN PUTS BI NA RYINPUT TO BI NARY OUTPUT O UTPUT
TO 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 ZON E 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 ZON E 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
Z BUS STAT Z BUS STAT
N2-
N2+
REF
N2-
N 2+
COM
REF
1 23 4 56
COM
ZB US
1 23 4 56
24V A C
24 V AC
24V A C
24V A C
24 V A C
24V AC
24 V A C
A N AL OGINPUTS
ZB US
BIN ARY C OM
24 V A C
24 V AC
24 V A C
24 V A C
24 V A C
24 V AC
+1 5 V D C
24 V A C
A N AL OGINPUTS BIN ARY C OM
+1 5 V D C
C O MM O N
C O M MO N
CO M M ON
C O MM O N
C O M MO N
CO M M ON
1 23 4 56 1 23 4 56
N2 Bus B
r si
ANAL O GINPUTS BIN ARYIN BI NA RY O UTPUTS A N A OUT ANAL O GINPUTS BIN ARYIN BI NA RY O UTPUTS A N A OUT
DSI DSI
P5 P6 P5 P6
XT Bus
GI F :N2r
(segment 3)
173
N2 BUS
N2 BUS
N2 Bus Overview and Rules

The N2 Communications Bus is a 9600 baud RS-485 network that connects Metasys NAEs, NCEs, and NCMs to
field controllers and point interfaces. The N2 Bus uses a master/slave protocol. The master device (NAE, NCE, or
NCM) initiates all communication with lower-level, slave devices.
The N2 Bus is typically installed with 22 AWG three-conductor unshielded twisted cable. Optionally, the N2 Bus can
use shielded, twisted cable or optical fiber when special fiber modems are used. The use of shielded cable is
recommended only for trunk segments that are routed near highly inductive loads produced by motors, or by
transformers and (non-electronic) lighting ballasts.
For most installations, N2 Bus segments use a daisy-chain network topology (Figure 19-2 on page 175); however,
when repeaters are used to extend the network, a branch or star topology can also be implemented. See
Table 19-1 on page 174 for N2 Bus rules.
The NAE, NCE, or NCM supports one N2 Bus, but some NAE models can support two N2 Buses. The devices that
you place on the N2 Bus include a wide variety of Johnson Controls and third-party controllers and devices.
Most N2 devices are connected to the N2 Bus with a removable terminal block on the device. Connection occurs
when you terminate the N2 wires between the master device (NAE, NCE, or NCM) and the slave devices
(Johnson Controls field controllers and third-party devices).
Table 19-1: N2 Communications Bus Rules
Category Rules/ Maximums Allowed
General Typically daisy-chained; branch or star configuration acceptable when repeaters are
used. See Figure 19-2 on page 175.
Number of Devices 100 devices total on the N2 Bus
50 devices per bus segment (not to exceed 100 device maximum for bus)
Up to two cascaded repeaters may be applied to the N2 Bus
Line Length and Type 1,524 m (5,000 ft)1 maximum separation between any devices on a bus segment.
Repeaters are used to logically connect bus segments together.
4,572 m (15,000 ft)1 between any devices on a bus (up to three segments of 1,524 m
[5,000 ft] each using cascaded repeaters). See Figure 19-2 on page 175.
2,012 m (6,600 ft)1 between two fiber modems
Cable 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire, twisted unshielded cable or
22 AWG stranded, 3-wire, twisted shielded cable
EOL Trunk Termination See EOL Termination Across the N2 Bus on page 179.
1. Some device models and third-party devices may have reduced capabilities.

N2 BUS
One Segment NxE/NCM
NxE/NCM 1,524 m (,5000 ft) maximum* ET SY
50 Nodes maximum
R
ET SY R
Combined Total for Both Segments

1,524 m (5,000 ft) maximum*
50 Nodes maximum
Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

1,524 m (5,000 ft) maximum 1,524 m (5,000 ft) maximum 1,524 m (5,000 ft) maximum
50 nodes max/segment 50 nodes max/segment 50 nodes max/segment
100 nodes max/bus 100 nodes max/bus 100 nodes max/bus
NxE/NCM
ET SY R
R R
NxE/NCM Branched Segments Star Segments

4,572 m (15,000 ft) maximum* NxE/NCM 4,572 m (15,000 ft) maximum*
ET SY R
100 Nodes maximum ET SY R

100 Nodes maximum
R R R R R R
FIG:N2_Segs
NxE: NAE or NCE
* Maximum length from NxE/NCM to farthest N2 device. R = Repeater
Figure 19-2: N2 Bus Showing Valid Topologies and Segment Limits
N2 Communications Bus Guidelines: Section 19 175

N2 BUS
Wiring the N2 Bus

all wiring connections. Short-circuited or improperly connected wires may result in permanent damage to the
equipment.
IMPORTANT: Do not run network communication cables in the same conduit, raceway, or panel with any high-
voltage (>30 VAC) wiring. Isolate all network devices from high-voltage wiring and equipment. Failure to isolate
network wiring and network devices from high-voltage wiring and equipment can result in damage to network
devices or poor network performance.
IMPORTANT: Do not connect N2 and MS/TP devices to the same FC Bus. The N2 Bus terminal on some NAE
or NCE models is labeled FC Bus, and even though the N2 and MS/TP protocols both use the FC Bus port, the
two protocols cannot share the same FC Bus.
IMPORTANT: Properly install, terminate, and ground the cable shield on the N2 Bus to minimize inductive
noise, which can result in unreliable communication on the bus.
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge to the network wiring and network devices. Static electric
discharge can damage the network devices and void any warranties.
General N2 Bus Wiring Guidelines

Observe the following when installing and wiring the N2 Communication Bus:
• Do not run cables near moving parts. Avoid sharp bends, abrasion, and the potential for severing or crushing
the cable.
• Provide some slack in the wires and cables to allow for access and servicing.
• Protect, coil, and secure any excess cable.
• Ensure proper grounding for bus cable shielding.
• Ensure proper EOL termination on communication busses.
• Use dedicated transformers for 24 VAC supply power to the network devices or provide surge protection on the
primary side of the 24 VAC supply power transformers to isolate the network devices from inductive surges or
spikes.

N2 BUS
Wiring the N2 Bus
COM (Blue)
– (White)
The N2 Bus uses 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire, twisted
+ (Black)
unshielded cable. Figure 19-3 on page 177 shows a wiring
SHLD
detail for an N2 Bus connected to an NAE/NCE. FC(N2) Bus terminal
block on an NAE has + = N2+
Figure 19-4 on page 177 shows a wiring detail for a typical an isolated SHLD - = N2-
COM
N2 device (with optional cable shield and soft ground
SH
LD
terminal. (Use is + A COM = N2 REF
connection). optional.)
Note: Connect the N2 Bus leads to the NAE’s or NCE’s N2 Bus terminal
FC Bus terminal block. block on N2 Devices
does not have a SHLD Optional Isolated
Follow these guidelines for wiring the N2 Bus: terminal. Cable Shield
Terminal (on NAE
• Wire the bus devices following the network topology FC Bus Ports)
options shown in Figure 19-2 on page 175. Maintain
consistent polarity along the entire N2 Bus. If using the
recommended N2 Bus cables from Anixter (see
Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards on To Next To Next
page 465), use the following wire color coding scheme: Device Device
FIG:N2_Term
3 Conductor, 22 AWG
Table 19-2: N2 Bus Wire Color Scheme (Cable Shield recommended in applications that
Terminal Wire Color encounter ambient inductive noise or interference.)
+ Black Figure 19-3: Wiring Detail of N2 Bus Connected to

- White FC (N2) Bus Terminal Block on NAE/NCE
COM Blue
• Twist the N2 Bus lead pairs together before inserting

into the termination and ensure that the termination is
N2- (White)
N2+ (Black)
REF (Blue)
tight at each terminal block on the daisy-chain.
• Shielded cable is optional on an N2 Bus, but it is
recommended for applications that encounter high
inductive interference or noise, or high RF
COM
interference. Connect the shield in a daisy-chain along Typical N2 Bus + + = N2+
the N2 Bus, and connect to hard ground at only one Terminal Block - = N2-
on N2 Devices COM = N2 REF
point, preferably near the N2 Bus supervisor (NAE,
NCE, or NCM).
• The shield connection terminal (SHLD) on the NAE or
NCE FC (N2) Bus terminal block is isolated and not
connected to ground. The SHLD terminal is provided
as a convenient terminal for connecting and isolating
the cable shields on the bus cables connected at the
FC Bus terminal blocks. At 3-terminal bus
connections, connect the cable shield drains together To Next To Next
Device Device
with a small wirenut or similar connector.
• If shielded cable is used, hard ground the cable shield (Optional) Cable Shield 560 pF
Connection Capacitor
at the NAE, NCE, or NCM where the N2 Bus to Soft Ground
terminates. Terminate the hard ground within 1 inch of
entering the metal enclosure. Isolate all other cable
shield connections from hard ground along the bus Figure 19-4: Wiring Detail of Typical N2 Device
segment. Terminal Block (with an Optional Soft Ground
• If the N2 segment experiences persistent network Connection to the Cable Shield)
communication problems or if the segment encounters
high ambient inductive noise, apply soft ground connections along the segment. To create a soft ground
connection (Figure 19-4 on page 177), connect a 560 pF capacitor between the cable shield and ground. The
connection to ground should be made within the first inch of entering the enclosure.

N2 BUS
Surge
Protector
N2 Bus
protect1
Surge
Protector
N2 Bus
N2 Bus
N2 Bus
Figure 19-5: Surge Protector Installation on N2 Bus
Surge Protectors
One pair of surge protectors is required whenever the N2 Bus wire is routed outside between two buildings. Install
the protector close to the N2 device that first receives the bus wires from the outside. See Figure 19-5 on
page 178.
The recommended surge protector is the Transient Eliminator, model TE/JC04C12, manufactured by Advanced
Protection Technologies, Inc. (APT). The device protects the N2 Bus from indirect lightning and shunts both
common and normal mode voltage surges to ground repeatedly without damage to N2 Bus components.
Do not use the surge protector with any other type wiring, such as leased line. If you need surge protection for
other wire types, contact APT or another transient noise protection company.
Fiber-Optic Modems
Fiber-optic modems are communication devices that provide conversion between N2 Bus signals (RS-485) and
fiber-optic signals. A pair of modems is required for each point of conversion.
EOL Termination on the N2 Bus
EOL termination is required on the N2 Bus to reduce
signal reflection when data transmissions reach the end of
a bus segment and bounce back. EOL termination is built
into some Metasys N2 devices and is enabled with a
switch or jumper on the device (Figure 19-6 on page 178).
AHUs, UNTs, DXs, VMAs, and VAVs are self-terminating
(EOL termination built-in) and therefore do not require
EOL termination at the device. For devices located at the
end of a bus segment that are not self-terminating (no
O 1
built-in EOL switch), use an EOL terminator. The EOL Switch in
FIG:NAE_EOL
recommended EOL terminator is the

MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator. For a
the ON Position
summary of EOL terminations, see Table 19-3 on
page 179. Additional details follow the table.
Figure 19-6: Setting the EOL Termination
Switch on the NAE35/45 or NCM45

N2 BUS
Table 19-3: Guide to End-of-Line Terminations
Device Type Device Is at End of Bus Device Is Not at End of Bus
Self-Terminating None None
Built-in EOL Switch Set EOL Switch On Set EOL Switch Off
No Controller EOL Provision Add EOL Terminator None
EOL Termination on NAEs, NCEs, and NCMs

An EOL switch on an NAE, NCE, and NCM enables EOL termination. For those NAEs/NCEs with two N2 Bus
connections, two EOL double-pole switches are provided. Set the EOL switch to the ON (up) position to set the
controller as an EOL termination device (Figure 19-6 on page 178).
EOL Termination on Switch-Terminating Devices
Some field controllers have an EOL switch or jumper. Such devices include DCMs, XBNs, XREs, ILCs, IFCs,
repeaters, SECVTs, and D600s. Set the EOL termination to On for any of these devices when it is the last device
on a bus segment.
EOL Termination on Self-Terminating Devices
Some field controllers are self-terminating devices and do not offer EOL switches. Such devices include VMAs,
VAVs, AHUs, UNTs, and DXs. These devices can be located anywhere on a bus segment and do not require an
EOL terminator.
EOL Termination on Devices without EOL Provision
For the devices such as TECs and third-party controllers in which no EOL provision is provided, install the
MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator at the device if at the end of the bus segment.
EOL Termination Across the N2 Bus
The N2 Bus may consist of up to three bus segments. Each bus segment on an N2 Bus requires two EOL
termination devices, one at each end of the bus segment. All other devices on the N2 Bus should have their EOL
termination disabled (EOL switches Off) (Figure 19-7 on page 179). If only one device on an N2 segment has an
EOL termination, it must be set to On.
EOL on N2 Bus Repeaters
When using repeaters in the N2 Bus, set the EOL jumpers (Figure 19-8 on page 180) based on the position of the
repeater in the run. See Table 19-4 on page 180 for proper settings.
NxE/NCM NxE/NCM
EOL Switch ON EOL Switch ON
ET SY DX9100
ILC
R
Self-terminating
ET SY R
EOL On
T
T
NxE/NCM
EOL Switch ON
ET SY R
TEC
EOL Terminator installed
FIG:EOL_Stng
NxE: NAE or NCE T T
T = N2 Bus EOL Termination On

Room Temp
70. 0ºF
MO DE FA N
Figure 19-7: Example of N2 EOL Terminations

N2 BUS
Table 19-4: EOL Settings for Repeater

Side Jumper If Repeater:
Side A J1 and J2 At end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).
Side B J3 and J4 At end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).
N2 Bus Repeater
The N2 Bus repeater (Figure 19-8 on page 180) isolates and boosts the power of the N2 Bus signal, which extends
the range and increases the number of devices that can reside on the N2 Bus. You need a repeater only when the
N2 Bus must be extended beyond 5,000 feet or 50 devices (or less if third-party devices are used). See
Figure 19-8 on page 180 for wiring detail. See N2 Communications Bus on page 184 for repeater model
information.
321
N2 Bus Repeater J4 EOL
N2 Bus Side B J3 Jumpers
Side B
Com REF-OUT (Out)
D N2 OUT(-)
D N2 OUT(+)
3 2 1
J1 EOL
N2 Bus Side A Jumpers
J2
Side A
Com REF-IN
D N2 IN(-) (In)
Baud Rate
D N2 IN(+) Switches
(set to 9600 baud)
120 VAC
G GND
W LO
N1
HI
FIG:N2_Rptr
Figure 19-8: Setting a Repeater EOL Termination on the FC Bus
N2 Bus Device Addressing

Every N2 Bus device (except the N2 Bus repeater) must have a unique address. For details on setting the N2 Bus
address on a device, see Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus on page 185.

N2 BUS
N2 Bus Checkout and Testing
Voltage readings on the N2 Bus must fall within the following voltage ranges:
Table 19-5: Acceptable Voltage Ratings for the N2 Bus
Measurement Lower Limit Upper Limit
N2+ to REF 2.45 VDC 2.98 VDC
N2– to REF 2.06 VDC 2.54 VDC
N2+ to N2– +0.38 VDC +0.92 VDC
Note: Because of the robust nature of the N2 Bus, a bus with voltages outside of these ranges may still
communicate, but may function in an impaired state. If the number of devices or device traffic on an impaired N2
Bus increases, communication problems could occur. Therefore, if your readings are not within the ranges listed in
Table 19-5 on page 181, a wire is most likely grounded, shorted, or crossed with another wire.
If you discover that the N2 voltages are outside these recommended ranges, you must locate and fix the problem.
To determine the location of the problem, go halfway down the bus, split it into two segments, and measure each
segment. Continue this process until the problem is isolated, identified, and corrected.
In many cases, poor N2 voltage is caused by:
• faulty or improper end-of-line termination
• short circuit between N2+, N2– and/or N2 REF at some point on the bus
• N2+ or N2– wire reversed on one or more field controllers
To assist you with successfully installing and validating the N2 Bus, the following tools are available:
• ComBus Quick Tester
• Metasys Checkout Tool
ComBus Quick Tester
The ComBus Quick Tester tests an entire N2 Bus
segment. It checks all three bus voltage readings
against the values in Table 19-5 on page 181, indicates REF - +
a Pass/Fail test result, counts all devices on the bus, 4-position Plug-in Terminal
Connector
and displays each controller by type.
To use the ComBus Quick Tester, follow these steps: End View
1. Unplug the N2 Bus terminal connector from the N2
device and insert it into the plug-in terminal on top
of the Quick Tester. The connector has the same
LCD Display
polarity order as the N2 device, so no wiring is
required.
Start
2. Set the end-of-line termination switch on the Scroll
Buttons
ComBus Quick Tester according to the tester’s Power
location on the N2 Bus.
End-of-line
3. Position the N2 and MS/TP Switch to the N2 Switch N2 or MS/TP
Switch
position.
FIG:Comtst
4. Supply power to all devices on the N2 Bus.

5. Turn on the ComBus Quick Tester.
6. Press and release the Start button on the tester. MS-CQT485-0
The entire test completes within 1 minute.
Figure 19-9: ComBus Quick Tester
7. Verify that the screen indicates a Pass result. If the
test result is Fail, troubleshoot the N2 Bus.
For more information, contact B&B Electronics regarding the Johnson Controls ComBus Quick Tester, Part
Number MS-CQT485-0. B&B Electronics can be contacted at (815) 433-5100 or on the Web at http://www.bb-
elec.com.

N2 BUS
Metasys Checkout Tool

The Metasys Checkout Tool (Figure 19-10 on page 182) helps you perform basic installation and wiring checkout
through a Palm compatible handheld device. You can also run the tool on a laptop computer with Palm Emulator
software.
The tool provides a semi-automated method of checking controller
wiring on the N2 or Zone Bus. It can also validate input/output wiring
and provide sensor/actuator setup.
Note: Since there is a wide variety of Palm-compatible handheld
devices, only some models are supported. For a list of compatible
models, refer to the Palm Tools Resource Page located on the Field
Support Center page of the Johnson Controls Portal intranet site. Metasys
Also refer to this site to obtain the Metasys Checkout Tool software at Checkout
no cost. Tool
For information on how to install and use this tool, refer to the
Metasys Checkout Tool User’s Guide (LIT-1201102).
FIG:metachktl
Figure 19-10: Metasys Checkout Tool

N2 BUS
Design and Installation of N2 N2 Communications Bus Technical Bulletin LIT-636018
Communication Buses
Troubleshooting Techniques for the N2 ASC and N2 Bus Network and Troubleshooting LIT-6363003
Communication Bus Guide
NAE5500 and NIE5500
NAE3500 and NAE4500
NCE25
NCM45x0-2
Specifications and Installation of the AHU Air Handling Unit (AHU) Controller Technical LIT-6363010
Air Handling Unit Controller Bulletin
Specifications and Installation of the UNT Unitary (UNT) Controller Technical Bulletin LIT-6363081
Unitary Controller
Specifications and Installation of the VAV Variable Air Volume (VAV) Controller Technical LIT-6363040
Variable Air Volume Controller Bulletin
Specifications and Installation of the DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Technical LIT-6364020
DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Bulletin
Specifications and Installation of the TEC1100 Series Technical Bulletin LIT-6363155
TEC1100 Series Networked Thermostats
Specifications and Installation of the TEC2101-1 Networked Single-Stage Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-13
TEC2100 Series Networked Thermostats Installations Instructions
TEC2102-1 Networked Single-Stage Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-145
Installations Instructions
TEC2103-1 Networked Multi-Stage Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-48
TEC2104-1 Networked Multi-Stage Economizer Part No. 24-9890-56
Thermostat Installations Instructions
Specifications and Installation of the MS-BACEOL-0 End-of-Line Terminator Part No. 24-10264-64
MS-BACEOL End-of-Line Terminator Installations Instructions
How to use the Metasys Checkout Tool Metasys Checkout Tool User’s Guide LIT-1201102
Commissioning an N2 Bus device with AS-CVTPROx00-1 Zone Bus/N2 Bus Interface Part No. 24-9544-0
the RS-485 Converter Converter

N2 BUS
Table 19-7: N2 Communications Bus
Address Range of Devices 1 to 2551
Number of Devices Supported Up to 100 (60 to 200 TC-9100s).
on an FC Bus 50 devices per bus segment maximum
Note: When multiple TEC2600 thermostats and/or other third-party devices are
connected to the bus the maximum capacity is reduced to 32 devices per segment.2
3 bus segments per FC Bus maximum
Data Transmission Standard RS-485
Signaling Method Baseband, 9600 baud, ASCII/Hexadecimal character
Surge Protection Tested to pass IEEE 587 and 472 waveforms
Transient Immunity Meets ENG1000-4 requirements for heavy industrial applications. Protected against
Termination Method Network of resistors that are switch selectable on certain devices.
Installation of MS-BACEOL-0 for devices that have no EOL provision or are not
self-terminating.
Transmission Media 22 AWG twisted 3-wire unshielded cable (solid or stranded)
22 AWG twisted 3-wire shielded cable (solid or stranded)
Optical Fiber (requires use of optical fiber modem)
Ethernet via Approved N2 Tunneling Devices
Shield Grounding One hard ground per bus segment when using shielded cable.
Physical Configuration Daisy-chained
Branch or star configuration acceptable when repeaters are used.
Distance between Devices 1,524 m (5,000 ft) maximum
Bus Length Up to 4,572 m (15,000 ft). One repeater per 1,524 m (5,000 ft) or 50 devices.
RS-485 Converter MM-CVT101-0, RS-232 to RS-485 converter for N2 Bus or
AS-CVTPROx00-1 Zone Bus/N2 Bus Interface Converter
Used for commissioning certain N2 devices.
Optional Vendor Components Repeaters
Acromag 4683-TTM-1F (115 VAC)
Acromag 4683-TTM-2F (230 VAC)
A repeater is required to support more than 50 devices per trunk segment and/or trunk
cable segments longer than 1,524 m (5,000 ft).
Transient Eliminator
Advanced Protection Technologies Transient Eliminator device TE/JC04C12
Fiber Modem
S.I. Tech 2110 Fiber-Optic Modem and S.I. Tech 2121 Power Supply
9-pin Male Connector Kit (required by 2110 modem)
Does not support 76.8k baud.
Preferred Network Cable Anixter Incorporated
Supplier 4420 N. Harley Davidson Ave., Suite B
Wauwatosa, WI 53225
1-800-447-8565
414-755-6120 (main)
414-755-6121 (fax)
1. If you have VMAs on the N2 trunk, do not use Addresses 254 or 255.
2. Some device models and third-party devices may reduce the N2 Bus device capacity.

Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus
N2 BUS
ADDR
NO
128 8
64 7 1
32 6 2
16 5 3
8 4 4
4 3 5
2 2 6
1 1
7
NO
NO
UNT, VAV DX-9100 XT-9100, XTM-905
O
F
O F
N 1
8 2
OF
7 4
6 128 8
F
5 64 16
4 32 32
OF
3 16 64
8
F
2 128
1 4
2
1
AHU VMA-1400 NDM
Address Block Zone Jumpers

Out
In
NO
1
2
2
1
3
Zone 1 Jumper
Zone 2 Jumper
4
5
6
FIG:DIP_addr
TC-9102
Figure 20-1: Various N2 Bus Device Address Switches, All Set to Address Value 168
Device Addresses on the N2 Bus
All devices connected to the N2 Communications Bus require a unique address to identify the device to
N2 BUS
supervisory controllers, such as NAEs, NCEs, and NCMs. These master devices use the address for polling,
ADDR
monitoring, and commanding slave N2 Bus devices and their field points.
For most devices, a set of DIP switches is used to configure the N2 Bus address. For other devices, such as
networked thermostats, the address is configured in software.
Note: To determine the N2 address number to use for each device, refer to addresses shown on the engineered
drawing’s riser diagram or room schedule.
DIP Switches
Figure 20-1 on page 185 shows the DIP switch designs for most controllers that reside on the N2 Bus. The switch
has eight segments with two positions: ON (In) and OFF (Out). Each switch corresponds to an 8-bit number from 1
to 128. Switches are labeled 1 to 8 or 1 to 128 (in 8-bit increments) and have the following decimal equivalents:
Table 20-1: Switch Number and Its Decimal Equivalent
Switch Number 1 2 3 or 4 4 or 8 5 or 16 6 or 32 7 or 64 8 or 128
Decimal Equivalent 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
The N2 hardware address is determined by summing the values beside each DIP switch that is set to ON. For
example, Figure 20-1 on page 185 shows how to set an Address of 168. Switch 128 (or Switch 8), Switch 32 (or
Switch 6), and Switch 8 (or Switch 4) are each set to ON (128 + 32 + 8 = 168), and all others are set to OFF.
Note: As a best practice when setting an N2 address, begin with the largest switch setting possible. For example,
if you need to set Address 100, you would start with the switch that is closest to (but not greater than) 100, which is
Switch 64 (7); then select the next lower numbered switch(es) that would provide a sum of 100, which are Switch
32 (6) and Switch 4 (3).
The process of setting or changing an N2 device address involves turning off power to the device, setting the N2
address, then returning power to device. A power cycle is required so that the controller updates itself with the new
address.
If the N2 device does not have DIP switches, such as networked thermostats and optionally the VMA1400, the N2
address is configured in software. For details, see the sections TEC Networked Thermostats on page 194 and
Software Addressing the VMA1400 on page 191.
The order of the N2 addresses you elect to use does not need to match the sequential order in which the devices
are installed in the field. For example, the first controller down the line may have Address 5 and the last controller
may have Address 1. No delays in communication result in mixing the order of address assignments. However,
using an incrementing address assignment scheme starting with Address 1 on the first device connected to the
supervisory controller makes for an intelligent network design.
If for some reason two devices have been assigned the same N2 Bus address on a single logical bus, even across
bus segments with a repeater in between, unreliable communications result.
The supervisory device that also has an N2 Bus connection (such as the NAE, NCE or NCM) does not require an
N2 Bus address.
To set the address on an N2 Bus device, you need the following:
• HVAC PRO software, current version (only if you need to software address VMAs)
• Laptop computer (to run HVAC PRO software)
• Small straight-blade screwdriver (for clicking switches into place)
• Small needle-nose pliers (for removing or inserting jumpers, if setting the TC-9102)

Table 20-2: N2 Communications Bus Addressing Rules
Category Rules
N2 BUS
ADDR
General One address used on one device across entire network.
Address Range 1 to 253
Note: Do not use address 0 (invalid), 2541, or 2552
Addressing N2 Bus Repeaters N2 Bus repeaters do not require an N2 Bus address and are not identified as an online
device to the network. They are passive devices.
1. Address 254 is reserved in the VMA as a broadcast address used during code downloads from HVAC PRO for Windows
software. This allows multiple VMAs to receive a download.
2. Address 255 is reserved for the Metasys Ethernet Router, if one is in use on the network.
Setting the Address on N2 Bus Devices

IMPORTANT: It is absolutely critical that you set addresses correctly. Duplicate addresses on the N2 Bus
cause unreliable communication, and finding which devices have the same address is very time-consuming.
UNTs and VAVs

The N2 Bus address for UNTs and VAVs is set with DIP switches located on the top right corner of the unit
(Figure 20-2 on page 187). The example in Figure 20-2 on page 187 shows Address 17. Follow these steps:
1. Turn off power to the device.
2. Position the DIP switches to configure the address using the 8-bit binary format.
3. Return power to the device.
N2 Address Switches
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
N
O
VAV/UNT Controller
12 345 67 8
R
OFF
ANALOG
ANALOG INPUTS BINARY INPUT TO BINARY OUTPUT OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 ZONE 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
STAT
Z BUS
1 23 45 6
ANALOG INPUTS BINARY COM
COMMON
1 23 45 6
FIG:VAV_N2-Addr
ANALOG INPUTS BINARY IN BINARY OUTPUTS ANA OUT
DSI
P5 P6
Figure 20-2: N2 Address Switches on UNT/VAV
IMPORTANT: For a UNT controller at Release A02 or earlier, do not use Addresses 8, 144, or 152. If you use
these addresses, you may experience N2 Bus collisions.
Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus: Section 20 187

DX9100s
The N2 Bus address for DX9100s is set with DIP switches located on the base of the controller. To set the address:
N2 BUS
ADDR

2. Detach the controller from the unit by flipping down the front panel flap and releasing Screw C (Figure 20-3 on
page 188.) Pull the right side of the controller away from the base until it is free. Then completely remove the
controller from the base, detaching the lugs on the left side. Place the controller in a safe location.
DIGITAL ANALOG TRIAC 24

INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS VAC
RD X D
TD
AL
01 10 XT Y XT
Screw C
Z A
K A/M
E
ESC
FIG:wirngd03
XT N2 RS232 ANALOG
BUS BUS INPUTS
Figure 20-3: DX Front Panel
3. Locate the Address switches on the unit (Figure 20-4 on page 188).
0-
(F
20
0-A ANALOG
10CT m OUTPUTS
A
VO
R 1 2
9ON
10 O 12345678
Y)
ADDRESS N
(F 1 2 3 4
0-A RT 5 6 7 8
10CT D
VO
R 1 2 3 4
Y) 5 6 7 8
ANALOG INPUTS
0-
20
m
A
1 2 3 4
FAIL0-
SAFE (0 - 10 V5 ONLY)
6 7 8
FA FA 20
IL
0- IL 0- m
HI
10 LO
G 10 A/
V WV RT
H
D 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
NO JUMPERS FACTORY SETTING
ADDRESS N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FIG:DX_n2-Addr
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 20-4: N2 Address Switches on Base of DX Controller
4. Set the controller address with the address switches using the 8-bit binary format.
5. Reattach the controller to the base with Screw C.

XTs and XTMs
The N2 Bus address for an XT or XTM is set with DIP switches located on the front of the unit (Figure 20-5 on
N2 BUS
page 189). Follow these steps:
ADDR
XT9100
XTM-905
RS485 EXP
A B CA B C A DDRESS XT-BUS E
X
P
XTM-905 METASYS
Power ON
PWR
RD
TD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RD
TD
XT9100 JOHNSON
CONTROLS
FIG:XT-XTM_N2-Addr
ADDRESS 2
FUSE 4
COM 24V V
~
Figure 20-5: N2 Address Switches on XT or XTM

AHU
The N2 Bus address for an AHU is set with DIP switches located in the lower right corner of its motherboard
N2 BUS
(Figure 20-6 on page 190). Follow these steps:

ADDR

AHU Controller Board
N2 Address
FIG:AHU_N2-Addr
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Figure 20-6: N2 Address Switches on AHU Controller

VMA1400s
You have two choices for setting the N2 addresses for VMAs: hardware addressing or software addressing.
N2 BUS
Hardware addresses take priority over software addresses. If you use software addressing, see Setup and
ADDR
Adjustment on page 224.
Hardware Addressing the VMA1400
To use hardware addressing on the VMA1400:
2. Position the DIP switches to configure the address using the 8-bit binary format. The switches are located on
the left side of the controller (Figure 20-7 on page 191).
N2 Address
DIP Switches
O
F
O F
N
128
64
32
16
8
4
FIG:VMA_N2-Addr
2
1
example: 16 + 1 = 17
Figure 20-7: N2 Address Switches on VMA1400 Controller
Software Addressing the VMA1400

If you use software addressing, the VMA must be at firmware Revision B12 or later. In addition, you need a laptop
computer that has HVAC PRO software Release 8.01 or later.
To address a VMA in software:
1. Set all N2 address DIP switches to Address 0 or 255 on all VMAs on the N2 Bus. If the DIP switches are set to
any other value during power up, the controller defaults to hardware addressing.
2. Supply power to the units.
3. Program each address through the Zone Bus using a laptop, AS-CBLPRO-2 or AS-CVTPROx00-0 converter,
and HVAC PRO software Release 8.01 or later. Select either Controller Information or VMA Balancer Tool from
the Action menu in HVAC PRO software.
If you select Controller Information, select Single Device.
4. Select Zone Bus. The Controller Information screen or VMA Balancer Tool screen appears.
5. Select an N2 address from the drop-down list.
6. Click Set Address.
7. Wait for the new address to appear in the N2 Address field of the Controller Information screen or Balancer
Tool screen.
Alternatively, program each address through the Zone Bus using a Palm compatible handheld device and the VBT
software. Refer to Auxiliary Gear Technical Bulletin (LIT-6363080) and Using the VMA1400 Balancing Tool (VBT)
Software Technical Bulletin (LIT-6363092).

NDM
The N2 Bus address for an NDM is set with DIP switches located on the left side of the unit (Figure 20-8 on
N2 BUS
page 192). Follow these steps:

ADDR

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
NDM
N 2 A DD R ES S
R S2 32
TO
M O DEM
1
O FF
2
4
8
16 N U -ND M1 01-0
32 RE V - M9426
64
128
N2TRANSMIT
0 11 65 3 2 8 71 6
N2RECEI VE
N 2 E ND P O W ER
O FL INE
OU T IN
9-12 VAC/DC
0.5A
R EF
E M BO DI E D S O F TW AR E
N 2-
N 2+
©
19 94
41 00 /A 00 /03
FIG:N2-Addr
JOHNS ON CONTROLS INC.

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Figure 20-8: N2 Address Switches on N2 Dialer Module (NDM)
TC-9102s
The N2 address on a TC-9102 is set with a six position DIP switch and a set of jumpers (Figure 20-9 on page 193).
The address is determined by the switch positions, and whether a jumper is installed across Zone 1 Jumper and/or
Zone 2 Jumper. Follow these steps:
2. Position the DIP switches and Zone Jumpers to configure the address using the 8-bit binary format. Two
examples are provided in Figure 20-10 on page 193. Also, see Table 20-3 on page 193 and Table 20-4 on
page 194 for how the switches and jumpers work together to set the address. Table 20-5 on page 194 shows
an example of setting Address 100.

TC-9102 Board
N2 BUS
ADDR
JP2
1 2 3 4
Zone 1 Jumper
Zone 2 Jumper
JP2
ON
1 U1
Address 2
Switches 3
4
5
6
SW1 JP3
FIG:tc9102addr
Figure 20-9: N2 Address Switches and Jumpers on TC-9102 Controller
N2 Address 43 N2 Address 100

Address Switches
Address Switches
ON JP2 ON JP2
1 1
2 2
3 3
Zone 1 Jumper (Out)
Zone 2 Jumper (Out)
Zone 2 Jumper (Out)
4
Zone 1 Jumper (In)
4
FIG:N2addrset
5 5
6 6
SW1 SW1
Figure 20-10: Examples of Setting N2 Bus Address
Table 20-3: Setting Network Addresses on TC-9102

Zone 1 Jumper Zone 2 Jumper Address Switch Network Address
Out Out 0 to 63 0 to 63
In Out 0 to 63 64 to 127
Out In 0 to 63 128 to 191
In In 0 to 63 192 to 255

Table 20-4: Addresses Format for TC-9102
Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 Zone 1 Zone 2
N2 BUS
Number Jumper Jumper

ADDR
Decimal 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
Equivalent
Table 20-5: Example (Address 100) for TC-9102

Switch Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Zone 1 Zone 2
Jumper Jumper
Switch Position Off Off On Off Off On In Out
Decimal = 100 0+ 0+ 4+ 0+ 0+ 32 + 64 0
TEC Networked Thermostats

TEC networked thermostats, such as the TEC1101 and TEC2101 Series thermostats, have N2 communications
capability. However, the N2 address on these units is not set with switches; it is set using the menu screens on the
unit.
Setting N2 Address on TEC1100 Series Networked Thermostat
To set the N2 address on a TEC1100 Series networked thermostat:
1. Push the Fan and Mode buttons simultaneously for 10 seconds after the thermostat is powered on. The lower
section of the display shows the current N2 address.
2. Press the up and down arrow buttons to change the address (1-253).
3. Push any button to exit this mode, or wait 5 seconds and the TEC automatically returns to normal operation.
Note: You can lock the keyboard by placing DIP Switch 2 in the ON position to prevent address change;
however, this disables access to other functions except temporary occupancy.
Setting N2 Address on TEC2100 Series Networked Thermostat
To set the N2 address on a TEC2100 Series networked thermostat:
1. Access the Installer Configuration Menu by removing the front cover and by pressing the configuration key,
labeled CONFIG.
Note: When the thermostat is in the Installer Configuration Menu and left unattended for 45 seconds, it reverts
to the Status Display Menu.
2. Answer NO to all prompts until the setting the N2 address prompt appears in the display. Press YES to set the
address.
3. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to display the desired address. The default address is 253.
4. Press YES to store the address.
5. Verify the correct N2 address is stored by pressing the YES and NO keys simultaneously. The programmed N2
address temporarily appears.
6. Close the front cover of the unit.
N2 Bus Repeater
The N2 Bus Repeater, used to isolate and boost the power of the N2 Bus signal, does not require an N2 address. It
acts as a passive device on the N2 Bus.

N2 BUS
ADDR
Design and Installation of N2 N2 Communications Bus Technical Bulletin LIT-636018
Communication Buses
Troubleshooting Techniques for the N2 ASC and N2 Bus Network and Troubleshooting LIT-6363003
Communication Bus Guide
NAE5500 and NIE5500
NAE3500 and NAE4500
NCE25
NCM45x0-2
Specifications and Installation of the AHU Air Handling Unit (AHU) Controller Technical LIT-6363010
Air Handling Unit Controller Bulletin
Specifications and Installation of the UNT Unitary (UNT) Controller Technical Bulletin LIT-6363081
Unitary Controller
Specifications and Installation of the VAV Variable Air Volume (VAV) Controller Technical LIT-6363040
Variable Air Volume Controller Bulletin
Specifications and Installation of the DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Technical LIT-6364020
DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Bulletin
Specifications and Installation of the NDM N2 Dialer Module (NDM) Technical Bulletin LIT-6363065
Specifications and Installation of the XT-9100 Technical Bulletin LIT-6364040
XT-9100
Specifications and Installation of the XTM-905 Extension Module, XPx-xxx Expansion LIT-6364210
XTM-905 Modules Technical Bulletin
Specifications and Installation of the TC-9102 Terminal Unit Controller Technical LIT-6363050
TC-9102 Bulletin
Specifications and Installation of the TEC1100 Series Technical Bulletin LIT-6363155
TEC1100 Series Networked Thermostats
Specifications and Installation of the TEC2101-1 Networked Single-Stage Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-13
TEC2100 Series Networked Thermostats Installations Instructions
TEC2102-1 Networked Single-Stage Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-145
TEC2103-1 Networked Multi-Stage Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-48
TEC2104-1 Networked Multi-Stage Economizer Part No. 24-9890-56
Thermostat Installations Instructions

N2 BUS
ADDR

UNT Controllers
Application
The UNT Controller is an electronic device for digital control of packaged air handling units, unit ventilators, fan
coils, heat pumps, and other terminal units serving a single zone or room. It can also be configured as a generic
Input/Output device for basic point monitoring applications when used within a Metasys network.
UNT
The UNT may be used as a stand-alone controller or connected to the Metasys network through a Metasys
supervisory controller.
When connected to the Metasys network, the UNT provides all point control information to the rest of the network.
The devices communicate through an N2 Bus. For a smaller facility, the UNT controller can function as a
stand-alone controller.
Table 21-1: UNT 110/120 Terminal Designations
Description Terminal UNT Terminal Block Terminal Description
Analog Input Common AI CM AI 1 Analog Input 1

Analog Input Common AI CM AI CM AI 1
AI 3 Analog Input 3
ANALOG INPUTS
AI CM AI 2
Analog Input Common AI CM AI CM AI 3 AI 5 Analog Input 5
Analog Input Common AI CM AI CM AI 4 AI 6 Analog Input 6
AI CM AI 5
+15 Volts DC supply +15 VDC AI CM AI 6 +15 VDC +15 Volts DC supply
+15VDC +15VDC
24 Volts AC 24 VAC 24VAC BI 1
BI 1 Binary Input 1
BINARY IN
24 Volts AC 24 VAC 24VAC BI 2 BI 2 Binary Input 2

24 VAC
COM
Transformer High Side 24 VAC POWER
ZBUS
Transformer Low Side COMMON N2 -
Zone Bus ZBUS N2 +
REF
BO 1
24VAC BO 2
N2 Reference REF
BINARY OUTPUTS
CMN BO 3
N2 Bus - N2-
CMN BO 4
N2 Bus + N2+ CMN BO 5
CMN BO 6 BO 1 Binary Output 1
24 Volts AC 24 VAC CMN BO 7 BO 2 Binary Output 2
FIG:UNT110-Termls
24 Volts AC 24 VAC CMN BO 8 BO 3 Binary Output 3

Shared Triac Node TRIACS BO 4 Binary Output 4
Common COMMON BO 5 Binary Output 5
Common COMMON
Table 21-2: UNT 111/121 Terminal Designations
Description Terminal UNT Terminal Block Terminal Description

AI CM AI 1
AI CM
ANALOG INPUTS
AI 2
UNT

AI CM AI 3
AI CM AI 4
AI CM AI 5
+15 Volts DC supply +15 VDC +15 VDC +15 Volts DC supply
AI CM AI 6
24 Volts AC 24 VAC +15VDC +15VDC BI 1 Binary Input 1

BINARY IN
24VAC BI 4
Transformer High Side 24 VAC POWER 24 VAC

BO 1 Binary Output 1
Transformer Low Side COMMON COM BO 2 Binary Output 2
ZBUS
Zone Bus ZBUS BO 3 Binary Output 3
N2 -
N2 Reference REF N2 +
N2 Bus - N2- REF BO 5 Binary Output 5
BO 1
N2 Bus + N2+ BO 6 Binary Output 6
BINARY OUTPUTS
24VAC BO 2
24 Volts AC 24 VAC CMN BO 3
24 Volts AC 24 VAC CMN BO 4 AO1 Analog Output 1
Shared Triac Node TRIACS CMN BO 5 AO2 Analog Output 2
Common COMMON CMN BO 6
Common COMMON
AO CM AO 1
Common COMMON
AO CM AO 2
AO Common AOCM
AO Common AOCM

Table 21-3: UNT 140 Terminal Designations
UNT Terminal Block Terminal Description
AI 1 Analog Input 1
A COM Analog Input Common
AI 2 Analog Input 2
UNT
AI 3 Analog Input 3
AI 4 Analog Input 4
AI 5 Analog Input 5
AI 6 Analog Input 6
+15 VDC +15 Volts DC supply
BI 1 Binary Input 1
24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BI 2 Binary Input 2
BI 3 Binary Input 3
24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BI 4 Binary Input 4
TRIAC Shared Triacs Nodes
BO1 Binary Output 1

RTN Return (24 VAC or Common)1
BO2 Binary Output 2
BO3 Binary Output 3

BO4 Binary Output 4
BO5 Binary Output 5

BO6 Binary Output 6
BO7 Binary Output 7

BO8 Binary Output 8
24 VAC 24 VAC Power - Transformer High Side

COM Common - Transformer Low Side
Z BUS Zone Bus
REF N2 Reference
N2- N2 Bus -
N2+ N2 Bus +
1. Depends on triac switching jumper setting: if high, return is Common; if low, return is 24 VAC.
UNT Controllers: Section 21 199

Table 21-4: UNT 141 Terminal Designations
UNT Terminal Block Terminal Description
AI 1 Analog Input 1
AI 2 Analog Input 2
UNT
AI 3 Analog Input 3
AI 4 Analog Input 4
AI 5 Analog Input 5
AI 6 Analog Input 6
BI 1 Binary Input 1
24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BI 2 Binary Input 2
BI 3 Binary Input 3
24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BI 4 Binary Input 4
TRIAC Shared Triacs Nodes
BO1 Binary Output 1

BO2 Binary Output 2
BO3 Binary Output 3

BO4 Binary Output 4
BO5 Binary Output 5

BO6 Binary Output 6
AO1 Analog Output 1

A COM Analog Output Common
AO2 Analog Output 2

Z BUS Zone Bus
AO1
REF N2 Reference
COM
N2- N2 Bus -
A
N2+ N2 Bus +
AO2
1. Depends on triac switching jumper setting: if high, return is Common; if low, return is 24 VAC.

Table 21-5: UNT 1108/1126/1144 Terminal Designations (Bottom Terminals Left to Right)
UNT Terminal Block Terminal ID Terminal Description
W1 AI1 Analog Input 1

W2 AI CM Analog Input Common
W1
AI1
AI1
UNT
W2
AICM
O1 2 3 4 5 6 W6 AI CM Analog Input Common
W5
N AI2
AI2
CTS 206-6 TB40
W6
AICM
W10 W 11
AI3
O1 2 3 4 5 6
AI3
N AICM
CTS 206-6 TB40 W11 AI CM Analog Input Common
W 12 W 15
AI4
AI4
AICM
W 16
AI5
AI5
W 17 W21 W 22
AICM
AI6
AI6
AICM

W 25 W26 W27 W31 W 32
+15VDC
+15VDC
COM
ZBUS
BI SRC

W 36 W 37 W38 W42 W 43 W 46 W47 W 48 W 53
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4
BI1
BI SRC
BI2
BI3
W25 +15 VDC +15 Volts DC Output
BI SRC
W26 +15 VDC +15 Volts DC Output
BI4
BI6
W27 COM 24 VAC Common
BI6 BI7
W31 ZB Zone Bus

FIG:unt1100-ai
BI SRC
BI7
W32 BI SRC Input Common, 24 VAC
W36 BI1 Binary Input 1




Table 21-6: UNT 1108 Terminal Designations (Top Terminals Left to Right)
W3 NO8 Relay Normally Open 8

W4 OUT8 Relay Center Contact
W7 NC8 Relay Normally Closed 8
BO OUT W3
Options
Jumper
OPEN
SRC
UNT

BO8
Jumper

W4
W7

W8
Jumper
BO7
W9
W 13 W 14 W18 W 19 W 20 W23 W24

Jumper

BO6

BO5
J um per

W 28 W29 W30 W34 W35 W39 W40 W 41 W 44

BO4
Jumper

Jumper
BO3

BO2
Jumper

W 45 W50 W51 W49
BO1
Jumper

SRC
W52
PWR

FIG:unt11080-bi
W56
W55
COM 24VAC W39 NC3 Relay Normally Closed 3


W52 SRC1 Jumper Selectable Source Voltage2

W49 24 VAC High Side of Power Transformer
W55 COM Low Side of Power Transformer
1. SRC is the Common to all relay out terminals via jumper clips.
2. Factory-installed jumper.

W3 AO1 AO 1 Signal
W4 AO CM AO 1 Common
W7 -- (not used)
BO OUT W3
Options
Jumper
OPEN
SRC
UNT
AO1
W8 AO2 AO 2 Signal
AO1
W4
AOCM
W13 -- (not used)

W8
AO2
AO2
W9
AOCM

W 14 W18 W 19 W 20 W23 W24
Jumper

BO6

BO5
J um per

W 28 W29 W30 W34 W35 W39 W40 W 41 W 44

BO4
Jumper

Jumper
BO3

BO2
Jumper

W 45 W50 W51 W49
BO1
Jumper

SRC
W52
FIG:unt11260-bo
PWR

W56
W55
COM 24VAC W39 NC3 Relay Normally Closed 3




W3 AO1 AO 1 Signal
W7 -- (not used)
W8 AO2 AO 2 Signal
BO OUT W3
Options
Jumper
OPEN
SRC
UNT
AO1
AO1
W13 -- (not used)

W4
AOCM
W8
AO2
AO2
W14 AO3 AO 3 Signal

W9
AOCM
W 14 W18
AO3
W19 -- (not used)

AO3
AOCM
W 20 W23
AO4
W20 AO4 AO 4 Signal

AO4
AOCM
W 28 W29 W30 W34 W35 W39 W40 W 41 W 44
W24 -- (not used)

BO4
Jumper

Jumper
BO3

BO2
Jumper
W 45 W50 W51 W49

BO1
Jumper

SRC
W52
PWR

FIG:unt1144-bo
W56
W55
COM 24VAC



Mounting
Universal Packaging Modules (Enclosures)
See Panels and Enclosures on page 435 for more information on mounting and installing UPMs. Pre-mounted
controllers (in an EWC10 enclosure with 50 VA transformer) include:
• AS-UNT110-101 / AS-UNT111-101
• AS-UNT140-101 / AS-UNT141-101
HVAC Pro for Windows software, current release, personal computer, AS-CVTPRO converter (for downloading,
uploading, and commissioning controllers via the Zone Bus or N2 Bus), three No. 8 sheet metal screws, drill,
6.4 mm (1/4 in.) flat blade screwdriver and 3.2 mm (1/8 in.) flat blade screwdriver
The UNT controller is often panel-mounted. See Panels and Enclosures on page 435.

Location and Environment
Mount the UNT to ensure the specified environment and ambient conditions.
• The atmosphere must be free of explosive vapors and escaping gases. Also, the atmosphere must be free of
exposure to corrosive chemical or salt vapors that might damage electric equipment.
• For UNT100/101, UNT110/111, and UNT140/141 Series controllers, the temperature must be maintained
between 0 and 52°C (32 and 125°F) with relative humidity (noncondensing) maintained between 10 and 90%.
• For UNT120/121 Series controllers used with outdoor rooftop applications, the temperature must be
UNT
maintained between -40 and 52°C (-40 and 125°F) with relative humidity maintained between 10 and 90%.
Some intermittent condensation is tolerable. This operating temperature range is possible in the UNT120/121
Series controllers due to the heater, coated circuit board, and BZ-1000-7 size enclosure.
• For the UNT1100 Series controllers, the temperature must be maintained between -40 and 60°C (-40 and
140°F) with relative humidity (noncondensing) maintained between 10 and 90%.
Extreme care must be taken when mounting the UNT in a rooftop unit. If the unit is mounted too close to devices
used to fire gas heat, the electromagnetic field created by these static generators could cause the UNT to
malfunction. In addition, some UNT models have built-in heaters to avoid malfunction in extremely cold ambient
conditions.
I/O
For multiple Variable Frequency Drives, optical isolators are required on analog outputs for proper isolation.
Mounting a UNT
Mount the controller on a flat surface (or 35 mm DIN rail for
UNT1100 Series model) in any convenient location that meets the
environment criteria listed. The overall dimensions of the UNT100
Series controller are 162 x 163 x 56 mm (6.5 x 6.4 x 2.2 in.) H x W
x D; for the UNT1100 Series controller, 162 x 157 x 42 mm (6.5 x
6.2 x 1.7 in.) H x W x D.
Note: Overtightening can strip screw threads. Make sure screws
do not interfere with wiring or access. A minimum clearance of
45.7 cm (18 in.) is required.
WIRNGU05
Note: If the UNT is mounted above ceiling for zone control Mounting
UNT
applications, ensure proper clearance is available in front of the Tabs
Controller
UNT for servicing.
Figure 21-1: Mounting a UNT100 Series
Note: If the UNT controller is not mounted in an enclosure, secure
Controller
it to a non-vibrating surface, such as a solid wall.
To surface mount the UNT:
1. Place the UNT in the proper mounting position. Make sure you allow enough room to install the enclosure and
conduit for wiring terminations to the controller.
2. Attach the UNT to the mounting surface using 3 No. 8 self-tapping screws.
To DIN rail mount the UNT1100:
1. Attach a 35 mm DIN rail to the panel.
2. Position the UNT1100 along the rail.
3. Snap the lower edge of the UNT1100 into place.

Wiring
See Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors on page 17 for more information on input or output wiring, cable
recommendations, and sizes. See Table 21-1 on page 197 through Table 21-8 on page 204 for the terminal
identifications of respective UNT Models. See Table 21-12 on page 218 for a listing of the signals that can be
connected to each terminal type.
Terminating Metastat Connectors
Insert the flat eight conductor phone jack RJ45 male connector into the UNT board female connector.
UNT
Note: Use the recommended preconfigured cable whenever possible. See Table 45-8 on page 467 for additional
information on preconfigured Metastat cables.
• If field installation of RJ-45 connectors is required, use the proper tool for crimping the connector onto the
cable. See Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors on page 17 for the recommended crimping tool.
• Ensure the cable wires are properly lined up by color code to allow a one-to-one connection from one end of
the cable to the other.
• See Figure 21-13 on page 216 for terminal block wiring designations.
Terminating Power from UNT’s Transformer
1. Cut cable to required length to insure conductors can run in a neat
workmanship condition within the enclosure. 1 2 3 45 6 78
2. Strip the cable insulating jacket to expose the individual conductors and
shield of the cable using a wire stripper.
+1 5VDC
ANALOG INPUTS BINARY INPUT TO BINARY OUTPUT
3. Strip the individual cable conductors to expose the last 1/4 in. of the 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
Z BUS
ZONE
STAT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TRACS
24 VAC
2 4 VAC
CO MMON
CO MMON
CO MMON
CO MMON
CO MMO N
N2 +
ZBUS
24VAC
COM
N2-
+15 VDC
R EF
conductors.
1 2 3 4 5 6
ANAL OG INPUTS 24 V AC
CO MM ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
O 1 2 3 4 5 6
FIG:UNT-Pwr
4. For UNTs with screw terminals (Figure 21-2 on page 206), insert the ANALOG INPUTS BINARY IN
DSI
BINARY OUTPUTS
conductors to the respective screw terminal. Using a 1/8 in. flat blade O 1 2 3 4 5 6
screw driver, tighten terminal to hold conductor in place.

For UNTs with quick connect electrical spade lugs (Figure 21-3 on
page 207), insert the exposed conductor into the spade lug connector and
crimp the connector using a wire crimping tool. Slide spade lug connectors
to respective quick connect posts.
N2+
COM
ZBUS
REF
24 VAC
Figure 21-2: Terminating Power N2-

Unit Power
Transformer
W49
24VA
UNT
W56 Optional
Ground
W52 W55
COM
BO OUT
Jumper
Options SRC
SRC
OPEN
AI Switches Job Information N2 Address

N 2+
N 2-
R ef
RECV XMIT
1 28
32
64
16
1
2
4
8
OPEN
(UP)
1 2 345 67 8
ADDR 0 = ALL OPE N
RY10029 Rev J
FIG:UNT1100-pwr
Figure 21-3: Terminating Power for UNT1100 Series

Setting Analog DIP Switches: UNT100 Series Only
AIs must be configured to match the type of signal connected to the input. The selections are resistance/
temperature input, 0 to 2 VDC, and 0 to 10 VDC. The AI switches are factory set with AI 1, 2, and 3 as resistive
inputs, and AI 4, 5, and 6 as 0 to 10 VDC inputs. Reconfigure the switches as necessary, referring to Table 21-9 on
page 208 and Figure 21-4 on page 208. For example, if you connect a 0-10 VDC input to AI 4, set SW1-4 to Off
and SW2-4 to On.
UNT
24 V AC ANA LO G
C OM M O N
A N A L O G IN P U TS B IN A RY IN PU T TO B IN A R Y O U TP U T O UTP U T
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 ZO N E 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
S TA T
24 VAC
ANALOGIN C OM M ON
COMMO
A N A L O G IN P U TS B IN A RY C O M
C OM M O N
4 5 6
O 1 2 3 4 5 6
N 24 V AC
10V
A RY IN B IN A R Y O U T P U T S A NA OUT
FIG:UNT-Swtch
C OM M O N
24 VAC
6
SW2 COMMON
2V
O1 2 3 4 5 6
N
T
SW1
V
ANALO
Figure 21-4: Dip Switches SW1 and SW2: UNT100 Series
Table 21-9: Setting Analog DIP Switches: UNT100 Series

Hardware Temp 2 VDC 10 VDC
Point (Resistive Input) (0 to 2 VDC Input) (0 to 10 VDC Input)
Switch SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
AI1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

Setting Analog DIP Switches: UNT1100 Series Only
The AI switches are factory set with AI 1, 2, and 3 as resistive inputs (and AI 4, 5, and 6 as 0 to 10 VDC inputs).
Reconfigure the switches as necessary, referring to Table 21-10 on page 209 and Figure 21-5 on page 209. For
example, if you connect a 0-10 VDC input to AI 4, set SW1-4 to On and SW2-4 to Off.
Analog Input Switches
UNT
AI Switches
BO OUT W 3 W4 W8 W9 W 14 W 18 W 20 W 23 W 28 W 29 W 30 W 34 W 35 W 39 W 40 W 41 W 44
Jumper
W 45 W 50 W 51 W49
Options
24VAC
AO1
AOCM
AOCM
AOCM
AOCM
AO2
AO3
AO4
SRC
W56
Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper W55

OPEN W52
COM
AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 BO4 BO3 BO2 BO1 SRC
PWR
N2 +
N2 -
Ref
RECV XMIT
R
128
32
16
64
1
2
4
8
OPEN
123 45 678
(UP)
AS-UNT11xx
ADDR 0 = ALL OPEN
PWR IN: 24VAC, 2AMP, CLASS 2
BIN OUT: 24VAC, 2A, CLASS 2, PILOT DUTY
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 RY10029 Rev J
A ICM
A ICM
A ICM
A ICM
A ICM
A ICM
A I1
A I2
A I3
A I4
A I5
A I6
R
W1 W2 W5 W6 W 10 W 11 W 12 W 15 W 16 W 17 W 21 W 22
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI6 BI7
+15VDC
+15VDC
BI S RC
BI S RC
BI S RC
BI S RC
ZBUS
COM
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI6
BI7
CTS 206-6 TB40
CTS 206-6 TB40

O1 2 3 4 5 6
O1 2 3 4 5 6
W 25 W 26 W 27 W 31 W 32 W 36 W 37 W 38 W 42 W 43 W 46 W 47 W 48 W 53
FIG:UNT1100-Swtch
Figure 21-5: Dip Switches SW1 and SW2: UNT1100 Series
Table 21-10: Setting Analog DIP Switches: UNT1100 Series

Hardware Temp 2 VDC 10 VDC
Point (Resistive Input) (0 to 2 VDC Input) (0 to 10 VDC Input)
Switch SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
AI1 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
Setting the N2 Bus Address Switches

The UNT requires a unique N2 Bus address. See Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus on page 185 for details.

Zone Bus Wiring Example
See Figure 21-6 on page 210 for an example of wiring the Zone Bus to the UNT.
BO OUT
Jumper
Options
SRC
OPEN
UNT
N2 +
N2-
Ref
RECV XM IT
128
32
16
64
1
2
4
8
OPEN
(UP)
12345678
ADDR 0 = ALL OPEN
RY10029 Rev J
! CAUTION: Risk of Property Damage. If

the same transformer is used
for both the UNT and M100
boards, connect the COM
terminal of the UNT to the
COM T1 T1 terminal of the M100.
CW
COM COM Failure to do so may result
in a short circuit and damage
24 to the transformer.
ZBUS VAC
Note: When you connect an M100C
CCW BUS T2 actuator to the Zone Bus, we
recommend powering it with a
separate 24 VAC transformer.
M100 Motor with

R81CAA-2 Board
HVAC PRO software

indicates the needed address.
Zone Bus
Address Switch
Set address to 22.
O 123 45678
FIG:untm100c
Figure 21-6: Zone Bus Wiring Example

Additional Wiring Termination Detail Diagrams
TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT
AI # Set SW1 to Position "T"

AICM and SW2 to Position "2V”
UNT
UNT-110 through 121
AI # Set SW1 to Position "T"
A COM and SW2 to Position "2V”
RTD UNT-140 and 141
Temperature AI # Set SW1 to OFF

AICM and SW2 to ON
Element
UNT-1100 Series
VOLTAGE INPUT - EXTERNAL SOURCE
FIELD Set SW1 to Position "V"

AI #
DEVICE
AICM and SW2 to Position "10V”
+ POWER
UNT-110 through 121
- SUPPLY
OUT AI # Set SW1 to Position "V"
COM A COM and SW2 to Position "10V”
UNT-140 and 141
AI # Set SW1 to ON
AICM and SW2 to OFF
UNT-1100 Series
Note: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA Current Inputs can be converted to voltage by addition of a 500 ohm
resistor at the UNT. Common and Analog Inputs. For current inputs, see your engineered for details.
VOLTAGE INPUT - INTERNAL SOURCE
AI # Set SW1 to Position "V"

AICM
FIELD and SW2 to Position "10V”
+15 VDC
DEVICE
+ UNT-110 through 121
- AI #
Set SW1 to Position "V"
+VDC A COM
and SW2 to Position "10V”
+15 VDC
UNT-140 and 141
AI #
Set SW1 to ON
AICM
and SW2 to OFF
+15 VDC
UNT-1100 Series
Note: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA Current Inputs can be converted to voltage by addition of a 500 ohm
FIG:AI-inpts
resistor at the UNT. Common and Analog Inputs. For current inputs, see your engineered for details.
Figure 21-7: Analog Inputs Detail - UNT

BINARY INPUT (DRY CONTACT)
24VAC
BI #
FIELD
UNT-110 through 121
DEVICE
UNT
24VAC
BI #
DRY CONTACT UNT-140 and 141
(N.O. or N.C. as BI SRC
required) BI #
UNT-1100 Series
Figure 21-8: Binary Inputs Detail - UNT

24 VAC BINARY OUTPUT
Switch Low (Common)
TRIACS
COMMON
24 VAC
UNT
BO #
FIELD
DEVICE UNT-110 through 121
H RTN Set Triac Jumper to
N BO # Switch Low
UNT-140 and 141 24V to
No Jumper Controller W56 W55
W49 W52 BO# 24V Com
NC Note: 24V
COM SRC sourced from
NO Open
controller power.
UNT-1100 Series
24 VAC BINARY OUTPUT

Switch High ( Hot )
TRIACS
24 VAC
BO #
COMMON
FIELD
DEVICE UNT-110 through 121
H BO # Set Triac Jumper to
N RTN Switch High
UNT-140 and 141 24V to
Jumper Controller W56 W55
W49 W52 24V Com
BO#
NC Note: 24V
COM SRC
NO Open sourced from
controller power.
UNT-1100 Series
Figure 21-9: Binary Outputs Detail # 1 - UNT

INCREMENTAL CONTROL to
M9106, 9109 - Switch Low (Common)
TRIACS
COMMON
UNT
24VAC
BO-b
COM BO-a
CW UNT-110 through 121
CCW RTN
BO-b Set Triac Jumper
Reverse Actuator rotation BO-a to Switch Low
by reversing the
connection to Spade Lugs UNT-140 and 141
CW and CCW 1100 does not support
Incremental control
UNT-1100 Series
INCREMENTAL CONTROL to
M9106, 9109 - Switch High (Hot)
TRIACS
24VAC
COMMON
BO-b
COM BO-a
CW UNT-110 through 121
CCW RTN
BO-b Set Triac Jumper
Reverse Actuator rotation BO-a to Switch High
by reversing the
connection to Spade Lugs UNT-140 and 141
CW and CCW 1100 does not support
Incremental control
UNT-1100 Series
Figure 21-10: Binary Outputs Detail # 2 - UNT

ANALOG OUTPUT (VOLTAGE)
AO #
FIELD
A COM
DEVICE
UNT-110 through 121
UNT
+ AO #
- AOCM
UNT-140 and 141
AO #
AOCM
UNT-1100 Series
0-10 VDC OUTPUT to M-9216
AOCM
Common 1 N 24 AO #
Power 2 H VAC UNT-110 through 121
Calibration Output 3 A COM
Current Input 4 AO #
Voltage Input 5
UNT-140 and 141
Feedback 6
AOCM
Terminal Block 1 AO #
W1
DA (cw) RA (ccw) UNT-1100 Series
W1
0-10V 2-10V
W1
Fixed Adjustable
To Reverse the Spring Return
Rotation, reverse the orientation
of the Blade Pin Coupler
Figure 21-11: Analog Outputs Detail # 1 - UNT

0-10 VDC OUTPUT to M-9216
Common 1
Power 2 24VAC
Calibration Output 3 AOCM
UNT
Current Input 4 AO #
Voltage Input 5
UNT-110 through 121
Feedback 6
24VAC
Terminal Block 1
A COM
W1 AO #
DA (cw) RA (ccw)
W1 UNT-140 and 141
0-10V 2-10V
W1 24V to W56 W55
Fixed Adjustable Controller 24V Com
To Reverse the Spring Return AOCM
Rotation, reverse the orientation AO # Add Jumper from
of the Blade Pin Coupler 24V Com to only
UNT-1100 Series one AOCM per
Transformer
Figure 21-12: Analog Outputs Detail # 2 - UNT
TE-6700 (Phone Jack) - No PB

CABLE WITH AN RJ-45
PIN FUNCTION CONNECTOR ON EACH END
1 SETPOINT (HTG) / LED
LED MODE
2 SETPOINT (CLG) 1 1
NO
3 TEMP SENSOR 2 2
PB 1 8
4 SENSOR COMMON
5 SUPPLY: 24 VAC Dip Switch 3 3
1 8 4 4
6 24 VAC ZBUS COMMON
7 SETPOINT COMMON 5 5
8 ZONE BUS 6 6
RJ-45
7 7 Modular Jack
Pin 1 Left RJ-45 8 8
Modular Jack (TAB NOTCH DOWN)
UNT Model Number

110 - 121 140 & 141 1100 Series
Set SW1 to Position "T" Set SW1 to Position "T" Set SW1 to OFF
Tab Down and SW2 to Position "2V" and SW2 to Position "2V" and SW2 to ON
Figure 21-13: Stat RJ Detail - UNT

Table 21-11: Documents Related to Setup, Installation, Mounting, and Wiring UNT Controllers
Installation Procedures, Wiring UNT Controller Technical Bulletin LIT-6363081
Details, Downloading/
Commissioning/
Troubleshooting for UNT100
UNT
Series Controllers
Installation Procedures for UNT1100 Series Installation Bulletin Part No. 24-9534-7
UNT1100 Series Controllers
Configuring, Wiring, Unitary (UNT) Controller 1100 Series LIT-63630831
Downloading, Commissioning, User’s Guide
Applying, Troubleshooting for
UNT1100 Series Controllers
Application Notes for UNT100 UNT Applications Application Note LIT-6375100
Series Controllers
Use of AS-CVTPRO Converter AS-CVTPROx-001 Zone Bus/N2 Interface Part No. 24-9544-0
Converter Installation Instructions

Model Information
Table 21-12: UNT Model Information
Type of Point
1108
1126
1144
120
121
140
141
110
112
113
111
Analog Inputs 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
RTD Temperature Element (NI, SI or PT), 0-10 VDC
Transformer, 2k ohm Setpoint Potentiometers (see
UNT
Figure 21-7 on page 211)

Binary Inputs 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 -- -- --
Dry Contacts, Momentary Push, Button at Zone
Sensor, BI4-Accumulator Input (see Figure 21-8 on
page 212)
Binary Inputs -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3
Dry Contacts, 24 VAC 10 mA minimum, Momentary
Push, Button at Zone Sensor (see Figure 21-8 on
page 212)
Binary Outputs 8 6 -- -- 8 6 8 6 -- -- --
24 VAC Triacs at 0.5 A, Low or High Side Common
Selectable (see Figure 21-9 on page 213 and
Figure 21-10 on page 214)
Binary Outputs -- -- 8 6 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
24 VAC Triacs at 0.5 A, Low or High Side Common
Selectable, Electrically Isolated (Figure 21-9 on
page 213 and Figure 21-10 on page 214)
Binary Outputs -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 8 6 4
24 VAC relays at 2 A each, (10 mA min.) 13 A Inrush,
Option for Isolated, LEDs (Figure 21-9 on page 213
and Figure 21-10 on page 214)
Analog Outputs -- 2 -- 2 -- 2 -- 2 -- 2 4
0 to 10 VDC at 10 Ma (see Figure 21-11 on page 215
and Figure 21-12 on page 216)
Zone Bus 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
I/O Terminations
Block2
Block2
Lugs1
Lugs1
Lugs1
Lugs1
--
--
--
--
--
Available Premounted in EWC10 with 24 VAC,
UNT140-101
UNT141-101
UNT110-101
UNT111-101
50 VA Transformer
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1. Quick-connect spade lugs.
2. Fixed terminal block.

Table 21-13: UNT Controllers
Product AS-UNT110-1 AS-UNT120-1 AS-UNT140-1 AS-UNT110-101 AS-UNT140-101 AS-UNT1108-0
Codes AS-UNT111-1 AS-UNT121-1 AS-UNT141-1 AS-UNT110-111 AS-UNT141-101 AS-UNT1126-0
AS-UNT1144-0
Power 24 VAC/40 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC/40 VA
Requirements (UNT supplied with 50 VA
UNT
System transformer)
Power Draw 10 VA 25 VA/Note 10 VA (400mA)
(due to
heater)
Ambient 0° to 60°C -40° to 60°C 0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F) -40° to 60°C
Operating (32° to 140°F) (-40° to 10-90% RH (-40° to 140°F)
Conditions 10-90% RH 140°F) 10-90% RH
10-90% RH
Ambient -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F); 10-90% RH
Storage
Conditions
Mounting Free of explosive vapors, escaping gases, exposure to corrosive chemicals and said vapors.
Environment
Conditions
Dimensions 165 x 163 x 56 mm (6.5 x 6.4 x 2.2 in.) 165 x 163 x 56 mm 165 x 163 x
(6.5 x 6.4 x 2.2 in.) 56 mm
UNT premounted in an (6.5 x 6.4 x 2.2 in.)
EN-EWC10-0 (HxWxD),
23 x 41 x 19 cm (9 x 16 x 7.5 in.)
Input/Output Quick-Connect Electrical Screwed Quick-Connect Screwed Quick-Connect
Terminations Spade Lugs Terminal Electrical Spade Terminal Block Electrical Spade
Block Lugs Lugs
Compliance CSA C22.2 No.205 IEEE 446,472,518,587 Category A;
FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A UL 916,864 NEMA ICS2, Part 2-230: VDE 0871 Class B
UL Listed and CSA Certified as part of the Metasys Network.
Mounts UNT can be UNT can be UNT can be UNT premounted in an UNT can be
mounted in mounted in mounted in EN-EWC10-0 (UPM) enclosure1 mounted in
EN-EWC or EN-EWC or EN-EWC or EN-EWC or
PAN-ENC PAN-ENC PAN-ENC PAN-ENC
enclosures enclosures enclosures enclosures
Power Removable Screw Terminal Quick-Connect
Terminations Electrical spade
lugs
N2 Removable Screw Terminal block (3-wire)
Terminations
Metastat RJ45 Female Connector
Zone Bus Quick Connect Electrical Spade Lugs
Terminations
1. See Panels and Enclosures on page 435 for mounting instructions for enclosures.

UNT

HI
(Red)
CW
LO
Coupler Bolt End Stop
Set Screw
Code No. LIT-410023

Coupler Pneumatic Tubing
CCW (differential pressure)
End
Stop
NEC Code if
Class 2 more than
Energy Limited 150 VAC Screw Numbers
Transformer Primary
(1) 24 VAC (18) BI-1 8 TB1-1
(2) 24 VAC (19) COM 6 TB2-7
Primary 24 VAC (3) Earth Gnd. (20) BI-2
Fan (Optional) (21) COM
Relay (4) BO-1* (22) BI-3
(5) BCOM* (23) COM 6
open (6) BO-2* 5
3-wire
Incremental close (7) BCOM* (25) +15 VDC 5 TB2-8

Valve (8) BO3* (26) AI-1 1 TB1-3 3
Actuator (9) BCOM* (27) COM 2 TB1-4
COM open (10) BO-4* (28) AI-2 4 TB1-2
3-wire (11) BCOM* (29) COM 3
close
Baseboard (30) AI-3*
(12) BO-5* 7 TB2-5 8
Heat (31) COM*
(13) BCOM* TB2-6
SHLD
REF
N2-
N2+
(14) AO-1* (32) AI-4*

(15) COM* (33) COM*
(16) AO-2* (34) ZB+
VMA1400 Series VAV Modular Assemblies
(17) COM* (35) ZB-

2-wire TE-6700** TE-7000 TMZ***
Proportional (Europe Wiring
Valve Actuator only)
LED Visual Response Action * Included on VMA1420/1430 only.
Figure 22-1: Typical VMA1400 Series Wiring Details

On Solid 20 second power-up self test
** Preferred DIP Switch O N
Flashes at 1 second rate Waiting for N2 communication
Irregular flashing 4 times per second After communications established position for TE-6700
Rapid flashing 20 times per second Needs code download *** Pin 5 (Supply) of the 1 2 3
Not lit No power or +15 V shorted TMZ1600 can be connected
Optional N2 Shield to either +15 VDC or 24 VAC.
To Next To NCM
N2 Device N2 Bus

FIG:VMA-wre
24-18 AWG
221
VMA1400
Application
The VMA1400 Series controllers are configurable, integrated modules that include a VAV controller and differential
pressure sensor. An actuator is also included on all models except the VMA1430.
The VMA1400 Series controllers are designed for N2 Bus applications.
Mounting
Preparing the VMA1400 for Mounting
The following tools are required:
• 8 mm (5/16 in.) square wrench or 10 mm (3/8 in.) 12-point socket for actuator collar screw
VMA1400
• pliers to turn the damper shaft (if needed)

• 8 mm (5/16 in.) hex nut driver or 100 mm (4 in.) extension for 8 mm (5/16 in.) socket and power screwdriver for
self-tapping screw
• 3.5 mm (9/64 in.) drill bit (optional)
The following equipment is required:
• VMA1400 Series controller
• TE-6700, TE-7000 (Europe only), or TMZ1600 room sensor
• RJ-style modular jack room sensor cable or wire for connecting the room sensor to the VMA1400
• separate damper actuator for the VMA1430
• Appropriate cable for valve (if applicable)
Ensure that the installation site meets the following environmental requirements:
• VMA1400 location is protected, as much as possible, from water caused by leaking pipes, condensation, or
dripping solder from sweating pipe joints.
• atmosphere is free of explosive vapors or escaping gases.
• atmosphere is free of exposure to corrosive chemical or salt vapors, which might damage electrical equipment.
• temperature is maintained between 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F), with the relative humidity (noncondensing)
maintained between 10 and 90%; these are operating limits. Flow measurement accuracy suffers if the
ambient temperature varies widely within this band.
IMPORTANT: The VMA1410 and VMA1420 require a damper shaft protrusion of at least 44 mm (1-3/4 in.)
from the VMA mounting surface.
Note: Make sure the VMA mounting location has adequate clearance for future servicing.
Mounting the VMA1410/1420
1. Place the VMA1400 in the proper mounting position on the damper shaft so that the wiring connections are
easily accessible. Make sure the VMA1400 base is parallel to the VAV box. If needed, use a spacer to offset
tipping of the VMA1400 caused by shaft bushings.
IMPORTANT: When the air supply to the VAV box is below 10°C (50°F), make sure that any condensation on
the VAV box, particularly on the damper shaft, does not enter the electronics. Mount the VMA1400 vertically
above the damper shaft to allow any shaft condensation to fall away from the VMA1400 controller. Additional
measures may be required in some installations.

2. Secure the self-tapping No. 10 screw into the VMA1400 mounting slot with a power screwdriver and 100 mm
(4-in.) extension socket. Otherwise, use a punch to mark the position of the shoulder washer, and then drill a
hole into the VAV box through the mark using a 3.5 mm (9/64 in.) drill bit. Insert the mounting screw, and
tighten against the washer.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten the screws, or the threads may strip. If mounting to the VAV box, make sure
the screws do not interfere with damper blade movement.
3. Locate the damper position using typical marking on

the end of the damper shaft (Figure 22-2 on
FIG:dmrsh
page 223).
VMA1400
4. Note the direction (CW or CCW) required to close the
Figure 22-2: Typical Damper Shaft End Icons
damper.
The open end-stop is
automatically set for To CW
N2 Address To CCW
90° boxes. Hard stops DIP Switches End Stop End Stop
must be provided for
O
45° and 60° boxes at F
O F
both fully closed and N
fully open damper
128
positions. By installing 64
32
the VMA1400 at the 16 Mounting
8
fully open position, the 4 Screw
2
VMA provides the 1 Shoulder
open stop for 45° and Washer
VMA-feat
60° boxes. The closed example: 16 + 1 = 17
Gear
damper seal provides Phone Jack Port Release
Mounting Slot
the fully closed stop. (Sensor) (Push Down)
5. Grasp the damper Figure 22-3: Typical VMA1400 Controller Physical Features
shaft firmly with pliers
and either manually
close the damper for boxes requiring 90° to achieve full travel, or manually open the damper for boxes
requiring 45° or 60° to achieve full travel.
6. Push down and hold the gear release lever (Figure 22-3 on page 223), and turn the VMA1400 coupler until it
contacts the mechanical end-stop at either the fully closed (90° boxes) or fully open (45° or 60° boxes)
position.
7. If the damper for a 90° box closes CCW, rotate the coupler to the CCW mechanical limit. If the damper for a
90° box closes CW, rotate the coupler to the CW mechanical limit.
8. Tighten the square coupler bolt to the shaft using an 8 mm (5/16 in.) wrench or 10 mm (3/8 in.) 12-point socket.
9. Loop the pneumatic tubing to include a trap for condensation. Attach the tubing from the VMA1400 to the VAV
box pickup. The HI (red) tubing is connected to the inlet or high-pressure side and the clear tubing to the low
side (Figure 22-1 on page 221).
10. Push the gear release lever, and turn the actuator coupling manually to ensure that the actuator can rotate
from fully closed to fully open without binding.
11. Complete the mounting by rotating the damper to the full-open position.
! Rotate the damper to the full-open position before starting the air handler. Failure to rotate the
damper to the full-open position may result in damage to the VAV box or ductwork when the air
handler is started.

Wiring
For more information on wiring the VMA1400 to an N2 Bus, see N2 Communications Bus Guidelines on page 173,
and refer to the N2 Communications Bus Technical Bulletin (LIT-636018).
Note: Many of these units are connected to the N2 Bus and the room temperature sensor using RJ-style jacks
and cables (Figure 22-3 on page 223). See Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors on page 17 for information on
wiring with RJ-style jacks and cables.
Consider the following when wiring the VMA1400:
• The VMA1400 includes isolation of the AI, BI, AO, and N2 from the 24 VAC and the BO circuitry.
• The VMA1400 includes isolated N2, isolated binary outputs, and isolated 24 VAC.
VMA1400
• The 24 VAC power input is internally transformer isolated by the VMA1400. To meet NEC requirements for line
voltage greater than 150 VAC, Terminal 1 can be earth-grounded.
• When supplying 24 VAC low voltage power to multiple VAV boxes, one 100 VA low-voltage, power-limited,
Class 2 transformer is usually used to power five or six controllers. See Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors
on page 17 for specific calculations for the maximum number of controllers allowed, not to exceed the 100 VA
limit. See Maximum Voltage Drop on 24 VAC Power Wiring on page 470 for voltage drop calculations to
determine wire size requirements.
• A conduit is not required by the NEC for Class 2 wiring installations.
• Large insulated spade lugs with a polarizing tab (for high voltage) do not fit on the VMA1400.
Note: Refer to the project engineering drawings for wiring details. Keep all field wiring, with the exception of the
N2 Bus, in the same room with the controllers, to comply with UL smoke control requirements. Refer to the
Metasys Smoke-Control Wiring Technical Bulletin (LIT-636331) for details on smoke control requirements.
To wire the VMA1400:
1. Disconnect all power to the VMA1400.
2. Determine if spade lugs, removable 2- or 3-position
screw terminals, or phone cable is used. Terminate
wiring per engineering drawings.
FIG:scrwterm
3. Install the N2 Bus to the supervisory controller in a daisy
chained fashion only. See N2 Communications Bus 2-Position Removable Screw
Terminal Connector
Guidelines on page 173.
4. Connect power to the VMA1400. Figure 22-4: Optional Removable Screw
Terminals 2-Position or 3-Position (Accessory)
5. Download, commission, and balance the VMA1400.
Refer to the Downloading and Commissioning the
Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly (VMA) 1400
Series Technical Bulletin (LIT-6363130) for more
information.
Set the N2 address on the VMA1400 Address DIP switches before connecting the VMA1400 to the network. See
Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus on page 185.

Table 22-1: Documents Related to Installation, Mounting, and Set up for the VMA 14xx Series
For Information On See Document LIT or Part
Number
Installation Considerations and Guidelines for VAV Modular Assembly (VMA) 1410/1420 Part No. 24-8740-1
VMA1410/1420 Controllers Installation Instructions
Installation Considerations and Guidelines for VAV Modular Assembly (VMA) 1430 Installation Part No.
VMA1430 Controllers Instructions 24-8986-18
Installation Considerations and Guidelines for VAV Modular Assembly (VMA) 1440 Installation Part No. 24-9590-0
VMA1440 Controllers Instructions
VMA1400
Assembly for VMA1400 Series Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly (VMA) LIT-635058
1400 Series Product Bulletin
Mounting and Wiring the VMA1400 Series Mounting and Wiring Variable Air Volume LIT-6363125
Modular Assembly (VMA) 1400 Series
Controllers Technical Bulletin
Downloading and Commissioning the VMA1400 Downloading and Commissioning the Variable LIT-6363130
Series Air Volume Modular Assembly (VMA) 1400
Series
Overview and Engineering Guidelines for Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly (VMA) LIT-6363120
VMA1400 Series 1400 Series Overview and Engineering
Guidelines Technical Bulletin
Troubleshooting the VMA1400 Series Troubleshooting Variable Air Volume Modular LIT-6363135
Assembly (VMA) 1400 Series Controllers
Technical Bulletin
Application Note for VMA1400 Series Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly (VMA) LIT-6375125
1400 Series Application Note
Configuring N2 Network and Integrating N2 N2 Communications Technical Bulletin LIT-636018
Devices into the Metasys System Extended
Architecture
Note
Product Code Number Cooling Only Models Cooling with Reheat External Actuator Used exclusively as
and/or Fan Powered part of the Metasys
Models Zoning Package
AP-VMA1410-0 AP-VMA1420-0 AP-VMA1430-0 AP-VMA1440-0
Optional 24 VAC Fuse A 0.6 A 2.0 A 1.2 A 2.0 A
Power Consumption VMA1410 VMA1420 VMA1430 VMA1440
10 VA maximum 10 VA maximum 3 VA maximum 10 VA maximum
(Relay and valve (Relay and valve (Damper actuator, (Relay and valve
requirements not requirements not relay, and valve requirements not
included.) included.) requirements not included.)
included.)

Electrical Inputs Analog Inputs:
Nickel, silicon, platinum (1k ohm), or NTC (2.25k ohm) RTD room sensors
1.6 K setpoint potentiometer (2-wire)
Voltage input for 0-10 VDC (humidity or pressure sensor)
Binary Inputs:
Dry contacts
Input configurations vary based on model type.
Velocity Pressure Velocity Pressure for 374 Pascal (0-1.5 in. W.C.)
Outputs No outputs on VMA1410 (internal stepper motor)
VMA1400
Binary outputs:
24 VAC triac switched
25-500 mA loads
Stepper drive
2 to 767 steps per second (23,000 step resolution)
(VMA 1410/1420/1440 only)
Analog output:
0-10 VDC @ 10 mA maximum
Terminations 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) spade lugs with the exception of communications, which are screw terminals
Optional Terminations 2- or 3-position screw terminals that plug onto spade lugs (optional accessories) 2-position
screw terminal: AP-TBK1002-0
3-position screw terminal: AP-TBK1003-0
Replacement N2 Communications Bus terminal: AP-TBK4N2-0
Controller Addressing DIP switch set (1-253)
Address 254 is reserved; 0 or 255 is used to disable hardware addressing.
Software addressable with HVAC PRO Release 8.01 or later.
Ambient Operating 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
Conditions
Ambient Storage -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F)
Conditions
Communications Bus N2 Bus between VMA1400 controller and supervisory controller (3-wire)
Zone Bus between VMA1400 controller and room sensor (8-pin phone jack or wire to spade
lugs or optional plug-on terminals)
Mounting VMA1410 VMA1420 VMA1430 VMA1440
Mounts to damper Mounts to damper Mounts to duct with Mounts to damper
shaft with single set shaft with single set two self-drilling shaft with single set
screw and to duct screw and to duct mounting screws screw and to duct with
with single mounting with single mounting provided. single mounting
screw. screw. screw.
Housing Plastic housing for controller/actuator with UL94-5VB Plenum Flammability Rating
Actuator Rating 4 N⋅m (35 lb⋅in) minimum; minimum shaft length = 44 mm (1-3/4 in.)
Compliance CSA 22.2 No. 205, UL 916, UL 864 (UUKL), UL 94-5VB, FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
and B, C-tick Australia/NZ, AS/NZS 4251.1, CISPR 22, Class B, CE Directive (89/336/EEC,
EN50081-1, EN50082-2) Industrial, IEEE 472, IEEE 472, IEEE518, IEEE587 Category A/B,
IEC-950, IEC 801-2, -3, -4, -6, -7, -8, ANSI C62.41 A/B

AHU Series Air Handler Unit Controllers
Not for power connection;

11 VA maximum output.
The M100C Actuator requires a separate
24 VAC transformer. 24 VAC
Transformer
T2 24 VAC 24VAC Power Input
COM
M100C DS1 +
ZBUS
Supervisory +N2 N2A+
Controller
-N2 N2A-
N2 REF AREF
BO 1
24VAC
N2 Bus is BO 2 XFR1
polarity sensitive. BO 3
24VAC
Daisy chain BO 4
Up
+N2 to +N2, etc. BO 5 J4
24VAC
24 VAC Solenoid
AHU
BO 6 24 VAC T1
or Relay BO 7
24VAC
Load
BO 8
BO 9 TRIAC
24VAC COM
24 VAC is always present at the load. BO 10
The common side at the BO terminal +AO 1
-AOCM
is switched On and Off. +AO 2
+AO 3
-AOCM
PSI +AO 4
102 +AO 5
OAP -AOCM
103 +AO 6
BI 1
BICM
BI 2
BI3
BICM
BI 4
BI 5
BICM
BI 6
IAP or IDP BI 7 6-pin
BICM J10
20-30 VDC BI 8
30 VDC
+VDC OUT
Performs like a +AI 1 J12

-AICM
variable resistor. TE +AI 2 8-pin
+AI 3
-AICM
+AI 4
"C"
FIG:AHU-Brd
+AI 5
-AICM
+AI 6
+AI 7
Do not reverse the wires on IAPs or IDPs. -AICM 100
If you do, 30 VDC is applied to an +AI 8
+VDC 30 VDC Out
AI terminal, which can burn out a OUT COM
100 ohm resistor. COM
PWR
12-30 VDC
HE 6300/6310
Figure 23-1: Typical AHU Controller Wiring Detail
Application
The AHU Controller is a complete digital control system for most common air handling configurations, including
single zone, variable air volume, multi-zone, and dual duct. It is designed for use on the N2 communication bus.
Packaging
The AHU is available in the following packaging configurations:
• AHU103 in a triple UPM enclosure (EWC35) with special AHU door
• AHU102 individual controller board combined with the AHU100 individual termination board
The AHU103 consists of an AHU100-0 termination board, an AHU102 controller board, and a 92 VA transformer,
packaged in a 3-high UPM. For details of the footprint and interior dimensions of the UPMs, refer to the Universal
Packaging Module Technical Bulletin (LIT-6363070). You can add UPMs to expand enclosure space. Refer to the
Ordering Information section of the Universal Packaging Module Technical Bulletin (LIT-6363070) for a listing of
the appropriate part numbers.
Note: See UPM Enclosures on page 439 for more information on mounting and installing UPMs.
Mounting
AHU

Tools needed for a typical installation
include:
• 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) bolts
Analog Input
• No. 8 screws Jumpers
TVC
• wrench and screwdriver appropriate
TVC
to the bolt and screw heads
TVC
TVC Current
• drill
TVC Input
Location TVC TVC
N2 Address Temperature
The AHU controller is normally panel- Input
TVC
mounted. For panel mounting TVC
considerations, see Panels and TVC Voltage
Input
FIG:AHU-Jmpr
Enclosures on page 435. TVC
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Environment
The installation site of the AHU must
meet the following environmental
standards:
Figure 23-2: Analog Input Jumpers and N2 Address Switches
• The atmosphere must be free of
explosive vapors or escaping gases.
• The atmosphere must be free of exposure to corrosive chemical or salt vapors that might damage electrical
equipment.
• The temperature must be maintained between 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F) with the relative humidity
(noncondensing) maintained between 10 and 90%.
• Power must be clean without electrical noise transients that are often present in industrial environments.
• Avoid areas where water leakage may occur.

Wiring
Terminal Identification
Table 23-1: AHU100 Terminal Identification
Description No. Terminal AHU Terminal Block Terminal No. Description
24 VAC for Zone Bus Only 1 24 VAC -AOCOM 29 Analog Output Common
24VAC
Common 2 COM COM +AO 6 30 Analog Output 6
ZBUS
Zone Bus 3 ZBUS N2A+
N2A-
AREF
BI 1 31 Binary Input 1
N2 Bus + 4 N2A+ BO 1 BICM 32 Binary Input Common
24VAC
N2 Bus - 5 N2A- BO 2 BI 2 33 Binary Input 2
BO 3
N2 Reference 6 AREF 24VAC
BO 4 BI 3 34 Binary Input 3
BO 5
Binary Output 1 7 BO 1 24VAC BICM 35 Binary Input Common
BO 6
24 VAC 8 24 VAC BO 7 BI 4 36 Binary Input 4
24VAC
AHU
Binary Output 2 9 BO 2 BO 8
BO 9
24VAC BI 5 37 Binary Input 5
Binary Output 3 10 BO 3 BO 10 BICM 38 Binary Input Common
+AO 1
24 VAC 11 24 AC -AOCM BI 6 39 Binary Input 6
+AO 2
Binary Output 4 12 BO 4 +AO 3
-AOCM
+AO 4 BI 7 40 Accumulator
Binary Output 5 13 BO5 +AO 5 BICM 41 Binary Input Common
-AOCM
24 VAC 14 24 VAC +AO 6 BI 8 42 Accumulator
BI 1
Binary Output 6 15 BO 6 BICM +VDC 43 + 30 VDC for Transducers
BI 2
BI3
Binary Output 7 16 BO7 BICM +AI 1 44 Analog Input 1
BI 4
24 VAC 17 24 AC BI 5 -AICOM 45 Analog Input Common
BICM
Binary Output 8 18 BO 8 BI 6 +AI 2 46 Analog Input 2
BI 7
BICM
Binary Output 9 19 BO 9 BI 8 +AI 3 47 Analog Input 3
+VDC
24 VAC 20 24 VAC +AI 1 -AICOM 48 Analog Input Common
-AICM
Binary Output 10 21 BO 10 +AI 2 +AI 4 49 Analog Input 4
+AI 3
-AICM
Analog Output 1 22 +AO 1 +AI 4 +AI 5 50 Analog Input 5
+AI 5
Analog Output Common 23 -AOCOM -AICM -AICOM 51 Analog Input Common
+AI 6
Analog Output 2 24 +AO 2 +AI 7 +AI 6 52 Analog Input 6
FIG:AHU-Conns
-AICM
Analog Output 3 25 +AO 3 +AI 8
+VDC
Analog Output Common 26 -AOCOM +AI 7 53 Analog Input 7
Analog Output 4 27 +AO 4 -AICOM 54 Analog Input Common
Analog Output 5 28 +AO 5 +AI 8 55 Analog Input 8
+VDC 56 + 30 VDC for Transducers
Power, Zone Bus, and N2 Connections

The 24 VAC input to the AHU100 plugs into the Molex connector (J4). This connector has a built-in line filter.
Do not connect power to screws Terminals 1 and 2. This is a filtered power output to the Zone Bus devices.
The Zone Bus is a 2-wire communications bus that allows a computer to communicate with the AHU, to download
the AHU’s configuration, and to communicate with the Zone Terminal and M100 Actuators. The Zone Bus may be
hard wired to the AHU or connected via the 6- and 8-pin phone jacks (see Figure 23-3 on page 231). The Zone Bus
provides 24 VAC, Common, and ZBUS. Terminal 3 links the controller with Zone Bus. Terminals 1 and 2 are limited
to 11 VA at 24 VAC.
The N2 connection to the AHU100 is at Terminals 4, 5, and 6 and identified as N2A+/ N2A-/AREF (Figure 23-1 on
page 227).
AHU Series Air Handler Unit Controllers: Section 23 229

N2 Modular Jack Configuration
Figure 23-3 on page 230 illustrates the polarization of
the 6-pin and 8-pin phone jacks on the AHU. Terminal
1 is to the extreme left as you face the jack opening,
tab notch down.
8-pin 6-pin
Table 23-2 on page 230 defines the pin usage for
each jack.
The 8-pin RJ-45 modular jack is used to connect a
Metastat to the AHU controller. 24 VAC power, zone
phonejk2
bus, and predefined analog inputs (AI-4, AI-7, and AI-
8) are connected via the phone jack. Figure 23-3: RJ-Style Modular Jack Pin Identification
Note: AI-4, AI-7, and AI-8 cannot be hardwired if the
Metastat is connected via phone jack.
The 6-pin RJ-Style modular jack is for local zone bus connection.
Table 23-2: RJ-Style Modular Jack Pin Identification
AHU
8-pin RJ-45 Modular Jack 6-pin RJ-Style Modular Jack

(AHU to TE-6700) (AS-CBLPRO-2 or Zone Terminal to Temperature
Sensor)
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 AI 8 Heating Setpoint 1 Not Used
2 AI 7 Cooling/Single Setpoint 2 24 VAC
3 AI 4 Zone Temperature Sensor 3 24 VAC and Zone Bus Common
4 Sensor Common 4 Not Used
5 24 VAC 5 Zone Bus
6 24 VAC and Zone Bus Common 6 Not Used
7 Setpoint Common
8 Zone Bus
Sharing a Sensor TE - 6100 AHU1

Outdoor Air Sensor
To share a single resistive sensor among multiple AHU VDC AS-AHU102 Jumper
Controllers: AI 1 Setting
AICOM V
1. Set the AHU102 analog input jumper located closest AI 2 AS-AHU100-0
AI 3
to the sensor to the T position. T C
(T Position)
2. Set all other AHU102 analog input jumpers to the
V position. AHU2
AS-AHU102 Jumper
Note: The maximum total wiring length is limited to VDC
Setting
AI 1
500 feet when using 18 AWG wire. AICOM V
AI 2 AS-AHU100-0
AI 3
T C
(V Position)
AHU3
VDC AS-AHU102 Jumper

AI 1 Setting
AICOM V
AI 2 AS-AHU100-0
AI 3
T C
(V Position)
AHUSHR
Figure 23-4: Sharing a Resistive Sensor Among

AHU Controllers

The eight AIs may be of three types: resistive, voltage, or current. The jumpers in the lower right of the AHU are
used to select the analog input type. See Table 23-2 on page 230 for the jumper positions for each type of input.
The input range for each AI type is listed in Table 23-3 on page 231.
Table 23-3: Jumper Configurations on AHU102
AI Type Range
Current (C) 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Voltage (V) 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC
Resistance (T) (Temperature) 1,000 ohm Nickel, Platinum, or Silicon, 0-2K ohm potentiometer
Set the address of the controller using the N2 address switches (Figure 23-2 on page 228). Do not use addresses
0, 254, or 255 as these are reserved. For details, see Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus on page 185.
Table 23-4: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up AHU Controllers
AHU
Installation and Mounting Air Handling Unit (AHU) Controller LIT-6363010
Procedures for AHU Controllers Technical Bulletin
Applications of the AHU Controller AHU Applications Technical Bulletin LIT-6375080
Footprints and Interior Dimensions Universal Packaging Module Technical LIT-6363070
of UPMs Bulletin
Features and Benefits of AHU Air Handling Unit (AHU) Controller LIT-635055
Controllers Product Bulletin
Model Information
Table 23-5: AHU Controllers
AS-AHU103-300 AHU100-0, AHU102-0, and UPM with Transformer
AS-AHU102-0 AHU Controller Board (only)
AS-AHU100-0 AHU I/0 Termination Board
Table 23-6: AHU Controller Specifications (Part 1 of 2)
Product Name Air Handling Unit (AHU) Controller
Part Numbers and AS-AHU103-300/AHU100-0, AHU102-0, and UPM with Transformer
Description
Analog Inputs 8
RTD temperature elements (1000 ohm nickel, platinum, or silicon)
2k ohm setpoint potentiometers
0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 2 VDC transmitters
0-20 mA
Binary Inputs 8
Dry contacts
0 to 15 VDC
(2.5 VDC trigger)
Analog Outputs 6
0/4-20 mA; can be converted to 0/2 to 10 VDC with addition of 500 ohm resistor
Binary Outputs 10
24 VAC triacs switched
50-500 mA loads
AHU Series Air Handler Unit Controllers: Section 23 231

Table 23-6: AHU Controller Specifications (Part 2 of 2)
24 VAC Power 3-pin termination to AS-XFR100 (J4)
Terminations
I/O Terminations Screw terminal (plug-in optional)
N2 Terminations Fixed screw terminal block
Zone Bus Terminations Discrete connections at controller and 8-pin and 6-pin phone jacks on controller
N2 Controller DIP switch set (1-253)
Addressing Note: Addresses 0, 254, 255 are unavailable or reserved.
Communications Bus Metasys N2 between AHU and network supervisory controller (2-wire + ref.).
Zone Bus between AHU controller and room sensor (6-pin phone jack or wire to screw
terminals)
Mounting Surface mount using 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) bolts (AHU-103)
Dimensions (H x W x D) 584.2 x 406.4 x 190.5 mm (23 x 16 x 7.5 in.)
Shipping Weight 7.7 kg (17 lb)
Compliance CSA C22.2 No. 205 FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A
IEEE 446, IEEE 472, IEEE 518, IEEE 587
AHU
Category A/B UL 916 Safety UL 864 Smoke Control

Refer to the Metasys Smoke Control Wiring Technical Bulletin (LIT-636331) for details on smoke
control compliance requirements.

VAV Series Variable Air Volume Controllers
TO TO
ZONE ZONE
STAT BUS
Z BUS
12 345 6
A A A +15 +15 BI BI 24 24 24 24
AI1 AI2 A I3 AI4 AI5 AI6 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BO1 BO 2 BO 3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8
COM COM COM VDC VDC COM COM VAC VAC VAC VAC
VAV140
12 345 6
DSI
VAV
A A A +15 +15 BI BI 24 24 24 7 24
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6V BO7 BO8
24 COM Z REF N2 N2
- +
VAC BUS
DSI
A A A +15 +15 BI BI 24 24 24 24
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8
BO6 BO7
VAV141
A A A +15 +15 BI BI 24 24 24 A
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 AO1 AO2
COM COM COM VDC VDC COM COM VAC VAC VAC COM
24 COM Z REF N2 N2
- +
VAC BUS
DSI
FIG:VAV14x-Mdls
A A A +15 +15 BI BI 24 24 24 A
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 AO1 AO2
COM COM COM VDC VDC COM COM VAC VAC VAC COM
Figure 24-1: VAV140 and VAV141 - Terminal Strip Models
Application
The VAV Controller is an electric device for digital control of single duct, dual duct, fan powered, and supply/
exhaust VAV box configurations. You may use the VAV as a stand-alone controller or connected to the Metasys
network. The supervisory controller can be the N30, NAE, NCE, or NCM.
When connected to the Metasys Network, the VAV provides all point and control information to the rest of the
network. The devices communicate through an N2 Bus.
Each VAV Controller application uses a different sequence of operation, all of which are covered in the HVAC PRO
for Windows User’s Manual (LIT-6375120).
Most VAV installations should be coordinated with the VAV box manufacturer for factory mounting. Contact the
mechanical services group for Johnson Controls VAV boxes for control information.
Mounting
Follow the instructions below to install and mount the VAV controller.
• HVAC PRO for Windows (current version) SW2
• computer, Intel Pentium class O1 2 3 4 5 6 TEMP 2V 10V
10V N
• Windows 2000 or Windows XP Operating
System SW2 OFF OFF ON
SW1 ON OFF OFF
• two screwdrivers (1/8 in. and 1/4 in. flat-blade)
VAV
2V
• AS-CVTPRO300 O1 2 3 4 5 6
Addressing T N
Set the AI configuration and N2 address switches
FIG:VAV-Swtch
before mounting the controller. For N2 addressing,
see the Addressing N2 Bus Devices section for V
more information.
Analog Inputs SW1
Configure the AIs to match the type of input signal Figure 24-2: AI Switches
connected to the input. Use Switches SW1 and
SW2 to set the AI configuration for resistance/
temperature input, 0 to 2 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC. See Figure 24-2 on page 234.
Mounting Procedures
Mount the controller on a flat surface in any convenient location that meets the environmental criteria listed
(Table 24-6 on page 241). The overall dimensions of the VAV Controller are 162 x 163 x 56 mm (6.5 x 6.4 x 2.2 in.)
H x W x D. Use the predrilled mounting holes to mount the VAV Controller.
1. Secure the VAV, using three screws through the mounting tabs on the sides of the controller board base. Make
sure the wiring connections are easily accessible.
2. Position the VAV and enclosure so that it rests firmly against the mounting surface.
3. Make sure you allow enough room to install the enclosure and conduit for wiring terminations to the controller.
4. Attach the VAV to the mounting surface using 3 No. 8 self-tapping screws.
Note: Overtightening can strip screw threads. Make sure screws do not interfere with wiring or access.
5. Remove the necessary wire passage knockouts.
6. Attach the enclosure cover after installing wiring.

Wiring
See Figure 24-3 on page 235 and R
Figure 24-4 on page 235 for the

terminal layouts of the VAV-110 and
VAV-111, respectively.
ANALOG INPUTS BINARY OUTPUT
Table 24-1 on page 236 and 1 2 3 4 5 6
BINARY INPUT
1 2 3 4
TO
ZONE
STAT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Z BUS
Table 24-2 on page 237 identify the 1 2 3 45 6
signals that can be connected to 1 2 3 45 6
COMMON
each terminal.
ANALOG INPUTS BINARY IN BINARYOUTPUTS
See Figure 24-1 on page 233 to see DSI
the terminal layouts of the VAV-140

P5 P6
and the VAV-141.

Table 24-3 on page 238 and VAV110
Table 24-4 on page 239 identify the
signals that can be connected to
+15VDC +15VDC
ANALOG INPUTS BINARY IN BINARY OUTPUTS
BO 6
BO 3
BO 5
BO 7
BO 8
BO 4
24VAC BO 2
BO 1
AI 1
AI 2
each terminal.
AI 3
AI 6
BI 1
BI 2
BI 3
BI 4
AI 4
AI 5
FIG:VAV110-Mdl
24VAC
24VAC
24VAC
24VAC
AI CM
AI CM
AI CM
AI CM
AI CM
AI CM
CMN
CMN
CMN
CMN
CMN
CMN
REF
N2 +
ZBUS
24 VAC
N2 -
COM
VAV
Figure 24-3: VAV110 Terminal Designations
ANA LOG
ANALOG INP UTS BINARY INPUT TO BINARY OUTPUT OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 ZONE 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
STAT
Z BUS
123456
COMMON
123456
ANALOG INPUTS BINARY IN BINARY OUTPUTS ANA OUT
DSI
VAV111
+15VDC +15VDC
ANALOG INPUTS BINARY IN BINARY OUTPUTS

24VAC BO 2
BO 6
AO CM AO 1
BO 4
BO 3
BO 5
BI 1
BI 4
AO CM AO 2
AI 1
24VAC BI 2
BO 1
AI 2
BI 3
AI 3
AI 5
AI 4
AI 6
24VAC
24VAC
FIG:VAV111-Mdl
24VAC
AI CM
AI CM
AI CM
AI CM
AI CM
AI CM
CMN
CMN
CMN
CMN
REF
N2 +
ZBUS
24 VAC
N2 -
COM
Figure 24-4: VAV111 Terminal Designations
VAV Series Variable Air Volume Controllers: Section 24 235

Terminal Identification and Descriptions
Table 24-1: VAV 110 Terminal Designations
Description Terminal VAV Terminal Block Terminal Description

AI CM AI 1
ANALOG INPUTS
AI CM AI 2
AI CM AI 3
AI CM AI 4
+15 Volts DC supply +15 VDC +15 VDC +15 Volts DC supply
AI CM AI 5
AI CM AI 6
24 Volts AC 24 VAC BI 1 Binary Input 1
+15VDC +15VDC
24VAC BI 1
BINARY IN
24VAC BI 2
24 Volts AC 24 VAC 24VAC BI 3
BI 4 Binary Input 4
24VAC BI 4
Transformer High Side 24 VAC POWER 24 VAC
Transformer Low Side COMMON COM
VAV
ZBUS
Zone Bus ZBUS
N2 -
N2 +
N2 Reference REF REF
BO 1
N2 Bus - N2- 24VAC BO 2
BINARY OUTPUTS
N2 Bus + N2+ CMN BO 3

CMN BO 4
CMN BO 5
24 Volts AC 24 VAC BO 1 Binary Output 1
CMN BO 6
CMN BO 7
FIG:VAV110-Termls
CMN
BO 8

Description Terminal VAV Terminal Block Terminal Description

AI CM AI 1
AI CM
ANALOG INPUTS
Analog Input Common AI CM AI 2 AI 6 Analog Input 6
AI CM AI 3
+15 Volts DC supply +15 VDC AI CM AI 4 +15 VDC +15 Volts DC supply
AI CM AI 5
24 Volts AC 24 VAC AI CM AI 6 BI 1 Binary Input 1

24 Volts AC 24 VAC +15VDC +15VDC BI 2 Binary Input 2
24VAC BI 1
BINARY IN
24VAC BI 3
Transformer High Side 24 VAC POWER 24VAC BI 4
Transformer Low Side COMMON
24 VAC
Zone Bus ZBUS COM
ZBUS
VAV
N2 Reference REF N2 -
N2 +
N2 Bus - N2- REF
BO 1
N2 Bus + N2+ BINARY OUTPUTS
24VAC BO 2
CMN BO 3
CMN BO 4
24 Volts AC 24 VAC CMN BO 5
CMN BO 6 BO 4 Binary Output 4
Common COMMON AO CM AO 1 BO 6 Binary Output 6
Common COMMON AO CM AO 2
AO1 Analog Output 1

AO Common AOCM AO2 Analog Output 2
AO Common AOCM

VAV Terminal Block Terminal Description
AI 1 Analog Input 1
AI 2 Analog Input 2
AI 3 Analog Input 3
AI 4 Analog Input 4
AI 5 Analog Input 5
AI 6 Analog Input 6

BI 1 Binary Input 1
BI COM Binary Input Common
BI 2 Binary Input 2
BI 3 Binary Input 3
VAV
BI 4 Binary Input 4
BO1 Binary Output 1

24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BO2 Binary Output 2
BO3 Binary Output 3

24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BO4 Binary Output 4
BO5 Binary Output 5

24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BO6 Binary Output 6
BO7 Binary Output 7

24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BO8 Binary Output 8

Z BUS Zone Bus
REF N2 Reference
N2- N2 Bus -
VAC
24
N2+ N2 Bus +
BO7
COM
24
BO8

VAV Terminal Block Terminal Description
AI 1 Analog Input 1
AI 2 Analog Input 2
AI 3 Analog Input 3
AI 4 Analog Input 4
AI 5 Analog Input 5
AI 6 Analog Input 6

BI 1 Binary Input 1
BI 2 Binary Input 2
BI 3 Binary Input 3
VAV
BI 4 Binary Input 4
BO1 Binary Output 1

24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BO2 Binary Output 2
BO3 Binary Output 3

24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BO4 Binary Output 4
BO5 Binary Output 5

24 VAC 24 Volts AC
BO6 Binary Output 6
AO1 Analog Output 1

A COM Analog Output Common
AO2 Analog Output 2

Z BUS Zone Bus
REF N2 Reference
N2- N2 Bus -
VAC
24
N2+ N2 Bus +
AO1
COM
A
AO2

Power Wiring
Limit the power to each VAV to 3 amperes or less. However, if you use one low voltage power trunk to power
multiple controllers, follow these precautions:
• Ensure polarity is maintained at each 24 VAC connection.
• As per NEC code, you must enclose 24 VAC power trunks with more than 4 amperes (100 VA) in conduit.
The 24 VAC power connection to VAV110/111 or VAV140/141 is at the far left two positions of the 3-position screw
terminal block. The removable terminal block also allows you to disconnect power to the VAV without disrupting the
24 VAC that is daisy-chained to other controllers.
You may connect the Series VAV110/111 and VAV140/141 power transformer secondary directly to earth ground. If
you elect to do so, the grounded side must connect to the Common power input terminal of the controller. You do
not need a separate isolation transformer for these controllers.
Zone Bus Wiring
Zone Bus may be hard-wired
to the VAV Controller instead L
Power
of using the phone jack. The Transformer
Zone Bus connection to N
VAV110/111 or VAV 140/141
TM
is at the far right position of 24VAC +15VDC +15VDC
COM
the 3-position screw terminal ZBUS
VAV
block identified as See Important Note below.

REF
24 VAC/COM/ZBUS. For all N2-
24VAC
COM
ZBUS
VAVs, the other side of the N2+ REF

N2-
BO1
two wire Zone Bus (the To N2+
24VAC
common side) may be Load 24VAC
TRIACS
connected to any available CO MM O N
CO MM O N
Common terminal.
CO MM O N
Contactor
FIG:Transeri
CO MM O N
CO MM O N
N2 Bus Wiring
The N2 connection to
Figure 24-5: Zone Bus Wiring
VAV110/111 or VAV140/141
is at the 3-position screw
terminal block identified as REF/N2-/N2+. The N2 screw terminal block is removable to allow you to disconnect the
communication trunk without disrupting the N2 that is daisy-chained to other controllers.
IMPORTANT: Some local electric codes require the secondary common of stepdown transformers be
connected to earth ground (typically on units powered by more than 150 VAC). You may have a maximum of one
single earth ground connection, which must be at the transformer secondary common, whether one or multiple
controllers are powered by the same transformer.
Binary Outputs
There are six or eight binary outputs (depending on the selected model) on the controller. Binary outputs are triacs
on the controller hardware. These outputs switch the transformer's low side (or common) to the output.
Each binary output must be connected between the BO terminal and 24 VAC terminal since it is low side switching.
Each BO must drive an individual 24 VAC load drawing between 50 and 800 mA.
If VAV output loads such as contactor or solenoid coils are grounded, you must use a separate isolation relay for
each load.
Any individual binary output (triac) can drive up to 800 mA when you limit the total 24 VAC power draw. You must
limit the power draw of a controller and its load to avoid heat dissipation problems.
Limit the total 24 VAC power draw of a VAV Controller installed in an enclosure to a maximum of 40 VA.
Limit the total 24 VAC power draw of a VAV Controller mounted in an open air environment to a maximum of
75 VA.

Table 24-5: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up VAV Series Controllers
Configuring N2 Network and Integrating N2 N2 Communications Technical Bulletin LIT-636018
Devices into the Metasys System Extended
Architecture
Installing, Wiring, and Configuring the VAV Variable Air Volume (VAV) Controller LIT-6363040
Controller Technical Bulletin
Applications of the VAV Controller VAV Terminal Control Applications Technical LIT-6375120
Bulletin
Features and Benefits of the VAV Controller Variable Air Volume (VAV) Controller Product LIT-635060
Bulletin
Building Applications for VAV/DPT Controllers VAV/DPT Applications LIT-6375042
Table 24-6: MS-VAV Series Controllers
Product Code Number AS-VAV110-1 AS-VAV140-1
AS-VAV111-1 AS-VAV141-1
Analog Inputs (1K ohm RTD, 6 6
VAV
0-10 VDC, 0-2 VDC)
Binary Inputs (24 VAC Dry Contact) 4 4
Analog Outputs (0-10 VDC @ 10 mA) AS-VAV110-1: 0AS-VAV111-1: 2 AS-VAV140-1: 0AS-VAV141-1: 2
Binary Outputs 24 VAC Triacs @ AS-VAV110-1: 8AS-VAV111-1: 6 AS-VAV140-1: 8AS-VAV141-1: 6
0.5 amperes)
VAV 110/111 Terminations 1/4 in spade lugs. Power and communications are removable screw terminal
blocks
VAV 140/141 Terminations Fixed screw terminal blocks. Power and communications are removable screw
terminal blocks
Controller Addressing DIP Switch (N2 only) use Addresses 1-253. Addresses 0, 254, 255 reserved.
Communications Bus Metasys N2 between VAV and network supervisory controller (2-wire + ref.). Zone
Bus between VAV controller and room sensor (8-pin phone jack or wire to spade
lugs)
Environmental Conditions Atmosphere must be free of explosive vapors, escaping gas, corrosive chemical or
salt vapors.
Temperature must be between 0° to 100°C (32° and 122°F), and relative humidity
(non-condensing) must be between 10 and 90%.
Mounting Surface mount using screws or DIN rail

VAV

DX-9100 Series Controllers with XT, XTM, and XP Modules
24 VAC
Common Supply
On/Off, DAT, Pulse,

or Start/Stop
0-10V Analog Incremental
AO1 DO5 DO6
(PAT)
Transducer DO3/DO4
4-20 mA
AO9
DI1 DI2 DI3/DI4
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 71 72 73 74 75 76 91 92 93
DX-9100
FIG:WIRNGD23
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 77 78 79 80 81 82 91 92 93
DI5
Figure 25-1: DX-9xxx-8454 Wiring Example 1
15
0- Sensor
+
AI8
-
XT BUS N2 BUS
1 2 3 1 2 3
RS 232 OUTPUT 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
COM Common
XT BUS RT-
RT+
15V S
COM
RTD 0-20
N2 BUS RT- mA
FIG:wirngd41
RT+
Sensor Sensor
AI1 AI4
Figure 25-2: DX-9xxx-8454 Wiring Example 2
Application
The DX-9100, DX-9121, and DX-9200 Extended Digital Controllers are intended as a digital control solution for
multiple chiller or boiler plant control applications, for the HVAC process of custom or complex air handling units, or
for distributed lighting and related electrical equipment control applications. The controllers provide direct digital
control as well as programmed logic control functions.
Along with their inherent control flexibility, these controllers can expand their input and output point capability by
communicating with input/output expansion modules on an extension bus. They provide monitoring and control for
all connected points via a built-in LED display. These controllers communicate on the Metasys N2 Bus, the
Metasys LON Bus, the LON FTT10, and the XT Bus, providing point control to the Metasys Network.
The XT-9100 and XTM-905 Extension Modules and XP-910x and XPx Expansion Modules have been designed to
provide additional input and output capacity within Metasys Networks, specifically for the DX Series Controllers.
The XT-9100 and XTM-905 modules provide the communications interface, and the XP and XPx modules provide
the analog and digital inputs and outputs.
The XTM-105 is intended for the N2 Bus, and the XTM-905 works on the XT Bus of the DX controller series. Both
support the XPx expansion modules.
Mounting
Mount DX-9100, DX-9121, and DX-9200 controllers to satisfy the specified environment and ambient conditions.
Take extreme care when mounting these devices in high electromagnetic field environments. If they are located too
near devices that generate electromagnetic fields, the DX controller could malfunction.
Mounting Procedures
1. If installed, remove the terminal covers DIGITAL ANALOG TRIAC 24
(DX-9xxx-8991) from the top and bottom of the
DX-9100
base. Place in a safe location.

2. If the controller has already been attached to the X D
RD
base, proceed as follows to detach it: TD
AL
XT Y XT
a. Open the front panel flap. Release Screw C
01 10
(Figure 25-3 on page 244). Pull the right

Screw C
Z A
side of the controller away from the base
K A/M
until it is free. Then completely remove the
0
controller from the base, detaching the lugs E

ESC
on the left side. Place the controller in a safe
location.
FIG:wirngd03
Note: The controllers can be screw or DIN Rail XT N2 RS232 ANALOG

mounted, and the 24 VAC terminal should be in BUS BUS INPUTS
the upper right corner.
Figure 25-3: DX Front Panel

3. Terminate cables and set analog DIP switches as required per project drawings.
184 mm/7.2 in.

5.2 mm/.2 in.
DIGITAL ANALOG TRIAC 24
200 mm/7.8 in.
185 mm/7.2 in.

RD X D
TD
AL
01 10
XT Y XT
Z A
K A/M
E
ESC
RS232
XT N2 ANALOG
BUS BUS INPUTS
170 mm/6.6 in.

15 mm/.6 in.
125 mm/4.9 in. 95 mm/3.7 in.
DX-9100-8454
DX-9100
DX-9100-8990
Base
DX-9100-8991
Terminal Cover Kit FIG:WIRNGD02
160 mm/6.2 in.

Clearance
Figure 25-4: Model DX-9xxx-8454 Mounting Dimensions
Analog Input Jumpers

1. Make all jumper selections before fixing the controller
to the base.
2. Select the analog input type using one jumper per n n n
input in the 0-10 V or RTD jumper field or 0-20 mA 0 - 10 V or RTD or 0 - 20 mA
Current Jumper Field.
FIG:wirngd20
Current
3. For 0-10 V inputs only, install a jumper in the Fail 0-10V/RTD Jumper Field Jumper Field
High or Fail Low position if Fail Safe operation is
required (Figure 25-6 on page 246). Fail High means Figure 25-5: Jumper Input Fields
that the controller assumes a 10 V input when there is
no input signal, and Fail Low means that the controller
assumes a 0 V input when there is no input signal.
DX-9100 Series Controllers with XT, XTM, and XP Modules: Section 25 245
4. Select the analog output type using one jumper per output. Note that analog outputs AO11 to AO14 are 0-10 V
only and require no jumper setting.
0-
(F
20
0-A ANALOG
10CT m OUTPUTS
A
VO
R 1 2
O 12345678
Y) 9ON
10
ADDRESS N
(F 1 2 3 4
0-A RT 5 6 7 8
10CT D
VO
R 1 2 3 4
Y) 5 6 7 8
ANALOG INPUTS
0-
20
m
A
1 2 3 4
FAIL0-
SAFE (0 - 10 V
5 ONLY)
6 7 8
FA FA 20
IL
0- IL 0- m
HI
10 LO A/
G V W 10 RT
H V
D 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
NO JUM PERS FACTORY SETTING
(FACTORY)
0 - 20 mA
0 - 10 V
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
1 2 9 10
ADDRESS N
(FACTORY)
0 - 20 mA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 - 10 V
RTD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ANALOG INPUTS
DX-9100
(ONE JUMPER FOR EACH INPUT)

10V/RTD
0 - 20 mA
CURRENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FAIL SAVE (0-10 V ONLY)

0 - 20 mA/RTD
FAIL LOW
FAIL HIGH
FAIL SAFE
0 - 10 V
0 - 10 V
FIG:wirngd19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 25-6: Setting Analog Jumpers and Address DIP Switch
Setting the N2 Address

Set the controller address on the Address DIP switches. See Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus on
page 185.
Mounting the XT-9100 Extension Module
Remove front cover by releasing the screw (A), lifting the cover and detaching it from the base (Figure 25-7 on
page 247). The cover may be hooked onto the base in the open position by engaging the two lugs on the left of the
controller cover into the corresponding holes in the base.

Alternatively, the cover may be completely removed by detaching the ribbon cable from the board in the cover.
RS485 EXP
A B C A B C ADDRESS
1.76 in. (45 mm)
3.24 in. (83 mm)

46 in. (118 mm)
Power
RD
TD
XT9100
DX-9100
FUSE COM 24V
FIG:WIRNGD24
A
2.73 in.
.47 in.
(12 mm) (70 mm)
1.68 in.
(43 mm)
2.08 in.
(53 mm)
Figure 25-7: Mounting XT-9100 Extension Module
Wiring
Do not mount the controller in heavy-duty switch gear cabinets or in cabinets with frequency-converting or phase-
cutting equipment. Low voltage wiring in electrical cabinets must be physically separated from line voltage and
power wiring. To avoid electrical interference in field cables:
• Keep input and output point cable runs as short as possible (less than 27.4 m [90 ft]).
• Use twisted pair cables.
• Run low voltage cables separately from line voltage/power cables.
• Do not run low voltage cables parallel to power cables for long distances (greater than 3 m [10 ft]).
• Do not run cables close to transformers or high frequency generating equipment.
• In high electromagnetic field environments, use shielded cable, grounding the drain wire at the controller
cabinet only.
• For the N2 communications bus, see N2 Communications Bus Guidelines on page 173.
• For the LONWORKS communications bus, wire according to LON Bus requirements. See LonWorks
Network Communications Bus Guidelines on page 305.
• Do not connect switched inductive loads to the 24 V transformer, which supplies the controller. When multiple
loads are connected to one transformer, cable each connected load from the transformer separately so that
any possible disturbances from one load has a minimal effect on other loads.
Wiring
• Make wire terminations via the terminal blocks on the upper and lower parts of the modules that accept
14 AWG (1 x 1.5 mm2) cable. See the respective procedures for details.
• Make terminations of the serial link bus cable via the connectors provided with the XT-9100 module.
• Use the connector cables that are provided with each module for connecting XT and XP modules over the
extension bus.
• Complete all wiring and connections to the XT and XP modules before applying power. The XT processor then
automatically configures itself to the connected XPs.
WARNING: Risk of Damage.
! The CMOS integrated circuits in the modules are sensitive to static. Take suitable precautions.
Note: Up to eight XT-9100s can be connected to a DX-9100, and each XT-9100 can support eight analog or eight
digital points.
XT -Bus
Com. RS485 Com.
RT - RT -
RT+ RT+
DX-9100
EXP
ADDRESS
XP Bus
A B C A B C
XT -9100
Address
Switches
FIG:wirngd25
FUSE
COM 24V
To
24 VAC Supply
XPs
Figure 25-8: Terminating XT-9100
Setting XT N2 Bus Switches

Select an N2 Bus device address for the XT. For details, see Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus on
page 185.
Setting Jumper Selections
1. Make jumper selections before installing the module and before power is applied to the module.
2. Remove the cover of the module and select the Analog Input Type using one jumper per input in the respective
position RTD or 0 to 20 mA inputs. Remove the jumper completely to select 0 to 10 V.
Note: A maximum of 30 mA is available from the 15 V supply of the module.

3. Select Analog Output Type using the jumpers as shown in Figure 25-9 on page 249. Two jumpers are required
for 0 to 20 mA, and one jumper for 0 to 10 V output.
EXP EXP
AI1AI2 AI3 AI4 +15V
12 34 56
RTD
0 - 20 mA
Input Selection
AIn
0 - 20 mA
7 8
0 - 10 V
AOn
Analog Output
Selection
DX-9100
XP9102
FIG:wirngd29
AI5 AI6 V A07 A08 C 24V
Figure 25-9: Setting Jumpers
XT-Bus Installation Guidelines

Cabling
• Maximum: 8 XT-9100s per DX-9100
• Maximum bus length: 1,200 m (4,000 ft)
• When the bus length is fewer than 100 m (330 ft), install 220 ohm end-of-line resistors at each end of the
XT Bus line.
• When the bus length is less than 100 m (330 ft), install a 220 ohm end-of-line resistor at the DX-9100 only.
End -of-Line
Terminator DX -9100
220 ohm XT -BUS
RT Com
RT -
RT+
End -of-Line
Terminator
220 ohm
FIG:wirngd39
RT+ RT- C RT+ RT- C
A B C A B C
XT -9100 XT -9100
Figure 25-10: XT-Bus Cabling

DX-9100

XP-910x Expansion Modules
Terminations
XP-9104 Terminations Detail

EXP C DI1 C DI2 C DI3 C DI4 EXP
Potential Free Contacts
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4 C DI1 C DI2 C DI3 C DI4
XP Bus
XP Bus
DO5
DO6
DO7
DO8
XP-9104
XP9104
DX-9100
DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8 C 24V
DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8 C 24V
Low (Common) or
High Side (24 VAC)
24 VAC Supply
External 24 VAC Supply
FIG:wirngd234
Figure 25-13: XP-9104 with Terminations Detail
EXP EXP
AI1 AI2 AI3AI4 +15V Power
15 V
0-10 V Signal
Common
Sensor
15 V
4-20 mA S
max
AO7
min
max EXP EXP
X P -B us
X P -Bu s
+15V
AO8
min
XP9102
XP-9102-
DX-9100
AI5 AI6 AO7 AO8 C 24V
RTD
Sensor 24 VAC Supply
-
+
M
E
~
~
0...10 VDC Actuator FIG:wirngd28
External 24V~ Supply

EXP DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4
EXP
DO1
DO2
DO3 EXP EXP
DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4
XP Bus
DO4
XP Bus
DO5
DO6
DO7
DO8
XP-9103
XP9103
DX-9100
DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8
DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8
Low (Common) or
High Side (24 VAC)
FIG:wirngd32
EXP C DI1 C DI2 C DI3 C DI4 EXP Potential Free Contacts
DI1
DI2
DI3 C DI1 C DI2 C DI3 C DI4
XP Bus
XP Bus
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8 XP-9105
XP9105
DX-9100
C DI5 C DI6 C DI7 C DI8 C 24V
C DI5 C DI6 C DI7 C DI8 C 24V
24 VAC Supply
FIG:wirngd234
Potential Free Contacts

EXP R1 NO NC R2 NO NC EXP
External Supply (24 V max)
Load
DO1
DO2
DO3 EXP EXP
R1 NO NC R2 NO NC
DO4
XP Bus
XP Bus
XP-9107
XP9107
DX-9100
NC NO R3 NC NO R4 C 24V NC NO R3 NC NO R4 C 24V
Load
24 VAC Supply
External Supply (24 V max)
FIG:wirngd38
XT Bus
XT-BUS Com Com
E RT- RT-
X RT+
P
RT+
XPx Com Bus
XT-BUS
E
X
P
XTM-905 METASYS
PWR XTM-905
RD
TD
JOHNSON
CONTROLS
ADDRESS 2
4
24V24V V
~
24V~ Supply
ADDRESS from Transformer 24V~ Supply
2
4 to XPx Modules
FIG:xtm905w
V
~
Figure 25-16: XTM-905-5 with Terminations Detail

DX-9100
Setting XTM-905 N2 Bus Switches

Select an N2 Bus device address for the XTM. For details, see Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus on
page 185.
XPA-8n1 Jumper Settings
Set the analog input and output types of the XPA-8x1 module by setting jumpers on the circuit board of the module.
Make all jumper settings before installing the module and before you apply power to the module. Remove the cover
of the module by carefully prying it loose from the four retaining lugs located on the sides of the cover.

Voltage-free Contacts
C C C C
C C C C
XPB-821 METASYS
BI1
BI2
BI3 XPB-8x1
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI7
BI8
JOHNSON
CONTROLS
FIG:xpb8x1w
C C C C
C C C C
DX-9100
Figure 25-18: XPB-821-5 with Terminations Details
C BI1 C C C
C BI1 C C C
XPE-401 METASYS
BI1 A
0
BO1 1
BI2 A
XPE-4x1
BO2 0
BI3 1
BO3 A
0
BI4 1
JOHNSON
FIG:xpe401s
CONTROLS
0 I 0 I 0 I
Internal Connections
0 I 0 I 0 I A
Motor
Starter
I Holding
DX-9100
Overload 0 Coil
Protection
Live Neutral
Figure 25-19: XPE-401-5 with Terminations Detail

C BI1 C BI2 C BI3 C

C BI1 C BI2 C BI3 C BI4
XPE-404 METASYS XPE-4x4 (x = 0...3)

BI1 A
0
BI2 1
BI3 A
BI4 0
1
BO1 A
FIG:xpe44w03
BO2 0 1/I 2/I 3/I 4/I
BO3 1
BO4 A
JOHNSON 0
CONTROLS 1 Internal Connections
1/I 2/0 2/I 3/I 4/I Relay Coils

Overload
DX-9100
Protection
Neutral
Live
Figure 25-20: XPE-404-5 with Terminations Detail
C BI1 C C C
C BI1 C C C
XPL-401 METASYS
BI1 A
0
BO1 1
BI2 A
XPL-4x1
BO2 0
BI3 1
BO3 A
0
BI4 1
FIG:xple4x1w
JOHNSON
CONTROLS
0 I 0 I 0 I
0 I 0 I 0 I A
Motor
Starter
I Holding
DX-9100
Overload 0 Coil
Protection
Live Neutral
Figure 25-21: XPL-401-5 with Terminations Detail

C BI1 C BI2 C BI3 C
C BI1 C C C
XPT-401 METASYS
BI1 A
0
BI2 1
BI3 A XPT-4x1
BI4 0
1
BO1 A
BO2 0
BO3 1
BO4 A
FIG:xpt4x1w
JOHNSON 0
CONTROLS 1
BO1BO1
24 VAC
On/Off or
Pulse Outputs
DX-9100
Figure 25-22: XPT-401-5 with Terminations Detail
Triac Outputs
BO1BO1
XPT-861 METASYS
BO1
BO2
BO3 XPT-8x1
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
JOHNSON
FIG:xpt861s
CONTROLS
24 VAC
DX-9100
On/Off or
Pulse Outputs
Figure 25-23: XPT-861-5

Note: Only one 4-20 mA 15V
AIC AIC AIC AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 15V15V15V active sensor may be 4-20 mA
S
powered by the module.
AIC AIC AIC AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 15V 15V 15V
Active Sensors
Power
XPA-821 METASYS 15V
Signal
max 0-10V +
AO7 Common
min -
max
External 0-10V or +
AO8
Power 4-20 mA
min -
JOHNSON
CONTROLS
AIC AI5 AI6 XPA-8x1
FIG:xpa8x1w
DX-9100
AI6
RTD
Sensor
-
M +
E ~
~
0...10 VDC Actuator
External 24V~ Supply
Figure 25-17: XPA-8n1 with Terminations Detail
Jumper Settings
RTD Sensor
AIC AIC AIC AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
0-20 mA
1234
0-10V
Analog Input Settings 1-6
56
7 8
0-20 mA
FIG:xpajmnew
0-10V
DX-9100
AIC AI5 AI6
Analog Output Settings 7-8
Figure 25-24: XPA-8n1 Jumper Settings

Power Watchdog Circuit
The power watchdog circuit checks to see that power is getting to all modules; the XTM does not respond if there is
a problem. For the power watchdog circuit to operate properly, you must make sure that the last expansion module
connected to the XTM has the loopback (end-of-bus) jumper installed in the correct position on its connector for the
24 VAC module supply bus (Figure 25-25 on page 265).
Expansion Module
2
Communications Bus I C
AICAICAICAI1AI2AI3AI415V15V15V
Power Watchdog
FIG:conem905
Loopback Jumper
DX-9100
AIC AI5 AI6 AO7 AOCAO8
Insert the power watchdog loopback
jumper into Holes 3 and 4 of the
Expansion Module module supply connector on the last
Power Supply Bus (24 VAC) module connected to the XTM-905.
Figure 25-25: Power Watchdog Loopback Jumper
Table 25-1: Documents Related to Installing, Mounting, and Setting up of DX Controllers
For Information On Refer to LIT or Part No.
Installation, Output/Inputs, and Operation of DX DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Technical LIT-6364020
Controllers Bulletin
Configuration Guidelines for DX Controllers DX-9100 Configuration Guide LIT-6364030
Table 25-2: DX Controller Series
Product Codes DX-9100-8454 XTM-905-5 XPA-821-5 XPL-401-5
DX-9121-8454 XT-9100-8204 XPB-821-5 XPL-404-5
XP-9102-8204 XPE-401-5 XPM-105-5
XP-9103-8004 XPE-404-5 XPE-402-51
XP-9105-8004
XPE-403-51
XP-9107-8004
XPL-402-51
XPL-402-51
Power Requirements 24 VAC
Power Draw .5 VA to 10 VA
Weight DX-9100-8454 XT-9100-8204 2.2 kg (4.7 lb)
DX-9121-8454 XP-9102-8204
XP-9103-8004
XP-9105-8004
XP-9107-8004
DX-9100
XTM-905-5 XTM-105-5 150.3 g (5.3 oz)
XPA-821-5 238.1 g (8.4 oz)

XPB-821-5 XPT-861-5 164.4 g (5.8 oz)
XPE-401-5 XPE-402-51
XPE-404-5
XPE-403-51
XPL-401-5
XPL-402-51
XPL-402-51
Ambient Operating Conditions 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); 10 to 90% RH Noncondensing
Ambient Storage Conditions DX-9100-8454 XT-9100-8204 -20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F)
DX-9121-8454 XP-9102-8204
XP-9103-8004
XP-9105-8004
XP-9107-8004
XTM-905-5 XPM-105-5 -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F)
XPA-821-5 XPE-402-51
XPB-821-5
XPE-403-51
XPE-401-5
XPE-404-5 XPL-402-51
XPL-401-5 XPL-402-51
XPL-404-5
1. XTM-105 only.

TC-9102 Terminal Unit Controller
Application
The TC-9102 Controller is a microprocessor-based DDC. It is designed for use with FCUs to control fan speed and
heating and cooling valves. The controller has heating and cooling setpoints for comfort, standby, and night modes.
The controller is configured using HVAC PRO, which assigns default operating parameters. The controller is
factory configured to control with default operating parameters and can be modified using HVAC PRO. Minimal
setup is required.
All TC-9102 controllers may be connected to an N2 Communications Bus to provide operating data to a
supervisory system and allow modification of operating procedures.
TC-9102
Figure 26-1: TC-9102 Controller Dimensions
Mounting
The TC-9102 Series controller is designed to be mounted within the fan coil unit housing or within a control cabinet.
Access is required for installation and maintenance workers. The mounting location must be clean and dry and not
subject to extreme heat or cold. The installation and electrical wiring must conform to local codes and should be
performed only by authorized personnel. Line voltage wiring must be separated from low voltage (30 VAC or less)
by 50 mm (2 in.). See Wiring on page 268 for more information.
For a typical installation, you need the following:
• HVAC PRO software, current version
• RS-485 converter (for N2 downloading, uploading, and commissioning). See N2 Communications Bus
Guidelines on page 173 for converter information.
• Laptop computer
• Screwdrivers (3.2 mm [1/8 in.] and 6.4 mm [1/4 in.] flat-head)
• Drill
To assist with mounting, see Figure 26-1 on page 267 for TC-9102 Controller dimensions.
Wiring
Power Source
• Terminations are made on the terminal blocks at each end of the controller. The low voltage terminal blocks
accept up to 16 AWG wires, and the fan control terminals accept up to 14 AWG wires.
• Separate the low voltage wiring from the line voltage wiring by a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.). Keep all cables as
short as possible and tie in position. To avoid induced noise, do not run cables close to transformers or
inductive loads.
• The 24 VAC supply must be stable and not shared with other switched inductive loads. An earth ground
(Terminal 2) is provided on the TC-9102 to add additional noise suppression on the power source, and should
be grounded.
• The TC-9102 Controller has an isolated transformer on board, allowing the user to share a single NEC Class 2
power transformer among multiple TC-9102 Controllers by running a power trunk from the single transformer to
several devices. Class 2 implies no more than 100 VA loading per transformer.
Note: If you use one low voltage power trunk for multiple controllers, follow these precautions:
• Ensure that polarity is maintained at each 24 VAC connection.
• Consider that some local electrical codes require that the secondary common of the stepdown transformer
be connected to earth ground (typically on units that are greater than 150 VAC). This ground must be at the
transformer secondary.
TC-9102
• Determine the total system load by adding all the actual loads to the basic load of the controller. See
Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards on page 465 for more information.
To meet the requirement for a UL installation, the following installation practices are required:
• The TC-9102 can be mounted directly into an FCU without the use of an additional enclosure, or
• The TC-9102 must be mounted into an enclosure when it is mounted remote from the FCU.
• In either case, the Class 1 line voltage fan control wiring from the TC-9102 must be routed away from all other
24 VAC power or communication (Class 2) wiring. Line voltage (>30 VAC) Class 1 and low voltage (30 VAC or
less) Class 2 wiring must be separated by at least 50 mm (2 in.) outside of enclosures and by 6.4 mm (.25 in)
inside enclosures.

Terminal Designations
External Supply
for Fan
250 VAC Max. Analog 0-10 VDC
3 Ampere or
1/8 hp Max. PWM (Europe Only)
Control Signal
Common
Neutral On- 24 VAC
Line Off
Ground
See Note 1.
Auxiliary Output Cooling Output Heating Output Power Supply

See Note 2.
Digital Input Analog Inputs

N2 Bus
Digital Common Analog Common
TC-9102
Window Occupancy Mode LED NTC Room
Sensor Sensor Setpoint
Contact
Note 1: For 0 to 10 VDC and PWM (only available in Europe) output,

terminals 30 and 40 are internally connected.
Note 2: Wiring for Cooling Output is the same as that shown for
Heating Output.
Figure 26-2: TC-9102-0221 Controller Wiring -- On/Off Fan Control
TC-9102 Terminal Unit Controller: Section 26 269

Incremental
Valve
PAT 24 VAC
Close Common Open
DAT 24 VAC
Valve
0-10 VDC
Fan Speed
Control
Common
120 VAC
On-Off 24 VAC
(2-stages)
24 VAC Ground
See Note 1.

See Note 2.
TC-9102

N2 Bus
Window Occupancy Mode LED NTC Room

Contact Sensor Sensor Setpoint
Note 1: For PAT, DAT, and On-Off outputs, terminals 1, 31, and 41
are internally connected.
Heating Output.
Figure 26-3: TC-9102-0330 Controller Wiring - 0 to 10 VDC Fan Control

Incremental
Valve
PAT 24 VAC
Close Common Open
External Supply DAT 24 VAC

for Fan Valve
250 VAC Max.
3 Ampere
1/8 hp Max.
120/24 VAC
Common
Neutral 120 VAC
On-
Line Off 24 VAC Power
Transformer
2R 1R
Ground
See Note 1.
71 70 61 60 41 40 32 31 30 3 2 1
Auxiliary Output Cooling Output Power Supply

Heating Output
See Note 2.
TC-9102
N2 Bus
10 11 12 13 14 15 20 21 22 23 24 RT+ RT- COM SH
Window Occupancy Mode Led NT C Room 0331wire

Contact Sensor Sensor Setpoint
For PAT, DAT, and ON-OFF outputs, terminals 1, 31, and 41

Wiring for Cooling Output is the same as that shown for

Heating Output.
Figure 26-4: TC-9102-0331 Controller Wiring - On/Off Fan Control

Incremental
Valve
PAT 24 VAC
Close Common Open
DAT 24 VAC
Valve
External Supply
3-speed
for Fan
Fan
250 VAC
3 Ampere
1/8 hp Max.
120/24 VAC
Common
120 VAC
Neutral Low On-Off 24 VAC Power
Line Transformer
Medium (2-stages) 2R 1R
High 24 VAC Ground
See Note 1.
71 70 63 62 61 60 42 41 40 32 31 30 3 2 1

See Note 2.
TC-9102

N2 Bus
10 11 12 13 14 15 20 21 22 23 24 50 51 52 RT+ RT- COM SH
Window Mode Led Room 0332wire

Contact Setpoint
Note 1: For PAT, DAT, and On-Off outputs, terminals 1, 31, and 41
Heating Output.
Figure 26-5: TC-9102-0332 Controller Wiring - 3-Speed Fan Control

TC-9102 Room Command
Controller Module TM-9100
52
51 51 3-speed Fan
Override
50 (Only for 3-speed
fan model.)
24
23 23 Remote
22 22 Setpoint
21
21 24 Common
20 20 NTC Sensor
15 15 LED
14 14 Mode
Max. 164 ft
(50 m)
FIG:wremod
Min. 24 AWG (0.5 mm diameter) wire
Figure 26-6: Wiring to Room Module, TM-9100
TC-9102
Table 26-1: Fan Output Types
Fan Type Terminal Description
Single Speed 60 Neutral to the Motor (Jumper to Terminal 71 [neutral])
(TC-9102-0xx1) 61 Power to the Motor (closes to Terminal 70 to operate the fan)
Three Speed 60 Neutral to the Motor (Jumper to Terminal 71 [neutral])
(TC-9102-0332) 61 High Speed (closes to Terminal 70 to operate the fan)
62 Medium Speed (closes to Terminal 70 to operate the fan)
63 Low Speed (closes to Terminal 70 to operate the fan)
0 to 10 VDC Variable Speed 60 Positive Signal; 0 - 10 VDC
(TC-9102-0330) 61 Negative Signal; 0 - 10 VDC
Table 26-2: Heating and Cooling Output Types (Part 1 of 2)

Heating/Cooling Type Terminal Description
PAT - Position Adjust Type 30 Heating Output - 24 VAC; Drives the Valve Open
(TC-9102-033x) 31 Heating Output Common - 24 VAC
32 Heating Output - 24 VAC; Drives the Valve Closed
40 Cooling Output - 24 VAC; Drives the Valve Open
41 Cooling Output Common - 24 VAC
42 Cooling Output - 24 VAC; Drives the Valve Closed
0 - 10 VDC 30 Heating Output Negative Signal; 0 - 10 VDC
(TC-9102-0221) 31 Heating Output Positive Signal; 0 - 10 VDC
40 Cooling Output Negative Signal; 0 - 10 VDC
41 Cooling Positive Signal; 0 - 10 VDC

Table 26-2: Heating and Cooling Output Types (Part 2 of 2)
Heating/Cooling Type Terminal Description
2-Stage On/Off 30 Heating Output - 24 VAC; Stage 1
(TC-9102-033x) 31 Heating Output Common - 24 VAC
32 Heating Output - 24 VAC; Stage 2
40 Cooling Output - 24 VAC; Stage 1
41 Cooling Output Common - 24 VAC
42 Cooling Output - 24 VAC; Stage 2
! Protect mechanical equipment, such as refrigeration equipment, that requires a minimum run time or
minimum off time with an appropriate time delay relay. Failure to incorporate such protection may
result in damage to the mechanical equipment.
Wiring Sensors and Actuators

The NTC temperature sensor has a higher impedance and therefore can use smaller diameter wire without offset
errors (see Table 26-3 on page 274). Use 18 to 24 AWG twisted pair wire for all sensor and output wiring
depending on line length. If shielding is used, it should be earth grounded at the controller end only.
CAUTION: Risk of Property Damage
! Do not run low-voltage cables or wires in the same conduit or wiring troughs with line-voltage wires.
Running low and line voltage wires in the same conduit or wiring troughs may damage the equipment
or cause system malfunction.
Table 26-3: Input and Output Load Impedances

Function Range DC Input Sensor or Load
Impedance Impedance
Inputs
TC-9102
AI Temperature NTC 2252 ohm at 25°C (77°F) 10k ohms 7400 to 1200 ohms
AI Setpoint Pot 0 to 5 VDC 600k 10k ohm
BI Opto-isolated – DC pullup <1k ohms closed 4.4k ohms 0 to 10 M ohm
>100k ohms open
Outputs
AO Voltage 0 to 10 VDC @ N/A 1k to 10 M ohm
10 mA maximum
BO VAC Triac 24 VAC @ 50 to 500 mA N/A 48 to 480 ohm
Table 26-4: Sensor Wire Sizes and Lengths

Sensor Type 18 AWG Wire Size Run Length in 24 AWG Wire Size Run Length in Meters
Meters (Feet) (Feet)
AI Temperature 152.4 (500) 50 (164)
(Resistive)
AI Voltage 152.4 (500) 30.5 (100)
BI Voltage/Contact 152.4 (500) 152.4 (500)
Single BO at 0.1 ampere 152.4 (500) 30.5 (100)
Single BO at 0.5 ampere 30.5 (100) 6.1 (20)

Wiring the N2 Bus
When the TC-9102 is wired to the N2 Communications Bus, it can receive commands from and transmit status
reports to a supervisory device over the Metasys Network. Connect the N2 Bus via the controller’s N2 Bus terminal
block (Figure 26-7 on page 275). Connect N2 + to RT+, N2- to RT-, and N2 REF to COM (N2 REF). For more
details on the N2 Bus, such as distance limitations and termination rules, see N2 Communications Bus Guidelines
on page 173.
TC-9102 N2 Bus Terminal Block
RT+ = N2+
RT - = N2 -
COM = N2 REF
From last To next

N2 device N2 device
Figure 26-7: Terminating N2 Bus Wires
Setting the N2 Address

The N2 address must be set and the N2 Bus tested for voltage, polarity, and isolation before actually wiring the
TC-9102 for operation. For setting the address, see Setting Device Addresses on the N2 Bus on page 185. For
testing N2 wiring, see N2 Communications Bus Guidelines on page 173.
Jumper Positions
To reach the jumpers and switches (Figure 26-8 on page 276), open the controller by gripping the cover with thumb
and finger on both sides above the center, and pull the cover off using the lower edge as a hinge. Replace the
cover by resting the lower edge of the cover against the base and then pressing the cover firmly to engage all four
retaining lugs.
Remove the JP2 Gain Jumper (Red) to reduce the proportional band to half of the factory setting or value entered
in the HVAC PRO configuration (gain x 2).
TC-9102
Remove the JP2 Integral Time Jumper (Blue) to perform proportional heating/cooling control only.

For a more detailed explanation of the effect of these tuning values, refer to the TC-9102 Applications Application
Note (LIT-6375130). Jumpers JP1, JP3, and JP4 are factory set.
Integral Time Jumper (Blue)
Zone 1 Jumper (Black)
Gain Jumper (Red)
Zone 2 Jumper (Black)
Factory Settings
(4 Spare jumpers
packed with 1 2 3 4
controller)
Power
LED
JP2
Receive/
Transmit
LED
ON
1 U1
Address 2
Switches 3
4
TC-9102
5
6
SW1 JP3
tc2jmpsw
123
Jumpers for TM-9180 Module
with LCD Display
Or
12 3
Jumpers for other TM-91xx
Modules (factory settings)
Figure 26-8: TC-9102 Controller Jumpers and Switches

Startup
When all jumpers and address switches have been set, and all connections have been made and verified, 24 VAC
power may be applied. The Power LED should be lit. If the communications bus is active, the R/T LED flashes. If
the Power LED is not lit, check the 24 VAC supply.
HVAC PRO Configuration
Configure the TC-9102 Controller with the software program, HVAC PRO (Release 8.04 or later). This software tool
configures, commissions, uploads, and downloads the TC-9102 Controller database. Refer to the TC-9102
Applications Application Note (LIT-6375130) for details.
Table 26-5: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up TC-9102
Daily Operation of the Metasys System Metasys System Help On the Help menu,
Extended Architecture, Navigating the UI, select Metasys Help
Monitoring and Controlling the BAS or LIT-1201793
Networks
Installation Considerations and Guidelines, TC-9102 Terminal Unit Controller Technical LIT-6363050
and Wiring Details for TC-9102 Terminal Unit Bulletin
Controller
Features and Selection Chart for TC-9102 TC-9102 Series Terminal Controller LIT-1928140
Terminal Controller
Application and Configuration of TC-9102 TC-9102 Applications Application Note LIT-6375130
Series Terminal Controller
Features, Application, Benefits and TC-9102 Terminal Controller LIT-635063
Configuration of TC-9102 Terminal Controller
Configuring N2 Network and Integrating N2 N2 Communications Bus Technical Bulletin LIT-636018
Devices Into the Metasys System Extended
Architecture
TC-9102
Architecture from a Computer Connections and Dial-up Connection Application
Note

Model Information
Table 26-6: Available TC-9102 Models
Model Fan Control Htg/Clg Control
TC-9102-0221 On/Off (Relay) 0 to 10 VDC Proportional
TC-9102-0330 0 to 10 VDC 2-stage, or PAT (Incremental)1
TC-9102-0331 On/Off (Relay) 2-stage, or PAT1
TC-9102-0332 3-speed (Relays) 2-stage, or PAT 1
1. These models may only use one of these choices for heating and cooling. Both heating and cooling must be of the same
type.
Table 26-7: Feature on TC-9102 Models

Function Terminal TC-9102 Model Characteristics
N2 Bus RT+, RT-, COM All Opto-isolated. Removable screw terminal block with
optional shield (SH)
24 VAC Power 1, 3 All Internally isolated power. Screw terminal block
AI Zone Temperature 20, 21 All Passive, NTC, 32 to 105°F (0 to 40°C)1
AI Remote Setpoint 22, 23, 24 All Active 3-wire, Pot, 0 to 10k ohms
AI Fan Override Control 50, 51, 52 All Auto, Off, 1-stage, 2-stage, 3-stage switch
BI Window Contact 10, 11 All Closed = window closed, <1k ohms
BI Mode Select Button 14, 21 All Momentary contact, <1k ohms
BI Occupancy Sensor 12, 13 All Closed = occupied, <1k ohms
Occupancy LED 15, 21 All Red, lit when occupied
2-Stage BO Cooling 40, 41, 42 TC-9102-033x Triac, 0.5 A at 24 VAC
AO Cooling 40, 41 TC-9102-0221 0 to 10 VDC, 10 mA
2-Stage BO Heating 30, 31, 32 TC-9102-033x Triac, 0.5 A at 24 VAC
AO Heating 30, 31 TC-9102-0221 0 to 10 VDC, 10 mA
TC-9102
BO Fan Control 60, 61 TC-9102-0xx1 Relay, 3 A at 125/250 VAC, 1/8 hp maximum

3-Speed Fan 60, 61, 62, 63 TC-9102-0332 Relay, 3 A at 125/250 VAC, 1/8 hp maximum
AO Fan Control 60, 61 TC-9102-0330 0 to 10 VDC, 10 mA
Fan Line Voltage Input 70, 71 -0221, -0331, -0332 125/250 VAC at 3 ampere maximum
Earth Ground 2 All Optional noise suppression on the 24 VAC power
source
1. The TC-9102s require a TM-9100 Series thermostat sensor.

MS-TC9102 Series
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, -15% to +10%, 50-60 Hz, Internally isolated
Power Consumption 3 VA Controller and Room Command Module (without BO loads)
Ambient Operating Conditions 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F), 10 to 90% RH noncondensing
Ambient Storage Conditions -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F), 10 to 90% RH
Terminations Terminal block for 1.5 mm2/16 AWG (maximum) cable and 14 AWG for fan terminal
block. Rated for 4 lb⋅in maximum torque.
Serial Interfaces Optically isolated RS-485 interface for N2 Bus connection; 9600 baud
Controller Addressing 1 to 255 selectable on DIP switches (6) and jumpers (2)
Room Command Module TM-9100 Room Temperature Sensor - NTC Thermistor 0 to 40°C (32 to 105°F)
Inputs Remote Setpoint - 10k ohm potentiometer
3-speed Fan Override - 10k ohm potentiometer
Occupancy Button - Momentary Contact
Binary Inputs Window Contact: Closed (<1k ohm) = window closed
Occupancy Sensor: Closed (<1k ohm) = occupied
Heating/Cooling Control Outputs Analog: 0 to 10 VDC, maximum 10 mA,
2 PAT: Triacs rated at 24 VAC, maximum 0.5 A1
2-stage: On/Off Triacs rated at 24 VAC, maximum 0.5 A1
(Maximum 1 mA leakage current)
Fan Control Outputs On/Off: Relay contact rated at 125/250 VAC, maximum 3 A, maximum 1/8 hp
3-speed: Relay contacts rated at 125/250 VAC, maximum 3 A, maximum 1/8 hp
Proportional: 0 to 10 VDC, maximum 10 mA
Mounting DIN rail or surface (two surface mount brackets supplied with controller)
Housing Material ABS + polycarbonate, Self-extinguishing UL94-V0 Protection, Meets IP30 (IEC529)
TC-9102
Dimensions (H x W x D) 118 x 108 x 31 mm (4.65 x 4.25 x 1.22 in.)
Processor ST 72334N
Memory 256 Bytes Random Access Memory (RAM), 8k Bytes ROM, 256 Bytes EEPROM
Standards Compliance • FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A - North American Radio Emissions
• IEEE 472 - Surge Withstand Capability
• IEEE 587, Category A - Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits
• UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment for Line Voltage relays
• IEEE 446 - Industrial Power/Brownouts
Compliance UL Listed and CSA Certified as part of the Metasys Network.
1. Minimum required load for each BO used is 1.2 VA (50 mA at 24 VAC). Relay loads less than 50 mA may cause triac/relay
chattering. If this occurs, use a 360 ohm, 5 watt resistor across the relay coil.

TC-9102

TE-6700 Series Sensors
Application Front View Wallbox
Side View Surface Surface
The TE-6700 Series Sensor are wall-mounted Mounted Sensor Wall Mount Sensor Height
Mounted
temperature sensors for room or zone temperature Height
control applications.
Parts Included
• mounting base for wallbox or surface mounting 3-3/16 4-3/4
81 121
• No. 6-32 x 7/8 in. (22 mm) oval-head screw (2)
• No. 4-40 x 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) socket head cover
screw (comes installed) 1-11/32
• drywall clip mounting kit (includes two each of 34

No. 6-20 x 1-1/4 in. [32 mm] pan-head, tapping 3-3/16
9/32 81
screws, spring clips, and spacers) 7
11/32
Special Tools Needed 9
Use a 1.5 mm (1/16 in.) Allen wrench or
T-4000-119 Allen-head adjustment tool for
mounting.
Installation Guidelines
IMPORTANT: Cover all RJ-style modular
connectors on thermostat cables with
masking tape when the cables are installed to
protect the connectors until the thermostats 1-11/32
are ready to be mounted. Considerable time 34
can elapse between installing a cable and Side View Wallbox Mounted Side View Wallbox Mounted
Sensor with Phone Jack Sensor with Terminal Block
mounting the thermostat. Modular jacks that are
painted or covered with drywall mud must be Figure 27-1: TE-6700 Dimensions, in. (mm)
replaced before installing the thermostat.
TE-6700
IMPORTANT: If a preconfigured thermostat cable with RJ-45 jacks is installed in an EMT or conduit raceway, a
3/4 in. minimum raceway is required to provide sufficient space to effectively pull the cable and not damage the
cable or jack.
Plenum Cable Run Applications

Use RJ-type thermostats and preconfigured cables for plenum jobs where you can run open wiring. Since you do
not have to strip and terminate wire, running open wiring is much cheaper and more accurate than trying to crimp
cables in the field. See Table 45-8 on page 467 for additional information on preconfigured RJ-45 thermostat
cables.
Cables for EMT or Conduit Applications
Use standard cable and terminal screws for conduit jobs since RJ jacks do not pull through a conduit well, and
preconfigured cables are seldom the right length. If a preconfigured cable is used, you can cut off one end, pull the
cable, and then re-terminate with a new connector. See Table 45-9 on page 467 for additional information on
Metastat cables for EMT or conduit applications.
Mounting
1. Loosen (do not 2. Swing the cover
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the Printed Circuit remove) the cover down from the
Board from the TE-6700 housing. Removing the screw with a 1/16 in. base.
Printed Circuit Board voids the product warranty. (1.5 mm) Allen
wrench.
IMPORTANT: Mount the TE6700 base and
housing after the walls are finished and painted to
avoid damage during construction. You can mount
some TE-6700s temporarily to test the control
sequences and assure cable and control reliability.
Note: You may be directed to install thermostats

before the walls are finished. You should avoid doing
this, unless the directing party is willing to take
Cover Base
responsibility for damage.
The TE-6700 is shipped with one mounting base for
both surface and wallbox mounting. To mount the
Figure 27-2: Removing the Cover from the Base
TE-6700, release the cover from the base as
described in Figure 27-2 on page 282.
Wallbox (2 x 4 in.) Mount Applications
Cover
Wallboxes (when used) can be roughed-in either vertical or
Screw
horizontal.
To mount the TE-6700 to a wallbox:
1. Pull the cable or wiring through the wallbox and base.
IMPORTANT: Seal the wallbox or use an ACC-INSL-0

Foam Pad Kit for Wallbox Mounting (ordered separately) to
keep drafts from causing false temperature readings.
2. Rotate the mounting base, so that one of the arrows on the No. 6
base points up. Screws
3. Fasten the base to the wallbox with the No. 6-32 x 7/8 in.
TE-6700
(22 mm) screws provided (Figure 27-3 on page 282).

4. See Wiring on page 284 for the appropriate connections. Figure 27-3: Wallbox Mounting
5. Place the bottom edge of the cover against the bottom lip
of the base, and rotate it up onto the base as shown in
Cover
Screw
6. Tighten the cover screw.
Once installed, removing the cover of the TE-6700 from the
wall requires loosening the cover screw, as described in
Cover
Base
Figure 27-4: Attaching Cover to Base

Surface Mount Applications
Special Tools Needed: Key-hole saw, 1/16 in. Allen wrench or
T-4000-119 Allen-head adjustment tool, Battery Drill or Screw Cover
Driver Screw
To mount the surface model to drywall:
1. Bend the top and bottom edges of the mounting base at
the perforations until they break off (Figure 27-5 on
page 283).
2. Cut a hole at the appropriate height and pull the wiring
through the hole.
IMPORTANT: Seal the hole or use an ACC-INSL-1 Foam

Pad Kit for Surface Mounting (ordered separately) to keep Cover Base
drafts from causing false temperature readings. If you are
using spring clips, a 35 mm (1-3/8 in.) hole is required.
3. Use the base as a template to mark the location of the two

mounting anchors, then make the holes, using the proper
tool.
4. If using spring clips, insert the clips on each side of the
35 mm (1-3/8 in.) hole, with the long leg of the spring clip
inside the wall. Use the spacers if needed, as shown in Figure 27-5: Removing the Breakaway Tabs
Figure 27-6 on page 283. Do not use the spacers for a
16 mm (5/8 in) hole.
IMPORTANT: Molly Bolts are strongly recommended for mounting sensors and thermostats because
thermostats in public high-traffic areas, such as hallways, tend to be bumped repeatedly. Sensor and
thermostats should never be mounted on drywall with plastic style anchors.
5. Pull the cable through the base of the TE-6700.

6. Rotate the mounting base so that one of the arrows on the base points upward.
7. Center the two holes in the base over the two mounting holes and fasten the base to the drywall.
8. See Wiring on page 284 for appropriate sensor terminations.
TE-6700
9. Place the bottom edge of the cover against the bottom lip of the base, and rotate it up onto the base as shown
in Figure 27-4 on page 282.
10. Tighten the cover screw.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten the mounting screws. Overtightening the mounting screws can damage the
mounting base and drywall.
Drywall 1-3/8 in. Spacer (2) for

Base (35 mm) 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) and 1/2 in.
Hole (12.7 mm) Thick Drywall
1-3/8 in.
(35 mm)
Hole
Drywall Drywall
Spring
No. 6-20 x 1-1/4 in. Clip (2) Spring
(32 mm) Pan-Head Clip (2)
Tapping Screw (2)
Figure 27-6: Surface Mounting to Drywall
TE-6700 Series Sensors: Section 27 283

Wiring
Keep cable run as short as possible to minimize sensor error. Each 76 m (250 ft) run of 18 AWG wire, or 15 m
(50 ft) of 24 AWG wire, creates 0.56°C (1°F) error for a nickel sensor or 0.83°C (1.5°F) error for a platinum sensor
due to wire resistance. To maintain less than 0.56°C (1°F) error for nickel or 0.83°C (1.5°F) error for platinum, hold
the total resistance of all sensor wiring below 3 ohms. When wiring the TE-6700, do not run low-voltage wiring in
the same conduit as line-voltage wiring or other conductors supplying highly inductive loads.
Terminal Block Wiring (TE-67xT Models)
Make connections pairing the following wires:
1
• sensor (Terminal 1 and Terminal 2)
LED SENSOR / OVR
• setpoint (Terminal 3 and Terminal 4)
• Zone Bus and Common (COM) (Terminals 6 and 7) ZB SENSOR COM
Shielding is not required. If used, follow the system controller’s
recommendations for grounding the shield. 24VAC/ZB COM SET PT COM
Note: The Manual Override PB does not respond when the

24VAC SET PT
DIP switch positions are all down (LED mode NO PB).
4
Figure 27-7: Terminal Wiring
Table 27-1: Terminal Block Wiring
Terminal Signal Designation
1 Temperature Sensor and Manual Override
2 Temperature Sensor Common
3 Setpoint Common and LED Common
4 Setpoint
5 24 VAC (+15 VDC – VMA only)
6 Common (for Power, Zone Bus, or Manual Override)
7 Zone Bus
8 LED and Manual Override
RJ-45 Modular Jack Wiring (TE-67xP Models) Note: Set the appropriate analog
TE-6700
The RJ-45 jack connection is shown in Figure 27-8 on input jumper/switch on the digital
page 284. Make electrical connections to the rear-facing controller to “T” (temperature).
8-pin RJ-45 connector, using eight conductor standard or
plenum-rated telephone cables. Terminals are identified in
Table 27-2 on page 285. Insert the RJ-45 connector with the
proper polarity (not reversed). Misalignment can cause
damage. Refer to the controller documentation to determine
the appropriate cable assembly. O N
1 2 3
IMPORTANT: Do not insert a 6-pin connector or anything 1 8

other than an RJ-45 8-pin connector into the 8-pin jack on
the back of the TE-67xP Temperature Element to prevent
damaging the modular jack.
Back of TE-6700
Setup and Adjustment Figure 27-8: 8-Pin Phone Jack Connection
Controller Configuration Switch
A DIP switch configures the TE-6700 for use with the desired controller by enabling or disabling the manual
override PB and the LED, in appropriate models. Refer to TE-6700 Series 2nd Generation Temperature Elements
Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7701-209) for more information.

Table 27-2: RJ-45 Modular Jack Pin Designations
RJ-45 Jack Signal Designation
Pin Number
1 Heating Setpoint or LED and Manual Override
2 Setpoint (Cooling)
3 Temperature Sensor and Manual Override
4 Temperature Sensor Common
5 24 VAC (+15 VDC – VMA only)
6 Common (for Power, Zone Bus, or Manual Override)
7 Setpoint Common
8 Zone Bus
Table 27-3: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up the TE-6700 Series
Installation Considerations and TE-6700 Series 2nd Generation Part No. 24-7701-209
Guidelines for TE-6700 Series Temperature Elements Installation
Instructions
Features and Benefits of TE-6700 Series 2nd Generation LIT-216331
TE-6700 Series Temperature Elements Product Bulletin
Accessories, Parts, and TE-6700 Series 2nd Generation LIT-1900055
Selection Chart for TE-6700 Temperature Elements Catalog Page
Series
Model Information
Table 27-4: TE6700 Series Sensor Accessories
ACC-DWCLIP-0 Drywall clip mounting kit (10 per bag)
ACC-INSL-01 Foam pad kit for wallbox mounting (10 per package)
ACC-INSL-11 Foam pad kit for surface mounting (10 per package)
GRD10A-608 Plastic guard with baseplate and mounting ring
TE-6700
T-4000-119 Allen-head adjustment tool (30 per bag)
TE-67L-600 Fahrenheit label replacement kit
TE-67MB-600 Mounting base kit
TE-67DO-6012 Door replacement kit with a Johnson Controls logo (10 per box)
TE-67DO-6022 Door replacement kit without a Johnson Controls logo (10 per box)
1. These foam pads prevent drafts from entering the unit through the wall, and make installation easier when mounting on an
uneven surface.
2. Contains 10 original style and 10 new style doors.
TE-6700 Series Sensors: Section 27 285

Table 27-5: TE-6700 Series
Product TE-6700 Series 2nd Generation Temperature Elements
Nickel Sensor Temperature Sensor: 1,000 ohm thin-film nickel
Temperature Coefficient: Approximately 3 ohms per °F (5.4 ohms per °C)
Reference Resistance: 1,000 ohms at 21°C (70°F)
Accuracy: ±0.18C° at 21°C (±0.34F° at 70°F)
Platinum Sensor Temperature Sensor: 1,000 ohm thin-film platinum
Temperature Coefficient: Approximately 2 ohms per °F (3.9 ohms per °C)
Reference Resistance: 1,000 ohms at 0°C (32°F)
Accuracy: ±0.41C° at 21°C (±0.73F° at 70°F)
Temperature Indicator Type: Liquid filled bulb thermometer
Range: 5 to 30°C (40 to 90°F)
Resolution: Fahrenheit scale graduated at 10F° intervals; Celsius scale graduated at 5°C
intervals
Setpoint Range Single Adjustment: Warmer/cooler, red/blue visual scale, or temperature - scaled °F/°C
Dual Adjustment: Heating and cooling, graduated scale 65 to 85°F (19 to 29°C)
Resistance: Nominal 1.5k ohm
Resolution: Fahrenheit scale graduated at 5F° intervals; Celsius scale graduated at 2°C
intervals
Field Connections RJ-45 Jack: 8-pin connector for 8-conductor 24 AWG cable
Terminal Block: Screw type terminals for 18 to 24 AWG wire
Zone Bus Access 6-pin connector with front access for a laptop with HVAC PRO software, a Palm compatible
handheld device with VAV Balancing Tool (VBT) software, or a Zone Terminal (ZT)
Manual Override Integral momentary pushbutton (DIP switch selectable)
LED Display Red LED indicates various modes of operation (Single and No Setpoint models only)
Ambient Operating 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) 0 to 100% RH, noncondensing; 29°C (85°F) maximum dew point
Conditions
Ambient Storage -40 to 71°C (-40 to 160°F) 0 to 100% RH, noncondensing; 29°C (85°F) maximum dew point
Conditions
Mounting Style Includes base and hardware for surface or standard U.S. wallbox mounting
TE-6700
Materials White thermoplastic

Dimensions (H x W x D) 81 x 81 x 36 mm (3.2 x 3.2 x 1.4 in.)

TEC21xx Series Thermostats
Applications
The TEC21xx Series Thermostats are N2 networked devices that provide control of two- or four-pipe fan coils,
cabinet unit heaters, or other equipment using on/off, floating, or proportional 0 to 10 VDC control input, three
speeds of fan control, and dehumidification capability.
Note: Many models of TEC21xx Series thermostats are available. The examples and tables included in this
section apply to the TEC21x6(H)-2 model because its capabilities cover a wide range of other TEC21xx Series
models. Refer to your engineered drawings and specific technical literature for more information on other models.
Also, see Related Documentation on page 301 for references to more information on TEC21xx Series thermostats.
Mounting
Locate the TEC21xx Series thermostat:
• on a partitioning wall, approximately 1.5 m (5 ft)
above the floor in a location of average temperature
• away from direct sunlight, radiant heat, outside
walls, behind doors, air discharge grills, stairwells,
or outside doors
• away from steam or water pipes, warm air stacks,
unconditioned areas (not heated or cooled), or
sources of electrical interference
Note: Allow for vertical air circulation to the
TEC21xx Series thermostat.
Note: If you need to install the thermostat on an
electrical junction box, use 2 1/8 x 4 in. square boxes
with mud ring covers and avoid the smaller 1 1/2 x 4 in.
FIG:cvr_rmvl
square or 3 x 2 in. boxes. This ensures you have
enough space for cabling and end-of-line devices, if
needed.
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the
security screw on the bottom of the thermostat
cover.
TEC21xx
2. Pull the bottom edge of the thermostat cover and
open the thermostat as illustrated in Figure 28-1 on
page 287. PCB
Locking
3. Carefully pull the locking tabs on the right side of
Tabs
the thermostat mounting base and unlock the PCB.
Open the PCB to the left as illustrated in
FIG:prntdcirctbrd
4. Pull approximately 15.2 cm (6 in.) of wire from the

thermostat mounting base.
Figure 28-1: Removing the Thermostat Cover and

Opening the Thermostat PCB
5. Align the thermostat mounting base on the wall and
use the base as a template to mark the two mounting
hole locations.
Note: Do not use plastic or nylon anchors of any type.
7. Position the thermostat mounting base on the wall and
use the two mounting screws to secure the base to the
FIG:mntingbas
surface as illustrated in Figure 28-2 on page 288.
screws.
8. Swing the PCB back to the right and carefully snap it
into the locking tabs on the thermostat mounting base. Figure 28-2: Securing the Thermostat Mounting
Base to the Wall
9. Pull the pull-tabs on each of the connectors and
remove the screw terminal blocks as illustrated in
Wiring
See Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards on page 465 for more information on alternative cable and wire
types, sizes, and lengths for connecting an TEC to the field buses, power supply, and the application control points.
See N2 Communications Bus Guidelines on page 173 for guidelines on wiring a TEC to an N2 Bus.
! Disconnect the power supply before making

! Do not apply power to the system before checking all

wiring connections. Short circuited or improperly
the equipment.
IMPORTANT: Make all wiring connections in accordance with

TEC21xx
local, national, and regional regulations. Do not exceed the

electrical ratings of the TEC21xx Series thermostat.

1. Strip the ends of each wire 6 mm (1/4 in.) and connect them to
the appropriate screw terminals as indicated in Table 28-1 on
FIG:termblck
page 289, and Figure 28-4 on page 290 through Figure 28-8
on page 291.
Note: Terminate the TEC according to Johnson Controls
engineered drawings. Figure 28-3: Removing the Screw
2. Carefully push any excess wire back into the wall. Terminal Blocks
Note: Seal the hole in the wall with fireproof material to
prevent drafts from affecting the ambient temperature readings.
3. Reinsert the screw terminal blocks onto the board and reattach the N2 Bus wires to the terminal block.

Note: If multiple wires are inserted into the terminals, be sure to properly twist the wires together prior to
inserting them into the terminal connectors.
See Figure 28-4 on page 290 to identify and locate the thermostat terminals in Table 28-1 on page 289.
Table 28-1: TEC21xx Series Thermostat Terminal Identification
(On/Off TEC2136(H)-2 TEC2156(H)-2
Control) Control)
1 Fan-H Fan-H Fan-H Fan On – High
2 Fan-M Fan-M Fan-M Fan On – Medium
3 Fan-L Fan-L Fan-L Fan On – Low
4 24 V~ Hot 24 V~ Hot 24 V~ Hot 24 VAC from Transformer
5 24 V~ Com 24 V~ Com 24 V~ Com 24 VAC (Common) from Transformer
8 BO3 BO3 Blank Open Heat
9 Blank BO4 AO2 Close Heat
10 Blank BO1 AO1 Open Cool
11 BO2 BO2 Blank Close Cool
13 RS RS RS Remote Sensor
14 Scom Scom Scom Sensor Common
16 UI3 UI3 UI3 Configurable Universal Input 3
Blank +, –, REF +, –, REF +, –, REF N2 Bus
TEC21xx

Separate 24 VAC
Power Source for Auxiliary Output
Power and Fan (24 VAC Maximum)
Five-Pole
Three-Pole
Left Top Connector
Hot Com BO5 BO5 Right Top
-L -M -H Aux Aux
Fan Fan Fan 24 V~ 24 V~
Connector
-H -M -L Hot Com
BO5 BO5 BO3
Aux + Aux Aux
1 2 3 4 5
– 6 7 8
REF
BO4/ BO1/ BO2 BI1
AO2 AO1
RS Scom BI2 UI3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Independent
Contacts
• Reheat
• Lighting
24 VAC • Exhaust Fan
Thermostat Power
- OR -
Same 24 VAC Remote Inputs Voltage-Free
Power and Fan Power Source for Auxiliary Output Contact
(24 VAC Maximum) • Door
• Remote
BI1 Scom BI2 UI3
Override
Hot Com • Filter Alarm
-L -M -H
BO5 BO5
Aux Aux • Service Alarm
Voltage-Free
Aux Voltage-Free Contact
Contact • COC/NH
• Remote NSB - OR - Normally Heat
• Motion Closed Contact
• Window = Cold Water
• COC/NC
Normally Cool
Supply Sensor Closed Contact
Changeover Sensor = Hot Water
+ – REF
24 VAC
TEC21xx
Thermostat Power FIG:wrng

Supervisory
Controller
Figure 28-4: Wiring the TEC21x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat (See Table 28-1 on page 289.)

BO2 24 V~ 24 V~ BO3 24 V~ 24 V~
Hot Com N.C. Hot Com
Cooling
Valve
FIG:tec2116(h)_2onoff
N.O.
Heating
Valve
Figure 28-5: Wiring TEC2116(H)-2 Thermostats for On/Off Control
or or 24 V~ 24 V~
or 24 V~ 24 V~ Hot Com
Hot Com Cooling
Valve
Heating
Valve
Figure 28-6: Wiring TEC2126(H)-2 and TEC2136(H)-2 Thermostats for On/Off Control
BO1 24 V~ 24 V~ 24 V~ 24 V~
BO2 Com BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4
Hot Hot Com
Cooling
Valve
FIG:TEC2126(H)-2floating
Heating/Cooling
Valve
Heating
TEC21xx
Valve
Figure 28-7: Wiring TEC2126(H)-2 and TEC2136(H)-2 Thermostats for Floating Control
24 V~ 24 V~
AO1 24 V~ 24 V~ AO1 AO2 Hot Com
Hot Com
Cooling
Valve
FIG:TEC2146(H)-2prop
Heating/Cooling Heating
Valve Valve
Figure 28-8: Wiring TEC2146(H)-2 and TEC2156(H)-2 Thermostats for Proportional Control

Connecting the TEC21xx to the N2 Bus
To connect the N2 Bus:
1. Set the N2 address of the TEC21x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat per the engineering drawings and test for bus
voltage, polarity, and isolation prior to wiring the N2 Bus. (See the Com addr parameter in Table 28-4 on
page 296 to set the N2 address for the thermostat.)
Note: To display the currently assigned N2 Bus address, press and hold the UP/DOWN arrow keys
simultaneously.
2. Observe the polarity when connecting the N2 Bus wires to the thermostat.
3. After the N2 Bus wires are connected to the first thermostat, continue in a daisy-chained fashion to the next
thermostat.
For more N2 Bus overview information, see N2 Communications Bus Guidelines on page 173 or refer to the N2
Communications Bus Technical Bulletin (LIT-636018) and the ASC and N2 Bus Networking and Troubleshooting
Guide (LIT-6363003).
The N2 Bus device address for the TEC is configured using the TEC configuration menus. There are no address
DIP switches to set. See Configuring the TEC21xx Series Thermostat on page 293 for more information.
Note: The TEC thermostat does not provide EOL termination. If the TEC terminates a bus segment on the N2 Bus
TEC21xx Series Thermostat Operation Overview
User Interface Keys
The TEC21x6(H)-2 Series thermostat user interface
consists of five keys on the front cover (as illustrated in
Figure 28-9 on page 292). The function of each key is as
follows:
• MODE key toggles among the system modes
available, as defined by selecting the appropriate
operation sequence in the Installer Configuration
Menu (for example, Off, Heat, Cool, Auto).
• FAN key toggles among the fan modes available, as
defined by selecting the appropriate fan menu
options defined in the Installer Configuration Menu
(for example, Low, Med, High, Auto).
Room Temp
TEC21xx
• OVERRIDE key (commercial models) overrides the 70.0ºF

unoccupied mode to occupied at the local user
interface for the specified TOccTime. (TOccTime is
defined by selecting the appropriate time period in
MODE FAN
FIG:frnt_vw
the Installer Configuration Menu.) The OVERRIDE

key also allows access to the Installer Configuration
Menu. See Configuring the TEC21xx Series
Thermostat on page 293.
Note: If one of the binary inputs is configured to Figure 28-9: Example of the Front Cover of a
operate as a remote override contact, this TEC21xx Series Thermostat
OVERRIDE key is disabled.
• °C/°F key (on hospitality models only and not shown in Figure 28-9 on page 292) changes the temperature
scale to either Celsius or Fahrenheit and allows access to the Installer Configuration Menu.
Note: For hospitality models, binary inputs can override from the unoccupied mode to occupied mode.

Backlit LCD
The TEC21xx Series thermostats include a 2-line, 8-character backlit display. Low-level backlighting is present
Cover LEDs
Three LEDs are included to indicate the fan status, call for heat, or call for cooling:
Status Display Menu
The Status Display Menu is displayed during normal thermostat operation. This menu continuously scrolls through
the following parameters:
• Room Temperature (All Models) and Humidity (TEC2136-2, TEC2136H-2, TEC2156-2, and TEC2156H-2
Models)
• System Mode
• Schedule Status – Occupied/Unoccupied/Override
Dehumidification Operation – TEC2136(H)-2 and TEC2156(H)-2 Thermostat Models
Upon detection of room humidity above the adjustable humidity setpoint as sensed by the integral humidity sensor,
dehumidification activates.
Note: Dehumidification operation functions only in the Cooling mode; dehumidification operation does not function
in either the Off or the Heating mode.
Note: A central network command can globally lock out dehumidification operation to all thermostats.
If the room temperature resides in the deadband between the Heating and Cooling setpoint:
• the thermostat forces the fan to low speed
• the chilled water valve opens to the specified maximum value set by CoolMax
thermostat
If the room temperature falls below the current Heating setpoint, the thermostat disables dehumidification
TEC21xx
operation.
If the thermostat is in Cooling demand:
• the chilled water valve opens to 100%
thermostat
If the thermostat is in Cooling demand and the room temperature rises 2F°/1C° above the Cooling setpoint, the
thermostat automatically disables dehumidification operation. Likewise, if the thermostat is in Cooling demand and
the room temperature falls below the current Heating setpoint, the thermostat disables dehumidification operation.
Configuring the TEC21xx Series Thermostat
The TEC21xx Series thermostat comes from the factory with default settings for all configurable parameters. The
default settings are shown in Table 28-4 on page 296. To reconfigure the parameters via the thermostat, follow
these steps:
1. Press and hold the center key for approximately 8 seconds to access the Installer Configuration Menu.
2. Release and press the center key to scroll through the parameters listed in Table 28-4 on page 296 until you
reach the desired parameter.

3. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose the desired selection option.
4. Press and release the center key to continue scrolling through the parameters.
Note: Pressing the FAN key during configuration restarts the list of displayed parameters at the first parameter
listed in Table 28-4 on page 296.
Configuring Inputs BI1, BI2, and UI3
The UI3 input provides changeover of hot/cold water switching, or supply air temperature monitoring at the
thermostat.
Choose the appropriate sequence of operation. The modes presented are user-dependent on the sequence of
operation selected. For two-pipe applications using a changeover sensor, choose the selection option
(0): Cooling only. Changeover occurs between Cooling only and Heating only.
Note: See Table 28-1 on page 289 and Figure 28-4 on page 290 for descriptions and locations of the terminals
called out in Table 28-2 on page 294 and Table 28-3 on page 295.
Table 28-2: Selection Options for Sequence of Operation in Two-Pipe Applications
Control
TEC21xx

Control
(4): Heating/Cooling, Four- 8: N.O. Heating 8: Open Heating 9: Proportional Heating
Pipe 9: N.C. Heating 9: Closed Heating 10: Proportional Cooling
(5): Heating/Cooling with 6 and 7: Reheat 6 and 7: Reheat 6 and 7: Reheat
Reheat, Four-Pipe 8: N.O. Heating 8: Open Heating 9: Proportional Heating
9: N.C. Heating 9: Closed Heating 10: Proportional Cooling
Configuring the Fan Menu

When selection option (0): Low-Med-High is chosen in the Fan Menu parameter, the fan operates as shown in
Figure 28-10 on page 295. When selection option (1): Low-High is chosen in the Fan Menu parameter, the fan
operates at only the low and high settings and ignores the medium setting.
High Heating Cooling

On Setpoint Setpoint On
Fan
Speed
Off Off
Medium
On On
Off Off
Low
TEC21xx
100% 2.0F°/1.0C° to
5.0F°/2.5C°
Deadband
Heating
Cooling
Valve
Valve
FIG::fn_oprtn
0%
2.5 2.0 1.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 2.0 2.5
Figure 28-10: Two-Speed and Three-Speed Fan Operation

Note: There are many models of BACnet TEC controllers. Table 28-4 on page 296 below focuses on the
TEC21x6(H)-2 because its capabilities cover a wide range of other TEC models. Refer to the specific technical
literature for more information on other models.
Table 28-4: Installer Configuration Menu (Part 1 of 5)
Appearing
on Display
Com addr N2 address at the thermostat; Range: 0 to 254
coincides with the address assigned
at the supervisory controller.
Default: 4
contact closed = Unoccupied
a window is open. The fan operation is not affected. A Window
alarm is displayed indicating that the window needs to be closed to
resume heating or cooling.
** When this setting is selected, the outputs are enabled only when
the contact is closed.
Default: None (Door Dry): Door contact only has an effect if BI1 is set to
MotionNO or MotionNC. (See the BI1 parameter earlier in this
table.) The occupancy is now dictated via BI1 and BI2. Any motion
detected sets the zone to Occupied status. The thermostat remains
in the occupied mode until a DoorOpen is detected, at which point
the thermostat goes to the unoccupied mode. If the door stays open
TEC21xx

input is energized. This input can be tied into the air conditioning
unit control card, which provides an alarm should there be a
malfunction.

Appearing
on Display
UI3 Configuration of Universal Input 3. (None): No function is associated with an input.
Default: None (COC/NH): Changeover Contact/Normally Heat: A dry contact input
closes when cold water is present. Valid only for two-pipe systems.
(COC/NC): Changeover Contact/Normally Cool: A dry contact input
closes when hot water is present. Valid only for two-pipe systems.
(COS): Changeover Analog Sensor: Used for hot/cold water
changeover switching. Valid only for two-pipe systems.
Note: Choose the selection option (0): Cooling only for the
SeqOpera parameter to allow changeover to occur between
Cooling only and Heating only. The changeover sensor does not
operate in Cooling with reheat, Heating with reheat, or Cooling/
Heating with reheat applications.
(SS): Supply Air Sensor Monitoring
MenuScro Gives the option of having the (off): The scroll is inactive.
display continuously scroll the (on): The scroll is active.
parameters.
Default: on
AutoMode Enables the Auto function (if (on): The Auto function is active (Off-Auto-Heat-Cool). Provides
Option 2 is chosen in the SeqOpera automatic changeover between heating and cooling.
parameter) to be visible within the (off): The auto function is inactive (Off-Heat-Cool).
MODE key menu. (The MODE key
is the key at the far left of the
thermostat cover.)
Default: off
Default: °F
%RH disp Displays the current humidity (on): Displays the current humidity reading in % RH.
reading (TEC2136-2, TEC2136H-2, (off): Does not display the current humidity reading.
models).
Default: off
Lockout Selectable Lockout Levels for Lockout Function
limiting end user keypad interaction. Level Mode Fan Local Occupied
Default: 0 Setting Setting Override Temperature
TEC21xx
Setpoints
(0) Access Access Access Access
(1) Access Access No Access Access
(2) No Access No Access Access Access
(3) No Access No Access No Access Access
(4) No Access No Access Access No Access
(5) No Access No Access No Access No Access
Pipe No Selectable number of pipes in the (2.0 Pipes): Limits the number of sequences of operation available
system. from 0 to 3, and enables heat/cool operation from the same output.
Default: 4.0 Pipes (4.0 Pipes): Allows access to all sequences of operation from 0 to 5,
and enables heat/cool operation from different outputs.
CntrlTyp Defines the control output for the (On/Off): For Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally Closed (N.C.)
type of valves used in the 24 VAC two-position valves.
installation (TEC2126-2, (Floating): For proportional three-wire control of 24 VAC floating
TEC2126H-2, TEC2136-2, and valves.
TEC2136H-2 models).
Default: Floating

Appearing
on Display
SeqOpera Determines the sequence of (0): Cooling (Off-Cool). The default is Cool.
operation. (1): Heating (Off-Heat). The default is Heat.
Default: 1 (2): Cooling with Reheat (Off-Auto*-Heat-Cool). The default is Heat.
(3): Heating with Reheat (Off-Heat). The default is Heat.
(4): Heating/Cooling, Four-Pipe (Off-Auto*-Heat-Cool). The default
is Heat.
(5): Heating/Cooling with Reheat, Four-Pipe (Off-Auto*-Heat-Cool).
The default is Heat.
* Auto can be disabled with the AutoMode parameter.
Note: Choose the selection option (0): Cooling only when using a
changeover sensor to allow changeover to occur between Cooling
only and Heating only.
Fan Menu Sets the Fan Mode options. (0): Low-Med-High: Three-speed configuration using three fan
Default: 4 relays (L-M-H). The default is High.
(1): Low-High: Two-speed configuration using two fan relays (L-H).
The default is High.
(2): Low-Med-High-Auto: Three-speed configuration with Auto Fan
speed mode using two fan relays (L-H). The default is High.
(3): Low-High-Auto: Two-speed configuration with Auto Fan speed
mode using two fan relays (L-H). The default is High.
(4): On-Auto: One-speed configuration, (H) Auto is for Fan on
demand and On is for Fan on all the time. The default is Auto.
DHumiLCK Locks out the dehumidification (off): Dehumidification is locked out.
capability (TEC2136-2, (on): Dehumidification is allowed.
TEC2136H-2, TEC2156-2, and
TEC2156H-2 models).
Default: on
%RH set1 Sets the dehumidification setpoints Range: 30.0 to 95.0% RH
(TEC2136-2, TEC2136H-2,
Default: 50.0% RH
DehuHyst1 Sets the dehumidification hysteresis Range: 2.0 to 20.0% RH
(TEC2136-2, TEC2136H-2,
TEC21xx

Default: 5.0% RH
DehuCool1 Sets the maximum dehumidification Range: 20.0 to 100.0%
cooling output (TEC2136-2, Note: This parameter can be used to balance smaller reheat loads
TEC2136H-2, TEC2156-2, and installed with regard to the capacity of the cooling coil.
TEC2156H-2 models). This
parameter can be used only if the
dehumidification sequence is
enabled.
Default: 100%

Appearing
on Display
Unocc CL Sets the Unoccupied Cooling Range: 54.0°F/12.0°C to
0.5F°/0.5C° increments;
setpoint value. 100.0°F/37.5°C
press and hold the
changing the heating or cooling temporary, and remain effective for the specified TOccTime.
Default: permnent
mode)
setpoint
Default: 2.0 hrs
the time specified.
Default: 2.0 min
setpoints.
TEC21xx
Cal RH Sets the desired humidity sensor Range: -15.0% RH to 15.0% RH (adjustable in 1% RH increments)
calibration (offset). The offset can
actual displayed room humidity
(TEC2136-2, TEC2136H-2,
Default: 0.0% RH

Appearing
on Display
Aux cont Determines the auxiliary contact (0) Not used, If the sequence of operation is set to
function and configuration. or used for reheat (2, 3, or 5), ignore this parameter.
Default: 0 reheat
(1) Auxiliary Occupied = contact The output
N.O. closed aligns with
Unoccupied = contact occupancy.
open
(2) Auxiliary Occupied = contact open
N.C. Unoccupied = contact
closed
(3) Auxiliary Occupied and fan On = The output
N.O. contact closed aligns with
Unoccupied and fan On occupancy
or Off = contact open and the
fan on
(4) Auxiliary Occupied and fan On =
command.
N.C. contact open
Unoccupied and fan On
or Off = contact closed
(5) This selection option is not used.
FL time Sets the maximum actuator stroke Range: 0.5 to 9.0 min (adjustable in 0.5 minute increments)
timing (floating CntrlTyp
TEC2126-2, TEC2126H-2,
models).
Default: 1.5 min
Cph Sets the maximum number of cycles Range: 3 to 8 cycles per hour
per hour (TEC2116-2, TEC2116H-2,
and on/off CntrlTyp TEC2126-2,
TEC2126H-2, TEC2136-2, and
TEC2136H-2 models).
Default: 4
RA/DA Choice of reverse or direct acting (RA): Reverse acting, 0 to 100% = 10 to 0 VDC
analog output signal (TEC2146-2, (DA): Direct acting, 0 to 100% = 0 to 10 VDC
TEC2146H-2, TEC2156-2, and
TEC2156H-2 models).
Default: DA
TEC21xx
Reheat Sets the duty cycle time for reheat (1): 10 seconds (six cycles per minute), for various equipment with
mechanical relays or contactors controlling mechanical reheat
systems.
UI3 dis Displays the supply or changeover Used as a diagnostic/service help, to troubleshoot and diagnose
temperature when UI3 is configured sensor operation.
as an analog input (supply sensor or
changeover sensor).

Table 28-5: Documents Related to Setup, Installation, and Wiring TEC21xx Series Thermostats
Design and Installation of N2 N2 Communications Bus Technical LIT-636018
Communication Buses Bulletin
Features, Benefits, Configuration, TEC2100 Series Networked LIT-1201660
and Ordering Information for Thermostats Product Bulletin
TEC2100 Series Thermostat
Installation and Specification of TEC2145-2 N2 Networked Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-196
TEC2145-2 Series Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and
One-Speed Fan Control Installation
Instructions
Installation and Specification of TEC21x6(H)-2 Series N2 Networked Part No. 24-9890-218
TEC21x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat Thermostat with Two Outputs and
Three Speeds of Fan Control
Installation and Specification of TEC26x7-2 Series N2 Networked Part No. 24-9890-293
TEC21x7-2 Series Thermostat Thermostat with Two Outputs
Model Information
Table 28-6: MS-TEC21xx Models
Product Code Control Outputs Fan Control Application
TEC2116-2 Two On/Off Three Speeds Commercial Market
TEC2116H-2 Two On/Off Three Speeds Hospitality Market
TEC2126-2 Two On/Off or Floating Three Speeds Commercial Market
TEC2126H-2 Two On/Off or Floating Three Speeds Hospitality Market
TEC2136-2 Two On/Off or Floating Three Speeds Commercial Market
TEC2136H-2 Two On/Off or Floating Three Speeds Hospitality Market
TEC2146-2 Two Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Three Speeds Commercial Market
TEC2146H Two Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Three Speeds Hospitality Market
TEC2156-2 Two Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Three Speeds Commercial Market
TEC2156H Two Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Three Speeds Hospitality Market
Accessories
representative to order any of these parts. Review the technical specifications of the accessories prior to their use
TEC21xx
in an application.
TE-636S-11 Strap-On Temperature Sensor

TEC21x6(H)-2 Series N2 Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability,
and Three Speeds of Fan Control
Power Requirements 19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 VA (Terminals 4 and 5) at 24 VAC Nominal, Class 2 or SELV
Relay/Triac On/Off and 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush, Class 2 or SELV
Contact Floating
Rating Control
Analog Proportional 0 to 10 VDC into 2k ohm Resistance (Minimum)
Output Rating Control
Fan Relay Output Rating 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush
Auxiliary Triac Output 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush
Output Rating
Digital Inputs Voltage-Free Contacts across Terminal Scom to Terminals BI1, BI2, or UI3
Temperature Backlit -40.0°F/-40.0°C to 122.0°F/50.0°C in 0.5° Increments
Range Display
Heating 40.0°F/4.5°C to 90.0°F/32.0°C
Control
Cooling 54.0°F/12.0°C to 100.0°F/38.0°C
Control
Accuracy Temperature ±0.9F°/±0.5C° at 70.0°F/21.0°C Typical Calibrated
Humidity ±5% RH from 20 to 80% RH at 50 to 90°F (10 to 32°C)
Minimum Deadband 2F°/1C° between Heating and Cooling
Conditions
TEC21xx
New Zealand

LonWorks
BUS
LONWORKS Network Communications Bus Guidelines 305
LN ASC
LN Series Application Specific Controllers 311
LN FPC
LN Series Free Programmable Controllers 321
VAV/VVT
LN
LN Series VAV/VVT Profile Application Controllers 335

Code No. LIT-410030
Cable Legend
Ethernet Switch
Ethernet
Computer
FTT-10
Note: This drawing shows an

FTT-10 network with LONWORKS
over IP.
NAE
Up to 64 nodes*
EOL EOL
i.Lon 600 LN Series VAV

(Router) LN Series RTU LN Series FCU LN Series UV LN Series
LN Series LN Series
Heat Pump
Scheduler Display
NAE Up to 64 nodes* Up to 64 nodes*
EOL EOL
Figure 29-1: LONWORKS Communications Bus Detail

s_B
LONWORKS Network Communications Bus Guidelines
:L
GI F NO
i.Lon 600
DX-9200 LN Series LN Series
(Router)
13 Point 8 Point
LN Series
* Depends on NAE LON LN Series 16 Controller
LN Series 16 Point
model; NAEs, routers, 24 Point Repeater Point w/ HOA Controller
Flexible NXE-REP-FTT
and repeaters count Controller
System
as nodes.

Controller
305
LONWORKS
BUS
LONWORKS
BUS
LONWORKS Network Bus Overview

The LONWORKS Network Communications Bus is based on a peer-to-peer communications network technology
developed by Echelon Corporation to provide an industry-standard local operating network. The network operates
at 78k baud over standard, twisted-pair wiring. The network is built around the Neuron chip, a microprocessor
which is an integral component of any LONWORKS compatible device.
The protocol types for LONWORKS systems currently supported by Johnson Controls are TP-1250, FTT-10, and
LONWORKS over IP. This document describes FTT-10 with LONWORKS over IP. Other LONWORKS protocols exist,
such as FT3120/FT3150 and TP-RS485. If you need information on these other protocols, refer to the pertinent
user guides, which can be downloaded from Echelon’s Web site at www.echelon.com.
LONWORKS Network Layout
The LONWORKS network is a free topology network, and devices can be connected to the network in a variety of
geometric configurations. For example, the devices can be daisy-chained from one device to the next
(bus topology) or connected with stub cables branching off from a main cable in a tree or star arrangement
(free topology). Or, a combination of these configurations can be mixed on the same network. Figure 29-1 on
page 305 shows a typical LONWORKS Network Bus topology.
Johnson Controls recommends installing systems using only the daisy-chained bus topology method. Free
topology networks shorten the distance of the bus, and can create situations where troubleshooting is more difficult
and end-of-line terminator placement is more difficult to determine. For more information on free topology, refer to
Johnson Controls technical literature or download information from Echelon’s website (www.echelon.com).
LONWORKS Network Components
Node
A node is any device containing a Neuron chip that communicates over the LONWORKS network. Examples of
nodes are controllers, network interfaces, and routers.
Router
A router is an active LONWORKS compatible device that physically connects two LONWORKS network segments. A
router can receive a message from one network segment, and make a decision as to whether the message needs
to be transmitted on the next segment.
Repeater
A repeater is a hardware device that connects two network segments. The repeater is used to extend the length of
the segment and/or allow more devices to be connected to it. Unlike a router, a repeater has no intelligence, so it
cannot selectively forward messages to reduce traffic in a segment and increase network capacity; in other words,
it forwards all messages.
Network Segment
A network segment is a physical segment of communications media, such as twisted-pair cable, that interconnects
LONWORKS compatible devices. Segments are interconnected by LONWORKS compatible routers or repeaters.

LONWORKS
BUS
Terminator
A terminator (end-of-line) is a resistor that typically sits at the Daisy-chained Bus Topology
physical ends of the network and acts as a damper, preventing
unwanted reflections of signals at the end of the wire. The type,
placement, and number of terminators required depends on the
topology of the network segment.
Network Topology Stub-wired Bus Topology
Figure 29-2 on page 307 shows the two basic types of bus
topology that can be used for LONWORKS network segments. The
daisy-chained bus topology is preferred. Other configurations,
including stub-wired, star, or loop, are acceptable only in rare
cases. If used, these configurations reduce the maximum distance
and number of nodes supported by two-thirds. With any topology, Legend:
the end of each segment is terminated with a 105 ohm 1% resistor LONWORKS Compatible Device
as an end-of-line terminator. (Including NCM350/361)
FIG:Bs_Tp
Bus EOL Terminator
Figure 29-2: Bus Topology Net Layouts
Table 29-1: LONWORKS Communications Bus Rules

Category Rules/Maximums Allowed
General Bus or free topology (bus topology recommended)
Number of Devices 64 electrical drops (nodes) per bus segment
Cable Length Dependent on cable type - see Installation Specifications on page 310
Cable Type Recommended - 22 AWG 2 conductor unshielded twisted pair (see
Installation Specifications on page 310)
EOL Termination 105 ohm resistor, 1% tolerance, 1/4 watt. Part number NXM-TERM-FTT
Cable Type and Segment Length

The LONWORKS network requires twisted-pair cable with two wires. See Metasys System Cable and Wire
Standards on page 465 for recommended cables. The maximum length of a channel segment depends on the
topology of the segment (bus or free), the type of cable used (cable size and quality), and the types of devices
connected to the segment. The tables in this section list the maximum Network segment lengths (i.e., total lengths
of continuous wiring between repeaters or routers).
Note: The maximum lengths presented in the specification table are absolute maximum values. Other factors that
affect network performance and reliability, such as noisy Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) environments or a
large distance between two individual devices on a free topology segment, may limit a segment to fewer devices or
shorter overall cable length. For the bus topology, the maximum length for a single stub cable is 3 m (10 ft), and the
stub lengths must be calculated into the overall segment length.
Number of Nodes per Network Segment
The maximum number of electrical drops (nodes/repeaters) allowed per network segment is 64. Note that
connections to routers or repeaters count as a node.
Installation Guidelines
When installing LONWORKS network wiring throughout a building, be aware of the following:
• Follow all NEC and local code restrictions.
• Do not exceed the maximum device limits given in this document.
• Do not run network cables close to transformers or high frequency generating equipment. We recommend the
use of a daisy-chained bus topology because it offers the maximum cable length, easier documenting,
troubleshooting and the lowest risk of communication errors.
• Run network and other low voltage cables separately from line voltage and power cables.
LONWORKS Network Communications Bus Guidelines: Section 29 307

LONWORKS
BUS
• For FTT-10 Bus wiring, the recommended cable is 22 AWG (1.5 mm2 or 0.6 mm diameter) cable. Do not use
wire of a thinner gauge because it breaks easily and reduces the performance of the network.
• Use the same cable type throughout the installation of any network segment.
• If shielded cable is used, install a 470k ohm,
1/4W, ±10% metal-film resistor between the Shielded Cable:
shield and ground at one location only Connect shields together Ground shield at
(Figure 29-3 on page 308). Make the connection and insulate with tape. only one point.
to ground within the first two inches of entering
the enclosure. Do not connect the shield to the
device’s ground (GND) terminal. At all other
locations, tie the shields together to maintain a
continuous run and isolate from ground by
taping back the shield. 470K ohm
Resistor
Wiring LONWORKS Network Buses and
Devices Daisy Chain Wiring:
Each device can be wired to the network using stub
length or daisy-chain wiring, or you can mix both
types of wiring. Where cable runs permit, daisy-
chain wiring is the preferred method. See
Figure 29-3 on page 308. Plug-on Screw
Terminal
Notes: Stub lengths can be up to 3 m (10 ft) long,
but shorter lengths are preferred. Note that stub
lengths must be calculated into the overall maximum
cable length allowed for the chosen network Stub Length Wiring:
topology (see Cable Type and Segment Length on To Next Device
page 307). LONWORKS Network
1. If you are wiring stub lengths, cut a short length
of cable (about 15 cm [6 in.] long is
recommended) from the same type of twisted-
pair cable as used for the network wiring. Stub lengths
no longer than
2. If required, remove the plug-on screw terminal 3 meters. The LONWORKS twisted pair network
labeled Network from the LONWORKS device. is not sensitive to polarity; however,
it is recommended to maintain same
3. Connect wires to the plug-on screw terminal. polarity between similar devices.
There are no + or - terminals because the
twisted-pair network is not polarity sensitive.
FIG:LON_wrng
(However, we recommend that you maintain the Plug-on Screw
same polarity between devices.) Terminal
4. If shielded cable is used for the network wiring,
connect the shields together and insulate with Figure 29-3: Wiring the LONWORKS Network
tape (Figure 29-3 on page 308).
5. Reconnect the plug-on screw terminal to the LONWORKS card or LONWORKS device.
6. Determine where, and how many, separate terminators are required on the network segment, according to the
segment’s topology.

LONWORKS
BUS
7. A bus-topology segment must be terminated at both ends of the bus Use of EOL Terminator
using bus-type 105 ohm terminators (Figure 29-4 on page 309).
LONWORKS Network Device Addresses
A LONWORKS device address is hard coded as a Neuron ID. The
address is a hardware address and, therefore, the ID changes if a piece
NXM-TERM-FTT
of hardware is removed and replaced. Understand that the Neuron ID is
FIG:LON_eol_trm
unique for each and every device (node) on the network.
Most LONWORKS devices are provided with two removable stickers with
the Neuron ID printed on them. Remove one sticker and place it on a
Room Schedule or floor plan identifying the system where the
LONWORKS device is installed. This number can then be typed in Bus-type EOL Terminator
manually during software configuration, which saves you another trip to (one at each end of bus)
the device to capture the neuron ID. Figure 29-4: EOL Terminator
Design, Installation, Commissioning, and LONWORKS Network Layout Technical Bulletin LIT-1162150
Troubleshooting of LONWORKS Networks
Specifications and Installation of the LN Metasys System LN Series Sensors Installation LIT-1201871
Series Sensors Instructions
Specifications and Installation of the LN Metasys System LN Series Free Programmable LIT-1201854
Series Free Programmable Controllers Controllers Installation Instructions
Specifications and Installation of the LN Metasys System LN Series Application Specific LIT-1201916
Series Application Specific Controllers Controllers Installation Instructions
Specifications and Installation of the LN Metasys System LN Series VAV and VVT LIT-1201878
Series VAV and VVT Controllers Controllers Installation Instructions
Connecting LN Series Controllers to the LONWORKS Network Integration with NAE LIT-1201668
Metasys System Technical Bulletin
Installing LN-Builder 3 Software LN-Builder 3 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10299-8
Using LN-Builder 3 Software LN-Builder 3 Technical Bulletin LIT-12011250
LONWORKS Network Communications Bus Guidelines: Section 29 309

LONWORKS
BUS
Table 29-3: LONWORKS Communications Bus (FTT-10 Protocol)
Address of Devices Hard coded as a Neuron ID.
LONWORKS Protocol Echelon Free Topology (FFT-10)
Signaling Method LONWORKS
Signaling Rate 78,000 bps
Transmission Media1 Belden 8442 - 22 AWG Stranded, Single twisted pair, PVC Jacket,
Unshielded
Belden 82442 - 22 AWG Stranded, Single twisted pair, Plenum Rated,
Unshielded
Shield Grounding Not Required
Physical Configuration Daisy-chained Bus Topology Preferred
Bus Length using Bus Topology Belden 8442 - 1,100m (3,600 feet) Recommended for EMT Installations
Belden 82442 - 1,100m (3,600 feet) Recommended for Plenum
Installations
Preferred Network Cable Supplier Anixter
4420 N. Harley Davidson Ave., Suite B
Wauwatosa, WI 53225
1-800-447-8565
414-755-6120 (main)
414-755-6121 (fax)
1. See Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards on page 465 for more information. For other cable sizes, refer to the
DX-9100 LONWORKS Systems Manual (LIT-1162250) or the Echelon Corporation Web site.

LN Series Application Specific Controllers
LN ASC
Application
The Metasys system LN Series application specific controllers are microprocessor-based controllers designed to
control almost any fan coil, rooftop, unit ventilator, or heat pump application. The controllers use the LONWORKS
communication protocol and are LONMARK certified using the fan coil, rooftop, unit ventilator, or heat pump profile.
This document describes the installation for the following controllers: LN-RTUL-0, LN-UVL-0, LN-FCUL-0, and
LN-HPUL-0.
Dimensions
Figure 30-1 on page 311 shows the dimensions of the Metasys system LN Series application specific controller.
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DO1 C DO2 C DO3 C DO4 C DO5 C AO1 - AO2
O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7
127 mm (5 in.)
24V AC/DC
SERVICE
COM
NETWORK
I1+ - I2+ I3+ - I4+ I5+ - I6+
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
25.4 mm
(1 in.) 114.3 mm (4.5 in.)
33.3 mm
165.1 mm (6.5 in.) (1.32 in.)
Figure 30-1: Metasys System LN Series Application Specific Controller Dimensions
Application Requirements
The Application Specific Controllers require:
• relative humidity of 0 to 90% (noncondensing) and an ambient operating temperature of 0 to 70°C (32 to
158°F)
• 24 VAC power, an external fuse, and a Class 2 transformer.
The board contains a 1.35 ampere auto-reset fuse.
Output plug-in connectors are on the top edge of the board. Power, input, network plug-in connectors and the
service button are on the bottom edge. We recommend mounting the controller vertically with the ventilation holes
on the higher end.
Mounting
Mounting holes in the controller measure 7.9 mm (5/16 in.).
Wiring
Planning and Selecting Cables
LN ASC
• Plan the placement of cables used for inputs, outputs, communication, and power.
• Place input, output, power, and network cable to avoid the effects of ambient noise.
• Separate analog type cables for power, communication, inputs, and outputs from other types of cables.
Connectors
The board connectors accept wires or flat cables: 22-12 AWG (0.14-2.5 mm²) per pole.
Connecting Power
To calculate the required transformer power:
24V AC/DC
• Add the power requirements of all the controllers and
COM
peripheral devices.
• Add the largest starting power of the group.
• Multiply this value by 1.3.
This value is the required transformer power.
Figure 30-2 on page 312 shows wiring connections to the power
source and fuse. The external fuse protects the outputs and all
AC
other equipment that is powered using the same transformer.
Note: Maintain consistent polarity when connecting controllers Fuse Transformer
and devices to the transformer. Connect the ground (COM) of each XVAC / 24VAC
controller and each peripheral to the same side of the transformer.
To other
The controllers have a half wave power supply. Connecting two equipment
half wave power supplies to the same transformer without
maintaining polarity causes a short circuit. The controller can use Figure 30-2: Power Connection and Fuses
24 VAC +/- 15% or 24 VDC.
Wiring the Inputs (I1-I6)
All inputs are configured by software. Hardware configuration of the
inputs is not required.
In Figure 30-3 on page 312, the potentiometer input is configured
in software as a resistance type. The other two inputs are
configured in software as the same type of input (resistance type),
thermistor, or digital input. I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
+ – + + – + + – +
180
Thermistor
10 kOhm 10kOhm
Potentiometer
Contact
NO - NC
Potentiometer Thermistor or
Input Digital Input
Figure 30-3: Potentiometer, Digital, and
Thermistor Inputs

Figure 30-4 on page 313 shows a 4-20 mA current input. The
current source is independent of the controller. The controller
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
does not supply current for the input.
LN ASC
+ – + + – + + – +
Figure 30-4 on page 313 shows a 0-10 VDC analog input. 180
The AC to DC power supply should be half wave rectified.

Wiring the Digital Outputs
Resistor: 500 Ω − ¼ Watt
The controllers have five digital outputs. These outputs are
4 – 20 mA
cold contacts, which means that there is no voltage present –
24 VDC
on the output terminals. An external power supply is required. +
See Figure 30-4 on page 313.
These outputs can switch 1.0 ampere at 24 VAC and can be 4-20 mA Sensor
+ –
used for PWM, control of valve or damper movement by
stroke time, or simple two-state outputs. 4 to 20 mA Current Input
Note: You must have a load on the output to verify the
TRIAC open and close action. It is not a dry contact closure
used in a mechanical relay.
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
+ – + + – + + – +
180
0 – 10VDC Controller V+
Sensor
– +
0 to 10 VDC Analog Input
Relay
A1 A2
Power Supply
COM
Fuse
24 VAC
081
DO1 C DO2 C DO3 C DO4 C DO5 C AO1 – AO2
Digital Output (for example Contactor, Valves)

with External Power Source
Figure 30-4: Input Wiring
LN Series Application Specific Controllers: Section 30 313

Wiring Analog Outputs
The two analog outputs are tri-mode outputs. The
Controller Common
LN ASC
following modes are available:

• Analog outputs providing a linear signal ranging
from 0 to 10 VDC. See Figure 30-5 on page 314. 0 – 10 VDC
• Pwm outputs for pwm applications. These
provide discrete signals at 0 or 12 VDC.
• Digital outputs for driving relays or solid state
relays. These provide discrete signals at 0 or
12 VDC. See Figure 30-6 on page 314.
08 1
DO1 C DO2 C DO3 C DO4 C DO5 C AO1 – AO2
Figure 30-5: 0 to 10 VDC Analog Output

.
Table 30-1: Analog Output Characteristics
Characteristic Description
Voltage 0 to 10 VDC when configured as an analog output
0 or 12 VDC when configured as a digital output
0 or 12 VDC when configured as a pwm output
Maximum Current 60 mA at 12 VDC (configured as a digital output or pwm output) (200 ohm max load)
50 mA at 10 VDC (configured as an analog output)
Protection Auto-reset fuse with the following ratings:
• 100 mA at 68°F (20°C)
• 60 mA at 140°F (60°C)
Network Wiring
The recommended wire type for LONWORKS
communications is 22 AWG, unshielded, with six
+
twists per foot. There is no polarity to be considered Connect a diode to 12VDC Relay
when connecting to a LONWORKS network. For more the relay terminal. K Max load
detailed information, refer to the Junction Box and (Ir = 1A @ Vr=25V) 200 ohms
Wiring Guideline published by the Echelon -
Corporation. Go to www.echelon.com.
Commissioning
To commission and add a device to a LONWORKS
network, follow these steps:
1. Visit the Johnson Controls Web site 081
(www.myjohnsoncontrols.com) and download the
latest version of the plug-in installation setup. DO1 C DO2 C DO3 C DO4 C DO5 C AO1 – AO2
Locate the files under Product Development >
Building Automation North America > BAS Figure 30-6: Relay Output
Products. You can also contact the Field Support
Center (FSC) to obtain the file.
2. Run the installation setup to install the device plug-in and the latest version of the .xif and .apb files into your
computer. the .xif and .apb files install in the C:\LonWorks\Import\JCI folder.
3. Register the plug-in into the network database. By doing this, you create the device template that is used to
commission the device.

4. Commission the device using the proper device template and .apb file with your network management tool.
LN ASC
! Downloading an improper .apb file automatically produces a warning in your network management
tool. If you persist in the download, you run the risk of crashing the Neuron chip in your controller.
Connecting LN Series Controllers to the LONWORKS Network Integration with NAE LIT-1201668

Table 30-3: Metasys LN Series Fan Coil Unit (FCUL) Controller
LN ASC
Product Metasys System LN Series Fan Coil Unit Controller (LN-FCUL-0)

Power Voltage: 24 VAC +15%, 50/60 Hz or 24 VAC1
Typical Consumption: 5 VA
Maximum Consumption: 10 VA
Protection: 1.35 ampere Auto-Reset Fuse
Environmental Operating Temperature: 0 to 70°C (32 to 158°F)
Storage Temperature: -20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F)
Relative Humidity: 0 to 90% Noncondensing
General Standard: LONMARK Functional Profile Fan Coil Unit #8020
Processor: Neuron 3150; 8 bits; 10 MHz
Memory: Flash 64k (APB application and configuration properties)
Communication: LonTalk Protocol
Media Channel: TP/FT-10; 78 kbps
Transceiver: Echelon Free Topology Transceiver (FTT-10)
Enclosure
Material: Metal 18 AWG
Dimensions: 127 x 165 x 33 mm (5 x 6.5 x 1.3 in.)
Weight: 0.67 kg (1.48 lb)
Safety: CSA and UL Listed
Inputs Number: 6 Universal Software Configurable
Digital: Dry Contact
Voltage: 0 to 10 VDC, Accuracy 0.5%
Current: 4 to 20 mA with 500 ohm external resistor
Resistor: Thermistor Type 2, 3, 7, 12, 24; 10k ohm
Range: -40 to 150°C (-40 to 302°F)
Accuracy: +0.5°C; +0.9°F
Resolution: 0.1°C; 0.18°F
Min/Max linear configuration
Potentiometer: 10k ohm
Up to 16 point translation table configuration
Input Resolution: 12 bits analog/digital converter
Outputs Number: 7
5 Digital: Triac 1.0 ampere at 24 VAC External Power Supply
2 Tri-mode Analog: 0 to 10 VDC (linear), PWM or digital 0 to 12 VDC
60 mA maximum at 12 VDC (60°C; 140°F)
Maximum load 200 ohm
Auto reset fuse: 60 mA at 60°C; 140°F; 100 mA at 20°C; 68°F
Analog Output Resolution: 8 bits digital/analog converter
1. Controller must be powered by a 24 VAC, Class 2 power supply.

Table 30-4: Metasys LN Series Rooftop Unit (RTUL) Controller
Product Metasys System LN Series Rooftop Unit Controller (LN-RTUL-0)
LN ASC
Protection: 1.35 Ampere Auto-Reset Fuse
General Standard: LONMARK Functional Profile Rooftop Unit #8030
Enclosure
Range: -40 to 150°C (-40 to 302°F)
Outputs Number: 7
5 Digital: Triac 1.0 Ampere at 24 VAC External Power Supply

Table 30-5: Metasys LN Series Heat Pump Unit (HPUL) Controller
Product Metasys System LN Series Heat Pump Unit Controller (LN-HPUL-0)
LN ASC

Protection: 1.35 ampere Auto-Reset Fuse
General Standard: LONMARK Functional Profile Heat Pump Unit #8051
Enclosure
Safety: UL Listed
Range: -40 to 150°C (-40 to 302°F)
Outputs Number: 7

Table 30-6: Metasys LN Series Unit Ventilator (UVL) Controller
Product Metasys System LN Series Unit Ventilator Controller (LN-UVL-0)
LN ASC
Protection: 1.35 Ampere Auto-Reset Fuse
General Standard: LONMARK Functional Profile Unit Ventilator #8080
Enclosure
UL Listed
Range: -40 to 150°C (-40 to 302°F)
Outputs Number: 7

LN ASC

LN Series Free Programmable Controllers
Application
This document describes the hardware installation for the Metasys system LN Series Controllers. These
installation instructions cover the installation of the following controllers: LN-PRG12x-0, LN-PRG8x-0,
LN FPC
LN-PRG4x 0, LN-PRGRTU-0, and LN-PRG88C-0.
Note: Output plug-in connectors are on the top edge of the board. Power, input, network plug-in connectors and
the service button are on the bottom edge.
Mounting
Mounting holes in the FP board measure 7.9 mm (5/16 in.).
Wiring
Planning and Selecting Cables
Plan the placement of cables used for inputs, outputs, communication, and power.
Place the input, output, power, and network cables to avoid the effects of ambient noise. Analog type cables for
power, communication, inputs, and outputs must be separated from other types of cables.
Connectors
The board connectors accept wires or flat cables: 22-12 AWG (0.14-2.5 mm²) per pole.
Connecting Power
24V AC/DC
The controller is protected by two 5 ampere
removable fuses against power surges and short
circuits. To calculate the required transformer power:
COM
1. Add the power requirements of all controllers
and peripheral devices.
2. Add the largest starting power of the group.
3. Multiply this value by 1.3.
This value is the required transformer power.
Figure 31-1 on page 321 shows wiring connections
to the power source and fuse. Connect the FP circuit Fuse
board to ground using the terminal marked GND. AC
This ground is for static discharge. The terminal can
be connected to the screw of mounting kit. The
Transformer
external fuse protects the outputs and the other
XVAC / 24VAC
equipment powered by the transformer.
Note: Maintain consistent polarity when connecting To other
controllers and devices to the transformer. The equipment
ground of each controller and each peripheral should
be connected to the same side of the transformer. Figure 31-1: Power Connections and Fuses
The free programmable controllers are a half wave
power supply. Connecting two half wave power supplies to the same transformer without maintaining polarity
causes a short circuit. The FP can use 24 VAC +/- 15% or 24 VDC.
Ground the Board
Connect the FP circuit board to ground using the terminal marked GND. This ground is for static discharge. The
terminal can be connected to the screw of the mounting kit.
Wiring the Inputs
The inputs for all controllers (except the
LN-PRG88C-0) are jumper configurable. The
wiring diagrams provide the jumper setting for
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5
each input type. The jumper settings are also + – + – + – + – +
printed on the board of the controller and on 180
the cover. The number of inputs available on
each controller varies according to the second
LN FPC
part of the model name (for example, four

inputs on the LN-PRG4x-0 and 8 inputs on the
LN-PRG8x-0). The LN-PRGRTU-0 is the only
exception and it has eight inputs. The jumper
configurable controllers ship with every input
configured as a 10k thermistor and/or digital 10 kOhm
Thermistor
10kOhm
input. Potentiometer
Contact
In Figure 31-2 on page 322, the potentiometer NO - NC Jumper
input is configured in software as a resistance Potentiometer Configuration
Input Thermistor or
type or an analog input. The other two inputs Digital Input
are both configured in software as the same
0-10VDC
type of input (resistance type), either 4-20mA
thermistor or digital input. 10K/DIGITAL/PWM
1K
A 4-20 mA current input is shown in
Figure 31-3 on page 322. The current source
is independent of the FP circuit board. The Figure 31-2: Potentiometer, Digital, and Thermistor Inputs
controller does not supply current for the input.
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5
+ – + – + – + – +
180
Built-in Resistor: 249 Ω Jumper

Configuration
4 – 20 mA
–
24 VDC +
0-10VDC
4-20mA
10K/DIGITAL/PWM
1K
Sensor –
+
Figure 31-3: 4 to 20 mA Current Input

A 0-10 VDC analog input is shown in Figure 31-4 on
page 323.
Note: Unlike the wiring applications shown in Figure 31-2
on page 322, Figure 31-3 on page 322, and Figure 31-4 on I1 I2 I3 I4 I5
page 323, the 16 Point Free Programmable with HOA + – + – + – + – +
(LN-PRG88C-0) does not require configuration using 180
jumpers. These settings are software configured.
LN FPC
Note: You must configure unused inputs as 10k/Digital/
PWM.
Outputs Controller V+ 0 – 10VDC
The number of outputs on the FP board varies according to
the second part of the model name (for example, 4 inputs on Sensor
the LN-PRG4x-0 and 8 inputs on the LN-PRG8x-0). The + –
LN-PRGRTU-0 is the only exception and it has eight inputs.
The letter following each device name determines the output Jumper
type. For example, LN-PRG12B-0 has six digital outputs and Configuration
six analog outputs. Table 31-1 on page 323 describes the
Output Types.
Table 31-1: Output Types 0-10VDC
4-20mA
Output Model Letter Suffix 10K/DIGITAL/PWM
Type A B C LN-PRGRTU-0 1K
Digital No Digital Half All Six Digital
Output Digital Digital Figure 31-4: 0 to 10 VDC Analog Input
Analog All Half No Two Analog
Output Analog Analog Analog
Wiring the Digital Outputs

Max Current 5A
The digital outputs are cold contacts, which
means that no voltage is present on the Relay
output terminals. An external power supply OUTPUT
is required. See Figure 31-5 on page 323. A2 A1
Power
These outputs can switch 5.0 A @ 14 VDC/
24 VAC and can be used for control of RELAY NO
COM
valve or damper movement by stroke time, RELAY NC
or simple two-state outputs. 24 VAC
A jumper configuration on the board
determines the normally closed/normally
open configuration of the output.
Note: The jumper provides a mechanical
relay with a dry contact closure. By default, 081 081
the jumper is set to the NO (normally open)
position.
C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC + - + -
Figure 31-5: Digital Output with External

Power Source (No jumper setting)
LN Series Free Programmable Controllers: Section 31 323

The analog outputs are tri-mode outputs. The
following modes are available: Connect a diode to
the relay terminal. -
• Analog outputs providing a linear signal 12VDC Relay
ranging from 0 to 10 VDC. See K Max load
Figure 31-6 on page 324. (Ir = 1A @ Vr=25V) 200 ohms
+
LN FPC
• PWM outputs for PWM applications.

These provide discrete signals at 0 or 12
VDC.
• Digital outputs for driving relays or solid
state relays. These provide discrete
signals at 0 or 12 VDC and 60 mA 0 81 08 1
current. See Figure 31-7 on page 324.
C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC + – + –
Figure 31-6: Relay Output

Table 31-2 on page 324 describes the Analog
Output characteristics.
Controller Common
Voltage 0 to 12 VDC when configured as an
analog input 0 – 10 VDC
0 to 12 VDC when configured as a
digital output
0 to 12 VDC when configured as a
PWM output
Maximum 60 mA @ 12 VDC (configured as a
Current digital output) (200 ohm load) 08 1
081
50 mA @ 10 VDC (configured as an
analog output)
C NO/NC C NO/NC C NO/NC + - + -
Protection Auto-reset fuse with the following
ratings: 100 mA @ 68°F (20°C),
Figure 31-7: 0 to 10 VDC Analog Output
60 mA @ 140°F (60°C)
Network Wiring
The recommended wire type for LONWORKS communications is 22 AWG, unshielded, with six twists per foot. There
is no polarity to be considered when connecting to a LONWORKS network. For more detailed information, refer to
the LON Cable and Junction Box Guide published by the Echelon Corporation (www.echelon.com).
Commissioning
To commission a device and add it to a LONWORKS network:
1. Visit the Johnson Controls Web Site (www.myjohnsoncontrols.com) and download the latest version of the
plug-in installation setup. Locate the files under Product Development > Building Automation North America >
BAS Products. You can also contact the FSC to obtain the file.
IMPORTANT: Downloading an improper APB generates a warning in your network management tool. If you
continue to download, you run the risk of crashing the Neuron chip in your controller.

HOA Switch and Jumper
The LN-PRG88C-0 model features a HOA switch on each of its outputs. SWITCH SELECTION
Figure 31-8 on page 325 illustrates the switch positions.
There is also a jumper location just to the left of the HOA on Output 7.
Removing this jumper disables the ON position of all HOA switches on
the controller; therefore, if any of the other switches are set to ON, their
ON
output is actually OFF. The AUTO position, however, is still active.
LN FPC
AUTO
OFF
Figure 31-8: HOA Switch
Output Configuration
Table 31-3: LN-PRG4A-0 Controller Output Configuration
Outputs Configuration
Number 4
12 Tri-mode Voltage 0-10 VDC (linear), digital 0-12 VDC (off/on) or PWM
PWM output: adjustable period from 2 seconds to 15 minutes.
60 mA maximum @ 12 VDC
Maximum load 200 ohms
Auto reset fuse 100 mA @ 20°C, 68°F, 60 mA @ 60°C, 140°F
Typical Consumption 4 VA
Maximum Consumption 12 VA
Analog Output Resolution 8 bits digital/analog converter
Table 31-4: LN-PRG4B-0 Controller Output Configuration

Number 4
2 Digital Relay 5 ampere @ 14 VDC-24 VAC (Jumper selectable NO-NC)
Auto reset fuse 100 mA @ 20° C; 68°F, 60 mA @ 60°C; 140°F
Table 31-5: LN-PRG4C-0 Controller Output Configuration

Number 4

Number 8
LN FPC


Number 8
Auto reset fuse 100 mA @ 20° C; 68°F, 60 mA @ 60°C; 140°F

Number 8

Number 12

Number 12
LN FPC
Auto reset fuse 100 mA @ 20°C; 68°F, 60 mA @ 60°C; 140°F

Number 12

Model Information
Table 31-12: LN Series 8 Point Free Programmable Controller
LN-PRG4A-0 Features 4 universal inputs, 4 analog outputs, Real-Time Clock, battery
backup, Logging and Scheduling (LNS Plug-in)
LN-PRG4B-0 Features 4 universal inputs, 2 analog outputs and 2 digital outputs, RTC,
LN FPC
battery backup, Logging and Scheduling (LNS Plug-in)

LN-PRG4C-0 Features 4 universal inputs, 4 digital outputs, RTC, battery backup,
Logging and Scheduling (LNS Plug-in)

LN-PRG67-0 Features 6 universal inputs, 5 triac outputs, 2 analog outputs, LNS
Plug-in, Logging and Scheduling (LNS Plug-in), Optional DIN Rail Kit.

LN-PRG8A-0 Features 8 universal inputs, 8 analog outputs, RTC, battery backup,

LN-PRG88C-0 Features 8 universal inputs, 8 universal outputs, 5 ampere relay on each
output, Real-Time Clock, battery backup LNS Plug-in, Logging and
Scheduling (LNS Plug-in)

LN-PRG12A-0 Features 12 universal inputs, 12 analog outputs, RTC, battery backup,

LN FPC
Connecting LN-Series Controllers to the LONWORKS Network Integration with NAE LIT-1201668
Installing LN-Builder 3 software LN-Builder 3 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10299-8
Using LN-Builder 3 software LN-Builder 3 Technical Bulletin LIT-12011250
Product Metasys System LN Series 8 Point Free Programmable Controller (LN-PRG4x-0)
Power Requirements Voltage: 24 VAC, ±15%, 50/60 Hz
Protection: 5 amp Removable Fuse, Model LN-PRG4-0 must be powered by a 24 VAC, Class
2 power supply
Environmental Operating Temperature: 0°C to 70°C, 32°F to 158°F
Storage Temperature: -20°C to 70°C, -4°F to 158°F
General Battery (for clock only): Real-Time Clock Chip
Enclosure:
Dimension: 192 x 166 x 35 mm (7.55 x 6.53 x 1.39 in.)
Status LED on outputs
Inputs Number: 4
Digital: Dry Contact, 200 ms minimum ON pulse (without trending), 350 ms minimum OFF
pulse (without trending), 350 ms minimum
ON/OFF pulse (with trending)
Thermistor: Type 2, 10k ohms @ 25°C, 77°F
Range: -40°C to 150°C; -40°F to 302°F
Accuracy: ±0.5°C; ±0.9°F
Platinum: RTD 1k ohms @ 0°C; 32°F
Range: -40°C to 75°C; -40°F to 167°F
Pontentiometer: Configurable on several points or linear on 2 points, Accuracy: ±0.5%
Voltage: 0 to 10 VDC, Accuracy: ±0.5%
Current: 4 to 20 mA with a built-in internal resistor 249 ohms
Input Resolution:12 bits analog/digital converter

Product Metasys System LN Series 13 Universal Free Programmable Controller (LN-PRG67-0)
Power Requirements Voltage: 24 VAC, ±15%, 50/60 HZ, 24 VAC; ±15%
Protection: 1.35 ampere Auto-Reset Fuse, Model LN-PRG67-0 must be powered by a 24 VAC,
Class 2 power supply
LN FPC

General Processor: Neuron 3150; 10 MHz
Memory: Flash 64k (APB application), Flash 128k (storage)
Battery (for clock only): Real-Time Clock Chip
Enclosure:
Dimension: 127 x 165 x 33 mm (5 x 6.5 x 1.3 in.)
Safety: UL Listed
Inputs Number: 6
Voltage: 0-10 VDC with 500 ohms external resistor
Resistor: Thermistor Type 2, 3 10k ohms
Range: -40°C to 150°C; -40°F to 302°F
Potentiometer: 10 and 100k ohms
22 points translation table configuration
Outputs Number: 7
5 Digital: Triac 1.0 ampere @ 24 VAC, external power supply
2 Tri-mode Analog: 0-10 VDC (linear), PWM or digital 0-12 VDC
60 mA maximum @ 12 VDC (60°C; 140°F)
Auto reset fuse: 60 mA @ 60°C; 140°F, 100 mA @ 20°C; 68°F

Product Metasys System LN Series Free Programmable Controller (LN-PRG8x-0)
Power Requirements Voltage: 24 VAC, ±15%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VAC; ±15%
Protection: 5 amp Removable Fuse, Model LN-PRG8-0 must be powered by a 24 VAC, Class 2
power supply
Environmental Operating Temperature: 0°C to 70°C, 32° F to 158°F
LN FPC
General Processor: Neuron 3150; 8 bits; 10 MHz
Memory: Nonvolatile Flash 64k (APB application), Nonvolatile Flash 128k (storage)
Enclosure:
Safety: UL Listed
CE: Pending
Inputs Number: 8
Digital: Dry Contact, 200 ms minimum ON pulse (without trending), 350 ms minimum OFF pulse
(without trending), 350 ms minimum
Thermistor: Type 2, 3 10k ohms @ 25°C, 77°F
Range: -40°C to 150°F; -40°F to 302°F
Range: -40°C to 75°C; -40°F to 167°F
Voltage: 0 to10 VDC, Accuracy: ±0.5%
Current: 4 to 20 mA with a built-in internal resistor 249 ohms

Table 31-21: LN Series 16 Point Universal I/O with HOA Switch Controller
Product Metasys system LN Series 16 Point Universal Free Programmable Controller (LN-PRG88C-0)
Power Requirements Voltage: 24 VAC, ±15%, 50/60 Hz
Type: 40 W isolated
LN FPC

Memory: Nonvolatile Flash 64k (APB application)
Clock: Real-Time Clock Chip
Battery (for clock only): CR2032 Lithium Battery
Enclosure:
Inputs Number: 8
(without trending), 350 ms minimum ON/OFF pulse (with trending)
Range: -40°C to 150°C; -40°F to 302°F
Range: -40°C to 75°C; -40°F to 167°F
Potentiometer: Configurable on several points or linear on 2 points, Accuracy: ±0.5%
Voltage: 0-10 VDC, Accuracy: ±0.5%
Current: 4-20 mA internal load 249 ohms
Protection: 375 mA or 500 mA removable fuse
Outputs Number: 8
Digital: Relay 5 ampere @ 14 VDC-24 VAC (Jumper selectable NO-NC)
Voltage:
0 to10 VDC or PWM
Configurable from MCL Tool Software
PWM output: adjustable period from 2 seconds to 15 minutes
Current: 4-20 mA, maximum load 500 ohms
Protection: 375 mA or 500 mA removable fuse
Switches:
Manual ON/OFF/AUTO on outputs

Product Metasys System LN Series 24 Point Free Programmable Controller (LN-PRG12x-0)
Power Requirements Voltage: 24 VAC, ±15%, 50/60 HX, 24 VDC, ±15%
Protection: 5 ampere Removable Fuse, Model LN-PRG12-0 must be powered by a 24 VAC, Class
2 power supply
LN FPC
Memory: Nonvolatile Flash 64k (APB application)
Enclosure:
Safety: UL Listed
CE: Pending
Inputs Number: 12
(without trending), 350 ms minimum
Range: -40°C to 150°C; -40°F to 302°F
Range: -40°C to 150°C; -40°F to 167°F
Voltage: 0-10 VDC, Accuracy: ±0.5%
Current: 4-20 mA with a built-in internal resistor 249 ohms
Input Resolution:12 bits analog/digital converter

LN FPC

LN Series VAV/VVT Profile Application Controllers
Application
The Metasys system LN Series VAV and VVT Controllers are zone controllers for VAV, VVT, and peripheral
heating and cooling applications. They are normally mounted on the damper shaft.
The VAV and VVT controllers have five inputs. If required, one input can accept a CO2 sensor. An onboard
differential air pressure sensor is included with hose attachments for VAV applications.
The VAV and VVT Controllers have three digital outputs and one analog output. They require:
VAV/VVT
• relative humidity of 0 to 90% (noncondensing) and an ambient operating temperature of 32 to 158°F (0 to
70°C)
LN
• 24 VAC power; an external fuse, and Class 2 wiring
Connectors for the inputs, outputs, power, and network wires are on the right side of the unit. The connectors are
labeled and easily accessible.
Mounting
Mount the controller directly on the air damper shaft.
Choose a mounting location that allows easy access to min. 40mm (1.5")
the cover and connectors.
Attach the controller to the shaft with the supplied metal
bracket as shown in Figure 32-1 on page 335.
The casing bracket is equipped with a mounting kit as
shown in Figure 32-2 on page 335. The mounting kit
secures the controller in its position by opposing the shaft
torque.
Install the mounting kit screw. Make sure that nothing
prevents the damper from opening and closing easily.
Figure 32-1: Mounting Overview
Hole for Damper Shaft Pressure Scale

Selection Jumper
Mechanical Stops
sl ort no C hc et si D
Connectors
Mounting
0 1 Kit
Connectors
High Pressure Low Pressure

Sensor Input Sensor Input
Figure 32-2: VAV Components (Cover Removed)
If necessary, limit the maximum damper shaft rotation
by modifying the position of the stroke end stops in 5°
increments.
; 2.48"
63mm
2.13"
54mm
To connect the pressure sensor, use flexible tubes
6.4 mm (1/4 in.) in diameter and 4 mm (5/32 in.) inside
diameter. 44mm;
1.72"
62mm
2.44"
0 1
124mm;
VAV/VVT
98mm;
4.88"
3.86"
LN
Bracket
mouting
kit
106mm ;
4.17"
226mm ;
8.90"
VAV-L and VAV-C Dimensions

Figure 32-3: Dimensional Drawing
Selecting Differential Pressure Scales
Three differential pressure scales are available and are selected using the
pressure scale jumpers. See Figure 32-2 on page 335 for the jumper location Range A Range B Range C
and Figure 32-4 on page 336 for the correct setting.
Wiring
Planning and Selecting Cables 0 - 0.5H2O 0 - 1H2O 0 - 2H2O
Plan the placement of cables for inputs, outputs, communication, and power. 0 - 125Pa 0 - 250Pa 0 - 500Pa
Place input, output, power, and network cables to avoid the effects of ambient
noise. Figure 32-4: Selecting the
Pressure Scale
Separate analog type cables for power, communication, inputs, and outputs
from other types of cables.
Connectors
The board connectors accept wires or flat cables: 22-12 AWG (0.14 – 2.5 mm2) per pole.
Grounding the Board
Connect the VAV and VVT circuit board to ground as shown in
This ground is for static discharge. Connect the terminal to the
NET A
NET B
GND
RESET
Connect to
screw of the mounting kit. ground
1 2 3
Twisted Pair
Figure 32-5: Grounding the Board

Connecting the Power
The controllers are protected against power surges and
DO2
3
short circuits by a 5 A removable fuse.
C
C
2
DO
To calculate the required transformer power:
1
1 Fuse
1. Add the power requirements of all the controllers and 24VAC
2
peripheral devices. COM AC
1
2. Add the largest starting power of the group.
SERVICE Transformer
3. Multiply this value by 1.3. XVAC / 24VAC
This value is the required transformer power. Removable
Fuses To other
VAV/VVT
Maintain consistent polarity when connecting controllers equipment
LN
and devices to the transformer. Connect the ground of Figure 32-6: Power Connection and Fuses
each controller and each peripheral to the same side of
the transformer.
For applications where multiple VAV and VVT Controllers are supplied from a common 24 VAC transformer, you
must maintain polarity throughout, or short circuits ampere result.
Also, you must use 24 VAC for the VAV and VVT controllers. Other voltages are not acceptable. When the outputs
are configured as powered outputs, the 24 VAC is switched directly to the outputs.
The external fuse on the profile application controllers (LN-VAVLx-0 and LN-VVTLx-0) protects other equipment
powered by the transformer.
Wiring the Inputs (I1, I2, I3, I4)
By default, the VAV and VVT controllers are shipped with 10K - Digital Inputs RESET
every input configured as a 10k ohm thermistor or digital

Analog Inputs GND
3
input.
NETB
2
To change the input type, remove the cover and move the NETA
1
jumpers as shown from Figure 32-7 on page 337 to INPUT I4
I4
+
8
Figure 32-12 on page 338. C
7
INPUT I3 I3
Figure 32-8 on page 337 shows an internally sourced 4 to +
6
INPUT I2 I2+
5
20 mA input. The power supply is internal to the sensor and C
4
INPUT I1
is not on the board. I1+
3
C
2
AO1
+
1
C
Figure 32-7: Selecting Analog 10k ohm or

Digital Inputs
NET B
1 2
NET A
Controller Source
INPUT I4 I4+ + Output 4-20 mA
6 7 8
C
INPUT I3 - Internal DC
I3+
power supply
Resistor
500 Ohm - ¼W
Figure 32-8: Internally Sourced 4 to 20 mA Input
LN Series VAV/VVT Profile Application Controllers: Section 32 337

NET B NET B
2
2
NET A
1
NET A
1
Input I4 I4+ Thermistor 10kOhm;
7 8
INPUT I4 C Type 2 & 3
I4+ Input I3
8
I3+
5 6
C Input I2 I2+
7
INPUT I3 Contact NO - NC
I3+ C
4
6
Figure 32-10: 10k ohm or Digital Input
10 kOhm Potentiometer
Figure 32-9: Potentiometer Input NET B
2
NET A
1
VAV/VVT
INPUT I4 I4+ + Controller V+

LN
8
C
- 0-10VDC
7
INPUT I3
I3+
6
Figure 32-11: 0 to 10 VDC Analog Input
Note: If the same transformer is used to power the VAV

or VVT profile application controller as well as the
sensor, the sensor and the power supply must be Controller VDC
4-20 mA
half-wave rectified. NET B - +
2
NET A
1
Wiring Digital Outputs (DO1, DO2, DO3) Input I4 I4+ + Power supply
7 8
C 24 VDC
Two types of digital outputs can be configured. Input I3
I3+
-
6
Resistor
• At time of shipping, all digital outputs on the VAV and 500 Ohm max - ¼W
VVT free programmable controllers are configured
Figure 32-12: Externally Sourced 4 to 20 mA Inputs
as unpowered output types.
• At time of shipping, all digital outputs on the VAV and
VVT profile application controllers are configured as powered output types.
The unpowered output type does not have any voltage on the output terminals when the output is active. Voltage
and current are supplied from outside the board.
The powered output type has 24 VAC on the output terminals when the output is active. Voltage and current are
supplied from the board.
Maximum current for all digital outputs whether powered or unpowered is 1 ampere.
DO1 and DO2 are controlled by a single jumper; set them identically. The DO3 output has its own jumper; you can
set it independently of the other two outputs.
All digital outputs are controlled by triacs. As a result, measurements across outputs with a digital voltmeter may be
misleading.
Wiring Powered Digital Outputs
Powered Outputs
Powered digital outputs switch 24 VAC from the supply transformer. I1 +
3
C
2
Set the output type selection jumpers as shown in Figure 32-13 on AO1+
1
page 338.
C
5
Output DO3 DO3

4
DO2
3
Outputs C
2
DO1 & DO2

DO1
1
24VAC
2
COM
1
S ERVICE
Figure 32-13: Jumper Position

for Powered Output Types

Wire the powered output terminal as shown in Figure 32-14 on page 339.
Wiring Unpowered Outputs
Set the output type selection jumpers as shown in
C
5
Figure 32-15 on page 339. Output DO3 DO3
4
DO2
Wire the unpowered digital output terminal as shown in
3
Outputs C Max. current:
2
Figure 32-16 on page 339. DO1 & DO2 DO1 1A @ 24VAC
1
24 VAC
2
Figure 32-14: Powered Outputs
Unpowered Outputs
VAV/VVT
I1 +
LN
C
2
AO1+
1
C
Output DO3
5
DO3
4
DO2
3
Outputs
C
DO1 & DO2
2
DO1
1
24VAC
2
COM
1
S ERVICE
Figure 32-15: Unpowered Outputs
5
Output DO3 DO3
4
DO2
3
Outputs C L Power supply
2
DO1 & DO2 DO1 C 24VAC
1
24 VAC
2
Max. Current
1A @ 24VAC
Figure 32-16: Unpowered Digital Outputs

I1 +
3
When configured as digital type, the analog outputs can C - Controller Common
2
provide 60 mA of current for relay, or solid-state relay, AO1+ + 0-10 VDC

1
operation. Table 32-1 on page 339 describes the Analog C

5
Output characteristics. DO3

4
Figure 32-17: Analog Output

Analog Output Characteristic
Voltage 0 to 10 VDC when configured as an analog output
0 to 12 VDC when configured as a digital output
Maximum Current 60 mA @ 12 VDC when configured as digital (200 ohm load)
50 mA @ 10 VDC when configured as analog
Protection Auto-reset fuse:
100 mA @ 68°F (20°C)
0 mA @ 140°F (60°C)

Network Wiring
I1 +
The recommended wire type for LONWORKS communications is
3
C Connect a diode to
2
22 AWG, unshielded, with six twists per foot. There is no polarity AO1+
K the relay terminal.
1
(Ir = 1A @ Vr=25V)
to be considered when connecting to a LONWORKS network. For C
5
detailed information, refer to the LON Cable and Junction Box DO3
4
12Vdc Relay
Guide published by the Echelon Corporation Max load 200 ohms
(www.echelon.com). Figure 32-18: Analog to Digital Output

Commissioning Using a Relay
To commission and add a device to a LONWORKS network, follow
these steps:
VAV/VVT
1. Visit the Johnson Controls Web site (www.myjohnsoncontrols.com) and download the latest version of the
plug-in installation setup. Locate the files under Product Development > Building Automation North America >
LN
BAS Products. You can also contact the FSC to obtain the file.
WARNING: Risk of Property Damage.
! Downloading an improper APB automatically produces a warning in your network management

tool. If you continue the download you run the risk of crashing the Neuron chip in your controller.
Model Information
Table 32-2: LN Series VAV and VVT Application Specific Controllers
LN-VAVL-0 Enclosure with LM-24M actuator, pressure sensor, and 8 I/O (4 UI,
3 triac DO, 1 AO), with Logging and LNS Plug-in
LN-VAVLF-0 Enclosure with LM-24M10 feed-back actuator, pressure sensor, and 7 I/O
(3 UI, 3 triac DO, 1 AO), and LNS Plug-in
LN-VAVLN-0 Enclosure with pressure sensor, and 8 I/O (4 UI, 3 triac DO, 1 AO), with
Logging and LNS Plug-in. No actuator
LN-VVTL-0 Enclosure with LM-24M actuator and 8 I/O (4 UI, 3 triac DO, 1 AO), with
Logging and LNS Plug-in. No pressure sensor
LN-VVTLF-0 Enclosure with LM-24M10 feedback actuator, and 7 I/O (3 UI, 3 triac DO,
1 AO), with Logging and LNS Plug-in. No pressure sensor
LN-VVTLN-0 Enclosure with 8 I/O (4 UI, 3 triac DO, 1 AO), with Logging and LNS Plug-
in. No actuator. No pressure sensor.
Table 32-3: Related Documentation (Part 1 of 2)

Table 32-3: Related Documentation (Part 2 of 2)
Connecting LN-Series Controllers to the LONWORKS Network Integration with NAE LIT-1201668
VAV/VVT
LN
Table 32-4: LN Series VAV and VVT (Part 1 of 2)
Product Metasys system LN Series Application Free VAV Programmable
Controllers (LN-VAVLx-0)
Metasys system LN Series Application Free VVT Programmable
Controllers (LN-VVTLx-0)
Power Requirements Voltage: 24 VAC, ± 15%, 50/60 HZ or 24 VDC
Protection: 5 ampere removable fuse
General Standard: LONMARK Functional Profile VAV #8010
Processor: Neuron 3150; 8 bits, 10MHZ
Memory: Non-volatile Flash 64 K (APB application and configuration
properties)
Battery (for clock only): Real-time Clock Chip
Enclosure:
Material: PVC, flammable class VO
Dimension: 4.88 x 8.9 x 2.48 inches (124 x 226 x 63 mm)
Weight: 1.84 lbs (0.835 kg)
Damper Motor Motor: LM24-Mus
Torque: 35 in. lb, 4N-m
Angle of Rotation: 95° adjustable
Fits shaft diameter: 8.5 mm to 18.2 mm; 5/16 inches to 3/4 inches

Table 32-4: LN Series VAV and VVT (Part 2 of 2)
Inputs Number: 4 universal
Voltage: 0-10 VC, Accuracy ±0.5%
Current: 4-20 mA with 500 K ohms external resistor, Accuracy: ±0.5%
Resistor:
Thermistor Type 2 10 K ohms
Range: -40°C to 150°F; -40°F to 302°F
VAV/VVT
Potentiometer 10 K ohms
LN
Linear 2-point setpoint adjustment

configurable on several points
1 Differential pressure: Range 125-250-500 Pa (0.5-1.2 in. H20),
Accuracy ±3% full scale
Outputs Number: 4
3 Digital: Triac 24 VAC ±15%, 50/60 Hz, maximum charge 1.0 ampere,
internal or external power supply
1 Tri-mode Analog:
0-10 VDC (linear), PWM or digital 0-12 VDC
60 mA maximum @ 12 VDC (60°C ; 140°F)
Auto reset fuse: 60mA @ 60°C; 140°F, 100mA @ 20°C ; 68°F

WIRELESS
TEC20 WRZ-7840 WRZ-TTX ZFR1811 ZFR1810 LOCATE
Wireless Device Location and Mounting Considerations 345
ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator and Antenna 365
ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router 377
WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors 385
WRZ-7840 Wireless Receiver 391
TEC20 Wireless Coordinator 397
TEC2xxx
TEC2xxx Wireless Thermostat Controller 405
WRS-RTN
TE-7800
WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Receivers 421
WRS-TTX
WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors 429

WIRELESS
LOCATE
Wireless Device Location and Mounting Considerations
Web
Browser
SCT/CCT
Wireless Connection
Hard-wired Network or Bus
Ethernet
Ethernet Network
NAE
WRS
Sensors TEC
WRS-RTN Wireless
Series Thermostat
Receiver TEC20-3C Controller
FC Bus N2 Bus Coordinator
FEC
WRS
Sensor
TE-7800
VMA1400 One-to-one
Receiver
WRZ
FEC Sensor
FEC FC
ZFR1811
Router Bus
IOM
ZFR1810
Coordinator
Laptop
Computer WRZ
Sensor
ZFR1811 VMA1600
Router
FIG:Wrs_Ntw
TEC Wireless
Thermostat
TEC20-6C Controllers
Coordinator
Desktop
Computer
Figure 33-1: Wireless Metasys Systems
WIRELESS
LOCATE
Overview
This section provides general guidelines for determining optimum mounting locations for installing wireless
controllers, routers, and sensors. Many of the guidelines are best practices that can be applied to locating and
installing many different wireless controllers and zone/room sensors or thermostats. The wireless Metasys
products described in this document include the following:
• ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System
• WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Mesh Room Temperature Sensors
• WRZ-7840 Series One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System
• WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool
• TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller System
• WRS Series Many-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System
• TE-7800 Series One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System
For general guidelines on determining mounting locations and installing wired network controllers and sensors,
see Locating and Installing HVAC Controllers and Sensors on page 13.
IMPORTANT: This section is not intended to provide complete guidelines, procedures, or safety information for
the products you may be installing, and not all of the guidelines presented in this section pertain to every
controller or sensor. Refer to the product manufacturer’s Technical Literature and Product Installation
Instructions for additional installation guidelines, procedures, and product safety information.
Installation Materials, Hardware, and Special Tools

Some of the product Installation and Wiring Guidelines sections in this book provide a short list of the hardware/
materials and any special (not typical) tools required to mount a product in a simple or typical application. See the
Materials and Special Tools Needed sections in each device’s specific section.
Typically, no mounting hardware is shipped with controllers or sensors, and it is the responsibility of the installer to
supply any material or hardware required to mount the controllers and sensors. Use durable mounting hardware of
sufficient quality to ensure that the installation can endure for the life of the product. Some of the guidelines in this
section provide information on appropriate mounting hardware for installing the product. You should refer to the
product manufacturer’s Technical Literature and Product Installation Instructions for additional information on the
required installation material and hardware.
For general information on receiving, transporting, shipping, handling, and storing controllers and sensors, see
General Guidelines for Transporting, Receiving, and Storing Controllers and Sensors on page 13.
Applications
The wireless Metasys products within a Metasys system are ideal for any location where it is cost-prohibitive,
difficult, or aesthetically unappealing to hardwire between Metasys products. Examples of these locations include
the following:
• hospitals, office buildings, university campuses, educational facilities, correctional facilities, and other
commercial structures with brick or solid concrete walls and/or ceilings that impede hard-wired applications
• office buildings, retail stores, and other commercial real estate where tenant turnover is frequent and
temporary walls and ceilings are common
• museums, historical buildings, atriums, and other sites where building aesthetics and historical preservation
are important
• stadiums, arenas, gymnasiums, convention centers, airports, zoos, and other locations with large, open
spaces
• buildings with marble, granite, glass, mirrored, wood veneer, or other decorative surfaces that present
challenges to hard-wiring
• buildings with asbestos or other hazardous materials that must not be disturbed
• buildings with occupants sensitive to disruptions to business

WIRELESS
LOCATE
• regions with high labor costs
Applications to Avoid
Locations or applications that prohibit cellular telephones or WiFi systems are unsuitable for the wireless Metasys
products. Examples include:
• operating rooms or radiation therapy rooms
• validated environments
• UL 864 Smoke Control applications
• department of defense applications requiring Diacap certification (for example, military bases and military
hospitals)
Do not use the wireless Metasys products in applications that cannot tolerate intermittent interference, or where:
• critical control features would impact life-safety or result in large monetary loss, including secondary (backup)
life-safety applications
• data centers, production lines, or critical areas would be shut down
• loss of critical control would result from loss of data from humidity or temperature sensor communications
• operation of exhaust fans or AHUs would impair a purge or pressurization mode
• missing data would invalidate reporting required by the customer
• security points are monitored
• annunciation of offline conditions in less than 5 minutes is required
Wireless Transmission Distances
The effective transmission distances can vary per application because of wireless signal absorption and reflection
due to metal obstructions, walls (or floors), and furniture found in typical building interiors.
IMPORTANT: Indoor line of sight transmission ranges between products can be less than shown in Table 33-1
on page 347 through Table 33-8 on page 361.
ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System

Table 33-1 on page 347 shows the indoor transmission ranges between ZFR1800 Series products.
Table 33-1: Indoor Transmission Ranges
Range Type Transmission Distance
ZFR1810 Coordinator, ZFR1811 Router WRZ-TTx Series Sensor
Recommended 15.2 m (50 ft) 15.2 m (50 ft)
Maximum, Line of Sight 76.2 m (250 ft) 30 m (100 ft)
TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller System

Table 33-2 on page 347 shows the transmission ranges between two TEC devices.
Table 33-2: Recommended Transmission Ranges between Two TEC Devices
Between TEC20 Coordinator and TEC Transmission Distance
Wireless Thermostat Controller or
between TEC Series Wireless
Controllers
Through Walls 10 m (30 ft)
Open Space 30 m (100 ft)
Wireless Device Location and Mounting Considerations: Section 33 347

WIRELESS
LOCATE
WRS Series Many-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System

Table 33-3 on page 348 shows the transmission ranges between the products in a Many-to-One wireless room
temperature sensing system.
Table 33-3: Recommended Transmission Ranges between WRS-TTx Series Sensor and WRS-RTN
Receiver
Indoor Line of Sight Transmission Distance
Between a WRS-TTx0000-0 Series Sensor and WRS-RTNx-0 Series Receiver1
Recommended 61 m (200 ft)
Maximum 152 m (500 ft)
WRS-TTx0000-1 Series Sensor and WRS-RTNx-1 Series Receiver2
1. 15 dBm Transmission Power
2. 10 dBm Transmission Power (CE Mark)
TE-7800 Series One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System

Table 33-4 on page 348 shows the transmission ranges between the products in a One-to-One wireless room
Table 33-4: Recommended Transmission Ranges between WRS Series Sensor and TE-7800 Receiver
Between a WRS-TTx0000-0 Series Sensor and TE-78x0-0 Series Receiver1
WRS-TTx0000-1 Series Sensor and TE-78x0-1 Series Receiver2
WRZ-7840 Series One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System

Table 33-5 on page 348 shows the transmission ranges between the products in a One-to-One wireless room
Table 33-5: Recommended Transmission Ranges between WRZ Series Sensor and WRZ-7840 Receiver
Between a WRZ-TTx Series Sensor and ZFR1811 Router
Minimum .61 m (2 ft)
WRZ-TTx Series Sensor and WRZ-7840 Series Receiver
Maximum 45 (50 ft)

WIRELESS
LOCATE
General Location and Estimating Guidelines
Observe the guidelines and procedures in this section for determining the optimum location for wireless Metasys
systems.
Positioning the wireless Metasys products in the optimum locations with direct, unobstructed, line-of-sight signal
paths enhances the wireless signal strengths between associated products and typically reduces the number of
wireless products required for your application. To help illustrate, Figure 33-2 on page 349 shows an example of a
line of sight path for a WRS Many-to-One wireless sensing system.
WRS Line WRS

Sensor of S ight Sensor
Wirele
s s Sig
nal P
ath
WRS-RTN
Receiver
Elevator
Shaft or
Metal Mechanical
Building Room
Columns
WRS
Sensor
LINE_OF_SIGHT
WRS
Sensor
Figure 33-2: Line of Sight Example: WRS Sensor System
To perform the procedures for locating the components of your wireless Metasys systems, you need the following:
• a detailed copy of the job site floor plans for the proposed application site with the wall locations, column
locations, mechanical rooms, elevator shafts, stairwells, metal duct work, chases and risers, and other large
metal obstructions shown. The plans should also include the proposed mechanical/HVAC zone layout and
wireless device locations.
• a copy of the job site architectural and mechanical specifications with the construction materials defined
• information on the dimensions, materials, and the general location of the furnishings and other mobile content
installed in the occupied application space (for example, file cabinets, shelving units, partitions, displays, and
other large metal items that can obstruct wireless signals)
• several different colored pens or markers for identifying zone and area boundaries, wireless Metasys product
locations, and signal obstructions. Examples of MOs include:
• interior building features such as elevator shafts, stairwells, mechanical or electrical equipment rooms,
equipment chases for HVAC, plumbing and electrical risers, metal reinforced walls, concrete walls, cinder
blocks, glass walls with metal coating, and large metal-reinforced columns and pillars
• office equipment and furnishings such as computer racks, many rows of tall file cabinets and book shelves,
metal partitions, and displays
Examples of minor obstructions include several rows of cabinets or shelves, metal light fixtures, multiple small
pillars, sheetrock walls with metal or wood studs, and glass walls without metal coating. For estimating
purposes, several small or minor obstructions can be grouped and considered a single MO.

WIRELESS
LOCATE
Follow these general guidelines when locating your wireless products:

• Locate the wireless Metasys products so they are easily accessible.
• Locate the wireless products in direct, line of sight to as many other wireless products within the same wireless
network.
• Avoid metal, concrete, and brick obstructions (including equipment rooms and elevator shafts) between the
wireless products.
• Locate the ZFR1810 Coordinators, TEC Coordinators, and WRS-RTN or TE-7800 Receivers in an elevated
position in the space, above furniture, cabinets, shelves, and other obstructions.
• For best signal transmission on ZFR1810 Coordinators, TEC Coordinators, and WRS-RTN or TE-7800
Receivers, which all have external antennas, vertically orient the external antenna with at least 50 mm (2 in.)
exposed below and clear of any pipes, duct work, or other metal obstructions.
• For best signal transmission on ZFR1811 Routers, wireless TEC thermostat controllers, WRZ sensors, and
WRS sensors which all have internal antennas, vertically mount these products.
• Do not mount the wireless Metasys product in recessed areas, metal enclosures, or shelving units unless the
antenna can be positioned outside of the recessed area or enclosure.
• Locate the wireless Metasys products that are within a wireless network on the same floor or building level as
the associated wireless products in the same wireless network. For example, locate ZFR1810 Coordinators,
ZFR1811 routers and WRZ sensors on the same floor.
For best temperature sensing and control, follow the same best practices used to locate a hard-wired temperature
control, sensor, or thermostat when locating sensors and TECs:
• Avoid enclosed or recessed locations and locations behind curtains, doors, or other obstructions to the
controlled space.
• Avoid locations near entry foyers, doors, windows, supply air ducts, and pipes.
• Avoid locations that are exposed to drafts, direct sunlight, and other sources of heat or cooling.
• Avoid locations where the wireless products could be exposed to excessive vibration.
• Locate the wireless products on an interior wall where it is easily accessible, at least 1.4 m (54 in.) above the
floor, in an area where the temperature is representative of the entire zone.
Follow the steps in this section to determine the optimum location for the ZFR1810 Coordinator and ZFR1811
Routers in your ZFR1800 Series system applications and to estimate the number of additional repeaters required.
ZFR1811 Router locations are determined by:
• the locations of the controlled equipment
• the locations of the associated field controllers and WRZ sensors
• the physical characteristics of the applications space
• the obstructions in the application space
Follow these rules:
• Every WRZ-TTx Sensor should be within 15 m (50 ft) (recommended) of at least two ZFR1811 Routers.
• Every ZFR1811 Router should be within 15 m (50 ft) (recommended) of at least two other ZFR1811 Routers.
• The ZFR1810 Coordinator should be within 15 m (50 ft) (recommended) of at least two ZFR1811 Routers.
• If any WRZ-TTX Sensor, ZFR1811 Router, or ZFR1810 Coordinator is not within 15 m (50 ft) (recommended)
of at least two other ZFR1811 Routers, then use ZFR1811 Routers and ZFRRPT Repeater accessories to
function as repeaters to serve this purpose of providing multiple wireless data pathways.
• The maximum distance between the ZFR1810 Coordinator and the farthest ZFR1811 Router should be less
than 76.2 m (250 ft).

WIRELESS
LOCATE
To locate the products:
1. Inspect the building plans floor by floor (section by section on each floor if necessary), and locate your field
controller and the intended locations of all WRZ-TTx sensors. See Figure 33-3 on page 351.
WRZ
Sensor
ZFR1810
Coordinator
ZFR1811
Router
Building
Column
Field
Controller
Fig:ZFRflroln
Figure 33-3: Building Floor Plan with ZFR1800 Series System
2. Locate the ZFR1811 Routers near their respective field controllers.

3. Highlight all of the obstructions on the building floor plans, such as elevator shafts, metal equipment,
equipment rooms, and duct work. See Figure 33-3 on page 351.
4. Locate the ZFR1810 Coordinator near the center of the space. See Figure 33-3 on page 351.
You must locate the ZFR1810 Coordinator on the same floor or building level as the associated ZFR1811
Routers. The ZFR1810 Coordinator’s antenna should be in direct, unobstructed line of sight with a minimum of
two ZFR1811 Routers.

WIRELESS
LOCATE
5. On your floor plans, draw a 15 m (50 ft) diameter (7.5 m [25 ft] radius) circle around each ZFR1800
Coordinator, ZFR1811 Router, and WRZ Sensor, to help determine wireless signal range. See Figure 33-4 on
page 352.
WRZ
Sensor
Elevator
Shaft
ZFR1810
Coordinator
ZFR1811
Router
Building
Field Column
Controller
Fig:ZFRflrpln2
Figure 33-4: Building Floor Plan with ZFR1800 System and with Circles Representing
Wireless Signal Range
6. Add ZFR1811 Routers and ZFRRPT repeater accessories to serve as repeaters in order to fill in gaps and
provide multiple wireless transmission paths between products. See Figure 33-5 on page 353.
Note: On your floor plan, if you have 15 m (50 ft) diameter (7.5 m [25 ft] radius) circles that do not overlap with
each other, add ZFR1811 Routers to serve as repeaters to fill in the gaps so that every 15 m (50 ft) diameter
(7.5 m [25 ft] radius) circle overlaps with at least two other 15 m (50 ft) diameter (7.5 m [25 ft] radius) circles.

WIRELESS
LOCATE
Note: Typical job sites include a number of major and minor obstructions in the final occupied space. The
router quantity and locations are directly affected by the number and location of obstructions.
WRZ
Sensor
Elevator
Shaft
ZFR1810
Coordinator ZFR1811
Router to
Serve as
Repeater
ZFR1811
Router
Building
Field Column
Controller
Figure 33-5: Building Floor Plan with ZFR1800 System Including Repeaters
7. Once the installation is complete, test the wireless transmission signal strength between the ZFR1810
Coordinator and all of the associated ZFR1811 Routers and WRZ-TTx Sensors to help validate a reliable mesh
network is in place. Each ZFR and WRZ product contains signal strength LEDs, and the ZCT also provides a
convenient method for testing the signal strength and provides additional diagnostics for the ZFR1800 system.
Note: If a ZFR1811 Router shows poor signal strength, you may be able to improve the signal strength by
rotating the ZFR1811 Router. If this does not help, then additional ZFR1811 Routers and ZFRRPT repeater
accessories serving as repeaters may be required.
Follow the steps in this section to locate your TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller System products. Follow
these rules:
• The recommended distance between every TEC wireless thermostat controller should be 10 m (30 ft) through
walls, and 30 m (100 ft) in open spaces.
• Every TEC wireless thermostat controller should be within a wireless transmission range of at least two other
TEC wireless thermostat controllers.
• The TEC Coordinator should be within a wireless transmission range of at least two TEC wireless thermostat
controllers.
• If a TEC wireless thermostat controller is not within wireless transmission range of at least two TEC wireless
thermostat controllers or a TEC coordinator, then use TEC wireless thermostat controllers to function as
repeaters to serve this purpose of providing multiple wireless data pathways.

WIRELESS
LOCATE
To locate the products:

1. From the floor plan, locate the intended locations of all the TEC wireless thermostat controllers. See
TEC Wireless
Thermostat
Controller
Building
Column TEC
Coordinator Elevator
Shaft
Concrete
Wall
Fig:TECflrpln
Figure 33-6: Building Floor Plan with TEC Wireless Thermostat Controller System
2. Highlight all of the obstructions on the building floor plans, such as elevator shafts, metal equipment,
equipment rooms, concrete block walls, and duct work. See Figure 33-6 on page 354.
3. Locate the TEC20-xC Coordinator near the center of the space. See Figure 33-6 on page 354.
You must locate the TEC Coordinator on the same floor or building level as the associated TEC wireless
thermostat controllers. The TEC Coordinator antenna should be in direct, unobstructed line of sight with a
minimum of two wireless TECs. See Figure 33-6 on page 354.
Note: Each TEC Coordinator supports up to 30 TEC wireless thermostat controllers.

WIRELESS
LOCATE
4. Around each TEC wireless thermostat controller and TEC Coordinator that are on your floor plans, draw a
30 m (100 ft) diameter (15 m [50 ft] radius) circle if transmitting in an open space or a 10 m (30 ft) diameter (5 m
[15 ft] radius) if transmitting through walls to help determine the wireless signal range. See Figure 33-7 on
page 355.
TEC Wireless
Thermostat
Controller
Building
Column TEC
Shaft
Concrete
Wall
Figure 33-7: Building Floor Plan with TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controllers
and Circles Representing Wireless Signal Range
5. Add TEC Wireless Thermostat Controllers to serve as repeaters and to fill in gaps and provide multiple
wireless transmission paths between wireless products in the network. See Figure 33-8 on page 356.
Note: On your floor plan, if you have the circles that do not overlap with each other, add TEC wireless thermostat
controllers to serve as repeaters to fill in the gaps so that every circle overlaps with at least two other circles.
The same transmission distances apply to TEC Wireless Thermostat Controllers serving as repeaters:
• 30 m (100 ft) diameter (15 m [50 ft] radius) for repeater wireless TECs transmitting in open space.
• 10 m (30 ft) diameter (5 m [15 ft] radius) for repeater wireless TECs transmitting through walls.
The dotted semi-circle represents the 30 m (100 ft) diameter (15 ft [50 ft] radius) transmission in an open space.

WIRELESS
LOCATE
Note: Typical job sites include a number of major and minor obstructions in the final occupied space. The
TEC quantity and locations are directly affected by the number and location of obstructions.
TEC Wireless
Thermostat
Controller
Building
Column TEC
Shaft
TEC Wireless Concrete

Thermostat Wall
Controller
Serving as
a Repeater
Figure 33-8: Building Floor Plan with TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller
System, including Repeaters
6. To help validate a reliable mesh network is in place once the installation is complete, check the status LED on
each wireless TEC to make certain it indicates a connection to the TEC Coordinator.
Follow the steps in this section to estimate and locate your Many-to-One wireless room temperature sensing
system.
Estimating WRS Receiver Quantities
The following procedure is typically a pre-sale exercise used to establish material estimates for a proposed
Many-to-One application. The actual number of receivers required for the application may vary from the estimate
generated by this procedure. Typically, final installed applications require fewer receivers than the pre-sale
estimate.
To estimate and locate WRS receiver quantities:
1. Divide each floor or building in the Many-to-One application into defined logical rectangular areas and
determine the approximate length and width of each area. Mark the area boundaries and dimensions on your
copy of the plans.
Note: Estimate the required receivers for the total application area on each floor or building level area
separately. Wireless transmissions may pass through floors, but through-floor signal paths are not
recommended.
2. Within each defined area, determine or estimate the total number of large or MOs that most likely could block
line-of-sight wireless signal paths between sensors and associated receivers.

WIRELESS
LOCATE
3. See Table 33-6 on page 357 to determine the number of receivers required for each defined area in your
application based on the approximate length and width of the defined area and the number of MOs within the
defined area.
Examples of MOs include:
equipment chassis for HVAC, plumbing and electrical risers, metal reinforced walls, concrete walls, cinder
block walls, glass walls with metal coating, and large metal-reinforced columns and pillars
metal partitions, and displays.
Any MOs that are located on the exterior boundary of the application area (and not in the wireless line of sight
signal paths) should not be included in your estimate.
For estimating purposes, several small or minor obstructions can be grouped and considered a single MO.
Examples of minor obstructions include fixtures, multiple small pillars, sheetrock walls with metal or wood
studs, and glass walls without metal coating.
4. Add the receiver estimates from each defined area to determine the total number of receivers required for your
entire Many-to-One application.
Table 33-6: Estimated WRS Receiver Quantities in Many-to-One Applications (Part 1 of 2)
Application Area Estimated Number of Receivers for an Application Area Based on the
Dimensions Number of MOs
Length x Width, m (ft) Zero MOs One MOs Two MOs Three MOs Four MOs Five MOs
8 x 8 (25 x 25) 1 2 - - - -
15 x 15 (50 x 50) 1 2 3 - - -
31 x 15 (100 x 50) 1 2 3 4 5 6
31 x 31 (100 x 100) 1 2 3 4 5 6
61 x 15 (200 x 50) 1 2 3 4 5 6
61 x 31 (200 x 100) 1 2 3 4 5 6
61 x 61 (200 x 200) 1 2 3 4 5 6
91 x 31 (300 x 100) 1 2 3 4 5 6
91 x 61 (300 x 200) 1 2 3 4 5 6
122 x 91 (400 x 300) 1 3 4 5 6 7
122 x 122 (400 x 400) 1 3 4 5 6 7
152 x 31 (500 x 100) 2 3 4 5 6 7
152 x 61 (500 x 200) 2 4 4 6 6 7
152 x 91 (500 x 300) 3 4 5 6 7 8
152 x 122 (500 x 400) 2 3 4 5 6 7
152 x 152 (500 x 500) 2 3 4 5 6 7
183 x 31 (600 x 100) 2 3 4 5 6 7
183 x 61 (600 x 200) 2 3 4 5 6 7
183 x 91 (600 x 300) 3 4 4 6 7 8
152 x 122 (500 x 400) 4 5 5 6 7 8
152 x 152 (500 x 500) 4 5 5 6 7 8
183 x 31 (600 x 100) 5 5 6 7 8 9
183 x 61 (600 x 200) 3 3 4 5 6 7
183 x 91 (600 x 300) 3 4 5 6 7 8
183 x 122 (600 x 400) 3 4 5 6 7 8
183 x 152 (600 x 500) 4 5 5 6 7 8
183 x 183 (600 x 600) 5 5 6 7 8 9
244 x 31 (800 x 100) 3 3 4 5 6 7
244 x 61 (800 x 200) 3 4 5 6 7 8

WIRELESS
LOCATE
Table 33-6: Estimated WRS Receiver Quantities in Many-to-One Applications (Part 2 of 2)

Application Area Estimated Number of Receivers for an Application Area Based on the
Dimensions Number of MOs
Length x Width, m (ft) Zero MOs One MOs Two MOs Three MOs Four MOs Five MOs
244 x 91 (800 x 300) 3 4 5 6 7 8
244 x 122 (800 x 400) 6 6 7 7 8 9
244 x 152 (800 x 500) 6 7 8 9 10 11
244 x 183 (800 x 600) 6 7 8 9 10 11
244 x 213 (800 x 700) 8 8 9 10 11 12
244 x 244 (800 x 800) 9 9 10 11 12 13
To perform the steps for locating the Many-to-One products, you need the following:
• the WRS sensors configured and mounted in their final locations or an unmounted WRS sensor (and the
sensor locations identified)
• a WRS receiver, or (preferred) a combination of a WRS Series wireless sensing system tool and a laptop
computer
Locating WRS Many-to-One Sensors
When installing WRS Many-to-One Sensors:
• Locate the sensor on the same building level or floor as the receiver
Note: Wireless transmissions may pass through floors, but through-floor signal paths are not recommended.
• Locate the sensor in direct line of sight to the receiver wherever possible.
• Avoid metal obstructions (including equipment rooms and elevator shafts) between the receiver and the
sensor.
• Do not locate the sensor in recessed areas or metal enclosures.
Note: A WRS receiver can be located in a metal enclosure if the antenna is exposed outside of the enclosure.
• Do not mount a sensor less than 0.6 m (2 ft) from the receiver.
Locating WRS Many-to-One Receivers
Follow these steps to determine the optimum location for the WRS receivers in your Many-to-One applications.
To locate Many-to-One receivers:
1. Inspect the building plans floor by floor (section by section on each floor if necessary) and mark the locations of
all WRS sensors on the plans.
2. Highlight all of the obstructions on the building floor plans. Mark major and minor obstructions with different
colors. Examples of major obstructions include:
equipment chases for HVAC, plumbing and electrical risers, metal reinforced walls, concrete walls, cinder
block walls, glass walls with metal coating, and large metal-reinforced columns and pillars
metal partitions, and displays
Any major obstructions that are located on the exterior boundary of the application area (and not in the wireless
line of sight signal paths) should not be included in your estimate.
For estimating purposes, several small or minor obstructions can be grouped and considered a single MO.
Examples of minor obstructions include fixtures, multiple small pillars, sheetrock walls with metal or wood
studs, and glass walls without metal coating
3. For each floor or defined section on the plans, visually group the WRS sensors into logical groups that appear
able to associate with a single receiver. Mark and identify each of these logical groups.
Some points to observe as you group sensors:

WIRELESS
LOCATE
• Group clusters of sensors that are close together and not separated by a major obstruction
• In large unobstructed areas, all of the sensors within a 122 m (400 ft) or smaller diameter circle can be
considered a single group
• Some sensors may not be located in or near the logical/visual grouping. (These outlying sensors are
addressed in Step 5.)
4. For each identified sensor group, assume that one receiver, located near the center of the group, can
associate with all the sensors in the group. Mark the approximate optimum location for each receiver
associated with a sensor group. There may be a range of optimum locations for the receiver within the sensor
groups. If there is a range of receiver locations, mark and identify that range.
Note: It may be determined later in this procedure that two or more adjacent sensor groups can be associated
to a single receiver.
5. Identify and mark any outlying single sensors that are located away from the discrete logical groups you have
identified. For each of these outlying sensors, determine the optimum (identified) receiver location or receiver
range (determined in Step 4) with which the outlying sensor can be associated.
Some points to observe when determining which receiver should associate with an outlying sensor:
• Look for direct unobstructed line of sight signal paths between the outlying sensor and available receiver
locations.
• The closest receiver is not necessarily the best option. Look for the receiver with direct unobstructed line of
sight signal paths that are less than 61 m (200 ft).
• If there is only a minor obstruction between a sensor and receiver, you can assume a 30 m (100 ft) signal
transmission limit. Associate the sensor to the closest receiver within that limit.
6. Assume that any major obstruction or combination of multiple minor obstructions in the line of sight path
between a sensor and receiver blocks the wireless signal transmission.
7. Perform these steps for all areas in the Many-to-One application. Look for areas with sensor groups that can be
combined into a single group with one associated receiver.
8. When all the interior walls and furnishings are in place, return to the site and perform a follow-up signal
strength survey of the Many-to-One application to ensure that all the sensors are maintaining adequate signal
strength with their associated receivers.
WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool
The WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool is a lightweight, portable, wireless receiver designed to receive
wireless data transmissions from WRZ-TTx Series Sensors in one-to-one sensing system site survey applications.
It also serves as a signal test receiver or site survey tool prior to installing a ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus
System.
Use the WRZ-SST-100 Sensing System Tool prior to installation to verify the optimum locations for
WRZ-TTx Series Sensors and WRZ-7840-0 Receivers in wireless room temperature sensing system applications;
or for ZFR1810 Coordinators, ZFR1811 Routers, and WRZ-TTx Series Sensor in wireless field bus applications.
Detailed Procedure
IMPORTANT: If there are other wireless mesh networks in the area, ensure that the PAN Address of the WRZ-
7840 Receiver and WRZ-TTx Sensor (set by the TRANSMITTER ID and AREA DIP Switches) is different from
the PAN ID of those wireless mesh networks.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that one or more AREA DIP switches are set to ON. The devices do not work if all AREA
DIP switches are set to OFF.
Note: Ensure the power switches on the WRZ-7840 Receiver and WRZ-TTx Sensor are set to OFF before
proceeding.
1. Set the TRANSMITTER ID and AREA DIP switches on the WRZ-7840 Receiver and the WRZ-TTx Sensor to
the same address.

WIRELESS
LOCATE
2. Install the batteries into the battery pack.

3. Connect the battery pack wire harness to the two pin connector located under the TRANSMITTER ID DIP
switches on the back of the WRZ-7840 Receiver (Figure 33-9 on page 360).
WRZ-7840 Receiver Inside Panel of WRZ-7840 Receiver
RF Signal
Strength
RF
SA
LED
128
WRZ-TTx Sensor
64
32
16
4
2
8
8
4
2
1
ON ON
Manual Occupancy TRANSMITTER AREA

Override Button I.D.
BATT
FIG:WRZ7840_pnl
RF Signal
Strength Connect Battery Pack Wire
LED Harness Here
Figure 33-9: RF Signal Strength LEDs, Occupancy Button, Battery Pack Wire Harness Connection:
WRZ-7840 Receiver and WRZ-TTx Sensor
Note: Connecting a battery pack to the receiver changes the WRZ-7840 Receiver into the WRZ-SST-100 Tool.
4. Turn the battery pack switch to ON.
5. For a One-to-One wireless system, place the WRZ-SST-100 Tool in the location where the WRZ-7840
Receiver would be located, and place the WRZ-TTx Sensor in the location you intend to mount this device.
For a ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System, place the WRZ-TTx Sensor in a desired location for a
ZFR1811 Router and place the WRZ-SST-100 Tool in a desired location for a ZFR1811 Router or ZFR1810
Coordinator.
6. Power on the test sensor and allow it to establish communications with the WRZ-SST-100 Tool. When
communication is established, the RF signal LED on the WRZ-SST-100 Tool blinks (Figure 33-9 on page 360).
If communication is not established within 15 seconds, press the manual occupancy override button on the
WRZ-TTX sensor to force another communication attempt. The occupancy button is shown in Figure 33-9 on
page 360.
7. Once the sensor establishes communication with the WRZ-SST-100 Tool, press the occupancy button for
5 seconds to force the test sensor into RTM.

WIRELESS
LOCATE
8. Hold the WRZ-SST-100 Tool in the location desired and record the number of blinks of the RF LED every
10 seconds. See Table 33-7 on page 361.
Table 33-7: WRZ-SST-100 Tool: Wireless Signal Strength
Number of Blinks: RF Signal Strength LED Signal Strength
3 Excellent
2 Good
1 Weak
0 None
If the signal strength is less than Good, you may have to move the location of either device until an Excellent or
Good signal strength is indicated.
Move on to the next location, and repeat Steps 1 through 9 as necessary.
9. When testing is finished, turn off the battery switch on the WRZ-SST-100 Tool and the power switch on the test
sensor.
Operation
Wireless Signal Strength
RF signal strength LED indicates the strength of the wireless signal between the sensor and the associated
sensing system receiver, expressed as Excellent, Good, or Weak. The tool has an LED that blinks off one, two, or
three times for every transmission to indicate the signal strength between the sensor and tool, or router/coordinator
and tool. See Table 33-7 on page 361.
RTM and RF Signal Strength LEDs
Normally, the sensor transmits every 60 seconds; however, pressing and holding the manual occupancy override
button on a WRZ-TTx Series Sensor for 5 seconds or more forces the sensor into RTM. In RTM, a WRZ-TTx
Series Sensor sends a data transmission once every 10 seconds. The sensors remain in RTM up to a total of
30 transmissions. After each transmission, the LED of the sensor flashes (LED Off to On) to indicate the signal
strength between the sensor and WRS-SST-100 Tool. The WRS-SST-100 Tool blinks (LED on to off) to indicate the
wireless signal strength.
For additional information, refer to the WRZ-7840 Series One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing
System Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011411).
Table 33-8: Wireless Metasys System Related Documentation (Part 1 of 3)
Selecting the Appropriate Wireless Wireless Metasys® System Product LIT-12011244
Metasys System Bulletin
Applications, Features, and Benefits of ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus LIT-12011336
the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System Product Bulletin
System
Locating and Installing a ZFR1810 ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator Part No. 24-10325-2
Coordinator Installation Instructions
Locating and Installing a ZFR1811 ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router Part No. 24-10325-10
Router Installation Instructions
Locating and Installing WRZ-TTx WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Part No. 24-10332-2
Wireless Sensors Temperature Sensors Installation
Instructions

WIRELESS
LOCATE

Commissioning, Configuring, ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus LIT-12011295
Operating, and Troubleshooting the System Technical Bulletin
ZFR1810 Coordinator, ZFR1811 Routers,
WRZ-TTx Wireless Sensors, and the
ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus
System
Analyzing and Troubleshooting the ZFR Checkout Tool (ZCT) Technical LIT-12011343
Wireless Network Created by the Bulletin
ZFR1800 System
Verifying Optimum Locations for WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Part No. 24-10393-17
Wireless Products before Installation Tool Installation Instructions
Applications, Features, and Benefits of TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller LIT-12011400
the TEC Series Wireless Thermostat System for Staged Equipment Product
Controller System Bulletin
TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller LIT-12011401
System for Fan Coil and Zoning Equipment
Product Bulletin
Mounting and Wiring TEC20-xC TEC20 Wireless Coordinator Installation Part No. 24-9890-781
Coordinators Instructions
Mounting, Wiring, and Programming TEC2001-3 Single-Stage Wireless Part No. 24-9890-714
Wireless Thermostat Controllers Thermostat Controller Installation
Instructions
TEC2002-3 Heat Pump Wireless Part No. 24-9890-722
Thermostat Controller Installation
Instructions
TEC2003-3 Multi-Stage Wireless Part No. 24-9890-730
Instructions
TEC2004-3 Multi-Stage Economizer Part No. 24-9890-749
Wireless Thermostat Controller Installation
Instructions
TEC2045-2 Wireless Thermostat Controller Part No. 24-9890-757
with Single Proportional Output and One-
Speed Fan Control Installation Instructions
TEC20x6(H)-2 Series Wireless Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-765
Controllers with Two Outputs,
Dehumidification Capability, and Three
Speeds of Fan Control Installation
Instructions
TEC20x7-2 Series Wireless Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-773
Controllers with Two Outputs Installation
Instructions
Commissioning, Configuring, TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller LIT-12011414
Operating, and Troubleshooting the TEC System Technical Bulletin
Series Wireless Thermostat Controllers
Applications, Features, and Benefits of WRS Series Many-to-One Wireless Room LIT-12011094
the WRS Many-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System Product
Temperature Sensing System Bulletin
Locating and Installing WRS-TTx Series WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Part No. 24-10126-19
Sensors Temperature Sensors Installation
Instructions

WIRELESS
LOCATE
Locating and Installing WRS-RTN Series WRS-RTN Series Receivers for Part No. 24-10126-0
Receivers Many-to-One Wireless Room Temperature
Sensing Systems Installation Instructions
Commissioning, Configuring, WRS Series Many-to-One Wireless Room LIT-12011095
Operating, and Troubleshooting the Temperature Sensing System Technical
WRS-RTN Series Receivers, Bulletin
WRS-TTx Series Sensors, and the
Many-to-One Temperature Sensing
System
Using the WRS-SST Series Wireless WRS-SST Series Wireless Sensing Part No. 24-10139-16
Sensing System Tool to Test Wireless System Tools Technical Bulletin
Signal Strength between WRS-TTx
Sensors and WRS-RTN Receiver
Locations
TE-7800 Series One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System
Applications, Features, and Benefits of TE-7800 Series One-to-One Wireless LIT-12011096
the One-to-One Wireless Room Room Temperature Sensing System
Temperature Sensing System Product Bulletin
Locating, Mounting, and Installing the TE-7800 Series Receivers for One-to-One Part No. 24-10139-8
TE-7800 Series Receiver Wireless Room Temperature Sensing
Systems Installation Instructions
Locating and Installing WRS-TTx Series WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Part No. 24-10126-19
Sensors Temperature Sensors Installation
Instructions
Commissioning, Configuring, Operating TE-7800 Series One-to-One Wireless LIT-12011097
TE-7800 Series Receivers, Room Temperature Sensing System
WRS-TTx Series Sensors, and the Technical Bulletin
One-to-One Temperature Sensing
System
Using the WRS-SST Series Wireless WRS-SST Series Wireless Sensing Part No. 24-10139-16
Sensing System Tool to Test Wireless System Tools Technical Bulletin
Signal Strength, Locate Sensors and
Receivers, and Troubleshoot
One-to-One Wireless Sensing Systems

WIRELESS
LOCATE

ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator and Antenna
ZFR1810
90
(3.5)
FIG:ZFR1810_dimfeat
25
(1)
102
(4)
1270
(50)
146
(5.8)
52
(2.1)
122
(4.8)
PAN OFFSET
DIP Switches
FC Signal Strength/
24 VAC End-of-Line
BUS Status Optimize Network
Input Switch
Terminals LEDs Button
Power
Terminals
FC BUS FC BUS
IN OUT
Jack Jack
Figure 34-1: ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator, Physical Features and Dimensions, mm (in.)
Application
IMPORTANT: The ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System is not designed or intended for use in mission-
ZFR1810
critical or life/safety applications.
IMPORTANT: Before installing the ZFR1810 Coordinator in plenum applications, verify acceptance of exposed
plastic materials in plenum areas with the local building authority. Building codes for plenum requirements vary
by location.
Some local building authorities accept compliance to UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment, while others use
different acceptance criteria.
A ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator provides a wireless interface between field controllers equipped with a
ZFR1811 Router and a NAE35/45/55 or NCE25 supervisory controller. Each wireless mesh network requires one
ZFR1810 Coordinator, which initiates the formation of the network.
Note: The ZFR1810 Coordinator (and the ZFR1811 Routers) must be at the same Metasys system release
version as the wirelessly enabled FEC/VMA16x0 field controller. For information on uploading or downloading the
devices to match, refer to the Loading Devices chapter of the CCT Help (LIT-12011147).
A ZFR1810 Coordinator can operate from either of two power sources:
• a 24 VAC, Class 2 power source when used with an NAE55 supervisory controller
• 15 VDC power provided from the FC Bus Jack on most Field Equipment or Supervisory Controllers that are
connected directly to the FC Bus.
The ZFR1810 Coordinator features a remote-mount antenna and cable to allow transmission when the NAE35/45/
55 or NCE25 is mounted inside a metal panel.
Mounting
See Wireless Device Location and Mounting Considerations on page 345 for location and mounting guidelines
specific to wireless products, including the ZFR1810 Coordinator. For general guidelines on determining mounting
locations and installing wired network controllers and sensors, see Locating and Installing HVAC Controllers and
Sensors on page 13.
Follow these additional guidelines when installing a ZFR1810 Coordinator:
• Locate the ZFR1810 Coordinator near the center of the associated array of ZFR1811 Routers.
• At a minimum, position a ZFR1810 Coordinator within 15.2 m (50 ft) of at least two ZFR1811 Routers.
• At a minimum, position all ZFR1811 Routers within 15.2 m (50 ft) of at least two other ZFR1811 Routers or one
ZFR1811 Router and the ZFR1810 Coordinator.
• Locate the ZFR1810 Coordinator on the same floor as the associated ZFR1811 Router and
WRZ-TTx Sensors.
• Test the transmission signal strength between the ZFR1810 Coordinator and the associated ZFR1811 Router
and WRZ-TTx Sensors to ensure a reliable mesh network is in place.
• Avoid metal obstructions and concrete or brick walls between the ZFR1810 Coordinator and the associated
ZFR1811 Router and WRZ-TTx Sensors.
For detailed information on location guidelines for a ZFR1800 Series system, and for estimating the number of
ZFR1811 Routers needed as repeaters for extending wireless transmission range, refer to the Wireless Metasys
System Location Guide (LIT-12011294).
• four No. 6 pan-head, sheet-metal screws
• galvanized steel mounting bracket
• two No. 6 Trade Size pan-head, sheet-metal screws
• round bushing
• hexagonal bushing

• a small straight blade screwdriver for securing communication wires in the terminal blocks
Mounting the Base
ZFR1810
The ZFR1810 Coordinator can be surface mounted using
the four No. 6 Trade Size self-tapping, pan-head screws 2. Use the mounting base
3. Insert the four No. 6 screws into for screw hole template.
supplied. mount holes on mounting base and
tighten them evenly to the surface.
To mount the ZFR1810 Coordinator base with screws:
1. Remove the ZFR1810 Coordinator from the mounting Slots
base (Figure 34-2 on page 367).
2. Use the mounting base as a template, and place the
mounting base against the mounting surface. Locking
Tabs (4)
3. Drill pilot holes at the marked locations and secure
the mounting base to the surface with the supplied
FIG:ZFR1810_mnt_bse
four No. 6 Trade Size screws supplied.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten the mounting 4. Reinstall receiver

screws. Overtightening the mounting screws may housing by aligning locking
tabs with slots on mounting 1. Remove receiver housing by
damage the mounting base or mounting surface. pressing the locking tabs in at
base and pressing housing
until it locks on to base. the slots in the mounting base to
4. Mount the antenna and connect the antenna cable to release the receiver from base.
the ZFR1810 Coordinator. See Assembling the
Antenna on page 367. Figure 34-2: Mounting the ZFR1810 Coordinator
5. Reinstall the ZFR1810 Coordinator housing to the
mounted base.
Assembling the Antenna
FIG:ZFR1810_ant_mnt
IMPORTANT: Use the antenna provided. Do not
alter the antenna in any way or use another
antenna. Do not modify the antenna cable in any
way.
Antenna
IMPORTANT: Minimum bend radius for the
antenna cable is 25 mm (1 in.). Any bend with a
smaller radius may damage the cable. Mounting
Screws
If mounting the ZFR810 Coordinator in a control panel,
choose a location on the top side of the control panel for
placement of the antenna. Ensure that the selected
location has line-of-sight to two or more ZFR1811
Routers. Hexagonal
Use Figure 34-3 on page 367 and the following steps to Bushing
assemble the remote-mount antenna: Antenna
Mounting
1. Remove the knock-out tab on the enclosure/panel Bracket
Round
box or drill a 7/8 in. diameter hole in the desired Bushing
Antenna
location on the top of the enclosure. Recloseable
Cable
Fastener Tape
2. Insert the round bushing into the hole in the
enclosure.
3. Insert the hexagonal bushing into the antenna
Figure 34-3: Mounting the Antenna
mounting bracket.
4. Thread the antenna cable through the hexagonal bushing.
5. Insert the base of the antenna into the hexagonal bushing and press until it snaps securely in place.
6. Thread the antenna cable through the round bushing at the top of the panel.
ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator and Antenna: Section 34 367

Mounting the Antenna Using Screws
To mount the antenna using screws:
ZFR1810
1. Center the antenna mounting bracket over the 7/8 in. (22 mm) round bushing.
2. Using the bracket as a template, drill two 3/32 in. (2 mm) pilot holes into the enclosure.
3. Screw the bracket into place using the supplied self-tapping mounting screws
Mounting the Antenna Using RFT
When sold as part of a panel assembly, six pieces of RFT are supplied with the unit. Use this tape between the
antenna bracket and the enclosure. To mount the antenna using RFT:
1. Ensure all mounting surfaces are clean and free of dust, oils, and debris before applying the RFT.
2. Remove the adhesive backing on two pieces of RFT and place one piece on the bottom of each antenna
bracket mounting foot.
3. Affix a mating piece of RFT onto each piece of RFT on the mounting bracket so that the fasteners mesh
together. Remove the adhesive backing on the mating pieces.
4. Center the bracket over the 7/8 in. (22 mm) round bushing and apply the bracket to the top of the panel. Push
down on the feet of the bracket until you feel the fasteners lock into position and the adhesive bonding to the
panel is completely attached.
Note: Extra pieces of RFT are provided so that you can change the mounting location on the top of the panel at a
later date if necessary.
Attaching the Antenna to the ZFR1810 Coordinator
To attach the antenna to the ZFR1810 Coordinator:
1. Remove the top cover of the ZFR1810 Coordinator by simultaneously pushing in both flexible tabs on one side
of the unit, followed by pushing in the tabs on the other side of the unit.
2. Remove the top portion of the unit.
3. Apply the antenna wire firmly to the connection point (see Figure 34-1 on page 365) until it locks into place.
IMPORTANT: The connection from the antenna cable to the ZFR1810 Coordinator is intended to be made only
once. Do not remove it once you have inserted it into the jack. If you must remove the antenna, disassemble the
case of the ZFR1810 Coordinator and remove the antenna from the jack by pulling on the knurled end of the
antenna's connector only. Pulling on the antenna cable from anywhere else can result in damage to the antenna.
Avoid any repeat removals and re-insertions as this may impact wireless connection integrity and unit
performance.
4. Replace the top portion and cover of the ZFR1810 Coordinator.

Wiring
In addition, follow these guidelines when wiring the ZFR1810:
• Mount the ZFR1810 securely before wiring it.
• Route the wires at least 50 mm (2 in.) away from the vent slots on the sides of the ZFR1810 Coordinator
housing.
• Provide slack in the wires. Keep wires routed neatly around the ZFR1810 Coordinator to promote good
ventilation, LED visibility, and ease of service.
IMPORTANT: Before installing the ZFR1810 Coordinator in plenum applications, verify acceptance of exposed
by location.
Some local building authorities accept compliance to UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment, while others
use different acceptance criteria.

IMPORTANT: Do not connect the ZFR1810 Coordinator to the power supply before setting the PAN OFFSET
switches.
ZFR1810
Power Input and Communication
Wiring for power input and communication uses one of two methods: terminal blocks or the FC Bus jack.
Terminal Blocks - Power
Use a 24 VAC nominal, 50/60 Hz, Class 2 power supply to power the ZFR1810 Coordinator. See Table 34-3 on
page 374 for recommended Johnson Controls transformers.
Connect the 24 VAC supply power wires from the transformer to the HOT and COM terminals of the 24 V~ three-
position screw terminal pluggable block as shown in Figure 34-4 on page 369 and Figure 34-1 on page 365. The
middle terminal is not used.
Note: Transformers not manufactured by
Johnson Controls may have different color wires. Follow ZFR1810
the manufacturer’s instructions when mounting and wiring Supply Power
transformers. Terminal Block
COM
Terminal Blocks - Communication
Connect the communication wires from the NAE or NCE 24V~ ZFR1810
to the four-position screw terminal pluggable block, as Supply Power
shown in Figure 34-5 on page 369 and Figure 34-1 on Terminal Block
Plug
page 365.
FC Bus Jack - Power and Communication
COM
HOT
Use a six conductor SA Bus RS-485 cable with RJ12
connectors to connect the ZFR1810 Coordinator to the
Wires from
FC Bus connector (FC/SA BUS IN) on the NAE, NCE, or
FIG:ZFR1810_Pwr_Prt
Johnson Controls
FEC26x0 controller. This connection provides both power 24 VAC, Class 2
Power Transformer
and communication to the ZFR1810 Coordinator.
Orange Wire Brown Wire
(24 VAC) (COM)
Figure 34-4: ZFR1810 Coordinator 24 VAC Power

Supply Connection
FC/SA BUS
Terminal
SHLD
COM
Block
+
FC/SA BUS
Terminal Block
Plug
COM
SH
LD
-
+
A
FIG:ZFR1810_FC_SA_Bs
(MS/TP) = + - COM
FC/SA Bus
Figure 34-5: ZFR1810 Coordinator

Communication Connection

Power Supply Output
IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the power supply output of the ZFR1810 Coordinator. The ZFR1810
ZFR1810
Coordinator’s power supply input must be able to source the ZFR1810 Coordinator and the connected external
devices. Exceeding the power supply input limits may cause the ZFR1810 Coordinator to shut down.
Use a six conductor SA Bus RS-485 cable with RJ45 connectors to connect an external Metasys device to the FC
BUS OUT jack as shown in Figure 34-1 on page 365.
PAN Offset
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the PAN Offset switches are set to the same value for the ZFR1810 Coordinator and
each associated ZFR1811 Router, and WRZ-TTx Sensor in a mesh network.
IMPORTANT: Set DIP switch 128 to On for all MS/TP controllers that are to communicate with the ZFR1800
Series Wireless Field Bus system. This setting enables wireless mode on the controller. For details, see the
specific guidelines document for the controller in this book.
Set the PAN Offset value of the ZFR1810 Coordinator using the DIP switches to configure the ZFR1810
Coordinator to communicate with the ZFR1811 Routers assigned to it. See Figure 34-1 on page 365 for the
location of the switches and Figure 34-6 on page 371 for an example.
The PAN Offset value equals the sum of the numbers set to ON. For example, if the DIP switches labeled
1, 4, and 8 are set to ON, the PAN Offset value is 13 (1 + 4 + 8 = 13). As a best practice for setting these switches,
set the highest switch value first, then the next highest switch value, and so on, until the total of the switch values
equal the intended device address.
When selecting a PAN Offset value for a wireless system:
• Use a unique PAN Offset value for each wireless mesh network at a job site.
• Use the same PAN Offset value for each wireless device in a wireless mesh network - the
ZFR1810 Coordinator and each associated ZFR1811 Router and WRZ-TTx Sensor.

PAN Offset and MS/TP Address Interaction
If the Metasys system is at Release 4.0, set the MS/TP address of the ZFR1810 Coordinator to 2.
ZFR1810
If the Metasys system is at Release 4.1 and later, the MS/TP address of the ZFR1810 Coordinator is no longer
fixed at 2. The new address is 120 plus the value summation of switch 8, switch 7, and switch 6 of the PAN
Offset, giving an MS/TP address range of 120 to 127. See the example in Figure 34-6 on page 371.
Note: Only the values associated with Switches 6, 7, and 8 that are set to the ON position count towards the
MS/TP address.
ZFR1810 Coordinator ZFR1810 Coordinator

MS/TP Address 125 (1 per Bus)
NAE
Not Used
PAN Offset
64
16
32
1
2
8
4
FC Bus MS/TP Address of ZFR1810
ON Coordinator = 120 + the value
summation of switches
OFF SW8, SW7, and SW6 of the
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PAN Offset set to ON.
SW8 (Value 1) = ON
PAN Offset = 13 SW7 (Value 2) = OFF
FEC MS/TP Address = 125 SW6 (Value 4) = ON
MS/TP Address 4 MS/TP Address = 120+1+4=125
ZFR1811
ZFR1811 Router
IOM
Not Used
MS/TP Address 5 PAN Offset
VMA MS/TP Address
64
32
16
1
8
4
2
VMA1600
MS/TP Address 6 ON
OFF
1
128
2
64
32
16
8
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PAN Offset = 13 MS/TP Address = 6

(Switch 128 is ON for
wireless mode with
IMPORTANT NOTES ZFR1800 Series System.)
PAN Offset for all devices in the mesh

MUST match and be independent
of other wireless meshes located in
adjacent areas.
1
8
2
On
MS/TP Address for MS/TP Controller
and its WRZ-TTx sensor MUST match. WRZ-TTx Sensor Power
SA Address 199
WRZ-TTx Series Sensor Off Zone
WRZ-TTx Sensor SA Bus Setting
1
32
16
64
4
2
8
10mW
64
16
1
32
4
2
Mesh
Switch (SW) Position SA Bus Address
All SW OFF 199 ON
Only SW1 ON 200
Only SW2 ON 201 OFF
NA PAN Offset 1mW MSTP Add
SW1 and SW2 ON 202
SW4 and SW8 OFF
Mesh is ON for use with Power = On
Only SW8 ON 203 ZFR1800 Series System Zone = SA Bus Address 199 (Zone 0)
Note: You can use up to 4 WRZ-TTx sensors. (Set according to application)
FIG:ZFR_sttngs
PAN Offset = 13
Transmit Level = 10 mW
MS/TP Address = 6
Figure 34-6: Setting the DIP Switches
In the example of Figure 34-6 on page 371, the PAN Offset of the ZFR1810 Coordinator is configured to 13 by
setting SW8, SW6, and SW5 (values 1, 4, and 8) to the ON position. The value summation of SW8 (value 1) and
SW6 (value 4) is 5, so the MS/TP address of the ZFR1810 Coordinator is 120 + 5, which equals 125.

Setting the FC Bus EOL Switch
Set the EOL switch on the ZFR1810 Coordinator according to the ZFR1810 Coordinator’s position on the FC Bus
ZFR1810
segment. The EOL switch position is Up for ON and Down for OFF. See EOL Termination on the MS/TP Bus on
page 81.
Status LEDs
The ZFR1810 Coordinator has five LEDs that indicate power, fault status, FC Bus activity, wireless activity, and
signal strength. See Figure 34-1 on page 365 for the location of these LEDs. These LEDs are described in
Table 34-1 on page 372.
Table 34-1: ZFR1810 Coordinator Status LEDs
Name Color LED Normal Descriptions
Switch
Number
(Left to
Right)
Power Green 1 On Off Steady = No power.
On Steady = Normal operation (power
available from 24 VAC connector or Field
Controller
Sensor Actuator [FC/SA] Bus IN jack).
Fault Red 2 Off Off Steady = Normal.
On Steady = Internal Errors detected.
FC Bus Green 3 Blink Blink - 2 Hz = Normal operation (ZFR1810
Coordinator is receiving BACnet frames over
the wire).
Off Steady = Attempting to Auto Baud, or
not connected to active MS/TP network.
On Steady = Auto Baud complete and not
receiving BACnet frames.
Wireless Green 4 Blink Blink - 2 Hz = Normal operation (ZFR1810
Coordinator is receiving BACnet frames over
the wire).
Off Steady = Not receiving BACnet frames.
On Steady = Stopped receiving BACnet
frames.
Signal Strength Green 5 Signal Strength1 Indication: OFF Steady = Not able to start a network.
3 Blinks - Good signal strength ON Steady with Signal Strength displayed
2 Blinks - Average signal strength once every 5 seconds = Normal operation
(ZFR1810 Coordinator is a member of a
1 Blink - Poor signal strength wireless network).
OFF for 3 seconds - No other
wireless devices within range
1. Signal Strength appears once every 10 seconds or when the Signal Strength/Optimize Network button on the
ZFR1810 Coordinator is depressed momentarily (less than 5 seconds).

The wireless signal strength indication LED displays the reception strength of the transmissions between the
ZFR1810 Coordinators, ZFR1811 Routers, and the WRZ-TTx Series Sensors. This LED helps determine the
network connectivity status when selecting locations for the devices during system installation.
Approximately once every 10 seconds, the Signal Strength LED flashes to indicate the reception strength of the
signal from neighboring devices. See Table 34-1 on page 372 for the location of this LED and Figure 34-1 on
page 365 for a description.

Use the WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool with a WRZ-TTx Sensor as a site survey tool to determine
ZFR1810
the wireless signal strength between a ZFR1810 Coordinator and a ZFR1811 Router or between two ZFR1811
Routers. See WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool on page 359 for more information on testing signal
strength in your application.
Signal Strength/Optimize Network Button
IMPORTANT: Do not use the Restore Defaults function unless specifically directed by the Field Support
Center at Johnson Controls.
The Signal Strength/Optimize Network Button allows the ZFR1810 Coordinator to use any of three functions:
• Signal Strength
• Optimize Network
• Restore Defaults
Use the Signal Strength mode to aid in signal strength testing. Refer to the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus
System Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011295) and Wireless Metasys System Location Guide (LIT-12011294) for more
information.
Use the Optimize Network mode to clear the mesh device routing tables of the ZFR1811 Routers and attempt to
find shorter and/or stronger signal paths to the ZFR1810 Coordinator. See Table 34-2 on page 373.
Note: The Optimize Network process can take up to 15 minutes to complete.
Table 34-2: Signal Strength/Optimize Network Button
Holding the Signal Strength/Optimize Network Puts the ZFR1810 Coordinator into the _____ Mode
Button for ___
0-5 Seconds Signal Strength
5-10 Seconds Optimize Network
10+ Seconds Restore Defaults1
1. Do not use the RESTORE DEFAULTS mode unless specifically directed by the Field Support Center.

Accessories
Table 34-3: ZFR1810 Coordinator Accessories (Order Separately)
ZFR1810
Product Code Number Product Description

TP-2420 Transformer, Wall Plug Mount, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 20 VA, Class 2
IA OEM-DAUB1 2400 USB Dongle with ZigBee Driver provides a wireless connection through the CCT to
allow wireless commissioning of the wirelessly enabled FEC and VMA1600 field
controllers. Also allows use of the ZCT in CCT. (Purchase through Johnson Controls
eCounterline.)
WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool. Requires WRZ-TTx Sensor to function as a site
survey tool for ZFR1800 Wireless Field Bus System, or for
WRZ-7840-0 One-to-One Room Temperature Sensing System.
Y65T31-01 Transformer, 120/208/240 VAC to 24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2, Foot Mount, 20 cm (8 in.)
Primary Leads and Secondary Screw Terminals
1. Additional Y60 Series Transformers are available from Johnson Controls.
Table 34-4: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up ZFR1810 Wireless Coordinators
Installation Instructions for ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Part No. 24-10325-2
ZFR1810 Wireless Coordinator Coordinator Installation Instructions
Commissioning and Configuring the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus LIT-12011295
ZFR1810 Wireless Coordinator System Technical Bulletin
Checking the Performance of the ZFR Checkout Tool (ZCT) Technical LIT-12011343
Wireless Mesh Network Bulletin
General Background on Wireless Wireless Metasys System Location LIT-12011294
Metasys System Products Guide
Table 34-5: ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator (Part 1 of 2)
Product Code Number MS-ZFR1810-0
Power Supply Input One of the following:
24 VAC +10%/-15%, 50/60 Hz, Class 2. Transformer allowance should be 2.5 VA maximum, 2 VA
typical. Provided through the three-position 24 V~ screw terminal pluggable block.
15 VDC, 180 mA (7 to 18 VDC, 185 mA maximum current draw) provided through the FC BUS IN
RS-485 (RJ-12) jack from the FC Bus Jack on a Field Controller or NxE supervisory engine.
Power Supply Output 15 VDC; Provided to the FC BUS OUT RJ-12 jack for external devices.
Addressing DIP Switches, Field Adjustable.
Wireless Band Direct-Sequence Spread-Spectrum, 2.4 GHz ISM Bands
Transmission Power 10 mW Maximum
Transmission Range 76.2 m (250 ft) Maximum Line-of-Sight
15 m (50 ft) Practical Average
Ambient Conditions Operating: 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F), 5 to 95% RH, Noncondensing
Storage: -20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F), 5 to 90% RH, Noncondensing
Materials White Plastic Housing with Plenum rating per UL1995 UL94-5VB Flammability Rating

Table 34-5: ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator (Part 2 of 2)
Terminations Two spade terminals with three-position screw terminal pluggable block for 24 VAC power supply
ZFR1810
input.
Four spade terminals with four-position screw terminal pluggable block for RS-485
communications connection from an NxE or FEC.
RJ-12 IN jack for 15 VDC power supply and RS-485 communications connection from an NxE or
FEC FC Bus jack.
RJ-12 OUT jack supplies 15 VDC and communications to BTCVT Wireless Commissioning
Converter.
Mounting Hardware Four No. 6 Trade Size Sheet Metal Screws
Shipping Weights 0.45 kg (1.0 lb)
Compliance United States:
Intended for Connection to an NEC Class 2 Power Source;
UL 916 Energy Management
Plenum rated per UL1995 UL94-5VB Flammability Rating
Transmission Complies with FCC Part 15.247 Regulations for Low Power Unlicensed
Transmitters
Transmitter FCC Identification: TFB-MATRIXL
Canada:
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment
Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B Limits
Industry Canada IC: 5969A-MATRIXL
Europe:
CE Mark – EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, Radio Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive
99/5/EC (Required European certifications pending)
specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or
misuse of its products.

ZFR1810

ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router
Status LED
100
(3-15/16) 18
(3/4)
ZFR1811
00-10-8D-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
136
(5-3/8)
PAN OFFSET
DIP Switches
1219
(48)
FIG:ZFR1811_dim
RJ-12 Plug
connects to
Field Controller's 18
FC/SA Bus RJ-12 Jack (3/4)
Figure 35-1: ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router, Physical Features and Dimensions, mm (in.)
Application
IMPORTANT: The ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System is not designed or intended for use in mission-
IMPORTANT: Before installing the ZFR1811 Router in plenum applications, verify acceptance of exposed
by location.
Some local building authorities accept compliance to UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment, whereas others
use different acceptance criteria.
A ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router is used with an FEC16x0, FEC26x0, or VMA1600 Series field controller.
The ZFR1811 Router provides a wireless interface between:
• a field controller and the supervisory engine (by way of a ZFR1810 Coordinator)
• a field controller and its associated WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Mesh Room Temperature Sensors
Up to four WRZ-TTx Series Sensors can be associated with a single ZFR1811 Router. In multi-sensor applications,
the ZFR1811 Router passes all the sensors’ data to a VMA1600 or FEC controller, which can be configured to
either average the sensors’ temperature input or select the highest or lowest sensed temperature for control of the
target zone.
A ZFR1811 Router can be powered directly from the connected field controller’s 15 VDC output. It can also be
powered by the power supply in the Repeater Accessory Kit (MS-ZFRRPT-0) to serve as a stand-alone repeater,
extending the range of the communications within the wireless mesh network.
Note: The ZFR1811 Routers (and the ZFR1810 Coordinator) must be at the same Metasys system release
version as the wirelessly enabled FEC/VMA16x0 field controller. For information on uploading or downloading the
devices to match, refer to the Loading Devices chapter of the CCT Help (LIT-12011147).
Mounting
When mounting the ZFR1811 Router to an enclosure, Proper Mounting Orientation
mount it to the top, bottom, or side of the enclosure, as
ZFR1811
shown in Figure 35-2 on page 378. Do not mount the

ZFR1811 Router in a horizontal orientation, as shown in
See Wireless Device Location and Mounting
Considerations on page 345 for location and mounting
guidelines specific to wireless products, including the
ZFR1811 Router. For general guidelines on determining
mounting locations and installing wired network
controllers and sensors, see Locating and Installing
HVAC Controllers and Sensors on page 13.
Follow these additional guidelines when locating a
ZFR1811 Router within a ZFR1800 Series System.
• Locate the ZFR1811 Router so that it is easily
accessible.
• For best signal transmission, vertically orient the
ZFR1811 Router with at least 50 mm (2 in.) of the flag
end of the router exposed below (and clear of) any
pipes, duct work, or other metal obstructions. Do not
mount the ZFR1811 Router in a horizontal
orientation. Improper Mounting Orientation
• The ZFR1811 Router is the same size as 1/2 in. EMT

and comes with a 1/2 in. EMT connector. This design
allows you to extend the ZFR1811 Router with 1/2 in.
EMT using a 1/2 in. EMT coupling. In locations where
EMT is not required, you can also use standard EMT
hangers to support the ZFR1811 Router.
• Due to the nature of the radio frequency waves, a
wireless device may have significantly different signal
strengths if its position changes relative to another
wireless device or if its environment changes. If a
ZFR1811 Router shows poor signal strength, you
may be able to improve the signal strength by rotating
the ZFR1811 Router.
• Locate the ZFR1811 Router in line-of-sight with as
FIG:ZFR1811 mntng
many ZFR1811 Routers and WRZ-TTx Sensors as

possible.
• Do not mount the ZFR1811 Router in recessed
areas, metal enclosures, or shelving units. Figure 35-2: Proper and Improper Mounting
Orientations
Note: For detailed information on location guidelines for
a ZFR1800 Series system, and for estimating the number
of ZFR1811 Routers needed as repeaters for extending wireless transmission range, refer to the Wireless Metasys
System Location Guide (LIT-12011294).

Wireless Signal Transmission Considerations
Line-of-sight transmission ranges between a ZFR1810 Coordinator, ZFR1811 Router, and/or a WRZ-TTx Sensor
can be less than the maximum distances shown in Table 35-1 on page 379. The effective transmission range for
indoor applications varies because of wireless signal absorption and reflection due to metal obstructions, walls (or
floors), and furniture found in typical building interiors.
Table 35-1: Indoor Line-of-Sight Transmission Ranges
ZFR1811
Range Type Transmission Distance
ZFR1810 Coordinator, ZFR1811 Router WRZ-TTx Series Sensor
Recommended 15.2 m (50 ft) 15.2 m (50 ft)
Maximum 76.2 m (250 ft) 30 m (98 ft)
Wiring
Wiring Considerations and Guidelines . SA BUS
Terminal FC BUS
Block Terminal
IMPORTANT: Do not connect supply power to the Block
ZFR1811 Router before finishing wiring and checking
all wiring connections. Short circuits or improperly
the Router.
COM
PWR
SHLD
COM
+
SA
-
-
IMPORTANT: Use copper conductors only. Make all
wiring in accordance with local, national, and regional
regulations. The ZFR1811 Router is a low voltage
(less than 30 VAC) device. Do not exceed the
PWR
COM
ZFR1811 Router’s electrical ratings.
COM
SA
-
+
SH
LD
-
+
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge SA BUS FC BUS

to the ZFR1811 Router. Static electric discharge can Terminal Block Terminal Block
Plug Plug
damage the ZFR1811 Router and void any
warranties.
IMPORTANT: Do not connect the ZFR1811 Router

to the power supply before setting the PAN OFFSET
switches.
FIG:ZFRCBL
Wiring with an FEC or VMA1600 Series Field
Controller
Connect the ZFR1811 Router to the field controller as RJ-12 Jack
shown in Figure 35-4 on page 380. If you are connecting Figure 35-3: ZFRCBL Accessory (Not to Scale)
an FEC1610 to the ZFR1811 Router, see Figure 35-5 on
page 381. The connection provides both power and
communication to the ZFR1811 Router. Some connections require the use of the ZFRCBL wire harness
(Figure 35-3 on page 379). To use the ZFRCBL wire harness, make the connections as shown in Figure 35-4 on
page 380 and Figure 35-5 on page 381. For more information on using the ZFRCBL accessory, refer to the
Wireless Commissioning Converter Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-10108-2).
ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router: Section 35 379

IOM1710, IOM2710,
IOM3710, or IOM4710
COM
PWR
FEC1610, FEC26x0, or VMA16x0
SA
SA
+
TERMINALS
SHLD
COM
SA BUS FC BUS FC
ZFR1811
+
-
SA PWR
Sensor SA/FC Bus
SHLD
COM
COM
+
+
-
-
Plug into
VMA Sensor
Port
ZFR1811 Router MS-ZFRCBL-0 Pinout
PIN 2
PIN 1 PIN # Wires To
PINS 4 & 6 MS-ZFRCBL-0
RJ12
PINS 3 & 5 1 FC +
Use the ZFR wire harness
when an extra RJ12 is 2 FC -
needed. If you connect an 3 SA COM
FIG:Wirng_Wrlss1
IOM, re-work the 4 SA PWR
1:2 Splitter connection by cutting off 5 SA COM
RJ12 type only ends and re-terminating to 6 SA PWR
Use in conjunction connectors supplied with
with the MS-ZFRCBL-0 the controller. PIN 1
to add two extra RJ12
connections. Balancing Thermostat
or BTCVT
DIS1710 Local Display °C
Module
RJ12
RJ12
- +
C° /
F°
Figure 35-4: Bus Wiring for FEC1610, FEC26x0, and VMA16x0 Controllers

Pan Offset
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the PAN OFFSET switches are set to the same value for each ZFR1810 Coordinator,
ZFR1811 Router, and WRZ-TTx Sensor in a mesh network.
IMPORTANT: Do not connect the ZFR1811 Router to the power supply before setting the PAN OFFSET
switches.
IMPORTANT: On the associated FEC/VMA Field Controller’s MS/TP Address switch block, set switch 128 to
ON for use with a ZFR1811 Router.
Set the PAN Offset value of the ZFR1811 Router using the DIP switches (located on the back of the cover) to
configure the ZFR1811 Router to communicate with the WRZ-TTx Sensors assigned to it and the ZFR1810
Coordinator to which the ZFR1811 Router is assigned. See Figure 35-1 on page 377 for the location of the
switches and Figure 35-6 on page 382 for an example.

IOM1710, IOM2710,
IOM3710, OR IOM4710
COM
PWR
SA
FEC1620 TERMINALS SA
+
-
SHLD
COM
SA BUS FC BUS FC
ZFR1811
-
SA PWR
SENSOR SA/FC
SHLD
COM
COM
Plug into BUS
+
-
-
VMA
Sensor
Port
Balancing Thermostat
or BTCVT MS-ZFRCBL-0 Pinout
°C
PIN 2
PIN 1
PIN # Wires To
PINS 4 & 6
RJ12
PINS 3 & 5 MS-ZFRCBL-0 1 FC +

- +
C° /
F°
Use the ZFR wire harness 2 FC -
to connect the Router. Do 3 SA COM
not plug the Router into the 4 SA PWR
FIG:Wirng_Wrlss2
Sensor port. If you connect
5 SA COM
ZFR1811 an IOM, rework the
connection by cutting off 6 SA PWR
Router
ends and re-terminating to
connectors supplied with the PIN 1
RJ12
controller.
Figure 35-5: Bus Wiring for FEC1620 Controller

The value equals the sum of the numbers set to ON. For example, if the DIP switches labeled 1, 4, and 8 are set to
ON, the PAN Offset value is 13 (1 + 4 + 8 = 13). As a best practice for setting these switches, set the highest switch
value first, then the next highest switch value, and so on, until the total of the switch values equal the intended
device address.
When selecting a PAN Offset value for a wireless system:
• Use a unique PAN Offset value for each wireless mesh network at a job site.
• Use the same PAN Offset value for each wireless device in a wireless mesh network - the
ZFR1810 Coordinator and each associated ZFR1811 Router and WRZ-TTx Sensor.

ZFR1810 Coordinator ZFR1810 Coordinator
MS/TP Address 125 (1 per Bus)
NAE
Not Used
PAN Offset
64
16
32
1
2
8
4
MS/TP Address of ZFR1810
ZFR1811
FC Bus
ON Coordinator = 120 + the value
summation of switches
OFF SW8, SW7, and SW6 of the
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PAN Offset set to ON.
SW8 (Value 1) = ON
PAN Offset = 13 SW7 (Value 2) = OFF
FEC MS/TP Address = 125 SW6 (Value 4) = ON
MS/TP Address 4 MS/TP Address = 120+1+4=125
ZFR1811
ZFR1811 Router
IOM
Not Used
MS/TP Address 5 PAN Offset
VMA MS/TP Address
64
32
16
1
8
4
2
VMA1600
MS/TP Address 6 ON
OFF
1
128
2
64
32
16
8
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PAN Offset = 13 MS/TP Address = 6

(Switch 128 is ON for
wireless mode with
IMPORTANT NOTES ZFR1800 Series System.)
PAN Offset for all devices in the mesh

MUST match and be independent
of other wireless meshes located in
adjacent areas.
1
8
2
On
Power
MS/TP Address for MS/TP Controller
and its WRZ-TTx sensor MUST match. WRZ-TTx Sensor
SA Address 199
WRZ-TTx Series Sensor Off Zone
WRZ-TTx Sensor SA Bus Setting
1
32
16
64
4
2
8
10mW
64
16
1
32
4
2
Mesh
Switch (SW) Position SA Bus Address
All SW OFF 199 ON
Only SW1 ON 200
Only SW2 ON 201 OFF
NA PAN Offset 1mW MSTP Add
SW1 and SW2 ON 202
SW4 and SW8 OFF
Mesh is ON for use with Power = On
Only SW8 ON 203 ZFR1800 Series System Zone = SA Bus Address 199 (Zone 0)
Note: You can use up to 4 WRZ-TTx sensors. (Set according to application)
FIG:ZFR_sttngs
PAN Offset = 13
Transmit Level = 10 mW
MS/TP Address = 6
Figure 35-6: Sample DIP Switch Settings

The ZFR1811 Router has a wireless signal strength indication LED that displays the reception strength of the
transmissions between the ZFR1810 Coordinators, ZFR1811 Routers, and the WRZ-TTx Series Sensors. This
LED helps determine the network connectivity status when selecting locations for the devices during system
installation. Approximately once every 10 seconds, the Signal Strength LED flashes to indicate the strength of the
signal received from neighboring devices. See Figure 35-1 on page 377 for the location of this LED, which is
described in Table 35-2 on page 383.
ZFR1811
Table 35-2: ZFR1811 Router Status LED
Signal Green Signal Strength Indication: OFF Steady = No power.
Strength 3 Blinks - Good signal strength OFF Steady with 1 blink every 5 seconds = ZFR1811
2 Blinks - Average signal strength Router is not a member of a wireless network, invalid PAN
1 Blink - Poor signal strength OFFSET setting, no ZFR1810 Coordinators or ZFR1811
Routers in area.
OFF for 3 seconds - No wireless
signal ON Steady with signal strength displayed once every
5 seconds = ZFR1811 Router is a member of a wireless
network.
OFF Steady with signal strength displayed once every
5 seconds = Wireless network is actively communicating,
but ZFR1810 Coordinator cannot be reached (for example,
coordinator lost power).
Wireless transmissions between ZFR1810 Coordinators and ZFR1811 Routers occur continuously as needed.
Wireless transmissions between ZFR1811 Routers and WRZ-TTx Sensors occur approximately every 60 seconds
or when the occupancy button on the WRZ-TTx Sensor is pressed. See WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room
Temperature Sensors on page 385 for more information.
Use the WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool with a WRZ-TTx Sensor as a site survey tool to determine
the wireless signal strength between a ZFR1810 Coordinator and a ZFR1811 Router or between two ZFR1811
Routers. Refer to the WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-10393-17)
for more information on testing signal strength in your application.
Accessories
See Table 35-3 on page 383 for information on accessories for the ZFR1811 Router.
Table 35-3: Accessories
Product Code Product Description
Number
MS-ZFRRPT-0 Optional Repeater Accessory for use with ZFR1811 Router as a repeater. Includes power supply
(20-28 VAC or 16-30 VDC input power and 12 VDC output power), and 4 x 4 in. electrical box with
cover.
WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool. Requires WRZ-TTx Sensor to function as a site survey tool for
ZFR1800 Wireless Field Bus System, or for WRZ-7840-0 One-to-One Room Temperature Sensing
System.
MS-ZFRCBL-0 Wire Harness with Connectors for use with MS-ZFR1811-0 Router for Wireless Field Bus. Allows
ZFR1811 Router to function with FEC1620 controller; and with FEC1610, VMA1610, or VMA1620
controllers in conjunction with NS Series Sensors, MS-BTCVT-1 Wireless Commissioning Converter, or
DIS1710 Local Controller Display.

Table 35-4: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up ZFR1811 Routers
Installation Instructions for ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router Part No. 24-10325-10
ZFR1811 Wireless Router Installation Instructions
Commissioning and Configuring the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus LIT-12011295
ZFR1811
ZFR1811 Wireless Router System Technical Bulletin

General Background on Wireless Wireless Metasys System Location LIT-12011294
Metasys System Products Guide
Table 35-5: ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router
Product Code Number MS-ZFR1811-0
Power Supply Input 8 to 18 VDC, 15 VDC Nominal. Provided from the FC/SA BUS RJ-12 jack on the FEC or
VMA1600 controller.
Current Consumption 90 mA maximum
Wireless Band Direct-Sequence Spread-Spectrum, 2.4 GHz ISM Bands
Transmission Range 76.2 m (250 ft) Maximum Indoor Line-of-Sight
15 m (50 ft) Recommended Indoor
Materials Translucent Plastic Housing with Plenum rating per UL1995 UL94-5VB Flammability
Rating
Terminations RJ-12 plug for connection to FEC or VMA1600 FC/SA Bus jack
Dimensions 136 x 100 x 18 mm (5-3/8 x 3-15/16 x 3/4 in.)
Mounting Hardware 1/2 in. trade size EMT connector
Shipping Weights 0.095 kg (0.21 lb)
Intended for Connection to an NEC Class 2 Power Source;
UL 916 Energy Management
Plenum rated per UL1995 UL94-5VB Flammability Rating
Transmitters
Canada:
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment
Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B Limits
Europe:
CE Mark – EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, Radio Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
Directive 99/5/EC (Required European certifications pending)

WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors
Application
IMPORTANT: The WRS-TTx Series sensors are not designed or intended for use in mission-critical or life/
safety applications.
The WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors are designed to sense room/zone temperature and
transmit wireless temperature control data. In a ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System (mesh network)
application, the sensors communicate with FEC1600 Series, FEC2600 Series, and VMA1600 Series Controllers
WRZ-TTX
by means of the ZFR1811 Router.
A WRZ-TTx Series Sensor can also be used in a One-to-One application (non-mesh network) to communicate with
a WRZ-7840 Wireless Receiver. The WRZ-7840 Receiver transfers data to the appropriate controller by means of
the SA communication bus. In a typical application, one WRZ-TTx Series Sensor reports to one
WRZ-7840 Receiver, but up to five WRZ-TTx Series Sensors can be associated with a single WRZ-7840 Receiver
for multi-sensor averaging or high/low temperature selection.
Depending on the sensor model, the WRZ-TTx Series Sensors can transmit sensed temperature, setpoint
temperature, occupancy status, and low battery conditions to an associated router or receiver. The WRZ-TTx
Series Sensors are designed for indoor, intra-building applications only.
• 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) Allen-head adjustment tool (Johnson Controls T-4000-119; order separately) for the small
screw that secures the sensor to the mounting base
• straight blade screwdriver (or coin) for unlocking the sensor housing from the mounting base locking tab
• WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing System Tool (optional): a site survey tool and signal test receiver used prior
to installing a ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System
Mounting
Tamper Resistant
See Wireless Device Location and Mounting Set Screw
Considerations on page 345 for information on locating and
mounting WRZ-TTx sensors. Manual Occupancy Temperature
Override Button Set Point
IMPORTANT: After you set the address but before you Control Dial
mount the sensor, we recommend that you verify
communication with the controller using the
WRZ-SST-100 tool or the built-in signal strength LED.
Battery Level
and 120
IMPORTANT: Install and power the ZFR1810 Signal Strength (4.7)
Coordinator and all ZFR1811 Routers in the area where LED
WRZ-TTx sensors are to be mounted before mounting
FIG:WRZ-TT_FRNT
WRZ-TTx sensors. This practice helps you verify 80
Back of Base to (3.1)
communication before mounting the sensors and avoids Front of Setpoint
sensor battery drain as initial communication between Control Dial 38
(1.5)
devices is attempted.
Figure 36-1: WRZ-TTP0000-0 Sensor,
Surface Mounting the Base with Double-Sided Physical Features and Dimensions, mm (in.)
Adhesive Foam Tape
The WRZ-TTx Series Sensor is surface mounted with
double-sided adhesive foam tape on surfaces. For best results, use all three pieces of foam tape (included).
IMPORTANT: If you are mounting the sensor in a public high-traffic area such as a hallway, or a location where
it may be bumped on occasion, use wall anchors that are appropriate for the surface instead of adhesive tape.
To mount the sensor base with adhesive foam tape:
1. Clean the mounting surface to ensure that the adhesive foam tape sticks to the surface.
Note: The mounting surface, mounting base, and ambient temperature must be at least 10°C (50°F) when
mounting the base with adhesive foam tape.
2. Remove the sensor housing from the mounting base
(Figure 36-2 on page 386). 1. Loosen (but do not remove)
the tamper-resistant set screw
3. Peel off the protective paper from one side of the on the locking tab on the
three strips of adhesive foam tape on the back side of 2. Insert a screwdriver blademounting base.
the mounting base. or coin into slot in top of the
housing and depress the locking tab
4. When positioned correctly, the arrow between the on mounting base to release housing.
WRZ-TTX
terminal slots on the mounting base points up. Ensure 3. Swing the sensor
that the base is upright (set screw on top) and press housing off of the
the base firmly onto the clean mounting surface. mounting base.
Removing an Adhesive-Mounted Base

To remove or relocate a sensor mounted with Mounting
Base
double-sided adhesive foam tape:
1. Remove the sensor housing from the mounting base
2. Remove the mounting base from the mounting
surface by carefully twisting the base off of the
surface. Sensor
Tabs
Housing
3. Remove any adhesive foam tape from the mounting
FIG:WRZ-TT_RMV
base and clean the base surface.
4. Pull bottom of sensor housing down
Note: You must provide new double-sided adhesive and off of tabs on mounting base.
foam tape to remount the base in an adhesive-mount
application. We recommend Can-Do (model No. 99116) Figure 36-2: Removing Sensor Housing from
adhesive foam tape or its equivalent. Mounting Base (Reverse Steps to Install Housing)
Wiring
The WRZ-TTx sensor is a wireless device and does not require the termination of any wires.
After the mounting base is properly mounted, you can set the sensor DIP switches, install the sensor batteries, turn
the sensor on, reinstall the sensor housing to the mounting base, and secure by tightening the tamper-resistant set
screw.
IMPORTANT: Do not turn the power switch ON until a router or receiver is installed and powered ON within RF
range. If this condition is not met, the sensor uses a higher than normal battery current as it attempts to find a
router or receiver within range, resulting in reduced battery life.

To prepare the sensor for operation and install the sensor housing on the mounting base:
1. Place the DIP switch overlay over the DIP switches.
See Figure 36-3 on page 387, Figure 36-4 on
page 387, and Figure 36-5 on page 387.
2. Set the DIP switches located on the back of the cover.
For a ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus
application (Figure 36-3 on page 387), set the DIP
switches as indicated. Refer to the ZFR1800 Series
Wireless Field Bus System Technical Bulletin
FIG:WRZ_ZFR
(LIT-12011295) for information on commissioning
WRZ-TTX
multiple WRZ-TTx Series Sensors in a
ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System.
Figure 36-3: ZFR Mesh Application DIP Switch
a. Set the POWER switch to OFF. Overlay
b. Set the MODE switch to MESH.
c. Set the PAN OFFSET switches according to the
job or system plans.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the PAN OFFSET is

the same for each ZFR1810 Coordinator,
ZFR1811 Router, and WRZ-TTx Series Sensor in
a mesh network.
FIG:1_to_1_WRZ7840
d. Set the ZONE DIP switches according to the job
or system plans, referring to Figure 36-3 on
page 387.
e. Set the MS/TP ADDRESS DIP switches to match Figure 36-4: One-to-One Application DIP Switch
the MS/TP address of the controller with which Overlay
the sensor is intended to communicate.
f. Set the TRANSMIT LEVEL switch to 10 mW.

For a One-to-One application with the WRZ-7840
Receiver (Figure 36-4 on page 387), set the Place
DIP switches as indicated, ensuring that the AREA DIP Switch
Overlay
and TRANSMITTER ID switches on the Here.
Ensure
WRZ-7840 Receiver and the WRZ-TTx Series Jumper W6
Sensor(s) are set to the same non-zero value. is in place.
a. Set the POWER switch to OFF.

b. Set the MODE switch to 1-to-1.
c. Set the SENSOR# to 199 for applications with Insert two AA Alkaline AA Alkaline Battery
only one sensor per controller. Use the other Batteries in battery ery
FIG:WRZ-TT_BCK
Batt
settings for additional sensors in applications with compartment. A lk alin e
AA
a single controller performing temperature
averaging or high/low selection within a zone.
Refer to the WRZ-7840 One-to-One Wireless Figure 36-5: Back of WRZ-TTx Series Sensor
Room Temperature Sensing System Technical Housing, Showing DIP Switches and Batteries
Bulletin (LIT-12011411) for information on
commissioning multiple WRZ-TTx Series
Sensors in a WRZ-7840 One-to-One Wireless
Room Temperature Sensing System.
d. Set the AREA switches to match the AREA switch on the WRZ-7840 Receiver.
e. Set the Transmitter ID switches to match the Transmitter ID on the WRZ-7840 Receiver.
WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors: Section 36 387

3. Install two AA batteries (supplied) into the battery compartment on the back of the sensor. Ensure that the
batteries are installed in the proper polarity (Figure 36-5 on page 387).
4. If the address DIP switches are set to the correct positions and the temperature sensing system is ready for
operation or testing, set the POWER DIP switch to the ON position (Figure 36-3 on page 387 or Figure 36-4 on
page 387).
5. Verify communication between the sensor and its controller using the WRZ-SST-100 tool (if available) or by
pressing the Manual Occupancy Override Button (Figure 36-1 on page 385) and monitoring the Signal
Strength LED. See Table 36-1 on page 388.
Table 36-1: Wireless Signal Strength
Number of Blinks Signal Strength
WRZ-TTX
3 Excellent
2 Good
1 Weak
0 None
6. Align the tabs on the bottom edge of the mounting base with the slots on the bottom edge of the sensor
assembly, and rotate the assembly onto its mounting base. (Reverse the procedure shown in Figure 36-2 on
page 386.)
7. Use a 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) Allen wrench or Johnson Controls T-4000-119 Allen-Head Adjustment Tool to tighten
the security screw and fasten the sensor assembly to the mounting base (Figure 36-2 on page 386).
Table 36-2: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up WRZ-TTx Sensors
Installation Instructions for WRZ-TTx WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Part No. 24-10332-2
Temperature Sensors Installation
Instructions
Installation Instructions for WRZ-SST-100 WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing Part No. 24-10393-17
Wireless Sensing System Tool System Tool Installation Instructions
Applications, Features, and Benefits of the WRZ-7840 Series One-to-One Wireless LIT-12011411
One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Room Temperature Sensing System
Sensing System Technical Bulletin
Table 36-3: WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors (Part 1 of 2)
Product Codes WRZ-TTP0000-0: Warmer/Cooler (+/-) Setpoint Adjustment
WRZ-TTR0000-0: No Setpoint Adjustment
WRZ-TTS0000-0: Setpoint Adjustment Scale: 13 to 29°C/55 to 85°F
Power Requirements 3 VDC Supplied by Two 1.5 VDC AA Alkaline Batteries (Included with Sensor);
Typical Battery Life: 48 Months (36 Months Minimum)
MS/TP Address, Network Number, and Zone Address
RF Band Direct-Sequence Spread-Spectrum, 2.4 GHz ISM Band

Table 36-3: WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors (Part 2 of 2)
Transmission Range Wireless Mesh Network Application:
30 m (100 ft) Maximum Indoor Line-of-Sight;
15 m (50 ft) Practical Average Indoor
One-to-One Application:
45 m (150 ft) Maximum Indoor Line-of-Sight;
Transmissions Every 60 Seconds (±20 Seconds)
Temperature System Accuracy 0.6C°/1.0F° Over the Range of 13 to 29°C (55 to 85°F);
0.9C°/1.5F° Over a Range of 0 to 13°C (32 to 55°F) and 29 to 43°C (85 to 110°F)
Temperature Sensor Type Internal 10k ohm NTC Thermistor
WRZ-TTX
Materials NEMA 1 White Plastic Housing
Mounting Screw Mount or Double-Sided Adhesive Foam Tape Mount;
Double-Sided Adhesive Foam Tape Included
Transmitters
Canada:
Europe:
CE Mark – EMC Directive 2004/108EC (Formerly 89/336/EEC),
Radio Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 99/5/EC
WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors: Section 36 389

WRZ-TTX

WRZ-7840 Wireless Receiver
NAE
WRZ-TTx
WRZ-TTx Sensor 5
Sensor 4
FC Bus
WRZ-TTx SA Bus
WRZ-7840
Sensor 3
WRZ-7840 FEC
Receiver
Note: Wireless field

controllers may be
WRZ-TTx FEC16x0, FEC26x0,
FIG:WRZ7840_ntwk
WRZ-TTx Sensor 1 or VMA16x0 models.
Sensor 2
Figure 37-1: One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing Applications
Application
IMPORTANT: The WRZ-7840 Receivers are not designed or intended for use in mission-critical or life/safety
applications.
The WRZ-7840 Receiver for One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing Systems is designed to receive
wireless RF temperature data from WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors and provide single
zone temperature control data to specified Metasys system extended architecture digital controllers in building
HVAC systems. The WRZ-TTx Sensor and WRZ-7840 Receiver combination is a functional equivalent to a
network sensor, such as an NS-BTP7001-0, but eliminates communications wiring (which is usually placed inside
the wall) between the sensor and receiver.
Like a network sensor, the WRZ-7840 Receiver is designed to communicate over a SA bus interface via MS/TP
BACnet protocol with VMA1600 controllers and FECs. The receiver supplies the sensed zone temperature,
temperature setpoint, and occupancy override data.
In a typical application, one WRZ-TTx Series Sensor reports to one WRZ-7840 Receiver; however, up to five
WRZ-TTx Series Sensors can be associated with a single WRZ-7840 Receiver (Figure 37-1 on page 391). In
multi-sensor applications, the receiver passes all the sensors’ data to the controller. The VMA1600 or FEC
controller can be configured to either average the sensors’ temperature input or select the highest or lowest
sensed temperature for control of the target zone.
Mounting Tamper Resistant
FIG:WRZ-7840_dim
Set Screw
See Wireless Device Location and Mounting
Considerations on page 345 for general information on
locating and mounting WRZ-7840 wireless receivers.
80
Follow these additional guidelines: Status LEDs (3.1)
RF
SA
• Locate the receiver so that it is easily accessible within
the proximity of the field controller, which is typically on
a VAV duct, or just above or just below the ceiling tiles.
80
Note: Communication cables of various lengths are Back of Base to (3.1)
available to connect the (WRZ-7840 Receiver) SA bus. Front of Dome 38 RJ-12 Port for SA Bus Connection
See Table 37-2 on page 395 for details. (1.5) (on underside)
• Locate the WRZ-7840 Receiver up to 30 m (100 ft) Figure 37-2: WRZ-7840 Receiver Physical
from the WRZ-TTx Series Sensor in a typical building Features and Dimensions, mm (in.)
environment.
WRZ-7840
• Mount the receiver so that the antenna symbol (shown

on the cover near the LEDs) is in a vertical orientation,
up or down. (The antenna symbol indicates the
approximate location of the receiver’s internal onboard
antenna.)
• If the receiver is mounted on duct work, such as a VAV
box, ideally the antenna portion of the receiver
(approximately 1/3 of the enclosure) should hang below
the duct work. Avoid having pipes, duct work, or other
FIG:WRZ-7840_mnt_ornt
RF
SA
metal obstructions in the direct line of sight to the sensors.
RF
SA
Surface Mounting the Base with Double-Sided Adhesive

Foam Tape
The WRZ-7840 Receiver can be surface mounted using the
three pieces of double-sided tape (factory installed). Figure 37-3: Correct Mounting Orientation
IMPORTANT: If you are mounting the receiver in a public
high-traffic area such as a hallway, or a location where it
may be bumped on occasion, use wall anchors that are
appropriate for the surface instead of adhesive tape.

To mount the receiver base with adhesive foam tape:
1. Remove the receiver from the mounting base
(Figure 37-4 on page 393). 1. Loosen
2. Insert a screwdriver blade (but do not remove) the
2. Peel off the protective paper from the three strips of or coin into slot in top of the tamper resistant set screw
adhesive foam tape on the back side of the mounting housing and depress the on the locking tab on the
locking tab on mounting mounting base.
base. base to release housing.
3. Ensure that the base is oriented in the desired
position (note where the set screw is; that is the 3. Swing the receiver
housing off of the
antenna side), and press the base firmly onto the mounting base.
clean mounting surface.
Surface Mounting the Base with Screws
Mount the WRZ-7840 Receiver:
Mounting
• to a wall, using two or more wall anchor molly bolts Base
(not provided) or appropriate anchors for the surface
WRZ-7840
• to a metal duct, such as a VAV box, using two or
Tabs
more sheet metal screws (not provided).
Receiver
To mount the receiver base with screws:
FIG:WRZ-7840_cvr_rmvl
Housing
1. Remove the receiver from the mounting base 4. Pull bottom of receiver
(Figure 37-4 on page 393). housing down and off of
tabs on mounting base.
2. Use the mounting base as a screw hole template,
place the mounting base against the mounting Figure 37-4: Removing Receiver Housing from
surface, and mark the location for the screw holes Mounting Base
3. Drill a pilot hole at the marked locations. If mounting to a wall, install the molly anchors.
4. Secure the mounting base to the surface with the
screws (Figure 37-5 on page 393). Tamper-Resistant
Set Screw
Wiring
The WRZ-7840 Receiver has a modular jack on the edge
Use mounting base as
of the enclosure (opposite the edge having the security a template for locating
set screw). This modular jack for the SA Bus requires a screw holes on
straight-through, one-to-one connection cable (not a mounting surface.
crossover) to the SENSOR jack on a VMA1600 or FEC Mount
field controller. Screws
FIG:WRZ-7840_mnt_bse
Use any two holes that hold base
IMPORTANT: Configure the field controller as if firmly and evenly to mounting surface.
connected to a wired network sensor. Configuring (Seven mounting screw holes are available
the field controller for use with wireless temperature on the mounting base.)
sensor causes incompatibility with the WRZ-7840
receiver. Figure 37-5: Mounting the Receiver’s Mounting
Base with Screws
Note: The SA Bus cable supplies power to the
WRZ-7840 receiver when the VMA1600 or FEC is
powered on.
WRZ-7840 Wireless Receiver: Section 37 393

Before reinstalling the WRZ-7840 Receiver to the mounting base, set the DIP switches according to the job plans.
(See Figure 37-6 on page 394.) When setting the DIP switches, ensure that the AREA and TRANSMITTER I.D.
switches on the WRZ-7840 Receiver and the WRZ-TTx Sensor(s) are set to the same non-zero value.
Follow these steps:
1. Disconnect the SA Bus cable before adjusting the DIP
FIG:WRZ7840_bckvw
switches.
2. Set the AREA and TRANSMITTER I.D. DIP switches.
3. Connect the SA Bus cable.
For each WRZ-7840 Receiver, record the following:
• the AREA and TRANSMITTER I.D. DIP switch
settings
• the location and/or identification of the controller
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
WRZ-7840
(VMA1600 or FEC) to which the WRZ-7840 is ON ON
connected to by means of the SA Bus cable. AREA

TRANSMITTER
I.D.
BATT
Use this information when adjusting the DIP switch
settings of the WRZ-TTx Sensor(s) assigned to the
WRZ-7840 Receiver and to associate the sensor and
receiver with the correct controller.
Status LEDs
Use the Status LEDs (see Figure 37-2 on page 392) with
the information in Table 37-1 on page 394 to troubleshoot RJ-12 Port for SA Bus Connection
the WRZ-7480 Receiver. Figure 37-6: WRZ-7840 Receiver (Back View)
Table 37-1: Status LEDs
SA (Sensor Actuator Green Flickering Flickering = SA Bus activity
Bus) Off Steady = No SA Bus activity
RF (Wireless Signal Green/Red Green, On, blinks signal strength every Green = Good sensor battery
Strength and Power bicolor 60 seconds1 Red = Weak sensor battery
Status) 1 Blink = Marginal RF signal strength
2 Blinks = Good RF signal strength
3 Blinks = Excellent RF signal strength
1. Pressing the occupancy override button on the associated sensor causes the RF LED on the WRZ-7480 Receiver to blink.

Accessories
Table 37-2: Accessories
Product Code Product Description
Number
WRZ-TTP0000-0 Wireless Room Temperature Sensor, Warmer/Cooler Setpoint Adjustment
WRZ-TTR0000-0 Wireless Room Temperature Sensor, No Setpoint Adjustment
WRZ-TTS0000-0 Wireless Room Temperature Sensor, Setpoint Adjustment Scale: 12 to 28°C (55 to 80°F)
WRZ-SST-100 Wireless System Survey Tool Kit
CBL-NETWORK6-0 1.8 m (6 ft) SA Bus Interface Cable to Connect WRZ-7840 Receiver to VMA1600 or FEC
WRZ-7840
Table 37-3: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up WRZ-7840 Receivers
Installation Instructions for WRZ-7840 WRZ-7840 Receiver for One-to-One Part No. 24-10375-0
Wireless Receiver Wireless Room Temperature Sensing
Systems Installation Instructions
Installation Instructions for WRZ-TTx WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Part No. 24-10332-2
Temperature Sensors Installation
Instructions
Installation Instructions for WRZ-SST-100 WRZ-SST-100 Wireless Sensing Part No. 24-10393-17
Wireless Sensing System Tool System Tool Installation Instructions
Applications, Features, and Benefits of the WRZ-7840 Series One-to-One Wireless LIT-12011411
One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Room Temperature Sensing System
Sensing System Technical Bulletin
Table 37-4: WRZ-7840 Receiver for One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing Systems (Part 1 of 2)
Product Code WRZ-7840-0
Field Controller Interface Power and SA Bus Interface between WRZ-7840 Receiver and VMA1600 or FEC
Supply Voltage Nominal 15 VDC via the SA Bus; 6.7 to 16.5 VDC Required
Current Consumption 10 mA Maximum
Addressing DIP Switches, Field Adjustable for up to 3840 Unique Addresses
Ambient Limits Operating: 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F), 5 to 95% RH, Noncondensing
Storage: -40 to 71°C (-40 to 160°F), 5 to 90% RH, Nonconducting
RF Band Direct-Sequence Spread-Spectrum, 2.4 GHz ISM Bands
Transmission Range 45 m (150 ft) Maximum Indoor Line of Sight;
Transmissions Every 60 Seconds (±10 Seconds)
Receiver Outputs One RJ-12 port for SA Communication Bus Output for Zone Temperature, Setpoint, and
Occupancy Override Indication
Temperature System Accuracy WRZ-TTx Sensor:
0.6°C (1°F) over the Range of 13 to 29°C (55 to 85°F);
0.9°C (1.5°F) over the Range of 0 to 13°C (32 to 55°F) and 29 to 43°C (85 to 110°F)
WRZ-7840 Wireless Receiver: Section 37 395

Table 37-4: WRZ-7840 Receiver for One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing Systems (Part 2 of 2)
Sensor Type WRZ-TTx Sensor: Internal 10k ohm NTC Thermistor
Materials NEMA 1 White Plastic Housing; UL94-5VB and V-0 Plenum Flammability Rated
Mounting Double-Sided Adhesive Foam Tape Mount or Screw Mount; Double-Sided Adhesive
Foam Tape Included
Dimensions 80 x 80 x 35 mm (3-5/32 x 3-5/32 x 1-3/8 in.)
Transmitters; Transmitter FCC Identification: TBF-MATRIXL
Canada:
Industry Canada IC:5969A-MATRIXL
Australia and New Zealand:
Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant (C-Tick Mark)
WRZ-7840
Europe:
CE Mark – EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, Radio Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
Directive 99/5/EC
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond these

TEC20 Wireless Coordinator
Application
IMPORTANT: The TEC20 Coordinator is not designed or intended for use in mission-critical or life/safety
applications.
The TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller System provides wireless networked control of HVAC equipment
on a BAS that enables remote monitoring and programming. This TEC Series System integrates into a supervisory
controller using BACnet IP or BACnet MS/TP communications.
TEC20 Coordinators allow the supervisory controller to communicate with multiple TEC Wireless Thermostat
Controllers. The TEC20 Coordinator initiates the formation of the wireless mesh network; one is required per
wireless mesh network. Each TEC20 Coordinator and the TEC Wireless Thermostat Controllers assigned to it
share a Personal Area Network Identification (PAN ID).
A TEC20 Coordinator requires a 15 VDC power source (available separately). An optional remote-mount antenna
and cable is available to allow transmission when the TEC20 Coordinator is mounted inside a metal panel.
• three fasteners appropriate for the mounting surface (M4 screws or #8 screws)
TEC20
• one 20.3 cm (8 in.) (or longer) piece of DIN rail and appropriate hardware for mounting the DIN rail
• small straight blade screwdriver for securing communication wires in the terminal blocks
Mounting 61.9
See Wireless Device Location and Mounting (2.438) Diagnostic LEDs
Considerations on page 345 for general information 160.4
(6.313)
on locating and mounting the TEC20 Coordinator.
Follow these additional guidelines when installing a
TEC20 Coordinator:
• Locate the TEC20 Coordinator near the center of
the associated array of TEC Wireless Thermostat SEC PRI BEAT STATU S
122.4
Controllers. (4.820)
• At a minimum, position a TEC20 Coordinator

within 10 m (32.8 ft) of at least two TEC Wireless
Thermostat Controllers.
• At a minimum, position all TEC Wireless
Thermostat Controllers within 10 m (32.8 ft) of at
least two other TEC Wireless Thermostat
Direct-Mount
Controllers or one TEC Wireless Thermostat Antenna
Controller and the TEC20 Coordinator.
FIG:TEC20_dimfeat
• Locate the TEC20 Coordinator on the same floor LAN2 (SEC) LAN1 (PRI)
as (or one floor above or below) the associated RJ-45 Ethernet Port RJ-45 Ethernet Port
TEC Wireless Thermostat Controllers. Figure 38-1: TEC20 Coordinator Physical Features
• Avoid metal obstructions and concrete or brick and Dimensions, mm (in.)
walls between the TEC20 Coordinator and the
associated TEC Wireless Thermostat Controllers.
Wall Mount Applications
To mount the TEC20 Coordinator on a wall (or other vertical surface):
1. Hold the TEC20 Coordinator up to the wall, oriented horizontally, as a template and mark the mounting tab
hole locations.
2. Drill holes in the wall at the locations marked in Step 1 and insert appropriate wall anchors in all three holes (if
necessary).
3. Hold the TEC20 Coordinator in place and insert the screws through the mounting tabs and into the holes.
Carefully tighten all of the screws.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten the mounting screws. Overtightening the screws may damage the mounting
tabs.
DIN Rail Mount Applications

To mount the TEC20 Coordinator on a DIN rail:
1. Securely mount an 20.3 cm (8 in.) (or longer) section of DIN rail horizontally and centered in the required
space.
2. Position the TEC20 Coordinator on the rail, tilting to hook DIN rail tabs over one edge of the DIN rail.
3. Pull out the DIN rail clip and push down and in to
FIG:TEC20_DIN_mnt
force the DIN rail clip to snap over the other edge of
the DIN rail.
4. To prevent the TEC20 Coordinator from sliding on the
DIN rail, secure with clips provided by the DIN rail
vendor, or place a screw in one of the four mounting
TEC20
tabs in the base of the TEC20 Coordinator.

To remove the TEC20 Coordinator from the DIN rail, snap
the bottom DIN clips to the extended position and
carefully lift the TEC20 Coordinator off the DIN rail.
Mounting the Remote Antenna
IMPORTANT: Use the antenna provided. Do not

alter the antenna in any way or use another
antenna. Do not modify the antenna cable in any
way.
IMPORTANT: Minimum bend radius for the

antenna cable is 25 mm (1 in.). Any bend with a
smaller radius may damage the cable.
Use Figure 38-3 on page 399 and the following steps to Figure 38-2: DIN Rail Mounting and Removal
mount the remote-mount antenna:
1. Ensure that the selected location has line-of-sight to one or more TEC Wireless Thermostat Controllers.
2. Gently screw the female connection of the remote antenna onto the TEC20 Coordinator’s antenna connector.
3. Mount the remote antenna on a metal surface, using the weighted magnetic base.
Removing and Replacing the Cover
You must remove the TEC20 Coordinator cover to connect the battery or to replace the battery. The cover snaps
onto the base with four plastic tabs (two on each end).
To remove the cover, press in the four tabs on both ends of the unit, and lift the cover off. To replace the cover,
orient it so the cutout area for communication ports is correct, and then push inward to snap in place.

FIG:TEC20_nocvr
Battery
Connector
(Bottom Board)
Diagnostic LEDs
(Visible with Cover On)
SEC BEAT
PRI STATUS
Earth Ground
Spade Lug
On Board Wireless Adapter LAN2 LAN1 RS-485 Coaxial Power

with Antenna Connection (SEC) (PRI) (3-position) Connector for
COM2 Wall Mounted
RJ-45 Ethernet Ports LAN2 and LAN1 Power Module
Antenna on Top Board. RS-485 Port COM2
on Bottom Board.
TEC20
Connector
Figure 38-3: TEC20 Coordinator (Cover Removed)
BACnet IP Ports
(RJ-45 Ethernet)
FIG:TEC20_btmvw
Antenna LAN2 LAN1
Connector (SEC) (PRI)
Battery in Bracket
(On Top of Option
Cards, if present)
Battery BACnet MS/TP Port Connector for Earth Ground

Connector (RS-485) Coaxial Power Spade Lug
Figure 38-4: TEC20 Coordinator Communication Ports (Bottom View, Cover Removed)
TEC20 Wireless Coordinator: Section 38 399

Wiring
Wiring Considerations and Guidelines
IMPORTANT: Do not connect supply power to the TEC20 Coordinator before finishing wiring and checking all
wiring connections. Short circuits or improperly connected wires may result in permanent damage to the TEC20
Coordinator.
regulations. The TEC20 Coordinator is a low-voltage (less than 30 VAC) device. Do not exceed the TEC20
Coordinator’s electrical ratings.
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge to the TEC20 Coordinator. Static electric discharge can
damage the TEC20 Coordinator and void any warranties.
To wire the TEC20 Coordinator:

1. Terminate wiring per engineering drawings.
2. Connect field-supplied earth grounding wires (with spade connector) from the earth ground lug on the TEC20
Coordinator.
3. Connect communications wiring. See Communications Wiring on page 400.
TEC20
4. Connect power to the TEC20 Coordinator. See Power Wiring on page 401.
See Figure 38-1 on page 397, Figure 38-3 on page 399, and Figure 38-4 on page 399 to locate connectors and
other components on the TEC20 Coordinator.
Communications Wiring
Connect communications cables to the TEC20 Coordinator using ports on the bottom of the unit (Figure 38-4 on
page 399).
Note: To prevent damage to the TEC20 Coordinator, provide strain relief for communications cables before
connecting them to the TEC20 Coordinator.
BACnet IP (TEC20-3C-2)
LAN1 and LAN2 are RJ-45 connector ports on the bottom of the TEC20 Coordinator (Figure 38-4 on page 399)
that provide 10/100-Mb Ethernet connection for using BACnet IP communications protocol. Use a standard
Ethernet patch cable for connecting to a hub or Ethernet switch.
Note: Typically, you only use LAN1 (primary port), unless you have a specific application for isolating a driver’s
network traffic to a separate IP address (and Local Area Network [LAN]) using LAN2.
The packing slip accompanying the TEC20-3C-2 Coordinator provides the factory-shipped IP settings for both
LAN1 and LAN2. Refer to the TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller System Technical Bulletin
(LIT-12011414) for information on configuring the IP address.
BACnet MS/TP (TEC20-6C-2)
An RS-485, optically isolated port uses a 3-position, screw terminal connector and always operates as COM2. Wire
to this connector with shielded 18-22 AWG wiring (refer to the TIA/EIA-485 standard). The screw terminals (from
left-to-right) are shield, plus (+), and minus (-).

Power Wiring
WARNING: Risk of Electric Shock
! Disconnect power supply before making electrical connections. Contact with components carrying
hazardous voltage can cause electric shock and may result in severe personal injury or death.
(TEC20-8X-1 power supply)
! Disconnect power supply before making electrical connections to avoid electric shock. (TEC20-7X-1
Power Supply)
IMPORTANT: The circuit powering the TEC20 Coordinator is 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz (if using the TEC20-7X-1
power supply) or 120 VAC at 50/60 Hz (if using the TEC20-8X-1 power supply). Do not connect supply power to
the TEC20 Coordinator before finishing wiring and checking all wiring connections. Short circuits or improperly
connected wires may result in permanent damage to the equipment.
IMPORTANT: User copper conductors only. Make all wiring in accordance with local, national, and regional
regulations. The TEC20 Coordinator is a low-voltage (<30 VAC) device. Do not exceed the TEC20 Coordinator
electrical ratings.
TEC20
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge to the TEC20 Coordinator. Static electric discharge can
damage the TEC20 Coordinator and void any warranties.
IMPORTANT: For maximum protection from electrostatic discharge or other forms of Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI), connect the earth ground spade lug to earth ground using a
#16 AWG or larger wire. Keep this wire as short as possible.
Use the following procedure to apply power to the TEC20 Coordinator.

1. Remove the cover from the TEC20 Coordinator.
2. Locate the red and black wires coming from the backup battery with 2-position connector plug.
3. Plug the connector into the battery connector on the bottom board (below option slot 2 area).
The connector is keyed so that you cannot insert it incorrectly. The red (positive) connection should be the
farthest from the two 30-pin option modules connectors.
4. Apply power to the TEC20 Coordinator by plugging in the power plug into the coaxial connector for power port
Battery
The TEC20 Coordinator has a custom 10-cell NiMH battery pack mounted under the cover. This battery allows the
TEC20 Coordinator to continue operation through very short power interruptions (a few seconds in duration) or to
back up data and automatically shut down after power outages of longer than 1 minute.
The battery is trickle-charged by the TEC20 Coordinator during normal operation. Following an extended power
outage, the battery is charged at a faster rate. Leaving the battery unconnected or in an unpowered TEC20
Coordinator causes the battery to fully discharge in a few weeks.
Note: The NiMH battery is fully discharged when factory shipped and requires up to 18 hours of powered
operation before it can provide reliable backup power.
Replace the battery approximately every 3 years if the TEC20 Coordinator is in a temperature-controlled
environment or every year if the TEC20 Coordinator is in a high temperature (greater than 50°C or 122°F)
environment.

When power is applied, the STATUS LED lights. After the TEC20 Coordinator boots, the yellow BEAT LED begins
blinking, with a typical rate of about 1 Hz. The blink pattern of the BEAT LED differs for each installation and varies
with system load/activity.
Use the Diagnostic LEDS (Figure 38-1 on page 397 and Figure 38-3 on page 399) along with the information in
Table 38-1 on page 402 to troubleshoot the TEC20 Coordinator. Also, refer to the Troubleshooting section in the
TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller System Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011414).
Note: After applying power, if the BEAT LED comes ON steady and stays lit longer than 2 minutes, contact the
Field Support Center for assistance.
Accessories
Use Table 38-1 on page 402 to order accessories.
Table 38-1: Diagnostic LEDs
Name Color Descriptions
SEC, PRI Green Off Steady = No Ethernet link is made.
On Steady = Ethernet link is present but no activity on the LAN.
Blink = Ethernet link is present with data activity on the LAN.
BEAT Yellow Blink 1/second to 10/minute = normal operation
Contact the Field Support Center for assistance if the heartbeat LED:
TEC20
displays On Steady
displays Off Steady
blinks more than once per second
STATUS Green Off Steady = Power Off (or CPU Fault if Power is On - Contact the Field Support Center for
assistance)
On Steady = Power On, CPU Active
Table 38-2: TEC20 Coordinator Accessories (Order Separately)

TEC20-A-1 Replacement antenna for TEC20 Coordinator
TEC20-RA-1 Remote antenna for TEC20 Coordinator when it is installed inside a metal cabinet or when remote
antenna mounting is required by physical installation, 0.53 m (1.75 ft) cable
TEC20-7X-1 24 VAC to 15 VDC Panel Mounted Power Supply
TEC20-8X-1 120 VAC to 15 VDC Power Supply
TEC20-9B-1 Replacement Battery Pack for TEC20 Coordinator

Table 38-3: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up WRS-TTx Sensors
Installation Instructions for TEC20 TEC20 Wireless Coordinator Part No. 24-9890-781
Wireless Coordinator Installation Instructions
Installation Instructions for TEC20 TEC20 Wireless Coordinator Antenna Part No. 24-10425-19
Wireless Coordinator Antenna Installation Instructions
Troubleshooting the TEC20 Wireless TEC Series Wireless Thermostat LIT-12011414
Coordinator Controller System Technical Bulletin
Planning Locations of TEC Wireless Wireless Metasys System Location LIT- 12011294
Thermostat Controller System Guide
Components
TEC Wireless Thermostat Thermostat Controller Installation
Controllers Instructions
Instructions
Network Thermostat Controller
TEC20
Wireless Thermostat Controller
TEC2045-2 Wireless Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-757
Controller with Single Proportional
TEC20x6(H)-2 Series Wireless Network Part No. 24-9890-765
Thermostat Controllers with Two
Outputs, Dehumidification Capability,
Controllers with Two Outputs

Table 38-4: TEC20 Wireless Coordinator
Product Code Numbers TEC20-3C-2: BACnet IP version
TEC20-6C-2: BACnet MS/TP version
Power Requirements 15 VDC, 15W maximum
Platform IBM PowerPC 405EP 250 MHz Processor
64 MB SDRAM and 64 MB Serial Flash
Battery Backup - shutdown begins within 10 seconds
Real-time clock - 3 month backup maximum with battery
Operating System NiagaraAX
Communications Ethernet: Two 10/100 Mbps Ports (RJ-45 Connection)
RS-232: 9-Pin D-Shell Connection
RS-485: 3-Pin Non-Isolated Port
Transmission Range Through Walls: 10 m (32.8 ft)
Line-of-Sight (Open Space): 30 m (98.4 ft)
RF Band Direct-Sequence Spread-Spectrum Transmission; 2.4 Ghz unlicensed band
Wire Size 18 AWG Maximum, 22 AWG Recommended
TEC20
Ambient Conditions Operating: 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); 95% RH Maximum, Noncondensing

Storage: -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F); 95% RH Maximum, Noncondensing
Compliance (Pending) United States:
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX,
FCC Compliant to CFR 47, Part 15, Subpart B and Part 15 Class A
(Other compliance information pending)
Canada:
C-UL Listed, File E207782, CCN XAPX7, Under CAN/
CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment, and C22.2 No.
205-M1983 Signal Equipment
Dimensions (H x W x D) 122.4 x 160.4 x 61.9 mm (4.820 x 6.313 x 2.438 in.)

TEC2xxx Wireless Thermostat Controller
Application
IMPORTANT: The TEC200x Series thermostat controllers are not designed or intended for use in mission-
The TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller System provides wireless networked control of HVAC equipment
on a BAS that enables remote monitoring and programming. This TEC Series System integrates into a supervisory
controller using BACnet IP or BACnet MS/TP communications.
TEC20 Coordinators allow the supervisory controller to communicate with multiple TEC Wireless Thermostat
Controllers. TEC200x-3 Series Wireless Thermostat Controllers provide networked control of a variety of staged
equipment. TEC2001-3 Single Stage Wireless Thermostat Controllers control fan coil units, unit heaters, and
single-stage packaged heating/cooling equipment.
The wireless mesh network uses ZigBee technology to enable remote monitoring and programming and to
enhance reliability by providing redundant transmission paths through other TEC Wireless Thermostat Controllers,
creating a resilient, self-healing mesh network.
Mounting
See Wireless Device Location and Mounting Status LED
Considerations on page 345 for general information on (beneath cover)
locating and mounting TEC200x Series Thermostat
Controllers.
TEC2xxx
Backlit
In addition, locate the thermostat controller: Plain-Text
LCD
• on a partitioning wall, approximately 1.5 m (5 ft) above
the floor in a location of average temperature System
Activity
• away from direct sunlight, radiant heat, outside walls, LEDs Room Temp
behind doors, air discharge grills, stairwells, or outside 70.0ºF
FIG:TEC200x-3_frnt
doors Intuitive
Operation YES NO
• away from steam or water pipes, warm air stacks, Keys
unconditioned areas (not heated or cooled), or sources
of electrical interference
Figure 39-1: TEC200x Series Thermostat

Controller Physical Features
Allow for vertical air circulation to the thermostat
controller.
Mounting the Thermostat Controller
Follow these steps to mount the thermostat controller:
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the security
screw (if installed) on the bottom of the cover.
2. Pull the bottom edge of the cover and open the
thermostat controller as illustrated in Figure 39-2 on
page 406.
3. Carefully pull the locking tabs on the right side of the
mounting base and unlock the PCB. Open the PCB to
the left as illustrated in Figure 39-3 on page 406.
FIG:cvr_rmvl
4. Pull approximately 152 mm (6 in.) of wire from the
mounting base. Figure 39-2: Removing the Cover
5. Align the mounting base on the wall and use the base
as a template to mark the two mounting hole
locations.
Note: Be sure to position the mounting base so that
the arrow on the base points upward to indicate the
top of the thermostat controller. PCB
Locking
TEC2xxx
6. Drill a 5 mm (3/16 in.) hole at each of the two marked Tabs

locations, and tap nylon anchors (included) flush to
the wall surface.
Note: Other means of anchoring the device may be
FIG:prnt_circ_brd
desired, depending on the wall medium; however, we
do not recommend nylon anchors for sheet rock
walls.
Figure 39-3: Opening the PCB
7. Position the mounting base on the wall and use the
two mounting screws (included) to secure the base to
the surface as illustrated in Figure 39-4 on page 406.
screws.
8. Swing the PCB back to the right and carefully snap it
into the locking tabs on the mounting base.
FIG:mntng_bs
Figure 39-4: Securing the

Mounting Base to the Wall

9. Remove the screw terminal blocks as illustrated in
Wiring
! Disconnect the power supply before

making electrical connections to avoid
electric shock.
! Do not apply power to the system before
FIG:trmnl_blcks
checking all wiring connections. Short
circuited or improperly connected wires
may result in permanent damage to the
equipment. Figure 39-5: Removing the Screw Terminal Blocks
IMPORTANT: Make all wiring connections in

accordance with local, national, and regional
regulations. Do not exceed the electrical ratings of the
thermostat controller.
When replacing an existing thermostat controller, remove and label the wires to identify the terminal functions.
When replacing a thermostat controller of the same model, simply remove the old screw terminal blocks and
reinsert them onto the PCB of the replacement thermostat controller.
TEC2xxx
To wire the thermostat controller:
1. Strip the ends of each wire 6 mm (1/4 in.) and connect them to the appropriate screw terminals as indicated in
Figure 39-6 on page 407 and Table 39-1 on page 408.
Note: If multiple wires are inserted into the screw terminals, be sure to properly twist the wires together prior
to inserting them into the screw terminals.
2. Carefully push any excess wire back into the wall. Seal the hole in the wall with fireproof material to prevent
drafts from affecting the ambient temperature readings.
Note: Seal the hole in the wall with fireproof material to prevent drafts from affecting the ambient temperature
readings.
3. Reinsert the screw terminal blocks onto the PCB.
4. Reattach the cover to the mounting base (top side Two-Pole
FIG:TEC2001_3_term
Four-Pole
first). Left Top Connector Right Top
Connector
5. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to reinstall the Y1 G RC C
security screw on the bottom of the thermostat RH W1
controller cover. 2 3 4 5 6 7
See Figure 39-6 on page 407, Figure 39-7 on page 408,
and Table 39-1 on page 408 for information on wiring the
Seven-Pole Bottom Connector
thermostat controller.
Aux BI1 BI2 RS Scom OS MS
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Figure 39-6: TEC2001-3 Thermostat Controller

Terminals
TEC2xxx Wireless Thermostat Controller: Section 39 407

Isolated Contact
• Lighting
FIG:TEC2001_3_app
• Exhaust Fan
Y1 G RC C RH W1 Aux BI1 BI2 RS Scom OS MS
Heat 1
Cool 1 Fan Aux
Remote
Remote Auxiliary/ Monitoring
If using the same power source Room Outdoor Supply
24 VAC for the thermostat and heating loads, Sensor Air Sensor Temperature
Thermostat Power install a jumper across RC and RH. Sensor
Figure 39-7: Wiring the TEC2001-3 Thermostat Controller
Table 39-1: TEC2001-3 Thermostat Controller Terminals

Number
2 Y1 Energizes on a call for Cooling
3 G Energizes Fan in accordance with Selected Fan Mode
TEC2xxx
4 RC 24 VAC from Equipment Transformer

5 C 24 VAC (Common) from Equipment Transformer
6 RH 24 VAC for Heating Stage
7 W1 Energizes on a call for Heating
10 Aux Auxiliary Output
11 BI1 Configurable Binary Input 1
12 BI2 Configurable Binary Input 2
13 RS Remote Room Sensor
14 Scom Sensor Common
15 OS Auxiliary Indoor/Outdoor Air Sensor
16 MS Remote Monitoring Supply Temperature Sensor

Overview
Figure 39-8 on page 409 shows the front cover of the
thermostat controller, including features used for setting Status LED
(beneath cover)
up and adjusting the thermostat controller.
User Interface Keys
The user interface consists of keys on the front cover as Backlit
Plain-Text
illustrated in Figure 39-8 on page 409. The function of LCD
each key is as follows:
System
• Use the YES/SCROLL key to: Activity
LEDs Room Temp
- confirm menu selections and to advance to the 70.0ºF
next menu item
FIG:TEC200x-3_frnt
Intuitive
- stop the Status Display Menu from scrolling and Operation YES NO
to manually scroll to the next parameter on the Keys
menu
Note: When the thermostat controller is left
unattended for 45 seconds, the display resumes Figure 39-8: Front Cover
scrolling.
• Use the NO key to decline a parameter change and to advance to the next menu item.
• Use the MENU key to:
- access the Main User Menu or to exit the menu (See the Main User Menu on page 410 section.)
TEC2xxx
- access the Installer Configuration Menu or to exit the menu (See the Configuring the Thermostat Controller
on page 410 section.)
Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
System Activity LEDs indicate the status and actions of the thermostat controller.
The Status LED, located beneath the cover, flashes at 5-second intervals to provide indication of the network
status of the thermostat controller. See Table 39-2 on page 409.
Table 39-2: Status LED
Flashes per Condition Indicated
5-Second Interval
1 Power On
2 Power On, Communicating
3 Power On, Communicating, Found Wireless Network
4 Power On, Communicating, Found Wireless Network, Communicating with TEC20 Coordinator
Backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

The thermostat controller includes a 2-line, 8-character backlit display. Low-level backlighting is present during
normal operation, and it brightens when any user interface key is pressed. The backlight returns to low level when
the thermostat controller is left unattended for 45 seconds.

Status Display Menu
The Status Display Menu displays during normal operation. This menu scrolls through several parameters:
• Room Temperature
• System Mode
• Schedule Status (Occupied/Unoccupied/Override)
• Outdoor Temperature – An outdoor air temperature sensor must be connected.
Configuring the Thermostat Controller
Main User Menu
Use the Main User Menu to access and change the basic operating parameters of the thermostat controller. During
normal operation, press the MENU key once to access the Main User Menu. This menu is most commonly used by
the zone occupant, and includes the following parameters:
• Temperature Setpoints
• System Mode
• Fan Mode
• The Main User Menu uses Auto Help. Auto Help displays automatically in the Main User Menu when there is a
pause in programming activity.
For further information, see Programming the Thermostat Controller on page 414.
TEC2xxx
Installer Configuration Menu

The thermostat controller comes from the factory with default settings for all configurable parameters. The default
settings are shown in Table 39-3 on page 411. To reconfigure the parameters via the thermostat controller, follow
the steps in this section.
To access the Installer Configuration Menu, press and hold the MENU key for approximately 8 seconds. Once the
Installer Configuration Menu begins, release and press the NO key to scroll through the parameters listed in
Table 39-3. When the desired parameter is displayed, use the YES key to choose the desired selection option.
Press the YES key and then the NO key to continue scrolling through the parameters.
When the thermostat controller is in the Installer Configuration Menu and left unattended for approximately
8 seconds, the thermostat controller reverts to the Status Display Menu.
Configuring Inputs BI1 and BI2
Both inputs can be configured to the Selection Options included in Table 39-3 on page 411.
Configuring the Wireless Mesh Network Settings
Use the following process to configure the wireless mesh network settings.
1. Select a PAN ID and Channel. Use these same values for every TEC Wireless Thermostat Controller (and the
associated coordinator) on the same wireless mesh network.
2. Select a Com Address for each thermostat controller (1 to 254). This address must be unique to each TEC
Wireless Thermostat Controller on the same wireless network (that is, unique to the PAN ID and Channel
combination).

on Display
Com addr Wireless address at the thermostat Range: 000 to 254
controller. Default: 4 Addresses of each item on the wireless bus must be uniquely
numbered, increasing from 1.
Note: Setting this parameter to 0 disables the function.
PAN ID Sets the Personal Area Network Range: 0 to 500
Identification (PAN ID) of the Note: Setting this parameter to 0 disables the function.
wireless network. All devices on a
network must have the same
PAN ID setting to communicate with
each other. Default: 0
Channel Sets the mesh network channel the Range: 11 to 26
device uses for communication. Note: Setting this parameter to 10 disables the function.
Only devices using the same mesh
network channel can communicate
with each other. Default: 10
GET FROM Parameter not available at this time. N/A
Default: None (Service): A Service alarm is displayed on the thermostat controller
when the input is energized. This input can be tied into the air
conditioning unit control card, which provides an alarm should there
be a malfunction.
TEC2xxx
capability of the thermostat controller.
(RemNSB): Remote NSB via a time clock input, an occupancy
contact closed = Unoccupied
Default: None (Service): A Service alarm is displayed on the thermostat controller
when the input is energized. This input can be tied into the air
conditioning unit control card, which provides an alarm should there
be a malfunction.
capability of the thermostat controller.
(RemNSB): Remote Night Setback (NSB) via a time clock input, an
occupancy sensor, or from a voltage-free contact.
Contact open = Occupied; contact closed = Unoccupied

on Display
Lockout Selectable Lockout Levels for Function Level
limiting end user keypad interaction.
(0) (1) (2)
Default: 0
Resume/Override Access Access No Access
Scheduling
Permanent Access No Access No Access
Temperature
Setpoints
Temporary Access Access No Access
Temperature
Setpoints
System Mode Setting Access No Access No Access
Fan Mode Setting Access No Access No Access
Pwr del 1 Sets the delay time period when the Range: 10.0 to 120.0 sec
thermostat controller is powered, or
at each time power is removed and
reapplied, before any operation
(fan, heating, or cooling) is
authorized. Also can be used to
sequence the startup of multiple
units in one location.
Default: 10.0 sec
TEC2xxx
Frost pr Provides a minimum heating (on): Enabled

setpoint of 5.5°C/42.0°F to prevent (off): Disabled
freezing in the zone controlled by
the thermostat controller.
Default: off
Heat max2 Sets the Occupied and Unoccupied Range: 4.5°C/40.0°F/to 32.0°C/90.0°F
maximum Heating setpoint values.
Default: 32.0°C/90.0°F
Cool min2 Sets the Occupied and Unoccupied Range: 12.0°C/54.0°F to 37.5°C/100.0°F
minimum Cooling setpoint values.
Default: 12.0°C/54.0°F
Anticycl Anti-Short Cycle timer sets the Range: 0.0 to 5.0 min adjustable in 1-minute increments
minimum on/off times for heating Set the anti-short cycle timer to 0.0 min for equipment that already
and cooling stages. has its own anti-short cycle timer.
Default: 2.0 min
Heat cph Sets the maximum number of Range: 3.0 to 8.0 cycles per hour
Heating cycles per hour.
Default: 4.0
Cool cph Sets the maximum number of Range: 3.0 or 4.0 cycles per hour
Cooling cycles per hour.
Default: 4.0
Deadband Sets the minimum deadband Range: 1.0C°/2.0F° to 2.0C°/4.0F° adjustable in 0.5C°/1.0F°
between the heating and cooling increments
setpoints.
Default: 1.0C°/2.0F°

on Display
Fan cont Determines how the fan is activated (off): Enables the thermostat controller to activate the fan in
in response to a call for heating or response to a call for cooling only.
cooling. (on): Enables the thermostat controller to activate the fan in
Default: on response to a call for heating or cooling.
When there is a call for auxiliary heating, the fan is activated by the
equipment fan and limit control.
Fan del Fan delay extends fan operation (on): Extends fan operation by 60 seconds after a heating or cooling
after a heating or cooling cycle has cycle has ended.
ended. (off): No extension of fan operation after a heating or cooling cycle
Default off has ended.
The fan delay is only active when the fan is in the Auto mode.
TOccTime Sets the duration of the Temporary Range: 0.0 to 12.0 hrs adjustable in 1-hour increments
thermostat controller is in the
Unoccupied mode)
setpoint
Default: 3.0 hrs
TEC2xxx
Cal RS Sets the desired room air Range: -2.5C°/-5.0F° to 2.5C°/5.0F° adjustable in 0.5C°/1.0F°
temperature sensor calibration increments
(offset). The offset can be added to
or subtracted from the actual
displayed room temperature.
Default: 0.0C°/0.0C°F
Cal OS Sets the desired outdoor air Range: -2.5C°/-5.0F° to 2.5C°/5.0F° adjustable in 0.5C°/1.0F°
temperature sensor calibration increments
(offset). The offset can be added to
or subtracted from the actual
displayed room temperature.
Default: 0.0C°/0.0F°
H lock Discontinues heating operation in Range:-26°C/ -15°F to 49°C/120°F adjustable in 5C°/5F°
response to the outdoor air increments
temperature. Requires that an
outdoor air temperature sensor be
installed and connected.
Default: 49°C/120°F
C lock Discontinues cooling operation in Range: -40°C/-40°F to 35°C/95°F adjustable in 5C°/5F° increments
response to the outdoor air
temperature. Requires that an
outdoor air temperature sensor be
installed and connected.
Aux cont Energizes peripheral devices (n.c.): Contact open = Occupied; contact closed = Unoccupied
(lighting equipment, exhaust fans, (n.o.): Contact closed = Occupied; contact open = Unoccupied
and economizers). The contact toggles with the internal Occupied/Unoccupied
Default: n.o. schedule (or the NSB contact on one of the digital inputs, if used).

2. When adjusting the temperature, press the UP or DOWN arrow key to change the value in 0.5C°/0.5F° increments; press
and hold the UP or DOWN arrow key to change the value in 5.0C°/5.0F° increments.
Programming the Thermostat Controller

After configuring the thermostat controller by means of the Installer Configuration Menu, program its operating
parameters by means of the Main User Menu. Access this menu by pressing the MENU key during normal
operation. The Main User Menu contains the basic operating features of the thermostat controller.
The Main User Menu also uses Auto Help, which is displayed automatically in the menu when there is a pause in
programming activity. To exit Auto Help, continue with the programming selection. When the thermostat controller
is in the Main User Menu and is left unattended for 45 seconds, the menu reverts to the Status Display Menu.
Enabling Override Schedule
Note: The Override Schedule prompt only appears when the thermostat controller is in the unoccupied state
(Unoccupied Mode).
This menu selection gives the user the option of overriding the unoccupied setpoints with the occupied setpoints for
the amount of time specified under the TOccTime parameter. See Table 39-3 on page 411.
Note: If one of the binary inputs is configured to operate as a remote override contact, this menu is disabled.
To override the unoccupied state while in the Main User Menu:
1. Press the NO key to all prompts until the Override Schedule prompt appears. If the thermostat controller is in
the unoccupied state, this is the first prompt.
2. Press the YES key to enable the temporary override. The thermostat controller returns to the Status Display
Menu.
When scrolling through the Status Display Menu, Override now appears for the schedule status parameter.
TEC2xxx
Resuming the Programmed Schedule

This menu only appears when the thermostat controller is in the override mode.
To resume the schedule while in the Main User Menu:
1. Press the NO key to all prompts until the Resume Schedule prompt appears. If the thermostat controller is in
the override state, this is the first prompt.
2. Press the YES key to resume the programmed schedule.
The thermostat controller returns to the Status Display Menu.
Entering Permanent Temperature Setpoints
The first prompt appearing in the Main User Menu of the thermostat controller when in the occupied state is to set
the permanent temperature setpoint. Permanent setpoints are stored in the programmed schedule.

To enter the permanent heating and cooling setpoints for the Occupied and Unoccupied Modes, follow the steps in
Table 39-4 on page 415. When changing the temperatures, press the keys once to change the temperature in
0.5C°/0.5F° increments; press and hold down the keys to change the temperature in 5.0C°/5.0F° increments.
Table 39-4: Entering Permanent Temperature Setpoints (Part 1 of 2)
Thermostat Description
Controller
Display
Press the MENU key while in the Status Display Menu to enter the Main User Menu.
RoomTemp
75.0°F
Press the NO key to all prompts until the temperature setpoint prompt appears on the display (it may be
Temperat the first prompt). Press the YES key to enter the temperature setting menu.
set? Y/N
Press the YES key to change the occupied cooling setpoint. Press the NO key to advance to the
Cooling occupied heating setpoint menu.
set? Y/N
Press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to set the temperature. Press the YES key to store the value and
Cooling advance to the next menu.
TEC2xxx
75.0°F
Press the YES key to change the occupied heating setpoint. Press the NO key to advance to the
Heating unoccupied cooling setpoint menu.
set? Y/N
Heating advance to the next menu.
68.0°F
Press the YES key to change the unoccupied cooling setpoint. Press the NO key to advance to the
Unocc CL unoccupied heating setpoint.
set? Y/N
Unocc CL advance to the next menu.
80.0°F
Press the YES key to change the unoccupied heating setpoint. Press the NO key to advance to the
Unocc HT temperature display units.
set? Y/N

Table 39-4: Entering Permanent Temperature Setpoints (Part 2 of 2)
Thermostat Description
Controller
Display
Unocc HT advance to the next menu.
62.0°F
Press the YES key to set the display units to °F or °C. Press the NO key to advance to the temperature
°F/°C setpoint type menu.
set? Y/N
Press the YES key to return to the Status Display Menu or press the NO key to reenter the temperature
Exit? setting menu.
Y/N
Entering Temporary Temperature Setpoints

To temporarily change the setpoint, press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to change the temporary setpoint for the
current mode of operation.
Note: Whether the thermostat controller is heating or cooling, the respective setpoint is temporarily adjusted. To
TEC2xxx
toggle between the temporary heating and cooling setpoints, press the NO key while changing the temporary
setpoints.
Ending Temporary Temperature Setpoints
The temporary setpoints remain in effect for the duration set in the TOccTime parameter or until manually
released.
To release the temporary setpoint sooner, while in the Main User Menu:
1. Press the YES key to the first prompt that appears.
2. If the thermostat controller does not immediately return to the Status Display Menu, press the MENU key again
and press the YES key to exit the Main User Menu.
The setpoint reverts to the Permanent Temperature Setpoint.
Selecting the System Mode
The thermostat controller has four system modes:
• Automatic Mode (auto): Automatic changeover between heating and cooling. This is the default setting.
• Cooling Mode (cool): Cooling operation only
• Heating Mode (heat): Heating operation only
• Off Mode (off): The thermostat controller is off; however, when frost protection (Frost pr parameter) is
enabled, the thermostat controller still calls for heat (if required).
To set the system mode while in the Main User Menu:
1. Press the NO key to all prompts until the system mode prompt appears on the display. Press the YES key to
select the desired system mode.
2. Press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to locate the desired system mode. Press the YES key to select the desired
system mode.
3. Press the YES key to return to the Status Display Menu or press the NO key to return to the system mode
selection menu.

Selecting the Fan Mode
The thermostat controller has three fan mode settings:
• On Fan Mode (on): Energizes the fan continuously for both occupied and unoccupied states, even if the
system mode is set to off.
• Automatic Fan Mode (auto): Energizes the fan only on a call for heating or cooling, for both occupied and
unoccupied states.
• Smart Fan Mode (smart): Energizes the fan continuously for occupied states, and only on a call for heating or
cooling in unoccupied states; this is the default setting.
To select the fan mode while in the Main User Menu:
1. Press the NO key to all prompts until the fan mode prompt appears on the display. Press the YES key to set the
fan mode.
2. Press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to locate the desired fan mode. Press the YES key to select the desired fan
mode.
3. Press the YES key to return to the Status Display Menu or press the NO key to return to the fan mode selection
menu.
Display Messages
See Table 39-5 on page 417 for display messaging. Refer to the TEC Series Wireless Thermostat Controller
System Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011414) for troubleshooting details.
Table 39-5: Display Messages
Display Function
Service Indicates that there is a service alarm in accordance with the programmable Binary Input (BI2).
TEC2xxx
Filter Indicates that the filter(s) is dirty in accordance with the programmable Binary Input (BI2).
Accessories
representative to order any of these parts.
Note: Review the technical specifications of the accessories prior to their use in an application.
Number
ACC-INSL-0 Foam Insulation Pad Kit (10 adhesive-backed foam pads)
TE-6363-11 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor

Table 39-7: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up TEC2xxx Wireless Controllers
Mounting and Wiring TEC20 TEC20 Wireless Coordinator Part No. 24-9890-781
Coordinators Installation Instructions
Installation Instructions for TEC20 TEC20 Wireless Coordinator Antenna Part No. 24-10425-19
Wireless Coordinator Antenna Installation Instructions
Troubleshooting the TEC20 Wireless TEC Series Wireless Thermostat LIT-12011414
Coordinator Controller System Technical Bulletin
Planning Locations of TEC Wireless Wireless Metasys System Location LIT- 12011294
Thermostat Controller System Guide
Components
TEC Wireless Thermostat Thermostat Controller Installation
Controllers Instructions
Instructions
Network Thermostat Controller
Wireless Thermostat Controller
TEC2045-2 Wireless Thermostat Part No. 24-9890-757
Controller with Single Proportional
TEC2xxx

TEC20x6(H)-2 Series Wireless Network Part No. 24-9890-765
Thermostat Controllers with Two
Outputs, Dehumidification Capability,
Controllers with Two Outputs

Table 39-8: TEC2001-3 Single-Stage Wireless Thermostat Controller
Power Requirements 19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 VA (Terminals RC and C) at 24 VAC Nominal, Class 2 or
SELV
Relay/Triac Contact Rating 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush, Class 2 or SELV
Relay/Triac Contact Rating On/Off and Floating Control: 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush, Class 2 or SELV
Binary Inputs Voltage-Free Contacts across Terminal C to Terminals BI1 and BI2
Wire Size 18 AWG Maximum, 22 AWG Recommended
Transmission Range Through Walls: 10 m (30 ft)
Line-of-Sight (Open Space): 30 m (100 ft)
RF Band Direct-Sequence Spread-Spectrum Transmission; 2.4 Ghz unlicensed band
Temperature Range Backlit Display: -40.0°C/ -40.0°F to 50.0°C/122.0°F
Heating Control: 4.5°C/40.0°F to 32.0°C/90.0°F in 0.5° Increments
Cooling Control: 12.0°C/54.0°F to 100.0°F/38.0°C in 0.5° Increments
Resolution ±0.1C°/±0.2F°
Control Accuracy ±0.5C°/±0.9F° at 21.0°C/70.0°F Typical Calibrated
Auxiliary/Outdoor Air -40.0°C/-40.0°F to 50.0°C/122.0°F
Temperature Indication Range
Minimum Deadband 1C°/2F° between Heating and Cooling
TEC2xxx
Ambient Conditions Operating: 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); 95% RH Maximum, Noncondensing
Storage:-30 to 50°C (-22 to 122°F); 95% RH Maximum, Noncondensing
Compliance (Pending) United States:
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX,
FCC Compliant to Part 15.247 Regulations for Low Power Unlicensed Transmitters
Canada:
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX7,
Under CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
Dimensions (H x W x D) 125 x 86 x 29 mm (4-15/16 x 3-3/8 x 1-1/8 in.)
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond these

TEC2xxx

WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Receivers
Application
The WRS-RTN Receiver for the Many-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System receives wireless RF
temperature data from multiple WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors for multiple temperature
zones. Figure 40-1 on page 421 illustrates a simple Many-to-One wireless room temperature sensing application
on a Metasys network with N2 controllers connected on the NAE field bus.
MS-UNT 2
VMA 1
WRS
Sensor 1 WRS
Sensor 2
N2 Bus
Web Browser
VMA 3
Internet
WRS-RTN
NAE Receiver
Temperature WRS
Data Sensor 3
FIG:n21_ovr
Ethernet Network
Firewall
Figure 40-1: Simple Metasys Network with Many-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing
System Application
WRS-RTN
TE-7800
The TE-7800 Series Receiver for the One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System receives wireless
temperature data from WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors for a single temperature zone.
TE-7820 Series Receivers are designed to communicate over a zone bus interface with Johnson Controls
VMA1400 Series Controllers. TE-7830 Series Receivers are designed to communicate over an analog interface
with Johnson Controls AS-AHU, AS-UNT, AS-VAV, and DX-9100 field controllers. Figure 40-2 on page 422
illustrates a simple One-to-One wireless room temperature sensing system consisting of one to four WRS-TTx
Series wireless room temperature sensors communicating single-zone temperature data to an associated
TE-7820-0 or TE-7830-0 receiver.
IMPORTANT: Before installing the WRS-RTN or TE-7800 Receiver in plenum applications, verify acceptance
of exposed plastic materials in plenum areas with the local building authority. Building codes for plenum
requirements vary by location. Some local building authorities accept compliance to UL 1995, Heating and
Cooling Equipment, while others use different acceptance criteria. Metal enclosures may be required.
Parts Included
• one WRS-RTN or TE-7800 Series Receiver
• one omnidirectional indoor antenna
• four No. 6 pan-head sheet-metal screws
• one control interface and power cable (included with TE-7800 only)
• one installation instructions sheet
Mounting
See Wireless Device Location and Mounting Considerations on page 345 for information on locating and mounting
WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Series Receivers.
Internet
Ethernet Network
Firewall Network
Automation
Engine
N2 Bus Web Browser
VMA 1
Zone Bus
Interface
Cable Zone Bus
Interface VMA 3 AS-UNT 2
Cable (Standalone) Analog
Interface
TE-7820 Cable
TE-7820
Receiver 3
Receiver 1
TE-7830
Receiver 2
WRS
Sensor 3C
WRS
Sensor 3A
WRS
Sensor 1
FIG:onetoone_ovr
WRS
WRS
Sensor 3B WRS
Sensor 2A
Sensor 2B
Figure 40-2: One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensing Applications

WRS-RTN
TE-7800
Installing the Omnidirectional Indoor Antenna

To install the omnidirectional antenna:
1. Screw the omnidirectional antenna on to the antenna port on the receiver.
2. Position the antenna in a vertical position and in direct line-of-sight to the sensors. The antenna tip should be at
least 50 mm (2 in.) away from any pipes, duct work, or other metal obstructions.
Mounting the Base
The WRS-RTN or TE-7800 Series receiver can be surface
mounted using the four No. 6 self-tapping, pan-head
screws supplied.
Slots
To mount the receiver base with screws (Figure 40-3 on
page 422):
1. Remove the receiver housing from the mounting base
Locking
by pressing the locking tabs in at the slots in the base. Tabs (4)
2. Use the mounting base as a template; place the
mounting base against the mounting surface and mark
the screw holes with a pencil.
FIG:Mnt_Recvr
3. Drill pilot holes at the marked locations and secure the

mounting base to the surface with four No. 6 screws
supplied. Tighten them evenly to the surface. Figure 40-3: Mounting the WRS-RTN or TE-7800
4. Reinstall receiver housing to the mounted base by Receiver
aligning locking tabs with slots on base and pressing
housing until it locks on to the base.

Note: Do not overtighten the mounting screws. Overtightening the mounting screws may damage the mounting
base or mounting surface.
Wiring
IMPORTANT: Do not connect 24 VAC supply power to the WRS-RTN or TE-7800 Series Receiver before
finishing wiring and checking all wiring connections. Short circuits or improperly connected wires may result in
permanent damage to the receiver.
regulations. The WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Series Receivers are low-voltage (<30 VAC) devices. Do not exceed
the receiver’s electrical ratings.
IMPORTANT: Prevent any static electric discharge to the WRS-RTN or TE-7800 Series Receiver. Static
electric discharge can damage the receiver and void any warranties.
Connect the 24 VAC supply power wires from the transformer to the removable 2- or 3-terminal plug. On the
3-terminal plug, use the two outside terminals; do not use the middle terminal.
IMPORTANT: You must assign an Internet Protocol (IP) address to the WRS-RTN receiver before connecting
the receiver to the network the first time. Refer to the WRS Series Many-to-One Wireless Room Temperature
Sensing System Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011095) for more information on assigning an IP address to the
receiver.
Wiring TE-7800 Receivers

Wire a TE-7820 receiver up to 91 m (300 ft) from the VMA1400 controller, as shown in Figure 40-4 on page 424.
Wire a TE-7830 receiver up to 30 m (100 ft) from the supported controller, as shown in Figure 40-5 on page 425.
WRS-RTN
TE-7800
WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Receivers: Section 40 423

WRS-RTN
TE-7800
424
24 VAC COM
To Supply
Transformer
24 VAC
TE-7820 Series RF Receiver

with Zone Bus Interface
TE-7820-0
RECEIVER

Johnson Controls
24
VMA1400 Series
2
1
VA 4VA
Digital Controller
C: C:
2
ZONE BUS MULT

to VMA1400 RF ADDRESS XMTRS
(Tstat)
24 VAC COM
24 VAC
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
AVG
HIGH
LOW
RF SIGNAL
ZONE BUS
OFF ON
OFF ON
Ts
ta
t
Power and Zone Bus Interface with
Figure 40-4: Wiring a TE-7820-x Receiver to a VMA1400 Series Controller

Johnson Controls VMA1400 Series Digital Controller
(6 ft Interface Cable included with TE-7820 Series RF Receiver)
FIG:TE-7820_TO_VMA1400
Note: Remove Jumper J1 for Johnson Controls AS-AHU and
TE-7830 Series RF Receiver DX-9100 Series controller applications that require disabling
with Analog Interface the manual override status via the zone temperature. Do not
remove Jumper J1 for Johnson Controls AS-UNT or
AS-VAV controller applications.
TE-7830-0
Johnson Controls
RECEIVER AS-AHU, AS-UNT,
ANALOG INTERFACE
AS-VAV, or DX-9100 Controller
24 VAC
To Supply
RF ADDRESS
Transformer
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
AVG
HIGH
LOW
RF SIGNAL
LOW BATTERY RELAY
RELAY COMMON
24 VAC
OCCUPANCY RELAY
OUT COMMON
Tstat LOW BATTERY

24 VAC COMMON
SET POINT OUT
ZONE TEMPERATURE OUT
24 VAC COM
OFF ON
OFF ON
Jumper J1
AI COM
SET PT AI
LOW BAT BI
BI COM*
TEMP AI-1**
OCC BI
24 VAC COM
24 VAC
Power and Analog Interface with

Johnson Controls AS-AHU,
AS-UNT, AS-VAV, or DX-9100 Controller
RED
BLK
BLU
YEL
GRN
WHT
ORN
BRN
FIG:TE-7830_wrng
BLU
YEL
GRN
WHT
ORN
BRN
RED
BLK
(6 ft Interface Cable Included with

TE-7830 Series RF Receiver)
* Relay Common (green wire) should be connected to either Binary In COM or
Figure 40-5: Wiring a TE-7830-x Receiver to an Analog Interface Field Controller

Binary In SRC, depending on the controller.
** Zone Temperature Out (white wire) should be connected to analog input AI-1
WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Receivers: Section 40

of the controller (zone temperature).
425
WRS-RTN
TE-7800
Table 40-1: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up WRS-RTN or TE-7800
Installation Instructions for WRS RTN WRS-RTN Receiver for Many-to-One Part No. 24-10126-0
Wireless Room Temperature Sensing
System Installation Instructions
Commissioning and Configuring the WRS Series Many-to-One Wireless LIT-12011095
WRS RTN Room Temperature Sensing System
Technical Bulletin
Assigning an IP address to a WRS RS Series Many-to-One Wireless Room LIT-2011095
RTN Receiver Temperature Sensing System Technical
Bulletin
Estimating the Number of WRS Wireless Metasys System Location LIT-12011294
Receivers Needed and Identifying Guide
Optimum Locations
Installation Instructions for TE-7800 TE-7800 Receiver for One-to-One Part No. 24-10139-8
Wireless Room Temperature Sensing
System Installation Instructions
Commissioning and Configuring the TE-7800 Series One-to-One Wireless LIT-12011097
TE-7800 Room Temperature Sensing System
Technical Bulletin
Table 40-2: WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Series Receivers (Part 1 of 2)
WRS-RTN Specifications
Product Codes WRS-RTN0000-x Series Receiver
Addressing Configurable via the NAE for up to 511 unique Transmitter ID addresses and up to 31
Property Code addresses.
WRS-RTN
TE-7800
Receiver Outputs One Ethernet connection for communicating Temperature, Setpoint, Occupancy Status,
Field Strength Measurements, and Low Battery Conditions
Wiring Terminations and One 3-Position Terminal Block with Removable Terminal Plug for 24 VAC Supply Power;
Network Interfaces One 10/100 Mbps, 8-pin, RJ-45 Ethernet Port
Network Bandwidth Less than 0.02% on a 10 Mbps Ethernet connection
Requirement
TE-7800 Specifications
Product Codes TE-7820-x Series Receivers for One-to-One Zone Bus Interface Applications
TE-7830-x Series Receivers for One-to-One Analog Interface Applications
Field Controller Interface TE-7820-x Series Receiver: Power and Zone Bus Interface between TE-7820-x Series
Receiver and VMA1400 Series Controller
TE-7830-x Series Receiver: Power and 0 to 5 VDC Analog Interface between
TE-7830-x Series Receiver and AS-AHU, AS-UNT, AS-VAV, and DX-9100 Series
Controller
Addressing TE-7820-x Series Receiver: DIP Switches, Field Adjustable for up to 510 unique
addresses. (For addresses 0 and 511, the TE-7820-x matches the N2 address of the
associated VMA1400 for its actual address.)
TE-7830-x Series Receiver: DIP Switches, Field Adjustable for up to 510 unique
addresses. (Addresses 0 and 511 are invalid.)
Receiver Outputs TE-7820-x Series Receiver: One Zone Bus Output for Temperature, Setpoint, Field
Strength Measurements, and Low Battery Indication
TE-7830-x Series Receiver: Two Analog Outputs for Zone Temperature and Setpoint:
0 to 5 VDC, 2 mA Maximum; Two Binary Outputs for Occupancy and Low Battery: Dry
Contacts Rated for 24 VAC, 50 mA Maximum

Table 40-2: WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Series Receivers (Part 2 of 2)
Wiring Terminations and TE-7820-0 Receiver: One 2-Position Terminal Block for 24 VAC Class 2 Supply Power
Network Interfaces and One Zone Bus Port
TE-7830-0 Receiver: One 2-Position Terminal Block for 24 VAC Class 2 Supply Power,
One 3-Position Terminal Block for Occupancy and Low Battery Binary Output Relays,
and One 3-Position Terminal Block for Zone Temperature and Setpoint Temperature
Outputs
Common Specifications (applies to WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Series Receivers)
Power Requirements 24 VAC (+10%/-15%), 50/60 Hz, 4.5 VA (minimum) Class 2 Power Supply
Ambient Operating 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Temperature
Ambient Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH, Noncondensing
Ambient Storage Temperature -40 to 71°C (-40 to 160°F)
Ambient Storage Humidity 5 to 90% RH, Noncondensing
RF Band Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum, 2.4 GHz ISM Bands
Transmissions Every 60 seconds (±20 seconds)
Transmission Range WRS-RTN0000-0 and TE-78x0-0 Series Receivers: 152 m (500 ft) Maximum Indoor
Line of Sight; 61 m (200 ft) Practical Average Indoor
WRS-RTN0000-1 and TE-78x0-1 Series Receivers: 114 m (375 ft) Maximum Indoor
Line of Sight; 50 m (165 ft) Practical Average Indoor
Temperature System Accuracy 0.6°C (1°F) over the range of 13 to 29°C (55 to 85°F)
0.9°C (1.5°F) over a range of 0 to 13°C (32 to 55°F) and 29 to 43°C (85 to 110°F)
Materials Gray Plastic Housing with UL94-5VB Flammability Rating
Mounting Screw Mount (Four No. 6 pan-head sheet-metal screws included.)
Omnidirectional Antenna Length: 140 mm (5.5 in.)
WRS-RTN
TE-7800
Compliance United States: Intended for NEC Class 2 Connection
UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX
UL 94-5VB Flammability Rating
Transmitters
WRS-RTN: Transmitter FCC Identification: CB2-TMPSENS2400A
TE-7800: Receiver Radio Module FCC Identification: CB2-RFMOD2400A
Canada: Intended for CEC Class 2 Connection
UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7
UL 94-5VB Flammability Rating
WRS-RTN Series: Industry Canada IC: 279A-TSENS24A
TE-7800 Series: Industry Canada IC: 279A-RFMOD24A
Europe: (TE-78x0-1 Series Receivers)
CE Mark - EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, Radio Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive 99/5/EC
Australia and New Zealand: Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant (C-Tick Mark)
South Africa: (TE-78x0-1 Series Receivers)
Accepts Directives for Europe
WRS-RTN and TE-7800 Receivers: Section 40 427

WRS-RTN
TE-7800

WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors
Application
The WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors are designed to sense room/zone temperature and
transmit wireless temperature control data to TE-7800 Series and WRS-RTN Series Receivers. Depending on the
sensor model, the WRS-TTx Series Sensors can transmit sensed temperature, setpoint temperature, occupancy
status, and low battery conditions to an associated receiver. The associated receiver passes the temperature data
on to a supervisory controller or a field controller.
Note: WRS-TTx0000-1 Series Sensors (CE Mark compliant models) have a reduced transmission power
(10 dBm) and transmission range to comply with the requirements of select countries.
The WRS-TTx Series Sensors are designed for two types Tamper Resistant
of room/zone temperature sensing systems: Set Screw
• The one-to-one temperature sensing system provides

Manual Occupancy Temperature
temperature data for single-zone temperature control Set Point
Override Button
based on a sensor reporting to a single TE-7800 Control Dial
Series Receiver. The one-to-one system provides
temperature data to Johnson Controls VMA1400,
AS-AHU, AS-UNT, AS-VAV, DX-9100, and FXxx
Series field controllers. 120
Occupancy LED
FIG:WRS-TT_FRNT
• The many-to-one temperature sensing system 4.7
provides temperature data for multi-zone control and
allows multiple WRS-TTx Series Sensors to report to a
single WRS-RTN Series Receiver. Up to 60 sensors 80
Back of Base to
can be associated with a single receiver. The practical Front of Set Point
3.1
average due to typical application environments is 10 Control Dial 38
1.5
to 20 sensors per receiver. The WRS-RTN Series
Receiver works in conjunction with a Metasys system Figure 41-1: WRS-TTP Physical Features and
NAE or NCE to distribute temperature data to the Dimensions, mm (in.)
multiple field controllers on the Metasys network.
The WRS-TTx Series Sensors operate as transceivers to
WRS-TTX
create a bidirectional association with the target receiver, which allows the temperature sensing system to confirm
and synchronize data transmissions between the sensors and the receiver.
The WRS-TTx Series sensors are designed for indoor, intra-building applications only.
IMPORTANT: The WRS-TTx Series sensors are not designed or intended for use in mission-critical or life/
safety applications.
Mounting
The WRS-TTx Series Sensors can be surface mounted using the double-sided adhesive foam tape supplied with
sensor. See Wireless Device Location and Mounting Considerations on page 345 for general information on
locating and mounting WRS-TTx sensors.
IMPORTANT: If you are mounting the sensor in a public high-traffic area such as a hallway, or a location where
it may be bumped on occasion, use wall anchors that are appropriate for the surface instead of adhesive tape.
Mounting the Base with Double-Sided Adhesive Foam Tape

To mount the sensor base:
1. Clean the mounting surface to ensure that the adhesive foam tape sticks to the surface.
Note: The mounting surface, mounting base, and ambient temperature must be at least 10°C (50°F) when
mounting the base with adhesive foam tape.
2. Remove the sensor housing from the mounting base (Figure 41-2 on page 430).
3. Peel off the protective paper from one side of the three 1. Loosen (but do not remove)
strips of adhesive foam tape and apply them to a the tamper-resistant set screw
on the locking tab on the
smooth section on the back side of the mounting base. mounting base.
2. Insert a screwdriver blade
4. Peel the protective paper off of the other side of the or coin into slot in top of the
strips of adhesive foam tape. housing and depress the locking tab
on mounting base to release housing.
5. Ensure that the base is upright (set screw on top) and
3. Swing the sensor
press the base firmly onto the clean mounting surface. housing off of the
mounting base.
Preparing the Sensor for Operation
Mounting
After the mounting base is properly mounted, you can set Base
the sensor DIP switches, install the sensor batteries, turn
the sensor on, reinstall the sensor housing, and secure the
sensor to the mounting base.
To prepare the sensor for operation and install the sensor
housing on the mounting base:
WRS-TT_REMOVE
Sensor
1. Set the sensor address by setting the TRANSMITTER Housing
Tabs
ID and PROPERTY CODE DIP switches on the back of
the sensor housing (Figure 41-3 on page 430).
4. Pull bottom of sensor housing down
Note: The sensor address can be set at any time, but and off of tabs on mounting base.
the sensor does not operate in a wireless temperature
sensing system until the DIP switches are set to the Figure 41-2: Removing Sensor Housing from
correct positions. See Wireless Device Location and Mounting Base (Reverse Steps to Installing)
Mounting Considerations on page 345 for information
on setting the sensor DIP switches to the correct
positions for your temperature sensing application.
2. Install two AA batteries (supplied) into the battery
compartment on the back of the sensor. Ensure that PROPERTY CODE
the batteries are installed in the proper polarity DIP Switchblock
3. If the address DIP switches are set to the correct TRANSMITTER ID
WRS-TTX
positions and the temperature sensing system is ready DIP Switchblock

PROPERTY CODE
16
8
4
2
1
ON
for operation or testing, set the POWER DIP switch to OFF
the ON position (Figure 41-3 on page 430) Sensor TRANSMITTER ID

POWER
256
128
ON/OFF
64
32
16
4
2
1
8
4. Position the bottom edge of the sensor housing under

OFF ON
Switch
the bottom lip of the mounting base and swing the
sensor into place. (Reverse the procedure shown in
Figure 41-2 on page 430.).
Insert two AA Alkaline AA Alkaline Battery
WRS-TT_BACK
5. Test the signal strength between the WRS-TTx sensor Batteries in battery ttery
and the WRS-RTN or TE-7800 Receiver by pressing compartment. a lin e Ba
lk
AA A
down and holding the Manual Occupancy Override
button for 5 seconds. Three LED blinks for each
transmission indicate a strong signal; two blinks
indicate a good signal. Figure 41-3: Back of WRS-TTx Series
Sensor Housing, Showing Address DIP Switches
6. After you verified the signal strength, secure the sensor and Batteries
to the mounting base by tightening the tamper-resistant
set screw (Figure 41-2 on page 430).

Removing an Adhesive-Mounted Base
If you must move or relocate a sensor that is mounted with double-sided adhesive foam tape, follow these steps:
1. Remove the sensor housing from the mounting base (Figure 41-2 on page 430).
2. Remove the mounting base from the mounting surface by carefully twisting the base off of the surface.
3. Remove any adhesive foam tape from the mounting base and clean the base surface.
Note: You must provide new double-sided adhesive foam tape to remount the base in an adhesive-mount
application. We recommend Can-Do (model No. 99116) adhesive foam tape or its equivalent.
Table 41-1: Documents Related to Installing, Wiring, and Setting up WRS-TTx Sensors
Installation Instructions for WRS Series Wireless Room Part No. 24-10126-19
WRS-TTx Series Sensors Temperature Sensors Installation
Instructions
Commissioning and Configuring the WRS Series Many-to-One Wireless LIT-12011095
WRS-TTx Sensors Room Temperature Sensing System
Technical Bulletin
Assigning an IP Address to a WRS RS Series Many-to-One Wireless Room LIT-2011095
RTN Receiver Temperature Sensing System Technical
Bulletin
Estimating the Number of WRS-TTx Wireless Metasys System Location LIT-12011294
Sensors Needed and Identifying Guide
Optimum Locations
WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors (Part 1 of 2)
Product Codes WRS-TTP0000-x Series Sensors: Warmer/Cooler (+/-) Setpoint Adjustment
WRS-TTR0000-x Series Sensors: No Setpoint Adjustment
WRS-TTS0000-x Series Sensors: Setpoint Adjustment Scale 13 to 29°C/55 to 85°F
Power Requirements 3 VDC Supplied by Two 1.5 VDC AA Alkaline Batteries (Included with Sensor);
Typical Battery Life: 60 Months (48 Months Minimum)
WRS-TTX
Addressing DIP Switches, Field Adjustable for up to 511 Unique Transmitter ID Addresses and for
Up to 31 Unique Property Code Addresses
Ambient Operating -18 to 50°C (0 to 122°F)
Temperature Limits
Ambient Operating 5 to 95% RH, Noncondensing
Humidity Limits
Ambient Storage -40 to 71°C (-40 to 160°F)
Temperature Limits
Ambient Storage 5 to 95% RH, Noncondensing
Humidity Limits
RF Band Direct-Sequence Spread-Spectrum, 2.4 GHz ISM Bands
Transmission Power WRS-TTx0000-0 Series Sensors: 15 dBm Maximum
WRS-TTx0000-1 Series Sensors: 10 dBm Maximum
Transmission Range WRS-TTx0000-0 Series Sensors: 152 m (500 ft) Maximum Indoor Line of Sight;
WRS-TTx0000-1 Series Sensors: 114 m (375 ft) Maximum Indoor Line of Sight;
Transmissions Every 60 Seconds (+20 Seconds);
Every 10 Seconds (+2 Seconds) in Rapid Transmit Mode
Temperature System Accuracy 0.6°C (1°F) Over the Range of 13 to 29°C (55 to 85°F);
0.9°C (1.5°F) Over a Range of 0 to 13°C (32 to 55°F) and 29 to 43°C (85 to 110°F)
WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors: Section 41 431

WRS-TTx Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors (Part 2 of 2)
Materials NEMA 1 White Plastic Housing
Mounting Double-Sided Adhesive Foam Tape Mount;
Double-Sided Adhesive Foam Tape Included with Sensor
Compliance (WRS-TTx0000-0 United States: Transmission Complies with FCC Part 15.247 Regulations for Low
Series Sensors) Power Unlicensed Transmitters
Transmitter FCC Identification: CB2-TMPSENS2400A
Canada: Industry Canada IC: 279A-TSENS24A
Australia and New Zealand: Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant (C-Tick Mark)
Compliance (WRS-TTx0000-1 Europe: CE Mark – EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, Radio Telecommunications Terminal
Series Sensors) Equipment Directive 99/5/EC
South Africa: Accepts Directives for Europe
WRS-TTX

PANELS
Panels and Enclosures 435
CUTOUT MOTOR
LOTEMP DMPR
Actuator Mounting and Preloading Guidelines 445
A11 and A70 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls 451

PANELS
Panels and Enclosures
Standard Panel and Enclosures
Application
Standard control panels and enclosures are designed to satisfy more than 80% of the Johnson Controls Branch
office demands by including the most commonly used components arranged in a highly organized layout, which
facilitates easy installation.
The enclosures house and protect subpanel assemblies, supervisory controllers, field controllers, input/output
modules, and application specific controllers. They are also used in configurations of gauges, relays, extension
modules, expansion modules, power supplies and other similar components.
Control Panels can be supplied to the field as a Sub Assembly panel without an enclosure and installed into
enclosures at the job site, or as a Panel Assembly mounted in a painted steel enclosure with a latched door. Both
are constructed in compliance with UL 508A and bear the UL Listed mark.
The Standard Control Panel product line has various assembly configurations, allowing the end users to select the
appropriate one for each application.
The Lite versions use a standard, non-customized NEMA-1 enclosure with a latching door, but without terminal
blocks for field wiring. Field wiring is terminated on the controller itself.
The standard offering of the Control Panel product line uses a custom Johnson Controls NEMA Type 1 enclosure
with a lock and key, and some models provide terminal blocks for quick field wiring to the controller.
The control panel is designed to provide the necessary clearance for electrical safety per UL508A, which also
provides the field installation technician room to terminate the connections inside the enclosure on the job site. The
door is hinged on the left side of the enclosure.
Control panels may also be ordered with NEMA Type 3R, 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures. See Ordering Control Panels
with NEMA Type 3R, 4, 4X and 12 Enclosures on page 438 for more information.
Table 42-1: Standard Enclosures
Standard Lite Enclosures Standard Johnson Controls Enclosures
A B E F A B E F G
Size 50.8 x 60.9 x 60.9 x 40.6 x 50.8 x 60.9 x 60.9 x 40.6 x 30.4 x
WxHxD 60.9 x 91.4 x 60.9 x 50.8 x 60.9 x 91.4 x 60.9 x 50.8 x 40.6 x
16.5 cm 16.5 cm 16.5 cm 16.5 cm 23.4 cm 23.4 cm 23.4 cm 16.5 cm 16.5 cm
(20 x 24 x (24 x 36 x (24 x 24 x (16 x 20 x (20 x 24 x (24 x 36 x (24 x 24 x (16 x 20 x (12 x 16 x
6.5 in.) 6.5 in.) 6.5 in.) 6.5 in.) 9.25 in.) 9.25 in.) 9.25 in.) 6.5 in.) 6.5 in.)
Weight 13.5 kg 23.5 kg 18.1 kg 9 kg 24.5 kg 34 kg 29.4 kg 9 kg 6.8 kg
(30 lb) (52 lb) (40 lb) (20 lb) (54 lb) (75 lb) (65 lb) (20 lb) (15 lb)
Footprint 50.8 x 60.9 x 91.4 x 40.6 x 50.8 x 60.9 x 60.9 x 40.6 x 30.4 x
60.9 mm 91.4 mm 91.4 mm 50.8 mm 60.9 mm 91.4 mm 60.9 mm 50.8 mm 30.4 mm
(20 x (24 x (24 x (16 x (20 x (24 x (24 x (16 x (12 x
24 in.) 36 in.) 24 in.) 20 in.) 24 in.) 36 in.) 24 in.) 20 in.) 12 in.)
Perforated 4 point 6 point 4 point 4 point 4 point 6 point 4 point 4 point 4 point
Panel connection connection connection connection connection connection connection connection connection
Mounting to
Enclosure
Separate No Yes
Panel
Terminal
Blocks
Provided
Enclosure 4 point connection
Mounting to
Wall
Color Gray painted enclosure per ANSI 61
PANELS
Mounting
The control panels and cabinets shall be located as 6 feet above the
indicated (Figure 42-1 on page 436) at an elevation of no finished floor
fewer than 61 cm (2 ft) from the bottom edge of the panel to
the finished floor and no higher than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the top
edge of the cabinet to the finished floor.
Anchor each cabinet in at least four places (in each corner)
or as required by the manufacturer’s recommendations
Most Johnson Controls panels are surface mounted. On
2 feet minimum
occasion, projects require flush mounted (recessed in a above finished floor
wall) or free stand panels.
If the enclosure or location desired to mount our panel is not
on the project drawings or identified in the specifications, it
FIG:pnlmnt
is usually the responsibility of Johnson Controls or its
subcontractors to identify the enclosure and location. Figure 42-1: Placing Control Panels
Therefore, be sure to write a confirming letter or sketch the
size and location of the panels and deliver this to the
designer or contractor; this helps ensure that the designated
space is available.
Keep in mind the following points when selecting a panel
location:
• Distance from the panel to the field devices. It is a best
practice to select a location as close as possible to the
largest collection of field devices.
• Accessibility for raceways or tubing to enter the
enclosure so that a minimal amount of bending is
required. Enclosure Mount-
ing to Wall - 4 point
• Clearance requirements when the panel door is connection
opened.
• Installing height (unless specified) is 1.8 m (6 ft) from
finish floor to the top of the enclosure.
• Wall or mounting surface type.
FIG:enclmnt
• Free standing enclosure requirements.

Interior walls are excellent locations for enclosures since
they usually are hollow walls, which allow for easier Figure 42-2: 4-Point Connection
installation. It is not required to stand off enclosures
installed on interior walls. Enclosures installed on exterior
walls may require standoffs due to temperature changes, which can cause moisture between the panel and wall.
Anchors shall be of adequate type and size for the load to be supported. For most hollow wall applications, 6.3 mm
(1/4 in.) toggle bolts are recommended.
Wiring
Control Panel Wiring Standards
The convention for all control panel wiring to and from a digital controller is 18 AWG with an insulation rating of at
least 300 V. For all other wiring, use 14 AWG. For more information, see Metasys System Cable and Wire
Standards on page 465.
These colors and wire gauges are not required for field wiring. See Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors on
page 17 for information on Johnson Controls standards for field wire and cable sizes and colors.

PANELS
Table 42-2: Typical Johnson Controls Internal Panel Wiring Colors
Signal Type Termination Wire / Cable Color
24 VAC Hot Orange
Common Brown
Ground (varies) Green
N2 Bus N2 + Black
N2 - White
N2 Ref Blue
Shield Shield
XT Bus XT + Red
XT - Black
XT Ref White
Shield Shield
FC Bus FC + Black
FC - White
FC Com Blue
Shield Shield
SA Bus SA + Black
SA - White
SA Com Blue
Power Red
+15 V, +5 V, or +24 V +15 V, +5 V, or +24 V terminal Red
Analog Input AI1 through AIx Yellow
Analog Output AO1 through AOx Tan
Binary Input BI1 through BIx Orange
Binary Output BO1 through BOx Violet
I/O Common I/O point’s Common, COM, CMN terminal Black
Wiring Separation
Follow UL/NEC standards when using inserts to separate low-voltage and line-voltage wiring by a minimum of
50 mm (2 in.).
Since most low voltage wiring for HVAC installations is classified as Class 2 circuit conductors, maintain separation
between these conductors and circuit conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, and
medium-power network-powered broadband communications circuits.
As a general rule, separate the routing of Class 2 conductors and cables at a minimum of 6 mm (0.25 in.) from
these types of circuits.
Refer to the National Electrical Code or local codes to ensure that you maintain proper separation requirements.
Enclosure NEMA Type Ratings
Various NEMA Type ratings are given to enclosures that permit them to be used in many different environments,
such as outdoors or in hazardous locations. All of Johnson Controls standard, lite, and UPM enclosures meet
NEMA 1 requirements. Table 42-3 on page 437 provides a brief explanation of the most common NEMA ratings.
Table 42-3: NEMA Ratings
NEMA Description
Rating
1 Indoor use. Provides a degree of protection against contact with the enclosed equipment or locations
where unusual service conditions do not exist.
3R Outdoor use. Provides a degree of protection against rain and damage caused by the formation of ice on
the enclosure.
4 Indoor or outdoor use. Provides a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water,
hose-directed water, and damage caused by the formation of ice on the enclosure.
12 Indoor use. Provides a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids.
Panels and Enclosures: Section 42 437

PANELS
Ordering Control Panels with NEMA Type 3R, 4, 4X and 12 Enclosures

Standard Johnson Controls enclosures are NEMA Type 1, but the perforated-back control panels with slotted
mounting holes are also designed to mount in specified Hoffman Type 3R, 4, 4X and 12 enclosures. (For details on
which NEMA 3R, 4, 4X, and 12 Hoffman enclosures match the bolt pattern of the Johnson Controls standard panel
backplane, see the Custom Control Panels Web site on the Johnson Controls Employee Portal.)
To special order a Johnson Controls control panel mounted in a Hoffman NEMA Type 3R, 4, 4X, or 12 enclosure:
1. Obtain an electronic version of the Custom Panel Order Form (File: 1634a) at the Custom Control Panels
Web site on the Johnson Controls Employee Portal.
a. On the portal, click on Products & Services on the menu bar.
b. In the HVAC Products section on the page, click Control Panels to go to the Control Panels homepage for
more information. To access and download a Custom Panel Order Form (File: 1634a) click on the Tools/
Forms link (or the Standard Plus Control Panels or Custom Control Panels link).
2. On an Item Description line on the electronic order form, specify an unenclosed SA version of the desired
perforated control back panel and request that it be mounted in a standard Hoffman enclosure.
3. Provide the Hoffman part number for the desired NEMA Type and size enclosure. To determine the appropriate
Hoffman part number, see Table 42-3 on page 437 or visit the Hoffman Web site at http://
www.hoffmanonline.com to obtain current product information.
4. Attach the completed Custom Panel Order Form to an email message and send your message and form to
CG-ControlPanel.Order.Entry@jci.com
Note: A layout drawing and wiring diagram is not required with your order as long as there are no changes or
additions to the control panel.
To request a quote for control panels and enclosures send an email to: CG-CustomPanelQuote@jci.com
Johnson Controls in Reynosa can also order any of the Hoffman line of products. To request a quote for any
Hoffman product, send an email with the Hoffman part number to CG-CustomPanelQuote@jci.com. To place an
order for any Hoffman product, send an email with a complete Custom Panel Order Form (File: 1634_a) with the
Hoffman part number to CG-ControlPanel.Order.Entry@jci.com
Panel Penetrations
The layout of the penetrations and the making of penetrations into the panels and cabinets is the responsibility of
the subcontractor or electrical installer.
Design Considerations
Load Bearing
Select a wall space or area with sufficient room to mount the enclosure and install conduit. The load-bearing
capacity of the wall must be able to support the full configuration weight. Wood surfaces generally only require
bolting the enclosure to the wall; drywall surfaces require anchors for the bolts.

PANELS
UPM Enclosures
Application
UPMs make up an expandable enclosure system, made of plastic, which house a wide range of controllers and
accessories.
Four sizes of units are available, and each comes completely assembled. However, due to their modular design,
you can modify the units to customize the enclosure to the site. (Johnson Controls Panel Facility wires and
configures a unit, complete with gear, to your specifications.) If system requirements change for units that are
already mounted, the enclosure’s modular construction allows you to increase the unit’s capacity without having to
rewire the existing controls.
Mounting Remove Door
1. To remove the cover, turn the key counterclockwise
until the key is in an upright position. Pull out on the
blue latch and then pull the cover out to a 90° angle
from the base. Finally, pull the cover up and away
from the hinge to completely remove it.
FIG:UPM-Mnt
2. Position the unit on the wall and mark the location of 2
the mounting slot on the upper-most section. Each Lift Up
section of an enclosure has a center mounting slot
and two mounting holes (Figure 42-4 on page 439).
1
3. Drill a hole to accommodate a 6.4 mm (1/4 in.) bolt. Open Door 90°
Anchor the bolt, leaving a 9.5 mm (3/8 in.) to 1.2 cm
(1/2 in.) protrusion on which to hang the backbone. Figure 42-3: Mounting a UPM
4. Hang the backbone over the bolt. Level the box. Mark
the appropriate mounting holes along the wiring Mounting Slot
channels. For units with multiple backbone sections, it
is only necessary to install bolts in the four outside
perimeter mounting holes, and alternate holes in the
remaining sections (Figure 42-5 on page 440).
Mounting Mounting
5. Drill into the wall to accommodate the mounting holes Hole Hole
(the units can be left in place or removed from the
wall). Secure the unit with 6.4 mm (1/4 in.) bolts. If
FIG:UPM-Mnt2
field gear is already mounted in the box, remove the
box from the wall before mounting.
Wire Channels
6. Mount the gear, using the appropriate mounting
methods for the application, and replace the door. Figure 42-4: Bolt Locations When Mounting a
Single Enclosure
IMPORTANT: The EWC12/22 supplies power via the utility outlets and two switched power wires in the power
box. If the powered devices use only the utility outlets, make sure that the switched power wires remain wire-
nutted and electrically insulated.

PANELS
Adding Sections to Existing Units

1/4 in. Anchor
You may add a backbone and cover to an existing unit Bolt
without having to rewire the original controls.
Expansion Kit Option
The expansion kit option provides additional storage
1/4 in. Bolt 1/4 in. Bolt
capacity for equipment that does not need to be viewed.
The expansion kit (EN-EXP101-0) includes a solid cover,
a backbone, and T-20 Torx screws (for fastening sections
together). You can order this kit to expand an existing
enclosure at the job site or as part of an original
No Bolt No Bolt
configuration through the Johnson Controls Panel Unit. Necessary Necessary
• Torx screwdriver
• T-20 recessed Torx screws (included with the
expansion and window units) 1/4 in. Bolt 1/4 in. Bolt
Expansion Unit Installation
FIG:mnt2
See Figure 42-6 on page 440 and follow the steps below
when installing expansion units:
1. Remove the two screws holding the endcap to the Figure 42-5: Bolt Locations When Mounting
backbone. Multiple Enclosures
2. Slide out the endcap.
3. Attach the endcap to the new backbone using the
same screws you just removed.
4. Position the endcap and new section assembly flush
against the main unit. Mark the holes and remove the
new section.
Add section
5. Drill holes into the wall and reposition the new to endcap
and attach
section. to unit.
6. Screw the sections together (using the included Torx
screws) and secure them to the wall using two
6.4 mm (1/4 in.) bolts.
FIG:UPM-pb3
7. Install any gear. Be sure that any previously installed
wiring for grounding or bonding is reinstalled.
8. Screw the new door piece to the new door.
Figure 42-6: Expanding the Package
9. Replace the door.
Wiring
Power Connections
Use wire-nuts to connect the power source’s hot and neutral lines to the corresponding lines inside the power box.
Use wire-nuts to connect the power source’s ground wire to the green power box wire. This grounds the power
outlets (which are internally connected to a ring terminal on the grounding screw). The transformer is already
connected to the second ring terminal on the same grounding screw.
This connection completes the line-voltage wiring to the power outlets and the transformer. Internal connections to
power outlets, switch, and ground are made at the factory. Switches control power to the transformer.

PANELS
Grounding and Bonding
Installing the power box in any of the four
designated positions locates one of the rear slots
of the box over a grounding screw at the back of
the endcap (each endcap has two grounding
screws). The power box must be provided with a
grounding conductor.
When bringing multiple conduits into one end of
the enclosure, you automatically connect the
standard conduit connectors to the ground plane,
grounding all conduits together. While attaching
other devices to the opposite screw on the same
endcap, you also ground those devices via the
aluminum ground plane.
If conduit is connected to the bottom endcap
(opposite the powerbox), electrically bond the
endcap to the grounded endcap and attach a
grounding wire from the open screw of the power
box endcap to either of the grounding screws of
FIG:UPM-mnt3
the second endcap (Figure 42-7 on page 441).
Figure 42-7: Power and Grounding/Bonding Terminations
Power Box and Transformer Location

The power box and transformer can be located in
different areas of the enclosure, depending on the
FIG:cvrnu
requirements of the other installed equipment.
Four discrete locations for the power box
(designated as A, B, C, or D) are on the outside of
the endcap (Figure 42-8 on page 441). The power
Figure 42-8: Line Voltage Conduit Entry
box is generally located in Area C. Set the power
from the Top of the Enclosure
box on the inside of the unit over two bosses
corresponding to one of the locations; A, B, C, or
D. Position the transformer to within 1.2 cm (1/2 in.) of the power box.
IMPORTANT: You must reconnect the ground wires if you move the power box.
Power
The power option provides an integrated 50 VA (EN-EWC15, EN-EWC25) or 100 VA (EN-EWC35, EN-EWC45)
transformer. A switch activates the transformer. Two utility outlets inside a metal power entrance box are also
included.
Power to the power box must be 120 VAC at 60 Hz.
A terminal block assembly is used specifically for higher voltage (line) connections and includes a 5 or 10 ampere
circuit breaker, which is also used as the control panel disconnect switch. This circuit breaker / disconnect does
not have lockout provisions, and per UL508A, a label is located next to it to instruct the field installer to
provide a separate lockable disconnect switch in the incoming power line.
Wiring Separation
Use one side of the enclosure to route low-voltage wiring and the other side for line-voltage wiring. Off-the-shelf
inserts from Richco Plastics plug into the mounting holes of the backbone to help route wires. The hole size is 7.87
mm (0.31 in).

PANELS
Design Considerations
W
Several preassembled sizes of enclosures are available.
These include the EN-EWC10-0, EWC20, EWC30, or the D
EWC40 (Figure 42-10 on page 442). You can order any
of these sizes to include a 24 VAC transformer and power
box (EN-EWC15-0 [with UNT], EWC25 [with DX-9100],
H
EWC35 [with AHU], EWC45 [with multiple controllers]).
Table 42-4 on page 442, Figure 42-9 on page 442, and
Figure 42-10 on page 442 illustrate the various enclosure
dimensions.
Due to the rigidity and strength of the molded plastic
enclosure, the weight supported by an individual
enclosure is probably higher than any application UPMPB6
requirement. The pull-out value of the screw holes on the
backbone is 90.7 kg (200 lb). However, in securing a very Figure 42-9: Dimensions of Preassembled
heavy object, the best practice is to distribute the weight Enclosures in Table 42-4 on page 442
over a number of screws.
The weight resting on the bottom endcap must not
exceed 22.6 kg (50 lb).
Environment
The enclosure is for indoor use only. Avoid areas where
water leakage may occur.
Table 42-4: Enclosure Sizes
Enclosure Size (H x W x D) EWC10
EN-EWC10-0 23 x 41x 19 cm (9 x 16 x 7.5 in.)
EN-EWC15-0
EN-EWC20-0 41 x 41 x 19 cm (16 x 16 x 7.5 in.)
EN-EWC25-0 EWC20
EN-EWC30-0 59 x 41 x 19 cm (23 x 16 x 7.5 in.)
EN-EWC35-0
EN-EWC40-0 76 x 41 x 19 cm (30 x 16 x 7.5 in.)
EN-EWC45-0
EWC30
FIG:UPM-b1
EWC40
Figure 42-10: Preassembled Enclosures

PANELS
Table 42-5: Documents Related to Installing and Setup of Enclosures
For Information On Refer to LIT or Part No.
Installation and Setup of M9000-310 and M9000-320 Weather Part No. 14-1330-18
M9000-310 and M9000-320 Shield Enclosures Installation Instructions
Weather Shield Enclosures
Features, Benefits, and M9000-310 and M9000-320 Weather LIT-1201704
Ordering Information for Shield Enclosures Product Bulletin
M9000-310 and M9000-320
Enclosures
Installation and Setup of UPMs Universal Packaging Module Technical LIT-6363070
Bulletin
Table 42-6: Enclosures
Product Description Dimensions W x H x D Weight
AS-ENC100-0 Utility Enclosure 18.6 x 17.3 x 17.6 cm (7.3 x 6.8 x 6.9 in.) N/A
EN-EWC10-0 UPM - Single Unit 40.7 x 22.9 x 19.1 cm (16. x 9 x 7.5 in.) 2.3 kg (5 lb)
EN-EWC20-0 UPM - Dual Unit 40.7 x 40.7 x 19.1 cm (16 x 16 x 7.5 in.) 3.6 kg (8 lb)
EN-EWC30-0 UPM - Triple Unit 40.7 x 58.5 x 19.1 cm (16 x 23 x 7.5 in.) 5 kg (11 lb)
EN-EWC40-0 UPM - Quad Unit 40.7 x 76.2 x 19.1 cm (16 x 30 x 7.5 in.) 6.4 kg
(14 lb)
PAN-ENC1620WD Steel Enclosure with Matching Door – 40.7 x 50.8 x 16.8 cm (16 x 20 x 6.62 in.) 14.3 kg
Custom (31.5 lb)
PAN-ENH1620WD Steel Enclosure with Matching Door – 40.7 x 50.8 x 16.8 cm (16 x 20 x 6.62 in.) 14.3 kg
Hoffman (31.5 lb)
PAN-ENH2024WD Steel Enclosure with Matching Door – 50.8 x 61 x 16.8 cm (20 x 24 x 6.62 in.) 13.6 kg
Hoffman (30 lb)
PAN-ENC2024WD Steel Enclosure with Matching Door – 50.8 x 61 x 23.3 cm (20 x 24 x 9.145 in.) 15.4 kg
Custom (34 lb)
PAN-ENH2424WD Steel Enclosure with Matching Door – 61 x 61 x 16.8 cm (24 x 24 x 6.62 in.) 18.1 kg
Hoffman (40 lb)
PAN-ENC2424WD Steel Enclosure with Matching Door – 61 x 61 x 23.3 cm (24 x 24 x 9.145 in.) 19.5 kg
Custom (43 lb)
PAN-ENH2436WD Steel Enclosure with Matching Door – 61 x 91.5 x 16.8 cm (24 x 36 x 6.62 in.) 23.5 kg
Hoffman (52 lb)
PAN-ENC2436WD Steel Enclosure with Matching Door – 61 x 91.5 x 23.3 cm (24 x 36 x 9.145 in.) 24.9 kg
Custom (55 lb)
PAN-ENC3042WD Steel Enclosure with Matching Door – 76 x 107 x 23.3 cm (30 x 42 x 9.145 in.) 43 kg
Custom (95 lb)
PAN-ENC3648WD Steel Enclosure with Matching Door – 91.5 x 122 x 23.3 cm (36 x 48 x 9.145 in.) 55.3 kg
Custom (122 lb)

PANELS

Actuator Mounting and Preloading Guidelines
MOTOR
DMPR
4
(102)
2
(51)
3-3/16
1-19/32 1-19/32
(81)
(40) (40) 1/8 3/4
(3) (19)
A
2-3/16
1-19/32 (56)
(40)
1-1/16
(27)
10-5/16 10
(262) (254)
6-15/16
(176)
1/4 (6.5)
Diameter
(6 Locations)
Figure 43-1: FPO... ILLUSTRATION 1 2-3/16

1-3/4 (25) (56)
(44)
FIG:m9210_dimens
Figure 43-1: Dimensions of a Typical Actuator, in. (mm)
Application
Actuators open and close dampers to control airflow. Many actuators mount directly on the damper shaft; others
MOTOR
use a crankarm and linkage to connect the actuator to the damper blades.
DMPR
Severe problems may arise if the actuators are not set up properly. If the actuators are not preloaded, they do not
properly close the damper blades. An unseated damper allows infiltration of air that is either too cold or too hot for
proper control or safety. Therefore, preloading the damper actuator is an important, standard value-added practice
that prevents infiltration.
Note: If the actuator does not close an exhaust or outside damper, HVAC equipment can become damaged or
have reduced effectiveness.
Actuator Mounting Side A:
CCW Spring Return Direction
CCW Spring Return Direction – CW Powered
Operation A
For CCW spring return direction, mount the actuator to Auxiliary Switch
the damper shaft so that the Side A of the actuator is Adjuster Located
away from the damper as illustrated in Figure 43-2 on on the Right
page 446. With power applied, the actuator drives CW
from the 0° position and spring returns CCW. Pointer Showing
80
90 70
60 50 40 30
20
10
-5 Actuator in the
Spring Return
Position
Manual
Override
FIG:Sde-A
Figure 43-2: Side A: CW Open/CCW Spring Return
CW Spring Return Direction – CCW Powered Side B:

Operation CW Spring Return Direction
To change the spring return direction to CW, mount the
actuator to the damper shaft so that Side B of the actuator B
Auxiliary Switch
is away from the damper as illustrated in Figure 43-3 on
Adjuster Located
page 446. With power applied, the actuator now drives on the Left
CCW from the 0° position and spring returns CW.
Pointer Showing
Actuator in the -5
10
20
30 60
70
80
90
40 50
Spring Return
Position
Manual
Override
FIG:Sde-B
Figure 43-3: Side B: CCW Open/CW Spring Return

Mounting the Actuator
To mount the actuator, proceed as follows:
MOTOR
DMPR
1. Secure the anti-rotation bracket to the damper frame
A A
or duct work. Use Figure 43-4 on page 447 and
Table 43-1 on page 447 to determine the distance
between the center of the shaft and the bracket.
2. Slide the actuator onto the damper shaft, and position
the tab of the anti-rotation bracket into the slot at the
Dim.
bottom of the actuator. B Dim.
3. Rotate the damper blade(s) to the desired position if A
the power is lost. To ensure a tight seal for normally
closed dampers, insert the manual override crank and
FIG:brpos
rotate it five turns in the direction indicated by the
arrow on the label. The position indicator should be
near the 0° position on the scale. Quickly rotate the
manual override crank a half turn in the opposite Figure 43-4: Length from Shaft to Bracket
direction to temporarily lock the actuator hub in place.
4. Evenly hand tighten each clamp nut onto the U-bolt,
keeping the actuator flat. Secure the U-bolt to the damper shaft and tighten securely.
5. To release the spring, turn the manual override crank in the direction indicated on the label.
6. Remove the manual override crank and store it in an unused mounting hole.
Table 43-1: Minimum Distances from Shaft
Shaft Diameter Dimensions A, mm (in.) Dimensions B, mm (in.)
12 to 14 mm 210 178
(1/2 to 9/16 in.)
(8-9/32) (7)
16 to 19 mm 207 175
(5/8 to 3/4 in.)
(8-5/32) (6-29/32)
Actuator Preloading
Preloading is one of the most important commissioning steps. Commissioning before preloading may cause air
leakage to occur and require some rework.
To fine-tune the actuator, you’ll need the following:
• M9000-200 Commissioning Tool or equivalent (laptop, signal generator)
• Cable or wire for making power and signal connections
• Wire stripper
• Adjustable, open-end, box-end, or socket wrenches, including Metric sizes
• Channellock-style or Vise-Grip pliers
• Flashlight
Recommended Preloading Procedure
When you complete this procedure, you ensure that the damper blades effectively prevent unwanted air exchange
that could damage the HVAC equipment.
1. Disconnect power to the actuator.
2. Loosen the U-bolt or crankarm bolt, which secures the actuator to the damper shaft or blade pin extension.
3. Connect the signal source to the actuator.
4. Apply a control signal of 5–10% over and above the normal closed value of the spring range. Your goal is to
find the minimum signal required to achieve an effective seal.
Actuator Mounting and Preloading Guidelines: Section 43 447

5. Firmly hold the blade pin extension with the channellock or Vise-Grip pliers, then physically close and continue
to hold the damper blades in a tightly closed position.
MOTOR
6. Retighten the U-bolt or crankarm bolt.

DMPR
7. Release the control signal. You should see the actuator spring back and create a tight seal at the damper
blades.
8. If you did not get a tight enough seal, repeat Steps 1–7. Apply a little more signal to increase the spring
pressure, release, then check the seal.
9. Continue until you obtain a good seal. Each time you preload, verify that the actuator tightly closed the damper.
Similar procedures can be followed for other electric and pneumatic actuators. Preloading is just as important for
pneumatic actuators as for electric.
Importance of Not Over Preloading
It is possible to over-preload a damper actuator. For example, consider the following scenario. Assume that:
• You need 20% minimum airflow.
• You used 20% of the voltage or current range to preload the damper.
• After preloading, you give the damper actuator a 20% command and walk away.
IMPORTANT: At 10% command, the damper stays closed. At 20% of maximum signal, the damper still stays
closed because of preloading. You must understand which signal is necessary to achieve 20% minimum airflow,
after preloading.

Table 43-2: Information on Dampers, Actuators, and Accessories (Part 1 of 2)
MOTOR
DMPR
Installing Actuators M100C Series Actuator with Digital Control Signal Input and LIT-2681113
R81CAA-2 Interface Board Installation Bulletin
M100G Series Proportional Actuator with VDC/mA Control LIT-2681298
Input R81GAA-2 Interface Board Installation Bulletin
M2202-xxx-2 Series Electric Spring Return Actuators Part No. 34-1660-4
M9102-AGA-2S and M9104-xGA-2S Series Electric Part No. 34-636-1220
Non-Spring Return Actuators Installation Instructions
M9104-AGx-2N Electric Non-spring Return Actuators Part No. 34-636-631
M9106-xGx-2 Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators Part No. 34-636-1085
M9108, M9116, M9124, and M9132 Series Electric Part No. 34-636-399
Non-Spring Return Actuators Installation Instructions
M9109 Series Electric Non-spring Return Actuators Installation Part No. 34-636-1190
Instructions
M9204-CNx Series Electric Spring Return Part No. 34-1280-41
Economizer Damper Actuators Installation Instructions
M9206-GGx-2S Series Proportional Electric Spring Return Part No. 34-1280-246
Actuators Installation Instructions
M9206 Series Electric Spring Return Actuators Installation Part No. 34-1280-9
Instructions
M9206-AGx-2S Series Floating Electric Spring Return Part No. 34-1280-238
M9206-Bxx-2S Series On/Off Part No. 34-1280-122
Electric Spring Return Actuators Installation Instructions
M9216 Series Electric Spring Return Actuators Installation Part No. 34-636-461
Instructions
M9216-BAx-2 Assemblies Installation Instructions Part No. 34-636-801
M9220-Bxx-3 On/Off Electric Spring Return Actuators Part No. 34-636-1239
Actuator Mounting and Preloading Guidelines: Section 43 449

Table 43-2: Information on Dampers, Actuators, and Accessories (Part 2 of 2)
MOTOR
Installing Dampers CD-1300 Installation Instructions Control Dampers Only Part No. 44-352-35
DMPR
FD-1600 Fire Rated Multiple Blade Damper Installation Part No. 44-1121-67
Instructions
FS-1620 1 1/2 Hour Fire/Class II Smoke Damper Installation Part No. 44-1121-8
Instructions
FS-1630 1-1/2 Hour Fire/Class I Smoke Damper Installation Part No. 44-1121-16
Instructions
Series Q35 MIZER™ Automatic Vent Damper System LIT-121515
Technical Bulletin
RF-2000 Round Fire Damper Installation Instructions Part No. 44-1121-32
RS-2000 Round Smoke Damper Installation Instructions Part No. 44-1121-40
RT-2000 Round Fire/Smoke Damper Installation Instructions Part No. 44-1121-59
SD-1600 Smoke Damper Installation Instructions Part No. 44-1121-24
ZD-1800 Zone Damper Installation Instructions Part No. 44-752-5
M9000-156 and M9000-165 Mounting Kit for M920x Series Part No. 34-1280-33
Installing the D-4073 with D-4073 with Universal Mounting Bracket Installation Bulletin Part No. 34-204-19
Universal Mounting Bracket
Installing the D-4073 with D-4073 with Auxiliary Mounting Kit Installation Part No. 34-206-26
Auxiliary Mounting Kit

A11 and A70 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls
A11 or A70 Thermostat
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
Element may be mounted in a slight downward
incline not to exceed 5 in. over a unit width of 5 ft.
(See table below.)
Use 1/4 in. poly tubing
to sleeve through a 1/4 in.
hole drilled in duct
or snap-in bushing. Attach to 3/8 in. copper or Not to
Bulb element 1/2 in. EMT with the wraps if Exceed
no coil flange exists. 14 in.
Coil and secure any unused
portion of the capillary
or sensing element at the Average element holder
beginning of the run. with 3 in. minimum radius. Coil and secure
any remaining
sensing element
Attach element holder that may be at
to frame of unit or 12 in. maximum the end of the
coil with self-tapping run.
screw or anchor tie
wrap. Always use
averaging element
holder that matches
loop size.
FIG:A11-A70_Acc
6 in. maximum
Start installation of
element at the bottom
of the coil. Determine
location of thermostat Must be within 6 in. of the Secure elements at end and
by using the above bottom of the coil (The every 2-3 ft along element
measurements. The most important part with 1/4 in. poly sleeve and tie
element length is 20 feet. of the coil to protect). wraps. Use additional vertical
lengths of 3/8 in. copper or 1/2 in.
EMT if no coil braces exist.
Note: When duct is covered with
insulation, mount stat to standard
electric wallbox cover on wallbox.
Figure 44-1: Mounting a Low Temperature Cutout Control in an Accessible Location
Application
Select models of the A11 and A70 Series Temperature Controls are low temperature operating controls typically
used for water-coil freeze protection in Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning and Refrigeration (HVACR)
applications.
• 1.3 cm (1/2 in.) EMT bender
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
• hole saw
• tin snips or hack saw, vise
• brackets
• 10.1 cm (4 in.) electrical box covers with a center hole knockout, or T-752-1001 1.3 cm (1/2 in.) Duct Flanges
• nylon tie wraps with holes
• 1.3 cm (1/2 in.) EMT connectors
• 6.4 mm (1/4 in.) poly tubing
• copper tubing
• EMT or Unistrut
• conduit hangers or Minerallac straps
• self-tapping sheet metal screws
• machine screws and nuts
• A11/A70 low temperature cutout control
• TE-6001-8 Element Mounting Bracket
Mounting
Mounting Considerations
The primary purpose of a low limit cutout is to prevent a coil from freezing. Therefore, before mounting the control,
you need to consider several factors that help protect the coil from freezing.
• Cool air drops to the bottom of the unit. This is why protection in the lower bottom of the unit (lower 15.2 cm or
6 in.) is vital.
• If the tubes in the coil freeze, the coil can crack and begin leaking. As water leaks from the coil, the control
system may sense the reduced water pressure and increase the flow of water to compensate for the loss,
which causes even more damage.
• For most low limits to perform their intended task, they must be installed in a very specific manner. The low limit
controls currently used incorporate a vapor-charged sensing element. The vapor in the element creates a
change in pressure with a change in temperature within the sensing element, eventually causing the electrical
switch in the device to open or close. This design feature is the reason that the device must be installed
properly so that it functions as intended.
• The size of the duct work or air handling unit system in which the device is being installed may require more
than one low limit control to adequately protect the entire coil.
• System accessibility affects how the device is mounted. Larger AHUs often provide access to the coil, allowing
you to effectively serpentine the capillary across its face. (See Mounting in an Accessible Location on
page 455.) Smaller AHUs or duct work may not provide direct accessibility, which means you need to
pre-assemble the control before installation. (See Mounting in an Inaccessible Location on page 456.)

• Install the poly tubing so that the element is mounted in a slight decline of approximately 1 inch for every 1 foot
of drop, as illustrated in Figure 44-2 on page 453.
Unit Width
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
Maximum
Drop
Unit Width Max inches of drop

(in feet) per segment
5 5.25
10 10.50
15 15.75
20 21.00
FIG:A11Drp
25 26.25
30 31.50
General Rule: 1 inch drop per foot of run.
Figure 44-2: Mounting Poly Tubing Inside Coil
• Two alternate installations are shown in Figure 44-3 on page 453 (which the York Solution Air Handling Units
team typically uses). If you select this installation method, mount the temperature control above the sensing
element whenever possible. If you cannot mount the control above the element, loop the capillary/element
slightly below the control, then route the element toward the top of the coil, and begin serpertining in a
downward direction from the top of the coil. Keep the loop as short as possible (maximum of 4 feet). If you
mounted the control below the sensing element, prevent possible nuisance alarms by mounting the control in a
conditioned space. When using the A11 Series control, coil the excess capillary (small capillary between the
control and sensing element) inside the conditioned space and secure.
Air Handling Unit - Conditioned Space* Air Handling Unit - Conditioned Space*
Sensing Element/Capillary Keep rise as short

as possible.
Maximum 4 feet.
A11 Element
A70
A11
A70
Coil and secure Coil and secure
any remaining any remaining
sensing element sensing element
here at the end of here at the end
the run. of the run.
FIG:A11-A70_Acc2
* Conditioned space is an area in which the setpoint is equal to or greater than the control setpoint.
Figure 44-3: Two Alternative Mounting Methods
A11 and A70 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls: Section 44 453
Observe the following guidelines when mounting A11 and A70 Series low temperature cutout controls.
CAUTION: Risk of Environmental and Property Damage
! Avoid sharp bends in capillary tubes. Sharp bends can damage the capillary tubes and may result in
release of the chemical charge in the sensing element or restrictions of flow, which may result in
damage to the environment or property.
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
CAUTION: Risk of Environmental and Property Damage
! Coil and secure excess capillary tubing away from contact with sharp or abrasive objects or surfaces.
Vibration and sharp or abrasive objects in contact with capillary tubes can cause damage that may
result in release of the chemical charge in the sensing element, which may result in damage to the
environment or property.
CAUTION: Risk of Property Damage
! Do not dent or deform the sensing bulb. Dents or deformations in the sensing bulb can change the
calibration, may cause the control to operate at temperatures other than the setpoint, and may result
in other property damage.
IMPORTANT: Be careful when drilling holes or driving screws while mounting sensing elements to avoid
puncturing or damaging hydronic coils.
IMPORTANT: Use only the mounting screws supplied with the Universal Mounting Bracket to avoid damaging
internal components. Be careful not to distort or bend the control case when mounting the control to an uneven
surface. Using other screws or bending the control case voids the warranty.
IMPORTANT: Locate the control case and bellows where the ambient temperature is always warmer than the
setpoint. The control operates only from the lowest temperature along any 14 to 16 in. length of the sensing
element.
IMPORTANT: Low temperature cutout controls must be located in areas protected from the effects of weather.
If the control is mounted in an area that is exposed to the weather or other wet environments, it must be
equipped with an outdoor enclosure.
IMPORTANT: It is important to mount the low temperature cutout control in the correct location. The capillary
must be exposed to all areas on the coil where a risk of low temperatures is present.
• Mount the control upright in an accessible location, where the control body, capillary tube, and sensing bulb are
not subject to damage, and the control is in the highest possible position of the entire installation.
• Mount the control upstream from mixed air or chilled water coils.
• Mount the control downstream from preheat coils.
• Mount the control upright on flat, vertical, or horizontal surfaces using accessory brackets. These controls have
NEMA 1 enclosures.
• Mount the capillary in a serpentine fashion so that it slopes gently downhill (not to exceed 5°), has no dips,
bends, or kinks, and so that the last segment is installed within 15.2 cm (6 in.) of the bottom of the coil.

Mounting in an Accessible Location
Sometimes, the coil face offers nothing that can hold the tie-wrapped sensing element. In these cases, use 1.3 cm
(1/2 in.) EMT, hard copper tubing, or Unistrut to build supports to be used for fastening the sensing element.
Fastening the sensing element to fixed supports holds the element in place, preventing movement in the air
stream. Field-fabricated supports often take the form of a rack with vertical supports (like pickets on a fence).
Once the proper location as been determined, follow these guidelines to mount an A11 or A70 Series low
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
temperature cutout (also see Figure 44-1 on page 451):
1. Use two screws or bolts through the two outer holes on the back of the control case when mounting the control
directly to a flat vertical surface.
2. Use the two inner holes with the mounting bracket (and screws supplied) when mounting the control to a flat
horizontal surface.
3. Determine the best mounting location for the low temperature cutout control. Locate the control as high as
possible on the side of the duct or on a nearby wall, panel, or structural support. The desired mounting position
is with the element bellows pointing down.
4. Build and install any field-fabricated supports that are necessary to hold the sensing element in place.
5. Using the control’s mounting bracket as a template, mark the location for the mounting screws.
6. Drill an 8 mm (5/16 in.) entry hole for the sensing element.
7. Feed the entire length of the sensing element through the entry hole.
IMPORTANT: On an A11 low temperature cutout control, the brass tubing just below the bellows is not
temperature sensitive and can be mounted in ambient temperature. Below the solder bead, the copper sensing
element begins. This part is temperature-sensitive and must be properly positioned to work correctly. On A70
controls, the entire capillary is temperature sensitive.
8. Fasten the control to the side of the duct using the

mounting bracket and self-tapping screws. Holes in Control Case for
Mounting to Flat Vertical
9. Secure the far end of the sensing element, starting at Standard Mounting Bracket Surfaces without a Bracket
the bottom of the coil. for Mounting Control to a
Flat Vertical Surface
10. Secure the sensing element with 6.4 mm (1/4 in.) poly (Part No. 271-350)
sleeve and tie wraps.
11. The sensing element must be positioned and
mounted within 15.2 cm (6 in.) of the bottom of the
coil. Use mounting screws
provided. Longer screws
12. Work your way back up to the bellows, stringing the may damage control
sensing element in a serpentine fashion horizontally Universal Mounting
across the face of the coil, as shown in Figure 44-5 Bracket
on page 456. (Part No. 271-51)
13. Successive horizontal runs of the sensing element Mount bracket to

should be inclined slightly upward. horizontal surface
14. Make sure that horizontal runs of the sensing element Figure 44-4: Mounting Options for A70 Controls
are no more than 30.5 cm (12 in.) away from each
other.
Note: On a wide coil, you could be left with a very small
S to get back up to the control. Locate this topmost bend
in the correct position to use up any remaining slack in
the length of the sensing element. You may need to build
a support for the bracket at that turning point.
15. To prevent damage caused by vibration or abrasion,
place a short piece of 3.2 mm (1/4 in.) poly sleeve
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
around the capillary at the point where it passes

through the entry hole in the duct work. Slit the
tubing lengthwise to permit easy installation.
Figure 44-5: Correct Control Capillary Orientation
Caulking or sealant is normally not needed when the
right size hole and tubing are used.
16. At the bends, use a TE-6001-8 Averaging Element Mounting Bracket to obtain the correct radius and protect
the sensing element. The radius of each bend of the sensing element must be at least 7.6 cm (3 in.) but not to
exceed 35.5 cm (14 in.).
Mounting in an Inaccessible Location
1. Determine the mounting location for the low limit control.
• The A70 is much easier to mount in inaccessible locations due to the way it is packaged.
• Stay clear of any moving parts within the duct, such as dampers.
• When the duct is covered with insulation, mount the control to a standard electrical 4-Square box and
cover.
2. Using Figure 44-6 on page 457 as a guide, measure the duct and calculate the required length and height of
the element support.
3. Using 1.3 cm (1/2 in.) EMT, build the support assembly outside of the duct.
Note: 1 cm (3/8 in.) hard copper tubing can be substituted for 6.4 mm (1/2 in.) EMT when building the support.
These instructions assume the use of EMT.

4. Starting at the bottom of the coil, distribute the sensing element around the support and tie-wrap it securely in
place. Keep the loops horizontal or inclined slightly downward (not to exceed 5°) and uniform in size
(see Figure 44-6 on page 457).
A11 or A70 Thermostat
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
Support element at both ends and every 2-3 in.
along the element.
Suggestion: Use short piece of poly
over element or capillary at supports.
Cut hole: Min 2-1/4 in.

size. Use 1/2 in. box
connectors on each
end of EMT to secure
to box covers.
Use 3/8 in. copper or
1/2 in. EMT to support
element.
Note: When duct

is covered with
insulation, mount
stat to standard
electrical box
and cover. Mount element in a slight
downward incline.
Keep loops horizontal
FIG:A11-A70_Inacc
or below and make them
the same size.
6 in.
Mimimum of 1 ft
Begin mounting at bottom horizontal
and work up to thermostat. sensing. No coils Must be within 6 in.
on flat portion of bottom of the
of bracket. coil (the most
important part of
the coil to protect).
Figure 44-6: Mounting Low Temperature Cutout Controls in Small Ducts with Inaccessible Coils
5. Consider the use of Minerallac conduit hangers or equivalent to provide anchoring points on the support where
needed.
6. Place a 1.3 cm (1/2 in.) EMT connector on each end of the support. These connectors poke through the
knockout hole on the 10.1 cm (4 in.) box covers, which are used as mounting plates at each end of the support.
7. At the upper end of the duct, using a large hole saw (5.7 cm [2-1/4 in.] minimum), drill the entry hole for the
sensing element/support assembly.
8. At the lower end of the duct, drill another
hole (use the same hole saw as used to cut Use hack saw to cut a
slot for sensor to
the entry hole). pass through.
9. A larger hole allows easier access for
mounting. This hole must be positioned to To secure 1/2 in. EMT Use drill to cut 1/4 in.hole.
allow the lower portion of the sensing to box cover. Protect element by covering
with poly.
element to be within 15.3 cm (6 in.) of the
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
FIG:4Sq_Mnt
bottom of the coil.
10. Cut a notch in another 10.1 cm (4 in.) box 4 Electrical Box Cover
cover. The notch is used to secure the with Center 1/2 in. Knockout
upper end of the support assembly. Locate
the notch so that the capillary (whip) can be Figure 44-7: Details on 4-Square Cover Upper Mount
positioned close to the support. See
11. Place a 10.1 cm (4 in.) box cover with the center knockout removed over the upper end of the support
assembly and, using a lock nut, fasten the support to the box cover.
12. Feed the sensing element/support assembly through the entry hole at the upper end, and poke the lower end
of the support through the exit hole at the bottom on the far side.
13. Place a 10.1 cm (4 in.) box cover with the center knockout removed over the end of the support, and using a
lock nut, fasten the support in place at the lower end.
14. Carefully place the capillary tube in the slot and apply a short piece of 6.4 mm (1/4 in.) poly tubing, slit
lengthwise, around the capillary where it passes through the notch.
15. Screw down the corners of the box cover to hold the upper end of the support assembly in place.
16. Using the mounting bracket, fasten the control to
the side of the duct using self-tapping screws, L1
ensuring a down hill element all the way to the L2
bottom of the control.
Load
M1
LINE Open-Low switch action:

Opens on temperature drop
Figure 44-8: Wiring for A70 SPST (Open-Low) Switch

Wiring
For most AHU installations, it is more cost-effective to wire the Low Limit (and other safeties) with low voltage Class
2 wiring and add a shutdown relay at the Motor Starter.
This practice allows the control to share raceways with other low voltage cables for the system.
CAUTION: Risk of Electric Shock
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
Disconnect power supply before making electrical connections to avoid electric shock.
IMPORTANT: Make all wiring connections in accordance with local, national, and regional regulations. Do not
exceed the electrical ratings.

Main Circuit (LINE to M2) opens and
Automatic Reset Controls Auxiliary Circuit (LINE to M1) closes
on temperature drop
A70AA and A70GA type controls with automatic reset have a L1
factory-set, fixed differential of 3°C (5°F). Turn the setpoint L2
screw to adjust the CUT OUT setpoint on the right side of the Alarm
Alarm
scale (Figure 44-10 on page 459). Circuit
Power
M1
LINE Load
LINE M2
Figure 44-9: Wiring for A70 4-Wire, 2-Circuit

Switch
Manual Reset Lockout Controls

A70BA and A70HA type controls with Manual Reset Lockout
have a fixed differential of 3°C (5°F). Turn the setpoint screw
to adjust the CUT OUT setpoint on the right side of the scale.
These A70 models lock out when the sensed temperature
drops to the CUT OUT setpoint. The control must be
manually reset by the user to restart the controlled
equipment. The manual reset mechanism is trip-free and
cannot be overridden by blocking or tying down the reset
button. (Figure 44-10 on page 459).
On locked-out equipment, first determine and remedy the
cause of the lockout. On Open-low controls, the sensed
temperature must rise at least 3°C (5°F) above the CUT OUT
setpoint before the control may be reset.
After the fixed differential (above CUT OUT) is reached,
press and release the reset button on the front of the control
to restore normal operation of the controlled equipment. Figure 44-10: Adjusting the A70 Control
IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the pointer beyond the highest or lowest indicator marks on the control’s
temperature scale. Adjusting the pointer beyond the indicator marks may damage screw threads, may cause
inaccurate control operation and will void the warranty. Also, most controls with spot sensitive sensing elements
used for coil protection are set and sealed at 1.6°C (35°F). Attempting to set them lower can damage the
control.
IMPORTANT: After adjusting the control settings and before leaving installation, verify equipment and control
operation, and verify control setpoint with a reliable thermometer.
Table 44-1: Documents Related to Installation and Mounting of A11 and A70
Application, Installation, and Mounting Details A70 High Temperature Thermostats with Form 997-743
for A70 Models Manual Reset Installation Instructions
Application, Installation, and Mounting Details A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Control LIT-121010
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
for A11 Models Installation Sheets Manual
Model Information
Table 44-2: A11 Series and A70 Series
Code Switch Switch Range Diff Bulb and Max Bulb Range
Number Action Action °C (°F) °C (°F) Capillary Temp °C Adjuster
Main Auxiliary (°F)
Contacts Contacts
A70GA-1C1 Open Low Close Low -9.4 to 2.8°C (5°F) 6.1 m of 204.4°C Screwdriver
12.8°C 3.2 mm (400°F) slot
(15 to 55°F) (20 ft of 1/8 in.)
O.D. Tubing
A70GA-2C Open Low Close Low 1.7 to 26.7°C -16.1 to - 9.5 mm x 121°C Screwdriver
(35 to 80°F) 1.1°C 7.6 cm 1.8 m (250°F) slot
(3 to 30°F) Cap.
factory set at (3/8 in. x 3 in.
-11.1°C 6 ft Cap.)
(12°F)
A70HA-1C1 Open Low Close Low -9.4 to Manual 6.1 m of 204.4°C Screwdriver
12.8°C Reset 3.2 mm (400°F) slot
(15 to 55°F) (20 ft of 1/8 in.)
O.D. Tubing
A70HA-2C Open Low Close Low 1.7 to 26.7°C Manual 9.5 mm x 121°C Screwdriver
(35 to 80°F) Reset 7.6 cm 1.8 m (250°F) slot
Cap.
(3/8 in. x 3 in.
6 ft Cap.)
A70KA-1C Open High Close High 37.8 to Manual 9.5 mm x 116°C Screwdriver
76.7°C Reset 7.6 cm 1.8 m (240°F) slot
(100 to Cap.
170°F) (3/8 in. x 3 in.
6 ft Cap.)
A11A-1C SPST Open Low 2 to 7°C Manual 6.1 m of 121°C Screwdriver
(35 to 45°F) Reset 3.2 mm (250°F) slot
O.D. Tubing
1.2 m Cap.
(20 ft of 1/8 in.)
O.D. Tubing,
4 ft Cap.
A11B-1C SPST Open Low 2 to 7°C 4.4°C (8°F) 6.1 m of 121°C Screwdriver
(35 to 45°F) Fixed 3.2 mm (250°F) slot
O.D. Tubing
1.2 m Cap.
(20 ft of 1/8 in.)
O.D. Tubing,
4 ft Cap.
1. The low cutout stop is set and sealed at 1.6°C (35°F). The control responds only to the lowest temperature along any 30 cm
(1 ft) of the entire 6.1 m (20 ft) element or bellows cup. If you try to set the control lower than 1.6°C (35°F), you can damage
the control.

Table 44-3: A11 Series
Product Codes A11A: SPST, Open Low, Manual Reset
A11B: SPST, Open Low, Automatic Recycle
A11D: SPDT, Manual Reset
A11E: SPDT, Automatic Recycle
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
Range Cutout 2 to 7°C (35 to 45°F)
Differential A11A, A11D: Temperature must be 6.7°C (12°F) above cutout point before control can be
reset.
A11B, A11E: 6.7°C (12°F)
Ambient Temperature Minimum: -18°C (0°F)
Maximum: 60°C (140°F)
Maximum Temperature at 121°C (250°F)
Bulb
Sensing Element 3.2 mm x 6.1 m (1/8 in. x 20 ft)
Capillary Length 1.2 m (4 ft)
Switch Snap-acting contacts in dust-protected enclosure
Material Case: 1.6 mm (.6 in.) Cold Rolled Steel
Cover: 0.8 mm (.3 in.) Cold Rolled Steel
Finish Gray Enamel
Conduit Opening 22 mm (0.9 in.) hole for 12.7 mm (1/2 in.) conduit
Mounting Bracket Standard on all controls
Shipping Weight Individual Pack: 0.8 kg (1.8 lb)
Overpack of 20 units: 17 kg (38 lb)
Electrical Rating Pilot Duty: 125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC
Motor Ratings AC Full Load ampere: 120 V = 16.0; 208 V = 9.2, 240 V = 8.0
AC Locked Rotor ampere: 120 V = 96.0, 208 V = 55.2, 240 V = 48.0
Non-Inductive ampere: 120 V = 16.0, 208 V = 9.2, 240 V = 8.0
Table 44-4: A70 Low Temperature Cutout (Part 1 of 2)

Product A70AA Type controls: SPST switch, Open on temperature drop
A70BA Type controls: SPST switch, Open on temperature drop, Manual Reset
A70GA Type controls: 4-Wire, 2-Circuit switch, Open on temperature drop
A70HA Type controls: 4-Wire, 2-Circuit switch, Open on temperature drop, Manual
Reset
Switch Action SPST or 4-Wire, 2-Circuit (Figure 44-7 on page 458 and Figure 44-8 on page 458)
Temperature Bulb Style Serpentine Spot-Sensitive or Remote Vapor-Pressure Bulb depending on Type and
Model
Temperature Range -9 to 13°C (15 to 55°F)
Note: Setpoint temperature for the Spot-Sensitive model is set at 2°C (35°F) in the
factory. Attempting to adjust lower damages the control.
Differential 3°C (5°F) Fixed, Above Setpoint
Ambient Temperature -18 to 60°C (0 to 140°F)
Maximum Allowable Bulb 121°C (250°F)
Temperature
Table 44-4: A70 Low Temperature Cutout (Part 2 of 2)
Electrical Ratings For electrical ratings, refer to the Technical Specification section in A70AA, A70BA,
A70GA, A70HA Type Low Temperature Thermostats (Part No. 24-7664-2527).
Case and Cover NEMA 1 Enclosures: Case is galvanized steel. Cover is plated and painted steel.
Dimensions (H x W x D) 83 x 101 x 53 mm (3.25 x 3.98 x 2.09 in.
Compliance UL Listed; File SA516, CCN SDFY, CSA Certified; File LR 948, Class 1222 01
LOTEMP
CUTOUT
Accessories (Order Separately) Universal Mounting Bracket: Part No. 271-51

Standard Mounting Bracket: Part No. 271-350
Averaging Element Holding Clip: Part No. T-275-101
Bulb Well Adaptor: Part No. WEL14A-601, WEL14A-602, or WEL14A-603

WIRE STD
CABLE
Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards 465

WIRE STD
CABLE
Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards
Overview
This section provides a series of tables that list the standard cables and wires recommended for use when
installing Metasys networks. It also include tables to assist the installer with raceway sizing, 24 volt power and
cable sizing, and resistive sensor cable length limitations. For specific instructions on installing and wiring Metasys
system network controllers, thermostats, sensors, and other HVAC components, refer to the particular installation
instruction sheets and technical bulletins.
Note: In this section, the term NxE refers to NAEs, NCEs, and NIEs.
Metasys Network Cable Sources
Anixter is a primary source for wire and cable that meets the Metasys system requirements. Worldwide locations
and contact information may be found on the following Web site at the Contact Us link:
http://www.anixter.com/AXECOM/US.NSF/HomePage
Fax order forms are provided on the Web site.
Specifications for some Johnson Controls cables can be found at:
http://www.anixter.com/AXECOM/US.NSF/ProductsTechnology/JohnsonControls
The specified cables, RJ-style connectors, crimping tool and other cable accessories are available from Anixter in
Wauwatosa, WI at 1-800-447-8565.
Cable Standards for Low Electromagnet Field Environments
Table 45-1 on page 465 lists the generic cable types recommended for use with the Metasys network. These
cables are used for wiring field point inputs, outputs, 24 VAC power, and communication buses.
Table 45-1: Low Electromagnetic Field Environments
Cable Purpose Cable Type
N1 LAN/Ethernet Ethernet Category 5 Data Cable 24 AWG 4 x 2 pair (CAT5)
BACnet MS/TP on the FC Bus 22 AWG/3-wire stranded twisted shielded cable
SA Bus (Screw Terminated) 22 AWG/4-wire (2-pair) stranded twisted shielded cable
N2 Bus 22 AWG/3-wire stranded twisted non-shielded cable
LON Bus FTT-10 22 AWG/2-wire stranded twisted non-shielded cable
LON Bus TP-1250 22 AWG/2-wire stranded twisted non-shielded cable
24 VAC 18 AWG/2-wire stranded twisted non-shielded cable (See Network Power
and Power Cable Guidelines on page 469 for more information.)
AI, AO, BI 22 AWG/3-wire or 22 AWG/2-wire stranded twisted non-shielded cable
BO <0.8 A@24 VAC 22 AWG/3-wire or 22 AWG/2-wire stranded twisted non-
shielded cable (20 VA at less than 75 ft one way distance). See Volt-
Ampere Power Requirements for Metasys Network Devices on page 469
for more information.
Metastat 24 AWG/8-wire solid non-shielded Category 3 data cable (CAT3)
Network Sensor RJ Term (SA) 24 AWG/6-wire (3-pair) solid non-shielded Category 3 data cable (CAT3)
Network Sensor Screw Term (SA) 22 AWG/4-wire (2-pair) stranded twisted shielded
Cable Standards for High Electromagnetic Field Environment

For installations where network wiring is subjected to transients because of its proximity to sources of electrical/
inductive noise, use the cable types listed in Table 45-2 on page 465 to avoid possible communication issues.
Table 45-2: High Electromagnetic Field Environments
Cable Purpose Cable Type
N2 Bus 22 AWG/3-wire or 22 AWG/2-wire stranded twisted shielded
AI, AO, BI 22 AWG/3-wire or 22 AWG/2-wire stranded twisted shielded
WIRE STD
CABLE
Cable Part Numbers for Standard Metasys Cables

Table 45-3: General Input and Output Cables1
Type Typical Usage Anixter Part No. pF/ft2 Area in2
22 AWG/2-wire Open Plenum Installations, Inputs/Outputs, CBL-22/2-NS-PLN 25 0.012
Non-Shielded Plenum Non-Spring Return Actuators
22 AWG/2-wire EMT (Raceway) Installations, Input/Outputs, CBL-22/2-NS-PVC 25 0.013
Non-Shielded PVC Non-Spring Return Actuators
22 AWG/3-wire Open Plenum Installations, Input/Outputs, CBL-22/3-NS-PLN 25 0.013
Non-Shielded Plenum Non-Spring Return Actuators
22 AWG/3-wire EMT (Raceway) Installations, Input/Outputs, CBL-22/3-NS-PVC 25 0.014
Non-Shielded PVC Non-Spring Return Actuators
18 AWG/2-wire Open Plenum Installations, Input/Outputs, CBL-18/2WHTNS-PLN 30 0.019
Non-Shielded Plenum Long Runs or Higher Load devices
(i.e. Spring Return Actuators)
18 AWG/2-wire EMT (Raceway) Installations, Input/Outputs, AL-1802C-2-1N-09 30 0.020
Non-Shielded PVC Long Runs or Higher Load devices
(Spring Return Actuators)
18 AWG/3-wire Open Plenum Installations, Input/Outputs, CBL-18/3WHTNS-PLN 30 0.022
Non-Shielded Plenum Long Runs or Higher Load devices
(Spring Return Actuators)
18 AWG/3-wire EMT (Raceway) Installations, Input/Outputs, AL-1803C-2-1N-09 30 0.023
Non-Shielded PVC Long Runs or Higher Load devices (Spring
Return Actuators)
1. See Resistive Sensor Temperature Offset on page 471 and Volt-Ampere Power Requirements for Metasys Network
Devices on page 469 for more information regarding cable sizing.
2. pF/ft = picofarads per foot.
Table 45-4: N2 Communication Cables

Type Typical Usage Anixter Part No. pF/ft Area in2
22 AWG/3-wire Open Plenum Installations CBL-22/3-NS-PLN 25 0.013
Non-Shielded Plenum 9600 Baud RS-485 Communication in
non-noisy1 environments.
22 AWG/3-wire EMT (Raceway) Installations CBL-22/3-NS-PVC 25 0.014
Non-Shielded PVC 9600 Baud RS-485 Communication in
non-noisy1 environments.
1. Non-noisy refers to locations with low electromagnetic fields. Common locations with high electromagnetic fields have
inductive loads such as non-electronic ballasts, motors, and transformers. For high electromagnetic locations, the same
cables used for the BACnet MS/TP Field Controller Bus are recommended (Table 45-5 on page 466).
Table 45-5: BACnet MS/TP Field Controller Bus Communication Cables

22 AWG/3-wire Shielded Open Plenum Installations, 38400+ Baud CBL-22/3-FC-PLN 55 0.014
Plenum RS-485 Communication.
22 AWG/3-wire Shielded EMT (Raceway) Installations, 38400+ Baud CBL-22/3-FC-PVC 31 0.015
PVC RS-485 Communication
Table 45-6: BACnet MS/TP Sensor Actuator Bus Communication Cables (when using Screw Terminations)
22 AWG/4-wire (2 pair) Open Plenum Installations, 38400+ Baud CBL-22/2P-SA-PLN 33 0.033
Shielded Plenum RS-485 Communication
22 AWG/4-wire (2 pair) EMT (Raceway) Installations, 38400+ Baud CBL-22/2P-SA-PVC 31 0.034
Shielded PVC RS-485 Communication

WIRE STD
CABLE
Table 45-7: LON Bus Communications Cables
22 AWG/2-wire Non-shielded Open Plenum Installations CBL-22/2-NS-PLN 25 0.012
Plenum
22 AWG/2-wire Non-shielded EMT (Raceway) Installations CBL-22/2-NS-PVC 25 0.013
PVC
Table 45-8: Metastat and Network Sensor Cables (with RJ Jacks)

Metastat 24 AWG/4 pair Open Plenum Installations from VMA, CBL-24/8NAT-PLN
Non-shielded Plenum VAV or UNT Controllers to Metastat
Metastat 24 AWG/4 pair Sensors. CBL-STAT25
Non-shielded Plenum 25 ft
Metastat 24 AWG/4 pair Pre-configured Cables come with RJ-45 CBL-STAT50
jacks terminated on both ends. 17 0.020
Metastat 24 AWG/4 pair CBL-STAT75
Non-shielded Plenum 75 ft Note: When provided with factory RJ-45
Metastat 24 AWG/4 pair Terminations it is best to ensure raceway CBL-STAT100
Non-shielded Plenum 100 ft (if used) is 3/4 in. to allow the termination
to pull through without damage.
Network Sensor 24 AWG/3 pair Open Plenum Installations from CMP-003224SPP-3
Non-shielded Plenum VMA-1600 or FEC Controllers to Network
Network Sensor 24 AWG/3 pair Sensors. CBL-NETWORK25
Network Sensor 24 AWG/3 pair Pre-configured Cables come with RJ-12 CBL-NETWORK50
jacks terminated on both ends. 0.015
Network Sensor 24 AWG/3 pair CBL-NETWORK75
Network Sensor 24 AWG/3 pair CBL-NETWORK100
Table 45-9: Metastat and Network Sensor Cables (with Termination Screws)
Metastat 24 AWG/4 pair Open Plenum Installations from VMA, CBL-24/8NAT-PLN 21 0.020
Non-shielded Plenum VAV or UNT Controllers to Metastat
Sensors
Metastat 24 AWG/4 pair EMT (Raceway) Installations from VMA, CM-00424BKTE-5U-10 17 0.027
Non-shielded PVC VAV or UNT Controllers to Metastat
Sensors
Network Sensor 22 AWG/2 pair Open Plenum Installations from CBL-22/2P-SA-PLN 33 0.032
Shielded Plenum VMA-1600 or FEC Controllers to
Network Sensors
Network Sensor 22 AWG/2 pair EMT (Raceway) Installations from CBL-22/2P-SA-PVC 31 0.034
Shielded PVC VMA-1600 or FEC Controllers to
Network Sensors
Metasys System Cable and Wire Standards: Section 45 467

WIRE STD
CABLE
Table 45-10: Ethernet Communication Cables

Ethernet Plenum Open Plenum Installations, 24 AWG 8 CBL-CAT52404P-7U 15 0.031
UTP CAT5 24/4 pair conductor (4 x 2 pair), unshielded data cable
between NCMs, NxEs, Workstations, Servers.
(330 ft limit between hubs and nodes)
Ethernet PVC EMT (Raceway) Installations, 24 AWG 8 CM-00424BKTE-5U-10 17 0.021
UTP CAT5 24/4 pair conductor (4 x 2 pair) unshielded data cable
between NCMs, NxEs, Workstations, Servers.
Ethernet Plenum Open Plenum Installations of 10Base2 CBL-RG62PUR-PLN 12.5 0.033
RG62A/U Coax Cable Ethernet systems between NCMs, NxEs,
Workstations, Servers.
Ethernet PVC EMT (Raceway) Installations of 10Base2 CBL-RG62PUR-PVC 13.5 0.045
RG62A/U Coax Cable Ethernet systems between NCMs, NxEs,
Workstations, Servers.
Table 45-11: Fiber-Optic Communication Cables (Dual Fiber, Glass, 62.5 Micron)
Outdoor Indoor
Manufacturer Duct/Aerial Direct Burial Duct Non- Plenum
(Rodent Resistant) (Below Frost Plenum
Line)
Corning Cable 002KW4-T4130-D20 002KW5-T4130-A20 002KW5-T4130-A20 002K81-31130-24
Systems P/N
Anixter P/N 372-COR62.5-LTD-02 002KW5-T4130-A20 002KW5-T4130-A20 370-947-FDDI-02
Note: Generally, the recognized distance limitation for fiber-optic cable is 6,336 ft, but distances vary by
manufacturer.
Metasys Cable Color Standard
Premium Cable Color Standard
Use the premium Metasys wiring color standard as shown in Table 45-12 on page 468 for customers who require a
color-coded wiring system.
Table 45-12: Premium Cable Color Standard
Cable Purpose Standard Color
N2 or FC Bus Blue
SA Bus Brown
Analog Input Cable Yellow
Analog Output Cable Tan
Binary Input Cable Orange
Binary Output Cable Violet
N1 Bus/Ethernet - Category 5 or Coax Purple
24 VAC Cable Gray
Spare White
LON Pink

WIRE STD
CABLE
Normal Cable Color Standard
Use the normal Metasys wiring color standard shown in Table 45-13 on page 469 for conventional HVAC projects
that require competitive pricing.
Table 45-13: Normal Wire Color Standard
Wire Purpose Standard Color
N2 or FC Bus Blue
SA Bus (Screw terminating) Brown
All Other Wiring Neutral Color
N2 and FC Bus Wire Color Scheme

If you use the standard Johnson Controls communications cable (CBL-22/3-FC-PLN) as listed in Table 45-5 on
page 466, use the wire color scheme shown in Table 45-14 on page 469 for N2 and FC Bus terminal connections.
Table 45-14: Standard Wire Color Scheme for N2 and FC Bus
Terminal Wire Color
+ Black
– White
COM or REF Blue
Network Power and Power Cable Guidelines

When selecting the 24 VAC, Class 2 power supply used for Metasys network devices, choose dedicated
transformers that are isolated from inductive surges or have surge protection on the primary side of the
transformer.
When estimating network power requirements, you must factor in the voltage drop, which depends on wire size
and wire run length. For details, see Maximum Voltage Drop on 24 VAC Power Wiring on page 470. Also, pay
particular attention to bus polarity throughout.
Volt-Ampere Power Requirements for Metasys Network Devices
A 24 VAC power transformer can supply multiple devices if:
• the power draw of the devices is less than the transformer’s rating
• the gauge of the power supply wire is large enough for the load
• the device does not require isolated power
Typically, the transformer load consists of the controller, plus any actuators and relays driven by the controller.
Table 45-15 on page 469 has power requirements for Metasys controllers and typical Johnson Controls actuators
and relays.
Table 45-15: Power Requirements of Control System Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Device Maximum Power Rating1 Device Maximum Power
Rating1
Supervisory Controllers Actuators
NCM-350 90-230 VAC @ 500 mA M100 Series - SR 25 VA
N30 5 VA M100 Series - NSR 20 VA
NAE55, NIE55 50 VA M9200 Series - SR 20 VA
NAE35, NAE45 25 VA M9100 Series - Float/Inc. NSR 3 VA
NCM45 25 VA M9100 Series Proportional NSR 7.5 VA
Field Controllers and IOMs VA2000 Series 5 VA
AHUs 16 VA VA7000 Series 7 VA
DX-9100 10 VA VA8000 Series 6 VA
LN Series 10 VA J Series Zone Valve 7 VA
UNTs 40 VA Relays

WIRE STD
CABLE
Table 45-15: Power Requirements of Control System Devices (Part 2 of 2)

Device Maximum Power Rating1 Device Maximum Power
Rating1
VAVs 40 VA RIB (Typical) 2 VA
VMA1400, VMA1600 10 VA Ice Cube (RLY) Type 2 VA
FECs 10 VA
IOMs 10 VA
XP / XT 4 VA
1. Requirements are approximate; refer to respective product literature for details. Also, you must account for the
voltage drop from the transformer to the load. Voltage drop for 24 VAC is much larger than for line voltage. Be
sure to use a wire gauge that is large enough for the load. See Maximum Voltage Drop on 24 VAC Power
Wiring on page 470.
Maximum Voltage Drop on 24 VAC Power Wiring

Controllers in particular are sensitive to variations in their supply voltage. To maintain proper operation, the supply
voltage variation should not exceed 2 volts.
Table 45-16 on page 470 lists the maximum one way distance that power wiring can be run for a particular load
and wire size. This limits the voltage drop on a 24 VAC power circuit to 2 volts, the limit that product engineers at
Johnson Controls have deemed acceptable.
To calculate the wire size and length necessary to maintain a maximum drop of 2 volts:
1. Add the power requirements for the controller and any connected actuators and relays (Table 45-15 on
page 469).
2. Use Table 45-16 on page 470 for wire size and maximum one-way length required for the load.
Table 45-16: 24 VAC Voltage Drop Limited to 2 Volts
AWG
ohms/kFt
22 ga 20 ga 18 ga 16 ga 14 ga 12 ga 10 ga
Load 16.46 10.35 7.95 4.99 3.14 1.98 1.24
A VA Maximum One Way Distance to Load in Ft1
0.11 2.5 552 878 1144 1822 2895 4591 7331
0.21 5 289 460 599 954 1517 2405 3840
0.42 10 145 230 302 481 764 1212 1935
0.83 20 73 116 151 240 382 606 968
1.25 30 49 77 101 160 255 404 645
1.67 40 36 58 75 120 191 303 484
2.08 50 29 46 60 96 153 242 387
2.5 60 24 39 50 80 127 202 323
2.92 70 21 33 43 69 109 173 276
3.33 80 18 29 38 60 96 152 242
3.75 90 16 26 34 53 85 135 215
4 96 15 24 31 50 80 126 202
1. Data for 18 AWG and greater is from Chapter 9, Table 8 of the 2005 NEC. Resistances are valid at 75 C. Refer to the table
for temperature correction factors. The following formula was used to approximate the wire runs in this table: (voltage drop
/ [ohms per kFt * load in amps]* 1000) /2 = one-way run (ft).

WIRE STD
CABLE
Resistive Sensor Temperature Offset
Resistance in the wire between a resistive temperature sensor and a controller introduce temperature error into the
sensor circuit. Both the Nickel (Ni) and Platinum (Pt) type resistive sensors experience error in their temperature
readings due to resistance in the sensor cable. The amount of resistance (temperature error) increases with an
increase in wire length and/or a decrease in wire diameter (wire gauge).
To minimize sensor temperature error due to field wiring, the total resistance of all resistive sensor wiring should be
less that 3 ohms (which results in approximately a 1.0°F offset for Nickel sensors and 1.4°F for Platinum sensors).
Table 45-17 on page 471 provides the maximum cable length (controller to sensor) for different wire sizes that
keeps the wire resistance below 3 ohms.
Note: Network Sensors are not affected by the length of wire runs since they communicate on the SA Bus.
Table 45-17: Maximum Wire Lengths for Sensor to Controller Circuits
Wire AWG Ohms/1000 ft Maximum One Way Distance (ft)
16 4 375
18 6.4 234
20 10.1 149
22 16.2 (or 16.5) 93
24 25.7 58
26 41 37
Network Conduit Sizing Guidelines

Conduit sizing charts for standard Johnson Control cables are shown below. All calculations are based on a 40% fill
rate using recommended cables available from Anixter. Calculations are based on PVC jacketed cables. Plenum
cables are normally slightly smaller in size.
When cable of the same size is contained in the same raceway, use Table 45-18 on page 471 to determine the
raceway size based on cable type.
Table 45-18: Raceway Size - All Cables of the Same Size
EMT 18 AWG 18 AWG 22 AWG 22 AWG 22 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 24 AWG 24 AWG RG62A/U
Size 2-wire 3-wire 2-wire 3-wire 3-wire 2 pair 3 pair 4 pair 4 pair Coax
non- non- non- non- shld shld non-shld non-shld Ethernet
shld shld shld shld Net Sens Metastat
1/2 in. 5 5 9 8 8 3 7 4 4 2
3/4 in. 10 9 16 14 14 6 13 7 7 4
1 in. 16 15 26 24 23 10 22 12 12 7
1-1/4 in. 29 26 46 41 40 17 38 21 21 13
1-1/2 in. 40 35 63 56 54 23 52 29 29 18
2 in. 65 58 104 93 89 39 87 48 48 29
When cable of mixed types are contained in the same raceway, follow these steps:
1. Record and add the area for each type of cable based on the quantity indicated in Table 45-19 on page 472.
2. Look up the raceway size based on the total area of cables in Table 45-20 on page 472.

WIRE STD
CABLE
Table 45-19: Raceway Size - Cables of Mixed Types

Cable Type Area Number of Cables
Each1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
18 AWG/2-wire 0.020 0.020 0.041 0.061 0.081 0.102 0.122 0.143 0.163 0.183 0.204
non-shielded
18 AWG/3-wire 0.023 0.023 0.046 0.069 0.092 0.115 0.138 0.161 0.184 .207 .230
non-shielded
22 AWG/2-wire 0.013 0.013 0.026 0.039 0.051 0.064 0.077 0.090 0.103 0.116 0.129
non-shielded
22 AWG/3-wire 0.014 0.014 0.029 0.043 0.057 0.072 0.086 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.143
non-shielded
22 AWG/3-wire 0.015 0.015 0.030 0.045 0.060 0.075 0.090 0.105 0.120 0.135 0.150
shielded
22 AWG/2 pair 0.034 0.034 0.069 0.103 0.137 0.172 0.206 0.240 0.274 0.309 0.343
shielded
24 AWG/3 pair 0.015 0.015 0.031 0.046 0.062 0.077 0.092 0.108 0.123 0.139 0.154
non-shielded Net Sen
24 AWG/4 pair 0.027 0.027 0.055 0.082 0.110 0.137 0.165 0.192 0.220 0.247 0.275
non-shielded Metastat
24 AWG/4 pair 0.027 0.027 0.055 0.082 0.110 0.137 0.165 0.192 0.220 0.247 0.275
Ethernet
RG62A/U Coax Cable 0.045 0.045 0.090 0.135 0.179 0.224 0.269 0.314 0.359 0.404 0.449
1. All area measurements in this table are in square inches (in.2).
Table 45-20: Raceway Size for Max Fill

Max Fill1 EMT Size
0.122 1/2 in.
0.213 3/4 in.
0.346 1 in.
0.598 1-1/4 in.
0.814 1-1/2 in.
1.342 2 in.
1. All area measurements in this table are in square inches (in.2).

UFAD FACTORY
FLEXSYS CNTRLS
Factory Installed Controls - Solution Air Handling Units 475
Under Floor Air Distribution Systems 483

FACTORY
CNTRLS
Factory Installed Controls - Solution Air Handling Units
Overview
For factory-installed components and wiring, Johnson Controls has two important options:
• FPC Systems - three subtypes:
- FPC systems with controller
- FPC systems without controller
- FPC systems with remote panel
• Factory-Mounted End Devices (FMEDs)
The drawing sets for these systems have system diagrams that may include flow diagrams and mechanical system
layouts.
Note: Online access to FPC Solution AHU system drawings is available to Johnson Controls personnel with an
Internet connection. The drawings are available for download on the MOM system, an online database containing
as-built drawings for shipped FPC systems. To reach the MOM system Web site, go to http://
c7mdcs121.cg.na.jci.com/MOMWeb/default.aspx. Contact your branch equipment support person for access
information.
FPC Systems
Factory Packaged Control systems are air handling units that feature traditional field control component devices
mounted and connected at the factory.
The following drawings are usually provided for all three system types:
• FPC Device Location Drawing (Figure 46-1 on page 478) is an engineered drawing (to scale) showing where
each device, by object identifier, is mounted by the factory.
• FPC Power/Safeties/End Device Wiring Diagram (Figure 46-2 on page 479 and Figure 46-3 on page 480) is
one or multiple drawings, typically laid out in a ladder diagram manner, depicting factory wiring and
terminations.
• I/O Header Diagram (Figure 46-4 on page 481) is a drawing that lays out how each low-voltage power, input,
or output connects to their respective home run cable. Each factory-connected unit has one or more home run
and low voltage power cables. The quantity of cables is dependent on the required inputs and outputs. Each of
these home runs are provided with I/O headers located in the AHU sections as needed.
In addition, the FPC with controller may contain a project review and signoff drawing that is used by the field
branch office and factory to clarify scope.
You should understand the differences between these three types of systems.
Each of these three drawings types are provided in FAN 55-510, Appendix C.
Note: A factory installed raceway is often sealed at the AHU sections to prevent condensation. It is imperative that
the integrity of the factory installation not be compromised. As such, do not add cabling, wiring, or tubing to the
factory raceway.
Note: Not every object or point device is factory installed on an FPC system (for example, space temperature,
space humidity, and field bus cabling).
FPC System with Controller
An FPC system with a controller is the most popular turnkey option available for field installation. They ship with a
factory-installed controller and with wiring that is mostly complete.
Note: Adding a controller enclosure to an AHU increases the total length of the AHU. It is important to ensure that
the extra length of the controller enclosure is taken into consideration when the project is designed and bid.
The Project Review and Signoff drawing clarifies how points are handled. Each object identifier should be listed
on a legend defining whether a point is factory or field supplied. An X indicates that a point device is factory
supplied. Factory-supplied points can be factory mounted and wired or shipped loose for field installation.
FACTORY
CNTRLS
Factory-Mounted and Wired identifies the point as factory mounted and wired. Typically, factory-mounted and
wired points do not have traditional field installation requirements, but you should be aware that:
• AHUs are often shipped in multiple sections on separate skids for logistical reasons. These separate sections
have factory-provided modular wire-connectors that connect the internal wiring in one section to the wiring to
another section. This task is typically performed by the mechanical contractor, but it is in your best interest to
ensure this connection is terminated properly and tested.
IMPORTANT: The factory-provided modular wire connectors for the internal wiring must be properly connected
and tested when the sections of an air handler unit or roof top unit are assembled. Failure to properly connect
the wiring connector can result in significant expense to disassemble the unit or reroute the internal wiring.
• Control valves typically terminate with a factory-provided plug and flexible wire whips. Valve locations must be
within 1.2 m (4 ft) of the unit or the flex whip must be extended. Factory extensions are available for order in
1.5 m (5 ft), 3 m (10 ft), and/or 6 m (20 ft) lengths. Work with the mechanical contractor during valve installation
to ensure valve location is within 4 ft, which allows factory whips to be used and eliminates additional labor and
material costs to add pipe and wire.
• MS/TP compatible VSDs are not factory connected to the FPC panel controller bus. If required, the field bus
cables must be field installed.
• The wiring installed at the factory meets ETL SEMKO Testing Laboratory requirements. This certification mark
indicates that the product has been tested for, and has met the minimum requirements of, a widely recognized
U.S. product safety standard; that the manufacturing site has been audited; and that the applicant has agreed
to a program of periodic factory follow-up inspections to verify continued conformance. ETL certifications are
also applicable to the wiring and cables installed at the factory.
• If factory wiring methods are brought into question by project authorities having jurisdiction (for example, local
inspectors and engineering firms), contact your Solution Air Handling Unit support team.
• Factory installation of control devices allows mounting in optimum locations. These locations provide the best
functionality with the highest quality, but may limit serviceability. If devices fail, direct replacement in the same
location may not be possible. Under these conditions, determine an alternate field replacement location.
• Solution AHUs often have low temperature cutouts mounted inside the air stream of the unit. When mounted in
this manner, the sensing element in these devices have special mounting allowances. For more information,
see A11 and A70 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls on page 451.
IMPORTANT: Some factory-installed devices have manual resets that interrupt the operation of the Solution
AHU. To avoid possible injury, it is critical that you follow proper lock-out/tag-out procedures when resetting
these devices.
Factory Shipped Loose are specific point devices shipped along with the unit, but must be field installed. Unlike
control valves, these points do not have a wire whip and must be field wired from their field location back to the
FPC panel (which is usually mounted on the AHU next to the supply fan starter).
The Field Supplied Points field indicates whether the point device is a control point Included or no control point.
• Field Control Point Included is a field point device similar to a factory shipped loose device. The only
difference is the device is not shipped with the AHU from the factory. You must field install this device.
• Field No Control Point is a field point device that is to be mounted on the AHU but is not a Johnson Controls
responsibility to install. A common example is a smoke detector.
These drawings also indicate how 120 VAC power wiring to the FPC control panel is handled. The (Single Point
Power) SPP Pre-wired to FPC Panel field defines if 120 V power wiring must be field installed or not.
• Y (yes) indicates that the factory is responsible for installing a transformer (typically at the supply fan starter) to
provide power to the panel.
• N (no) indicates that you must determine if you or another contractor (such as Division 16) are responsible for
providing power.

FACTORY
CNTRLS
FPC System without Controller
FPC systems without a controller are wired much like the FPC system with a controller. The only differences are
that in the FPC panel:
• no controller is mounted in the panel at the factory
• each cable is terminated within the FPC panel on a terminal strip (by the factory)
The final wiring terminations for the controller must be completed in the field. You should attempt to install a
(shipped loose) controller and associated field point devices using the lowest total installed cost solution. Be sure
to communicate any desired installation or wiring changes early, so they can be reviewed and approved prior to
installing the system.
FPC System with Remote Panel
An FPC system with a remote panel is wired much like the FPC with controller. The only differences are that in the
FPC panel:
• No controller is mounted in the panel at the factory.
• Each cable is tagged and is not terminated in the FPC panel at the factory.
You must mount the remote panel, provide raceways and cables, and terminate the cables.
Factory Installed Controls - Solution Air Handling Units: Section 46 477

FACTORY
CNTRLS
FMED System
These systems are the least turnkey options available and require the most materials and labor to install and wire.
Field devices can be mounted, but only for those devices that can be factory installed. No power wiring, low voltage
cabling, raceways, or panels are provided.
Note: On FMED systems, some of the factory-installed end devices are almost inaccessible in the field, so it is
strongly recommended that you select one of the wired FPC solutions whenever possible.
FIG_DVC_LCTN
Figure 46-1: Typical FPC Device Location Drawing

FACTORY
CNTRLS
115 VOLT
FPC POWER / SAFETIES / END DEVICE WIRING DIAGRAM
SUPPLY
DEDICATED TB2-1 TB2-2
BY OTHERS D
6 D
AMP
C C
BL 115V WHT
B T2 B
BLU YEL
24V
BLK WHT
115V
TB2-3A A T1 A TB2-6A
BLU YEL
TB2-3B 24V TB2-6B
CUSTOMER BO
TB2-4047 SUPPLIED TB2-4047 A1 A2
R BLK
SF-C
D A START / STOP B C
N.O. C
CONTACT
SF RUN/TIME CLOCK
LOCATED IN SUPPY FAN MCC PANEL
11 CR3 14 TB2-10 TB2-11 A1 A2

D A CR3
1 1B LOCATED IN AHU TB2-2060 21 CR3 22 TB2-2060
A
BI LT-A D
PB1 TB2-2023 TB2-2023 A D C B
R BLK C LT-A STATUS
C
A D C B
A1 A2
4 5 TR1 1 B B
CR3A
2 3
1 SECOND RESET LATCH
TB2-12 11 CR3A 14 TB2-12 TB2-13 TB2-13 TB2-14 TB2-14
A D C B A D C B A D C B
TB2-15 J J J J
A
BO SDR-1 A2
TB2-4054 A1 TB2-4054
R BLK
B
A D N.O. C C B
LOCATED IN SUPPY FAN MCC PANEL

C
FIG:HVAC_DRW_YORK1
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE
Figure 46-2: Typical FPC Power/Safeties/End Device Wiring Diagram - Part One
Factory Installed Controls - Solution Air Handling Units: Section 46 479

FACTORY
CNTRLS
FPC POWER / SAFETIES / END DEVICE WIRING DIAGRAM

CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
LOCATED IN FS
TB3-1035 AI DA-T TB3-1035
R BLK
t
B C D A
LOCATED IN FS
TB3-2047 DI SF-S TB3-2047
R R Y BLK
p
B C D A
LOCATED IN HC
HR1 AO HTG-O HR1
R BLK
B C D A
LOCATED IN CC
TB3-3022 AO CLG-O TB3-3022
R BLK
B C D A
LOCATED IN FM
TB3-1001 AI MA-T TB3-1001
R BLK
B C t
D A
LOCATED IN FM
TB3-3042 AO OAD-O TB3-3042
R BLK
FIG:HVAC_DRW_YORK2
B C SIGNAL COM D A
LOCATED IN FM
TB3-3041 AO RAD-O BL TB3-3041
R K
B C SIGNAL COM D A
Figure 46-3: Typical FPC Power/Safeties/End Device Wiring Diagram - Part Two

FPC
SPLIT HC CC FM
HR1
FS
HR2
SPLIT
P1 P P P
24V 24V 24V

POWER POWER POWER
HR2 FS HR1 HC P HR1 CC P HR1 FM P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Figure 46-4: Typical I/O Header Diagram

-O
-O
1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12
-O
HT G
CL G
-1
-S
-O
-O
-O
-O
OA D
L T -A
MA -T
SF -C
DA -T
F SF
-O
S DR
HT G
RA D
CL G
OA D
RA D
FIG:HVAC_DRW_YORK3
Factory Installed Controls - Solution Air Handling Units: Section 46

481
FACTORY
CNTRLS
FACTORY
CNTRLS

Overhead ductwork is
eliminated and ceiling is
Power poles and poke raised.
Code No. LIT-410048

throughs are eliminated.
Under Floor Air Distribution Systems
Air diffusers are

place in the floor tile.
Installation of
raised floor.
Underfloor plenum
for HVAC air
distribution.
FIG:UVEx
Voice/data/cable are
placed in underfloor.
Power outlet box in
floor tile.

Figure 47-1: Overview Representation of Under Floor Air Design for Commercial Office Environment
483
UFAD
FLEXSYS
Application
The Johnson Controls FlexSys system is a UFAD system that provides an alternative heating and cooling air
FLEXSYS
delivery solution. With the FlexSys system, the entire volume under the floor becomes a pressurized air handling
UFAD
space. The under floor air design provides conditioned air at a higher relative supply temperature and lower static
pressure than the traditional overhead mixed air distribution system. See Table 47-1 on page 484 for a comparison
of the two systems.
Table 47-1: Comparing Under Floor Air System with Traditional Overhead Air System
Type of Air System Supply Air Temperature Return Air Temperature Static Pressure
Under Floor Air System 61 to 63°F (16 to 17°C) 80 to 83°F (26 to 28°C) 0.01 to 0.05 in. wc
Overhead Mixed Air System 55°F (13°C) 75°F (24°C) 1.0 to 2.0 in. wc
Note: To find valuable underfloor system information for use in pre-construction meetings and project inspections,
refer to the resources page on the Tate Access Floors Web site: http://www.tateaccessfloors.com. This Web site
features construction project requirements, commissioning checklists, and other resources that can assist
architects, general contractors, and commissioning agents in the successful delivery of a UFAD system.
Equipment
The UFAD system consists of the following:
• MIT units
• MFT units, either UFE units or UFW units
• PMs
• PAP cables
• TEC2688FS-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Network Thermostat
MIT Units
The FlexSys system provides the under floor air distribution through an advanced terminal design known as the
MIT. The MIT units employ a pulse-width modulation valve that automatically adjusts individual terminals and a
damper that uses time modulation logic to maintain the thermostat setpoint. These units feature 20 gauge
galvanized pre-painted (flat black) steel construction. The top grill for each unit is in 2 sections and adjustable to
create 16 different air patterns. The units include MIT2-A, MIT2-C, and MIT2-G.

MIT2-A
The MIT2-A is a constant volume air terminal (Figure 47-2 on page 485). The unit is rated for 150 cfm at 0.05 in.
FLEXSYS
wg. Options are available for a nominal 10 in. (254 mm) round (MIT2-Ar) grill and a narrow (MIT2-An) 5 x 10 in.
UFAD
(127 x 254 mm) nominal grill.
10.39 14.88
(264) (378)
10.39
(264)
10.39 MIT-2A Performance

(264)
1000
1.63 (41)
CFM - Standard Air

7.06
(180) 100
FIG:MIT2-A
9.81
(249) 10
0.02 0.03 0.05 0.06
MIT2-A 67.68 107.4 149.53 175.26
Static Pressure - inches w ater gauge
Figure 47-2: MIT2-A – Dimensions, in. (mm), Product Image, and Performance Chart
Under Floor Air Distribution Systems: Section 47 485

MIT2-C
MIT2-C is a variable volume air terminal (Figure 47-3 on page 486). Any time the terminal is open, the air velocity is
FLEXSYS
constant. The short time duration between air pulses results in the sensation of continuous air delivered with
UFAD
constant flow. The unit is rated 150 cfm at 0.05 in. wg. Options are available for a nominal 10 in. (254 mm) round
(MIT2-Cr) grill and a narrow (MIT2-Cn) 5 x 10 in. (127 x 254 mm) nominal grill. It is rated for 24 volt (18-30 VAC)
operation and comes with one Plug and Play (PAP-1) 25-foot (7.62 m) cable.
10.39
(264) 15.81
(402)
10.39
(264)
13
(330)
10.39 MIT2-C Perform ance
(264) 1000
CFM - Standard Air
1.63 (41)
7.06 100
(180)
FIG:MIT2-C
10
12.31 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.06

(313) MIT2-C 67.68 107.4 149.53 175.26
Static Pressure - inches w ater gauge
Figure 47-3: MIT2-C – Dimensions, in. (mm), Product Image, and Performance Chart

MIT2-G
MIT2-G is a variable volume heating and cooling air terminal (Figure 47-4 on page 487). Any time the terminal is
FLEXSYS
open, the air velocity is constant. The short time duration between air pulses results in the sensation of continuous
UFAD
air delivered with constant flow. The terminal is rated for 150 cfm at 0.05 in. wg. Options are available for a nominal
10 in. (254 mm) round (MIT2-Gr) grill and a narrow (MIT2-Gn) 5 x 10 in. (127 x 254 mm) nominal grill. It is rated for
24 volt (18-30 VAC) operation and comes with one PAP-1 plug and play cable. Heating mode is accomplished by
duct (rigid/flexible) connection to the UFE/UFW Modular Fan Terminal.
10.39 15.81
(264) (402)
5
(127)
13
(330)
10.39
MIT-2G Performance
(264)
1000
1.63 (41)
CFM - Standard Air
7.06
(180)
Ø 5
FIG:MIT2-G
(127)
100
12.31
(313)
10
0.02 0.03 0.05 0.06
MIT-2G 67.68 107.4 149.53 175.26
Static Pressure - inches water gauge
Figure 47-4: MIT2-G – Dimensions, in. (mm), Product Image, and Performance Chart

MIT Nomenclature Drawing
To determine the type of MIT model, see Figure 47-5 on page 488.
FLEXSYS
UFAD
MIT2 - A N G O
Security
O = None
Modular Integrated Terminal, 2nd Generation T = Tamper Resistant
Terminal Type G = Grille Color

A = Constant Volume
FIG:MIT_Nmen
C = Variable Volume, Cooling Only S = Square Grille Face (standard), 10 x 10 in.
G = Variable Volume, Cooling, Ducted Heating N = Narrow Grille Face (optional), 5 x 10 in.
H = Constant Volume, Manual Adjustment R = Round Face Grille (optional), 10 in. diameter
Figure 47-5: MIT Series – Terminal Nomenclature
MFT Units
UFE Units
The UFE-2A/2AE through UFE-6A/6AE models (Figure 47-6 on page 488) are under floor fan and electrical
powered heating units. They feature steel, finned, and sheathed element heaters that are UL listed. Their solid
state relays modulate the heat. Each unit has a 24 VAC (up to 100 VA) transformer that may power other devices.
Various sized heaters are available.
Disconnect
Switch
w
flo
Air 22 (559)
Optional Air Filter

36 (914)
10 in. (254) UFE – 9.75 x 22 (248 x 559)
13 in. (330) UFE – 12.75 x 22 (324 x 559)
10 in. (254) UFE-2 through UFE-4

13 in. (330) for UFE-5 and up
8.5 (216) Power in

See Note.
20.5 (521)
See Note. Filter
24 VAC
Access
Note: Inlet and Outlet are: Thermostat

FIG:UFE
8.5 x 20.5 (216 x 521) UFE-2 through UFE-4

11.5 x 20.5 (292 x 521) UFE-5 and above
Right side of unit shown. Unit can be flipped over for opposite hand as required.
Figure 47-6: UFE Series – Dimensions, in. (mm) and Product Image

UFW Units
The UFW-2A/2AE through UFW-6A/6AE models (Figure 47-7 on page 489) are under floor fan heating units with
FLEXSYS
one or two rows of heating coils. The units can control 0-10 VDC proportional or spring return water valves
UFAD
(normally open or normally closed). Each unit has a 24 VAC transformer that may power other devices (up to 100
VA). The connections are 1/2 in. (13 mm) O.D. (5/8 in. [16 mm] O.D. on 5A and up) x 0.020 in. (.5 mm) wall straight
seamless copper tubing with brazed return bends. Power specifications for the water control valve (supplied by
others) are 24 VAC or 0-10 VDC (not to exceed 10 VA).
w
flo
Air
22 Hot Water Coil – 1/2 (12.7) OD
(559)
41.25 Copper Tubing
(1048)
with 5/8 (16) Sweat
Disconnect Connections
Switch
10 (254) for UFW-2 through UFW-4

13 (330) for UFW-5 and up Connections
for
Hot Water
Power
Valve
in
Inlet and 24 VAC/PAP-5
Outlet are: 24 Filter
Access Output Only
(609)
UFW-2 through 4 = 8.53 x 20.78 (216 x 528)
UFW-5 & Above = 11.53 x 20.78 (293 x 528) Thermostat/PAP-6
with .75 (19) flange
Right Hand Coil
Connection Shown
One - Row Water Coil Two - Row Water Coil
0.625 (16) 0.625 (16) 3

(76)
8.75 (222) 9.125 (232)
FIG:UFW
.75 1 (25.4) .75
(19) (19)
2.5 Contact Factory for 2 (50)
(63) 13 (330) Height
Configuration
Figure 47-7: UFW Series – Dimensions, in. (mm) and Product Image
Tools Required
• Power screwdriver (Phillips #3 bit) to remove floor panels and replace them
• Voltmeter to check for power
• Panel Lifter for removing floor panels
Preparation
Follow these steps:
1. Verify that the UFE/UFW is the correct model for the desired location.
2. Remove the floor coverings and floor panels, if installed at the desired location.
3. Verify that the remaining floor panels are installed properly.

Installation
Follow these steps:
FLEXSYS
1. Remove the floor panels to provide a 2 ft x 4 ft (0.7 x 1.2 m) minimum opening for the UFE/UFW terminal.
UFAD
2. Position the UFE/UFW on the subfloor. Verify you can open the access door fully clear of the floor risers.
3. Connect the unit to the building power, per local code requirements.
4. With the circuit energized, verify the fan operates correctly.
IMPORTANT: To ensure the required CFM is met, we recommend that you remove the filter from the unit after
the construction phase completes but before the commissioning phase begins. Once the floor is installed, a filter
replacement can be extremely difficult.
5. Replace all floor panels in their original locations.

Operation
After installation, the UFE/UFW terminal needs no adjustment or service for proper operation.
Repair Parts
• Air filter – 1 x 10 x 22 in. (25.4 x 254 x 559 mm), (Walnut Manufacturing Part Number 3000.1019.01)
• Air filter – 1 x 13 x 22 in. (25.4 x 330 x 559 mm), (Walnut Manufacturing Part Number 3000.1019.30)
• Fuses (Contact Walnut Manufacturing for part number)
• Finned tubular heater (Contact Walnut Manufacturing for part number)
UFE Nomenclature Drawing
Figure 47-5 on page 488 describes how to interpret the UFE model number.
U F E - 1 12 00
UF = Underfloor Fan Terminal Heating Coil

HC = Heating/Cooling Terminal 000 = None (Fan Only)
015 = 1.5 kW
030 = 3.0 kW
Type of Heat 045 = 4.5 kW
E = Electric 060 = 6.0 kW
W = Hot Water 090 = 9.0 kW
1L = Hot Water, 1 row, left hand coil connections
FIG:UFE_Nmen
Nominal Airflow 1R = Hot Water, 1 row, right hand coil connections
2L = Hot Water, 2 rows, left hand coil connections
1 = 150 CFM (71 L/sec) 2R = Hot Water, 2 rows, right hand coil connections
2 = 300 CFM (142 L/sec)
3 = 600 CFM (283 L/sec)
4 = 850 CFM (400 L/sec)
5 = 1200 CFM (566 L/sec)
6 = 1500 CFM (708 L/sec)
Voltage
12 = 120 V/ 1 Ph/ 60 Hz 24 = 240 V/ 1 Ph/ 60 Hz
20 = 208 V/ 1 Ph/ 60 Hz 27 = 277 V/ 1 Ph/ 60 Hz
23 = 208 V/ 3 Ph/ 60 Hz 48 = 480 V/ 3 Ph/ 60 Hz
Figure 47-8: UFE Series – Fan Terminal Nomenclature

Power Supply (PM-1)
The PM-1 is an electrical under floor power supply module (Figure 47-9 on page 491). It comes with a galvanized
FLEXSYS
steel junction box measuring 4 x 4 in. (101 x 101 mm) (nominal) with standard knockouts for use in conduits for
UFAD
under floor air systems. The power supply is rated for supply air temperatures from 45 to 120°F (7 to 49°C). It can
power up to 13 MIT terminals and 1 TEC thermostat. One control transformer is installed in the junction box and is
rated at 120/240/277 VAC to 24 VAC (90 VA). The transformer has a built-in circuit breaker reset button (3 A) to
protect the circuit from overloading. The reset button is located on the exterior of the transformer housing. In
addition, a 24 VAC PAP cable connection is pre-wired with a female cable connection for a PAP-5 cable (provided).
You can install the power module under the floor at any convenient location, but make it accessible through a
convenient floor panel to provide access to the reset button.
Figure 47-9: PM-1-12 Wiring Detail
Plug and Play Cables

Figure 47-10 on page 492 illustrates the plug and play cables used with the UFAD product line. To assist with the
proper installation of these cables, order a cable installation test kit (Walnut Manufacturing Part Number
49.9000.00). The kit includes PAP terminators for testing power and signal cable integrity, and test kit instructions.
One kit is shipped with the first shipment of UFAD product, but we recommend that you purchase additional kits
prior to installing and commissioning the VAV systems. Ship the kits directly to the project installation team. For
more information, contact your local equipment representative.

PIN #1 BROWN PIN #1 BROWN
FLEXSYS
BLUE JACKET
PIN #2 WHITE PIN #2 WHITE 3 4
3 4
UFAD
PIN #3 BLUE PIN #3 BLUE 1 2

1 2
PIN #4 GREEN PIN #4 GREEN
PAP-1 GENERAL PURPOSE CABLE (25 ft)

PAP-1S CABLE (5 ft)
PIN #1 BROWN
YELLOW JACKET
PIN #2 WHITE
3 4
1 2 PIN #3 BLUE
PIN #4 BLACK
PAP-2 WHIP CABLE (50 ft)
PAP-2S CABLE (10 ft)

BLUE JACKET
PIN #2 WHITE PIN #2 WHITE 4 3
3 4
PIN #3 BLUE PIN #3 BLUE
1 2 2 1
PIN #4 GREEN PIN #4 GREEN
PAP-3 EXTENDER CABLE (25 ft)

GREEN JACKET PIN #2 WHITE
3 4 3 4
1 2 PIN #3 BLUE 1 2
PIN #4 GREEN
PIN #4 GREEN
PAP-5 POWER ONLY CABLE (25 ft)
4 3
2 1
PIN #1 BLACK PIN #1 BLACK

ORANGE JACKET PIN #2 WHITE
3 4
PIN #2 WHITE
3 4
1 2
1 2 PIN #3 BLUE
PIN #3 BLUE
PAP-6(3C) HEATING/CHAINING CABLE (100 ft)

4 3
2 1
OR- 1 BROWN
OR- 2 WHITE / BLACK
OR- 3 BLUE / WHT

PIN #1 BROWN
WHITE JACKET OR- 4 GREEN
4 3 PIN #2 WHITE/BL
PIN #3 BLUE/WH
2 1 BL- 1 BLACK
PIN #4 GREEN
PUSH-FIT BL- 2 WHITE
ORANGE JACKET COUPLING
FIG:PAPCblng
PIN #1 BLACK BL- 3 BLUE

PIN #2 WHITE
4 3 7B-2 SHIPPED 7B-1 (6 in.) BL- 4 RED
SEPARATELY FACTORY
2 1 PIN #3 BLUE
ASSEMBLED TO
TEC
PIN #4 RED
BLUE JACKET
PAP-7B TEC CABLE (10 ft)
Figure 47-10: Plug and Play Cables

Simple Zone
PAP-7B PAP-7B
TEC TEC
To next chain of MIT-2
Typical Riser Diagrams
PAP-6 (ORANGE)
PAP-1
PAP-5 (TYPICAL)
PAP-1 (TYPICAL) PAP-5 (GREEN)
MIT-2 MIT-2
... ...
(TYP.) (TYP.) PM
Power In –
120, 240 or 277 Volt;
1 phase; 50/60 Hz
Maximum 13 MIT-2 per power source Maximum 13 MIT-2 per power source
PAP-6 (ORANGE)
Power In –
PM
120, 240 or 277 Volt;
1 phase; 50/60 Hz
MIT-2
...
FlexSys Generation II using the TEC2688-FS Network Thermostat.
(TYP.) Power In –
PM
120, 240 or 277 Volt;
1 phase; 50/60 Hz
NOTES: Maximum 13 MIT-2 per power source
Common side of
PM = Power Module – Powers up to 14 MITs and TECs each transformer
PAP-6 (ORANGE) must be connected
TEC = Thermostat
MIT-2 = Terminal Unit/Airvalve
PAP-1 = Power and Control Cable – (Blue)
PAP-5 = Power Only Cable – (Green) MIT-2
PAP-6 = Heating/Chaining Cable (Orange) ... PM
(TYP.) Power In –
PAP-7B = TEC Cable – (White) 120, 240 or 277 Volt;
FIG:TEC2688FS-2ClgOly
Figure 47-11: FlexSys Generation II with TEC2688FS-2 Cooling Only Zones

1 phase; 50/60 Hz
Maximum 13 MIT-2 per power source
Under Floor Air Distribution Systems: Section 47

493
See Figure 47-11 on page 493 through Figure 47-13 on page 495 for sample riser diagrams that apply to the
UFAD
FLEXSYS
UFAD
FLEXSYS
494
Simple Zone
TEC PAP-7B
PAP-7B
PAP-5 PAP-1 TEC

(GREEN) (TYPICAL)
MIT-2
...
(TYP.)
MIT-2
PAP-1
...
(TYP.)
(BLUE)
Maximum 13 MIT-2 per PM or fan terminal PAP-1 (BLUE)
PAP-1
PAP-6(3C) (ORANGE) (TYPICAL)
24 VAC

UBE/UFE/UFW MIT-2
T-Stat
...
(TYP.)
Power in –
Line Voltage
Maximum 13 MIT-2 per PM or fan terminal
2 position or modulating
(0-10 VDC) valve control
PAP-5
(GREEN)
24 VAC
OTES: UBE/UFE/UFW
Power in –
PAP-6(3C) (ORANGE) T-Stat
TEC = Thermostat 120/1/60, 208/1/60,
2 position or modulating 208/3/60, 240/1/50,
MIT2-G = Terminal Unit/Airvalve (0-10 VDC) valve control 277/1/60, 480/3/60
UBE = Underfloor Fan-powered unit with electric heat
UFE = Underfloor Fan-powered unit with electric heat 24 VAC
UFW = Underfloor Fan-powered unit with hydronic heat UBE/UFE/UFW
PAP-1 = Power and Control Cable – (Blue) T-Stat Power in –
PAP-6(3C) (ORANGE)
120/1/60, 208/1/60,
PAP-5 = Power Only Cable – (Green) 2 position or modulating 208/3/60, 240/1/50,
PAP-6(3C) = Heating/Chaining Cable – (Orange) (0-10 VDC) valve control 277/1/60, 480/3/60
PAP-6(3C) (ORANGE)
PAP-7B = TEC Cable – (White) To the next UFE/UFW
FIG:TEC2688FS-2HtgClg
Figure 47-12: FlexSys Generation II with TEC2688FS-2 Fan-Powered Heating and MIT-2 Cooling Zones
OR- 1 BROWN
Connection Diagram for Same 24 VAC Power

OR- 2 WHITE/BLACK
Source for Auxiliary Output (24 VAC Maximum)
WHITE JACKET
OR- 3 BLUE/WHITE
TEC2688FS-2
OR- 4 GREEN – NOT USED
BL- 1 BLACK
BL- 2 WHITE
BL- 3 BLUE
24 VAC COM
FAN
24 VAC HOT
7B-1 (6") BL- 4 RED

BO5
BO5
FACTORY 3 4 5
ASSEMBLED TO
6 7
TEC
BL1
BL4
BL2
BL3
OR3
OR1
OR2
TERMINAL # - DESCR / APPLIC FLEXSYS – (LEAD COLOR) 9 10 X X X X X X

3 – Low Fan Speed Fan – White/Black Stripe
AO2
AO1
4 – 24 VAC Hot 24 VAC Hot – Red & Red Jumper

5 – 24 VAC Common 24 VAC Common – Black & Brown
6 – Aux BO5 Heat Relay Source – Red Jumper
7 – Aux BO5 Heat Relay Output – Blue/White Stripe
9 – AO2 OPEN Cooling Damper Output - White
10 – AO1 CLOSE Cooling Damper Output - Blue
12 – BI #1 Not Used
13 – RS Not Used
FIG:TEC2688FS-2ThrmConn
14 – Scom Not Used

15 – BI #2 Not Used
16 – Change-over Signal Not Used
Under Floor Air Distribution Systems: Section 47

Figure 47-13: FlexSys Generation II with TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat Connections – Standard Applications
495
UFAD
FLEXSYS
TEC2688FS-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Network Thermostat
Application
FLEXSYS
UFAD
The TEC2688FS-2 is a BACnet MS/TP networked

device that provides control for FlexSys under floor
VAV systems. It is specifically designed to work
seamlessly with the MIT2 (MIT 2nd Generation)
FlexSys UFAD system, which are the MIT2 units for
both cooling only and cooling with perimeter heat
applications. The TEC2688FS-2 contains a single
speed low-voltage fan contact to control the fan
during the heating mode and also contains an
auxiliary contact for pulsed heat operation. The Backlit, plain text
Room Temp
70.0ºF
TEC2688FS-2 is compatible with all MIT2 under floor LCD is easy to read
air terminals. The TEC2688FS-2 is also compatible in any condition. LEDs indicate
system activity.
with all FlexSys fan-powered terminal units that
include 2A1S in the Thermostat Fan & Heater
Control Signal identifiers in the model number.
FIG:frnt_vw
The technologically advanced TEC2688FS-2 Series Three keys on the thermostat
make operation easy and intuitive.
Thermostat features a BAS BACnet MS/TP
communication capability that enables remote Figure 47-14: TEC2688FW-2 Front Cover
monitoring and programmability for efficient space
temperature control.
The TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat features an intuitive user interface with backlit display that makes setup and
operation quick and easy. The thermostats also employ a unique, PI time-proportioning algorithm that virtually
eliminates temperature offset associated with traditional, differential-based thermostats.
IMPORTANT: The TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat is intended to provide an input to equipment under normal
operating conditions. Where failure or malfunction of the thermostat could lead to personal injury or property
damage to the controlled equipment or other property, additional precautions must be designed into the control
system. Incorporate and maintain other devices, such as supervisory or alarm systems or safety or limit controls,
intended to warn of or protect against failure or malfunction of the thermostat.
IMPORTANT: If you need to install the thermostat in an electrical wall box, use 2 1/8 x 4 in. (54 x 101 mm)
square boxes with mud ring covers and avoid the smaller 1 1/2 x 4 in. square (38 x 101 mm) or 3 x 2 in.
(76 x 51 mm) boxes. This ensures you have enough space for PAP cabling, communication cabling, and EOL
devices (if needed).
If your application has traditional, non-time pulse modulated equipment that is driven with a 0 to 10 VDC signal,
use the TEC2647-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with Two Outputs. This thermostat has:
• three speed fan outputs (for systems that require fan control in Cooling mode)
• one 0 to 10 VDC cooling output
• one 0 to 10 VDC heating output
Similar to the TEC2688FS-2, the TEC2647-2 is pre-wired with a PAP cable to adapt to the FlexSys system. This
configuration requires an additional converter called the Q-Box to convert a 0 to 10 volt output to time-based
pulses to drive the MIT VAV boxes. The TEC2647-2 is selectable with YORKworks equipment selection software.
For more information, refer to the TEC26x7-2 Series BACnet® MS/TP Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs
Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-9890-242).

Mounting
FLEXSYS
Locate the TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat:
UFAD
• on a partitioning wall, approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) above the floor in a location of average temperature
Note: Local, State, and/or Federal laws, such as the Americans with Disabilities Act, may necessitate different
mounting height above the floor.
• away from direct sunlight, radiant heat, outside walls, behind doors, air discharge grills, stairwells, or outside
doors
• away from steam or water pipes, warm air stacks, unconditioned areas (not heated or cooled), or sources of
electrical interference
Note: Allow for vertical air circulation to the TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat.
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the security screw on the bottom of the thermostat cover.
2. Pull the bottom edge of the thermostat cover and open the thermostat as illustrated in Figure 47-15 on
page 497.
3. Carefully pull the locking tabs on the right side of the thermostat mounting base and unlock the PCB. Open the
PCB to the left as illustrated in Figure 47-16 on page 497.
4. Pull both the MS/TP BACnet wires and the PAP-7B(2)
cable approximately 6 in. (152 mm) from the wall.
Insert the wires through the hole in the thermal back
plate (optional) and through the hole in the thermostat
mounting base.
Note: If the thermal back plate is being installed,
align the thermal back plate on the wall and use the
plate as a template to mark the two mounting hole
locations. Proceed to Step 6.
5. Align the thermostat mounting base on the wall, and
use the base as a template to mark the two mounting
hole locations.
FIG:cvr_rmvl
Figure 47-15: Removing the Thermostat Cover
Note: Do not use plastic or nylon anchors of any type.
7. Plug the PAP-7B(1) cable (attached to the
thermostat) to the PAP-7B(2) cable.
Extend the cable through the thermal PCB
Locking
back plate, if present. Tab
PAP-7B(2)
PCB
Locking
Tab
FIG: opn_pb
Figure 47-16: Opening the Thermostat PCB

8. Position the thermostat mounting base (and thermal
back plate if present) on the wall, and push the
FLEXSYS
PAP-7B connector through the thermal back plate into

UFAD
the wall cavity.

9. Use the two mounting screws (included with the
thermostat) to secure the base to the surface
screws.
10. Swing the PCB back to the right, and carefully snap it
into the locking tabs on the thermostat mounting
base.
FIG: scr_wll
Wiring
When a TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat is replaced, simply
remove the old screw terminal blocks and reinsert them Figure 47-17: Securing the Thermostat
onto the PCB of the replacement thermostat. Also identify Mounting Base to the Wall
and remove the wires from the MS/TP connector and
reconnect the wires to the appropriate screw terminals on
the replacement thermostat.
! Disconnect power supply before making electrical connections to avoid electric shock.
! Do not apply power to the system before checking all wiring connections. Short circuited or
improperly connected wires may result in permanent damage to the equipment.
IMPORTANT: Make all wiring connections in accordance with local, national, and regional regulations. Do not
exceed the electrical ratings of the TEC2688FS-2 Series Thermostat.

1. Strip the ends of each BACnet MS/TP wire, if present, 1/4 in. (6 mm) and pull approximately 6 in. (152 mm)
from the wall. Insert and connect them to the appropriate screw terminals as indicated in Table 47-2 on
page 499 as +, -, and REF.
Note: For more details on wiring the MS/TP Communications Bus, refer to the MS/TP Communications Bus
Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011034).
Note: Ensure the PAP-7B cable was properly assembled. See Mounting on page 497.
2. Carefully push any excess wire back into the wall. Seal the hole in the wall with fireproof material to prevent
drafts from affecting the ambient temperature readings.

Table 47-2: Terminal Identification (See Figure 47-18 on page 500.)
Terminal Terminal Label Function PAP7B-1 Wire Color
FLEXSYS
Number
UFAD
TEC2688FS-2 (On/Off or
Floating Control)
3 Fan Fan Output White/Black Stripe
4 24 V~ Hot 24 VAC Power Input from Transformer Red and Red Jumper
5 24 V~ Com 24 VAC (Common) from Transformer Black and Brown
6 BO5 Aux Heat Relay Source Red Jumper
7 BO5 Aux Heat Relay Output Blue/White Stripe
9 AO2 OPEN Cooling Damper Output White
10 AO1 CLOSE Cooling Damper Output Blue
12 BI1 Configurable Binary Input 1 N/A
13 RS Remote Temperature Sensor N/A
14 Scom Sensor Common N/A
15 BI2 Configurable Binary Input 2 N/A
Blank +, –, REF MS/TP Bus N/A

Three-Pole Two-Pole
Left Top Connector Right Top
FLEXSYS
Connector
UFAD
+ – REF Fan
24 V~ 24 V~
Hot Com BO5 BO5
+ Aux Aux
3 4 5
– 6 7
Supervisory
Controller REF
AO2 AO1 BI1 RS Scom BI2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
24~ 24~ BO5 BO5 S

FAN AO2 AO1 BI 1 RS BI 2
HOT COM AUX AUX COM
3 9 10 12 13 15
4 5 6 7 14
MIT2 MIT2
Open Close RETURN
AIR
Jumper SENSOR
FAN J1 HEAT
*1
or
Field Contact
HEAT
24 VAC
24 VAC
T1
T1 System Wiring
Thermostat Internal Wiring
Jumper J1
*1 Relay (15 minute cycle only)
or
FIG:wrng
SSR Firing Board
Figure 47-18: Wiring Schematic for the TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat (See Table 47-2.)
Note: For MS/TP Bus Object information please reference TEC2688FS-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Network
Thermostat Installation Instructions.
Connecting the TEC26xx to the MS/TP Bus
See BACnet MS/TP Communications Bus Guidelines on page 73 for guidelines on wiring a TEC to a FC Bus. The
MS/TP Bus device address for the TEC is configured using the TEC configuration menus. There are no address
DIP switches to set. See Configuring the TEC2688FS-2 Series Thermostat on page 501 for more information.
Note: The TEC thermostat does not provide EOL termination. If the TEC terminates a bus segment on the FC Bus
A small green light under the thermostat cover (on the left edge when facing the thermostat) indicates the
communications mode when the thermostat is operating. The following blink codes may be seen:
• Short-Short-Long: Indicates that the baud rate is known and that communication is active.
• Short-Short: Indicates that the thermostat is scanning for the correct baud rate and that there is no
communication.
• Off: Indicates that there is no power to the thermostat or that the MS/TP wiring polarity is reversed.
• Long: Indicates that the MS/TP communication daughter board is the wrong type for the main board.

MS/TP Device Mapping
For MS/TP Device Mapping please reference TEC2688FS-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Network Thermostat
FLEXSYS
Installation Instructions.
UFAD
Thermostat User Interface Keys
The TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat user interface consists of three keys on the front cover (as illustrated in
Figure 47-14 on page 496). The function of each key is as follows:
• OVERRIDE key overrides the unoccupied mode to occupied at the local user interface for the specified
TOccTime. (TOccTime is defined by selecting the appropriate time period in the Installer Configuration Menu.)
The OVERRIDE key also allows access to the Installer Configuration Menu. See Configuring the
TEC2688FS-2 Series Thermostat on page 501.
• If one of the binary inputs is configured to operate as a remote override contact, this OVERRIDE key is
disabled.
Backlit LCD
The TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat includes a 2-line, 8-character backlit display. Low-level backlighting is present
LEDs
Two LEDs are included to indicate a call for heat or a call for cooling:
• The HEAT LED is on when heating or heat is on.
Status Display Menu
The Status Display Menu is displayed during normal thermostat operation. This menu can continuously scroll
through the following parameters:
• Room Temperature
• System Mode
• Occupancy Status (Occupied/Unoccupied/Override)
• Applicable Alarms (The backlight lights up as an alarm condition is displayed.)
Note: An option is available within the Installer Configuration Menu to activate the scrolling display rather than
show only the Room Temperature parameter.
Note: As a best practice during startup the installer can validate operation of all MIT boxes in a zone by driving the
setpoint to one extreme and then visually inspecting operation of dampers.
Configuring the TEC2688FS-2 Series Thermostat
The TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat comes from the factory with default settings for all configurable parameters. The
default settings are shown in Table 47-4 on page 503. To reconfigure the parameters via the thermostat, follow the
steps in this section.
To access the Installer Configuration Menu, press and hold the override key for approximately 8 seconds. Once
the Installer Configuration Menu begins, release and press the center key to scroll through the parameters listed in
Table 47-4 on page 503. When the desired parameter is displayed, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose the
desired selection option. Then press and release the override key to continue scrolling through the parameters.
Configuring Inputs BI1 and BI2

FLEXSYS
Choose the appropriate sequence of operation. The

UFAD
modes presented are user-dependent on the sequence of Heating Output

operation selected. See Figure 47-19 on page 502 and
Cooling Output
Figure 47-20 on page 502 for sequence of operation
examples. Heating Setpoint Cooling Setpoint
Cooling Setpoint Deadband

Device
On
Opened
Device Opened On Heat Off
Device
Off Closed
Device Closed
FIG:clng_wth_rht
Temperature Increase
FIG:clng_nly
(Increments of 1F°/0.5C°)
Temperature Increase
(Increments of 1F°/0.5C°) Figure 47-20: Cooling with Heating
Figure 47-19: Cooling Only

Selection Option Control Curve Terminal Numbers Used (See Table 47-2 on page 499
and Figure 47-18 on page 500.)
(0): Cooling Only See Figure 47-19 on page 502. 9 and 10: Time-Modulated Cooling
(2): Cooling and Heat See Figure 47-20 on page 502. 3 and 7: Fan and Heat 9 and 10: Time-Modulated Cooling
Configuring Heat Sequences

Heat 10 Seconds Cycle Time Sequence
Fan Operation
The Fan operation has a 2% hysteresis on Fan operation between PI Heat = 0% and 2%. The Fan has a fixed
90-second delay (purge time) when the PI Heat = 0%. The fan is energized when heat output is energized. See
Heat Output Operation on page 502 for more information.
Heat Output Operation
The cycle time is 10 seconds. Use this operation for driving a SSR output. This operation is not intended for
mechanical relays or valves.
The Duty Cycle is a ratio of ON time versus Cycle time of the heat output. A 50% duty cycle, for example, has a
5 seconds ON and 5 seconds OFF of heat output (repeated continuously).
When Fan is initially de-energized and PI Heat = 0%, the Fan only energizes once the PI Heat = > 2%. When Fan
is initially energized and then PI Heat = 0%, the Fan remains energized for an additional 90 seconds (purge cycle).
Heat 15 minutes Cycle Time Sequence
Fan Operation
The Fan is energized when heat output is energized. The Fan has a 90-second OFF delay (purge cycle) when heat
output is de-energized.

Heat Output Operation
The Cycle time is 15 minutes. Use this operation for driving an SSR, mechanical relay, or valve output. Duty cycle
FLEXSYS
is a ratio of ON time versus Cycle time of the heat output. A 50% duty cycle, for example, has 7.5 minutes ON and
UFAD
7.5 minutes OFF of heat output (repeated continuously).
Appearing
on Display
Com addr MS/TP device address at the Range: 004 to 127
thermostat; coincides with the
device address assigned at the
supervisory controller.
Default: 4
contact closed = Unoccupied.
a window is open. The fan operation is not affected. A Window alarm
is displayed indicating that the window needs to be closed to resume
heating or cooling.
** When this setting is selected, the heating and/or cooling outputs
are enabled only when the contact is closed.
Default: None (Door Dry): Door contact only has an effect if BI1 is set to MotionNO
or MotionNC. (See the BI1 parameter earlier in this table.) The
occupancy is now dictated via BI1 and BI2. Any motion detected
sets the zone to Occupied status. The thermostat remains in the
occupied mode until a DoorOpen is detected, at which point the
thermostat goes to the unoccupied mode. If the door stays open
input is energized. This input can be tied into the air conditioning unit
control card, which provides an alarm if a malfunction occurs.
MenuScro Gives the option for the display to (off): The scroll is inactive.
continuously scroll the parameters. (on): The scroll is active.
Default: on
Default: °F

FLEXSYS
Appearing
UFAD
on Display
Lockout Selectable Lockout Levels for Lock Function
limiting end user keypad interaction. out
Local Override Occupied Temperature Setpoints
Default: 0 Level
(0) Access Access
(1) No Access Access
(2) No Access No Access
Unocc CL Sets the Unoccupied Cooling Range: 54.0°F/12.0°C to 0.5F°/0.5C° increments;
setpoint value. 100.0°F/37.5°C press and hold the
changing the heating or cooling temporary and remain effective for the specified TOccTime.
Default: permnent
mode)
setpoint
Default: 2.0 hrs
the time specified.
Default: 2.0 min
setpoints.

FLEXSYS
Appearing
UFAD
on Display
Reheat Sets the duty cycle time for heat (1): 10 seconds (six cycles per minute), for various equipment with
mechanical relays or contactors controlling mechanical heat
systems.
Accessories
representative to order any of these parts.
Note: Review the technical specifications of the accessories prior to their use in an application.
TE-6361P-11 Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor
Repair Information
If the TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat fails to operate within its specifications, see Table 47-6 on page 505 for
troubleshooting details and Table 47-7 on page 506 for display messaging. For a replacement thermostat, contact
the nearest Johnson Controls representative.
Table 47-6: Troubleshooting Details1 (Part 1 of 2)
Symptom Probable Causes
Multiple Excessive bus errors may be occurring.
Symptoms
A device may have been added or changed with a duplicate device address (may not be the same
device address as some devices having problems, and may have happened sometime before the
problem was noticed).
Wiring errors or wire problems may exist.
The baud rate may have been changed on some devices on the network, but not all devices.
Max_Master may have been changed incorrectly (may have happened sometime before the problem
was noticed).
A download may be in progress.
A fault may exist at a device.
A repeater may be needed or may be configured incorrectly.
A duplicate device object name or instance may exist.

Table 47-6: Troubleshooting Details1 (Part 2 of 2)
Symptom Probable Causes
FLEXSYS
UFAD
Poor Performance See the probable causes listed in the Multiple Symptoms section earlier in this table.
Excessive bus traffic may exist (bus overload).
The baud rate may be set too low.
Too many devices may be on the network.
Unaccounted devices may be on the network (not mapped to the NAE).
Unusually slow devices are slow to respond on the network.
Thermostat Goes See the probable causes listed in the Multiple Symptoms section earlier in this table.
Offline
A power failure or other failure may have occurred at the thermostat.
Communication may have been disabled at the thermostat.
Thermostat Does See the probable causes listed in the Multiple Symptoms section earlier in this table.
Not Come Online
A thermostat may be connected to the wrong bus.
A baud rate may be specified in the new thermostat that is incompatible with the running network.
No device on the network is configured to use a specific baud rate (normally the NAE), but all devices
are set to use auto baud. At least one device, typically the bus supervisor (NAE), must have an
assigned baud rate. Set the baud rate in the bus supervisor and set all other devices to auto baud.
1. For common MS/TP troubleshooting information, refer to the MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin
(LIT-12011034).
Table 47-7: Display Messages

Display Function
Service Indicates that there is a service alarm in accordance with the programmable Binary Input (BI2).
Filter Indicates that the filter(s) is dirty in accordance with the programmable Binary Input (BI2).
Window Indicates that an outside window or door is open and has cancelled the thermostat heating or cooling
action in accordance with the programmable Binary Input (BI1).

Table 47-8: Documents Related to Setup, Installation, and Wiring of UFAD Systems
FLEXSYS
UFAD
Installation and Specification of TEC2688FS-2 BACnet MS/TP Part No. 24-9890-706
TEC2688FS-2 Series Thermostat Networked Thermostat with Single
Proportional Output and One-Speed
Fan Control Installation Instructions
Installation and Specification of TEC26x7-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Part No. 24-9890-242
TEC2647-2 Series Thermostat Networked Thermostats with Two
Outputs Installation Instructions
MIT2-A
Table 47-9: MIT2-A
Application AirFixture and FlexSys control devices, in raised floors 8 in. (203 mm) or higher
Size 10 x 10 in. (254 x 254 mm) nominal grill size, 11.4 x 11.4 in. (290 x 290 mm) trim ring
(Specify color on order)
Grill Rating Cast Aluminum, conforms to NFPA 90a, 1,250 lb (567 kg) Load strength
Supply Pressure/ 0.02 to 0.1 in. wg
Temperature 40 to 110°F (4 το 43°C)
Capacity MIT2-A Nominal 150 cfm at 0.05 in. wg supply pressure
MIT2-Ar
MIT2-An Nominal 100 cfm at 0.05 in. wg supply pressure
Noise Criterion Below NC-17 at all flow conditions
Dimensions 14.88 x 10.39 x 7.06 in. (378 x 264 x 180 mm)
Weight 7 lb (3 kg)
MIT2-C
Table 47-10: MIT2-C
Size 10 x 10 in. nominal grill size, 11.4 x 11.4 in. (290 x 290 mm) trim ring
Grill Rating Cast Aluminum, conforms to NFPA 90a, 1,350 lb (612 kg) Load strength
Temperature 40 to 120°F (4 to 49°C)
Capacity MIT2-C Nominal 150 CFM at 0.05 in. wg supply pressure
MIT2-Cr Nominal 140 CFM at 0.05 in. wg supply pressure. Flare combination can reduce flow to
115 CFM
MIT2-Cn Nominal 100 CFM at 0.05 in. wg supply pressure
Weight 9 lb (4 kg)

MIT2-G
Table 47-11: MIT2-G
FLEXSYS
UFAD
Size 10 x 10 in. (254 x 254 mm) nominal grill size, 11.4 x 11.4 in. (290 x 290 mm) trim ring
Grill Rating Cast Aluminum, conforms to NFPA 90a, 1,350 lb (612 kg) load strength
Temperature 40 to 110°F (4 to 43°C)
Capacity MIT2-G Nominal 150 CFM at 0.05 in. wg supply pressure
MIT2-Gr
MIT2-Gn Nominal 100 CFM at 0.05 in. wg supply pressure
Weight 9 lb (4 kg)
UFE and UFW Series Terminals

Table 47-12: UFE and UFW
Application Under Floor Heating
General Features ETL Listed
Meets All NEC Requirements
Includes NEMA-1 Enclosure
Single–Point Electrical Connection
Dark Heat Finned Steel Heating Elements
Main Supply Fusing
Solid State Heating Contactors
Interlocking Disconnect Switch on Access Door
Hot Water Coil
Terminal Strip for Hot Water Valve
Power Requirements 24 VAC or 0-10 VDC (not exceed 10 VA)
Transformer 100 VA Control Transformer
Heating Coils 1- or 2-Row Hot Water Heating Coil
• 10 Aluminum fins per inch
• 1/2 in. O.D. circuit tubes (5A and up are 3/4 in. O.D.)
Color Galvanized Steel – Painted Black
Supply Air Pressure 0.02 to 0.08 in. wg
Capacity Nominal 300, 600, 850, 1200, 1500 cooling cfm at .05 in. wg supply airway pressure
Dimensions UFE-4A or lower 10 x 22 x 36 in. (254 x 559 x 914 mm)
UFE-5A or higher 13 x 22 x 36 in. (305 x 559 x 914 mm)
UFW-4A or lower 10 x 22 x 41 in. (254 x 559 x 1041 mm)
UFW-5A or higher 13 x 22 x 41 in. (330 x 559 x 1041 mm)
Weight UFE-4A or lower 75 lb (34 kg)
UFE-5A or higher 77 lb (35 kg)
UFW-4A or lower 80 lb (36 kg)
UFW-5A or higher 85 lb (38 kg)

PM-1-12 Power Module
Table 47-13: PM-1-12
FLEXSYS
Application Under floor, 8 in. (203 mm) or higher raised floor system
UFAD
Shipped Items 6 modules per carton
Dimensions 27 x 27 x 27 in. (685 x 685 x 685 mm)
(Shipping Container
Weight 41 lb (19 kg)
(Shipping Container)
TEC2688FS-2 Thermostat
Table 47-14: TEC2688FS-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostats
Power Requirements 19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 VA (Terminals 4 and 5) at 24 VAC Nominal, Class 2 or
SELV
AO1 and AO2 Pulsed Voltage 20 to 40 VDC, 0.9 to 1.1 seconds Pulse Width, 30k ohm Minimum Resistive load,
Output Rating Output, Voltage 1,000 pf Maximum Capacitive Load
Fan Relay Maximum Rating 30 VAC, 1.0 A Continuous, 3.0 A In-Rush
Output
Minimum Rating 30 VAC, 0.015 A Continuous
Fan Relay 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush
Auxiliary Output Triac Output 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush
Rating
Digital Inputs Voltage-Free Contacts across Terminal Scom to Terminals BI1 or BI2
MS/TP Network Guidelines 32 Devices Maximum; 4,000 ft (1,219 m) Maximum Cable Length
Temperature Backlit Display -40.0°F/-40.0°C to 122.0°F/50.0°C in 0.5° Increments
Range
Heating Control 40.0°F/4.5°C to 90.0°F/32.0°C
Cooling Control 54.0°F/12.0°C to 100.0°F/38.0°C
Accuracy Temperature ±0.9F°/±0.5°C at 70.0°F/21.0°C Typical Calibrated
Default Minimum Deadband 2F°/1C° between Heating and Cooling
Conditions
Controller (B-ASC)
New Zealand
Dimensions 4-15/16 x 3-3/8 x 1-1/8 in. (125 x 86 x 29 mm)
(Height x Width x Depth)
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond
these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting
from misapplication or misuse of its products.

FLEXSYS
UFAD

Glossary of Acronyms and Terms
This section contains a list of selected acronyms and DIP Dual Inline Package
terms used in this book.
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
A ampere
DX Extended Digital Controller
AC Alternating Current
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable
ADS Application and Data Server Read-only Memory
ADX Extended Application and Data Server EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
AHU Air Handling Unit or AHU Controller EMI Electromagnetic Interference
AI Analog Input (object or point) EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing
AO Analog Output (object or point) EOL End-of-Line termination or terminator
AP Access Point ETL Edison Testing Laboratory
APT Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc. EWC Enclosure
ASC Application Specific Controller FC Field Controller
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, FCU Fan Coil Unit
Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
FEC Field Equipment Controller
Engineers
AWG American Wire Gauge FMED Factory Mounted End Devices
BACnet Building Automation Control Network FPC Factory Packaged Control

FSC Flexible System Controller or Field
BAS Building Automation System
Support Center
BI Binary Input (object or point)
FTT Free Topology Transceiver
BO Binary Output (object or point)
GND Ground
BOM Bill of Material
HTG Heating
bps bits per second
HVAC Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
CAT5 Category 5 cable
HVACR Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and
CCT Controller Configuration Tool Refrigeration
CCW Counter-Clockwise HW Hot Water
CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with IC Industry Canada
Collision Detection
ID Identification
CE Mark Conformité Européenne
I.D. Inside Diameter
cfm cubic feet per minute
IFC Intelligent Fire Controller
CLG cooling
ILC Intelligent Lighting Controller
CO Configurable Output
I/O or IO Input/Output
COM Common
IOM Input Output Module
CPU Central Processing Unit
IP Internet Protocol
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
kb kilobit
CW Clockwise
KB kilobyte
DA Damper Actuator or Direct Acting
kg kilogram
DCM Digital Control Module
LAN Local Area Network
DDC Direct Digital Controller
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
DI Digital Input
LED Light-Emitting Diode
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung
Code No. LIT-410049 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) 511

LN LONWORKS Network PA Panel Assembly
LON Local Operating Network PAN ID Personal Area Network Identification
mA milliampere PAP Plug And Play
MA Mixed Air PAT Position Adjustment Type
MAC Media Access Control PCB Printed Circuit Board
MAD Mixed Air Damper PI Proportional Integral
max maximum PM Power Module
MB megabyte PPM Pulse Per Minute
Mb megabit PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient
Mbps million (or mega) bits per second PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
MCC Motor Control Centers PWB Printed Wire Board
MFT Modular Fan Terminal PWM Pulse Width Modulation
min minimum RA Return Air
MIT Modular Integrated Terminal RA/DA Reverse Action/Direct Action
MO Major Obstruction RAM Random Access Memory
MOM Manufacturing Order Management RF Radio Frequency
MS/TP Master-Slave/Token-Passing RFT Recloseable Fastener Tape
N.C. Normally Closed RJ Registered Jack
N.O. Normally Open RH Relative Humidity
N1 N1 network RO Relay Output
N2 N2 protocol ROM Read-only Memory
NAE Network Automation Engine RTC Real-time Clock
NC Network Controller RTD Resistance Temperature Device
NCE Network Control Engine RTM Rapid Transmit Mode
NCM Network Control Module RTU Rooftop Unit
NCU Network Control Unit SA Supply Air or Sensor-Actuator
NDM N2 Dialer Module SECVT Serial to Ethernet Converter
NEC National Electrical Code SELV Safety Extra-Low Voltage
NEU Network Expansion Unit SHLD Shield
NIE Network Integration Engine SRC Source
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ SSR Solid State Relay
Association SW Switch
NFPA National Fire Protection Association TB Terminal Block
NIE Network Integration Engine TC Terminal Controller
NS Network Sensor or Network Systems TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/
NSB Night Setback Internet Protocol
NTC Negative Temperature Coefficient TCU Terminal Control Unit
O.D. Outside Diameter TE Temperature Element
OA Outside Air or Outdoor Air UDP User Datagram Protocol
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer UFAD Under Floor Air Distribution
OS Operating System UFE Under Floor Electric

UFW Under Floor Water
UI Universal Input
UI User Interface
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UNT Unitary (controller)
UO Universal Output
UPM Universal Packaging Module
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
USB Universal Serial Bus
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
VAC Volts Alternating Current
VAV Variable Air Volume
VBT VMA1400 Balancing Tool
VDC Volts Direct Current
VMA VAV Modular Assembly
VOM Volt Ohmmeter
VSD Variable Speed Drive
VVT Variable Volume Temperature
WAN Wide Area Network
WiFi Wireless Fidelity
WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
XBN Multiplex Binary
XFR Transformer
XM Expansion Point Module
XP Expansion Module
XPL Expansion Module Latched
XPT Expansion Module Binary Triac
XRE Multiplex Relay Electrically Maintained
XRL Multiplex Relay Latched
XRM Multiplex Relay Momentary
XT Bus used by Expansion Modules
XTM Type of controller
ZB Zone Bus
ZCT ZFR Checkout Tool
ZFR Wireless Field Bus Router
ZT Zone Terminal
ZTU Zone Terminal Unit
Glossary of Acronyms and Terms 513

Trademark Listing
This section contains a list of trademarks used in this handbook.
620 LAN CableMeter is a registered trademark of Fluke Corporation.

Acromag is a registered trademark of Acromag Incorporated.
AirFixture is a registered trademark of AirFixture Company.
Anixter is a registered trademark of Anixter International.
BACnet is a registered trademark of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
BACnet Testing Laboratories is a trademark of BACnet Manufacturers Association, Inc.
Belden and Belden CDT are registered trademarks of Belden.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth, Inc.
Channellock is a registered trademark of Channellock, Inc.
Corning is a registered trademark of Corning Incorporated.
Echelon is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation.
Electrocube is a registered trademark of Electrocube, Inc.
EZ-RJ45 Crimper is a trademark of Bomar Interconnect Products, Inc.
FlexSys is a trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Fluke is a registered trademark of Fluke Corporation.
Fluke MicroScanner Pro is a trademark of Fluke Corporation.
Hoffman is a registered trademark of Pentair Company
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
Johnson Controls is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
LanRoverPRO and LanRoamerPRO are trademarks of Test-Um Incorporated, a company of JDS Uniphase
Corporation.
LONMARK and LONWORKS are registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation.
Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows and Windows XP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Minerallac is a registered trademark of Minerallac Fastening Systems.
MIZER is a trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Molex is a registered trademark of Molex.
Netgear is a registered trademark of Netgear, Inc.
Neuron is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation.
Palm is a registered trademark of Palm, Inc.
PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines.
Renesas is a registered trademark of Renesas Technology Corporation.
Torx is a trademark of Textron Incorporated.
TP600 LANRoamerPRO is a trademark of Test-Um Incorporated, a company of JDS Uniphase Corporation.
Transient Eliminator is a registered trademark of Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc.
Unistrut is a registered trademark of Unistrut Corporation.
Vise-Grip is a registered trademark of IRWIN Industrial Tool Company.
Trademark Listing: Section 49 515

W-Linx is a registered trademark of W-LINX Technology Company, Ltd.
ZigBee is a trademark of ZigBee Alliance Corporation.

Index
Symbols Antenna
Mounting for ZFR1810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
APT
Transient Eliminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
A
A11 and A70 Series Controls, See Low Temperature B
Cutout Controls BACnet MS/TP, See MS/TP
Acromag Baud Rates on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 180, 184 Belden Cables
Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 FC and SA Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 LonWorks Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Bill of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Addressing Bomar Interconnect Products, Inc.
AHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 EZ-RJ45 Crimper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 28
DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
FC Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 C
FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
IOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Cables
LonWorks Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Cable Installation Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Color Standard for Metasys Cables and Wires 468
N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Guidelines for Metasys Networks . . . . . . . . . . 17
NAE35/NAE45/NCM45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Low Voltage Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
NAE55/NIE55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Maximum Voltage Drop on 24 VAC Wiring . . 470
NCE25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Part Numbers for Standard Metasys Cables . 466
NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Resistive Sensor Temperature Offset . . . . . . 471
NS Network Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 RJ-Style Modular Connectors and Cables . . . . 19
SA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Cabling Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
TC-9102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 ComBus Quick Bus Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
TEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Conduit Sizing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
TEC21xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Crimping Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
TEC2xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
UNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 D
VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Dampers, See Actuators
VMA1400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Data Protection Battery
VMA1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 NAE35/NAE45/NCM45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
WRS-TTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 NAE55/NIE55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
WRZ-7840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 NCE25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
WRZ-TTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 DIS1710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
XT and XTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ZFR1810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
AHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Drawings
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Factory Installed Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Flow Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Object or Point Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
AHU100 Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Point Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Allied Telesyn switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Riser Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Anixter Room, Valve, and Damper Schedules . . . . . . . 12
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
System Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) 517

Termination Reference Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 I
Title Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 IOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Termination Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
E Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Enclosures, See Panels and Enclosures L

EOL Termination
FC Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 LanRoamerPRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 28
MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 LN ASC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
MS/TP Bus Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
N2 Bus Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 LN FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
SA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
EOL Terminator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Ethernet LN VAV/VVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Cable Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Overview and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 LonWorks Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
EZ-RJ45 Crimper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 28 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
F Low Temperature Cutout Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Factory-Mounted End Device System . . . . . . . . . . 478 Mounting in an Accessible Location . . . . . . . . 455
FC Bus Mounting in an Inaccessible Location . . . . . . . 456
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
EOL Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Recommended Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Rules and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 M
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Manufacturing Order Management (MOM) . . . . . . 475
FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Materials Transporting, Receiving, and Storing . . . 13
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Maximum Voltage Drop on 24 VAC Power Wiring 470
Input and Output Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Metastat, See TE-6700
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Metasys Checkout Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Metasys System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Termination Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 MIT2-A/C/G, See Modular Integrated Terminals
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Modular Fan Terminals
Fiber Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 UFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Field Controller Bus, See FC Bus UFW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
FlexSys System Modular Integrated Terminals
TEC2688FS-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 MIT2-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
UFAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 MIT2-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 MIT2-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Fluke 620 LAN Cable Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Mounting
Fluke MicroScanner Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
FPC AHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
System types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 DIS1710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Freeze-Stat, See Low Temperature Cutout Controls DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
H General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
IOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
HVAC Control Drawings, See Drawings LN ASC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

LN FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Terminal Block Function, Ratings, Requirements,
LN VAV/VVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 and Cable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Low Temperature Cutout Controls . . . . . . . . . 452 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Metasys System Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 NAE55/NIE55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
NAE35/NAE45/NCM45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
NAE55/NIE55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Comparison table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
NCE25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Installing the Data Protection Battery . . . . . . . . 37
NS DTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
NS Network Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 81
SECVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Sensors, General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Standard Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Terminal Block Functions, Ratings, Requirements,
TC-9102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 and Cable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
TE-6700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
TE-7800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 NCE25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
TEC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
TEC21xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
TEC2688FS-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
TEC26xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
TEC2xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
UNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Termination Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
UPM Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
VMA1400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
VMA1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 NEMA Type Ratings for Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . 437
WRS-RTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Netgear Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
WRS-TTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 NS DTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
WRZ-7840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
WRZ-TTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
XT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 NS Network Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
ZFR1810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ZFR1811 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Multiple NS Sensors on an SA Bus . . . . . . . . . 80
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Baud Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 O
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Object or Point Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
N P
N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 PAN Offset
Acceptable Voltage Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ZFR1810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ZFR1811 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Checkout and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Panels and Enclosures
ComBus Quick Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Enclosure NEMA Type Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . 437
N2 Bus Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Mounting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Ordering Panels and Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . 438
N2 Bus Checkout and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Standard Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
NAE35/NAE45/NCM45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 UPM Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Comparison table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 PAP Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 PM-1
Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Point Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Index 519
Preloading, See Actuators TEC21xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Project Drawings, See Drawings TEC2688FS-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
TEC26xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
R TEC2xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Repeaters UNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85 VMA1400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 VMA1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Riser Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 WRS-TTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
RJ-11 vs. RJ-12 Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 21 WRZ-7840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
WRZ-TTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
S ZFR1810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
S.I. Tech ZFR1811 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Fiber Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Standard Enclosures
SA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Status LEDs
EOL Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Multiple NS Network Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 IOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Recommended Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 NAE35/NAE45/NCM45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
RJ-Style 6-Wire Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 NAE55/NIE55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Rules and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 NCE25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 SECVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
SECVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 TEC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 TEC2688FS-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 TEC26xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 TEC2xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 VMA1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Sensor Actuator Bus, See SA Bus WRZ-7840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 ZFR1810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Setting EOL ZFR1811 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
AHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Surge Protection
DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 System Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
NAE55/NIE55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 81 T
NAEs and NCMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
NCE25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 TC-9102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
SECVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
TEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Third-Party Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
UNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 TE-6700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
VMA1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Setup and Adjustment Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
AHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
DIS1710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 TE-7800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
IOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Low Temperature Cutout Controls . . . . . . . . . 459 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
NAE35/NAE45/NCM45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 TEC
NAE55/NIE55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
NCE25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
TC-9102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 TEC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
TE-6700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
TEC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
TEC21xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 UFW, See Modular Fan Terminals
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 UNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
TEC2688FS-2 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Termination Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 UPM Enclosures
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
TEC26xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 USB Dongle for ZigBee Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 V
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
TEC2xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 VMA1400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Terminal Designations Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
UNT 110/120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
UNT 1108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
UNT 1108/1126/1144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 VMA1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
UNT 111/121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
UNT 1126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
UNT 1144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
UNT 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
UNT 141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
VAV 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Termination Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
VAV 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
VAV 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Voltage Drop Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
VAV 141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Volt-Ampere Device Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Termination Details
FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 W
IOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
NCE25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Wireless, See SECVT, TE-7800, WRZ-7840, WRS-
UNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 RTN, WRZ-TTx, and WRS-TTx
VMA1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Wiring
Termination Reference Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 AHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Test Um TP600 LanRoamerPRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Color Standard for Metasys Cables and Wires 468
Third-Party Controllers DIS1710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Setting EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Title Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FC Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
TP600 LanRoamerPRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 28 FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Transient Eliminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
U LN ASC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
LN FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
UFAD LN VAV/VVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 LonWorks Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
UFAD System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Low Temp Cutout Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
UFE, See Modular Fan Terminals MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
UFE/UFW
Index 521
N2 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 177 WRZ-SST-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 383
NAE35/NAE45/NCM45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 WRZ-TTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
NAE55/NIE55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
NCE25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Mesh Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
NS DTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
NS Network Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 One-to-One Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Panels and Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
RJ-Style Modular Connectors and Cables . . . . 19 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
SA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
SECVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 X
TC-9102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 XT and XTM
TE-6700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
TE-7800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
TEC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
TEC21xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Y
TEC2688FS-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
TEC26xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 York Factory Packaged Controls . . . . . . . . . . 475, 484
TEC2xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
UNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Z
UPM Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 ZFR1810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
VMA1400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
VMA1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
WRS-RTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Optimize Network Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
WRZ-7840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 PAN Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
WRZ-TTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
ZFR1810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Signal Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
ZFR1811 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Wiring Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Wireless Signal Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
W-Linx Mini Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
WRS-RTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 ZFR1811 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 PAN Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
WRS-TTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Setup and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Signal Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
WRZ-7840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 ZFRCBL Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 ZFRCBL
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Wiring to FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Setup and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Wiring to ZFR1811 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 ZFRRPT Repeater Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . 377, 383
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

FAN410 Rev.3.0 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

FAN410 Rev.3.0 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Installation Quick Reference

The documentation contained in this handbook is the exclusive property of

FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) i

ii FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) iii

iv FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) v

vi FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) vii

viii FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) ix

x FAN 410 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Code No. LIT-410TOC1 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) 1

Code No. LIT-410002 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC): Section 1 3

Tab Six: Wireless Temperature Sensing Systems, Receivers, and Sensors

4 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

NAE5512 Tunneled N2 Data

Figure 1-1: Metasys System Network and Field Communications Buses

Sensors and Thermostats

6 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Designation Qty Part Number Description

Code No. LIT-410003

120 V Power COM

ORG 24V HOT SCOM

Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC): Section 2

8 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Understanding HVAC Control Drawings: Section 2 9

10 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Figure 2-2: Typical Point Schedule

Understanding HVAC Control Drawings: Section 2 11

Figure 2-3: Examples of Typical Termination Reference Details

Room, Valve, and Damper Schedules

12 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Code No. LIT-410004 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC): Section 3 13

Figure 3-1: Proper Orientations for Controllers in Wall Mount Applications

14 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

To mount the controller in DIN rail applications (Panel):

Locating and Installing HVAC Controllers and Sensors: Section 3 15

16 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Code No. LIT-410005 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC): Section 4 17

it carries is less than 100-volt amperes. If you Structure

NEC in its entirety. In addition, you are Approved and

The power supply determines the classification Generally Accepted Methods

This practice prevents Class 2 wiring from Ceiling

Generally Accepted Installation Practices

18 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

On Plenum Cable Jobs

Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors: Section 4 19

20 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

RJ-12 connectors are smaller than the RJ-45 connectors

Wiring HVAC Controllers and Sensors: Section 4 21

22 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

Code No. LIT-410TOC2 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC) 23

Segment Cable Lengths

Ethernet Network Overview and Rules

Code No. LIT-410006 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC): Section 5 25

Wiring the Ethernet Network

General Ethernet Wiring Guidelines

26 Installation Quick Reference Handbook - (HVAC)

pairing with the pin numbers B lue

Ethernet Network Guidelines: Section 5 27

Transmit + 1 Green - Stripe 1 Receive +

Figure 5-3: Straight-Through Ethernet Cable Detail